DG NCD 408 0000 BNH SPC Me 000002

NCD P3 Carpark
50% Detailed Design Specifications - Mechanical, Public Health and

Fire Protection
DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-ME-000002
0052253
29 March 2023
Revision 01
Copyright © 1976 - 2023 Buro Happold. All rights reserved.

NCD P3 Carpark BURO HAPPOLD
Revision Description Issued by Date Checked
00 Draft MS/AJ 15/02/23 NM
01 90% Detailed Design MS/AJ 29/03/23 NM
https://burohappold.sharepoint.com/sites/052253/Shared Documents/030 MEP/90% Detailed Design/90% Final

Specification Files/DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-ME-000002.docx
This report has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and information of Binyah for the purposes set out in the
report or instructions commissioning it. The liability of Buro Happold Consulting Engineers Limited in respect of the
information contained in the report will not extend to any third party.
author Mahavir Shah/Ashveen

Jeetun
date 29/03/23
approved Neil Mowat
signature
date 29/03/23
DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-ME-000002 Revision 01
50% Detailed Design Specifications - Mechanical, Public Health and Fire Protection 29 March 2023
Copyright © 1976 - 2023 Buro Happold. All rights reserved. Page 3
Contents
SECTION 230010 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 230710- HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 233116 - NON-METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 233400 – HVACS FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 233610 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - execution
SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - general
PART 2 - products
PART 3 - execution
SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
PART 1 - general
PART 2 - products
PART 3 - execution
SECTION 234300 – ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - products
PART 3 - execution
SECTION 237213 – HEAT WHEEL AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 237216 – HEAT PIPE AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 237219 – FIXED PLATE AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 237223 - PACKAGED (RUN-AROUND COIL) AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 237310 - CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 238123 – COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEMS AIR-CONDITIONER
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 238129 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS (AND VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME)
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 238216 – AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 238219 - FAN COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 239000 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Table of Tables
No table of tables entries found
Table of Figures
No table of figures entries found.
Glossary
Term Definition
SECTION 230010 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR

CONDITIONING (HVAC) GENERAL
SPECIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Read this Section in conjunction with:
1. The HVAC Particular Specification, the HVAC Materials & Workmanship Specifications, Drawings and
Schedules
2. Other related Divisions/Sections
3. All of the Contract Documents; including Contract, Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Schedules etc.
B. Section Includes
1. This section of the specification sets out the Contractors obligations and services to provide a
complete and functioning HVAC system and the standards of materials to be used and standards of
workmanship to be adopted for the HVAC Services installations.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review and fully understand the specification, drawings,
schedules and scope of work. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, accessories,
supplementary components, labour, etc. to provide complete and fully operational systems that are safe
and able to be used properly.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the requirements and regulations of the local
Authority having jurisdiction and liaise with the Authority including; the submission of application forms
and all necessary documentation, obtaining approval on all drawings and equipment and obtaining
approval for temporary service disconnection, relocation, replacement and/or reconnection of the services
prior to commencement of work. All time, expenses and local authority fees incurred in gaining approvals
shall be included in the tender returns.
C. The Contractor will be deemed to have, prior to tender submission, studied all relevant project drawings
and specifications and the overall development and to have aquatinted himself with all relevant details
affecting the Works. No claims will be allowed after submission of a tender for lack of information or other
reasons which could have been resolved by a visit to the site or from a study of drawings of the project
and the overall development. Arrangements for visiting the site shall be made with prior agreement with
the CA.
D. The Contractors responsibilities shall include the following duties in addition to those outlined elsewhere in
the specification, drawings or schedules:
1. Check the design and accept full functional responsibility for all HVAC services to meet the
requirements of the CA in accordance with the specification, drawings and schedules.
2. Provide all labour, equipment and materials required to complete the Works in accordance with the
Design Intent.
3. Provide additional hardware, incidentals and any other work necessary for the completion of the
Works and safe, correct operation of each system, whether or not such items of Works are detailed in
specifications, drawings or schedules.
4. Prepare shop / construction / installation drawings for approval.
5. Builderswork openings, bases, ducts, inserts and sleeves required for the Works.
6. Coordinate with all other services and trades, liaise with members of the professional team,
attend meetings as required.
7. Test, commission and certify that the Works have been completed and inspected in accordance with
the requirements of the relevant Regulations and Authorities.
8. Prepare As-Built Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals and other project specific record
documents.
9. Train the Employer's staff in the operation of the systems installed.
E. The Contractor shall include for specialist equipment and systems to be detailed, designed and
commissioned by the relevant specialist suppliers. This shall include but not be limited to the controls
system, and any other specialist equipment specified.
F. In the event of a contradiction between this specification and any drawing becoming apparent either
before or after tendering, the CA shall be immediately consulted for clarification. The CA’s decision shall be
final. A specification requirement, which is not repeated on the drawing, does not constitute a
contradiction. An item required by the specification but not indicated on the drawing is required unless
specifically clarified otherwise by the CA.
G. During the course of the Works the Contractor shall maintain on site a fully detailed record of all changes
from the installation drawings to facilitate easy and accurate preparation of the as built drawings and to
ensure that these drawings are in all respects a true record of the installation. These shall be readily
accessible for review by the CA on an ongoing basis.
H. All materials and equipment shall be tropicalised and suitable for use in the high ambient temperatures
and humidity conditions encountered. The close proximity of the sea presents a saline corrosion risk and all
materials and equipment shall be suitably corrosion protected. All external equipment shall withstand;
abrasion from sand and fine particles, intense sunlight with high infra-red and UV content, high ambient
temperature/humidity and sea mists (with consequent deposition of salts on equipment) for the duration
of its design life.
I. The Particular Specification and Equipment Schedules detail the specific requirements of the Project and
will take precedence over the Materials and Workmanship specifications, it is however the Contractors
responsibility to highlight any conflicts within the specification to the CA. Where two or more references
do conflict, the most stringent shall take precedence as determined by the CA.
1.3 STANDARD OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall employ suitably qualified and competent tradesmen experienced with the installation
of HVAC services to carry out the Works to the highest standard and shall employ the services of specialist
Sub-contractors for the execution of works outside his normal expertise e.g. BMS, water treatment and
commissioning.
1.4 PROVIDE EVERYTHING NECESSARY
A. Provide everything necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Works in accordance with the
intent and meaning of the contract documents.
B. Details of construction or materials that have not been referred to in the specification or drawings but the
necessity for which may reasonably be implied or inferred from the specification or drawings, or which are
usual or essential to the completion of the Works, shall be provided and installed with no additional costs.
1.5 CONTINUITY OF THE WORKS
A. No undertaking is given that the Works will necessarily be able to proceed continuously, and no claim will
be entertained for discontinuity of work due to the necessity to conform to the contract programme.
1.6 RELATION TO WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Examine the Works of other Specification Divisions upon which the Works of this Division 23 HVAC Work
Sections depends for proper completion. The Contractor shall report any defect or conflict to the CA. Do
not commence works under this Division 23 until such defects and conflicts have been resolved.
B. Coordinate the Works of the Division 23 HVAC Work Sections with the Works of the other Specification
Divisions in such a manner that there is no interference and conflicts. In areas where pipes, ductwork,
equipment etc. called for in the Division 23 HVAC Work Sections shall be installed in conjunction with
pipework, conduits, cable ways etc. called for in other Specification Divisions, the Contractor shall
coordinate the work to ensure proper installation, clearances, access and the best use of the space.
C. No additional cost or claim will be allowed due to conflict of works or installations, where full liaison with
other trades and disciplines would have prevented such an occurrence.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination of the installation of services and take
account of all other works and trades either during or prior to their incorporation into the Works. This shall
include initiating co-ordination meetings with all other Contractors/Trades and disciplines and undertake
all surveys that are necessary.
E. Where minor clashes of services occur (i.e. ductwork and pipework clash in ceiling void) on site that were
not foreseeable at the design or co-ordination drawing stage then these clashes or minor co-ordination
matters shall be resolved by discussion and agreement with other trades and disciplines. The CA shall be
informed of the action to be taken by an approved means and no instructions will be issued to cover such
minor clashes.
F. When any new, revised or updated architectural, structural or services information is issued by the CA
under the authority of an Instruction, examine such information and if necessary, modify the Works
accordingly to prevent any clashes or abortive work due to such instruction.
G. No extra cost or claim will be allowed to cover any clashes or abortive work that result from not requesting
an explanation or seeking clarification in respect of any such revision.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall check the design and accept full functional responsibility for all HVAC services to meet
the requirements of the CA in accordance with this specification, drawings and schedules.
B. The Contractor's tender submission shall include for all the necessary material, equipment and
systems to meet the CA‘s acceptance whether specifically mentioned or not. The scope of the design shall
include all of the systems, works, etc. detailed in the specification, drawings or schedules.
C. Design Parameters: HVAC system design and equipment selection shall be in accordance with the
requirements noted in the particular specification, drawings or schedules.
1.8 STANDARDS AND OTHER CODES OF PRACTICE
A. In addition to the requirements indicated on the drawings or stated elsewhere, the Works shall be in
accordance with provisions of the following standards and codes:
1. British Standard Specification (BS) and European Standards (BS EN).
2. British Standard Code of Practice (BSCP).
3. CIBSE Guides to Current Practice and Technical Memoranda
4. Institution of Electrical Engineers Regulations (IEE) (BS 7671).
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
6. Building Research Station (BRE) digest recommendations.
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)
9. Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association (HVCA)
10. The Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA)
11. Project Specific Design or Operator Standards as stated elsewhere
B. The current editions of the publications listed above form a part of this Section. When new editions are
published during the construction, the instructions of the CA shall be sought regarding any modifications
or changes necessary.
C. References to BS documents shall be to the versions and amendments listed in the British Standards
Catalogue and in subsequent issues of BSI News up to one month prior to the tender issue date and shall
include all addendums.
D. The tender shall be based on the Regulations current one month prior to the issue date of tenders (unless
stated otherwise elsewhere).
E. The Contractor shall produce on site, when requested by the CA, any Code of Practice or British Standard
applicable to the Works.
F. In addition to the requirements noted in the specifications, drawings and schedules or stated elsewhere,
the installation shall accord with the requirements of the following local and statutory bodies:
1. Local Municipality Regulations
2. Local Fire and/or Civil Defence Authorities
3. Local Water Authority
4. Local Electricity Supply Authority
5. Local Telecoms and Data Services Provider
6. National Ministry of Interior
7. The Requirements of General Authorities for Health Services
8. ME Radio communications Agency
9. Local LPG Gas regulations/authorities
10. Police Requirements
11. Local Environmental Authority requirements
12. Local Municipality Health & Safety requirements
G. The standards established by the drawings, specification or schedules shall not be reduced by any of the
above codes and bodies.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall prepare a method statement to indicate fully the quality control programme for the
Works and indicate clearly the role of the CA in that programme. The quality control system shall include a
suitable methodology and recording procedure which shall enable the personnel responsible for any work
to be identified.
B. The objective of the quality control programme shall be to demonstrate:
1. Full compliance with the BS EN ISO 9001 standards and procedures
2. Full compliance with the specification in regard to materials and workmanship
3. Establishment of standards that will be acceptable to the CA by means of sample installations prior to
full scale erection of all major elements and trades required
4. Submission to the CA for agreement of any samples of proposed manufacturer’s items to be utilised in
the Works prior to ordering
5. Establishment of method statements defining quality standards
C. The quality control system will be subject to audit at any time during the duration of the contract.
D. All manufacturer's shall be registered to BS EN ISO 9001 Quality Standards, including in-house engineering
for product design activities.
E. All product and materials shall have product conformity certification (e.g. BSI Kitemark, BSI Safety Mark or
CARES scheme) or product approval (e.g. British Board or Agreement Certificate).
F. Certificates of compliance with British Standards, BSI Certification Schemes, and/or other Quality Assurance
Schemes, shall be provided to the CA when requested.
G. Use competent persons to install the systems. Provide documentary evidence of their competence, which
the CA or their nominees, shall be entitled to see at any time.
H. The complete HVAC Services installation and components shall, unless stated otherwise, comply with the
appropriate British Standard (BS and/or BS EN)) or Code of Practice (CP) and where no BS or CP is
applicable an alternative internationally accepted alternative standard for the particular item.
I. Ensure all equipment and systems are installed in accordance with the relevant standards and that
operational compatibility exists between the systems and any other system installed in the same location.
J. All systems shall comply with the requirements of the Authority having jurisdiction, and shall comply with
the requirements given within this Specification and the applicable documents referred to therein.
K. Notify all authorities in accordance with their regulations and obtain any required approvals for the Works.
L. The CA will issue a quality control instruction where the installation fails to meet the standard required in
the specification.
M. Where the installation fails to meet the required standard submit written proposals for compliance.
1.10 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Comply with the requirements of all relevant health and safety legislation and regulations.
B. Comply with the requirements of the project health and safety pre-construction information.
C. Allow for providing all necessary general health, safety and welfare facilities unless it has been specifically
agreed that certain facilities will be provided by others.
D. Where the Contractor submits quotations for any works post contract award or when issued with an
Instruction, these shall be inclusive of welfare facilities including secured storage.
E. Appoint a “competent person” on the site to manage health and safety during construction.
F. Ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that all persons employed on, or visiting the site are adequately
informed, instructed, trained, supervised and equipped such that they are able to carry out their duties
without risk to safety or health.
G. Take all necessary steps to ensure that only authorised persons are allowed into any construction area.
H. Health and safety information provided in the tender documentation or within the pre-construction
information is limited to highlighting significant risks to health and safety identified during the design and
is not intended to identify all health and safety risks with which a competent Contractor should be familiar.
I. Provide relevant information about the Works that might affect the health and safety of any person.
I. Provide all necessary information to the Principal Contractor to allow him to develop the construction
health and safety plan in accordance with the requirements of the Health & Safety Regulations prior to the
commencement of works on site. In the absence of a construction health and safety plan the Contractor
shall prepare and issue a stand-alone project specific health and safety plan to the CA.
J. Develop the construction health and safety plan in accordance with the requirements of the Health &
Safety Regulations prior to the commencement of works on site.
K. Review, and revise as necessary, the construction health and safety plan in line with any information
received from Sub-contractors or any changes in the requirements of the project. Any changes shall be
promptly advised to all relevant Sub-contractors, the Health and Safety Officer and CA as appropriate.
L. The development of the health and safety plan shall not be limited to those particular risks identified pre
construction but shall include consideration of all reasonably foreseeable risks. The development of the
health & safety plan shall include the arrangements for the management of the construction works and for
monitoring compliance by all persons with the requirements of relevant statutory provisions
M. The health and safety plan shall be adequately developed, as far as is reasonably practicable allowing for
any phasing of works, etc., in sufficient time to allow it to be submitted to the Employer and/or Health &
Safety Coordinator for comment prior to the commencement of any works on site. In the case of phased
N. works the plan relating to the work content of any phase shall be adequately developed and submitted for
approval prior to the commencement of any work within that phase of the project.
O. Supply to the Principal Contractor, any method statements, he or the Employer may request. Comply with
all Health & Safety procedures required by the Health & Safety Coordinator and the Principal Contractor.
P. Ensure that all Sub-contractors complete appropriate assessments of the risks to health and safety in
respect of their works as required under applicable statutory legislation, including the project Health and
Safety plan, the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations and other relevant health and
safety regulations.
Q. Ensure that all Sub-contractors, employees and self-employed persons under your control who are at work
on the construction of the project comply with the requirements of the construction health and safety plan.
R. Prepare all necessary information for the production of a health and safety file for the Works in accordance
with the requirements of the local Health & Safety Regulations and in the format defined by, or agreed
with, the Health & Safety Coordinator and/or the CA. Ensure and coordinate the provision of information
for the health and safety file by all Sub-contractors, specialists and suppliers. Provide the health and safety
file information in adequate time to allow this to be coordinated and handed over to the Employer at
practical completion of the Works, unless otherwise agreed.
S. Comply with the latest edition of the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations. Undertake
COSHH assessments for all activities and substances provided or used on site to assess their potential
health hazards. Copies of all relevant COSHH assessments shall be issued to the operatives concerned and
strictly monitored. Particular attention shall be given to the use of glues and sealant.
T. Labour saving lifting devices shall be used wherever possible and materials sized to allow easy manual
lifting.
U. Consider the future replacement of plant and equipment and ensure no item of plant or equipment is
installed in such a manner that it cannot be routinely and regularly maintained in a safe manner.
V. Ensure that all Sub-contractors are issued with copies of the pre-construction health and safety
information including details of all identified significant hazards and relevant information prior to the
submission of their tenders and that they price for compliance.
1.11 RISKS TO HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Submit a statement with the tender describing any significant and unavoidable risks which may arise as a
result of carrying out the Works and the measures proposed to safeguard the health and safety of
operatives and of any person who may be affected by the Works.
1.12 SUPPLY OF INFORMATION
A. The CA shall provide supplementary information from time to time as may be necessary to enable the
completion of the Works in accordance with the contract conditions. Allow for such progressive release of
further information by the CA during the course of executing the Works.
B. In order to facilitate the orderly and timely production of all further information that shall be considered
necessary, submit to the CA for approval a programme indicating the progressive release of such
information to enable the completion of the Works in accordance with the contract conditions.
C. The CA shall issue all the drawings that are considered necessary to enable the preparation of coordinated
installation and shop drawings.
1.13 DRAWING DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions are used to clarify the extent of information appropriate to different drawing
types.
B. Sketch drawings
1. Line diagrams and layouts indicating basic proposals, location of main items of plant, routes of main
pipes, air ducts and cable runs in such detail as to illustrate the incorporation of the HVAC services
within the project as a whole.
C. Concept schematic drawing
1. Line diagrams indicating main items of plant and their interrelationships in such detail as to illustrate
the incorporation of the HVAC services within the project as a whole.
D. Detailed schematic drawing
1. A line diagram describing the interconnection of components in a system showing the HVAC
principles. The main features of a schematic drawing are:
a. A two-dimensional layout drawing with divisions to show the distribution of the system between
building levels or an isometric style layout indicating the distribution of systems across individual
floor levels. The drawing is not necessarily constructed to scale.
b. Includes all functional components that make the system work for example, plant items, pumps,
fans, dampers, valves, strainers, terminals, electrical switchgear, distribution and components.
c. Labelled with appropriate pipe, duct and cable sizes.
d. Indicates components that have a sensing and control function including their interrelationship,
for example, building management systems, fire alarms, etc.
e. Components indicated on the schematic drawing identified for cross-referencing purposes.
f. Includes data essential to testing and commissioning including volumetric flow rates, design total
pressure losses at equipment, locations of dampers, valves and flow measuring stations, etc.
E. Technical design drawing
1. A drawing showing the extent of the services installations. The main features of technical design
drawings are:
a. Plan layouts to a scale of at least 1:100.
b. The drawings shall show the extent and type of services terminals visible within the space
c. Approximate locations of horizontal and vertical service runs shall be shown
d. Plant and distribution system sizes, particularly those affecting spatial allocation, while
acknowledging that these may need some adjustment and refinement in the preparation of the
detailed design drawings and equipment schedules
e. Pipework and electrical containment represented by single line layouts. Ductwork represented by
either double- or single-line layouts as required to demonstrate that the routes indicated are
feasible.
f. Symbols and line conventions in accordance with industry recognised standards for symbols and
other graphic conventions.
F. Detailed design drawing
1. A drawing showing the intended locations of plant items and service routes in such detail as to
indicate the design. The main features of detailed design drawings are:
a. Plan layouts to a scale of at least 1:100.
b. Plant areas to a scale of at least 1:50 and accompanied by cross sections.
c. The drawing will not indicate the precise position of services; they indicate the general routes and
locations for the installation of services. Co-ordinated Working Drawings or Installation Drawings
can be prepared without major re-routing of the services shown on the Detailed Design Drawings.
d. Pipework and cable containment represented by single line layouts.
e. Ductwork represented by either double or single line layouts as required to demonstrate the
routes indicated are feasible.
f. Symbols and line conventions in accordance with industry recognised standards for symbols and
other graphic conventions.
g. The drawings indicate the space available for major service routing in both horizontal and vertical
planes.
G. Coordinated working drawing
1. A drawing showing the inter relationship of two or more engineering services and their relation to the
structure and building fabric. The main features of co ordinated working drawings are:
a. Plan layouts to a scale of at least 1:50, accompanied by cross sections to a scale of at least 1:20 for
all congested areas.
b. The drawing makes allowances for installation working space and space to facilitate
commissioning and maintenance.
c. The drawing shall be spatially co ordinated i.e. there should be no physical clashes between the
system components when installed.
d. Critical dimensions, datum levels and invert levels shall be provided together with dimensions in
areas where tolerances are minimal.
e. Spaces shown on the drawing shall make allowance for the service at its widest point for example,
spaces between pipe and duct runs. Allowances for insulation, standard fitting dimensions and
joint widths shall be included on the drawing.
f. The drawing shall include allowances for those plant items specified by the designer and identified
in the design specification.
g. The drawing shall indicate positions of main fixing points and supports where they have
significance to the structural design.
h. The drawing shall demonstrate a feasible sequence of installation of the services.
i. The drawing shall be supported with individual services drawings for clarity.
j. Plant room layouts to a scale of at least 1:20, accompanied by cross sections and elevations to a
scale of at least 1:20.
H. Installation drawing
1. A drawing based on the Detailed Design Drawing or Co ordinated Working Drawing with the primary
purpose of defining the information needed by the tradesmen on site to install the Works. The main
features of installation drawings are:
a. Plan layouts to a scale of at least 1:50, accompanied by cross sections to a scale of at least 1:20 for
all congested areas.
b. A spatially co ordinated drawing, i.e. no physical clashes between the system components when
installed at the scaled off positions shown on the drawing.
c. The drawing includes allowances for inclusion of all supports and fixings necessary to install the
Works.
d. The drawing includes allowances for the service at its widest point..
e. The drawing allows for insulation, standard fitting dimensions and joint widths on the drawing.
f. The drawing makes allowance for installation details provided from shop drawings.
g. The drawing makes allowance for installation working space; space to facilitate commissioning
and space to allow on going operation and maintenance in accordance with the relevant health
and safety requirements.
h. The drawing makes allowance for plant and equipment including those that are chosen as
alternatives to the designer's specified option.
i. The drawing provides dimensions where the positioning of services is considered to be important
enough not to leave to the tradesmen on site.
j. Plant room layouts to a scale of at least 1:20, accompanied by cross sections and elevations to a
scale of at least 1:20.
I. Installation wiring diagram
1. A drawing showing the interconnection of electric components, panels, etc. in accordance with the
design and incorporating the details provided on manufacturer's drawings.
2. The information shall indicate maximum electrical loading for each supply cable; cable termination
facilities; and cable identification and all terminal numbers.
J. Manufacturer's Drawing
1. A drawing provided by a manufacturer, fabricator or supplier for a particular project, and which is
unique to that project and indicates a project specific representation of the product, components or
plant items to be supplied. Examples include ductwork, pre fabricated pipework, control and
switchgear panels and associated internal wiring, pre-fabricated plant customized plant and
equipment etc.
K. Manufacturer's certified drawing
1. A drawing provided by a manufacturer or supplier to indicate details of the product, components or

plant items and which the manufacturer or supplier guarantees the supplied equipment will comply
with.
L. Record drawing
1. A drawing showing the building and services installations as installed at the date of practical
completion. The main features of the record drawings are:
a. The drawings provide a record of the locations of all the systems and components installed
including pumps, fans, valves, strainers, terminals, electrical switchgear, distribution and
components.
b. They use a scale not less than that of the installation drawings.
c. The positions of access points for operating and maintenance purposes shall be marked on the
drawings.
d. The drawings shall include all plant, equipment and ancillary items reference labels. This shall
include the individual referencing of all grilles, diffusers, louvres, valves and pipeline ancillaries in
addition to the scheduled plant and equipment.
e. The drawings should not be dimensioned unless the inclusion of a dimension is considered
necessary for location.
f. The drawings include the location, including level (if buried) of public service connections
provided within the contract, no matter who installed them, together with the points of origin and
termination, size and materials of pipes, line pressure, flow and other relevant information.
g. The drawings show the location and depth of all buried services.
h. They include schematic drawings of each system indicating principal items of equipment, zoning,
means of isolation, etc in sufficient detail to understand the system operation and the inter-
connections between various systems.
i. They include the layout, location and extent of all piped services showing pipe sizes, together with
all valves for regulation, isolation and other purposes, drain cocks, test points, gauges, flow or
pressure switches and other instruments.
j. The drawings show the location, identification, size and details of all equipment and controls
equipment served by, or associated with, each of the various services.
k. The drawings show the layout, location and extent of all air ducts, including those formed in
builder’s work or otherwise outside the contract, showing dampers and other equipment, acoustic
silencers, grilles, diffusers, other air terminals, balancing dampers, access panels, fire dampers,
turning vanes, hand holes, test holes, gauges and instruments. Each duct and terminal shall be
marked with its size and air quantity flowing. Each terminal unit or grille shall have its duty clearly
shown as recorded from the commissioning results.
l. The drawings show the location and identity of each room including space housing plant,
machinery or apparatus.
m. The drawings include detailed general arrangements of all HVAC plantrooms, machinery spaces,
air handling plant rooms, tank rooms, electrical switch-room and other plant or apparatus,
including the location, identity, manufacturer, size and rating of each item.
n. The drawings include all necessary sections, elevations, isometrics and schematics of the plant
spaces.
o. The drawings include control and wiring diagrams incorporating details of each instrument and
equipment item and written description of the sequence of operation of each system. All
diagrams include full details of internal panel wiring and connections to field mounted items.
p. The drawings show the layout, location and extent of electrical switchgear, distribution boards,
cables and termination points associated with the HVAC systems.
q. The drawings include details to show inter-connections between the Works and equipment or
systems provided by others to which wiring and connections are carried out as part of the Works.
r. The drawings include detailed power and control wiring drawings and diagrams for all systems
associated with the HVAC installation showing origin, route, cable containment size, type and
number of conductors, length termination size and identification, and measured conductor and
earth continuity resistance of each circuit. Indicate if cable/conduit is surface mounted, concealed
in wall chase, in floor screed, cast in-situ, in false floor, above ceiling void, etc.
s. The drawings include logic flow diagrams for each individual control or monitoring specification
and for each engineering system to illustrate the logical basis of the software design
M. Builder's work drawing and information
1. Drawings and/or schedules, appropriate to the stage of design development showing the
requirements for architectural and/or structural provisions necessary to facilitate the HVAC services
and allow their integration into the project. Such information includes the position and sizes of all
access covers, panels and doors required in the building structure and fabric for proper safe access for
and to plant and equipment for installation, maintenance, inspection and future replacement. a.
Design stage
1) A drawing and/or schedule to show the provisions required to accommodate the HVAC
services that significantly affect the design of the building structure, fabric and external works.
The information also indicates the work to be carried out by building trades for example plant
bases, major openings and major structures for plant and equipment.
2) This will be appropriate to the stage of design development and maybe based on preliminary,
non-manufacturer specific plant selection.
b. Installation stage
1) Drawings to show requirements for building works necessary to facilitate the installation of
the HVAC services and as described elsewhere.
N. Controls logic diagrams
1. Diagrams, drawings and/or schematic details of all control components and instruments showing the
layout with each item uniquely identified together with a description of the controls operation and
details of the associated interlocking.
2. Switchgear, starter and control instrumentation panel drawings.
3. Drawings that show the construction and internal wiring diagrams of the starters, panels and/or other
devices.
1.14 TENDER DRAWINGS
A. The Tender Drawings primarily describe the design intent of the Works, the working principles of the
systems, general arrangements, principles of services co-ordination and the intended methods of
installation.
B. The drawings are accordingly part diagrammatic with runs of piping, ducts, cable, conduit and the like
being shown to small scale and not necessarily indicating exact installation positions. The drawings shall
also provide sufficient information:
1. To facilitate the preparation of an estimate and tender
2. To enable all other participants to appreciate the inter-relation of the Works with other trades and
disciplines
3. When read in conjunction with the other engineering services drawings and the architectural and
structural engineering drawings to enable the preparation of the final or supplementary builder's work
information, co-ordination, installation and shop drawings incorporating manufacturing drawings and
final details of specified or selected plant and equipment.
C. The drawings indicate equipment, pipework, ductwork, and controls, in sufficient detail to show how all the
HVAC services can generally be accommodated and coordinated with each other, the other engineering
services, the architecture and the structure. These drawings are provided for information purposes only.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all detailed coordination of the HVAC systems.
D. Any dimensions are stated for elements that have a visual impact on the completed works.
E. The drawings will not show dimensions required to construct the Works nor will they accurately locate
every item of plant, equipment and ancillary items which does not influence the visual impact of the
completed works. The decision of the CA as to what has a visual impact shall be final.
F. The drawings do not detail the building fabric or structure whether new or existing nor are they based on
survey drawings or installation drawings of any other party or consultant.
G. Plant and equipment is shown based upon the manufacturers’ catalogue information and is subject to
verification or revision by the Contractor when manufacturers’ details or drawings are available.
H. The Contractor shall obtain all information required to produce the co-ordination and installation drawings
or requirements, based upon the tender drawings, at no additional cost.
I. Where it is necessary to survey an existing building or existing structure or services within that building to
prepare coordinated installation and shop drawings the Contractor shall take responsibility for obtaining
that information. The cost of obtaining that information shall be included in the contract price.
J. In the case of new services installations within a 'shell and core' type development the Contractor shall
allow for all costs associated with obtaining all necessary details of the base services systems from the
relevant Contractor's and/or design team for incorporation into the shop and installation drawings.
K. The Contractor shall interpret the design intent of the tender drawings and reflect same in the co-
ordination and installation drawings subject to the comments of the CA. Where differences occur between
the tender and the co-ordination and installation drawings these differences shall be deemed to be
included in the contract price for the Works and no additional cost shall be allowed due to any variation in
layout, arrangement or detail unless the deviation is specifically covered by a CA Instruction before the
production of the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Working temperatures, operating and test pressures of services:
1. Equipment, pipework, fittings, valves, coils, vessels and other pipeline ancillaries including joints and
jointing methods shall be suitable for the working temperature and operating pressures of the systems
applicable. Working pressures of materials and plant shall be derated where appropriate to suit the
operating temperature in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and the appropriate
British Standard or Code of Practice.
2. All plant, equipment and ancillary items shall be suitable to withstand the test pressures defined
elsewhere without damage and undue stress.
3. A schedule of working temperatures, operating pressures and test pressures shall be submitted for
approval before any orders are placed.
4. No material or equipment shall be used where the maximum de-rated operating pressure or test
pressure is at its limit and would not adequately withstand a fluctuating increase in system pressure of
at least 10%.
B. Metric and Imperial Conversions
1. Some dimensions and units in metric have been converted from imperial units and approximated to
the nearest practical dimension, i.e. 12" has been converted to 300mm. Due allowance shall be made
for these conversions. Metric sizes have been used in this specification for both metric and imperial
components. In certain instances only imperial components are available and generally the imperial
size has been converted to the metric equivalent size.
C. Units of measurement
1. The units of measurement shall be:
Measurement Unit Unit abbreviation

Temperature Degrees Celsius °C
Pressure Kilo Pascal or Pascal KPa or Pa
Volume flow rate Litres per second or cubic metres per l/s or m³/s
second
Velocity Metres per second m/s
Speed Revolutions per minute rpm
Capacity Litre l
Heat flow Kilo Watt kW
Measurement Unit Unit abbreviation
Area Square metre m²
Length Metre or millimetre m or mm
Density Kilogramme per cubic metre kg/ m³
Mass/weight Kilogramme kg
Force Newton N
Power Kilowatt kW
Current Ampere A
Voltage Volts V
Illumination Lux lux
Frequency Hertz Hz
Noise Decibel dB
Energy Kilowatt hour kWh
Resistance Ohm ohm
Reactive Volt - Ampere or Kilovolt - Ampere VAr or kVAr
Capacitance Farad F
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials, equipment, ancillary items and expendable sundries shall be supplied and purchased new from
manufacturers or stockists and shall not be second hand, reconditioned or overhauled.
B. Ensure all plant, equipment and materials are protected against damage or adverse weather conditions
until practical completion.
C. Any plant equipment or materials that have been subjected to damage, incorrect storage or incorrect
installation shall be replaced at no additional cost.
2.3 CONSISTENT MATERIAL SUPPLIES, QUALITY AND FINISH
A. Materials shall be of a consistent manufacturer and standard. Each type of material item or range of
material items shall therefore be of a single manufacture.
B. Unless specifically stated, material items shall be of the same finish and/or quality and/or grade as the
system within which they are installed.
2.4 SELECTION OF MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS
A. Where manufacturers, suppliers or installers of products are not identified by name, select products that
comply in all respects with the specification and demonstrate such compliance.
B. Where manufacturers, suppliers or installers of products are identified by name, or names, but no reference
is made to "or approved" equivalent use these exclusively.
C. Where manufacturers, suppliers or installers of products are identified by name, or names, but reference is
made to "or approved" equivalent the submitted tender shall include the named or one of the named
suppliers. Alternatives may be selected and shall be submitted to the CA for approval, separately.
2.5 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT
A. Technical submissions from alternative manufacturers shall only be considered when the Contractor
provides a technical submission from an approved manufacturer.
B. The Contractor may only submit 1 technical submission from an alternative manufacturer for each item of
plant. In the event the CA rejects the alternative manufacturers technical submission any subsequent
submissions shall only be from approved manufacturers.
C. Alternative manufacturers’ equipment and materials shall be equivalent in every respect to that specified
and the Contractor shall clearly demonstrate the advantages to the project for undertaking the change. D.
A separate compliance statement for any such alternatives shall be submitted to the CA and include:
1. Company details
2. Full technical data and performance characteristics
3. Certification attained
4. Details of any implications or consequential amendments to the design and/or construction /

installation of other parts of the Works
5. A complete and precise statement of the effects on cost. Relevant cost savings will be deemed to have
allowed for all consequential costs associated with amendments of other parts of the Works. Identify
additional costs arising from necessary changes to the details of the installation, including changes to
the design and drawings, as well as any associated ancillary equipment
6. Effects on construction, programme, maintenance, cost in use or other differences
D. Where alternative equipment or materials offered have been accepted by the CA, either prior or post
contract award, undertake and be responsible for the redesign of all services and builder's work affected by
these equipment changes. No additional costs or extension or delay to the programme will be allowed.
E. The acceptance of any alternatives shall be at the discretion of the CA, who is not bound to accept any
alternatives. Alternatives that would involve significant changes to other work will not be considered.
2.6 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL DATA
A. The tender drawings have been prepared based on the current catalogue information of the equipment
specified elsewhere.
B. Revisions or modifications of the physical characteristics of the equipment sometimes occur between the
published catalogue information and the final information issued on the manufacturing drawings. When
such revisions or modification arise incorporate these and their effects on other parts of the Works onto
the installation drawings and where necessary the final builder's work information.
C. Review the manufacturer’s references at the earliest opportunity and bring any anomalies to the attention
of the CA in writing.
D. No extra cost or claim or extension to the programme or delay will be allowed for such modifications to
the drawings or the Works as a result of such manufacturing changes.
2.7 EQUIPMENT AND PLANT PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES
A. Where equipment and plant performance data and duties are identified in the specification check and
ensure that the equipment (where the manufacturer is named and/or a figure number is quoted) is capable
of the stated duty or performance in all respects and obtain a written undertaking from the selected
manufacturer that all aspects of the defined specification will be achieved.
B. More than one clause of the specification may cover the total performance of the equipment and therefore
ensure that the supplier obtains or has seen all sections of the specification prior to giving the written
guarantee of performance.
2.8 SPARE PARTS
A. In addition to the spare plant and equipment specified elsewhere, the following shall be provided;
1. Three months before practical completion (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) submit to the CA a
schedule of spare parts as recommended by the manufacturers and make recommendations of any
others that the Employer should obtain for the maintenance of the installations included in the Works.
2. The schedule shall be priced in detail and include the following information for each item:
a. Manufacturer’s current price (including packaging and delivery to site)
b. Quantity to be provided
c. Manufacturer’s reference for the item
d. Referencing to the plant and equipment installed
3. Identify the items that are additional to those specified and included in the contract price. Submit to
the CA a quotation, priced in detail, for the additional items.
4. Four weeks prior to practical completion (unless stated otherwise elsewhere or instructed by the CA)
provide all specified spare parts and the additional items.
5. For each spare part provided include for and undertake to:
a. Check that each spare part is suitable for the replacement of the corresponding part supplied with
the plant and equipment installed
b. Provide reference to the plant and equipment information in the operating and maintenance
manual so purpose is clear
c. Label and reference each spare part in accordance with the schedule of spare parts
d. Paint, grease and pack as necessary to prevent deterioration during storage
6. All spares shall be contained where practicable in protective containers.
2.9 SUPPLY OF TOOLS
A. Eight weeks before practical completion (unless otherwise stated elsewhere) submit to the CA a schedule
of tools and portable instruments as recommended by the manufacturer and make recommendations of
any others that the Employer should obtain for the maintenance of the installations included in the Works.
B. The schedule shall be priced in detail and include the following information for each item:
1. Manufacturer’s current price (including packaging and delivery to site)
2. Quantity to be provided
3. Manufacturer’s reference for the item
4. Referencing to the plant and equipment installed
5. Purpose
B. Identify the items that are additional to those specified and included in the contract price. Submit to the
CA a quotation, priced in detail, for the additional items.
C. Two weeks prior to practical completion (unless otherwise stated elsewhere) provide all specified tools,
keys and portable instruments and the additional items if so instructed by the CA. E. Include for and
undertake to:
D. Check that each item is suitable for the intended application
E. Label and reference each item identifying purpose and the plant or equipment
F. Paint, grease and pack as necessary to prevent deterioration during storage
G. All tools, keys and portable instruments shall be secured and contained in lockable cabinets that will be
located as agreed with the CA.
2.10 SUPPLY OF COMPUTER HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
A. If the Works include for the provision of computer hardware and software, for example, building
management system, the following conditions shall apply.
1. Include for provision of a warranty that the system fulfils all of the requirements and functions stated
in the specification.
2. Prior to the equipment being delivered to site, pre commissioning tests shall be undertaken at the
manufacturer’s premises, the results of which shall be witnessed by the CA.
3. A "trial period" shall precede any formal acceptance of the system and commence when the CA is
notified in writing that the complete system is available for its intended purposes.
4. During installation, the hardware shall be delivered to site in accordance with the contract programme,
or if no time or date is stated, within a reasonable time to enable the tests or verification routines to be
completed prior to installation of the software.
5. On successfully passing the tests and routines for the hardware, provide, deliver, install and
commission the software.
B. Obtain on behalf of the end user all appropriate licenses, permissions, copyright waivers, rights of use and
the like from the owners of the software rights. Ensure that the end user is properly registered with the
software supplier for support and appropriate updating. Application software shall be in compliance with
BS 7649.
C. Provide back-up copies of any software and two back-up copies of all software items, as commissioned.
2.11 DELETERIOUS MATERIALS
A. Deleterious materials shall not be utilised on any part of the Works.
B. Check with Sub-Contractors, manufacturers and suppliers of products and materials that products do not
contain any such deleterious materials. If any specified product contains such material notify the CA in
writing and request an alternative specification of product, manufacturer or supplier.
C. Use the best information available to ensure deleterious materials are not incorporated into the Works
either directly or within products, whether or not specifically specified. D. The following deleterious
materials shall be excluded from the Works:
1. Materials in which chlorofluorocarbons (CFC), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFC) or HFA’s have been

used as blowing agents.
2. Halon or any other substances causing ozone depletion.
3. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC) and hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFC) based refrigerants. (All refrigerants

shall be zero ODP).
4. Asbestos or products containing asbestos.
5. Urea formaldehyde or materials which may release formaldehyde.
6. Materials comprised in whole or part of man-made and/or naturally occurring mineral fibres which
have a diameter of 3 microns or less and a length of 200 microns or less or which contain fibres not
sealed or otherwise not stabilised to ensure that fibre migration is prevented.
7. Lead where the metal or its corrosion products may be directly ingested inhaled or absorbed.
8. Lead-based paints or primers
9. Polyurethane or polyisocynate foam
10. Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or similar compounds
11. Pentachorophenol, lindane or tributyltin (TBT) oxide
12. Extruded polystyrene other than low ozone depletion materials
13. Materials manufactured with any form of animal hair.
14. Materials that support bacteria.
D. Substances publicised by the Health and Safety Executive, Building Research Establishment, British
Standards Institution or other authorities or professional bodies as being deleterious to Health and Safety
shall not be incorporated into any part of the Works.
E. All jointing materials shall be of a type approved by the respective authority.
F. Warrant that deleterious materials are not incorporated in the Works and provide a written compliance
statement to the CA prior to commencement of the Works.
G. Notify the CA in writing, as soon as reasonably practicable of any material designated by the Building
Research Establishment, British Standards or codes of practice as deleterious at any time during the
contract.
2.12 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES
A. General requirements
1. All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe or ductwork operating conditions.
2. Identification of services shall comply with BS1710 and BS 4800.
3. When it is required to supplement the warning colour with warning sign to comply with statutory
requirements reference should be made to BS 5499: Part 5.
4. Identification bands shall be applied in a logical and tidy manner with lettering and flow arrows clearly
visible. Where several pipelines are installed in parallel to each other the identification bands shall be
applied at the same location on each pipe.
B. Valve labels and charts
1. Each valve shall be provided with a label indicating the service being controlled, together with a
unique reference number corresponding with that shown on the valve chart (s) and record drawings.
The labels shall be made from 3 ply (black/white/black) traffolyte material showing white letters and
figures on a black background. Labels shall be tied to each valve with chromium plated linked chain.
2. A wall mounted, glass covered plan to the approval of the CA shall be provided and displayed in each
plantroom showing the plant layout with pipework, valve diagram and valve schedule indicating size,
service, duty, etc.
C. Identification of services
1. Pipework and ductwork shall be identified by colour bands 150mm. wide or colour triangles of at least
150mm/side. The bands or triangles shall be applied at termination points, junctions, entries and exits
of plantrooms, walls and ducts, and control points to readily identify the service, but spacing shall not
exceed 4.0 metres.
2. Pipework services
a. Basic colours for pipeline identification:
Pipe contents BS identification colour reference BS Basic identification colour names

4800
Water 12 D 45 Green
Steam 10 A 03 Silver-grey
Oils 06 C 39 Brown
Gas 08 C 35 Yellow/Brown
Air 20 E 51 Blue
Electrical 06 E 51 Orange
b. Colour code indicator bands shall be applied as colour bands over the basic identification colour
in the various combinations as listed below:-
Pipeline Contents Colour Band to BS.4800

Water Services:
Cooling 00 E 55
Fresh/drinking 18 E 53
Boiler feed 04 D 45/00 E 55/04 D 45
Condensate 04 D 45/14 E 53/04 D 45
Chilled 00 E 55/14 E 53/00 E 55
Central Heating Services:
below 100 C 18 E 53/04 D 45/18 E 53
above 100 C 04 D 45/18 E 53/04 D 45
Steam Services: Basic colour only
Natural Gas 10 E 53
Oils:
Electrical Services: Basic colour only
c. In addition to the colour bands specified above all pipework shall be legibly marked with black or
white letters to indicate the type of service and the direction of flow, identified as follows:-
Service Marking
High temperature hot water HTHW
Medium temperature hot water MTHW
Low temperature hot water LTHW
Chilled water CHW
Condenser water CONDW
Steam Steam
Condensate Condensate
d. Pipes shall have the letters ‘F’ and ‘R’ added to indicate flow and return respectively as well as
directional arrows.
3. Ductwork services
a. The size of the symbol will depend on the size of the duct and the viewing distance but the
minimum size should not be less than 150mm. length per side. One apex of the triangle shall
point in the direction of airflow.
Service Colour BS.4800

Colour reference
Conditioned Air Red and Blue 04 E 53/18 E 53
Warm Air Yellow 10 E 53
Fresh Air Green 14 E 53
Exhaust/Extract/Recirculated Air Grey AA 0 09
Foul Air Brown 06 C 39

b. In addition to the colour triangles specified above all ductwork shall be legibly marked with black
or white letters to indicate the type of service, identified as follows:-
Supply air S
Return air R
Fresh air F
Exhaust air E
a. The colour banding and triangles shall be manufactured from self-adhesive cellulose tape,
laminated with a layer of transparent ethyl cellulose tape.
B. Identification of plant
4. Each item of plant and equipment shall be labelled with a traffolyte or metal label indicating its unique
reference code as used in the operating and maintenance documentation.
5. The plant numbering system shall be agreed with the CA prior to the commencement of the Works.
6. The plant numbering system shall be fully compatible with any existing numbering system.
7. All items of plant and equipment shall be provided with a manufacturer’s nameplate indicating the
plant type, reference, serial number, year of manufacturer, performance and electrical data.
8. Pressure vessels which have been hydraulically tested at the manufacturer’s works shall indicate the
test pressure, working pressure and date of test.
D. Labels for major equipment
1. Major equipment shall be clearly labelled with both the manufacturers’ detailed label and a
"equipment description or reference title" label applicable to the project. Both labels shall be securely
fixed in a prominent position on the equipment and shall be engraved on either a nonferrous plate or
rigid laminate plastic.
2. The labels shall indicate the following details as a minimum:
3. Manufacturer's labels
a. Manufacturers name and address
b. Serial No. of item
c. Date of manufacture
d. Specified duty and performance
e. Electrical details
4. Equipment description or reference title label:
5. The label shall describe the equipment function or title and the system reference number applicable to
the project. This label shall be a minimum size of 50 mm x 100 mm. A sample shall be submitted to
the CA for approval prior to production.
6. Lubrication points, air vents, drain points, electrical connections and pipe connections shall also be
clearly labelled by either manufacturers standard labels, purpose made rigid laminated plastic labels
secured to the equipment or where not practicable stenciled on directly in enamel paint in an
approved manner.
2.13 ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES AND STARTERS FOR HVAC SERVICES
A. Unless indicated elsewhere, electric motors up to and including 3.0 kW (unless stated otherwise elsewhere)
input capacity shall be single phase type thereafter shall be 3 phase type.
B. Electrical supplies to equipment shall, unless stated elsewhere, be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker
and switched by an isolating device.
C. All motors shall be selected to comply with the specified duties when operating at a maximum frequency
of 50Hz.
D. Electrical motors up to 0.5kW input capacity shall be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker and switched by
an isolating device. Motors over 0.5 kW input capacity shall be started and protected as follows unless
stated elsewhere:
1. Motors up to 0.75kW input capacity shall be started and protected by a "Direct on Line" starter or soft
start
2. Motors over 0.75kW to 5.0kW input capacity to be started and protected by a "Direct on Line" Starter
or soft start
3. Motors over 5kW input capacity and up to 150kW shall be started and protected by a "close
transitional Star Delta" starter or soft start
4. Motors over 150kW input capacity shall be started and protected by a specialist device and advice
should be sought from the supply authority.
2.14 ELECTRICAL MOTORS FOR HVAC SERVICES
A. Motors shall as a minimum, meet the European Minimum Energy Efficiency Performance Standard (EU
MEPS) applicable at the time of tender.
B. Motors shall meet the following criteria:
1. 0.75 – 375kW, 2-6 pole motors, up to 1000 V 50 Hz shall meet IE2 efficiency level
2. Motors above 0.75kW shall be fitted with variable speed drives.
3. If motors over 7.5KW are not provided with variable speed drives they shall meet IE3 efficiency level.
4. Motors capable of continuous duty operation
5. Efficiency measuring method acc. to IEC 60034-2-1:2007.
6. IE1 efficiency motors shall not be used.
C. All submittals shall give specific fan powers (SFP) for motors as combined figures with associated inverters.
D. Motors shall have power factors at full load running conditions that are equivalent or better than that
required by the Supply Company.
E. Motor shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of BS 4999-141:2004+A1:2010, BS 5000, BS EN

60079 and BS EN 60034.
F. Motors shall have standard recommended frame sizes, ratings and connection dimensions in accordance
with the relevant standards.
G. Motors shall have the following enclosures to the relevant standard unless otherwise stated elsewhere:
1. IP44 (totally enclosed) - In all internal plantrooms or where the motor is not subject to the external
weather conditions or in a flameproof area.
2. IP65 (weatherproof) - On plant in all external locations or in highly saturated atmospheric locations.
H. Motors shall have a class of winding insulation suitable for the operating temperatures defined elsewhere
and shall be in accordance with BS EN 60085 classification and materials.
I. Motors shall be selected to meet the internal and external noise criteria stated elsewhere.
J. Unless specifically stated elsewhere, motor bearings shall be of the lubricated sleeve or roller type with
lubrication plugs and extension tubes where the motor is concealed.
K. In all areas which are designated a flameproof area or within plants for systems handling air to or from
flameproof areas shall be provided with flameproof motors.
L. Unless specifically stated elsewhere all motors shall run at 1440rpm on 50 Hz supplies.
2.15 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
A. All equipment and systems installed shall provide electromagnetic compatibility within the system and with
any other systems installed in the same area.
B. All systems and buildings shall be assessed for protection to, and such protection shall meet the
requirements of:
1. BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
2. BS EN 55015 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of

electrical lighting and similar equipment
3. BS EN 60870 Tele-control equipment and systems
4. BS EN 55024 Information technology equipment.
5. Immunity characteristics.
6. Limits and methods of measurement
7. BS EN 12015 Electromagnetic compatibility.
8. Product family standard for lifts, escalators and passenger conveyors. Emission.
9. BS EN 12016 Electromagnetic compatibility.
10. Product family standard for lifts, escalators and passenger conveyors. Immunity.
C. All equipment shall meet the requirements of the appropriate electromagnetic compatibility standard.
D. All electrical and electronic apparatus shall comply with the EMC Regulations 2006 and shall carry the CE
Marking to demonstrate compliance.
2.16 EARTH CONTINUITY AND BONDING OF HVAC SERVICES
A. Electrical earthing continuity shall be provided between all metal pipework, ductwork and associated
equipment. It shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition of the IEE Regulations for buildings
(BS 7671).
B. Ductwork
1. All flexible connections and joints shall be bridged across by means of a linking earth copper tape.
The tape shall be 20mm wide braided, tinned with copper lugs at each end and bolted to the flanged
joints.
C. Pipework
1. All flexible joints, non-metallic compensators or flexible connections shall be bridged across by means
of a linking copper earth tape. The tape shall be 20mm wide braided, tinned with copper lugs at each
end and bolted to the flanged joints or connections. An alternative means of fixing the link tape to
smaller diameter pipes may be used subject to approval.
D. Equipment
1. All items of equipment shall have an appropriately sized, threaded brass earth stud(s) to allow
connection of earth continuity links. The earth link tape(s) shall have a cross sectional area and
material complying with BS 7671. The item of plant or equipment shall have earth continuity within
itself and shall also have the same earth continuity link with associated pipework and/or ductwork
connections.
2. All additional earth continuity links shall be subject to individual service continuity checks by the
installer.
2.17 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION
A. Metal pipework conveying water shall be protected from electrolytic action by the installation of
nonconductive or fibre type nipples to mechanically separate copper pipes from galvanised tanks or
galvanised steel pipework.
B. In the case of acidic water, approval shall be obtained of the protection required to avoid possible
corrosion due to electrolytic action.
2.18 PREVENTION OF DEZINCIFICATION
A. Brass fittings shall not be used where there is a risk of dezincification or stress corrosion.
B. Approval shall be obtained prior to ordering materials that may be affected by dezincification and the
correct materials shall be used throughout the system.
2.19 SERVICES CROSSING BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS
A. At points where services cross the building expansion joints, flexible connections, compensators, or
expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate the building movement within the services installation
unless it can be demonstrated that there is sufficient flexibility in the pipework installation.
B. Brackets and supports each side of the flexible joint shall be so arranged that the services crossing the
building expansion joint remain symmetrical and correctly aligned.
2.20 PROTECTION OF BURIED SERVICES
A. Wrapping 2 coats of petroleum jelly impregnated tape or similar approved material around the pipe and
pipeline ancillaries shall protect services of ferrous metal and copper that are buried directly within the
ground or surrounded or bedded in concrete.
2.21 RUBBER MATTING
A. Black rubber strip floor matting shall be installed in front of switch panels and control panels. The matting
shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 921, neatly cut to the dimensions required and laid in an
approved manner.
2.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINT
A. Where indicated elsewhere seismic restraints shall be provided to the requirements as detailed below.
B. All seismic restraints shall be in compliance with the following standards;
1. International Building Code (IBC)
2. SMACNA – Seismic Restraint Manual
3. ASCE 7/05 – Minimum design loads for buildings and other structures
4. NFPA 13 – Standard for the installation of sprinkler systems
5. Local Building Codes
C. Provide seismic restraints for rigidly and resiliently supported equipment to prevent permanent
displacement in any direction caused by lateral motion, overturning or uplift, in accordance with the
Seismic conditions noted elsewhere.
D. Submit for CA‘s review a material list with technical data documenting the primary functions, quality and
performance of each system to be used in the Work, e.g., the load ratings, or other such primary
characteristics as required by the specification, drawings or schedules. E. Furnish a listing for each of the
following:
1. Safety Disconnects
2. Seismic Restraining Devices F. Calculations:
3. Submit for CA‘s review engineering calculations prepared and sealed by a Chartered Engineer
experienced in seismic applications and who is licensed in the country where the project is located,
showing that equipment mountings, foundations and their seismic restraints are suitable for
supporting the services in their environment without failure and permanent displacement.
4. Submit for CA‘s review calculations and revised equipment schedule data if changes are made to
the system routing, location, size, or components or any other changes to a system are made and the
changes impact the design parameters scheduled or indicated in the specification, drawings or
schedules.
5. Furnish movement calculations for risers based on the following criteria.
a. Minimum creepage and shrinkage factor of 0.94mm per 1m, (approximately 3mm per 3.2m floor -
to - floor height). Verify this data with the Creep and Shrinkage Report.
E. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere, for buildings up to 12 floors, the calculations submitted can be of the
simplified type based upon simplified amplification factors. For all buildings over 12 floors detailed design
calculations shall be submitted in compliance with the stated standards and the Local Building Codes.
F. All seismic restraints shall be supplied by a manufacturer with a minimum 10 years’ experience in the
design and manufacture of seismic restraints. The manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the
highest quality management standards, certified to ISO 9001 and 14001.
2.23 PRESSURE DIRECTIVE
A. All pressure equipment and assemblies with a maximum allowable pressure greater than 0.5 bar shall
comply with the European Community (EU) Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EEC. Pressure
equipment shall include vessels, piping, safety accessories and pressure accessories. Assemblies shall
mean several pieces of pressure equipment assembled to form an integrated, functional whole. B. Pressure
equipment shall be marked as a minimum with:
1. Unique identification of the manufacturer
2. Unique identification of model and serial number
3. The year of manufacture
4. Maximum/minimum allowable pressure limits
5. CE marking
B. Provide a declaration of conformity for all pressure equipment and submit copies to the CA prior to
installation into the Works. Provide copies as part of the record documentation. D. Equipment shall be:
1. Designed for adequate strength taking into account internal/external pressure, ambient and
operational temperatures, static pressure and mass of contents in operating and test conditions,
corrosion and erosion, fatigue, etc.
2. Provided with means to ensure safe handling and operation and of examination, draining and venting.
3. Provided with protection against exceeding the allowable limits of pressure.
4. Where necessary, pressure equipment shall be designed and fitted with suitable accessories to meet
damage-limitation requirements in the event of external fire.
C. Ensure all components or sub-assemblies in their finished assembly are used within their safe operating
range and correctly installed and tested.
D. Ensure that adequate instructions are provided by the manufacturer for the safe installation, testing and
operation.
E. Instructions shall be provided to ensure for the safe maintenance and operation of the equipment when in
operation.
F. Pressure equipment and assemblies below the specified pressure / volume thresholds shall be safe and
designed and manufactured according to good engineering practice.
2.24 ATEX DIRECTIVE
A. All equipment and protective systems used in potentially explosive atmospheres shall comply with the
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC.
B. Equipment meeting the requirements of the Directive shall have the CE symbol clearly affixed to indicate
compliance.
C. All equipment, protective systems and components shall bear the specific marking of explosion protection
as required by the ATEX Directive in addition to the CE marking.
D. Provide an EU Declaration of Conformity prior to delivery to site as stated elsewhere.
E. Where a product is subject to several directives, which all provide for the affixing of CE marking, provide to
the CA an EU Declaration of Conformity, prior to delivery to site, as evidence that the product conforms to
the provisions of all necessary directives.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE MECHANICAL ENGINEER
A. Employ a site Senior Mechanical Engineer for the Works of Division 23 HVAC Work Sections, satisfactory to
the CA. The Senior Mechanical Engineer shall be based full time on site and retained throughout the
construction period unless otherwise accepted or directed by the CA.
B. Provide site supervision of the Works and visit the site as often as necessary to ensure the Works are
properly performed. Attend meetings as requested by the CA.
3.2 PROGRAMME
A. Within 4 weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) of the award of the contract provide a detailed
programme produced by means of bar charts and full network analysis, clearly illustrating how the overall
programme will be achieved within the contract period, stated elsewhere, in particular identifying the
following:
1. The latest dates for release of final information required from the CA.
2. The period required for the production, approval and issue of builder's work information, coordination,
installation and shop drawings.
3. Adequate time for the production of drawings and builder's work information and for the subsequent
checking and approval of same by the CA. The actual activities of production, adjustment,
resubmission and review shall be identified; a blanket time allowance will not be acceptable.
4. The periods required for each phase and engineering service on a floor by floor or zone by zone and
plant room by plant room basis.
5. The proposed order dates, manufacturing period and proposed delivery to site for each item of major
plant to be clearly defined.
6. Any long delivery items shall be identified within one month of appointment and a detailed method
statement prepared to schedule the action to ensure the delivery to site in adequate time to meet the
contract requirements.
7. The period required for the testing and commissioning of the services. Separate testing and
commissioning activities shall be identified, and a separate programme prepared.
8. The period required for operating the systems, load simulation tests, final adjustment, environmental
testing and instructing the Employer's staff.
9. The period required and latest dates for the production, approval and issue of record drawings and
operating and maintenance instruction manuals.
B. All information required above shall be agreed with the CA before inclusion in the proposed programme.
3.3 METHOD STATEMENTS
A. Submit method statements to the CA prior to commencement of the Works.
B. Health and safety statement to include:
1. Management procedures.
2. Any significant and unavoidable risks that might arise as a result of executing the Works.
3. An outline of the health and safety procedures to be undertaken to safeguard the operatives and of
any person who may be affected by the Works.
4. A copy of the company's health and safety policy document including risk assessment procedures
5. Accident records for the last five years
6. Details of any Health and Safety Executive enforcement action
7. Details of staff responsible for health and safety on this project with details of their qualifications and
duties.
C. Management procedures to be adopted for the project.
D. Managing and resourcing of design duties and responsibilities including design capability.
E. Commissioning and testing procedures and management.
F. Quality control management and procedures. The method statement shall:
1. Indicate the quality control programme
2. Demonstrate compliance with the contract in regard to materials and workmanship.
3. Demonstrate the establishment of standards by means of sample installation and submission of

samples prior to installation.
G. Statement outlining the management team, stating the definition of each person's role, and the
commitment to the project including:
1. The curriculum vitae and references for each of the key personnel that will be used on the project.
2. A line management diagram starting at the site supervisors and rising through the management levels.
3. Details of both site and office-based staff.
3.4 TECHNICAL INFORMATION AND QUERIES
A. Complete and submit a technical query request to the CA where clarification on any technical issue is
required.
B. For the purposes of clarity, the raising of technical query requests is intended to foster a pro-active
approach to dealing with genuine queries. In this respect the issue of a technical query shall include the
installer’s suggested solution to the query for the consideration of the CA.
C. If in the opinion of the CA a technical query is deemed to be inadequate in any way the CA shall have the
sole discretion to reject the technical query until such time as adequate information is provided by the
installer.
D. No claims for additional costs and/or extension of time shall be considered through the lack of information
provided by the installer and/or the rejection of technical queries.
E. Ensure that technical query sheets are raised at least two weeks prior to the requirement for a response.
F. Prepare a schedule to record the progress of technical queries and ensure it is maintained up to date. An
agreed referencing system shall be adopted for all technical queries and each query shall have the
following information:
1. Unique reference
2. Brief description of query
3. Date raised
4. Date response required
5. Revisions to drawings
G. Where revisions take place either under the authority of a CA instruction, or by written agreement with the
CA or when revised architectural, structural or services information is issued, all drawings shall be modified
accordingly and shall be re-issued for construction purposes subject to examination by the CA. The issue
of revised drawings shall be in accordance with and with regard to the agreed programme for construction
and where time is available re-issues shall be grouped together, as agreed with the CA.
H. Providing all revisions are properly incorporated into the drawings and the final installation is correct
according to the drawings, then the final issue of these drawings may be used in conjunction with the draft
set of marked up prints kept on site, as the basis for the record drawings.
3.5 PROGRESS
A. Ensure the Works programme is maintained up to date and redraft, without delay, if any circumstance
arises that affect the progress of the Works and submit to the CA.
B. Provide progress reports to the CA every 4 weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) in addition to any
other information required under the contract conditions.
C. Progress reports shall include, but not limited to, the following information:
1. Date of order and delivery of all major plant and equipment
2. Materials and equipment on site or installed
3. Site labour employed
4. Activity breakdown indicating target percent progress and actual percent progress for each activity
monitored against the contract programme.
5. Latest schedule of information required indicating required / received dates and highlighting critical
path items.
6. Status of utility services with connection dates for each service where applicable.
7. Latest progress indicated on a copy of the programme. The programme shall include a base line
activity bar for each activity and a separate progress bar to each activity bar.
8. Any proposed alteration to the programme. Alterations shall be identified clearly prior to the activities
being undertaken and shall be in accordance with the contract.
9. Copies of snagging/defects lists verifying that inspections are being undertaken. D. Record progress
of the Works weekly on a copy of the programme.
D. Maintain a set of the latest drawings, which shall form the basis for the record drawings, marked up as the
Works progresses. These shall be available for inspection by the CA at any time.
E. If at any time the execution of the Works falls behind the contract programme, formulate corrective
measures and notify the CA of these intended measures prior to their being adopted.
3.6 CALCULATIONS
A. All calculations produced in respect of design responsibilities shall be coordinated and presented in a
logical format that can be easily understood.
B. All calculations shall be prepared to a recognised and agreed format and shall be indexed.
C. The use of computer programs in the preparation of designs shall be carefully controlled. All software
programs shall be verified, and their use agreed with the CA prior to commencement of design tasks.
Where unverified software is used its use shall be declared and the initial outputs justified by full and
complete hand calculations.
D. Calculations that are preliminary in nature, i.e., do not form part of the final submittal, shall be referenced
independently and clearly indicated 'Preliminary'.
E. Submittals shall clearly state the methodology, formulae, design criteria, assumptions and all design
margins used in the calculations.
F. Where necessary, calculation sheets shall be accompanied by an annotated layout drawing identifying
terminals, fittings and the particular sections of ductwork or pipework.
G. Each calculation sheet, drawing or schedule shall clearly identify the originator, date of production, checker
(who signs or initials) and date of check.
H. Each set of calculations shall further require the approval of a Chartered Engineer to verify that the design
is in accordance with the specification and design intent.
I. Allow at least 15 working days (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) from date of receipt by the CA for
examination of the calculations and submittals.
J. Incomplete submittals will not be examined until fully re-submitted, as they will be considered inadequate
and misleading.
K. The costs for the preparation of all necessary calculation shall be included in the Works.
3.7 PREPARATION OF DRAWINGS
A. Prior to preparing any documents the Contractor shall agree with the CA a document numbering system.
B. All drawings for the Works shall be prepared on a computer aided draughting system AutoCAD or
compatible, producing drawings in standard .DWG format.
C. Drawing plots shall be ISO ‘A’ paper size, with an agreed logo/title block in the bottom, right-hand corner.
D. Every plant and section layout drawing shall be multi-layer, with each service shown on a separate
layer/overlay, for subsequent easy modification.
E. The sequence of layers, pen colours and sizes shall be agreed prior to commencement of drawing
production.
F. The AutoCAD software used to produce drawings shall be approved prior to commencement of drawing
production.
G. The medium for transfer of information shall be high quality CD-R and two disks are to be supplied (unless
otherwise stated elsewhere) for each batch of drawing data. AutoCAD drawing file (DWG) will be supplied,
not data exchange files (DXF).
H. The standard drawing size shall be A1 for all drawings (unless otherwise stated elsewhere).
I. Drawing units shall be metric with one unit being one millimetre.
J. All necessary sets in pipes and ducts around piers, columns, beams or other obstructions, although the
clarity not shown on the tender drawings, shall be carried out in accordance with good practice.
K. All drawings shall be read in conjunction with the other engineering services drawings, the structural
engineering and architectural drawings and ensure that work is being carried out in accordance with the
latest issue of the relevant drawings, assuming authority has been issued.
L. Make provision for detailing and installing the Works specified herein to meet the building conditions on
site and be satisfied of the building conditions to provide every contingency in connection therein. M.
Scales used on drawings shall be selected to convey clearly the proposals.
M. All drawings shall be QA checked and signed by the design manager prior to submittal. Any drawings
which have not been checked and signed will be rejected.
N. Ensure the notation on all documents produced follows the same conventions as the tender
documentation. Agree additional notation with the CA before preparing any documents.
3.8 REVISIONS OF DRAWINGS
A. Where revisions take place either under the authority of a CA instruction, or by written agreement with the
CA or when revised architectural, structural or services information is issued, all drawings shall be modified
accordingly and shall be re-issued for construction purposes subject to examination by the CA. The issue
of revised drawings shall be in accordance with and with regard to the agreed programme for construction
and where time is available re-issues shall be grouped together, as agreed with the CA.
B. Providing all revisions are properly incorporated into the drawings and the final installation is correct
according to the drawings, then the final issue of these drawings may be used in conjunction with the draft
set of marked up prints kept on site, as the basis for the record drawings.
3.9 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit technical and performance data of all materials and equipment which he
proposes for the installation including manufacturer’s catalogue data, equipment capacities and pressure
ratings of selected models and weights (shipping, installed, and operating), for approval to the CA prior to
procurement. The data shall include dimensions, weights, operating parameters, certified test data, wall
thickness, finishes and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and connection
details.
B. The CA shall review all drawings and manufacturers details prior to any orders being placed.
C. The final details including all technical aspects and calculations where applicable shall be submitted in a
clear, definable and easily read format with the specified technical details, notes and performance data
clearly shown in the English language. Where drawings are to be examined, the manufacturer’s details
(shown on the drawings) must have been previously reviewed or only partial approval/comment will be
granted.
D. Submit a separate compliance statement for each item of plant or equipment identifying all technical
details and performance characteristics and that required to be achieved as specified.
E. All reviews of submittals will be carried out in the offices of the CA (unless stated otherwise elsewhere). The
Contractor shall include for all costs and make all necessary arrangements for reviews of submittals to be
undertaken in this manner. All meetings in this respect shall be held in the offices of the CA (unless stated
otherwise elsewhere). Agree with the CA where samples of materials offered for review are to be sent.
F. Drawings, calculations and submittals shall be issued for review progressively, as agreed in advance with
the CA.
G. Each submittal package shall contain all drawings, design calculations, support information, method
statements, manufacturer's literature, builder’s work information, etc. necessary to facilitate an
independent review. All documents (excluding drawings) submitted for review shall be adequately bound.
H. The Contractor shall include as part of all Technical Submittals the relevant extracts from the specification
with confirmation of compliance on all items contained within the specification related to the technical
submission. All non-compliances will be considered as a deviation and the Contractor shall provide full
details to justify the deviation; acceptance of any deviation will be at the discretion of the CA.
I. All material submittals shall include confirmation of the design life of all components. The minimum design
life of all materials shall be in accordance with those stated in CIBSE Guide B unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
J. Schedule of drawings and submittals
1. Within four weeks of the contract appointment prepare a schedule of all proposed drawings and
submittals required for comment. The schedule shall indicate as a minimum the following information:
a. Drawing/submittal number and revision number
b. Drawing/Submittal title and service
c. Drawing Scale
d. Latest date required on site and/or for manufacturing purposes
e. Date required for final comment
f. Date for submission for comment
g. Date of commencement of drawing production or submittal order
2. As agreed with the CA revise and update the drawing schedule as necessary on a regular basis during
the contract period.
3. In planning the production of drawings and other submittals take into account the time required for:
a. Submission to the CA
b. Examination by the design team
c. Alterations and re-submission in the event of the initial submission not being accepted
d. Final issue for construction purposes
4. Indicate the full extent of all submittals required to be submitted for comment. The submittals shall be
grouped so as to support the main issue of drawings for a particular part of the project or the HVAC
service.
5. Incomplete submittals will not be examined until fully re-submitted, as they will be considered
inadequate and misleading.
K. All correspondence related to the examination and review procedure shall be directed through the office
of the CA (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
L. Allow 15 working days (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) from the date of receipt by the CA for review or
comment or otherwise on all submittals.
M. The number of copies and format of information to be provided shall be as follows (unless stated
otherwise elsewhere).
1. 2 Number full size paper prints of drawings
2. 1 Number reduced size A3 paper print of drawings
3. 1 Number A4 copy of all materials submittals
4. 1 CD of the information
3.10 MISTAKES IN SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error, discrepancy or omission in any submittal, presentation or
drawing prepared or where others have prepared these for submittal. Responsibility will not be relieved
whether or not such submittal has been presented to the CA and examined and/or approved and/or issued
on a CA instruction.
B. The said indemnity shall be subject to the proviso that such error, discrepancy or omission is not due to
any inaccurate data, drawing or information provided by the employer or by the CA on his behalf.
C. Reimbursement will be sought for any abortive expenditure that the Employer, CA and/or other trades and
disciplines may incur in placing reliance on any such error, discrepancy or omission.
3.11 REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS
A. The CA will examine the submittals for compliance, in principle, with the design intent.
B. Such examination shall not relieve any responsibilities and obligations under the contract.
C. Examination of any submittal by the CA shall not mean that the CA is responsible for the correctness of the
drawing or submittal or its suitability for purpose. The drawings, calculations and submittals shall be
issued progressively as agreed in advance with the CA to facilitate examination.
D. Allow adequate time in the programme for submittals with due allowance for incorporation of comments
and resubmission in order not to cause delays.
E. Each package shall contain all drawings, design calculations, support information, manufacturer's literature,
etc necessary to facilitate an independent review. All documents (excluding drawings) submitted for
examination shall be adequately bound.
F. All documents shall be clearly identified with a 'status' during the course of the project.
G. The following categories shall be used:
1. Preliminary - Submittal presented for informal comment as appropriate. Any comment, or lack of
comment, is not to be construed or implied as giving approval.
2. Information - Submittal presented for information only and no comments required
3. For Review - To be reviewed and examined by the CA
4. Construction - For construction purposes
H. Revised items on drawings shall be indicated by 'clouds' around the changes and annotated with a revision
number/letter.
I. All drawings shall require the approval of the installer's design manager to verify that the drawing has been
developed from an approved design and that the information does not conflict with the requirements of
other design disciplines.
J. All documentation submitted shall be accompanied by a certificate indicating that it has been checked and
approved by the installer's design manager.
K. Only drawings that have been reviewed, and incorporate the comments by the CA may be progressed to
'Construction' status. Should it become necessary to revise the drawing its status shall be changed to 'For
Review' and re-submitted.
L. On receipt and examination of any submittal the following conditions shall apply:
1. Reviewed. Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed
2. Reviewed. Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed subject to

incorporation of comments indicated. If compliance with the comments cannot be achieved amend
and re-submit.
3. Rejected The submittal does not comply and is to be re-submitted after correction.
M. Where drawings and submittals are reviewed subject to comments indicated these comments shall be
incorporated immediately and re-submitted to the CA prior to issue for construction.
N. Where drawings are revised and updated during construction these shall be issued to the CA for
examination of the revision only, the revision being clearly marked.
O. Builder's work information and installation drawings shall not be reviewed in detail but shall be examined
by the CA for general suitability.
P. Record drawings are to be prepared as the Works progress and shall be examined in the same manner as
stated above unless stated otherwise. Allow 15 working days (unless otherwise stated elsewhere) from
receipt by the CA for review and comment.
3.12 ORDERING
A. Orders for plant, equipment and materials, as required, shall be placed to maintain the necessary progress
of the Works. If requested provide copies of such orders to the CA within one week of request.
B. Notify the CA of any discrepancies in sufficient time so as not to jeopardise the contract programme and
allow any instructions to be issued and implemented.
C. Prior to placing orders the Contractor shall check that the order is being placed upon the current
equipment schedules and shall be satisfied that all orders fulfill the requirements of the contract
documentation. This shall include, but not limited to:
1. Performance and technical criteria
2. Compatibility between items of plant and systems
3. Dimensional co-ordination between building fabric, structure, items of plant and other engineering
services
4. No claims will be accepted as a result of failure to be properly satisfied to these requirements.
D. Prepare an ordering schedule for submission to the CA that shall indicate the following data:
1. Item of material or plant
2. Manufacturer
3. Date of order and reference number
4. Acknowledgement of order and reference
5. Delivery period quoted
6. Date required on site
7. Off-site testing date
8. Allowable programme float
9. Date delivered to site
E. Update, modify and submit the ordering schedule on a regular basis as agreed with the CA. Indicate on
the schedule any possible problems and when delivery to site has been achieved.
3.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Off-site works testing and inspection shall be carried out prior to delivery to site of plant and equipment as
stated elsewhere.
B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of this document and those detailed
elsewhere.
C. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to Site with particular reference to the climatic conditions they
will be transported, stored and installed in.
D. Protection and packaging
1. Ensure that all plant, equipment and materials and particularly prefabricated portions of the Works are
properly packaged and protected against damage during delivery, storage and until fully, finally and
properly incorporated into the Works and set to work.
2. Submit to the CA a method statement in regard to the protection proposals for both stored and
installed plant, equipment and materials prior to commencement of the works on site.
3. All plant, equipment and materials shall be protected against ingress of water and dust, formation of
condensation, extremes and rapid changes of temperature, building works and operations of others.
4. Cover all items with polythene sheeting except when being worked upon.
5. Cap all open ends of pipes, ducts, conduit, and trunking etc except when being worked upon
6. After removal of any temporary protection paint parts liable to corrosion.
7. Filter media shall only be installed when the plant items concerned are commissioned and tested.
8. Protect all finished items from damage. Install items such as grilles, diffusers, accessories etc as near
to completion as practicable.
9. Any plant or equipment subject to incorrect storage or inadequate protection will be deemed
unacceptable for incorporation into the Works and new plant or equipment will be required as a
replacement. Plant, equipment and materials suffering deterioration or damage shall be replaced prior
to handover at no additional cost to the contract.
E. Storage
1. Provide sufficient weatherproof, safe and secure storage for all materials and equipment.
2. Equipment and materials shall be offloaded, stored and transported about the Works in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Open ends on all ductwork, tubes, conduit, and associated equipment shall effectively be plugged,
capped or sealed whilst in storage and during transportation to site. Provide racks to prevent
distortion of pipes, conduit and similar materials.
3.14 BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide all necessary supporting steelwork, brackets, clamps and fixings necessary for the complete
installation.
B. Ensure that all items of works undertaken or materials provided under this contract, are included in the
contract price, and also that any such item, including builders work information and materials supplied, are
incorporated into the Works in accordance with the agreed programme.
C. All materials provided for fixing by others shall be included in the Works cost and supplied in accordance
with the programme.
D. Provide the specified builders work drawings/details and issue same for construction in compliance with
the agreed programme.
E. Provide all builders work information in sufficient time, including necessary approvals, to comply with the
agreed programme requirements. No additional cost or time extension will be allowed arising from failure
to comply.
F. Prepare all other necessary builders work drawings required for the execution of the Works, making due
reference to the structural engineering and architectural final dimensioned detail drawings.
G. All access panel drawings shall be fully co-ordinated with all other trades and Sub-Contractors to ensure
that the Architectural impact is minimised and approved by the CA.
H. All drawings shall be fully dimensioned showing both size and position of builder's work.
I. Where major structural and/or architectural facilities or provisions, for engineering services may have
already been indicated check that these are correct, satisfactory and adequate for the purpose and confirm
same in writing to the CA within two weeks of the award of contract.
J. Where the preliminary builder's work facilities or provisions issued prior to the award of contract are not
correct or insufficient, advise the CA immediately when such becomes evident and obtain further
instructions.
K. No additional cost or time extension will be allowed for modifications to the Works due to failure to:
1. Adequately inspect and check the existing or preliminary builders work facilities and provisions
2. Revise, supplement and/or issue final information, drawings/details for the actual Works requirements.
L. If agreed with the CA, mark on site actual locations of minor non-structural holes through walls, partitions,
floors etc. and also chases in non fair-faced walls, etc. for ducts, pipes and the like in preference to
providing drawings of such builder's work requirements. Offer them for inspection by the CA prior to
carrying out any work.
M. Establish a method of working with the CA to ensure the Works may proceed without hindrance.
N. The maximum size for a non-structural hole for marking on site shall be 150mm x 150mm (unless stated
otherwise elsewhere).
O. Drawings to be provided shall be as follows:
1. Details of all bases for plant formed in concrete, brickwork or blockwork to a scale of not less than 1:20
2. Details of all attendant builders work, holes, chases, etc. for pipes, ducts and cables etc. and any item
where access for a function of the installation is required to a scale of not less than 1:50
3. Details of all purpose made brackets for supporting service or plant/equipment to a scale of not less
than 1:50
4. Details of all accesses into ceilings, ducts, etc. at a scale of not less than 1:50
5. Details of all special fixings, inserts, brackets, anchors, suspensions, supports etc. at a scale of not less
than 1:20
6. Details of all sleeves, puddle flanges, access chambers at a scale not less than 1:20
P. Submit all necessary load and thrust calculations with drawings/details.
Q. Fixings to structural steelwork shall be of the clamp type and no steelwork shall be cut, drilled or welded
without prior written approval of the CA.
R. All fixings shall be of the correct size and type for the fixing load applied and the type shall be approved
prior to commencement of the Works.
S. Where alternative equipment or materials has been offered that the CA has accepted and which
subsequently varies the Works in any way whatsoever, then undertake the redesign of the associated
builder's work. No claim for additional costs or delay to the completion of the Works will be allowed.
T. Refer to the Particular specification division 230020 for details of the specific builderswork obligations
within the Works.
3.15 COORDINATION OF SERVICES
A. All aspects of the Works require detailed co-ordination to avoid any possible clash or conflict with other
trades and disciplines.
B. Be responsible for the co-ordination of the installation of services and take account of all other works and
trades either during or prior to their incorporation into the Works. No extra cost or claim will be allowed
due to conflict of works or installations, where full liaison with other trades and disciplines would have
prevented such an occurrence.
C. Initiate co-ordination meetings with all other trades and disciplines and undertake all surveys that are
necessary. Minute these meetings and submit to the CA no longer than one week after the date of the
meeting. The minutes shall be suitably detailed to cover all matters raised and indicate which party
requires to action matters.
D. Where minor clashes of services occur on site that were not foreseeable at the design or co-ordination
drawing stage then these clashes or minor co-ordination matters shall be resolved by discussion and
agreement with other trades and disciplines. The CA shall be informed of the action to be taken by an
approved means. No instructions will be issued to cover such minor clashes.
E. Identify at an early stage and report prior to commencement of the Works, any conflict in the positioning
between engineering services, the structure or architectural elements. Ascertain if structural tolerances
have been exceeded, and service voids reduced, and take site on-site dimensions. Advise the CA of any
proposed corrective action to resolve any conflicts.
F. When any new, revised or updated architectural, structural or services information is issued by the CA
under the authority of an Instruction, examine such information and if necessary modify the Works
accordingly to prevent any clashes or abortive work due to such instruction.
G. No extra cost or claim will be allowed to cover any clashes or abortive work that result from not requesting
an explanation or seeking clarification in respect of any such revision. Any remedial works shall be carried
out at no cost to the contract.
3.16 SITE DIMENSIONS AND LEVELS
A. Use a laser levelling system to install all building services installations wherever possible and co-ordinate
the measurements with all other trades and disciplines to prevent any clashes.
B. Obtain all dimensions and levels on site for the actual setting out of the Works. Ensure these dimensions
are available before proceeding with the Works.
C. Do not take dimensions from drawings by scaling. Where dimensions are indicated on the drawings check
these on site, as appropriate, to ensure construction and manufacturing tolerances can be accommodated.
D. As the development advances measure on site all works by others that may foreseeably affect the Works.
These dimensions shall be incorporated into the drawings or marked up on revised drawings if already
issued.
E. No extra cost or claim will be allowed for any errors arising from inaccurate setting out or failure to check
actual site dimensions. Reimbursement will be sought for any abortive expenditure.
F. Any comments, discrepancies or divergences that will / may affect the Works shall be brought to the
attention of the CA in adequate time to avoid delay or abortive expenditure.
3.17 SETTING OUT
A. Ensure all items of plant and equipment can be installed in the available space and that there is adequate
access to install plant to its final position in a safe manner.
B. Install the Works so as to be accessible for safe operation, maintenance, repair and future replacement.
Deviations from the drawings to achieve this shall be agreed with the CA and written approval obtained
before installation work commences. Final position and size of access doors shall be agreed with the CA.
C. Ensure uniform, neat and symmetrical arrangements of wall, floor and ceiling mounted equipment. Agree
with the CA all necessary horizontal and vertical alignment before installation work commences.
D. Amend any errors arising from inaccurate setting out or lack of site co-ordination at no additional expense
to the contract.
3.18 TERMINAL LOCATIONS
A. The positions of all connection points, accessories, equipment and other room terminals as shown on the
tender drawings are approximate and for guidance in the preparation of the tender. B. Agree with the CA
the room terminals that are subject to final positioning on site.
B. Allow for the movement of all such terminals up to a radius of 2.0 m from the positions shown on the
drawings.
C. Confirm with the CA the mounting heights before commencing work on site.
3.19 ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
A. Demonstrate that all plant and equipment incorporated into the Works can be safely and easily maintained
in full compliance with Health and Safety legislation, health & safety requirements, British Standards and
(where applicable) Health Technical Memoranda.
B. Services installed in ducts, trenches and subways shall comply with the requirements of BS 8313
(Accommodation of Building Services in ducts).
C. Ensure that all access panels/doors are unobstructed and that adequate space is provided for future
replacement of plant or parts.
D. Access requirements are generally described and detailed elsewhere in the specification but the following
minimum requirements shall be provided:
1. Plant and Equipment
a. Access facilities shall be provided to all items of plant and equipment. The requirements for
access shall be established with the manufacturer and indicated as clear unobstructed space on
the coordinated installation drawings.
b. Walkways, access platforms, ladders and lifting gear shall be provided if necessary.
c. Access is required for:
1) Regular maintenance, fabrication or adjustment
2) Replacement of parts
3) Monitoring plant conditions
4) Cleaning
d. Prior to practical completion demonstrate on the “As Built” drawings and to the CA that all plant
and equipment has adequate access facilities.
2. Ductwork Systems
a. Provide access where frequent cleaning shall be necessary in the form of 450mm x 380mm access
panels at a minimum of 3m intervals, positioned to enable internal cleaning of all ductwork
components. On horizontal ducts the bottom of the opening shall be 50mm above the bottom of
the duct to enable easy sweeping out.
b. Access panels shall be so positioned as to enable cleaning personnel to easily reach the inside of
the duct.
c. Provide access for inspection of ancillary items concealed in ductwork, including but not limited
to:
1) Control dampers
2) Fire dampers
3) Control devices
4) Turning vanes
5) Heating/cooling coils (both sides)
d. Provide access to plant connections including but not limited to:
1) Inlet ducts to wall or roof mounted extract fans
2) Either side of axial flow fans
3) External louvers
4) Access for testing including provision of test holes
5) Access for commissioning/testing - ensure all control dampers are easily accessible, provide
access panels in ceilings if necessary.
3. Pipework Systems
a. Provide access for venting and draining
b. Provide access for water treatment additions
c. Access for commissioning/regulating - Ensure all commissioning stations, strainers and isolating
valves are easily accessible, provide access panels in ceilings if necessary.
d. Locate all ancillaries including control valves, isolating valves in positions where routine access is
easily achieved.
e. Access for cleaning and rodding wastes, stacks, vents and drains
f. On new sanitation pipework access shall be provide at the head of horizontal runs of soil and
waste pipes, on top of stub stacks, on vertical pipes passing between floors, on horizontal
suspended pipes above ceilings and immediately prior to connecting to existing soil and waste
stacks. Where alterations to the building comprise existing access points allow to provide
alternative suitable access.
g. Access points shall take the form of proprietary bolted or screwed fittings with seals.
E. Design, co-ordinate, supply and install all access platforms, access covers, gratings, ladders, stairs, rails and
protecting elements required for future maintenance and operation of the Works.
1. The installations shall be structurally stable and safe in use. Detail design drawings shall be provided
together with builders work information and submitted for review prior to fabrication and installation.
Drawings and calculations shall also be submitted to the structural engineer for comment.
2. Walkways and stairways shall be in accordance with BS 5395 Parts 1 and 3 (Stairs, ladders and
walkways) and BS EN ISO 14122 (Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery).
Include all toe plates, railings, guards and infill’s necessary to ensure a safe installation.
3. Flights of stairs shall not exceed 16 risers. Longer stairways shall be provided as equal flights
separated by landings.
4. Handrails, platforms and walkways shall be designed for heavy duty. External and plant room
installations shall be of the open mesh type fabricated from mild steel sections hot dip galvanised after
manufacture in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Bolts, nuts washers and other fastenings shall be hot
dip galvanised or zinc plated.
5. External installations shall be finished with a polyester powder coating in a BS or RAL colour advised by
the CA.
3.20 FACILITIES FOR THE REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT
A. Services connections to equipment, and plant, shall be made with decoupling adjacent to the equipment
such that any removable section, cover or the complete unit can be readily removed or withdrawn without
the removal or disturbance to large sections adjacent services systems.
B. In addition it shall be possible to isolate and drain down any item of equipment without isolating large
sections of the remaining system.
3.21 REMOVAL OF PIPEWORK
A. Pipework shall be installed with sufficient flanged and/or union joints to facilitate easy removal of any part
of the system at a future date. Flanged and/or union joints shall be provided at intervals not greater than
16m along all straight runs of pipework.
B. In plantrooms, services ducts, false ceilings and other similar areas, flanged and/or union joints shall be
provided at suitable locations to facilitate removal of pipework in sections.
3.22 ALLOWANCE FOR INSULATION
A. All connections and brackets for sensors, equipment labels and other pipe, duct or equipment mounted
accessories shall be extended to project past the insulation thickness and enable items and accessories to
be fitted or removed without disturbing the insulation or cladding.
3.23 SITE MODIFICATIONS
A. Site modifications to plant, equipment or assemblies shall not be undertaken without approval from the
CA.
B. Authorised site modifications shall be in accordance with manufactures’ recommendations and

requirements and comply with any type test certificate obtained for the arrangement of components.
3.24 FIRE PRECAUTIONS
A. Take all reasonable fire precautions in respect of stores, workshops and other installations. Where it is
necessary to use any naked flame or welding equipment in executing the Works and where combustible
materials are in use, adequate protection shall be given to other adjacent materials and personnel.
Suitable fire extinguishers shall be readily available at the position where such work is proceeding and the
Contractor shall ensure that the areas where the work is being undertaken are adequately ventilated.
3.25 BENEFICIAL USE OF INSTALLATIONS
A. Systems shall not be used before practical completion without prior written approval of the CA.
B. Systems used before practical completion not for the benefit of the Employer shall have all consumable
elements (including filters, lamps and tubes) replaced with new not more than seven days prior to practical
completion.
C. Maintenance shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. Final manufacturer
guarantee periods shall not be affected and a written guarantee to this effect shall be obtained.
D. If required prior to practical completion and after the issue of a written instruction by the CA, operate the
installations or any part of them, provided that such operation is practicable and does not prejudice the
responsibilities and obligations under the contract.
3.26 INSPECTION BEFORE CONCEALMENT
A. Whenever work requiring inspection or testing is subsequently to be concealed, 7 days’ notice shall be
given to the CA (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) so that inspections may be made or tests witnessed
before concealment.
B. Failure to give due notice may necessitate the uncovering of the work and reinstating it at no extra cost or
claim or extension to the programme or allowance for delay.
C. Record drawings of any services to be concealed shall be issued to the CA at the time notice is given.
3.27 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Where used in the specification the following definitions shall apply:
1. Commissioning – the advancement of an installation from the stage of static completion to working
order to the specified requirements.
2. Testing – the measurement and recording of specified quantifiable characteristics of an installation or

parts thereof. This includes off site testing.
3. Setting to work – the process of setting a static system in motion
4. Regulation – the process of adjusting the rates of fluid flow in a distribution system to achieve
specified values
5. Environmental testing – the measurement and recording of internal environmental conditions
6. System proving – the measuring, recording, evaluating and reporting on the seasonal performance of
the systems against their design values
7. System demonstration – demonstrating the capability of the installation to achieve and maintain the
specified performance criteria
8. Fine-tuning – the adjustment of the system where usage and system proving has shown such a need.
This may include the re-assessment of design values and control set points to achieve the required
system performance.
B. Commissioning Specialist
1. Employ an independent company who specialises in testing and commissioning of HVAC works to
undertake all commissioning and testing activities associated with the Works and as specified
elsewhere.
2. The commissioning specialist shall be a member of The Commissioning Specialists Association (CSA).
3. Submit with the tender, details of the independent company to be employed.
C. Commissioning programme
1. Prepare comprehensive programmes for the pre-commissioning checks, setting to work, testing,
commissioning, system proving and environmental testing of the Works. Submit programme within 12
weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) of contract appointment.
2. Review and update the commissioning programme at agreed intervals and if necessary revise and
amend the programme to suit the progress of the Works. Due account shall be taken of any phasing
requirements.
D. General requirements
1. Prior to commencement of the Works submit schedules indicating those parts of the Works for which
inspections and tests are required to substantiate conformity with the specification.
2. Notify the CA in writing when the Works or parts thereof are ready for testing and commissioning. 3.
Agree in advance with all parties procedures for inspections and tests including periods of notice.
3. All commissioning and tests shall be carried out to the complete satisfaction of the CA.
4. Provide all labour (including specialists), special instruments, materials, fuel, lubricants, coolants, tools,
plant and equipment required to carry out the pre-commissioning, commissioning, testing and the
performance testing of all elements.
5. Provide all necessary facilities to enable tests to be witnessed and inspections carried out including all
necessary instruments and recorders to monitor systems during commissioning system proving and
environmental testing.
6. Off-site works testing and inspection shall in no way relieve the installer of his responsibilities to
ensure that all materials and equipment installed in the Works are entirely suitable for the applications
and conditions of operations.
7. Provide method statements supported by risk assessments detailing the procedures for carrying out all
on site tests.
8. Co-ordinate the activities of all specialised personnel, including manufacturer’s representatives,

together with providing any attendance required.
9. Indicate on drawings where access is required into ceiling voids, service risers etc and ensure these
points are not closed up until the commissioning and testing is complete.
10. Ensure all requirements such as cleanliness, protection from harmful external and internal elements are
provided prior to commencement of commissioning and testing.
11. The Works shall be fully tested, commissioned and be fully operational prior to witnessing and
inspection by the CA.
12. All certification documents shall be submitted to the CA for examination before any system is offered
for final acceptance.
13. The CA will examine, subsequent to setting to work and regulation of the Works the results of the
commissioning and the documentary records thereof.
14. The object of the witnessing stage is to enable the CA to establish a level of confidence in the
commissioning results being presented. The extent and proportion of results to be witnessed by the
CA will be at the discretion of the CA.
15. The CA will only witness test proceedings to determine if the specified requirements have been
satisfied.
16. Should the tests fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment are properly installed and
functioning correctly, the cause of the failure shall be investigated. Should the failure be due to
incorrect or faulty work then without delay, carry out such remedial measures and adjustments as may
be necessary and repeat the commissioning and testing procedures to the satisfaction of the CA and
at no cost to the contract.
17. Any defects of workmanship, materials, performance, maladjustment, non-compliance with the
specification, or other irregularities which become apparent during the tests shall be rectified and the
tests repeated at no cost to the contract until the whole is proved free from defects and in complete
working order. All systems shall be left sound and correct.
18. The CA shall have the right to reject any material, apparatus or equipment which, as the result of
inspections and/or tests may be found to be defective or unsatisfactory in any respect, or not in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification, and to require the installer to repair, adjust,
modify, or replace the defective item. If the defective item be adjudged by the CA to be unsuitable for
repair, adjustment or modification, then it shall be replaced by a completely new item at the expense
of the installer.
19. Where it is not possible at the particular time of commissioning and testing for full load conditions to
be obtained or simulated, undertake to repeat such operations of full load or a simulation thereof at a
time when this can be achieved as agreed with the CA.
20. Where portions of the work are required to be commissioned and tested separately, then upon final
completion, demonstrate to the CA that all the several portions are capable of proper simultaneous
operation in accordance with the requirements of the specification.
21. Where the construction programme is such that the commissioning, testing, balancing, adjustment,
needs to be undertaken in an area of the building taken over and occupied by the Employer, then take
all necessary precautions against and be responsible for any damage caused whilst working in such
areas for that purpose.
22. The result of each and every inspection and test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this
specification, whether or not witnessed by the CA, shall be accurately recorded on approved form of
test certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure. Test results shall be written at
the time of test in blue ink and signed by the tester and any witness. Alterations or corrections shall
be made by crossing out not by overwriting the previous data. No test results shall be corrected with
correction fluids or similar correction media.
23. Provide a written statement to the CA confirming that each installation has been correctly tested and
commissioned and that the performance requirements can be achieved.
24. All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner and in accordance
with the provisions of the local Health and Safety regulations, the electricity safety regulations, quality
and continuity regulations (where appropriate), or equivalent international safety standards to the
complete satisfaction of the CA.
25. Provide method statements supported by risk assessments detailing the procedures for carrying out all
on site tests.
26. No material, apparatus, equipment or installation shall be covered or otherwise permanently

concealed from view until the CA has had the opportunity to inspect it and either has formally waived
his right to inspect it or has given written authorisation for covering to proceed following satisfactory
tests and/or inspection.
27. Should any alternative item be proposed that does not carry appropriate certification, ensure
independent testing is carried out at no expense to the Works to confirm compliance.
28. Where a test indicates non-compliance with the specification submit immediately details of the
noncompliance and details for corrective action.
29. Maintain records of all specified inspections and tests performed including third party and works
testing and maintain copies of all records on site for inspection.
E. Testing and commissioning activities
1. Undertake the following activities:
a. Testing, pre-commissioning checks, commission, regulate and set to work the Works.
b. Develop and complete the initial commissioning plan and submit to the CA.
c. Obtain all compliance approvals from the Local Authorities. Submit a report to the CA to confirm
all necessary checks and witnessing by the Local Authority, Government offices, Statutory
Authorities, etc have been undertaken
d. Provide all specialist personnel including manufacturer’s representatives and coordinate their
activities, together with providing any attendance required.
e. Attend commissioning meetings
f. Provide and submit standard pro-forma for the various requirements for commissioning records
and certification for agreement with the CA prior to commencement of the Works
g. Prior to installation submit a report that all system designs can be commissioned
h. Submit to the CA a post installation report to confirm that installations are complete and ready for
commissioning
i. Monitor progress against the programme of works and provide weekly reports detailing progress
of testing and commissioning activities
j. Maintain a diary/log of significant commissioning and testing activities
k. Measure and reconcile noise levels at agreed locations to verify compliance with design criteria
l. Correct any issues found during the performance testing
m. Submit to the CA all certification documents prior to any system being offered for final acceptance
n. Confirm in writing to the CA that each installation has been correctly tested and commissioned
and that the performance requirements can be achieved.
o. Ensure all certification is attained and witnessed as necessary for inclusion in the record
documentation
p. Provide and submit a report for every test, demonstration, balance or commissioning activity
witnessed, together with an engineering appraisal on the performance, either on or off-site
q. Maintain on site at all times full records of all testing, commissioning and performance testing
r. Prepare and submit a written report on the operational and performance testing
s. Prepare and submit a final commissioning report detailing the results of the commissioning and
commenting on the performance of systems. To be signed by a competent person.
F. Regulations and standards
1. Electrical installations shall be inspected and tested as required by the latest edition of BS 7671 IEE
Wiring Regulations
2. Commissioning provisions and procedures shall follow the guidance and recommendations contained
within the latest editions of the following documentation unless stated otherwise:
a. CIBSE Commissioning Codes
1) Series A - Air Distribution Systems - High and Low Velocity
2) Series B - Boiler Plant
3) Series C - Automatic Control Systems
4) Series R - Refrigeration Systems
5) Series W- Water Distribution Systems
6) Series M - Commissioning management
b. BSRIA Application Guides
1) AG 3/89.3 Commissioning of air systems
2) BG 2/2010 Commissioning of water systems
3) AG 1/91 Commissioning of VAV systems in buildings
4) AG 1/2001.1 Pre-commission cleaning of pipework services
5) AG 16/2001 Variable flow water systems
6) AG 20/95 Commissioning of pipework systems
3. Particular attention shall be given to the permitted tolerances in the above documentation.
G. Personnel
1. Appoint a “competent person” to supervise the whole of the testing, commissioning, system proving,
system demonstration and instruction of the employer’s staff.
2. Testing work shall be carried out by experienced operatives who are fully trained in the use of the
equipment and the requirements of the test. The CA may request evidence of competence for those
carrying out testing.
3. Testing and commissioning of major items of proprietary plant shall be carried out by manufacturer's
personnel.
H. Instruments for testing and commissioning
1. All instruments shall be provided by the Contractor or the commissioning specialist appointed by the
Contractor.
2. Submit to the CA a schedule detailing the equipment and instruments to be used in the testing and
commissioning of the complete works.
3. Ensure all instruments are correctly calibrated and are marked with a unique reference for
identification. All instruments shall be calibrated immediately prior to commencement of the testing
4. and shall be re-calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation during the course of
testing, as necessary
5. Submit evidence of correct calibration of all instruments used in connection with commissioning and
testing to the CA prior to commencement of the Works. Test methods shall be demonstrated to the
CA where required.
6. Instrument calibration data and identification shall be included on the respective test record sheets.
I. Testing and commissioning record sheets
1. Maintain a systematic record of commissioning and testing results.
2. The installer and commissioning specialist shall record results of inspections, checking, testing and
commissioning on record sheets approved by the CA prior to the commencement of the Works.
3. Submit pro-forma record sheets for the recording of all testing and commissioning to the CA for
approval prior to the commencement of the Works.
4. Where pro-forma record sheets are not issued by the Contractor for the HVAC engineering systems
use record sheets as described in the BSRIA Application Guides for the respective systems.
5. The installer shall issue the completed sheets to the CA in a logical sequence as the Works proceed.
6. Any witnessing or independent checking by the CA shall be carried out solely at the discretion of the
CA as considered necessary.
7. Two sets of the checking and testing record sheets shall be issued for use during the progress of the
Works and the installer shall provide any further or supplementary test record sheets as required by
the CA to provide a comprehensive record of all tests.
J. Static testing
1. Progressive static testing shall include the following tests, but other tests may be required and
witnessed:
a. Insulation resistance
b. Earth fault loop impedance
c. Earth continuity
d. Pressure testing of hydraulic systems
e. Air leakage testing of ductwork systems
2. The CA shall be given the opportunity to witness all static tests. Advance notice of 5 working days
shall be given to the CA (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
K. Load and performance simulation tests
1. Equipment to undergo load, duty and performance tests shall be as detailed in Division 230020
(Particular specification).
L. Commissioning progress reports
1. Prepare and submit commissioning and testing progress reports at regular intervals as agreed with the
CA which shall include the following information:
a. Activities completed
b. Activities not completed and actions been taken
c. Forthcoming events and specific actions required
d. Progress against the commissioning and master project programme
M. System demonstration
1. Subsequent to the completion of all testing and commissioning to the satisfaction of the CA, when
directed by the CA operate the plant and demonstrate that the overall systems function correctly in
accordance with the requirements of the specification.
2. Full running and operation period shall be as stated elsewhere and shall be allowed in the programme.
3. During this period be responsible for the recording of results and the operation and maintenance of
the plant. If appropriate and as agreed with the CA use this time to instruct the Employer's staff in the
operation and maintenance of the systems.
4. Provide an operational report of the demonstration and print out of the conditions maintained within
the space for the required demonstration period.
N. Off-site testing
1. Off-site works testing and inspection shall be carried out prior to delivery to site of plant and
equipment as stated elsewhere.
2. Equipment shall be tested for duty and performance prior to dispatch. Test to the appropriate British
Standard or the requirements stated elsewhere if these exceed the British Standard. Carry out all tests
required by legislation under the direction of a competent person.
3. Works testing shall be to the satisfaction of the CA and the Employer’s insurance representative where
required.
4. Include in the contract price all off site testing costs and meet all expenses of the CA and three other
members of the design team (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) to attend inspections and witness
tests at a manufacturer’s or other location away from the site, whether in the project country or
abroad.
5. Attendance or otherwise during specified inspections or tests will not reduce the obligations or
restrictions of the contract.
6. Notify the CA eight weeks (unless otherwise stated elsewhere) in advance of such tests and submit a
programme and method statements for the inspections and witness tests.
7. Method statements from the manufacturer shall clearly detail the testing methods being proposed,
test rig set up, design performance criteria to be met, testing equipment and be supported by risk
assessments. The detailed testing procedures shall be agreed with the CA prior to the tests being
carried out.
8. The final method statement shall be submitted to the CA 4 weeks prior to the proposed test date
(unless otherwise stated elsewhere).
9. The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the equipment can meet the specified deign performance and
requirements. Where the equipment is required to perform in different modes, then the design
performance for each mode of operation shall be tested and certificates provided for all modes of
operation. These shall include part load tests where equipment is designed to operate through a
range or modulate between minimum and maximum design performances.
10. The manufacturer shall have tested the plant or equipment prior to witnessing by the CA and
confirmed readiness for CA attendance.
11. If testing indicates non-compliance with the specification submit immediately details of the
noncompliance and proposals for corrective action. No additional costs or extension to the
programme will be allowed for re-testing or other non-compliance corrective action.
12. Duplicate signed certificates of tests carried out at the manufacturer's works for any items of plant or
equipment shall be forwarded to the CA within 3 working days of the tests and prior to delivery of
equipment to site. All certificates shall be signed by a competent person and witnessed.
13. Where required by the CA, equipment manufacturer’s tests will be required to be repeated on site to
prove the operating performance.
14. Each item of equipment tested at works shall be stamped or fitted with a plate to provide the
following minimum data:
a. Normal working conditions
b. Test conditions
c. Individual equipment reference
d. British Standards applicable
e. Date of test
f. Manufacturer’s details
15. Upon successful completion of the testing the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and returned to
new condition and correctly packaged for delivery to site.
16. No inspection or testing by the CA or his authorised representative nor the witnessing of satisfactory
tests nor the authorising of dispatch to site shall in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations under the contract, nor shall it in any way limit the right of the CA to reject such items after
delivery to site if they subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or unsuitable for their
intended purpose.
17. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all materials, apparatus and equipment required
for the execution of the Works are ordered sufficiently early to ensure delivery to site at the correct
time as required by the construction programme. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
ensure that adequate time is available for inspection and/or testing by the CA, including the giving of
required due notice. No materials, apparatus or equipment subject to inspection and/or test will be
recognised as complete and ready for dispatch until after such inspections and tests have been
satisfactorily carried out and no claim for delay will be allowed unless the CA has failed to carry out
inspection or to waive inspection after being given the specified period of notice.
accordance with the requirements of the specification, and to require the Contractor to repair, make
adjustments, modification or replacement of the defective items before dispatch to site. If the
defective item be adjudged by the CA to be unsuitable for repair, adjustment or modification, then it
shall be replaced by a completely new item at the expense of the Contractor.
O. Pre-commissioning checks
1. The Contractor shall undertake all necessary pre-commissioning works and checks as detailed in the
CIBSE Commissioning Codes and the BSRIA Application Guides stated elsewhere.
2. Ensure that each system, including components, or item of equipment is complete and in a safe
condition prior to start-up.
3. All necessary notices shall be displayed.
4. The Contractor shall submit to the CA a written report, including record sheets, for each system
indicating completion of the pre-commissioning works and checks.
5. System commissioning shall not commence until the pre-commissioning works and checks have been
completed and accepted as satisfactory by the CA.
P. Test certificates
1. Ensure test certificates include as a minimum:
a. Project title
b. Contractor’s name
c. Specific location of the item in the Works, including plant identification, system etc
d. Details of the plant / equipment, including manufacturers’ reference number permanently marked
in a conspicuous position on the item concerned.
e. Date, time and duration of inspection / test
f. Weather conditions during the test, where applicable
g. Details of the test / inspection
h. Instruments used, serial numbers, and calibration dates, where applicable
i. Number and type of deficiencies found, where applicable
j. Any corrective action taken, where applicable
k. Itemised readings for all tests, where applicable
l. Name and signature of those inspecting / witnessing test / testing
m. Other relevant particulars.
2. Test certificates shall be issued in duplicate to the CA within 5 working days of the test (unless
otherwise stated elsewhere).
3. Maintain records of all specified inspections and tests performed including third party and copies of
works test certificates on site
4. An additional copy of every test certificate relating to site tests of the completed installation or parts
thereof shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual specified elsewhere.
Q. Reports
1. Submit to the CA written reports signed by a qualified person to confirm that:
a. Prior installation - all system designs can be commissioned
b. Post installation - installations complete and ready for commissioning
c. System cleanliness - specified cleanliness has been achieved
d. Pre-commissioning checks – completion of pre-commissioning checks
e. Commissioning and testing – to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and confirm
that each installation has been correctly tested and commissioned and achieving the specified
performance.
2. 2. The final documentation of reports and completed record sheets shall be compiled into a systems
commissioning manual for inclusion in the operating and maintenance documentation.
R. Environmental testing
1. Carry out environmental testing to prove the performance of the systems.
2. Environmental testing shall be undertaken in all rooms provided with temperature &/or humidity
control.
3. As directed by the CA provide a temporary installation of portable recorders together with adequate
charts at no cost to the contract to simultaneously record temperature and humidity
4. The corresponding external conditions shall also be recorded at regular intervals whilst the tests are in
progress.
5. All rooms shall be tested until stable design conditions are proven.
6. The final locations of the test instruments shall be agreed with the CA prior to commencement of the
environmental testing period.
7. Maintain and check all portable recorders during the period of testing
S. Performance testing
1. Demonstrate the performance of installations including single, standby, multi-duty plants and systems,
and plants specified for future use.
2. Apply artificial loads or provide test arrangements to simulate the full range of operating conditions
and duties of the systems.
3. Demonstrate by measured tests that noise criteria indicated have been achieved.
4. Air circulation and distribution shall be demonstrated after the systems have been balanced to provide
the correct air quantities. Smoke tests may be required at the discretion of the CA to prove
distribution.
T. Authority witnessing and testing
1. As part of the commissioning procedure the Contractor shall arrange for all necessary checks and
witnessing by the Local Authority, Government Offices, Statutory Authorities, etc.
2. Such witnessed tests and signed certificates of acceptance shall be obtained.
U. Fine-tuning
1. During the 12 months after practical completion and in consultation with the CA undertake to:
a. Fine tune the HVAC systems, which shall include;
1) Checking that all space air temperatures and humidities are being maintained within the
agreed tolerances and making the necessary adjustments where necessary.
2) Checking all supply and extract air volumes and air distribution within the spaces are correct
and adjust as necessary.
3) Checking fresh air volumes and room CO2 levels are being maintained and adjust as
necessary.
4) Checking water systems temperature control is being maintained within the agreed tolerances
and making the necessary adjustments where necessary.
5) Checking water systems flow rates levels are being maintained and adjust as necessary.
6) Revising all BMS time schedules to match the building occupiers’ operational requirements.
7) Incorporate all plant and system settings within the O & M following the fine tuning.
b. Assess the need for fine tuning of the installations
c. Ensure the requirements for fine tuning are incorporated in the commissioning programme
d. Ensure that fine tuning activities are programmed, planned in advance and agreed with the CA
and employer prior to commencement
e. Arrange that the relevant parties are retained and appointed to provide input to fine tuning
activities
f. Ensure that fine tuning activities are planned with regard to the health and safety of occupants
and such that any disturbance to them is minimised
g. Provide a mechanism by which the employer can provide feedback on the performance of the
building both before and after fine tuning
h. Attend meetings as requested by the CA to deal with issues arising from fine-tuning of the Works.
2. The costs for fine-tuning and adjustment of the Works during the 12 months after practical
completion shall be included in the contract price.
3. Allow for the number of visits as stated elsewhere during the 12 months after practical completion.
V. General requirements for HVAC services
1. In addition to the requirements stated elsewhere, the Contractor shall perform and record the
following:-
a. Test all equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, checking rotation, revs,
running current on each phase of electrical motors, etc., and recording.
b. The ventilation and air conditioning systems shall be run without air filters to disperse all dust, etc.,
and commission the system before the introduction of the Client's filters.
c. Check air volumes, sound levels, speeds, running currents and pressures generated of fans.
d. Check hydraulic pressure drops across all items of equipment.
e. Check air on/off, water on/off temperatures to all heater batteries, cooler batteries, circuits, boilers
and other relevant plant.
W. Air distribution systems
1. Preliminary checks, pre-commissioning checks, commissioning procedures, setting to work, regulation

and measurement of air flow shall be in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code A and as defined
in BSRIA Application Guide AG 3/89.3 Commissioning air systems.
X. Variable air volume systems
1. Where variable air volume systems are to be commissioned, these shall be carried out with full
simulated supply air volumes. To achieve this all variable air volume terminal units shall be supplied
with a device, ferrule or control mechanism which shall override the controlling thermostat and cause
the unit to operate at its design maximum volume as stated elsewhere.
2. Static pressure readings, at design supply volume, shall be taken and recorded for every variable
volume terminal unit.
3. Where the VAV air supply and extract fans duties are regulated by speed change, the Contractor shall
arrange for the manufacturer of the variable speed control equipment, the controls system specialist,
the commissioning specialist and CA to attend site together to ensure that the fan duties are matched
over their range.
4. Where VAV terminal units include for the installation of an integral adjustable volume controller, fitted
after the main unit then the volume shall be set in accordance with the schedule prior to being fitted
within the VAV terminal unit.
5. In addition the volume regulator calibration shall be checked, by measuring of differential static
pressures across the unit and the reading of the resultant supply air flow from the manufacturers
pressure/air flow characteristic charts.
6. Air circulation and distribution shall be demonstrated after the systems have been balanced by the
Contractor to provide the specified air quantities. Pitot tube readings shall be taken in all main and
branch ductwork together with terminal point readings. Smoke tests may be required to prove
distribution within enclosures and these shall be at the discretion of the CA.
7. All controls associated with variable air volume system shall be demonstrated and checked at full, 2/3
and 1/3 partial load operation. In addition all mixing damper systems shall have minimum fresh air,
maximum fresh air, and mixed conditions demonstrated.
8. Spot checks shall be made in the presence of the CA to ensure correct operation of the terminal units,
including air temperature and pressure checks.
Y. Refrigeration systems
1. Procedures for refrigeration systems shall be in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code R and
manufacturers’ instructions for the following: a. Use and handling of refrigerants
a. Pressure and leak testing
b. Evacuation and dehydration
c. Charging and lubrication
d. Preliminary checks
e. Setting to work and adjusting
f. Apparatus and instruments
2. In the presence of the CA show the correct operation of the refrigeration equipment including:
a. Air on/off dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for the cooling coil for steps of control together
with suction and discharge temperatures/pressures on the refrigerant side recorded against the
prevailing ambient conditions and recorded room conditions.
b. Chilled water flow and return temperatures (which ever applies) recorded against the prevailing
ambient conditions and recorded room conditions.
3. Air cooled condensers and water cooling towers shall be demonstrated to show that correct
refrigerant condensing temperatures and water on/off temperatures can be achieved against outdoor
dry bulb and wet bulb air temperatures respectively
Z. Ductwork air leakage testing
1. Air leakage testing shall be in accordance with DW 144 and procedures set out in DW 143. Tests shall
be to the pressures recommended in DW 144 for the classification of the selected ductwork.
2. Where indicated by the CA low pressure ductwork shall be tested using the DW 143 testing provisions
for medium pressure ductwork.
3. The CA shall select at random a maximum of 10% of the duct system to be witnessed by the CA for air
leakage.
4. All high pressure ducts shall be air leakage tested.
5. Tests shall be to the pressures recommended in DW 144 for the classification of the selected ductwork.
6. Tests shall be carried out as the Works proceed and prior to the application of insulation.
7. In the event of test failure of the randomly selected section, the CA shall have the right to select two
further sections at random for testing. Where successive failures are identified there shall be the right
to require the Contractor to apply remedial attention to the complete ductwork system and carry re-
testing of the complete ductwork system at no cost to the contract.
8. The Contractor shall provide documented evidence of the calculations used to arrive at the allowable
loss for the section to be tested and the results of the test shall be witnessed and signed.
AA. Pipework pressure testing
1. Comply with the procedures given in HVCA Guide to good practice for site pressure testing of
pipework and ensure all safety precautions are adopted.
2. When a section of any installation is completed and ready for testing advise the CA giving seven
working days’ notice for the CA to witness such tests. Witnessing shall be at the discretion of the CA.
3. Provide a blanked connection to accommodate a check gauge in addition to the gauge used for test
purposes.
4. All buried or concealed pipework shall be tested before any permanent covering is applied.
5. Pipework installations shall be hydraulically tested after erection and before thermal insulation is
applied. For welded mains every weld shall be hammered while under pressure and the test period
may be extended to allow this activity to be undertaken.
6. Test section by section as the work proceeds.
7. The term ‘pipework installation’ shall include valves, heat exchangers and controls etc, subject to the
system pressure when in operation.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all valves, ancillaries and equipment are suitable
for the test gauge pressure.
9. Pressure testing of water pipework systems shall be carried out generally in accordance with BS 6880-
3.
10. Test pressures generally shall be twice the working pressure up to and including working pressures of
280 kPa and thereafter 1.5 times the working pressure plus 140 kPa.
11. Tests pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure or visible
evidence of leakage.
BB. Pipe Cleaning and Water Treatment
1. General requirements
a. Employ a water treatment specialist, as agreed with the CA, for the analysis, design, supply,
installation and operation of any system cleaning and chemical treatment process.
b. Ensure the water treatment and pipe cleaning processes comply with statutory authority, COSHH
Regulations and health and safety requirements.
c. Pre-commission cleaning of heating, cooling and condenser pipework systems shall be carried out
in accordance with the latest edition of BSRIA Application Guide Precommission cleaning of
pipework systems BG 29/2012.
d. The recommendations of BSRIA BG50/2013 Water treatment for closed Heating and Cooling
Systems shall be consulted in the selection of chemicals for corrosion control.
1) The Contractor shall before commencement of the Works:
2) Provide a detailed method statement for the chemical cleaning and ongoing water quality
treatment for the water systems provided under the contract. The method statement shall
include the maximum agreed Pseudomonas (cfu/l) and TVC (cfu/l) levels. These levels shall be
agreed with the CA prior to addition of any water filling of the systems
3) Prepare drawings that show the detailed provisions for incorporating the cleaning facilities.
The drawings shall show the details of all temporary facilities required
4) Determine the potential for partial or phased cleaning of a system and locate suitable
isolating valves to prevent cross contamination
5) Provide details of the method by which flushing velocities are to be achieved, ie pumping
requirements and motor power requirement for temporary pumping facilities
6) Agree witnessing and reporting stages for confirmation that system cleaning is being
conducted in accordance with the agreed procedure, and that the results are acceptable
7) Obtain approval from the local Water Authority for the disposal of contaminated flushing
water, and in particular, for the disposal of cleaning chemicals. If approval cannot be obtained
make preparations for removal of the waste by other means.
8) During the fabrication and installation of pipework systems, the installer shall comply with the
recommended Codes of Practice and take sufficient care to prevent the ingress of extraneous
matter.
9) Ensure that the flushing and chemical cleaning procedures are planned so that the whole
operation is carried out as a continuous process, ie there are no delays during the flushing
stage, or between the flushing and chemical cleaning stages. Chemical cleaning shall be
carried out immediately after the pre-flush.
10) Chemical cleaning shall not be undertaken unless the system has been pressure tested and
thoroughly clean-water flushed to the satisfaction of the cleaning specialist.
e. Notify manufacturers and suppliers of equipment of proposed system cleaning and chemical
treatment processes. Establish for all equipment requirements of any particular cleaning and
chemical treatment process due to size of waterways or materials used.
f. All chemicals for system cleaning, corrosion inhibition and bacteria control shall be selected by a
water treatment and chemical cleaning specialist and agreed with the CA prior to commencement
of the Works.
g. Maintain progressive records of a staged cleaning process.
h. It is the responsibility of the installer to advise the water treatment specialist of the materials used
in the construction of the plant and systems.
i. Comply with the Water Supply Regulations in undertaking cleaning and flushing activities.
2. Inspection and witnessing
a. The Contractor shall ensure that inspection and witnessing of the cleaning process shall be
conducted as the work is in progress and shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition
of BSRIA Application Guide Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems BG 29/2012.
b. The Contractor shall advise the CA at least five working days in advance (unless stated otherwise
elsewhere) of flushing and cleaning activities so procedures can be witnessed at the discretion of
the CA.
3. Water samples
a. Carry out all necessary tests to ensure that cleaning and chemical treatments are operating as
required.
b. All water samples taken for chemical and microbiological analysis shall be submitted to an
independent laboratory. The laboratory used shall have NAMAS accreditation or equivalent for
the tests to be undertaken.
c. Use sterile containers to take samples.
d. Results shall be submitted to the CA for review, if poor results are obtained, then remedial action
shall be taken at no additional cost to the contract. Under this condition tests shall continue until
stability of the system(s) is proved.
e. Water samples from agreed locations shall be taken throughout the cleaning process to prove the
quality and chemical and microbiological stability of the systems. Water samples shall be taken
from representative system extremities and low points.
f. Prior to commencement of the Works on site obtain an analysis of mains water taken from the site
supply point and ensure the results are typical for the site location with the local water authority.
Submit a sample of water to the water treatment specialist.
4. Mains water
a. An adequate supply of mains water should be made available for flushing.
b. Back-flow protection in compliance with the Water Supply Regulations shall be provided between
the incoming mains connection and systems fill point.
c. All temporary mains shall be cleaned and chlorinated in accordance with BS EN 806 before being
used for system filling.
d. Where an adequate mains supply is not available or the quality of the mains water is not
satisfactory, a biocide dosed, temporary supply of fill water to reduce risk of bacterial
contamination shall be provided
e. Chlorine dioxide units or alternative shall be installed on all incoming MCW. Units to be installed
and commissioned early in the contract to treat the water coming on site during the HVAC
installation process.
f. The chlorination shall be completed before the filling/flushing process begins. All water used for
water treatment exercise shall be conditioned prior to use. Ensure all water used for
flushing/testing and cleaning are free from micro bacterial contamination.
5. Pseudomonas and closed systems
a. Water samples shall be taken from the proposed source of water for testing, flushing and final
filling before the Works commence and shall be tested for Pseudomonas bacteria. The laboratory
used shall have NAMAS accreditation or equivalent for the tests to be undertaken. The test results
shall be submitted to the CA before commencement of the Works.
b. On Pseudomonas being detected, a method statement detailing testing, sourcing and treatment
regimes shall be agreed with the CA in time for the procedures to be incorporated within the
construction programme.
c. If Pseudomonas is detected the Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary water
treatment plant on site for initial filling and hydraulic testing. The plant shall be maintained until
practical completion.
d. Before practical completion the installer shall commission a final water analysis report based on
samples taken in the presence of the CA. The report shall demonstrate that the systems do not
contain any microbiological activity and are in accordance with the water treatment specialist’s
recommendations. If microbiological activity is present, the systems shall be retreated and tested
until clear.
6. Preliminary checks
a. Prior to the cleaning and chemical treatment process, the Contractor shall ensure that:
1) No damage can occur to any item of plant or equipment due to the cleaning and/or chemical
treatment process or blockage due to cleaning. Equipment or fittings that will restrict the
cleaning procedures or will be subject to damage shall be either bypassed or removed, and
the flow and return connections cross connected unless otherwise stated. The extent of these
measures and any others that could restrict effective circulation shall be discussed and agreed
with the CA prior to carrying out the cleaning process.
2) All foreign matter is removed.
3) Certified pressure tests have been undertaken to the satisfaction of the CA.
4) Chemicals to be used are compatible with system materials and equipment and approved.
5) All necessary temporary by-passes are provided.
6) All drains provided have been tested and approved together with any associated pumping
equipment.
7) Adequately sized drains are fitted at all low points that cannot be emptied via the main drains.
8) Temporary strainers and filters are installed as required for removal of solids during the
cleaning and/or chemical treatment process.
9) Dirt pockets are installed at low points to facilitate removal of solids and are complete with
drain valve to pipework size.
10) All automatic/manual air vents are fully commissioned.
11) All necessary electrical supplies are available to undertake the Works.
12) Dead legs more than 3 pipe diameters in length are looped to allow effective cleaning.
Connections shall be of a similar bore to the pipework.
13) Adequate and safe means of access is provided to the pipework system during the cleaning
and chemical treatment process.
14) Circulation has been demonstrated and approval obtained on all parts of the system.
7. Disposal of chemicals
a. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permissions from the local Water Authority before any
chemical is discharged into public foul or surface water drains and comply with the requirements
of all necessary legislation. Provide documented evidence to the CA of all necessary permissions
prior to commencement of the Works.
b. The Contractor shall make applications to all necessary authorities and provide details of the
chemicals to be discharged, the maximum quantity, the maximum rate of discharge, the
temperature, and the proposed date on which the discharge will take place.
c. Where required by the local water authority, provide effluent tanks for storage of all waste
products of cleaning and chemical cleaning processes.
d. Upon local water authority approval, either dispose to drain of all waste products after neutralizing
to the required standard or ensure authorised disposal at registered sites.
8. Treatment prior to system handover
a. Prior to handover the Contractor shall be responsible for regular monitoring of water quality and
ensuring the system water is circulated and if necessary further dosed until the system is handed
over and put into normal use.
b. Should the Contractor for any reason, partially or completely drain down the system, it is essential
that the CA is informed and the water treatment specialist is advised so that the chemical
concentrations can be checked and if necessary, a further treatment introduced or remedial action
taken before the final commissioning of the systems.
c. Prior to handover the water in each system shall be analysed to confirm that the correct condition
and chemical concentration has been achieved, before a completion certificate is issued.
9. Initial flushing of pipework
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly flushing with treated mains cold water to a
satisfactory quality, via a break tank, all pipework to remove traces of loose dirt, scale and
extraneous matter, prior to pre-commission cleaning and placing into operation the various
pipework systems.
b. Flushing of water systems shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition of
c. BSRIA Application Guide Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems BG 29/2012.
d. When all sections of a system have been flushed, the installer shall notify the CA for the
cleanliness of the systems to be witnessed.
10. Pre-commission flushing and chemical cleaning
a. The Contractor after completing the initial flushing of the heating, chilled water and condenser
water pipework services to the satisfaction of the CA, shall arrange for the water treatment
specialist to carry out the pre-commission flushing and chemical cleaning of the pipework
systems.
b. Pre-commission flushing and chemical cleaning procedures shall be in accordance with the latest
edition of BSRIA Application Guide Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems BG 29/2012.
11. Condenser water pipework systems
a. All condenser water services pipework systems shall be sterilized by a water treatment specialist in
accordance with BS 806 and the requirements of the local water authority.
b. Prior to sterilization ensure the system shall be flushed, cleaned and drained.
c. The CA may choose to witness this operation and the installer shall give at least 2 days’ notice
prior to the commencement of any sterilization process.
d. Following sterilization submit samples for microbiological analysis to an independent laboratory.

The laboratory used shall have NAMAS accreditation or equivalent for the tests to be undertaken.
Results shall be submitted to the CA, if poor results are obtained, then remedial action shall be
taken at no additional cost to the contract.
e. Immediately prior to handover, retake samples and submit for analysis and report. Where
necessary repeat the sterilization immediately prior to handover.
f. All necessary attendance and facilities shall be provided to enable the water treatment specialist to
carry out the sterilization process:
g. Provide a suitable electrical supply for the operation of associated equipment.
h. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure all components of the system(s) are completely
sterilized.
i. Ensure unrestricted access to all draw-off points during the whole of the process.
j. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all tanks are cleaned, the systems have been
flushed with clean water to remove all debris, refilled and pressure tested before the water
treatment specialist attends site.
k. The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the importance of carrying out a thorough initial cleaning
of all systems using mains cold water from an independent source to avoid the possibility of re-
chlorination.
l. The Contractor shall ensure:
1) Deposits of iron oxide or other foreign materials such as brick dust, cement, etc., all of which
allows the "hide-out" of bacteria in pipework systems have been thoroughly flushed out.
2) Cooling tower tanks are cleaned of extraneous matter and left in a thoroughly clean condition.
3) The installer shall comply with the latest Water Regulations and HSE L8
Legionnaires’ disease: The control of legionells bacteria in water systems:
Approved Code of Practice and guidance (ACOP)
4) The installer shall ensure that:
a) Equal flow occurs through each cooling tower tank on a multi tank coupled installation.
b) Pipes installed to falls to avoid air locks.
m. The installer shall ensure compliance with HSE L8 Legionnaires’ disease: The control of legionella
bacteria in water systems: Approved Code of Practice and guidance (ACOP)
n. The installer shall provide in the building maintenance manual details of the methodology
required to maintain the mains and domestic water quality in accordance with the requirements of
HSE L8 Legionnaires’ disease: The control of legionella bacteria in water systems: Approved Code
of Practice and guidance (ACOP).
o. Should the installer have any queries relating to the above provisions, these shall be discussed and
approved by the CA prior to commencement of the Works.
12. Dosing pots
a. Dosing pots shall be a fabricated welded steel container manufactured with welded end caps and
complete with:
1) Air cock
2) Conical filling funnel
3) Non-return valve at the base
4) Flow and return valves including connections
5) Drain valve`
b. The dosing pot shall be suitable for the system operating pressures.
c. Dosing pot shall be installed between the flow and return lines in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure satisfactory mixing of the concentrated chemical
solution with the total water capacities of the systems. The unit shall be located in a convenient,
fully accessible position, either fixed by wall brackets or suitably supported on a mild steel angle
iron stand from plantroom floor
d. The dosage pots shall be of the following sizes unless stated otherwise:
1) System volume up to 2000 litres 3.5 litre dosing pot
2) System volume more than 2000 litres 13.5 litre dosing pot
13. Connections between new and existing systems
a. To protect water quality when systems are extended or modified, newly installed pipework shall be
cleaned and treated before being connected to existing pipework.
b. Pre-commission cleaning of heating and cooling pipework systems shall be carried out in
accordance with the latest edition of BSRIA Application Guide Pre-commission cleaning of
pipework systems BG 29/2012
c. The water quality in the existing system shall be checked by the installer’s water treatment
specialist and the results submitted to the CA prior to the commencement of the Works. Water
sampling points shall be agreed with the CA.
d. Cleaning and treatment of existing systems (or new systems incorporating old pipework) shall be
advised by the Contractor’s water treatment and chemical cleaning specialist and agreed with the
CA prior to the commencement of the Works.
e. Any necessary remedial measures shall be agreed with the CA and undertaken before connecting
to new plant or equipment. The Contractor shall allow adequate time so as not to delay the
programme.
f. If a system has been previously dosed with chemicals establish the type and for what purpose.
Ensure that new chemicals are compatible and there is no interference or reaction between
chemicals or system materials.
g. Final connections shall only be made when satisfactory water analysis results have been achieved
for both existing and newly installed pipework. Water analysis records for both existing and new
systems shall be submitted to the CA prior to connection
14. Temporary pump sets
a. Temporary pumps shall be provided to circulate chemicals and achieve flushing velocities in new
circuits which do not have their own pumps or where the system pumps cannot achieve the
flushing velocities required.
b. The temporary pump set shall be sized so that it can achieve the flushing velocities in accordance
with the latest edition of BSRIA Application Guide Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems
BG 29/2012 or the design velocity plus 10%, whichever is the greater. The flushing velocity shall
be selected based on the largest pipe size in the system or circuit to be flushed.
c. Locations for temporary pumps shall be agreed with the CA and shall be away from emergency
exit routes but within reach of electrical, water supply and drain facilities. All temporary pumps
sets shall have surrounding protection barriers, and shall be located in bunds to assist water
collection in the event of a leak.
15. Preventative maintenance
a. Include for the preventative maintenance of water treated services during the 12 months defects
liability period (unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
b. Provide monthly visits for one full year by a fully qualified chemist to undertake the following:
1) Review water analysis records, correspondence and reports since previous visit
2) Test water samples on site for:
3) Hardness
4) All inhibitors
5) Dissolved solids
6) PH
7) Total alkalinity
8) Carry out a micro-biological analysis of water in each system
9) Check performance of water treatment plant and testing equipment on site
10) Submit a written report to the employer and CA
c. The preventative maintenance works shall also include:
1) Drain down, manually clean and refill cold water storage tanks (twice per annum).
2) Manual cleaning and chlorination of water cooling towers including chlorination of condenser
water systems (twice per annum).
16. Employer training
a. Provide a complete training programme for the Employer’s staff to include but not limited to:
1) Methods of basic water testing
2) Explanation of results obtained
3) Actions to be taken on test results
CC. Automatic Controls
1. Automatic control systems shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning
Code C.
2. The Contractor will be required to demonstrate every function and interlock relating to the automatic
controls. This demonstration shall be conducted under simulated occupancy and shall include but not
be limited to:-
a. All automatic temperature control functions including high limit and safety cut-outs.
b. All safety devices and 'position under failure settings' such as normally closed damper positions;
normally open valves; gas cut off valves; isolation of ventilation plant etc., shall be demonstrated.
c. All automatic smoke detectors mounted within ductwork and their associated interlocks shall be
demonstrated including the 'plant available for use' facility offered to the Fire Officer in
emergency situations.
d. All optimiser and time clock energising of plant shall be demonstrated and set to the values stated
in the specification. Demonstration of any optimiser shall include the switching of all required
plant during 'non occupation periods' under simulated frost and internal condensation conditions.
e. All controls associated with the fan coil terminal units. Spot checks shall be made by the CA to
ensure correct operation of the fan coil units including temperature, volume and pressure checks.
3. At the completion of the Contractor’s commissioning and prior to any final approval from the CA,
record the simultaneous internal and external dry and wet bulb temperatures. Should the contract
programme determine that such temperature recording tests occur during partial load conditions then
the Contractor will be required to return to site and repeat the tests. This rechecking shall occur during
the months of January/February and July/August unless otherwise notified by the CA.
DD. BMS witnessing
1. The Contractor shall facilitate by demonstration the following for witnessing by the CA or nominated
representative:
a. The BMS hardware is installed in accordance with the requirements as stated elsewhere
b. Verification of operator software and associated graphics
c. The control of main and/or critical items of plant along with a random sample of other points
d. Points witnessing:
1) If less than 300 points demonstration of all points
2) Between 300 and 1000 points demonstration of 50% with a minimum of 300
3) If more than 1000 points demonstration of 20% with a minimum of 500 points
2. The CA reserves the right to witness 100% of the points if the failure rate is greater than 5%.
3. A sample of specific functions as directed by the CA e.g. 10% of alarms and 10% of data logging
4. The operation of several identical items of plant in detail with the others witnessed on a random basis
5. Verification of the system security access
6. Verification that all safety-related functions perform to that specified, eg plant shutdown on fire
condition
7. Verification that all plant restarts according to that specified after building power failure and local
power failure
8. Verification that power meter data-points match the meters.
9. Ensure that trend logs are used when witnessing points in order to monitor the performance of control
actions
As part of the witnessing strategy the Contractor shall verify the following:
a. Handover of all operating manuals and system documentation.
b. Handover of backup copies of software.
c. The completion of any specified system operator training
EE. Electrical Services Associated with the HVAC Works
1. The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested as required by BS 7671 and shall then be fully
commissioned and left working.
2. The Contractor shall issue an electrical installation certificate as required by BS 7671 at the practical
completion of the Works
3. The testing of elements under the various sections of the specification may be required to be carried
out in parts, or as a whole.
4. All tests shall be made in the presence of the CA who shall have been duly notified of the Contractor’s
intentions. Provide triplicate copies of test certificates covering all tests carried out on the completed
installation.
5. Following the satisfactory conclusion of final inspections and tests on completed sections of the
Works, the Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical installation and leave it in
full working order.
6. For the purpose of this specification, the term 'commissioning' shall be deemed to include:
a. The energising of electrical distribution circuits and equipment that have previously been
inspected, tested, and found satisfactory and capable of being energised with complete safety.
b. The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in accordance with the
directions of the CA or, failing such directions, in accordance with sound engineering practice.
c. The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including that supplied and
installed under other contracts, as detailed elsewhere.
d. The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the carrying out, where
required, of further tests and the making of all necessary adjustments so as to obtain optimum
performance.
3.28 INSTRUCTION OF EMPLOYER’S STAFF
A. At a time to be agreed with the CA and prior to practical completion instruct the Employer's staff in the
use, correct operation and general maintenance of the Works and be satisfied that the staff are competent
to take over the installation on completion.
B. Submit to the CA for approval a detailed training programme and method statement for the training of the
Employer’s staff 12 weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) before commencement of training.
C. Include adequate periods to instruct the Employer’s staff in the operating and maintenance of the Works.
Submit to the CA for approval a detailed training programme and method statement for the training of the
Employer’s staff.
D. During such periods of instruction undertake and be responsible for the correct operation and
maintenance of the installations.
E. Employ the services of relevant specialists and suppliers necessary for this purpose and provide each
person with a comprehensive set of teaching notes and diagrams.
F. F. All the associated training equipment required by the trainer(s) to enable the training to be
demonstrated effectively shall be provided.
G. For all instruction periods maintain training records which shall be submitted to the CA on completion. All
attendee names shall be recorded and signatures obtained from all attendees confirming they have
understood the training given. A schedule of names shall be provided within the operating and
maintenance documentation.
H. All health and safety issues relating to the Works shall be brought to the attention of all attendees.
I. All attendees shall be provided with the appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
J. ‘Formal’ presentations shall be carried out over ‘half day’ periods.
K. As an indication, the training for operating staff should include, but not be limited to:
1. Building services system scope (demonstrated with the aid of schematics and/or other drawings/visual
aids). To include an overview of the purpose and normal operating functions of the Works and
explaining the philosophy and method of control used.
2. Demonstration and training (by controls Specialist) of the building control system.
3. An electronic projector style ‘walk through’ of the operation and maintenance manuals, highlighting
important areas of health and safety together with all other items of importance.
4. Highlighting, demonstrating and providing delegate experience in all maintenance procedures

identified in the O&M Manuals.
5. Physical tour(s) of inspection of the Works illustrating aspects covered in the ‘classroom’ and the
location of essential isolating points of all incoming services.
6. Explaining and illustrating all operator alarms, their possible causes and actions required.
7. Explaining all known and typical fault scenarios which are capable of being recognised and/ or rectified
by the operators.
8. Identifying and demonstrating all safety equipment and interlocks including all interlocks with other
suppliers’ systems /equipment.
9. Identifying the noise levels in the various areas and highlighting the need for any protection required.
10. Specifying and illustrating any hazards associated with the Works and the methods employed to deal
with them.
11. Providing instruction on the correct operation of plant items and the safe limits of their operation.
12. Explaining the mode of operation and sequence of events resulting from both power failure and fire
alarm conditions.
13. Demonstrating any alarms and explaining they’re meaning and possible causes.
14. Highlighting any associated hazardous maintenance materials which may require special disposal
considerations.
15. Highlighting the signs, cause and effect of known/ possible breakdown or fault conditions.
16. Indicate and demonstrate (where practicable) arrangements made for access and removal of specific
items of equipment or key large or heavy subassemblies / components.
17. Demonstration of the safe day to day running and maintenance of all systems, plant and equipment.
18. Providing sufficient expertise to address delegate questions.
19. The training for the operation of the controls, monitoring or BMS installations shall include as a
minimum:
a. Initial training at the works of the controls supplier including hands on experience of equipment
and software similar to the installation.
b. Instruction on the procedures for testing and routine inspection of sensors and actuators to
enable the operator to assess the nature of faults and extent of remedial action required.
c. The provision of all appropriate reference and training manuals.
d. Complete initial instruction prior to commissioning of the installed system.
e. Site instruction on the installed system.
L. All costs associated with the instruction of the Employer’s staff and required attendance following practical
completion shall be included in the contract price.
3.29 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Great importance will be placed upon quality, accuracy, clarity and completeness of the record documents
and upon these being made available promptly.
B. Practical completion will not be granted unless an approved copy of the record documentation has been
prepared, and is available for handover to the Employer.
C. Comply with the requirements of the Health & Safety Regulations in providing the appropriate input to the
health and safety file for the Works.
D. Comply with the requirements of the Authorities having jurisdiction in providing all necessary
documentation and information.
E. Provide record documentation, as detailed elsewhere, to include but not limited to:
1. Record drawings and schedules.
2. Plant room and switch room drawings, schedules and schematics.
3. Operating and maintenance manuals.
4. Blank maintenance logs.
5. Building log book information.
F. Ensure record documents clearly record the arrangements of the various sections of the Works as actually
installed and identify and locate all component parts.
G. The record documents shall set out the extent to which maintenance and servicing is required and how, in
detail, it should be executed. Sufficient, readily accessible and proper information shall be provided to
enable spares and replacements to be ordered.
H. Correlate record documents so that the terminology and the references used are consistent with those
used in the physical identification of the component parts of the installations.
I. Demonstrate as required throughout the execution of the Works that complete and accurate records are
being maintained and that the record documents are being progressively compiled as the work on site
proceeds.
3.30 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record drawings of the complete Works shall be provided at practical completion.
B. Record drawings of the final "as installed" layouts shall be issued in draft form to the CA for examination 4
weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) prior to the testing and commissioning period to allow checking
for accuracy.
C. Record drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD format as agreed with the CA prior to production of the
drawings.
D. All drawings shall be suitably layered, with different services on each layer. A detailed list of layers, external
references or equivalent (if used) and list of files shall be provided with the discs. If the drawings were
produced from CAD drawings provided by the CA, the same layering system shall be used. E. The drawings
shall be produced in full size metric units.
E. Once approved, the complete set of record drawings shall be revised as necessary to incorporate testing
and commissioning data where applicable, and the final set(s) of record drawings and computer discs shall
be handed over at practical completion.
F. Issue at practical completion the complete approved package of record drawings in the following numbers:
1. CAD disk(s) 2 number (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) sets of complete record drawings
2. White paper prints 2 number (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) sets of complete record drawings
G. Each CD shall be labelled and CD cases shall be labelled identifying project title, issue date and index of
contents.
H. Valve charts, electrical distribution charts in panels and the like, shall be issued for examination at agreed
dates to allow adequate time for manufacture and installation prior to practical completion.
I. Where portions of the work are to be concealed, draft copies of record drawings shall be supplied to the
CA before the work is concealed in order to facilitate checking and examination.
J. The record documents shall be correlated so that the terminology and the numerical and/or other
references used therein are consistent with and similar to those used in the physical identification of
component parts of the Works.
K. Each record drawing shall show the following information:
1. The name of the contract and, where appropriate, the zone or floor designation
2. Description of drawing, drawing reference and scale
3. Name and address of the Contractor and the Engineer.
L. The completed drawings shall be signed as record drawings.
M. Each record drawing shall be endorsed with the words 'Record Drawing' in the bottom right hand corner
adjacent to the title block.
N. Mark up ‘as installed’ details weekly and before any work is hidden from view.
O. Failure to undertake the above procedure for the preparation of record drawings and leaving the
production of such drawings too late in the construction/commissioning period will result in practical
completion not being granted by the CA.
3.31 PLANT AND SWITCH ROOM DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS
A. Provide good quality plant and switch room drawings, schedules, schematics and instructions and hang in
the respective plant room or any other appropriate location or where directed by the CA.
B. Protect surfaces of such information by pressure lamination and hang using suitable fixings and provide
backboards if necessary.
C. A sample shall be submitted for approval prior to commencing production.
D. Provide information as stated elsewhere and include:
1. All information required under statutory or other regulations
2. Location of all incoming service isolating and metering facilities
3. Emergency operating procedures including details for emergency call out service
4. First aid instructions for treatment of persons after electrical shock
5. Schematic drawings of installations showing identification and duties of equipment
6. Controls schematics
7. Valve schedules showing reference, type, location, application/service and normal operating position
E. Prior to being fixed, plant and switch room drawings, schedules, schematics and instructions shall be
submitted for review by the CA. The review procedure shall be as for record drawings as stated elsewhere
and all items shall be fixed prior to practical completion.
3.32 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Employ an independent company who specialises in the preparation of operation and maintenance
manuals to provide the manuals in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
B. Submit details of the proposed specialist to the CA for approval prior to commencement of the Works.
C. 12 weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) before the contract completion date provide a draft copy of
the operating and maintenance manual to the CA for comment.
D. Retain a copy of all the delivered record documentation for at least one year after practical completion
(unless stated otherwise elsewhere). If requested by the Employer or CA during this period, provide
additional copies subject to a charge.
E. Undertake the following activities with respect to the preparation of the operation and maintenance
manual:
1. Liaise with the Health & Safety Officer and any other parties associated with the production of the
Health and Safety File, to ensure that the required information is complete and that the method of
presentation and terms used are consistent.
2. Liaise with designated members of the design team to obtain all information necessary to convey a
thorough understanding of the design intent and operating principles of the installations.
3. Liaise with designated Contractors and specialist Sub-contractors to obtain all necessary details of the
installed systems and equipment to enable safe and proper operation and maintenance.
4. Liaise with specialist equipment suppliers as necessary to ensure that clear operating and maintenance
instructions are included in the manual.
5. Prepare additional written, diagrammatic and/or pictorial information as necessary for the operation
and maintenance of the HVAC engineering services installations.
6. Re-draft and restructure information provided by others as necessary so as to ensure consistency with
other parts of the manual and other sections of the Health and Safety File.
7. Submit periodic reports to the CA on the progress of the preparation of operation and maintenance
manuals.
8. Collate all the information into a coordinated, indexed and cross-referenced document.
9. Provide all stationery, printed material and binders required for the production of the draft and final
editions of the operation and maintenance manuals.
10. Correct any errors or omissions in the manual.
F. Operation and Maintenance Manual requirements:
1. All documentation shall be in English.
2. All units of measurement shall be metric, conforming to the SI system.
3. The text of descriptive sections shall be concise and complete avoiding possible ambiguity or
misunderstanding. All information shall be pertinent to the specific installations. Irrelevant material or
material of a general nature shall not be acceptable. Where generic standard clauses are used as the
basis for certain parts of the manual, they shall be edited to ensure that all text is relevant to the
Works.
4. Jargon shall be avoided. All new terms shall be defined when first introduced. Abbreviations shall
only be used if they have been defined or their meaning is clear from the text.
5. The imperative mode shall be used for instructions regarding operation, maintenance, disassembly etc.
6. Illustrations, drawings and diagrams incorporated into the manual shall be easily read in conjunction
with the relevant text.
G. All aspects of the manual shall comply with relevant requirements of the Health & Safety Regulations for
the provision of information for the Health and Safety File.
H. The operating and maintenance manual shall be co-ordinated with all other manuals produced for the
project by other Contractors, to ensure that the format, layout and contents are consistent.
I. Include recommendations within the operating and maintenance manuals that the installation be
inspected and tested in accordance with BS 7671 and include a recommended maximum period before re
test based on the advice given in BS 7671 guidance notes.
J. Where appropriate, the maintenance procedures and frequencies detailed in the manual shall be in
accordance with details provided by the manufacturer for specific items of equipment. Where specific
requirements are not pertinent, the procedures and frequencies shall be as recommended in Standard
Maintenance Specifications for Engineering Services in Buildings.
K. Care shall be exercised to ensure that maintenance procedures and frequencies described in
manufacturers’ printed details are accurately reflected in the text of the manual.
L. The manual supplier shall identify, from the CA, the intended maintenance strategy for the Works and the
level of technical competence and user ability of the personnel likely to be employed. The manual shall be
written in a style to suit the abilities of all users. Where necessary, prepare separate sections to suit the
following levels of competence:
1. Non-technical – e.g. building manager or caretaker requiring simple directions for basic operations.
2. General technical – with broad-based maintenance skills required for routine maintenance, inspections
etc. and detailed analysis of system operation.
3. Specialist – expert in individual fields and with respect to particular items of equipment.
M. The manual shall have an alphabetical index or indexes. The indexing and cross-referencing in other parts
of the manual shall be arranged to provide easy access to required information.
N. Content and layout; unless an alternative format and contents are agreed with the CA prior to issue of the
draft document, the manual shall be arranged as follows:
1. Front cover and fly sheet
a. Details to be shown on front cover and spine of all volumes:
b. Document title – Operating and Maintenance Manual
c. Employer name and logo
d. Premises name
e. Services referred to in the manual
f. For multiple volumes, provide description of content
g. Title page
1) Premises name and address (authenticated postal address, phone, e-mail and fax number etc.)
2) Full name and address of employer
3) Date of completion and handover of services to employer
4) Date of issue
5) Authors manual reference number
6) Name and contact details including postal address of manuals authors.
h. Contents and Index
1) Contents list for the entire manual
2) Master list of main headings in each section for all manuals (for cross referencing purposes); a
copy of this contents list shall also be included in the health and safety file.
3) Detailed contents for the particular volume, structured to detail main headings with detailed
contents of the said heading with page numbers.
4) Indexes for electronic copies of manuals shall be provided with hyperlinks.
5) Comprehensive index for all sections of the manual
i. Section 1, General Information and Introductory overview
1) Full name, address, telephone number, facsimile number, website and email address for the
entire design team
2) Full name, address, telephone number, facsimile number, website and email address for the
main and all Sub-contractor including any specialist
3) Any limitations on the use of the manual
4) Record of amendments to manual (include space for future records).
5) Description on how to use the manual
6) List of supplementary documents
7) Distribution list and locations of all copies of the manual
8) Overview of systems the manual covers
j. Section 2, Contractual and Legal Information
1) Details of ownership, leases etc.
2) Define areas of responsibility for operation and maintenance
3) Detail start and end dates for:
a) Construction period
b) Services installation
c) Hand over
d) Practical completion
e) Defects period
f) Manufacturers guarantees or warranties
4) Details of manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties, including maintenance agreements

offered by the manufacturer or Sub-contractors
5) Inspection reports
6) Documents pertinent to the employers/user liability
7) Local and public authority consents, including consents required for access, alterations etc.
8) Certificates confirming the premises and installed systems may be used safely; these shall
include examination certificates by competent persons for pressure systems etc., together
with written examination reports
9) Software license information
k. Section 3, Health and Safety
1) Features or characteristics that may produce a hazard
2) Flammable, toxic or otherwise deleterious substances necessary for the operation of systems,
restricted access, pressure systems, etc.
3) Known hazards against which protection can be provided
4) Mandatory requirements relating to safety; to include details of all systems and equipment
requiring periodic inspection, examination or testing to comply with relevant regulations,
approved codes of practice etc.
5) Relevant safety precautions; to include procedures to minimise the risk of damage or injury
from recognised hazards, requirements for special manual procedures, permits to work etc.
6) Details of recommended first aid equipment to be maintained on the premises
l. Section 4, Emergency Information
1) Contact information for:
a) Utility supplier emergency services (gas, water, electricity, district cooling)
b) Provider of emergency call out service
c) Installer’s emergency staff
d) Security/fire systems
e) Location of first aid equipment
f) Emergency control locations
g) Water main stopcock(s)
h) Gas shut offs
i) Electricity isolation points
j) Specific systems/plant
m. Section 5, Description of Services and Design Intent
1) A schedule of the floor areas of each of the building zones categorised by environmental
servicing type
2) Description of the whole building and intended use
3) Design philosophy including all design criteria
4) Detailed description of each installed system and equipment. To include as a minimum a

written explanation of the following:
a) Scope
b) Intended purpose
c) Plant and distribution locations, divisions of main zones, etc. cross referenced to
schematics
d) Function
e) General design parameters
f) Installed capacities
g) System capacities (based on commissioning results)
h) Restrictions of the systems
i) Planned operational efficiency and most economic mode of operation
j) Expected service life
k) Manufacturers information concerning correct operation
n. Section 6, Equipment Schedules
1) System by system schedules of all plant, equipment, valves, distribution boards etc.
stating as minimum:
a) Component type
b) Unique asset number
c) System
d) Location
e) Number off
f) Duty and size
g) Performance figures
h) Manufacturer and supplier
i) Manufacturer’s model and/or reference number
j) Manufacturer’s serial number and nameplate details
k) Original order number for the particular plant/equipment item
2) Each item of plant and equipment shall have a unique asset number cross referenced to the
record drawings and schedules.
o. Section 7, System Operation
1) Descriptions of the operational and control strategies to include:
a) Control and operating strategy for each system
b) Outline of general operating mode including summer and winter operation
c) Start-up and shut down procedures
d) Description of procedures for the whole system and individual items of plant, from fully
off to fully operational, including interlocks etc.
e) Interlocks and inter-dependencies between plant and systems
f) Procedures for emergency shut down and operating procedures for standby plant
g) Means of making safe potentially dangerous plant
h) Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards when operating each system
i) Bringing into operation all standby equipment included in each system
j) Instructions on fault finding and emergency use
k) In the event of plant malfunction or equipment failure control sequences for all systems
installed
l) Details of all software provided and procedures for updating and/or modifying software
operating systems and control programs
m) Instructions for the creation of control procedure routines and graphic diagrams, where
applicable
p. Section 8, Energy Management:
1) Energy management strategy to enable energy consumption to be monitored and controlled
2) Metering philosophy; to include a schedule of the building’s energy supply meters and sub-
meters, indicating for each meter, the fuel type, its location, identification and description, and
instructions on their use
3) Carbon emissions and the comparable performance benchmarks and target figures for energy
consumption and energy costs.
4) Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption and energy costs
q. Section 9, Maintenance
1) Maintenance instructions for each item of plant, coordinated from manufacturer’s details and
recognised industry guidelines including:
a) Frequency and recommended routine maintenance activities
b) Guidance on the nature of deterioration and defects to look for
c) Dismantling and re-assembly
d) Adjustment, calibration and testing
e) Special tools needed for maintenance (cross referenced to the particular item)
f) Test equipment and auxiliary services
g) Reference to spare parts / replacements
h) Programme / frequencies for planned preventive maintenance
2. Comprehensive schedules identifying:
a. Routine periodic checks on plant /system status and condition
b. Periodic verification of accuracy of controls, instruments etc.
c. Routine visual and physical checks, measurements and certification of continuing fitness for
purpose and safety
d. Routine checks/changes to plant/system components/settings to compensate for wear,

operational requirements, experience in use etc. so as to ensure continuing optimum performance
e. Recommended frequency and procedure for routine lubrication of moving parts, including generic
specification for lubricants
f. Procedures for fault finding and identifying causes of abnormal operation of plant and equipment
g. Section 10, Spares and Tools:
1) Schedule for all types of replaceable assemblies, components etc. particular to specific plant
2) Schedule of specialist tools/equipment particular for specific plant and necessary for
undertaking work including all access equipment
3) Separate parts lists shall be provided for each item detailed in the equipment schedule
4) Schedule of normal consumable items
5) Recommended stocking levels
6) Schedule of personal protective equipment necessary for operation / maintenance activities /

tasks
7) Manufacturer’s part numbers for all spares/assemblies
h. Section 11, Drawings:
1) A schedule of all HVAC services record drawings for the Works. The schedule shall include
drawing title, number, source, revision, date, and system detail. The schedule shall include
space to record future modifications and dates.
2) A scaled set of all record drawings including schematics
3) An A3 size of all record drawings including schematics
4) Legend for all colour-coded services
5) A schedule of all manufacturers’ drawings for the Works; the information to include drawing
title, number, source, revision, date, and system detail
6) A scaled set of all manufacturers drawings including schematics
7) An A3 size of all manufacturing drawings including schematics
i. Section 12, Testing and Commissioning Data:
1) Copy of reports confirming that the Works were satisfactorily commissioned, signed by a
competent person or the commissioning agent
2) Copies of all test certificates, records, commissioning and performance test records for the
Works; all certification shall be signed and witnessed
3) Method statements for the testing and commissioning procedures undertaken including
description of equipment used
4) Copies of calibration certificates for all test equipment
5) Schedules of all fixed and variable equipment settings established during commissioning
j. Section 13, Manufacturer’s Data
1) Schedule of all manufacturers and suppliers indicating company name, postal address,
telephone number, email and website address (Sorted in company order alphabetically)
2) Manufacturer’s product data / literature for all items of plant and equipment installed; the
information shall be project specific and include detail drawings, electric circuit details and
operating and maintenance instructions
3) Schedule of equipment with model number, unique equipment asset number and serial
number
k. Section 14, Materials and Substances
1) Register of harmful substances; details of any materials that could be hazardous to health,
used in connection with or otherwise relevant to operational or maintenance activities
2) COSHH details
3) Register of recyclable materials
4) Methods for safe disposal or destruction of any parts, materials or components; provide a
data sheet for each material known to constitute a potential hazard, with detailed procedures
for its safe, authorised disposal.
l. Section 15, Outline of Contents
1) Details of allowances made by plant manufacturer or system designer for modifications
2) Provide space in manual to record future modifications
O. The manual shall conform to the following minimum standards:
1. The covers shall be substantial, of adequate size, distinctive and of sufficient strength to protect the
contents for the life of the installation. The method of binding shall give a permanent anchorage
along the left-hand side whilst allowing the text to be flat without damage to the spine.
2. The manuals shall be prepared on an approved typeface on top quality A4 suitable for direct insertion
into the manuals
3. The front cover and where appropriate the spine, shall have the information clearly displayed in
permanent lettering.
4. Dividers between sections shall be stepped, overlapping printed card. The divider shall be labelled to
identify the section of the manual that it proceeds.
5. All pages comprising the manual shall be subsequently numbered according to each section (i.e.
section 1 pages numbered 1/1, 1/2, etc., section 2 pages numbered 2/1, 2/2etc.).
6. Checking of drafts
a. A draft copy of the operating and maintenance instruction manuals contained in a temporary
loose leaf binder(s) shall be issued to the CA for examination prior to the testing and
commissioning.
b. The draft copy of the manual shall conform to the required format and contain all the information
identified in this specification with the exception of any information not available at that time
(such as commissioning results).
c. Draft versions of the manual shall clearly display the word “DRAFT”.
7. Final documentation
a. Once approved a draft copy shall be handed over prior to instructing the employer's staff in the
operation and use of the services installations. This copy shall contain all testing and
commissioning data and test results, actual control set points and the like in draft form.
b. Prior to practical completion provide the following copies of the final manual which shall include
all testing and commissioning results and final plant duties and control settings, etc. in a typed
form.
c. 2 number paper format copies shall be provided (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
d. 2 number copies in electronic format on CD shall be provided (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
e. All CD’s and other electronic forms of delivery media associated with the manual shall be clearly
labelled with:
1) A heading stating “O&M manual” and disc number if more than one disc
2) Details of the premises and systems covered
3) The issue number of the manual and date of release
8. Copyright
a. The Employer shall have sole copyright to all documents produced specifically for the manual.
The Employer shall be entitled to produce copies of all parts of the manual for his own use.
b. If the Employer transfers ownership or responsibility of the installations he shall be entitled to

transfer his copyright of documents included in the manual.
3.33 HANDOVER REQUIREMENTS
A. This section details the requirements and procedures for completion and handover.
B. As a pre-requisite to Practical Completion in respect of the Works or part thereof, demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the CA that:
1. All the Works are complete. With the exception of minor snags or limited defects as agreed with the
CA that could be reasonably completed within an agreed programme without causing disruption to
the Employer’s use of the building or part thereof.
2. All spares, keys, tools and other consumables have been supplied and handed over to the Employer as
instructed by the CA.
3. The instruction of the Employer’s staff in the use and correct operation of the installation has been
completed satisfactorily. In particular, safety devices and controls demonstrations.
4. All commissioning and testing completed including the issue of a final commissioning reports signed
by an approved competent person
5. A complete demonstration of the Works including fully functional operational controls tests
undertaken in the presence and to the satisfaction of the CA.
6. All necessary certification by the Employer’s insurers has been completed.
7. All approved record documentation including record drawings, operation and maintenance manuals,
etc are approved and issued
8. All necessary Statutory Authority approvals have been undertaken and written confirmation
established
C. Should adequate record documentation not be available Practical Completion will not be granted.
3.34 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Ensure all debris, dirt and redundant items created by the Works are removed from the site.
B. Ensure adequate waste facilities are provided to ensure all waste is sorted out on site appropriately,
segregated and disposed of for recycling / reclamation where possible.
C. Ensure that chemicals, solvents and other liquids are disposed of safely and are only discharged to drain in
compliance with Environment Agency, local statutory and local authority requirements.
D. Ensure all onsite materials and activities are carried out to avoid any damage to local wildlife, plant life
and/or habitats.
E. The Works shall be thoroughly cleaned, all splashes, deposits, temporary markings, coverings and rubbish
shall be removed leaving the site and works in a fit condition for occupation / use and to the satisfaction of
the CA.
3.35 ROTATING EQUIPMENT
A. Immediately prior to practical completion and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations adjust,
ease and lubricate moving parts as necessary to ensure easy and efficient operation.
B. Whenever necessary, ensure that temporary electrical supplies are provided to enable rotating plant items
delivered and/or installed to be run at regular intervals to avoid damage or deterioration.
C. If temporary electrical supplies are not available ensure that rotating plant is hand-turned in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.36 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements of this document and as stated elsewhere and submit the following:
1. Warranties
a. Unless stated otherwise, the Contractor shall provide a manufacturer's full warranty covering all
products of Division 23 HVAC Works, valid for 12 months from date of issue of contract
completion certificate.
3.37 POST-HANDOVER CHECKS
A. Undertake the following post-handover checks:
1. Check that each of the following meets the specified requirements.
a. Internal air temperature.
b. Relative humidity.
c. Ventilation.
d. Energy consumption (ensure that the pulse-input counters match the meters).Check that each of
the above meets the specified requirements.
2. Control strategies:
a. Check that any suspect control strategies are appropriate for the intended application.
b. Check that the suspect control strategy has been implemented and commissioned correctly.
c. Check that the control strategy is still appropriate for the intended use.
3. Network communications:
a. Check that all relevant field controllers communicate properly.
b. Check for correct sharing between controllers of relevant data and correct inter-controller
operation.
4. Control set-points:
a. Check that the set-points in question are correct and appropriate.
5. Control loop settings:
a. Check that the control loop settings result in accurate and stable control.
b. Check that all self-learnt characteristics are valid.
6. Control zones:
a. Check that the control zones are appropriate.
7. Occupant controls:
a. Check that occupant controls work correctly
B. Sub-system/component level checks:
1. Sensors:
a. Check the accuracy and location of any suspect sensors.
2. Actuators:
a. Check that any suspect actuators operate correctly.
C. Dampers and valves:
1. Check that any suspect dampers and valves are not jammed and that they operate as intended.
3.38 DEFECTS
A. Prepare a system of recording defects in order to assess and monitor. The defects register should record:
1. Reference
2. Description of the defect
3. Remedial works proposed
4. Agreement to remedial works proposed
5. Confirmation of defect clearance
B. The defects register and the relevant responses in dealing with them shall be monitored by the CA to
establish whether the number of defects is deemed excessive and if steps need to be taken to improve
performance.
3.39 DEFECTS LIABILITY
A. Liability for making good defects in the installations shall be for a period of twelve months from the date
of issue of the certificate of practical completion for the installations (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
B. If as part of liability for defects, it is necessary to replace or renew any portion of the Works, the defects
liability period in respect of that portion of the Works shall be deemed to commence from the date of such
replacement or renewal.
C. If the replacements or renewals are of such a character as may affect the performance or efficiency of the
Works or any portions thereof, the CA shall require that new tests be carried out to demonstrate that the
plant is continuing to work satisfactorily.
D. Take all precautions in the remedying of defects in the Works to minimise the risk of damage to the
buildings, the decorations, the fittings and the equipment. In the event of such damage occurring bear the
cost of replacement or making good, subject to the proviso of being granted the benefit of any settlement
in respect of such damage accepted by the insurers under the insurance policies taken out in accordance
with the requirements of the contract.
E. Agree with the CA a programme for the carrying out and the completion of any work not finally finished at
the time of the Works being offered for acceptance and which does not prejudice the issue of a practical
completion certificate. This work may be requested to be executed out of normal hours and no additional
costs will be accepted for this action.
F. Prepare and submit records of failures or malfunctions of any part of the Works during the defects liability
period, together with remedial action taken, subsequent re-testing and the results.
G. Notify the CA of damage, failures or malfunctions to the Works caused by incorrect operation of the
installations, vandalism or other actions by a third party.
H. Rectify all defects due to materials or workmanship or other faults that occur, including those notified by
the Employer or CA, during the defects liability period with the minimum of delay and at no additional cost
to the contract.
I. Produce prior to practical completion a written statement for the approval of the CA that sets out how the
defects which arise during the defects liability period will be rectified to ensure that disruption to the
Employer's use of the building is kept to a practical minimum. This work may be required to be executed
out of normal hours and no additional costs will be accepted for so doing.
J. Inform the CA in writing when all defects are finally rectified so that an inspection may be undertaken by
the CA.
3.40 RIGHT OF ACCESS DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
A. Right of access will not be unreasonably withheld, at all reasonable working hours and at own risk and
expense, to any part of the Works for the purpose of inspecting the working of the installations or to the
records of the working and the performance thereof, for the purpose of examination.
B. Subject to CA approval, undertake any tests considered necessary at own risk and expense.
C. Liaise closely with the Employer's staff during the defects liability period so that all necessary remedial
works and/or rectification shall be carried out in such a manner as to avoid or minimise shut-down time
and inconvenience to the Employer.
3.41 COMPLETION OF CONTRACT
A. All plant, equipment and ancillary items shall be cleaned and tested before final acceptance by the CA.
B. From the date of issuance of the 'Taking-Over Certificate' all equipment, materials and workmanship, other
than lamps, shall be unconditionally warranted for not less than 1 year (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
C. Defects and deficiencies, which originate or become evident during the warranty period, shall be repaired
or replaced at no cost.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 230710- HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Read this section in conjunction with other related Divisions, the General Requirements, Particular
Specification, Equipment Schedules, Drawings and Contract Documents.
B. Section Includes
1. Ductwork thermal insulation
2. HVAC Equipment thermal Insulation
3. HVAC Pipework thermal insulation
4. Requirements for Fire Rated insulation and Acoustic insulation are detailed in sections 233113 (Metal
Ductwork) and 233300 (Air Duct Accessories) respectively and are to be provided in addition to the
requirements of the thermal insulation detailed in this section.
C. Related Work Sections and Documentation
1. Division 22 Plumbing Work Sections
2. Division 23 HVAC Work Sections
3. Division 26 Electrical Work Sections
D. Definitions
1. Exposed defines pipes, ducts and equipment which are visible, as in equipment rooms, on the roof, in
service tunnels, in rooms without ceilings or within open grid ceilings.
2. Concealed defines pipes, ducts and equipment which are not normally visible, as in plenums, chases,
shafts and above ceilings.
3. Ambient defines the normal temperature to which the pipework, ductwork or equipment is exposed.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 230010 Submittal Procedures and submit the following.
B. Technical Submittals
1. Submit Product Data on materials and components for use.
2. Submit prior to ordering the manufacturer’s declared values of thermal conductivity for each material
proposed. The declared values shall be appropriate to the mean temperature of the applied insulation
and based on results of tests carried out in accordance with the appropriate British Standards.
3. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials and systems.
4. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
5. Where two or more layers of dissimilar insulating material are used, submit the declared value of
thermal conductivity for each layer under the appropriate temperature conditions. The thickness of
each layer shall also be stated. Ensure that the interface temperature between the two materials does
not exceed the limiting temperature for the material of the outer layer.
C. Installation Drawings:
1. On all installation drawings and/or co-ordinated working drawings reference the proposed insulation
to be applied to the pipework, ductwork and equipment. Provide insulation application details for the
various types of insulation to be used.
2. Indicate individual service insulation thicknesses.
D. Test Reports:
1. Provide list of tests included.
2. Certified test data.
a. Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with this Section and
governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosive
resistance and compressive strength.
E. Samples
1. Submit 300mm long sample of each piping insulation type and equipment insulation type.
2. Submit 300mm x 300mm x 500mm (long) sample of each duct insulation and equipment insulation
type.
3. Submit 300mm long sample of pipework insulation with aluminium cladding
4. Submit 300mm x 300mm x 500mm (long) sample of ductwork insulation with aluminium cladding
F. Installation Instructions:
1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and installation method statement.
G. Maintenance Data:
1. Submit maintenance instructions and include this data and product data in maintenance manuals.
H. Supplementary Product Literature:
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the system.
I. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
J. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of Section 23 0010 (General Specification), and submit the following:
a. Warranties as stated elsewhere.
b. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals:
1) Include component list with manufacturer's reference numbers, descriptions of materials and
procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of pipe
insulation, duct insulation and equipment insulation materials shall be fully accredited to the highest
quality management standards, certified to ISO 9001 and 14001.
B. Materials used in fire-rated assemblies shall bear the UL or other approved testing laboratory, Classification
marking.
C. Flame-proofing treatments subject to deterioration from moisture or humidity shall not be acceptable.
D. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements shown on the Design Drawings or
specified in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards
and codes. The current editions of the publications listed below form a part of this Section.
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards, including;
a. BS 5422 – Method of specifying thermal insulation materials
b. BS 5970 – Thermal insulation of pipework, ductwork, associated equipment & other industrial
c. installations
d. Where alternative materials are proposed by the Contractor the thicknesses shall be calculated in
accordance with BS EN ISO 12241
2. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM International Standards.
3. Underwriters' Laboratories, UL Standards.
4. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA Standards.
5. International Code Council, ICC Standards:
a. International Building Code, IBC.
b. International Mechanical Code (IMC)
6. North American Insulation Manufacturer’s Association, NAIMA Standards.
E. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 23 0010 (General Specification).
1. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
2. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems comply with the
specified performance requirements.
3. Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake testing to show compliance
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA at no additional cost.
4. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements.
5. All tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standard or equivalent
international standard.
A. Accept materials on Site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including
product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage, by
storing in original wrapping.
C. Materials shall be stored and adequately protected from damage or deterioration until installed.
Protection shall also cover any adverse effects of environmental conditions prevalent in the stored and
installed location. D. Insulation shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Insulation shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide systems and products a single manufacturer.
B. Thermal insulation shall be provided for the following functions:
1. Prevent the formation of condensation on pipework, ductwork and equipment
2. To protect personnel from exposure to extremes of temperature
3. Conserve energy for both cooled and heated systems
4. Control process temperatures
C. All materials shall be strictly in accordance with this specification.
D. Materials and their method of application shall not constitute a known risk to health during application or
use.
E. Materials shall be in accordance with BS 2972, BS EN 13467, BS EN 13468:2001, BS EN 13469, BS EN 13470,

BS EN 13471 and BS EN 13472
F. The use of galvanised or zinc coated insulation steel jacketing and accessories on or near austenitic
stainless steel and austenitic nickel steel/alloy equipment and piping, is prohibited.
G. Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mould and fungal growth and
attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respect be suitable for continuous use throughout the
operating temperatures and within the environment where installed.
H. The insulation shall be suitable for the specified conditions of use without the physical properties falling
outside the tolerances allowed in the appropriate British Standard for the material.
I. All thermal insulation shall be made from materials with zero ozone depletion potential (CFC and HCFC
free). Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, written confirmation from the insulation manufacturer(s) that
the products to be installed are CFC and HCFC free.
J. All insulation products shall maintain their thermal performance for a minimum of the plant design life.
Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, details from the manufacturer(s) that define the life expectancy of the
materials to be installed.
K. All insulation shall be guaranteed to be asbestos free.
L. Fire performance
1. Insulation materials shall have a European Classification for reaction to fire performance of A1, A2, or B
and should not have a potential to flashover.
2. All insulation materials installed inside buildings and building service ducts shall conform to Class 0
(unassisted by facing material). Class 0 is a Class 1 material as defined in BS 476-7 which has a fire
propagation index (l) of not more than 12 and sub-index (i1) of not more than 6.
3. The complete assembly of materials, as installed, shall satisfy the ‘spread of flame’ requirements to
Class 1 of BS 476-7.
4. The insulating material itself (i.e. without any facing) shall satisfy the ‘spread of flame’ requirements to
Class 1 of BS 476-7.
5. All insulation materials, adhesives, sealants and facings installed shall have a smoke obscuration rating
less than 5% when tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 5659-2.
6. Where fire and surface spread of flame certificates relate to factory made products, ensure that the
certificates are valid where materials are incorporated in pre-insulated equipment.
7. If there is a potential hazard from contamination by oil or other flammable chemicals, a suitably
resistant finish, e.g. a metal sheet or appropriate non-absorbent coating, shall be applied over the
vulnerable areas. The lapped joints of sheet finishes shall be arranged to shed contaminating fluids
away from the insulating material.
M. Vapour barrier
1. On surfaces operating below ambient temperature a complete vapour barrier seal shall be provided.
2. The vapour barrier shall take the form of a factory applied coating or be manufactured from closed cell
sheet material.
3. Vapour barriers shall be continuous and the integrity maintained. Where this is not possible, the
vapour barrier shall be effectively sealed to the pipe, duct or equipment to prevent any ingress of
moisture or water vapour.
4. External vapour barriers shall be pre-applied or applied immediately after fitting the insulating material
and before the fluid in the pipe, duct, or vessel is cooled.
5. Where additional layers are specified as a form of weather protection or as mechanical protection for
the thermal insulation, these shall be additional to the vapour barrier.
6. Where such additional weather or mechanical protection is required, the installer shall ensue that its
application does not cause any damage to the vapour barrier during installation and is unlikely to
cause damage in service.
7. The vapour barrier shall not reduce the fire performance of the system as installed below the limit
specified as appropriate to the type of application.
8. The values for water vapour permeance of barriers shall be as BS 5422
2.2 PIPEWORK, DUCTWORK & EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULES
A. Piped services including, but not limited to:
1. Chilled water flow and return
2. Buried chilled water flow and return (pre-insulated pipes).
3. Heating water flow and return
4. Condensate drainage pipework.
5. Condenser water flow and return, where routed within air conditioned/cooled spaces
6. Refrigerant pipework
7. All valves and pipeline accessories
B. Ductwork services including, but not limited to:
1. All supply air ductwork with air below ambient temperature
2. All return and exhaust air ductwork with air below ambient temperature
3. All fresh air ductwork routed within spaces below ambient temperature
4. All high temperature ductwork, including kitchen exhaust
5. All builderswork plenums and builderswork ducts.
C. Equipment and Miscellaneous Applications including, but not limited to;
1. Chilled water pump casings.
2. Storage vessels, buffer tanks, etc.
3. Heat exchangers, calorifiers and cylinders.
4. Builderswork risers and walk-in plenums
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Finish Requirements
1. Aluminium cladding shall be provided over all insulated piping exposed to outdoors, within
mechanical rooms and exposed to view.
2. Extreme care shall be exercised in the case of cladding pipework and air conditioned supply and return
air ductwork to ensure any riveting or fixing of the aluminium cladding does not perforate the facing
on the insulation and destroys the vapour barrier
3. On external Insulation
a. The top surface of horizontal ducts shall be factory prepared to provide a fall of 1:25 to ensure
that surface water does not cause ponding on the upper surface. The minimum thickness of
insulation shall be maintained including at all flanges and supports.
b. Vertical cladding joints shall overlap to ensure no top metal edge exposure and prevent water
penetration.
c. No cladding joints will be permitted on the top of pipework
d. A neoprene strip shall be provided at all joints to protect the insulation vapour barrier from
damage by the cladding fixings.
e. All joints and fixing shall be sealed with mastic to provide a water proof installation and maintain
the integrity of the vapour barrier.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Dissimilar metals and materials subject to galvanic corrosion shall not be installed in contact with one
another.
B. Where the complete assembly is liable to mechanical damage in use, the final finish shall be sufficiently
strong to ensure that the insulation does not become exposed.
C. Materials in contact shall be compatible and shall not cause corrosion of degradation under normal site
conditions.
D. Materials shall be free from objectionable odour at the temperature at which they are to be used.
E. The insulation shall be suitable for the specified conditions of use without the physical properties falling
outside the tolerances allowed in the appropriate British Standard for the material.
F. Protect insulated stainless steel surfaces from the risk of stress corrosion in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 5970.
G. Phenolic foam
1. Phenolic foam pipe and duct insulation shall have a thermal conductivity of not more than 0.025
W/mK at 10 °C mean temperature.
2. Materials shall be in accordance with BS EN 13166
3. Phenolic foam shall not be used on steam services or services operating above 100 °C.
4. Where there is risk of corrosion being initiated by the pipework insulation a standard passivating bore
coating shall be provided to reduce the risk.
5. Aluminium foil overlaps shall not be tucked in between the butt joints of the insulation sections.
6. All phenolic pipe insulation shall be a nominal density of not less than 35 kg/m³.
7. All duct insulation shall be a nominal density of not less than 40 kg/m³.
8. The perpendicular compressive strength of the pipework insulation shall not be less than 150 kN/m²
and 100 kN/m² for duct insulation.
H. Mineral wool
1. For all mineral wool insulation products, test evidence must be submitted to the CA for approval, prior
to ordering, showing that the fibres from which the products are made are not classified as a possible
human carcinogen, as detailed by European Directive 97/69/EC and the approved supply list of
CHIP98.
2. Mineral pipe insulation sections shall have a nominal density of not less than 120 kg/m³. Preformed
pipe sections shall be resin bonded with a thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.038 W/mK at 50 °C
mean temperature
3. Mineral wool duct slab shall have a nominal density of not less than 45 kg/m³ with a thermal
conductivity not exceeding 0.04 W/mK at 50 °C mean temperature.
I. Closed Cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber Insulation
1. The insulation shall be a flexible closed cell elastomeric insulation in flat panels or pre-formed pipe
sections and shall be in compliance with ASTM C 534.
2. Closed cell elastomeric nitrile rubber insulation sections to meet the following criteria
a. Temperature Range: -100°C + 105°C.
b. Thermal Conductivity: < 0.037 W/mK at 30°C
c. Water Vapour Permeability: µ 7000 (DIN 52 615), 0.09 µgm/Nh BS 4370/2.
d. Fire Rating: Class O when tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7:and BS
476 part 6.
e. Density: 45 kg/mз up to 65 kg/m³.
f. Noise Reduction: 35 dB(A) to the frequency of 500 Hz, European Standard EN

20140 – 10.
g. Closed Cell Content: > 90%
h. Corrosion Risk: Assessment certified according DIN 1988/7.
i. Ozone Resistance: ASTM-D-1171- No crack.
3. Where used externally the insulation shall be UV stable or protected in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. The insulation shall be CE marked in accordance with the relevant European standard.
5. High load bearing supports shall be used to prevent “crushing” the insulation and shall be in full
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. FM/UL Approved.
J. Calcium Silicate
1. Calcium silicate preformed pipe sections shall have a normal bulk density of 200 – 220 kg/m³ and a
thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.05 W/mK at 100 °C mean temperature.
2. Calcium silicate is prohibited on cold water, chilled water and air conditioning services.
K. Insulation thickness
1. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with BS 5422
2. The insulation thicknesses stated in the following tables are given for thermal conductivities
appropriate to the usual materials used for the application. The thickness for intermediate thermal
conductivities and pipe sizes shall be deduced by calculation or interpolation in accordance with the
relevant British Standards.
3. Pipe nominal diameters stated in insulation thickness tables are based upon steel pipework.
4. Where copper or plastic pipework is used the equivalent outside diameter of the pipe shall be used.
Reference should be made to BS EN 10255 and BS EN 10220.
5. If the thickness given in, or interpolated from, the tables in the British Standard or the specification do
not correspond with available thickness, the nearest higher available thickness shall be used.
6. In multi-layer applications, where material thickness is rounded up to suit available commercial

thickness, the installer shall ensure by calculation (in accordance with the appropriate British Standard)
that each interface temperature is below the maximum continuous operating temperature of the
materials involved.
L. Minimum insulation thickness for chilled water, condensate and cold water pipework to prevent
condensation (BS 5422 Table 8) within air conditioned spaces (all spaces maintained below 30°C)
Ambient temperature 25°C Relative humidity 80%
Phenolic foam λ = 0.025 W/mK
Mineral wool λ = 0.038 W/mK
Emissivity outer surface = 0.05 (low e.g. aluminium, bright)
Steel pipe Temperature of contents (°C)
nominal + 10 +5 0
pipe size Insulation thickness (mm)

Phenolic Mineral wool Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral
(mm) Foam wool foam wool
15 15 20 15 25 20 30
20 15 20 15 30 20 35
25 15 25 20 30 25 35
32 15 25 20 30 25 40
40 15 25 20 35 25 40
50 15 30 25 35 30 45
65 20 30 25 35 30 45
80 20 30 25 40 30 50
100 20 35 25 40 30 50
150 20 40 30 50 35 60
200 25 40 30 50 40 60
250 25 40 35 50 40 70
300 25 40 35 60 40 70
Flat surfaces 30 52 40 70 50 90
λ=thermal conductivity at mean temperature of insulation.
Thicknesses given in the above table are calculated specifically against the criteria stated.
All flow and return pipework shall be provided with the same insulation thickness and the thickness shall be
based upon the lowest temperature.
Closed cell elastomeric rubber insulation shall be the same thickness as the mineral wool.
M. Minimum insulation thickness for chilled water, condensate and cold water pipework to prevent
condensation within non-air conditioned spaces (this shall include internal spaces at 30°C and above) and
where located externally.
Ambient temperature 50°C Relative humidity 80%
Emissivity outer surface = 0.05 (low e.g. aluminium, bright)
Steel pipe Temperature of contents (°C)
nominal + 10 +5 0
pipe size Insulation thickness (mm)

Phenolic Mineral wool Phenolic foam Mineral Phenolic Mineral
(mm) wool foam wool
15 25 40 25 40 25 40
20 25 40 25 40 25 40
25 30 50 30 50 30 50
32 30 50 30 50 30 50
40 30 50 30 50 30 50
50 30 50 30 50 30 50
65 40 50 40 50 40 50
80 40 50 40 50 40 50
100 40 50 40 50 40 50
150 50 75 50 75 50 75
200 50 75 50 75 50 75
250 50 75 50 75 50 75
300 50 75 50 75 50 75
Flat surfaces 50 75 50 75 50 90
λ=thermal conductivity at mean temperature of insulation.
All flow and return pipework shall be provided with the same insulation thickness and the thickness shall be
based upon the lowest water temperature.
N. Environmental insulation thickness for non-domestic hot water service areas to control heat loss (BS 5422
Table 13)
Mineral wool λ = 0.038 W/Mk
Steel pipe nominal pipe size Water temperature of 60°C
(mm) Insulation thickness (mm)
Phenolic foam Mineral wool
15 15 30
20 15 35
25 15 35
32 20 35
40 20 40
50 20 40
65 20 40
80 25 40
100 25 45
150 25 50
200 30 50
250 30 50
300 30 50
Flat surfaces 30 50
λ=thermal conductivity at mean temperature of insulating material
All flow and return pipework shall be provided with the same insulation thickness.
O. Environmental insulation thickness for ductwork carrying warm air (BS5422 Table 11) Phenolic foam λ =
0.018 W/mK
Temperature difference between air inside ductwork and ambient air (°C)
10 25 50
Environmental insulation thickness (mm)
Phenolic foam Mineral wool Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral

foam wool foam wool
25 40 25 50 40 65
λ=thermal conductivity at mean temperature of insulating material
Thicknesses stated in the above table are calculated specifically against the criteria stated.
On variable temperature ductwork, the insulation thickness shall be based upon the highest air temperature
within the ductwork.
P. Minimum insulation thickness for condensation control on ductwork carrying air (BS5422 Table 12) within
air conditioned spaces (all spaces maintained below 30°C). Ambient temperature 25 °C
Relative humidity 80%
Dew point temperature 21.3 °C
External surface emissivity 0.05 (low e.g. aluminium, bright)
Minimum air temperature inside duct (°C)
15 10 5 0
Minimum thickness of insulating material (mm)
Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral

foam wool foam wool foam wool foam wool
20 30 30 50 40 75 50 100
λ=thermal conductivity at mean temperature of insulating material at 10°C
Q. Minimum insulation thickness for condensation control on ductwork carrying air within non-air
conditioned spaces (this shall include internal spaces at 30°C and above) and where located externally.
Ambient temperature 50 °C Relative humidity 80%
Dew point temperature 21.3 °C
External surface emissivity 0.05 (low e.g. aluminium, bright)
Minimum air temperature inside duct (°C)
15 10 5 0
Minimum thickness of insulating material (mm)
Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral Phenolic Mineral

foam wool foam wool foam wool foam wool
40 50 40 60 50 75 50 100
λ=thermal conductivity at mean temperature of insulating material at 10 (°C)
R. Equipment and Miscellaneous Applications
1. On all steel or cast-iron surfaces apply 1 coat of Denso Paste Primer prior to applying insulation
2. Chilled water pump casings
a. Minimum 25mm thick 72kg/m³ density mineral wool flexible insulation with vapour seal facing
3. Heat exchangers, calorifiers, thermal storage vessels and cylinders
a. Minimum 50mm thick 72kg/m³ density mineral wool flexible insulation having a factory applied
Class 'O' facing of reinforced aluminium foil
S. Refrigeration Pipework
1. Including the following:
a. All refrigeration pipework for direct expansion split systems shall be closed cell elastomeric nitrile
rubber insulation.
2. Schedule of Insulation:
a. Thickness: 20mm.
T. High temperature ductwork
1. Kitchen exhaust ductwork and duct systems in which temperatures may exceed 82°C shall have
minimum thickness of calcium silicate insulation of 63mm.
U. Roof Drains and Overflow Drains
1. Insulate as detailed for condensate pipework
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and conditions affecting performance of
the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely completion and notify the CA of the
unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Insulation that has been damaged in shipment or in the field shall not be used, except where the damage
is rounded edges or corners, which may be cut square, and the resulting joints meet the approval of the
CA.
C. Insulation materials shall be kept dry prior to, during and after installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation materials shall not be applied until all required tests have been completed, all surfaces to be
covered are clean and dry, all foreign material, such as rust, scale, dirt etc. has been removed and
rustproofing has been completed. Welded areas shall be free of rust and any affected areas painted with
red oxide primer. Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish.
Space ambient temperature during application of finishing of insulation shall be within the limits
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
B. Maintain temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer’s of adhesives, mastics and insulation
cements. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. C. Vapor
barriers, sealers and adhesives shall be applied only to thoroughly dry insulation.
C. Workmanship
1. Thermal insulation work shall be undertaken by specialist firms who are skilled craftsman conversant
with the application of pipe insulation, duct insulation and equipment insulation to mechanical
systems.
2. All thermal insulation materials shall be supplied by manufacturer’s assessed and registered in
accordance with British Standard quality systems standards or recognised alternative.
3. All insulating material and associated products shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and instructions. The CA will not accept any work not complying with these
recommendations.
4. All adhesives and adhesive tapes shall be suitable for the extremes of temperature for the application
and shall have a life expectancy equal to or greater than the associated equipment, pipework or
ductwork.
5. Thermal insulation shall not be applied to pipework and ductwork services until:
a. The installation, or sections of the installation have been fully pressure tested and all joints proved
sound
b. The surface to be insulated has been cleaned, dried and is free of rust, scale and other foreign
matter
c. All painting of paintwork has been completed and is dry. Damage caused to pre-painted surfaces
during installation shall be repaired at no additional cost
d. Copper pipework has been cleaned thoroughly to remove all traces of surplus jointing flux,
building materials and debris, dust and moisture.
6. Protect all surrounding equipment during installation and leave the area clean and tidy.
7. Each pipe or duct shall be insulated separately and adjacent parallel pipes or ducts shall not be
married together in one insulation covering. There shall be a minimum clearance of 25mm between
adjacent surfaces of insulation.
8. Materials shall be stored and adequately protected from damage or deterioration until installed.
installed location.
9. All joints, surfaces, edges and overlaps shall be neatly finished. Where possible arrange overlaps to be
on the 'blind' side and parallel to circumferential and longitudinal joints.
10. Where allowance for expansion and/or contraction has to be accommodated, the insulation shall be
finished in a neat and approved manner permitting easy access and disconnection of removable items
without disturbing adjacent insulation.
11. All insulation work shall be to a good standard and the insulating materials, coverings and/or coatings
shall be of a uniform thickness throughout.
12. All insulation shall be complete with a smooth and clean finished surface, no damaged ends or edges
and with no irregularities in the thickness of the insulating material or in the material covering. Rigid
sections shall be concentric and accurately matched.
13. Three sections of each type of insulation shall be cut out for inspection by the CA to ensure that the
correct thickness has been installed. If the inspection reveals any defects the installer shall cut out a
further three sections for inspection. If these also prove defective then the insulation shall be rejected
and all insulation shall be stripped off and reinstated at the installer’s expense and with no delay to the
programme.
14. All insulation joints shall be installed close butted together. Sections having damaged ends or edges
will not be accepted.
15. Filling voids with adhesive, joint sealer or mastic will not be accepted.
16. Pipework and ductwork supports are to be provided with inserts, to match the insulation thickness, to
enable the insulation finishes to be continuous through the supports.
17. All support brackets for cold and chilled water services pipework and ducting shall be provided with
purpose designed load bearing high density inserts of the same thickness as the insulation, to facilitate
installation of a continuous thickness of vapour sealed insulation and finish.
18. All connections and brackets for sensors, equipment labels and other pipe, duct or equipment
mounted accessories shall be extended to project past the insulation thickness and enable items and
accessories to be fitted or removed without disturbing the insulation or cladding.
19. Insulation applied to vessels and pipeline and ductwork ancillaries shall be neatly cut and finished test
plates, test points, and dampers to leave these visible.
20. Manufacturer’s labels which are concealed by the insulation shall be provided with labelling to match
the manufacturer’s label on the face of the insulation as detailed elsewhere.
21. Where an insulated duct or pipe penetrates the building, adequate precautions shall be taken to
prevent the entry of water and the opening shall be sealed to prevent ambient air infiltration.
22. The installer shall ensure that all insulating materials, adhesives and finishes specified herein or added
to this contract conform to the requirements of the Local Authority. Installed insulation that is rejected
by the Local Authority shall be stripped out and replaced with acceptable materials at no additional
cost to the contract and with no delay to the programme.
23. When directed by the CA arrange for thermal conductivity performance testing of selected materials,
at either the manufacturer’s works or at an approved testing laboratory. Testing shall be in accordance
with the relevant British Standards.
24. Electrical bonding terminals suitable for connection of a 6 mm² (maximum) conductor shall be
provided for electrical earthing continuity which shall be carried out in accordance with the latest
edition of BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations and the local authority requirements.
25. Any separation of joints or cracking of the insulation due to poor workmanship shall be made good
before the job is accepted.
26. Any replacement or repair to insulation incurred due to insulation being installed prior to testing shall
be carried out at no additional cost to the Employer.
27. Vapour barriers and insulation shall be complete over the full length of surface, without penetration
for hangers or accessories.
28. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces, with round shapes laid to true circular and concentric
shape, shaped to blend with fitting insulation and adjacent covering, with full length section and tight
to insulated object.
29. All debris resulting from the supply and/or application of the insulation shall be removed by the
Contractor.
30. Clean-up will be required each day after each shift.
31. Provide supervision to ensure that the insulation shall be supplied and installed according to the
Contract Documents and to the complete satisfaction of the CA.
32. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
33. Cover insulation seams or locate joints in least visible locations.
34. Where pipes or ducts cannot be insulated after erection, insulate prior to installation.
35. Where specified thicknesses of insulation exceed available thickness in single layer, provide insulation
in 2 or more layers with joints staggered.
36. Insulation of removable panels, access doors and other access points shall be fabricated in such a
manner that all are easily removable without damage to the insulation and vapor barrier.
D. Thermometers, gauges and test points
1. Gauges and test points shall be free of adhesive and the insulation neatly scarfed prior to
application of the finish.
E. Sleeves
1. Where insulated ductwork or pipework passes through wall, roof or floor sleeves, the ductwork and
pipework shall be insulated with the same material and same thickness as the rest of the system,
unless otherwise specified. The space between the insulation and the sleeve shall be sealed by the
2. insulation Sub-Contractor, including any fire and/or acoustic sealing. All fire sealing of fire
compartment penetrations shall be in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements.
F. Pipe Hangers
1. Pipe hangers in direct contact with the pipe on all cold/chilled lines shall be insulated along the
vertical hanger rod for a distance of 4 times the insulation thickness. Apply vapour barrier jacket and
seal all laps with vapour barrier adhesive.
G. General
1. Where insulation requires sealing and taping, complete required procedures at the same time the
insulating material is applied to assure clean surfaces exist for proper adhesion.
2. Insulate all chilled water system appurtenances so that no condensation forms, i.e., drain lines, sensing
lines, thermometer stems, etc.
H. Internal piping Installation (concealed)
1. Pipework shall be insulated with approved rigid preformed pipe sections with I.D. to match pipe O.D
having a factory applied bright Class ‘O’ foil facing to form a continuous vapour barrier.
2. Sections shall be close butted and all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with ‘Class ‘O’
aluminium foil self-adhesive tape applied over a clean surface and firmly pressed down. The minimum
width of aluminium foil tape shall be 50mm. Where provided, the longitudinal joint overlap shall be
sealed with a suitable adhesive to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Internal piping Installation (concealed)
1. Pipework shall be insulated with approved rigid preformed pipe sections with I.D. to match pipe O.D
having a factory applied bright Class ‘O’ foil facing to form a continuous vapour barrier.
2. Sections shall be close butted and all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with ‘Class ‘O’
aluminium foil self-adhesive tape applied over a clean surface and firmly pressed down. The minimum
width of aluminium foil tape shall be 50mm. Where provided, the longitudinal joint overlap shall be
sealed with a suitable adhesive to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Sections shall be firmly secured by additional bands of aluminium foil tape applied circumferentially at
not greater than 300 mm centres, ensuring a minimum of three self-adhesive bands per cut section.
4. All bends, sets, tees and elbows are to be correctly mitred and segmented with insulation to the
necessary thickness to match the adjoining. All joints to be securely sealed with 50 mm wide Class ‘O’
aluminium foil self-adhesive tape.
5. The insulation shall not be left exposed at termination points. Insulation edges shall be over taped
and returned and adhered to the exposed insulation face. Ensure the aluminium foil does not come
into contact with the insulated metal face.
6. Bends, fittings, flanges and pipe clips shall also be insulated with preformed sections of foil faced
insulation, cut to suit on site with joints sealed with adhesive and matching self -adhesive tape. Bends
shall be insulated with mitred segments.
7. If cold and damp conditions are anticipated during installation, consideration shall be given to utilising
a Class ‘O’ aluminium foil tape with an acrylic adhesive.
8. All ends of the insulation and points where the covering is penetrated shall be sealed so that the
continuity of the vapour barrier is maintained.
9. Particular care shall be taken to vapour seal insulation termination points on pipework, valves and
equipment operating below ambient temperature. A suitable vapour barrier sealant shall be applied
to moisture proof the interface between the insulation and the underneath metal face at all
termination points and the vapour barrier shall be returned affectively and sealed to the butt end of
the insulation section so as not to allow any ingress of moisture or water vapour.
10. All metal parts of valves, strainer caps, etc., (excluding and moving parts, i.e. actuators, spindles, etc.)
projecting beyond the insulation shall be painted with an approved anti-condensation compound. All
mild steel pipework prior to being insulated shall be painted two coats of red oxide paint. Particular
care shall be taken to ensure water or water vapour does not enter the insulation system via valve
spindles etc.
J. Pipework in Plantrooms and areas which could be subject to mechanical damage
1. Pipework shall be insulated with approved rigid preformed pipe sections having a factory applied
bright Class ‘O’ aluminium foil facing as for internal pipework and finally protected with aluminium
cladding.
2. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the integrity of the underlying vapour barrier facing.
3. A sample of the proposed method shall be provided for approval prior to commencing the installation
and rivets and screws which may damage the vapour barrier are not to be used.
4. The cladding shall be secured with aluminium bands at 300 mm centres, of a suitable type and
dimension. The banding shall be selected to complement the sheet cladding and not contribute to bi-
metal corrosion.
K. External Pipework and Pipework in purpose built external trenches
1. Pipework shall be insulated with approved rigid preformed pipe sections having a factory applied
bright Class ‘O’ aluminium foil facing as for internal pipework and finally protected with aluminium
cladding or polyisobutylene (PIB) sheeting.
All joints and protrusions through the cladding shall be sealed with an approved sealant to provide a water
and weatherproof finish. The cladding shall be additionally secured with metal banding at 450mm centres.
The banding shall be selected to complement the sheet cladding and not contribute to bi-metal corrosion.
L. Buried pipework
1. All buried pipework shall be pre-insulated and shall be as specified in Section 232113 of this
specification.
M. Internal ductwork (concealed from view) - air conditioning and warm air
1. All rectangular ductwork shall be insulated with either mineral wool having a factory applied bright
Class ‘O’ reinforced aluminium facing complying with BS 5422 and BS 5970 or phenolic foam insulation
having a factory applied bright Class ‘O’ reinforced aluminium facing complying with BS 5422 and BS
5970
2. Circular and oval ductwork shall be insulated with either flexible duct mineral wool insulation having a
factory applied bright Class ‘O’ reinforced aluminium facing complying with BS 5422 and BS 5970 or
phenolic foam insulation having a factory applied bright Class ‘O’ reinforced aluminium facing
complying with BS 5422 and BS 5970
3. All insulation slabs shall be cut to fit on site.
4. The insulation shall be bonded to the ductwork surfaces with a contact adhesive suitable for the
materials and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5. The insulation on the underside of the ductwork shall be additionally secured by means of suitable
nylon insulation hangers, fixed at maximum 300mm centres. Insulation hangers shall be additionally
attached to the vertical faces of the duct where mineral wool insulation is used. Where support
hangers puncture the foil, they shall be sealed using aluminium foil tape to maintain the vapour
barrier.
6. All joints shall be sealed with 100mm minimum wide self-adhesive aluminium reinforced foil tape to
form a continuous vapour barrier seal, including ductwork and equipment flanges which shall be
encased. All insulation slabs shall be secured with a minimum of three self -adhesive tape bands per
linear metre of ductwork.
7. Where a vapour barrier is required, provision should be made for exposed slab edges to carry the
aluminium foil to the adjoining edge.
N. Ductwork in plantrooms - air conditioning and warm air
1. Rectangular ductwork shall be insulated as for internal ductwork and finally protected with aluminium
cladding.
2. Extreme care shall be exercised in the case of cladding insulated ductwork to ensure any riveting of the
aluminium cladding does not perforate the aluminium foil facing on the insulation and destroys the
vapour barrier. A sample of the proposed method shall be provided for approval prior to commencing
the installation and rivets and screws which may damage the vapour barrier are not to be used
3. Circular/oval ductwork shall be insulated as for rectangular ductwork and finally protected with
aluminium cladding.
O. External Ductwork
1. Rectangular and circular/oval ductwork shall be insulated as for external ductwork and finally
protected with aluminium cladding.
2. Extreme care shall be exercised in the case of cladding insulated ductwork to ensure any riveting of the
aluminium cladding does not perforate the aluminium foil facing on the insulation and destroys the
vapour barrier. A sample of the proposed method shall be provided for approval prior to commencing
the installation and rivets and screws which may damage the vapour barrier are not to be used
3. Vertical cladding joints shall overlap to ensure no top metal edge exposure and prevent water
penetration.
4. All joints and fixing shall be sealed with mastic to provide a water proof installation and maintain the
integrity of the vapour barrier.
5. Circular/oval ductwork shall be insulated as for rectangular ductwork and finally protected with
aluminium cladding.
P. Drain Installation
1. Roof drains and overflow drains shall have flexible insulation with adhesive applied in 150mm wide
strips on 400mm centres.
a. Provide 1.6mm (minimum) annealed tie wire, tied spiral wound or half hitched at 400mm centres
for securing insulation until adhesive sets.
b. Butt insulation and seal joints and breaks with 50mm of foil adhered over joint.
c. Apply insulation to the sump of roof drains and overflow drains, including the vertical drop to the
related horizontal line.
d. For roof drains, insulate all horizontal lines.
e. For overflow drains, insulate all interior lines.
Q. Kitchen exhaust duct Insulation application
1. Install Fire Protection Insulation according to the manufacturer, UL Installation Guidelines and Civil
Defence Authority having jurisdiction requirements.
2. Access doors shall be of the same fire integrity as the associated ductwork and shall consist of metal
frame, 1.6mm metal cover, insulation blanket.
R. HVAC plant including Heat exchangers, calorifiers, thermal storage vessels and cylinders
1. Heat exchangers, calorifiers, thermal storage vessels and cylinders shall be insulated with mineral wool
flexible duct insulation having a factory applied Class 'O' facing of reinforced aluminium foil.
2. Insulation shall be cut to suit on site and bonded to surfaces by means of a suitable adhesive, applied
in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3. Thickness of insulation shall be as stated elsewhere in this specification for “flat surfaces”.
4. On all equipment with chilled/cold water the insulation shall be vapour sealed. All joints shall be sealed
with 100mm minimum wide self-adhesive aluminium reinforced foil tape to form a continuous vapour
barrier seal, including all equipment connections and accessories, which shall be encased.
5. The insulation shall be protected with aluminium cladding, all joints lapped and neatly secured along
the longitudinal seams.
6. Extreme care shall be exercised in the case of cladding equipment requiring a vapour seal to ensure
any riveting of the aluminium cladding does not perforate the aluminium foil facing on the insulation
and destroys the vapour barrier. A sample of the proposed method shall be provided for approval
prior to commencing the installation and rivets and screws which may damage the vapour barrier are
not to be used.
7. Before applying the cladding the insulating material shall be completely smooth finish with no gaps or
crevices between sections, ensuring that it is tight fitting adjacent to all connections, inspection covers
and other protrusions.
8. The cladding when finished shall be free from dents, burrs, sharp corners and all tapings and
protrusions such as access covers, bosses, tapings, etc., shall be separately clad in the same material
but removable for inspection purposes. Fit cut outs with purpose made over-plates or collars.
9. Remove manufacturer’s name plate and re-fix on cladding, where nameplates cannot be easily
removed, new labels shall be provided to match the manufacturer’s label.
S. Pump insulation
1. Domestic water booster pump casings and chilled water pump casings shall be provided with a
minimum of 25mm thick mineral wool flexible duct insulation having a factory applied Class 'O' facing
of reinforced aluminium foil.
2. On steel or cast iron surfaces, apply 1 coat of Denso Paste Primer prior to applying insulation.
3. Chilled water pumps shall be insulated by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be
constructed by forming the bottom and sides joints that do not leave raw ends or edges of the
insulation exposed. Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a rigid housing that does not rest on
the pump.
4. Joints between the top cover and the sides shall fit tightly forming a female shiplap on the pump joint
on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.
5. The entire surface of the removable section shall be finished as specified.
6. The housing shall be constructed so that the bearing can be serviced without removing the housing.
7. Pump insulation shall be provided with an aluminium cladding.
T. Tanks and cisterns for HVAC systems
1. Cold water storage tanks and cisterns shall be insulated with either mineral wool having a factory
applied bright Class ‘O’ reinforced aluminium facing complying with BS 5422 and BS 5970 or phenolic
foam insulation having a factory applied bright Class ‘O’ reinforced aluminium facing complying with
BS 5422 and BS 5970
2. Thickness of insulation shall be as stated elsewhere in this specification for “flat surfaces”.
3. Insulation shall be bonded to tank sides by means of suitable adhesive, applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
4. All insulation slabs shall be closely butted together and joints sealed by means of matching
selfadhesive tape 100mm. wide. Any exposed edges of the insulation and any points where the
covering is penetrated shall be sealed, using a suitable sealant.
5. Floor mounted tanks shall be insulated on the sides and top only - not on their undersides.
6. Insulation for loose covers and access manholes shall be made in separate sections completely
removable.
7. The insulation shall be protected on the four vertical corners with 75mm. x 75mm. aluminium angles.
8. The insulation surfaces shall be protected by means of aluminium sheeting, all overlaps being secured
with sheridised self-tapping PK. screws or pop rivets. A sample of the proposed method shall be
provided for approval prior to commencing the installation and rivets and screws which may damage
the vapour barrier are not to be used
9. Ensure the vapour barrier is not damaged when applying the sheet metal cladding.
U. Thermal Insulation Installation for Builderswork Riser Applications and walk-in plenums.
1. 1. Where a masonry riser is used to convey preconditioned air, the riser shall be thermally insulated
with insulation having the following unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings:
a. Thermal conductivity coefficient: Not greater than 0.036W/ mK at a mean temperature of 20°C.
b. Thickness: 50mm.
c. Density: 48kg/ m³ for mineral wool.
d. Foil scrim Kraft facing and vapor barrier.
e. Faced once in place with perforated pre-galvanised sheet metal
2. Adhere insulation on interior surface of plenum with adhesive for 100% coverage.
3. Retain the insulation in the riser as follows:
a. By galvanized steel Z-sections installed around the perimeter of the riser at nominally 1200mm
centres, or to suit the width of a sheet of insulation or perforated sheet metal.
b. Fasten the Z-sections to the masonry at 500mm centres with masonry adhesive and at each end
with expanding masonry anchors or percussion fastenings where allowed in the head contract.
4. Corner angles, cover strips, U-sections and Z-sections shall be manufactured from 0.6mm thick
galvanized or zinc anneal sheet metal, with feathered edges so as to crimp down on the insulation.
V. Diesel Exhaust Application
1. Provide asbestos free rigid hydrous calcium silicate precision moulded in sections split ready for
application on diesel fire pump exhaust piping. The thickness of calcium silicate preformed pipe and
muffler insulation shall be calculated by the manufacturer to the acceptance of the CA and shall
maintain an outside surface temperature of less than 40°C when engines are operating.
a. K factor not to exceed 0.43W/m°C at 100°C.
b. Density to be not less than 220kg/ m³.
c. Compressive strength to be 993kPa based on 38mm thickness of block.
d. Fire hazard classification shall be listed by UL or equal British regulatory organization, and shall
not exceed the following:
1) Flame Spread Rating: 0.
2) Smoke Development: 0.
W. Insulated support blocks
1. At the points of support where insulation bears the weight of pipework and contents, purpose
designed load bearing, high density blocks of an approved material shall be installed at all support
positions to facilitate installation of a continuous thickness of vapour sealed insulation and finish.
2. The pipe insulation shall be butted up to the block and the joints sealed with a suitable adhesive tape
to provide a continuous vapour seal through the support.
3. Sharp edges on metal support brackets/clips shall be ground smooth to ensure that the brackets/clips
do not perforate the foil facing, thus destroying the vapour seal.
4. Where pipework is supported on steel bearers/rollers, purpose designed high density blocks of an
approved material fitted with galvanised metal wearing plates shall be used. The support blocks shall
be butt jointed, wrapped with adhesive tape and vapour sealed.
X. Valve and flange insulation
1. Provide thermal insulation to all valves, flanges, strainers and ancillaries. The insulation shall be
suitable for the service to be insulated and provide the same thermal performance as the adjoining
pipework and maintain the continuity of the vapour barrier where required.
2. The insulation on strainer baskets shall be removable to allow regular maintenance access.
3. All chilled water valves and flanges shall be insulated and complete with vapour barrier.
Y. Valve and flange aluminium casing
1. Aluminium boxes shall be the split casing type fabricated from 0.9 mm aluminium sheet or 0.7 mm
fitted with spring clip fasteners and neoprene or similar seals. The internal insulating material lining
shall have the same thermal performance as the adjoining insulation and be secured to ensure the
lining will not collapse when the box is removed and re-installed. Aluminium boxes shall be reusable
and facilitate removal without disturbing the adjacent insulation.
2. All valves shall be provided with valve boxes unless otherwise stated.
Z. Aluminium cladding
1. Aluminium cladding shall be formed to fit tightly over the outer circumference of the insulation with
longitudinal overlaps of not less than 40 mm the outer part of the overlap to be secured with self
tapping screws or rivets of the appropriate type at centres of not more than 150mm. All longitudinal
joints shall be hidden from view as far as possible.
2. Extreme care shall be exercised in the case of cladding equipment requiring a vapour seal to ensure
any riveting of the aluminium cladding does not perforate the aluminium foil facing on the insulation
and destroys the vapour barrier. A sample of the proposed method shall be provided for approval
prior to commencing the installation and rivets and screws which may damage the vapour barrier are
not to be used
3. Circumferential overlaps to be not less than 40 mm and secured with self-tapping screws or rivets of
the appropriate type, not less than four, equally spaced. One circumferential joint should be left free
at maximum intervals of 5 metres to allow for expansion and contraction.
4. All joints shall be so arranged as to shed liquids and shall be sealed with a suitable gun applied water
resistant sealant.
5. All bends and fittings shall be covered with matching aluminium sheet cladding tailored to fit the
application but using specially segmented purpose made pieces, or mitred bends where applicable.
6. All insulation termination points shall be trimmed with compatible aluminium coiled end capping
pieces secured over the aluminium cladding with closed head pop rivets.
7. All aluminium metal work shall be pre-formed, neatly and correctly installed, and manufactured to
ensure a smooth, clean, uniform installation free from sharp and dangerous edges.
8. Minimum thickness of aluminium cladding:
Minimum thickness of aluminium cladding (mm
Pipework up to 150mm OD 0.60
Pipework up to 150mm OD 0.70
Ductwork 0.70
Heat exchangers & vessels 0.90
Flange & valve boxes 0.90
Removable covers 0.90
AA. Polyisobutylene (PIB) sheeting
1. Polyisobutylene (PIB) sheeting shall have a minimum thickness of 0.8mm and of tensile strength not
less than 3.4 MN/m2 lapped on all circumferential and longitudinal joints and sealed using a
solvent/cold welding agent. Points where the PIB sheeting is penetrated due to protrusions shall be
sealed with a suitable sealant to the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Adhesives and welding agents used shall be as recommended by the Polyisobutylene (PIB) sheeting
manufacturer. Under no circumstances will an alternative adhesive or welding agent be permitted.
3. PIB shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. The following tests shall be made for each pipe system and ductwork system:
1. Pipework insulation
a. Run pump systems.
b. Check for signs of condensation.
c. Check for signs of insulation separation.
d. Remove and replace faulty insulation.
2. Ductwork Insulation:
a. Run fan systems.
b. Check for signs of condensation.
c. Check for signs of duct insulation separation.
d. Remove and replace faulty insulation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Perform final clean of all surfaces following installation of insulation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Read this Section in conjunction with other related Divisions, the General Requirements, the Particular
Specification, Schedules, Drawings and the Contract Conditions. Section Includes
1. Hydronic piping for HVAC systems
2. Underground Hydronic piping for HVAC systems
3. General duty valves for HVAC piping
4. Meters and gauges for HVAC systems
5. Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment
6. Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC piping and equipment
7. Refrigerant piping
8. Closed system pressurisation units
B. Related Work Sections and Documentation
1. Division 22 Plumbing Work Sections.
2. Division 23 HVAC Work Sections.
C. Definitions
1. Hydronic pipework refers to pipework systems where there is heat transfer (i.e. Chilled water, heating,
condenser water systems and refrigerant pipework systems)
2. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.
3. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene.
4. LTHW: Low Temperature Hot Water
5. DPCV’s: Differential Pressure Control Valves
6. PICV’s: Pressure Independent Control Valves
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 Submittal Procedures and submit the following.
1. Submit product data and technical specifications on all materials, equipment and components for use.
2. Prepare and submit fully detailed material submittal compliance statements for all components and
each item of equipment used, which forms the permanent HVAC pipework installation.
3. Submit, prior to installation, details of all support systems including seismic brackets affixed to the
structure. The submission shall include and identify:
a. Location of connections
b. Numerical identification of maximum allowable design value of connecting method
c. Numerical value of applied load or reaction to the building structure
d. Type of connection, for example, vertical support, vertical support with bracing
e. Bracing reaction type, for example, tension only, tension and compression
4. All anchors, inserts or connections to the structure shall be submitted to the CA for acceptance.
Submittal review and/ or acceptance by the CA shall not constitute compliance or usability.
5. Submit a list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
6. Submit method statement.
7. Submit verification of hydronic water system flushing.
8. Submit a listing of the names of the welders, together with corresponding marks.
C. Installation Drawings:
1. Submit coordinated layout installation showing all water-piping systems. Include locations, applicable
details and insulation padding requirements. Note the drawings shall indicate valved manual air vents
and drains, provisions for pipe pressure testing, system filling and phased construction as required for
the system installations on the project.
D. Underground Hydronic Piping Technical Submittals
1. Submit coordinated layout installation drawings showing, existing utilities to be crossed by the chilled
and heating water-piping systems. Include locations, applicable details and supporting calculations for
pipe anchors, pipe guides, thermal expansion loops and insulation padding requirement. Note the
drawings shall indicate valved manual air vents and drains, provisions for pipe pressure testing and
phased construction as required for the system installations on the project.
2. Submit piping, insulation and jacket construction, including heat loss information based on pipe sizes
and system operating temperatures.
3. Submit shop welding, inspection and quality control procedures and welders' qualifications.
4. Submit factory welding inspection and quality control reports with each piping shipment delivered to
the Site.
5. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and requirements.
6. Submit manufacturer's start-up report, including written field installation verifications for compliance
with the manufacturer's requirement.
E. Pressurisation Unit Submittals
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all pressurisation units, indicating construction,
dimensions, weights, performance and maintenance requirements.
2. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each pressurisation units.
3. Submit the following information, where applicable, to the CA for approval in accordance with the
requirements of this specification:
a. Operating flow and return temperatures
b. Minimum and maximum system pressures
c. Fill pressure
d. System volume
e. System expansion
f. System height above pressurisation unit
g. System height below pressurisation unit
h. Schedule of starting and full load currents
i. Details of connections
j. Sound pressure spectrums
k. Pump motor rating and design absorbed power
l. Pump and motor speeds
m. Drive belt sizes
4. Submit performance curves of each pump shall be submitted to the CA prior to equipment being
ordered. Pump test data shall comply with BS EN ISO 9906 and BS EN ISO 5198.
6. Submit electrical data, including motor starting requirements.
7. Submit details of Variable Speed Drive units including manufacturer's details.
8. Confirm the vibration control equipment selections.
9. Submit manufacturers certified drawings for every pressurisation unit.
F. Calculations
1. Submit supporting calculations for all pipework expansion including pipe anchors, pipe guides and
thermal expansion loops.
2. Calculations prepared and signed by the Contractor’ licensed Structural Engineer shall include:
a. Horizontal and vertical reaction loads at connections to building structures for all seismic
restraints, including those covered by referenced Guidelines. Coordinate reaction loads and
attachment details with Licensed Structural Engineer.
3. Submit a confirmation letter and calculations signed by the Contractors Structural Engineer performing
the seismic load calculations, confirming the design details of all seismic restraint requirements as
detailed elsewhere within the specification
4. Submit calculations for system water content and expansion/contraction for pressurisation unit sizing.
G. Test Reports:
1. Submit a list of all product tests undertaken, including copies of the certified test data. All testing shall
confirm compliance with the relevant standard (i.e. British Standard, European Standard, Etc.).
H. Supplementary Product Literature:
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 Execution and Closeout Requirement and submit the
following:
1. Warranties as stated elsewhere.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals:
a. Include schedules of materials used.
b. Include recommendations for maintenance.
c. As Built drawings
A. The manufacturers shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of pipework,
valves, supports and pipework ancillaries and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management
standards, certified to ISO 9001 and 14001.
B. Welders shall be fully qualified and certified as detailed in section 3.0 below or an approved welding
bureau for the country in which the project is located.
1. Each welder shall identify his or her work with a marking stamped on each weld joint of pipe, valve or
fitting.
2. Welders making defective welds shall be given a re-qualification test and upon failing to pass shall not
be permitted to work on this project.
C. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Drawings or
specified in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards
a. BS EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements.
b. BS EN 12735 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round copper tubes for air conditioning and
refrigeration. Tubes for piping systems
c. BS EN 14324:2004. Brazing. Guidance on the application of brazed joints
d. BS EN 1254 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings
e. BS 8313 (Accommodation of Building Services in Ducts)
4. Factory Mutual System, FM Standards.
b. International Mechanical Code, IMC.
7. The German Institute of Standardization, DIN Standards.
8. American Water Works Association, AWWA Standards.
9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME Standards.
10. International Organization for Standardization, ISO Standards.
11. American Standards Association, ASA Standards.
12. American National Standards Institute, ANSI Standards.
D. Valves shall be manufactured under an approved BS EN ISO 9000 Quality System.
E. Suspended equipment and piping shall be attached to the structure, supported by and seismically braced
in accordance with the most current revision of one of the following seismic bracing system in accordance
with the International Building Code (IBC) and ASCE 7 using design parameters as indicated elsewhere
within the specification;
1. Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Guidelines for Suspended Piping, Electrical Systems and Floor
Mounted Equipment.
2. International Seismic Application Technology's (ISAT) Seismic Design Manuals, for seismic restraint
system requirements.
3. Seismic bracing system by Unistrut Corporation
4. Seismic bracing system by Hilti Ltd
5. Seismic bracing system by Cooper B-Line
6. Seismic restraint and bracing details shall generally be in accordance with ASHRAE Applications
Handbook
F. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 23 0010 (General Specification).
G. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA at no additional cost
to the project.
H. Provide a Site Quality Control plan in accordance with Section 23 0010 (General Specification).
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including
B. Pressurisation Units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at the factory. Mark the unit
room locations and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
C. Each Pressurisation Unit shall have lifting lugs of shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final
placement.
D. Protect all pipework, valves and ancillaries from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
E. Materials shall be stored and adequately protected from damage or deterioration until installed.
installed location.
F. All pipework, valves and ancillaries shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Insulation shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not operate Pressurisation Units for any purpose including construction activities, temporary or
permanent, until pipework is clean and the pipework system has been filled. Following the unit
commissioning it shall be run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall be strictly in accordance with this specification.
B. All pipework shall be as detailed in the pipework schedule Pipe Lengths
1. In assembling piping systems, utilise longest available commercial standard piping lengths allowed on
Site to minimise number of piping joints.
2. Accurately cut pipe to field measurements to permit placement without forcing or springing, except
for cold springing of expansion loop legs.
3. Pipes shall be supplied in lengths suitable for manual handling.
C. Piping Diagrams:
1. The Contract Documents may include piping diagrams as a part of the Drawings. These piping
diagrams are not for the purpose of giving physical dimensions or locations but rather to show all
required piping accessories necessary to make clear the interconnections, by the piping system, of the
various units of the process. If an item is indicated on either the piping diagram or on the Drawings,
but not on both, it will be assumed that the Contractor has included such item in his estimate of the
cost of the work and that he shall provide the same.
D. The Drawings are intended for the Contractor's guidance. The Drawings shall not be scaled and the
Contractor shall verify accuracy and immediately notify the CA of any discrepancies, which prevents
coordination, fabrication, or installation of works.
1. Anticipate and coordinate minor changes in position of piping to suit site requirements. Such minor
changes shall not necessitate a request for information (RFI) or change order.
2. Promptly communicate to the CA any changes affecting accessibility to or clearance around

equipment or accessories.
E. Valves and Pipework Ancillaries
1. All valves, cocks, vents and accessories installed in the Works shall be approved by the CA prior to
ordering.
2. Valves shall be as far as practicable be from the same manufacturer with the same pattern to provide
conformity and to simplify maintenance. All gate, globe, angle, swing check, strainer, balancing and
butterfly valves as a group shall be of the same manufacturer.
3. In addition to valves, cocks and strainers indicated in the Particular Specification, on the Drawings and
as detailed elsewhere, provide for the installation of sufficient valves, air vents, drain cocks and
strainers to ensure the correct operation, isolation, venting and draining of the systems to the
satisfaction of the CA.
4. All valves shall comply with the Pressure Systems Safety Regulations and carry the CE mark complete
with a declaration of conformity.
5. All valves and pipeline ancillaries shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system test pressure and
maximum working pressure, temperature.
6. Valves and pipeline ancillaries shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works, in accordance with
appropriate British Standards specification.
7. Seals, discs, gland packing, plug lubricants etc. shall be suitable for the application and operating
conditions as detailed elsewhere.
8. All castings shall be clean close grained metal free from rough projections.
9. Unless otherwise specified, valves of 50mm nominal bore and under shall have female ends screwed to
BS 21 and valves 65mm nominal bore and over shall have flanged ends.
10. Flanged valves shall have matching flanges manufactured in accordance with BS EN 1092-1.
Composite flanges to BS EN 1092-1 shall be used when butterfly or other 'inside bolt circle' valves are
installed in copper pipe work systems.
11. All valves which contain copper alloy shall be gunmetal or capable of withstanding dezincification.
12. Provide guided chain operator for valves 100mm and above installed 2.1m AFF and valves in difficult
locations as determined by the CA.
13. Valve Connections
a. Provide valves compatible with adjoining piping pipe joints.
b. Valves shall be the full port size of the pipe in which they are installed.
14. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all balancing and flow regulation valves are correctly
selected and installed to suit the flow rates indicated. All regulating/balancing valves must be
approved by the CA prior to installation.
15. Valves shall be provided on all pipework wherever necessary to achieve proper isolation and
regulation of the whole systems. They shall be installed to isolate and balance every section of the
pipework network including but not limited to the following locations:-
a. To isolate each item of equipment including heat transfer terminal units
b. To regulate and balance the flow through each item of equipment including heat transfer terminal
units and control valves
c. To isolate every section of the pipework network including main and sub-circuits.
d. To regulate and balance the flow through every section of the pipework network including main
and sub-circuits
e. To isolate, regulate and balance the flow to any item of equipment supplied by or, to be
connected to the systems, by others (Should the equipment or plant not be connected up prior to
balancing, temporary by-pass connections and a regulating valve shall be installed to achieve
balancing)
f. To isolate, and allow the removal of all control valves, float valves, flow meters, strainers, and other
similar pipeline ancillaries
g. To isolate each float operated valve
16. Regulation and balancing of the systems shall be achieved by the installation of commissioning
stations and isolating valves. For variable flow circuits DPCV’s and PICV’s shall be provided complete
with isolating valves.
17. Flow measuring and control devices shall be installed to the manufacturer’s recommendations, with
special regard to straight pipe lengths required before and after the assembly.
18. Where DPCV’s and PICV’s are used, measuring stations shall be provided upstream of the isolation
valve.
19. Check valves shall be installed where plant operates on an automatic changeover basis or where flow
reversal can occur. Check valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
20. Where indicated, valves or cocks shall be lockable, with purpose-made locking devices which do not
impede the fast closure of the valve where that is necessary. The locking device shall remain attached
to the valve in both open and closed position.
21. All valves shall be constructed from asbestos free materials.
F. Hangers and supports
1. Pipe Isolators
a. Provide each hanger or clamp for uninsulated piping with a metal-backed pipe isolating material
to isolate sound vibration and electrolysis. Black tape shall not be acceptable.
2. Hanger Rods
a. Provide steel hanger rods, appropriately threaded.
b. Provide connection points with jamb nuts or double nuts.
3. Provide piping supports in accordance with the International Mechanical Code, the Authority Having
Jurisdiction and this specification. In the event of a conflict the most onerous clause shall be used.
4. Support piping joined with grooved couplings or other proprietary piping system in accordance with
the manufacturer's installation guidelines.
5. Where pipes are seismically braced, support and brace pipes in accordance with codes stated
elsewhere in the specification.
6. Support nonmetallic piping with a sufficient number of hangers to prevent sagging and misalignment
in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.
7. Where exposed to weather, all material shall be hot dipped galvanized or other approved corrosion
protection method.
8. Multi-purpose pipe saddles shall be used on pipe sizes 32mm and larger.
9. Hangers, anchors and supports, not detailed on or reference by the Contract Documents, shall be
designed by the Subcontractor to support the combined weight of the pipe, fluid and pipe insulation
and shall have a safety factor of at least 5, based on the ultimate tensile strength of the material used.
Calculation and sketches shall be submitted with signature and stamped by a Structural Engineer
licensed by the Country in which the project is located for review.
G. Nuts, Bolts and Washers
1. Nuts, bolts and washers for black steel and cast iron flanged joints shall be to BS EN 1515 with threads
to BS 3643 or of the high tensile steel type to suit the operating pressure and temperature.
2. On galvanised, plastic and copper/gun metal and all external pipework, all nuts, bolts and washers
shall be as above but sherardized to BS 4921.
3. The length of the bolt shall be determined to suit the thickness of flanges and joints shall protrude the
nut head by 6 mm maximum.
4. Gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 1514.
H. For joints of dissimilar metals:
1. Take appropriate means to prevent galvanic action where dissimilar metals are connected.
2. Isolating gaskets, sleeves and washers shall be installed between flanges, bolts and nuts.
3. Gaskets, equal to Teflon as manufactured by DuPont or acceptable equivalent.
4. To join pipes of dissimilar materials.
a. Use insulating coupling.
b. Dielectric coupling shall be equal to Victaulic Style 47 or acceptable equivalent when connecting
dissimilar metals in liquid systems.
I. Puddle flange assemblies
1. Puddle flange assemblies shall be provided where pipes pass through walls or floors which require
proofing against liquid penetration. They shall consist of a length of pipe and an un-drilled flange
welded onto the pipe at a distance midway through the structural thickness.
2. The assembly shall extend beyond both sides of the wall or floor and shall be terminated in flange
connections.
3. The assembly shall be manufactured from the same class of piping as the adjoining pipework and the
complete assembly shall be wrapped in two coats of petroleum jelly impregnated tape.
J. Vibration and Seismic controls
1. Inertia bases
a. Structural Bases
1) Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets to support equipment and
motor, with motor slide rails.
2) Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine and to transmit
design loads to isolators and snubbers.
b. Concrete Inertia Bases
1) Construction: Structural steel channel perimeter frame, with gusseted brackets and anchor
bolts, reinforcing, concrete filled.
2) Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
3) Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.
4) Concrete: Minimum 20mPa concrete.
2. Vibration Isolators
a. Open Spring Isolators
1) Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75% vertical stiffness, with working deflection
between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity.
2) Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 6mm thick neoprene sound pads and
zinc chromate plated hardware.
3) Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 1.2mm; meet requirements for neoprene pad
isolators.
4) For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
b. Restrained Open Spring Isolators
2) Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 6mm thick neoprene sound pads and
zinc chromate plated hardware.
3) Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 1.2mm; meet requirements for neoprene pad
isolators.
4) Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.
c. Closed Spring Isolators
1) Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber
stabilizers.
3) Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad
isolators and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 7mm clearance.
d. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators
1) Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene
rubber stabilizers.
isolators and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 7mm clearance and limit stops
e. Spring Hanger
isolators.
3) Misalignment: Capable of 20° hanger rod realignment.
f. Neoprene Pad Isolators
1) Rubber or neoprene waffle pads:
a) Hardness: 30 durometer in accordance with ASTM D2240.
b) Thickness: Minimum 13mm.
c) Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width.
2) Configuration: Single layer.
3) Configuration: 13mm thick waffle pads bonded each side of 6mm thick steel plate.
4) Neoprene pads/mounts shall not be used for external applications or areas within direct
sunlight
g. Rubber Mount or Hanger:
1) Molded rubber designed for 10mm deflection with threaded insert.
h. Glass Fibre Pads:
1) Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fibre.
i. Seismic Snubbers
1) Type: Non-directional and double acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members
restrained by neoprene elements.
2) Elements: Replaceable neoprene, minimum of 18mm thick with minimum 3mm air gap.
3) Capacity: 4 times load assigned to mount groupings at 10mm deflection.
4) Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding 3 times rated load capacity of
seismic snubber.
j. Roof Mounting Curb: 350mm high with rigid steel lower section containing adjustable spring
pockets with restrained spring isolators, steel upper section to support rooftop equipment and
continuous elastomeric membrane extending from upper section for counter-flashing over
roofing. Provide acoustical package to achieve specified noise levels.
3. Seismic Restraints
a. For Seismic Bracing Applications, provide the following.
1) Pipe Hangers and Supports
a) Provide in accordance with one of the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing

systems.
b) Hangers for single hanger supported piping shall be steel clevis type with spaced tube.
c) Hangers shall be designed and installed to allow for a minimum 40mm of vertical
adjustment.
d) Hangers, supports and insulation for conditions which involve thermal and/or building
expansion and contraction shall be engineered based on actual field conditions.

Hangers shall be designed and installed to allow to vertical adjustment.
e) Trapeze supported piping shall be attached to strut channel framing or a structurally

engineered trapeze hanger support as indicated in the referenced pre-engineered seismic
bracing systems.
f) Items supported by trapeze hangers shall be properly attached at each trapeze location.
g) Hangers and vertical support rods shall be sized and spaced according to the referenced
pre-engineered seismic bracing systems.
h) Hangers shall be secured top and bottom by a double nut assembly to the threaded
support rod(s).
i) High density insulation inserts shall not be used at piping seismic attachment locations
unless indicated otherwise in the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing systems.
2) Select and utilize one of the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing systems for
application throughout the project.
3) Application of pre-engineered seismic bracing systems shall be as follows:
a) Designed, engineered and built by the system Subcontractor and based on the use of one
of seismic bracing systems listed above. These details and seismic bracing Installation
Drawings shall be reviewed and accepted by the CA before installation.
b) Select components for struts, strut clamps, strut fittings, strut nuts, hangers, pipe clamps,
steel cable restraints and hardware, in accordance with the selected preengineered
seismic bracing system.
c) Once a pre-engineered seismic bracing system is selected for the project and accepted by
the CA, the system shall be used for the entire project within a given mechanical system.
2.2 PIPEWORK
A. Piping shall comply with material specification described in this Section and as indicated on Hydronic
Piping Schedule.
B. The pipework clauses refer to British/European Standards, alternative equivalent international standards
will be acceptable with the approval of the CA. Steel pipework
1. Pipework up to and including 150mm. nominal bore shall be carried out in black mild steel heavy
quality mild steel tube to BS EN 10255. Above this bore, carbon steel pipes shall comply to BS EN
10216-1 and BS EN 10217-1
2. Where screwed pipework joints are used, only tapered threads as BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1 will be
accepted. The joints on pipework shall be clean threaded, pulled up tightly and made with an
approved jointing compound and long stranded fine hemp. After joints have been formed, all surplus
hemp shall be cut away and the joint wiped clean ready for painting.
3. Where pipes are held in vices when screwing or jointing, care shall be taken to ensure that the surface
of the pipe is not damaged. Any pipework so damaged will not be accepted and if installed shall be
replaced.
4. Flanges dimensions shall comply with tables 6 to 13 within BS EN 1092 -1 (for the specified pressure
rating).
5. Screwed fittings on steel piping shall be best quality malleable cast iron banded or beaded pattern to
BS 143 and BS 1256 and external screwed tapered thread to BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1. On equipment
or pipeline ancillaries having parallel threads they shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 228-1.
6. Long screw connections, running nipples, reducing nipples, back-nuts, bushed fittings shall not be
accepted.
7. All bends and tees shall be of the long sweep pattern; elbows and square tees shall not be permitted
on pumped systems.
8. Where unions are used these shall have bronze spherical seats; flat seated unions shall not be
permitted.
9. Pipework for welding shall be supplied with plain ends, joints being made with butt welds on site.
10. The Contractor shall allow only for electric arc welding for pipework above 100 mm bore. Pipework
below 100mm bore may be oxyacetylene or electric arc welded
11. Pipework with a nominal bore of 65mm. and above shall employ flanges for jointing at periodic
distances. Where flanges are used these shall comply with BS EN 1092 and to the table suitable for
the working pressure of the system. Flanges shall be machine faced and trimmed at the edges. All
joints shall be flush and shall use full face Taylor's corrugated rings coated with approved jointing
compound. All flanges shall be fillet welded to the pipework.
12. Branch connections on 20mm. and 15mm. pipes shall be by drilling and reamered, not welded. Branch
welds and shoes are not permitted unless the branch weld is at least two sizes less than the main size.
Welding metal or flux shall not project into the pipe bore and shall be finished clean, smooth and of
even thickness.
13. Remove scale, rust and temporary protective coating and paint with one coat of red oxide primer, as
work proceeds.
C. Copper pipework (above ground)
1. Copper tube shall conform to BS EN 1057:2006+A1:2010
2. Fittings for copper pipework shall be either:
a. Copper or cast gunmetal capillary type to BS EN 1254. Only lead free soft solder shall be
permitted for capillary type joints.
b. Capillary type to BS EN 1254 suitable for waste services. Tees, crosses and bends shall be 45º or
88½ º sweep type.
3. Where bends of other angles are required or where more suitable, formed bends in copper tubing
shall be used.
4. Formed bends to copper piping shall be made with the use of springs or an efficient bending machine
and shall maintain the diameter of the pipe and shall not involve rippled or scored work.
5. Fittings above 54mm. diameter shall be prefabricated in light gauge copper tube as specified above
using machine made bends and silver brazed swept branch connections.
6. Brass compression fittings shall comply with BS EN 1254.
7. Screwed joints on copper pipework shall be provided where specified and at screwed valves and
fittings. Screwed joints shall have taper threads complying with BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1.
8. Jointing materials shall be approved by the CA prior to commencement of the Works. The Contractor
shall obtain the approval from the local Water Authority for all jointing materials to be used.
D. Copper pipework (laid in ground)
1. Copper pipework, where laid in the ground shall be copper tube to BS EN 1057:2006+A1:2010 - R250
(class Y) and shall be jointed with copper or cast gunmetal, capillary type fittings.
2. All pipework shall be protected by wrapping with two layers of Denso tape or equal and approved.
3. Only lead free soft solder will be permitted for capillary type joints.
E. Copper pipework (installed within screed)
1. Copper pipework where laid in a concrete screed shall be plastic coated, pre-insulated copper tube to
BS EN 1057:2006+A1:2010 - R250 (class X)
2. No fittings are to be installed within the screed, and all bends are to be pulled.
F. Stainless steel pipework
1. Pipework shall be installed in light gauge stainless steel tube to BS EN 10312.
2. Jointing shall be means of unpolished chromium plated compression type fittings or proprietary push-
fit fittings with seal rings that are completed using a proprietary clamp/pressing tool.
3. Where bends or angles are required, then formed bends in the stainless steel tubing shall be used.
4. Stainless steel tubing shall not be used where pressures exceed 13 bar and fittings shall be selected to
suit the maximum system pressures.
G. Galvanised mild steel pipework
1. Medium and heavy grade galvanised steel pipework shall conform to BS EN 10255.
2. Fittings on 150 mm and below shall be galvanised malleable cast iron fittings conforming to BS 143
and BS1256 with screwed joints to BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1:2004
3. Fittings on pipework 175 mm and above shall be 45° and 90° long radius elbows, 180° return bends,
caps, eccentric reducers and branch bends to BS EN 10253-1 to the same quality and thickness as the
tube.
4. Care shall be exercised when threading the tube to ensure that threads are carefully cut to minimise
the number of exposed threads.
5. Stranded hemp and Boss white shall not be used under any circumstances.
H. GRP Pipework
1. GRP pipework shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5480, BS EN 1796 & BS EN 14364
2. The pipework shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.
3. The maximum distance between supports and the width of the supports shall be in accordance with
the manufacturers’ recommendations. Pipe supports shall not exert undue pressure on the pipe wall or
deform the pipe wall against the clamp or support.
4. All pipework fittings shall be factory fabricated and of the specified grade, class and pressure rating to
match the pipework.
5. All pipework shall be installed with the minimum number of joints and couplings and with adequate
accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment.
6. The installation shall be carried out under the supervision of a manufacturer’s representative or by a
qualified person with qualification certificate for the installation of GRP pipework. The certificate shall
be submitted to the CA for approval.
7. Operatives shall be fully trained by the manufacturer in the use and installation of its products.
8. Submit to the CA prior to the commencement of the Works documentary evidence that operatives
have undertaken such training by the manufacturer.
9. Care shall be taken during installation to ensure that the external surface of the pipework is not
damaged by rough handling or dragging along the ground. Metal slings, hooks and chains must not
come into direct contact with the pipe surface. Fabric slings shall be used and attached at 2 points (a
single sling from the centre of the pipe will not be acceptable).
10. Thermal expansion
a. The pipework shall be installed to accommodate expansion and contraction of the pipework.
b. Changes in direction or expansion loops shall be provided to accommodate expansion and

contraction wherever possible. If this is not practical expansion compensators may be used subject
to the approval of the CA.
c. The Contractor shall undertake a total analyses of the pipework and submit calculations together
with the selection data for compensation devices for the approval of the CA.
11. All pipework shall be supplied to site with factory fitted end caps on every pipe as recommended by
the manufacturer. The end caps shall be maintained during shipping, storage and handling to prevent
end damage to the pipe and dirt debris and moisture entering the pipe.
I. Chilled water & LTHW systems, buried pipes:
1. Pipework up to and including 150mm. nominal bore shall be pre-insulated black mild steel heavy
quality mild steel tube to BS EN 10255. Above this bore, pre-insulated carbon steel pipes complying
with BS EN 10216-1 and BS EN 10217-1 shall be used. The complete system shall include pre-insulated
pipes, fittings, valve chambers, and leak detection system.
2. Insulation material: Rigid polyurethane foam, density 48kg/ m³, thickness 50mm, thermal conductivity
0.02W/ m² °K maximum at mean temperature of 24°C.
3. Protective jacketing: made of extruded High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe having density 950kg/
m³.
4. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere all chilled water and LTHW buried pipework shall be provided with
a leak detection cable wrapped around the pipework and joints. The leak detection system shall
consist of a microprocessor based panel capable for continuous monitoring of leaks/faults and
connected to the BMS.
J. Under floor cooling:
1. Under floor cooling pipework shall be cross-linked polyethylene pipe (PE-Xa) in accordance with BS
7291-1 & BS 72091-3, BS 15875, EN ISO 21003, DIN 16892, DIN 4726, DIN ISO 15875
2. The pipework shall be installed and tested in accordance with BS EN 1264-4:2009 and the
manufacturers’ recommendations. The pipework shall utilise the manufacturers’ standard fixings to
secure the pipework in position.
3. The pipework shall be 20mm nominal diameter with a wall thickness of 1.9mm and shall include an
oxygen diffusion barrier.
4. The pipework shall be suitable for installation within concrete floors and shall have a minimum
guaranteed life of 25years.
5. No joints will be permitted on pipework buried within the floor.
6. Pipework connections shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
and shall consist of a non-detachable compression joint in accordance with DIN 18380
7. The pipework manufacturer shall manufacture and supply the manifolds which shall be of cast
dezincification brass and mounted on galvanised steel brackets and mounted within a purpose made
galvanised steel cabinet
8. The pipework from the manifold to the floor shall be protected with a flexible sleeve.
9. The pipework shall be provided with protection where it enters the floor.
K. Press-fit pipework systems
1. General
a. The use and extent of press-fit pipework systems shall be as indicated in the pipework schedule,
including the limitations of pipe sizes.
b. Press-fit systems shall only be used for water services systems.
c. Operatives shall be fully trained by the manufacturer in the use and installation of its proposed
products.
d. Submit to the CA prior to the commencement of the works documentary evidence that operatives
have undertaken such training by the manufacturer or their approved representative.
2. Pipework
a. Pipes shall adhere to the required specification of the press-fit system manufacturer.
b. Carbon steel (OD 12 to 54 mm) to DIN 2394. The pipe shall be manufactured from unalloyed high
purity low carbon steel. The outside of the pipe shall be primed and protected with a 1mm thick
polypropylene coating.
c. Stainless steel (NB 65 to 100 mm for heating only) tube manufactured from Cr-Ni \steel material
No 1.4301 to DIN EN 10088/BS 304
d. Copper tube to BS EN 1057:2006+A1:2010 - R250/R290
e. Stainless steel tube manufactured from Cr-Ni-Mo Steel material No 1.4401 to DIN EN 10088/BS
316 and conforming to DVGW W541.
f. Pipes shall be supplied with plastic end caps to prevent ingress of dirt and stored in dry conditions
prior to installation.
3. Pipework fittings
a. System operating temperatures and pressures shall be commensurate with the seal ring material.
Maximum operating pressure shall be 16 Bar and working temperatures of -5°C to 110°C. Prior to
commencement of the installation, the contractor shall confirm that the pipework system chosen
is capable of handling the design temperatures and pressures.
b. Purpose-made press-fit jointing fittings shall incorporate factory-fitted butyl rubber seal rings
within a circumferential profile.
c. The joint shall be accomplished by use of a jawed circumferential crimping tool or a similar tool
utilizing press slings.
d. Pipe fittings on carbon steel pipework shall be primed and painted matt white to match the
factory finished plastic coated tubes. In areas of high humidity and where moisture will contact
the surface of a fitting, a layer of anti-corrosion tape shall be applied after priming and prior to the
application of the insulation.
L. Victaulic Standard Grooved Piping System for Carbon Steel up to 300mm Diameter
1. General
a. The use and extent of Victaulic pipework systems shall be as indicated elsewhere including the
limitations of pipe sizes.
b. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved end piping systems, all
grooved products utilised shall be supplied by Victaulic. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the
same manufacturer as the grooved components.
c. Operatives shall be fully trained by the manufacturer in the use and installation of its proposed
products including grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation.
d. Submit to the CA prior to the commencement of the Works documentary evidence that operatives
have undertaken such training by the joint system manufacturer.
e. Allow for a visit from a Victaulic representative to visit site to review the installation, when not
more than 10% of the installation has been completed. The Contractor shall remove/replace any in
properly installed products at no expense to the contract.
f. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from
pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.
g. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended
service as specified, see later clauses.
h. Couplings installation shall be complete when visual metal-to-metal contact is reached.
2. Pipework
a. Pipework shall be carbon steel EN 10255, EN 10216, EN 10217 and EN 10224.
b. Pipework to have roll or cut grooved ends as appropriate to the pipe material, wall thicknesses,
pressures, sizes and method of joining.
3. Couplings for joining steel pipe
a. Couplings shall be suitable for pipe sizes from 20mm to 300mm. The couplings shall be
manufactured in two segments of cast ductile iron, grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be pressure
responsive synthetic rubber, flexible type.
b. Mechanical coupling bolts shall be zinc plated, heat treated carbon steel.
c. Coupling housings shall be provided for support and hanging in accordance with their
manufacturers recommendations and as stated elsewhere.
d. Couplings 20mm to 40mm shall be Victaulic style 77, standard flexible coupling. Gasket shall be
grade ‘E’ EPDM compound with green colour code, operating temperature -34°C to +110°C.
e. Couplings 50mm to 200mm shall be Victaulic style 177. Gasket shall be grade ‘EHP’ EPDM
compound with red colour code, operating temperatures -34°C to +110°C.
f. Couplings 250mm to 300mm shall be Victaulic style 77, standard flexible coupling. Gasket shall be
grade ‘E’ EPDM compound with green colour, operating temperatures -34°C to 110°C.
g. The gaskets shall be synthetic rubber conforming to steel pipe outside diameter and coupling
housing, manufactured of elastomers designated in EN BS 681.
h. End fittings
1) Standard end fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to Grade 65-45-12, forged steel with
9.53 mm wall thickness.
i. Hole cut branch outlets
1) For pipe size 15mm to 20mm. Strapless outlets to be Victaulic style 923.
2) Pipe sizes 50mm to 200mm. Bolted branch outlets shall be manufactured from ductile iron,
grade 65-45-12 with synthetic rubber gasket and heat treated carbon steel zinc plated bolts
and nuts. Victaulic style 920/920N.
j. Flange adapters
1) Flange adapters shall be suitable for use with grooved end pipe and fittings, flat faced for
connecting to EN BS 1092 PN 10/16, Victaulic style 741.
k. Tools
1) Any tools used shall be manufactured and supplied by Victaulic. Rolled sets or cut of grooves
shall be compatible with the pipe material and wall thickness.
l. Fittings
1) Valves, strainers etc. shall be as detailed within this specification, suitably flanged for
incorporation into the pipework system.
M. Refrigerant Pipework
1. Copper tubes for refrigerant pipework shall comply with BS EN 12735 and shall be suitable for the
refrigerant and oil used. .,
2. Copper tube shall be suitable for the operating pressures that will occur throughout the system.
3. Pipework shall be delivered to site with capped and sealed ends and shall be dry, completely free from
scale and internally degreased.
4. The number of joints shall be kept to a minimum and the longest possible lengths of copper pipe shall
be utilized where possible.
5. The design, installation and commissioning shall comply with BS EN 378 and all local codes.
6. Refrigeration pipework joints shall be brazed or silver soldered. Joints shall be kept to the absolute
minimum. Formed bends shall be used in preference to fittings.
7. Flared or screwed joints shall only be used with the approval of the CA.
8. Refrigeration plant accessories and controls
a. The refrigeration system shall be protected by a pressure relief device unless it is so constructed
that pressure due to fire conditions would be safely relieved anyway. The pressure relief
equipment provided shall discharge outside the building.
b. Each refrigeration system shall be complete with suitable connections for the safe removal of the
complete refrigerant charge.
c. The operation and safety devices shall be set to ensure safe operation, avoid potential damage
and nuisance tripping. High and low pressure switches shall be provided.
d. The thermostatic expansion valve shall have the following items preceding it in the refrigerant
liquid line:
e. Solenoid valve
f. Sight glass
g. Refrigerant drier (replaceable)
h. Refrigerant strainer and means of isolation
i. Capped refrigerant charging valve
j. Where fitted, an evaporator pressure regulating valve shall be protected by a strainer, and an
evaporator pressure gauge shall be provided up-stream of the valve, fitted with means of
isolation.
k. The condensing unit may be required to start under an exceptionally heavy load condition and
shall either have sufficient motor power available to meet this condition or be fitted with a device
or system which limits the maximum suction pressure.
l. If the direct expansion evaporator is at a higher level than the compressor it shall operate on a
pump down cycle.
m. To ensure that no oxides have been formed in the pipelines the CA will select three joints to be cut
out by the installer. Should oxides be found then all pipework shall be replaced at no cost to the
contract. All costs associated with the opening of these joins shall be allowed for by the installer.
n. Refrigerant stop valves which incorporate a spindle gland shall be of the back seat type. The
spindle gland shall be serviceable with the valve 'in -situ'.
o. All refrigerant pipework installations shall be designated, tested and commissioned by the installer
in accordance with all relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice.
9. Refrigeration leak detection
a. Enclosed spaces containing equipment or pipework charged with refrigerant shall be provided
with an automatic electronic refrigerant leak detection system. The detection system shall be
capable
b. of providing remote indication of an alarm condition. Unless otherwise indicated the alarm shall
be transmitted to the Building Management System.
c. The refrigerant monitor shall have an infrared sensing method and the sensing range shall be 0 TO
10,000ppm. The minimum refrigerant detection level shall be no more than 1 ppm and its
specified error over its measurement range shall be no more than +/- 3 ppm for 1 – 50 ppm range
and +/- 10% for 51-1,000 ppm range.
d. The refrigerant leak detection system shall be programmed to test for the specific refrigerant
within the space.
e. The monitor’s specified performance for its specified refrigerant shall be confirmed by a factory
test and the manufacturer shall provide a certificate of test/verification with the unit. This test
shall be done with a NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) traceable mixture of
the monitor’s scheduled refrigerant(s).
f. The refrigerant monitor shall have a data display screen and keypad that provides indication of
sensed refrigerant concentration, editing of monitor configurations, editing of alarm limits, alarm
status, and alarm reset.
g. The unit shall have a self-diagnosing fault alarm and a minimum of three levels of refrigerant
concentration alarm set points.
h. All units shall be UL listed.
i. The quantity of refrigerant monitor sampling sensors shall be adequate to the number of chillers
supplied and plant room configuration. The minimum number of monitors shall be 12 (unless
stated otherwise elsewhere), however the final quantity and location shall be as advised by the
chiller manufacturer.
j. An audible alarm shall be installed on the refrigerant monitor.
k. An alarm strobe light shall be installed on the refrigerant monitor. The light will operate upon
audible alarm operation.
l. Monitor shall have an ambient temperature operating range of 5°C to 50° C).
m. The refrigerant leak monitor detection system shall be interfaced with the BMS.
10. The CA will place a strong emphasis on the standard of brazing and the associated quality control
procedures in order that the required standards are achieved in all cases.
11. Appropriate refrigeration installation tools must be utilised.
12. Insulate the entire length of pipework and to avoid contact between copper and galvanising of
support tray.
13. All external refrigerant pipes shall be fully shielded with a reflective or of a light coloured finish to
protect against solar radiation.
14. For refrigeration copper pipework 28 mm diameter or smaller shall be supported on continuous cable
tray.
15. Refrigerants used shall be as detailed in the particular specification, schedules or detail drawings, no
refrigerant comprising or containing CFC’s or HCFC’s shall be used.
16. Any refrigerant used shall be fully compatible with all materials the complete refrigeration system is
comprised of.
17. Refrigeration equipment shall have a pressure test and a leakage pressure test after manufacture.
Tests on the refrigerant side shall be made in accordance with BS 4434. Water-side pressure tests shall
be 1.5 times the working pressure unless otherwise indicated.
18. Operatives engaged on work to refrigeration systems shall be fully trained and be registered with the
appropriate body.
N. Fan coil flexible pipe connections
1. Flexible hose connections shall be provided on all pipework connections to fan coil units unless stated
otherwise.
2. Fan coil connections shall consist of an EPDM inner liner with a stainless steel wire braid. The fittings
shall be nickel plated brass with stainless steel ferrules.
3. Hoses shall have an overall length of not less than 300mm. and resist kinking when bent through 180
degrees and shall be designed for a working pressure of 20 bar and temperatures of up to 110° C.
4. The hoses shall be colour coded red and blue to indicate its suitability for hot or chilled water.
5. Chilled water connections shall be fully insulated and the insulation fitted with end caps.
2.3 VALVES AND PIPING ANCILLARIES
A. All valves, cocks, vents and accessories must be fitted in such a manner that they are accessible for
operation and maintenance. Valve operating handles must be easily accessible and operation must not be
impeded by structure or other services.
B. Access to double regulating valves must be such that scales and verniers are clearly visible.
C. At least 100 mm clearance from pressure test points must be allowed to enable manometer tubes to be
connected without kinking. Ensure test points are located to enable safe, positive quick–coupling and
uncoupling of the flexible connections.
D. Large valves shall not be supported by the pipework to which they are supported and additional supports
positioned close to each side of the valve shall be provided. Removal of the valve shall not allow the
adjacent pipework to sag.
E. Provision of lockshields on valves
1. Where valves are shown as lockshield pattern or where the accidental closure or opening of a valve
from its normal functioning position could cause harm to equipment or persons, then the valve shall
be of the lockshield type with a bronze, chromium plated, or cast iron shield and complete with a
loose key. In all other respects the valve shall be as specified for wheel type valves but of the
lockshield type.
F. Pipeline strainers
1. Strainers shall be provided on the inlet connections to all pumps, meters, air handling and fan coil unit
cooling coils, pressure reducing valves and where stated elsewhere or shown on the drawings to safe
guard against dirt and other foreign particles.
2. Strainers shall be of the 'Y' type up to 150 mm and pot or "Y" type on 200 mm and unless indicated
otherwise elsewhere and shall be located between isolating valves with a convenient drain adjacent
and installed in such a way that the strainer element/basket can be readily removable below the level
of the body.
3. Strainers shall be the same size as the pipeline immediately before any reduction in size of pipeline to
suit a control valve or pump/plant connection.
4. Strainer elements shall be cleaned and free from dirt prior to practical completion.
5. Provide plugged connections for drain, air vent and differential pressure monitoring located in the
adjacent pipework or within the strainer body. Threads shall be to BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1.
6. Provide pressure gauges on the inlet and outlet of each strainer on sizes 32 mm and above unless
stated otherwise.
7. Strainers over 100 mm shall be complete with an adequate size of blow-down connection and drain
cock and shall have a discharge pipe which shall run to the nearest gully.
8. Unless otherwise stated strainers shall have a stainless steel element with perforation size as indicated
below. Screen free flow area shall be not less than 250% of the pipe bore.
9. Screen perforations:
a. Nominal pipe size - 15 mm to 50mm
1) Within range 0.7 – 0.9 mm diameter
b. Nominal pipe size - 65 mm and over
1) Within range 1.5 – 1.8 mm diameter
c. The Contractor shall submit to the CA for approval details of all strainer elements prior to
ordering.
d. Baskets shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressures as stated elsewhere without
distortion.
e. Strainers shall be complete with an asbestos free non-stick gasket.
f. Strainer bodies up to 50 mm shall be bronze with compression ends to BS EN 1254-2.
g. Strainer bodies above 50 mm shall be cast iron with flanged ends to BS EN 1092-2.
G. Check valves (Non-return valves)
1. Whether indicated or not indicated in the Specification or on the Drawings, non-return valves shall be
fitted where plant operates on an automatic changeover basis or where flow reversal can occur.
2. All valves shall have flow direction indicators and shall have a pressure rating to suit the maximum
operating pressure of the system. Where used on systems with operating temperatures in excess of
65°C the disk and seating shall be suitable for the conditions.
3. Non-return valves shall be either the straight pattern or swing check type. Check valves shall be
installed in horizontal pipework unless they are specifically selected for operation in vertical pipework.
They shall be selected to present a low resistance to flow.
4. Up to and including 50mm
a. Type: Swing type check valve to BS 5154 and BS EN 12288
b. Body material: Bronze
c. Pressure rating: PN16
d. Temperature range: -10 to 100°C
e. End connections: BS21 taper
f. Specification: Metal disc; screwed in cap; BSI Kitemark; WRAS listed.
5. 65mm to 150mm
a. Type: Swing pattern check valve to BS EN 12334
b. Body material: Cast iron
d. Temperature range: -10 to 220°C
e. End connections: Flanged BS EN 1092-2
f. Specification: Cast iron disc; fibrous gasket.
6. 200mm and above
a. Type: Wafer pattern check valve to BS EN 12334
b. Body material: Cast or ductile iron with stainless steel stem
c. Seat EDPM or reinforced PTFE
d. Pressure rating: PN25
e. Temperature range: -10 to 220°C
H. Safety and relief valves
1. Safety valves shall discharge with rapid opening action to prevent pre-determined safe pressure being
exceeded.
2. Relief valves shall discharge with opening action proportional to increase in pressure above set
pressure.
3. Safety and relief valves shall meet the requirements of the European Pressure Equipment Directive
97/23/EC and the appropriate British Standard for the equipment to which they are connected, and be
suitable for the operating conditions of the system. Valves shall be sized for the rated output of the
appliance.
4. Direct acting safety valves shall be in accordance with BS EN 4126-1.
5. Pipework connections shall be fitted, where indicated, to provide discharge connection to safety and
relief valves. Discharge and waste pipes shall terminate at visible and safe positions with a tundish to
be agreed with the CA.
6. Spring type safety valves shall be of the enclosed spring loaded high lift type.
7. Valves up to 50mm nominal diameter shall be bronze or DZR copper alloy body as indicated and
threaded to BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1.
8. Valves 65mm and above shall be cast iron and approved to BS 6759 and flanged to BS EN 1092-2.
They shall have a screwed on or bolted on spring casing, carbon steel spring and a gun metal valve
head, seat and adjustable screws and ferrule.
9. Valves shall be complete with a screwed on top cover, testing lever and locking device as BS 759 and
shall have a discharge pipe one size larger than the valve which shall terminate 300 mm from the floor
level.
10. The valve release pressure shall be set at a pressure above the system operating pressure and as
agreed with the CA. The spring range shall be selected to give equal adjustment either side of the
operating pressure.
11. Valves shall be stamped with their set pressure and limiting temperature. Test certificates shall be
provided for all valves with the valve serial number on the certificate.
I. Isolating valves
1. Ball Valves 15 mm up to 50mm
a. Type: Ball valve
b. Body material: Bronze or DZR brass (corrosion resistant)
c. Pressure rating (min): PN16
d. End connections: Threaded to BS EN 10226-1
e. Specification: PTFE seat and packing
f. DZR brass ball
g. Mild steel (zinc plated) with PVC covered lever WRAS listed and BS kitemark approved.
h. Temperature range: -10°C to 100°C
i. Operation: Lever operated, quarter turn, tight shut-off
j. Operation of the valve shall generally be by lever fitted with stop permitting a 90° movement of
the ball between fully open and closed position. The handle position shall indicate whether valve is
open or closed. In areas where space is limited a T-handle shall be fitted.
k. Valves on insulated pipework shall be provided with an extended stem in which the lever is held
above the pipe insulation.
l. As indicated, valve spindles shall be suitable for operation by a screwdriver where the valve is
liable to unauthorised use or lever operation
2. Butterfly valve 65 mm and above
a. Type: Butterfly to BS EN 593
d. Specification: Short wafer lugged type
e. Liner EPDM
f. Stainless steel shaft and disc
g. Operation: Lever operated up to 150 mm.
h. Valves 150 mm and above shall be complete with gear unit.
i. Valves shall have a pressure rating to suit the maximum operating pressure of the system.
j. Valves shall be suitable for fitting between flanges complying with BS EN 1092, centrally located
by fully lugged fixing bolts.
3. Gate valve 65mm and above (alternative to butterfly valve)
a. Type: Gate valve to BS EN 1171
c. Pressure rating (minimum): PN16
d. End connections: Flanged to BS EN 1092-2
e. Specification: Wedge disk
f. Non-rising stem of manganese bronze
g. Inside screw (non-rising stem)
h. Bronze disc
i. Malleable iron hand-wheel
j. BSI kite mark approved
k. Operation: Hand-wheel
J. Valves for flow regulation
1. Valves shall be selected to produce the required pressure drop at between 50% and 75% of the fully
open position.
2. Double regulating valve up to and including 50mm
a. Type: Double regulating valve to BS 7350
b. Body material: Bronze
d. Temperature range: -10°C to 100°C
e. End connections: Threaded to BS 21 and BS EN 10226-1
f. Specification: Oblique or Y pattern
g. Valves shall be of the screwed end pattern and shall be complete with position indicator and
lockable adjustable setting position.
h. Where necessary, valves shall be selected for low flow conditions.
3. Double regulating valves 65mm and above
a. Type: Double regulating valve to BS 7350
d. Temperature range: -10°C to 120°C
e. End connections: Flanged to BS EN 1092-2
f. Specification: Oblique or Y pattern
g. Rising stem
h. Bolted on bonnet
i. Screwed boss into which an in-built drain cock/valve or air vent can be provided
j. Hand-wheel material: Cast iron
4. Commissioning sets
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final selection of all commissioning sets.
b. Commissioning sets shall comprise metering stations and double regulating valves installed in the
positions for the proportional balancing of heating and chilled water pipework systems.
c. The metering station shall be fitted to the upstream valve connection in accordance with the
d. The Contractor shall submit to the CA, prior to ordering, a comprehensive schedule, prepared by
the manufacturer, detailing the correct selection of each commissioning set in respect to signal
pressure and valve position.
e. Flow measurement devices must always be sized using pressure differential – flow rate criteria and
the general assumption that line size devices will suffice will not be acceptable.
f. Double regulating valves shall be selected to ensure that the required head absorption occurs at
valve settings not less than 25% open.
g. Flow measurement devices should be selected and sized to meet the following requirements at
the design flow rate:
1) The minimum pressure differential signal should not be less than 1kPa
2) The minimum head loss across the device should be consistent with the minimum pressure
differential signal requirements
3) With water flow rates of 0.04 l/s or less, low flow measurement units shall be used.
4) The accuracy of the flow rate derived from the pressure differential across the signal
generating device shall be within ± 5%.
h. Where orifice valves are specified, these shall be used in their fully open position to ensure
minimum pressure drop across the valve and the valve must provide positive shut-off.
i. Commissioning sets shall be fitted in a straight length pipe run. The Contractor shall be
responsible for obtaining from the flow measurement device manufacturer the appropriate
number of pipe diameters to be allowed upstream and downstream of the device. Typical values
are 10 pipe diameters downstream and 5 diameter upstream of any change in pipe direction to
minimise the effect of turbulence on the pressure signals at the measuring device. Flow charts
allowing the manometer readings to be converted into flow rates shall be provided for each size
of measuring station.
j. The Contractor shall take due care throughout the installation and during the flushing and
cleaning process to ensure that the flow measurement devices remain clean and undamaged.
k. Ensure that test points are not installed so as to become dirt traps. Where practical, high pressure
test points shall point upwards to allow ease of venting.
l. Up to 50mm
1) Single unit commissioning valve with combined functions of regulation and flow
measurement
2) Type: Fixed orifice double regulating valve to BS 7350
3) Valve body material: Bronze
4) Pressure rating: PN25
5) Temperature range: -10 to 100°C
6) End connections: Threaded to BS 21
7) Specification: Fitted with two insertion points allowing quick connection;

WRAS approved; integral orifice plate
m. Orifice plate (Flow measuring device) 15mm up to 50mm
1) Type: Flow measuring device complying with BS 7350
2) Valve body material: Bronze
5) Specification: Fitted with two insertion points allowing quick connection;

integral orifice plate; flow measurement accuracy ± 5%
n. 65mm and above
1) Shall consist of a flanged oblique pattern double regulating valve complete with cast iron
metering station installed on the return side of any circuit or sub-circuit
2) Type: Fixed orifice double regulating valve and close coupled fixed orifice
fitting manufactured to BS 7350
3) Valve body material: Cast iron
4) Orifice plate: Stainless steel orifice plate with two stainless steel
extension tubes fitted with insertion test points
7) End connections: Flanged BS EN 1092-2
8) Specification: Cast iron disc; cast iron bonnet;
9) Hand-wheel material: Cast iron
10) Independent means shall be provided for positive isolation on pressure tappings.
5. Orifice plate (Flow measuring device)
a. Where Orifice plates are specified or indicated on the drawings they shall be to the same
specification for Commissioning Sets and comply with BS 7350
6. Automatic balancing valves
a. Automatic balancing valves with replaceable cartridges maybe used as alternative to the manual
balancing valves but cartridges shall not be installed during flushing of the system.
b. All automatic balancing valves up to 50mm shall have a "Y" pattern brass body with pressure
temperature plugs built in.
c. Flow rates of the auto-flow valves shall be in accordance with the Equipment Schedules and set at
the factory. The Contractor shall review the flow rates based upon the selected plant and
equipment and select the valves based upon the actual flow rate where this has been revised.
d. The cartridges shall be available in multiple pressure ranges and the specific range shall be
selected based upon the system requirements.
e. All valves using non-visible cartridges shall be provided with an identification tag containing
identification code, valve model number, flow rating and differential pressure range.
f. 15 mm to 50 mm
1) Automatic balancing valves shall have replaceable cartridges with flow rates determined at the
factory which shall be maintained within ±5%.
2) The flow cartridge shall be stainless steel and each cartridge shall be coded to indicate flow
rate duty. Brass and nickel plated cartridges shall not be acceptable.
3) The cartridge shall be removable from the body to provide access for change, inspection and
cleaning without removing the body from the pipeline.
4) The valve shall be complete with two colour coded pressure tapping ports.
5) If the unit is not isolated during system flushing the flow cartridge shall not be installed and a
blank flushing cap shall be installed.
6) The stem and test points shall be provided with extension pieces to allow for insulation.
7) Body material: DZR copper alloy
8) Maximum Pressure: 25 bar
9) End connections: Threaded to BS 21
g. 65mm and above
1) Automatic balancing valves 65mm and above, shall have a ductile iron body with pressure
temperature plugs built-in.
2) The requirements for the cartridges shall be as detailed for valves up to 50mm.
7. Differential Pressure control Valves
a. The valves shall be designed to maintain a constant downstream pressure irrespective of the
upstream pressure. The valve shall have an adjustable set point and shall be self-operated (i.e no
requirement for external connections.)
b. All control valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with BS EN 60534
c. Differential pressure valves shall be selected based upon a maximum valve flow coefficient (Kv) of
0.75
d. Valves up to 50mm shall have the body manufactured from brass with a pressure rating of PN25.
e. The control valve shall comprise of a stainless steel pressure balanced piston mechanism to enable
it to close against high out of balance differential pressures. The plug construction shall be
shaped to give a low noise emission.
f. The valve characteristic shall provide good control at small valve openings. The selected valve
must be able to fully close against the maximum applied pump head and the construction of the
seat and plug shall be stainless steel to combat the effects of cavitation.
g. Valves 65mm and above shall be of cast iron construction and a pressure rating of PN16.
h. The DPCV should be installed on the return line and shall be supplied with minimum 1200 mm
capillary pipe for connection and sensing of pressure from supply line. The design of DPCV should
be such when installed on return line, the return pressure is sensed internally i.e. without any
additional external capillary pipe.
i. The DPCV should not have external sealing elements. The DPCV valve body shall be made of
Ductile Iron EN-GJS-400.
j. The body should be Electrophoretic painted to ensure longer durability. The diaphragm and
gaskets shall be made of EPDM.
k. The DPCV shall be provided with an adjustment ring to deliver desired differential pressure.
l. The DPCV shall have provided with measuring points. The DPCV shall have two venting screws for
removal of air.
m. Valve body shall be marked with the brand name, PN rating, DN, Material, Kvs, ΔP and flow
direction arrow. Installation of a strainer upstream of the DPCV is recommended.
n. The DPCV shall be supplied along with a partner Variable Orifice Double Regulating Valve from
the same manufacturer. All necessary accessories for connecting the capillary pipe to VODRV shall
be supplied along with DPCV.
o. The minimum and maximum working temperature range of the DPCV should -20 C° and +120° C
respectively.
p. Valve should be suitable for Pressure Class PN 16 and PN 25 as applicable and capable of
operating under maximum differential pressure of 800kPa.
q. The DPCV should be delivered in fully assembled condition. Assembly of valve, actuator and
distance piece at site is not permitted.
r. A computerized balancing instrument with ISO 9001 calibration certificate preferably from the
same manufacturer shall be handed over by the contractor after the project completion.
8. Pressure Independent Control valve
a. The valves shall be designed to maintain a constant downstream pressure irrespective of the
upstream pressure and incorporate a motorised actuator to control the flow rate.
b. All control valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with BS EN 60534
c. Differential pressure and flow regulation valves shall be selected based upon a maximum valve
flow coefficient (Kv) of 0.90
d. Valves shall have cast iron bodies and a pressure rating of PN16.
e. The control valve shall comprise of a stainless steel pressure balanced piston mechanism to enable
it to close against high out of balance differential pressures. The plug construction shall be
shaped to give a low noise emission.
f. Stroke: ≥ 4mm for valves DN15-20 and ≥ 6.5mm for valves DN25 and above.
g. Characteristics: Control part of the valve shall have EQM (Equal Percentage) Characteristics and
shall not be Linear. EQM characteristic of the PICV shall be inherent and shall not be achieved by
modification of the valve characteristic from Linear to EQM using an Actuator.
h. Differential Pressure Control Element: shall be with membrane and not cartridge type.
i. Flow Setting must enable stepless setting of the flow rate from 100% to 0%.
j. Body material:
1) 15 to 50 mm - Bronze or dezincification resistant copper alloy equivalent to CuZn33Pb2Si-S

(CC751S) according to EN 1982.
2) 65 to 150 mm - Ductile Iron equivalent to EN-GJS-400-15 according to EN 1563.
k. End Connections:
1) 15 to 50 mm - Male Threaded Connection according to ISO 228 or according to EN 12266-1

and AS 871.
2) 65 to 150 mm - Flange Connection according to EN-1092-2, type 21.
l. Diaphragm & Seals: EPDM or HNBR.
m. Valve Plug: Polyphenylsulphide (PPS), dezincification resistant copper alloy or Stainless Steel. n.
Spring: Stainless Steel.
n. Pressure class: 16 bar or as per actual maximum static pressure in current application.
o. Maximum Differential Pressure: 4 bar or as per actual maximum differential pressure in current
application.
p. Installation: Uni-directional access to measuring points, setting and connection of the actuator.
q. The valve shall be fitted with a fully modulating actuator supplied by the valve manufacturer to
ensure the compatibility.
r. Actuator shall accept 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC or 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA (with reversed option) control
signal for accurate modulating control. Actuator stroke shall be compatible with the stroke of the
control valve for reliable and versatile operations.
s. Actuator shall have valve stroke adaptation and position indicator visible from all sides. Actuator
shall have linear characteristic.
t. Actuator shall be rated IP54 in accordance to EN 60529.Actuator shall be suitable for ambient
temperature ranging from 0 to 50 deg C. Actuator shall be selected with adequate force/torque to
work within the operating range of differential pressure required for the application.
u. Power Supply: 24VAC/230VAC, 50/60 Hz.
v. All the actuator installed on air handling units or actuators installed on pipe diameter more than
50 mm shall be capable of providing the valve status (feedback) to the BMS system.
K. Combined Ball Valve and Strainer
1. Where indicated on the drawings provide a combinedf ball valve and strainer. Operation of the valve
shall allow the strainer to be inspected and removed for flushing
2. The combined isolation valve/strainer body shall be manufactured from DZR bronze to BS EN 12420
and shall be supplied complete with a 300 micron mesh marine grade 316 stainless steel strainer.
3. The combined ball valve/strainer shall be supplied with extension spindles on all chilled water
pipework to allow for continuous insulation.
L. Float operated valves
1. All float operated valves and materials shall be WRAS approved.
2. When installed float operated valves shall be capable of achieving the minimum air gap as required by
the Local Water Supply Regulations.
3. Ball float valves shall be fitted with a servicing valve on the inlet.
4. Valves shall be manufactured from cast gunmetal or bronze of a non-dezincifiable grade.
5. To prevent back siphonage no connection of a dip tube or silencing pipe to the discharge port shall be
permitted.
6. Float valves fitted to feed and expansion tanks shall be provided with an approved modified float arm
such that it allows the float to move a sufficient distance to accept or allow the anticipated
expansion/contraction volume of water within the tank.
7. 15 mm float operated valves shall be of the plastic body diaphragm type to BS 1212 unless stated
otherwise. Plastic floats shall be to BS 2456.
8. 22 mm and above float operated valves shall be the full bore bronze or gunmetal body equilibrium
pattern ball float type to BS 1212 with copper float to BS 1968.
M. Tundishes
1. Tundishes shall be provided adjacent to equipment as indicated. The units shall be formed from either
3mm copper sheet or mild steel sheet (galvanised after manufacturer). The tundish shall be a tapered
reducing cone with a minor diameter to suit the drain line. The major diameter shall be 50 mm larger
than the minor diameter, tapering at approximately 30 degrees.
N. Draw-off cocks (Drain cocks)
1. Drain cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants and as indicated elsewhere in the
Specification and on the Drawings and at all low points within all water services systems to allow the
system to be fully flushed and drained..
2. 15 mm – 50 mm draw-off cocks shall be the straight type, gland pattern with gunmetal or bronze
body, threaded to BS 21 and complete with brass hose union outlet, screwed blank cap and strap.
Plugs shall have a square head with a slot to indicate plug position. A loose malleable iron lever shall
be provided with each plug valve. Each draw-off cock shall be hydraulically tested to 20 bar.
O. Flexible pipe connections
1. Flexible pipe compensators shall be installed on pipe connections to pumps, compressors, chillers,
cooling towers, cooling and heating coils on air handling units supported on anti-vibration mounts.
2. Rubber bellows shall be a single convolution of multi-ply EPDM rubber with corrosion resistant steel
wire mesh reinforced body.
3. The units shall be suitable for the working pressure and temperature.
4. The units shall have an indelible identification indicating manufacturer, date of manufacture, type, size,
pressure rating and a batch number.
5. Ensure flexible connections have a design life of 10 years at 100 °C. Units shall be in accordance with
DIN 4809 and after a service life of 10 years at 100 °C must have a burst pressure of not less than 30
bar.
6. Flanges shall be to BS EN 1092 and shall be able to swivel and be removable.
7. Threaded ends shall be to BS 21 with one union end.
8. Where untied bellows are used the manufacturers recommendations for anchors and guides shall be
followed.
9. Tie bars shall be threaded and with adjustable length. Tie bars with rubber top hat washers shall be
used where the working pressure exceeds 1.5 bar.
10. Ensure flexible connections are tied when the plant is on vibration isolation mountings.
11. For working temperatures between 65 °C and 90 °C the bellows shall be steel wire mesh re enforced
throughout and manufactured in accordance with DIN 4809.
12. For working temperatures up to 65 °C the rubber bellows shall be high tensile synthetic fibre
reinforced.
13. For hot water services the bellows liner shall be of a food grade butyl rubber.
P. De-aerators and dirt separators (LTHW, Chilled Water)
1. As indicated on the drawings, a combined inline de-aerator and dirt separator shall be provided on
each closed circuit system where the maximum operating temperature does not exceed 100°C.
2. The static head for heating systems shall not exceed 15m and 5m on chilled water systems.
3. Where the static head for heating systems exceeds 15m and 5m on chilled water systems separate
positive vacuum de-aerator and dirt separator shall be provided on each closed circuit system.
4. Units, including connections, shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
5. Units shall be horizontally mounted in the main supply pipe at the point of maximum system
temperature and be adequately supported to be stress free.
6. The units shall be designed to prevent clogging and to maintain a constant pressure drop across the
unit irrespective of the amount of dirt trapped.
7. Water velocities through the unit shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations but
through a standard unit shall not exceed 1.5 m/s unless otherwise stated. Units for velocities between
1.5 m/s and 3 m/s shall be specially selected.
8. Casings shall be manufactured from mild steel incorporating internal spiral wound copper mesh
system. Connections shall be line size with flanges complying with BS EN 1092 for sizes 50 mm and
above.
9. A drain valve capable of permitting dirt removal while the system is operational shall be provided at
the base of each unit.
10. An automatic air release mechanism shall be provided at the top of the unit comprising solid
polycarbonate floats and spring loaded self-closing valve to ensure positive seal to prevent leakages.
11. The unit shall be suitable for a maximum operating pressure of 10 bar unless otherwise stated.
12. Where indicated, a demountable unit shall be provided in which the lower section can be opened and
the internal mechanism removed for cleaning and inspection.
13. Positive vacuum de-aerator
a. As stated above on systems where a combined de-aerator and dirt separator is not suitable an
automatic vacuum de-aerator shall be provided.
b. The de-aerator shall take a quantity of water from the system and by closing a solenoid valve
create a vacuum and thereby release the dissolved gases within the water, which are then
removed via an air vent within the unit. The de-gassed water is then pumped back into the system.
c. The de-aerator shall be connected in side stream fashion using 2 x 15mm connections. The unit
shall be fully self-circulating.
d. The de-aerator shall have a vessel, which is isolated from the main system, and has a pump to
reduce the pressure of a sample of circulating water to below atmospheric.
e. For cooling systems, the de-aerator shall be suitably insulated to prevent condensation.
f. The unit shall have a maximum operating temperature of 0°C-85°C standard operating pressure of
6 bar, with minimum inlet pressure being 1 bar.
g. The pressure differential de-aerator shall be connected to the system in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
h. The De-aerator shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's representative.
i. Vacuum degasser should be pump based with cyclonic principle and should have a control unit
with microprocessor control, touch screen color display and if required water make-up with
pressure break tank.
j. The devices shall be equipped with a measurement device for the determination of the residual
gas content in the water. This device turns off the system as soon as the gas content of the water
is low enough. If the gas content rises the system starts the degassing process again.
k. The measurement device shall also report a suspected leakage in the degassing unit if the gas
quantity is too high. The devices shall provide a connection prepared for a water make-up. The
device shall be designed in such a manner that the make-up water is degassed before it is
delivered to the system.
l. Ethernet connection to the web, Mod Bus connection to BMS systems and volt free contacts shall
be provided for BMS monitoring.
m. Degassing and Water-Make up control unit should have pump, solenoid valve, degassing vessel,
break tank, feedback relay and microprocessor control.
n. Degassing and Water-Make up control unit should be CE-tested, according to the requirements of
the European Directives PED/DEP 97/23/EC, 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC.
o. The system pressure to be measured as a 4-20 mA signal at the control unit by means of
electronic sensors. Microprocessor control should ensure an intelligent, secure system operation,
self-optimizing with memory function.
p. Microprocessor control should have illuminated graphical color touch screen display for the
representation of all relevant parameters, with numeric and graphical display of the pressure and
water level in the vessel. The control unit can withstand a maximum admissible pressure within 8
or 10 bar based on the system requirement.
q. Water make-up should maintain the controlled process of water make-up by means of contact
water meter and electronic check of the make-up quantity, time and frequency.
r. Pressure maintaining monitoring device is required to check of water-make up quantity, time and
frequency.
s. Pressure maintaining monitoring device should be according to EN 1282-4.7.4.Water make-up

break tank should be AB type according to EN 1717, SVGW-tested.
t. The control panel shall display:
• System static pressure at the point of degasser connection
• Operation mode (auto/standby)
• Collective alarm
• Motor protection of the pump triggered
• Pump status
• Solenoid valve status
• Water make-up status
Q. Air Bottles
1. On pipework up to and including 80 mm size, air bottle shall be manufactured from 50 mm size tube
300mm long with a screwed or brazed cap. Air bottles on pipework 100 mm and above shall be
manufactured from 100 mm size tube, 400 mm long. Bottles shall be manufactured from galvanised
steel tube on ferrous pipework or copper tube on non-ferrous pipework systems.
2. All air bottles shall be complete with a 10 mm gun metal key operated, needle seated air cock.
3. Where the air cock is at high level or inaccessible from floor level a 15 mm size steel or copper
extension tube shall be provided to a position within 1.5 m of the floor and fitted with a 10 mm size
needle-seated globe valve or air cock.
4. Automatic air vents shall be provided where air bottles are not practicable to install or at locations
approved by the CA.
R. Automatic Air Vents
1. Automatic air vents shall be 15 mm and have a bronze body, copper or stainless steel float and guides,
non-corrodible needle valve and seats and be suitable for the system temperature and pressure.
2. Each automatic air vent shall be complete with a lock-shield valve.
3. The discharge pipe from the automatic air vent shall be manufactured in copper tube and shall be run
to discharge over the nearest gully, tundish or other suitable location to the approval of the CA.
4. Air venting devices and any air release pipes installed in exposed positions where freezing is likely to
occur shall be insulated to the required standard.
S. Open air vent pipes shall not be less than 20mm diameter continued up beyond the highest point of the
system and turned to discharge over the feed and expansion tank. All open vents shall run with a
continuous rise from the point of connection to the system, to the point of discharge.
T. Dirt pockets
1. Full-bore dirt pockets shall be provided at the bottom of all vertical pipework risers, the dirt pockets
shall be valved to allow pockets to be drained without draining the system.
2. The dirt pockets shall be formed from 300mm. length of similar full bore pipework beyond the last
branch and/or connection complete with isolating valve and drain cock.
3. The isolating valve shall be line size up to a maximum of 50 mm.
U. Overflows and condensate drain
1. Equipment which has a continuous or intermittent discharge of waste water shall have an
overflow/drain connection and discharge pipe which shall fall continuously to the nearest gully.
2. Overflow/drains shall be the same diameter as the connection size to the equipment and increased as
soon as possible to 25 mm.
3. A 150 mm diameter by 150 mm high tundish shall be provided adjacent to the equipment into which
the overflow/drain shall discharge.
4. On connections to coils/cooling towers a waste trap shall be installed between the coil/cooling tower
and the drain.
5. Where more than one overflow/drain runs into a common pipework drain the diameter of the
pipework shall be sized, by the contractor, to ensure that the system drains to the gully at all times.
6. An air break trap shall be provided to each drain to comply with CIBSE TM 13.
7. Glass traps or clear plastic traps shall be provided for air handling unit drain trays
8. Glass traps shall be used in all healthcare and clean room applications.
V. Water Temperature Gauges/Thermometers
1. Temperature gauges shall be provided as indicated on the drawings and at the following locations:-
a. On flow and return connections to heating and chilled water coils except on individual fan coil
units and induction type terminal units.
b. On flow and return chilled water and condenser water connections to water chillers and heat
pumps.
c. On the flow and return connections to each heating boiler.
d. On the primary and secondary flow and return connections to each plate heat exchanger.
e. On the main common flow and return header from water chillers, heat pumps and heating boilers.
f. On the flow and return pipework of the secondary heating and chilled water circuits.
g. On the flow and return pipework to the underfloor cooling/heating.
2. Temperature gauges/thermometers shall be as follows;
a. 100 mm diameter gas filled type acting through mechanical linkage to BS EN 13190 with matt
black case and polished chrome bezel, rigid stem to suit particular application, black indicating
pointer with red hand set and graduated in °C with the range equal to twice the normal operating
temperature. The accuracy of thermometers shall be ± 1% of the full scale reading,
b. Where gauges are externally located they shall be of weather resistant construction.
W. Pressure/Altitude Gauges
1. Pressure gauges and gauge cocks shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings and
fitted to indicate system pressures/heads at the following points: -
a. On chilled water and condenser water connections to each water chiller and heat pump.
b. On the inlet and outlet connections to plate heat exchangers
c. On the inlet and outlet connections to boilers
d. Pressure differential gauges across the suction and discharge connection of every circulating
pump.
e. On the inlet and outlet connection to pressure reducing valves.
f. On the inlet connections to strainers (32mm and above).
2. Each pressure/altitude gauge shall be 100 mm diameter and of the bourdon tube operation type to BS
EN 837 with red hand set and black indicating pointers, removable front glass face, matt black case
and polished chrome bezel, scale graduated in kPa to twice the pressure range covered with normal
indication mid-point of scale.
3. The pressure/altitude gauges shall be complete with the correct size of pocket and gunmetal gauge
cock with ebony handle. The accuracy of the gauges shall be ± 1% of the scale range.
4. All pressure gauge connections shall be provided with a “pig tail” syphon between the system
pipework and the instrument to protect the gauge from pulsations.
5. Where gauges are externally located they shall be of weather resistant construction.
X. Temperature and Pressure Test Points
1. Self-sealing test plugs shall be fitted where indicated on the drawings and in addition the positions
listed below. The plugs shall be fitted in to screwed bosses into the pipeline at bends or other
locations to ensure full penetration of the gauge probe and shall be suitably rated for each application.
2. The test points shall be of gunmetal construction and shall have long life ethylene-propylene
diaphragms and be complete with a screwed sealing cap, retaining strap and renewable washer.
3. Test points shall be as manufactured by Binder Engineering their Twinlock type test plug or equal
approved alternative.
4. Two insertion pressure gauges and two thermometers shall be provided for each range of conditions.
Pressure gauges shall be of the 60 mm diameter Bourden tube type (B100 complete with Twinlock
adapter B180) with 1% accuracy to BS EN 837-1 and thermometer gauges shall be of the 45 mm
diameter bi-metallic type, (C100) with 0.1% resolution.
5. Test points shall be installed at the following positions:
a. On the flow and return connections to each terminal heat transfer unit.
b. On each port of every motorised control valve and pressure control valve.
c. On flow and return connections to each heating and cooling coil.
d. On the suction and discharge of each circulating or transfer pump.
e. On the inlet and outlet connections to strainers (25 mm and below).
f. On the flow and return of each branch line.
Y. Pipe hangers and Supports
1. Where expansion takes place in pipework, pipes shall be supported on cast iron roller chair assemblies
with retaining strap or ‘U’ bolts to restrain transverse movement.
2. Where expansion is minimal pipework shall be held in position by ‘U’ bolts, split bands or split pipe
rings. Single pipe supports from walls shall be held in position by two piece screw-on clips which shall
be removable without disturbing the fixings. Caliper, single piece rings, or ‘snap on’ type brackets will
not be allowed.
3. Brackets shall be manufactured from the following materials:
a. Steel and cast iron pipework
1) Mild steel or malleable iron, with cast iron rollers, mild steel nuts, bolts and washers and mild
steel screws.
b. Copper pipework
Brass or gun metal with cast iron rollers plastic coated, and brass screws, nuts, bolts and
washers. Alternatively mild steel plastic coated pipe brackets may be used on larger
diameter pipework.
c. Plastic pipework
1) PVC coated steel for 75 and 110 mm diameter plastic pipework and plastic or polypropylene
for smaller diameter pipes. Fixing screws, nuts and bolts shall be steel with a galvanised or
sheridised finish.
4. On chilled water pipework the pipework supports shall be on the outside of the insulated support
blocks as detailed in section 230710
5. Refer also to Seismic requirements where applicable.
6. All supports/hangers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.
7. Do not use wire for either temporary or permanent hanger or support purposes.
2.4 CLOSED SYSTEM PRESSURISATION
A. Closed system pressurisation units shall be complete package units containing expansion vessel(s), pumps,
break tank and all controls, interlocks and ancillary equipment necessary to maintain the system operating
conditions.
B. The whole unit shall be factory wired and shall be controlled via an integral control panel. Where required
all ferrous metal shall be factory primed and gloss painted on site to an approved colour.
C. Expansion vessels shall be in accordance with BS 4814 and BS 7074.
D. Vessels shall be all welded steel construction and contain a removable butyl rubber sac or diaphragm
enclosing a permanent pre-charged air cushion.
E. Each unit shall be provided with sufficient number and capacity of expansion vessels. These shall handle
the full expansion volume of the system from normal cold fill or ambient conditions to normal working
temperature.
F. The actual system water contents and the capacity of the pressure vessel and break tank shall be calculated
by the Contractor to achieve and accept the total system contraction/expansion volume of water.
G. The system pressure shall be maintained with the pressurisation pump operating for only 20% of the total
operating hours and the vessels shall be sized to prevent over frequent operation of the pump.
H. The integral break tank shall be manufactured from GRP and be complete with a removable lid, ball valve
inlet, overflow connection with discharge pipe, drain cock and outlet connection to the pump. The ball
valve inlet shall comply with Water Supply Regulations.
I. Duplicate direct-coupled pumps shall be provided comprising cast iron casing with gunmetal impeller,
stainless steel shaft, motor, mountings and fittings or as otherwise indicated.
J. Pumps shall be complete with drain plug, isolating valves and neoprene/rubber flexible compensators.
Pressure test points shall be provided on the suction and discharge connections.
K. Automatic changeover of the pumps shall be provided on pump failure. The changeover shall be remotely
indicated. Provision shall be incorporated for periodic variation of the duty pump. Each pump shall be
fitted with an ‘hours run’ counter. The over frequent starting of the duty pump shall be indicated.
L. High and low level pressure switches shall be provided for pump control. Separate high and low pressure
switches shall be provided to interlock and shut off the boiler or chiller plant if the system operating limits
are exceeded. The switches shall be hand reset. A low-level alarm shall be provided on the break tank to
stop the pump-set if the water level in the tank drops to a dangerous level.
M. Every pressurisation set shall be provided with an LED pressure read out two number pressure gauges and
pressure switches wired to an interlocked isolator contained in a dust and water-proof casing mounted on
the unit. The whole unit shall have a heavy gauge robust sheet steel controls cabinet/enclosure, powder
coated, with lockable quick opening door and IP 55 protection. Controls cabinet/enclosure to house all
controls devices, components, relays, contactors, switches, warning/indicator lamps, etc complete with the
following:
1. Door interlocked isolator
2. Pump motors protected by miniature circuit breakers
3. System water pressure gauge
4. Power on lamp
5. High pressure alarm indication
6. Low pressure alarm indication
7. Break tank low level float switch alarm indication
8. Break tank high level float switch alarm indication
9. Audible alarm and muting switch/button
10. Run/trip indicator lamps per pump
11. Pump run test buttons/switches
12. Pump off/auto switches per pump
13. Tripped VFC per pump
14. Hours run meter per pump
15. Remote stop/start facility
16. EMC compliant
17. Common alarm connection to the site Building Management System unless stated differently
elsewhere within the specification.
N. Facilities for the transmission of the status of pumps, operating pressures and alarms from the unit to the
main control panel or building management system, as indicated, shall be provided.
O. A safety valve shall be provided on closed systems with expansion vessels wherever required by BS 7074.
P. For initial system filling, a proprietary flexible hose system, complete with water stop valve, backflow
prevention devices, braided hose, isolating valves, strainer etc shall be provided and comply with Water
Supply Regulations. Suitable wall mounted racking shall be provided to store the hose filling equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
B. Any items damaged during shipment or in the field shall not be used.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Ream pipes and tubes to full inside diameter. Clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly.
Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping.
B. Identify piping flow direction and contents. Refer to Section 230010 General specification.
C. Piping Installation
1. Install all piping in the best workmanlike manner in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
2. Pipework shall generally follow the routes and approximate positions indicated on the drawings. The
piping indicated on the Drawings is however diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general
routings and connections and may or may not be, in all instances, indicated in its true position. The
Contractor shall take responsibility for the final co-ordination and proper erection of systems of piping
in every respect suitable for the work intended and as described in the Specification.
4. Pipework, ancillaries, valves and demountable joints shall be installed to permit easy operation,
regulation and for convenient and safe routine maintenance and renewals once the installation is
complete.
5. All pipework shall be installed with adequate gradients to facilitate draining and venting.
6. Pipework shall be run in a neat manner and installed plumb, straight, symmetrical and at right angles
to or parallel to adjacent walls.
7. No joints shall be formed in wall or floor thicknesses.
8. All pipework, fittings and valves shall be free from corrosion, scale and internal obstruction.
9. Pipework ends shall be cut square, reamed, free from burrs and finished full bore.
10. Sufficient unions and flanged joints shall be provided to install and dismantle sections of pipework,
wherever difficulty in dismantling may occur and on straight runs of more than 25m.
11. Unions or flanges shall be provided at all valves and equipment for easy dismantling. Connections to
coils, pumps, and other equipment shall be made in such a manner as to eliminate undue strains in
piping and equipment. Necessary fittings and bends shall be furnished to avoid springing of pipes
during assembly.
12. Care shall be taken in placing unions to allow freedom to spring apart. Unions and flanges shall not
be placed in inaccessible positions. Where pipework is installed in inaccessible places, a union or
flange shall be installed, prior to the pipe passing into the wall or floor. Unions shall have two bronze
conical seats ground in. Long screw connections will not be accepted.
13. Install piping to avoid any interference with the installation or removal of equipment, other piping,
ducts, etc.
14. Piping shall be installed to allow for expansion.
15. All black mild steel pipework in wall chases shall be welded throughout with flanged joints at 16 m
maximum intervals if applicable.
16. Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used and fabricated fittings will not be accepted without
approval.
17. Bends and tees shall be of the easy sweep type, except at air vents, drain points and dead legs where
square tees shall be used.
18. Prior to any work being "covered up", the Contractor shall request the CA's approval to that part of the
installation in question.
19. Protection during construction
a. Adequate storage facilities shall be provided to ensure that tube does not suffer any deterioration
from the ‘as new’ delivered condition.
b. During construction work care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter entering the pipework
either in storage or during installation.
c. Open ends shall be capped with the appropriate pipework fitting. Wooden plugs and the like
shall not be used.
d. Valves fitted on the ends of pipework shall not be accepted as a means of preventing the ingress
of foreign materials.
e. Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean the CA shall have the right to instruct that
pipework so left uncovered to be dismantled for such lengths as the CA requests and the
pipework blown through and/or cleaned at no cost to the contract.
f. Remove all cement adhering to pipework surfaces and brackets.
g. Remove scale, rust by wire brushing and paint pipework and brackets as stated elsewhere in the
specification.
20. Pipework spacing
a. Pipe runs shall be spaced in relation to one another, other services and the building structure.
Ensure adequate space for access to pipe joints, etc. and allowance for the specified thickness of
thermal insulation.
b. The following are recommended as minimum clearances in the spacing of pipe runs:
Description Minimum distance
Between insulated or un-insulated pipeline and wall 25 mm

finish
Between ceiling finish or soffit 50 mm
Above floor finish 50 mm above top of skirting or
150 mm whichever is greater
Between adjacent pipelines
• both insulated 25 mm
• one insulated, one un-insulated 75 mm
• both uninsulated 150 mm
Insulated pipes to adjacent conduit or trunking 50 mm
Un-insulated pipes to adjacent conduit or trunking 100 mm
Adjacent electrical cables not in conduit or 150mm

trunking
21. Install systems in a manner that they can be thoroughly drained and all air eliminated. Provide drain
cocks at all low points in the systems and air vents at all high points. Indicate accordingly on the
Installation Drawings.
22. During welding or soldering procedures, provide a fire retardant cloth, mat or blanket to protect the
structure, and adequate fire protection equipment at all locations where work is being done. Close off
shaft or confine areas with a fire retardant mat or cloth to prevent sparks or pieces of hot metal from
falling down the shaft or area way. Welding shall only be undertaken in well ventilated spaces.
23. Provide sufficient isolation valves in the installations to allow isolation on all floors, on each riser, or
specific zones for the purposes of maintenance. Provide adequate drain cocks between isolation valves
to drain the isolated part of the system for the purpose of maintenance. Indicate all isolation valves on
the Installation Drawings.
24. Provide quick fill points to the chilled water system for the purpose of quick filling of the system or
sections of the systems on completion of maintenance. Quick fill points shall be provided in the ETS
plant rooms, top of the chilled water risers. Indicate the proposed quick fill points on the Installation
Drawings.
25. Provide drain points to the chilled water system for the purpose of draining of the system or sections
of the systems for maintenance. Drain points shall be provided in the ETS plant rooms, bottom of the
chilled water risers. Indicate the proposed drain points on the Installation Drawings.
26. Where steel piping is required to be buried use pre-insulated pipes or apply 2 prime coats of saturated
hydrocarbon paste with inert filler and passivation agents as a primer and adhesive for wrapping with
a petroleum impregnated nylon carrier tape to the acceptance of the CA. Applications shall be made
after assembly and testing of pipe work. Paste and tape shall be equal to that manufactured by Denso
Manufacturing Canada or acceptable equivalent.
27. Where it is necessary to offset piping to avoid obstructions, use 45° elbows rather than 90°elbows.
28. Provide suitable cleanouts on every other change in direction and slope all condensate drip drains.
29. Tundishes shall be provided on all drains that collect drainpipes from equipment and drain lines.
30. Piping located on roofs shall be mounted on curbs or other pipe supports to ensure that bottom of
pipe elevation is a minimum of 610mm above roof surface.
31. Expansion of pipework
a. Adequate provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of all pipework, and, where
possible, advantage shall be taken of pipework changes in direction to accommodate movement
in pipe systems.
b. Anchors and guides shall be positioned to contain all movement and resist the maximum loads
imposed.
c. Anchors and guides are to be located at points which prevent excess stresses on pipework, joints
and equipment connections.
d. Similar provisions shall be made for building movement or building settlement.
e. Where natural flexing of the pipework is not practicable thermal and building movement shall be
accommodated by the use of expansion joints.
f. Expansion joints may be of the restrained or unrestrained type and shall be provided with welded,
screwed or flanged ends as appropriate and as indicated.
g. Expansion joint convolutions shall be of a stainless steel, super multi-ply construction fitted with
stainless steel inner sleeves.
h. Expansion joint shall be capable of not less than 2000 complete reversals of movement at the
given working conditions and the manufacturer shall be able to produce calculations to that
effect.
i. Expansion joints shall be capable of withstanding a pressure test of twice their design pressure
without loss of performance.
j. The manufacturer's guidelines for selection and installation shall be strictly adhered to. On
completion of the installation, prior to heat being applied, the Contractor shall arrange for the
manufacturer's representative to inspect and check that the installation of the expansion joints is
in accordance with his instructions. This shall be agreed with the manufacturer prior to placing an
order.
k. Axial unrestrained expansion joints shall only be used in positions where their pressure thrust can
be contained by adequate anchor points. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to
submit calculations for loadings on main anchors. Recommended guide spacing must be strictly
adhered to.
l. Restrained expansion joints may be used for angular or lateral movement. Their restraints shall be
capable of absorbing the full pressure thrust of the bellows, plus forces due to the connecting
pipework.
m. Angular expansion joints shall be constructed using an ultra-low friction rocking hinge
mechanism, which limits the movement to one plane. Angular expansion joints shall be used in
pairs or in threes.
n. Lateral expansion joints shall be fitted with threaded tie bars and low friction self-lubricating
hemispherical nuts allowing movement in two planes.
o. Stainless steel convoluted hose with a stainless steel wire braid may be used to absorb small
lateral movements in pipework branches or for building movement in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
p. Pipework subject to expansion and contraction shall be supported via swivel type hangers.
q. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the manufacturer to approve the expansion
joints provisions prior to ordering of materials and commencement of the works.
32. Expansion loops
a. Prefabricated expansion loops shall be constructed in same pipework class and finish as the
pipework system.
b. Where access is limited prefabricated expansion loops shall be used.
33. Anchors and guides
a. Anchors and guides shall be provided to control the direction and effects of movement of the
pipework systems and to resist stresses and loading on pipework due to forces acting on the
pipework system.
b. The anchor loads, anchor and guide locations, method of fixing to the structure and design details
shall be submitted to the CA for review prior to commencement of the works.
c. Ensure the structure is suitable for the transmitted stress.
d. Use similar or compatible materials with the pipework system.
e. The Contractor shall supply, and install all cleats, brackets and steelwork required for anchor
points.
f. Steelwork secured in trenches or ducts to which anchors are attached shall be hot-dip galvanised.
g. Anchors attached to pipework shall be finished with two coats of aluminium paint.
h. Bellows shall only be installed in straight sections of pipework with pipework guides in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations which shall be submitted for review and strictly
adhered to.
i. Thrust blocks and suitable anchors shall be provided where buried pipework internal pressures are
not contained by the jointing system.
j. Anchors shall be as follows:
k. Steel pipe
1) On mild steel pipework, mild steel anchors capable of resisting the maximum stresses shall be
provided and preferably shall be welded to the pipework.
2) Where it is impracticable to weld the anchors to the pipework, cast-iron chairs with at least
two wrought-iron stirrup bolts shall be used. The bolts shall be provided with sufficient thread
to ensure an effective grip on the pipe.
l. Copper pipe
1) The anchors shall be provided by wide copper straps secured to the pipework in such a
manner that the pipe is not damaged.
m. PVC pipe
1) Use PVC coated over straps to clamp pipework to mid steel channel section firmly attached to
the building structure.
34. Sets and pulled bends
a. Sets and pulled bends shall not be allowed in:
1) Galvanised pipework
2) Un-galvanised tube 65 mm and above
b. Sets and bends shall be free from kinks and ripples and formed in a suitable bending machine.
c. Wherever possible the pipe shall be bent cold by the gradual application of pressure to radius of
not less than 3 times the nominal bore.
35. Pipe sleeves and plates
a. All pipework passing through floors or walls shall be provided with sleeves of similar material and
of such diameter as to allow free movement of pipework.
b. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to finish flush with finished faces of wall or ceiling and 15mm.
proud of the finished face of floors. All sleeves shall be retained in position before making good
by lugs or plates welded on at sub-floor level.
c. The weight of pipework shall not be borne by sleeves.
d. Sleeves shall be manufactured from mild steel tube painted with two coats of zinc rich primer.
e. Copper sleeves shall be used in conjunction with uninsulated copper pipework.
f. Where pipework is insulated, the pipe sleeve shall be of sufficient size to allow the thermal
insulation to pass between the pipe and the sleeve over its entire length.
g. In areas where floors are washed down install with a 50 mm protrusion above floor finish and shall
have its edge rounded or bevelled. The protrusion length shall be agreed with the CA prior to
installation.
h. Unless stated otherwise white plates shall be installed wherever pipes pass through walls, floors
and ceilings exposed to view. Samples shall be submitted to the CA for approval prior to
installation.
36. Pipe sleeves through fire barriers
a. Sleeves which are contained in walls, ceilings or floors which are fire barriers shall be additionally
packed with a non-combustible material for the entire length to form a fire/smoke stop of the
required fire rating.
b. The material shall be subject to approval and must comply with the Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
c. Petroleum based expanding foam products shall not be used.
d. The ends of sleeves packed with material shall have suitable fire resistant mastic applied to seal
the fibres and present a neat appearance.
e. Sleeves for UPVC pipes shall contain an intumescent material to BS 476.
37. Pipe sleeves through acoustic barriers, enclosures and plantrooms
a. Sleeves on pipes which are contained in walls, ceilings or floors which are acoustic barriers, or
through acoustic enclosures, or plantroom walls, floors or ceilings, shall be packed with a 12 mm
thick resilient neoprene inner sleeve around the pipe and filled with a non-setting mastic
compound. The outer edges of the sleeve shall be made air-tight by sealing with a dense
nonsetting mastic compound. Where such barriers are also fire barriers the material shall comply
with the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
38. Pipe supports
a. Pipework supports are to be arranged so that no undue stress is imposed upon the pipes.
b. Ensure that all materials used for pipework supports are compatible with the pipeline materials.
c. All steel hangers and supports shall be cleaned and painted with 2 coats of zinc rich paint.
d. Where practical, support vertical riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
e. Vertical piping shall be supported top and bottom, in addition to wall brackets as detailed in the
table below.
f. Equipment shall not be used to support piping.
g. Install hanger on insulated piping in a manner that does not damage insulation and the vapour
barrier. Pipe hangers on insulated piping shall be installed on the outside of the insulation and not
in contact with the pipe, except at seismic pipe bracing when required.
h. Additional supports shall be provided for equipment such as valves, strainers and ancillaries so
that minimum stress is imposed on the pipework and the weight is not taken by the pipework.
The support arrangement shall allow safe operation and removal of the component.
i. All brackets and supports shall allow free movement of the pipes due to expansion and
contraction with special regard to prevention of damage to any thermal insulation and vapour
barrier.
j. Where multiple pipe runs of differing bores are supported from a common point, use support
spacing of pipe requiring the closest spacing with adequate provision for the unequal movement
due to expansion and contraction. Supports shall also be provided at bends where there is a run
of pipework 1 metre or more both sides of the bend.
k. Cantilever type supports from walls shall not be permitted except for single pipes of diameters up
to 50 mm.
l. Obtain approval for all fixings to structural concrete or structural steelwork and loads imposed on
the structure. Shot fired fixings shall not be used or any reinforcement drilled through.
m. Static point loadings transferred to the structure which cannot be accommodated by the structural
fixings shall be spread over a larger area by means of additional brackets and/or additional load
spreading primary steelwork.
n. The Contractor shall set out and align pipework brackets/supports as required to suit the actual
site conditions.
o. Ensure that vertical supported services loads and parameters are within the support manufacturers
operating range.
p. Pipework supports shall be as detailed as a minimum
Steel pipework
Pipe bore Maximum support spacing (m)

Nominal
(mm) Horizontal vertical
bare insulated Bare or insulated
up to 15 1.8 1.8 2.4

20 2.4 2.4 3.0
25 2.4 2.4 3.0
32 2.7 2.4 3.0
40 3.0 2.4 3.6
50 3.0 2.4 3.6
65 3.7 3.0 4.6

80 3.7 3.0 4.6
100 3.7 3.0 4.6
125 3.7 3.0 5.4
150 4.5 4.5 5.4
200 5.0 5.0 6.0
250 5.0 5.0 6.0
300 6.1 6.1 9.0
350 9.5 7.0 9.0
400 9.5 7.5 9.5
450 10.0 8.0 10.0
500 11.0 9.0 11.0
Copper pipework

Nominal
horizontal vertical
(mm)
bare insulated bare or insulated
up to 15 1.2 1.2 1.8
22 1.2 1.2 2.1
28 1.8 1.5 2.4
35 2.4 1.8 3.0
42 2.4 1.8 3.0
54 2.7 1.8 3.0
67 3.0 2.4 3.5
76 3.0 2.4 3.5
108 3.0 2.4 3.5
133 3.0 3.0 3.5
159 3.5 3.5 3.5
Cast iron pipework

Nominal
horizontal vertical
(mm)
bare insulated bare or insulated
All sizes 1.8 1.8 3.0
At least one fixing shall be provided for each unit length.
UPVC and polyethylene pipework

Nominal
horizontal vertical
(mm)
32 – 40 0.5 1.2
Above 50 0.6 1.2
75 - 100 0.9 1.8
150 1.2 1.8
Polyethylene pipework

Nominal horizontal vertical
(mm)
up to 15 0.5 0.75
20 to 25 0,55 0.75
32 to 40 0.5 1.2
Above 50 0.7 1.2
q. For plastic pipework space vertical support intervals at no greater than 1.5 times the horizontal
spacing.
r. For UPVC and ABS pipework reduce spacing between supports for operating temperatures above
20°C in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. Support continuously for operating
temperatures above 60 °C.
39. Pipework brackets
a. Where expansion takes place in pipework, pipes shall be supported on cast iron roller chair
assemblies with retaining strap or ‘U’ bolts to restrain transverse movement.
b. Where expansion is minimal pipework shall be held in position by ‘U’ bolts, split bands or split
pipe rings. Single pipe supports from walls shall be held in position by two piece screw-on clips
which shall be removable without disturbing the fixings. Caliper, single piece rings, or ‘snap on’
type brackets will not be allowed.
c. Brackets shall be manufactured from the following materials:
d. Steel and cast iron pipework
1) Mild steel or malleable iron, with cast iron rollers, mild steel nuts, bolts and washers and mild
steel screws.
e. Copper pipework
1) Brass or gun metal with cast iron rollers plastic coated, and brass screws, nuts, bolts and
washers. Alternatively mild steel plastic coated pipe brackets may be used on larger diameter
pipework.
f. Plastic pipework
1) PVC coated steel for 75 and 110 mm diameter plastic pipework and plastic or polypropylene
for smaller diameter pipes. Fixing screws, nuts and bolts shall be steel with a galvanised or
sherardized finish.
40. Flushing bypasses
a. Provision shall be made for flexible or fixed full-bore by-passes to be fitted across all major items
of plant in order to facilitate the circulation of water during dynamic flushing operations.
b. Items which could be damaged by the flushing and cleaning process shall be isolated and cleaned
by alternative methods approved by the CA.
41. Positioning of control components
a. Pipeline control components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and in the positions indicated on the design drawings.
b. For control components incorporated in insulated pipework the controllers shall extend beyond
the insulation to ensure that there are no gaps in the insulation and the vapour barrier shall be
maintained. If specific control components cannot comply with the above requirements, submit
details to the CA for approval of the insulation method proposed.
c. Supports shall be provided to ensure no strain is imposed on the components.
d. The components shall be installed so as to ensure adequate and safe access for operation and
maintenance.
D. Where modifications or extensions to existing services are to be undertaken, all valves which are to be
removed and re-fixed shall be overhauled thoroughly, with glands and seals renewed, all to the satisfaction
of the CA.
E. Special care shall be exercised in the installation of screwed valves to avoid straining their bodies and
preventing the gate or seat from closing tight. The wrench shall always be applied to the side being
attached to the pipe. When attaching pipe to a valve already in place, a second wrench shall be used to
hold the valve while the pipe is being tightened. A pipe shall not be screwed so far into a valve as to
damage the seat.
F. Seismic controls – general
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Bases:
a. Set steel bases for 25mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
b. Set concrete inertia bases for 50mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
c. Adjust equipment level.
d. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.
e. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different
from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load
is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
f. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0inches WG, 1.5kPa static
pressure and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
g. Provide seismic snubbers for all equipment, piping and ductwork mounted on isolators. Each
inertia base shall have minimum of 4 seismic snubbers located close to isolators. Snub equipment
designated for post-disaster use to 1.5mm maximum clearance. Other snubbers shall have
clearance between 4mm and 7mm.
h. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient

hangers for scheduled distance.
i. Up to 100mm Pipe Size: First 3 points of support.
j. 125 to 200mm Pipe Size: First 4 points of support.
k. 250mm Pipe Size and Over: First 6 points of support.
l. Select 3 hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 25mm static deflection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25mm static deflection
or ½ static deflection of isolated equipment.
m. Pipe Isolation Schedule
Pipe Diameter Minimum Distance From

(mm) Equipment (Pipe Diameters)
25 120
50 90
80 80
100 75
150 60
200 60
250 54
300 50
400 45
600 38
3. Seismic Restraints
a. Install seismic restraints for pipes, flues and equipment in accordance with the codes and
guidelines detailed in Section 1.0 of this specification and the manufacturers recommendations.
b. Design and install restraints to prevent permanent displacement in any direction caused by lateral
motion, overturning or uplift.
c. Install approved resilient restraining devices as required to prevent flues, ducts and piping motion
in excess of 8mm.
d. Make no rigid connections between equipment, pipes and ducts and building structure that
degrade noise and vibration isolation systems.
e. Coordinate seismic bracing requirements with other sections to result in:
4. Seismic Bracing Installation
a. Piping:
1) Install all bracing and restraints in accordance with referenced "Guidelines".
2) Coordinate seismic bracing and restraints so that required thermal expansion provisions are
not restricted.
3) Provide floor support and bracing of pipe risers in pipe chases and connection risers to
equipment.
b. Flexibly Supported Piping:
1) Install and locate restraints to allow normal operation of systems without transmitting
vibrations to building structure.
2) Location of restraints: In accordance with referenced "Guidelines" as specified in this Section.
3) Construction of Restraints: Steel cables, installed slack.
c. Rigidly Mounted Equipment:
1) Secure to floor as required to prevent horizontal motion and overturning
2) Secure to walls or other equipment to prevent overturning.
a) Attach to elements capable of taking calculated seismic loads.
b) Provide steel backing in walls as required to brace equipment and piping from wall.
G. Venting and draining
1. All pipework shall be laid to falls to suit the pipework material and its diameter.
2. Provide manual air vents at all high points and drain cocks at all low points in heating water, chilled
water and cooling tower water piping.
3. Equipment shall be provided with drains and vents which shall be accessible from outside the casing.
4. Eccentric Reducers:
a. In Horizontal heating water and chilled water piping, top side flat.
b. Between water piping and pump suction.
5. Concentric Reducers:
a. Shall be used in vertical piping.
b. Shall be used as increasers in horizontal piping.
6. Connect steam and condensate branch piping to top of mains.
7. Connect heating water and chilled water branch piping to bottom of main. Where connection is made
to the top of main due to coordination issues, provide vents and drain as required.
8. Adequate drains and vents shall be provided to facilitate draining and venting of the complete
pipework system.
9. Drain points shall be located in accessible positions and shall include drain cocks with hose union and
removable key. ‘Y’ type drain cocks shall not be used.
10. Where pipework sections can be isolated, drain and vent points shall be provided to facilitate draining
down and venting of that section of pipework.
11. Drain points on medium and high temperature pipework shall be fitted with a flanged valve and blank
flange.
12. In plantrooms a 30m length of 25mm flexible rubber/armoured hose pipe shall be provided and fixed
to a wall. The hose shall have a connection to match the drain valves.
13. The Contractor shall allow for the provision of fast fill and drain connections in accordance with the
water treatment specialists’ requirements and as indicated on the drawings.
14. De-aerators shall be installed on all primary and secondary hydraulic circuits.
H. Piping System Joints
1. Provide joints of the type indicated for each pipe work system.
2. On threaded pipework the threads shall be cut full and clean using sharp dies.
3. All pipework ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter
4. On male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
5. Jointing materials used to seal threaded pipe joints shall be non-toxic.
6. Avoid the excessive use of jointing material and PTFE/ Teflon shall not be used above 65mm pipe
diameter.
7. Copper capillary fittings
a. Excess flux and solder shall be removed and the joint cleaned to give a clean neat finish
8. Refrigerant piping system joints
a. Provide joints of the type indicated for each pipe work system.
b. Pipe work shall be threaded in accordance with ANSI B21, threads shall be cut full and clean using
sharp dies.
c. Threaded ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe
jointing compound, or pipe joint tape PTFE or Teflon where recommended by pipe/ fitting
manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads
exposed.
d. Jointing materials used to seal threaded pipe joints shall be non-toxic.
e. Avoid the excessive use of jointing material and PTEE/ Teflon shall not be used above 65mm pipe
diameter.
f. Braze copper tube and fittings where indicated in accordance with ANSI B31.
g. Silver brazing will be the jointing of 2 closely adjacent prepared surfaces with melting brazing
alloy drawn by capillary action over the complete surfaces to be joined. The flame gas may be oxy-
acetylene, oxy-propane or oxy-butane.
h. Solder copper tube and fitting joints in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube
ends square, ream to full inside diameter and clean both outside of tube end and inside of fitting.
Apply suitable flux, as recommended by tube/ fitting manufacturer, to joint areas of both tube and
fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting and apply molten solder in a manner which shall draw
solder by capillary action over the complete surfaces to be joined. Excess solder and flux shall be
wiped from joint.
9. Flanged joints
a. Flanged pipe joints shall be made using purpose made mild steel, cast iron, wrought iron screwed
or welded flanges, compatible with the pipe work material used.
b. Steel flanges shall be raised face type except when bolted to flat faced cast iron flanges on
equipment, in which case they shall be flat faced.
c. Bolting for services shall be hexagon head bolts and heavy hexagonal nuts. Nuts and bolts shall be
tightened beyond finger tightness with an indicating torque wrench to ensure equal tension on all
bolts. Tighten bolts such that those 180° apart or directly opposite are torqued up in sequence.
d. Gaskets for insertion between flanges shall be purpose made, full face diameter, of accepted
nontoxic composition material not less than 3mm thick before compression.
e. Caulking of any joints screwed, flanged, welded or otherwise shall not be permitted.
10. Victaulic Joints
a. All Victaulic joints shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations.
b. Ensure that grooved pipes are in accordance with the current Victaulic specifications and
recommendations.
c. Ensure that the "A" dimension, i.e. the area from the pipe end to the front edge of the groove is
free from indentations, scores, seams, projections or roll marks.
d. Use only lubricants which are non-toxic and non-injurious to the gasket material.
e. Upon completion of assembly, the bolt pads of each coupling shall be fully drawn together, except
for HP-70 couplings in sizes of up to 100mm.
I. Welding Requirements
1. General
a. Metal arc welding shall be fusion welding with the heat for welding provided by electric arc or arcs
and the melting of metal electrodes will provide the filler material. The electrodes shall be coated
rod suitable for use in the Location of the project. The welding operation shall be in accordance
with the electrode manufacturer's recommended procedures
b. Gas arc welding shall only be used on pipework below 100mm diameter and shall be fusion
welding with the heat for welding providing by burning a gas with oxygen at a temperature to
melt metal rods suitable for use in the Location of the project. The mixture of gases shall be
oxyacetylene, oxy-propane or oxy-butane.
c. Welding of galvanized steel pipe shall be implemented by first removing the galvanizing by filling
or grinding to reduce smoke generation during welding.
d. Provide adequate ventilation and smoke exhaust to permit welder to work continuously.
e. The CA will place a strong emphasis on the standard of welding and the associated quality control
procedures in order that the welding meets the required standards in all cases.
f. All welding shall be executed by competent qualified/certified welding operators fully experienced
in the type and size of welding being carried out.
g. All welds shall be permanently marked with the welder’s individual identification code placed
adjacent to each completed weld. A log of all welders, their qualifications and a record of the
work carried out by them shall be kept on site at all times and shall be available for inspection.
h. Any weld not permanently marked with a welder’s individual identification code shall be examined
by an independent inspection authority to include both visual and non-destructive testing. Should
testing fail the weld shall be cut out and replaced at no cost to the contract or delay to the
programme.
i. An approved independent inspection authority acting as sole arbiter shall carry out all visual and
non-destructive examination. Personnel engaged in radiographic, magnetic particle or ultrasonic
examination and interpretation shall hold appropriate NDE certification which shall be submitted
to the CA prior to commencement of the Works.
j. To enable the independent inspection authority to realistically cost their work the Contractor shall,
during the tender period, send to the Independent Inspection Authority all necessary information
to facilitate costing. Details of the independent inspection 3.2.oauthority shall be submitted with
the tender.
k. Prior to completion of the Works submit to the CA a statement signed by the independent
specialist responsible for welding examination and non-destructive testing stating compliance
with the requirements of the specification.
l. All examination and testing of welds together with the resulting remedial work shall be at no
additional cost to the contract or delay to the programme.
m. Care shall be taken during welding operations that the welding metal or flux does not project into
the bore of the pipe. Welds shall be of good clean metal, free from slag inclusions and porosity,
of even thickness and contour, well fused with the parent metal, annealed and finished smooth.
n. Electrodes shall be tropicalized as required suitable for the type of weld. Pipe and preparation for
butt welding shall be machine beveled. Oxygen cutting shall be permitted. All oxide shall be
removed after cutting and the cut shall be made smooth and true by filing or grinding.
o. The correct alignment and welding gap shall be carefully maintained throughout the welding
using mechanical jigs, or tack welding and/ or welded-on bridging pieces.
p. All scale, rust, paint and any other substance detrimental to the weld shall be removed from the
tack weld before the initial root run fusion is commenced.
q. Where tack welds are used to secure alignment, there shall be four equally spaced and to the
same standard as the final weld, this is, they shall have full penetration at the throat, vee or fillet
and be of a length equal to twice the pipe wall thickness. All extremities of tack welds shall be
dressed to provide fusion with the initial root run of weld
r. Manufactured welding fittings shall be used as far as possible and shall be black mild steel butt
welded type complying with the relevant standards.
s. Immediately on completion every weld shall be painted with zinc chromate paint.
2. Standards and codes
a. All welding shall be in accordance with all relevant standards and codes, including but not limited
to:
BS EN 287-1 Approval testing for welders for fusion welding – Steels

BS EN 970 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds – Visual examination
BS EN 1435 Non-destructive examination of welds – Radiographic examination
BS EN 1714 Non-destructive examination of welded joints – Ultrasonic examination
HVCA TR5 Welding of carbon steel pipework – Code of Practice
BS 2633 Specification for class I arc welding of ferritic steel pipework for carrying fluids
BS 2971 Specification for class II arc welding of carbon steel pipework for carrying fluids
BS EN ISO 9934 Non-destructive testing. Magnetic particle testing
3. Welder approval
a. All welders shall hold valid welder approved certification. A welder approval certificate shall be
valid for such period as defined by the issuing body.
b. Copies of current welding certificates for all welders shall be presented for examination by the CA
before any works are commenced.
c. Only certified welders providing acceptable samples shall be permitted to weld.
d. Welders holding BS EN 287-1 certification shall be limited to the range of approval stated on the
certificate with regard to welding process, welding position, material groups, pipe wall thickness
and pipe diameter.
e. Prior to commencement of the Works, welders shall perform sample welds for the inspection by
an approved independent specialist in accordance with necessary standards. Each welder shall
carry out the Abbreviated Tests specified in Appendix III of the HVCA: TR5 Document to the
satisfaction of the Independent Inspection Authority.
f. The welder’s qualifications shall be in accordance with BS 2971 or BS 2640 as applicable and their
approval tests in accordance with BS 4872 Part 1. Welder qualifications shall be reviewed and
approved by the independent inspection authority. A current HVCA Test Certification is
acceptable in lieu of the foregoing.
g. For pipework in category 2 of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, welding procedures
shall comply with EN 288 part 3 or ISO 15614. Welder qualifications shall comply with BS EN 287
part 1.
h. Approval testing does not exempt compliance with the fault limitations shown in BS 2971 or BS
2640.
i. Failure to satisfy the independent inspection authority as to the competence of any welder
craftsman shall result in that craftsman being tested in accordance with BS 4870 and BS 4871 as
applicable prior to that craftsman commencing or continuing to work. Failure of any craftsman to
complete such tests to the satisfaction of the independent inspection authority shall result in that
craftsman ceasing all welding work.
4. Weld quality
a. All welds shall be visually examined to BS EN 970 on the outside surface and, where practicable, in
the bore with the aid of optical instruments if necessary by an approved independent specialist.
b. Inspection reports detailing welding inspection activities formed during that period shall be
submitted to the CA at weekly intervals.
c. Non-destructive examination shall be used progressively during the installation of the Works as
part of quality control.
d. Non-destructive examination reports shall indicate either the acceptance or rejection of welds.
Test reports including radiographs where appropriate shall be submitted to the CA. Remedial
action shall be agreed with the CA before commencement of these works.
e. Over and above the testing of each welder's work a number of random tests shall be carried out.
Non-destructive testing shall be undertaken on approximately 10% of all butt weld joints and 5%
of all other joints. Non-destructive testing shall be evenly distributed over the whole of the Works
and shall be evenly split between all welders employed on the Works.
f. Installed welds to a maximum number of 3% of total or 10 number shall be removed to enable a

thorough inspection to take place.
g. Should any weld fail then a further 15 welds shall be subject to radiographic testing.
h. Should any of the second batch of welds fail then the CA shall have the right to instruct the
cutting out and replacement of all welds and the replacement of all welders previously employed
on site at no additional cost. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures, subject to
agreement with the CA, in order that subsequent welding shall be in compliance with the required
standards.
i. If a considerable proportion of welded joints by a particular operator are found to be

unacceptable, all welds by this welder shall be completely removed and replaced at no additional
cost.
j. The number of random tests shall also apply to all welds completed off-site by pre-fabricators.
k. Failure of any one welder’s work shall result in 10 more of their welds being tested as selected by
the independent inspection authority or CA. Failure of any of these shall result in all of that
person’s work being tested at the Contractor’s own cost.
l. If the Contractor introduces different welder craftsmen after the stipulated number of tests on
welds have been undertaken the Contractor shall at his own cost have at least 5 samples of each
such craftsman’s work tested.
m. A statement shall be submitted to the CA prior to practical completion to confirm compliance with
the welding quality requirements of this specification. The statement shall be signed by the
independent inspection authority.
5. Radiographic Testing
a. Radiography shall be limited to the examination of butt welds.
b. Radiographic non-destructive tests shall be carried on a percentage of all welds as stated and
selected at random during the course of construction by the inspection authority and agreed with
the CA.
c. Radiographic examination shall be undertaken in accordance with BS EN 1435.
d. The regulations regarding ionising radiation hazards to site personnel and the public must be
adhered to.
e. A method statement, clearly defining the preparation and methodology of the tests shall be
submitted to the CA for approval prior to the testing.
f. The radiographic testing shall be evenly distributed over the whole of the works and shall be
evenly split between all welders employed on the works on a pro-rata basis.
g. Radiographic test operators shall be qualified to PCN Level 2 or ASNT Level 2 and shall be
approved by the independent inspection authority along with examination reports.
h. Submit examination reports to the CA.
6. Ultrasonic Testing
a. Where radiographic testing is prohibited on site, ultrasonic testing shall be undertaken in lieu.
b. Where the use of ultrasonic examination is agreed it shall be undertaken in accordance with BS EN
1714
c. A method statement, clearly defining the preparation and methodology of the tests shall be
submitted to the CA for approval prior to the testing.
d. All ultrasonic testing operators shall be qualified to PCN Level 2 or ASNT Level 2. The
independent inspection authority shall review all ultrasonic testing operator qualifications and
examination reports.
e. Submit examination reports to the CA.
7. Magnetic particle examination
a. Where the use of magnetic particle examination is agreed, it shall be undertaken in accordance
with BS EN ISO 9934-1.
b. Similarly, 10% of fillet welds made in non-ferrous materials shall be examined by Dye Penetrant
Inspection (DPI).
c. All magnetic particle and dye penetrant inspection operators shall be qualified to PCN Level 2 or
ASNT Level 2. T
d. The independent inspection authority shall review all magnetic particle and dye penetrant
inspection operator qualifications and associated examination reports.
e. Submit examination reports to the CA.
8. Brazing and bronze welding
a. The CA will place a strong emphasis on the standard of brazing and the associated quality control
b. Brazing and bronze welding shall be executed by competent qualified/certified operators fully
experienced in the type and size of work being carried out.
c. Brazers shall hold a valid certificate of competency issued by an approved body. Brazers without
valid certificates and those without relevant brazing work experience within the preceding three
months shall undertake an approved competency test, witnessed and certified by an approved
body. A copy of certificates shall be submitted to the CA before any works are commenced.
d. A log of all brazers, their qualifications and a record of the work carried out by them shall be kept
on site at all times and shall be available for inspection.
e. If so requested by the CA, and prior to commencement of the Works, brazers shall perform
samples at all sizes for the inspection of the CA. Only certified brazers providing acceptable
samples shall be permitted to undertake the works.
f. Copper joints shall be silver soldered, brazed or bronze welded to suit the operating temperature
and pressure and shall comply with BS EN 14324.
g. In addition the recommendations of the HVCA and Copper Development Association shall be
adhered to.
h. Welding rods, brazing filler materials, fluxes etc, shall comply with relevant British Standards.
i. Brazers shall permanently identify each of their joints with their own unique mark which will
withstand site conditions without damaging system or component performance. Methods of
marking shall be approved by the CA prior to commencement of the works.
j. During the installation of the Works the CA shall select at random installed brazed joints to a
maximum number of 3% of total or 10 number and the Contractor shall remove these to enable a
thorough inspection to take place. In the event of finding a faulty joint, a further 10 joints made
by the relevant brazer shall be cut out and tested. Should any of the second batch fail then the CA
shall have the right to instruct the cutting out and replacement of all brazed joints and the
replacement of all brazers previously employed on the site. Cutting out and consequential
rectification works shall be carried out by the Contractor at no expense.
k. Visual examination and non-destructive testing of joints shall be carried out by an independent
specialist approved by the CA prior to commencement of the works.
J. Press-fit pipework systems - Installation
1. Where the use of press-fit type pipework system is selected, the whole of the pipework system shall be
installed with a single manufacturers’ range. The Contractor shall not use more than one press-fit
manufacturer on a pipework system. Press-fit capillary and compression type fittings shall not be used
on the same system.
2. Pipe for press-fit jointing shall be prepared fully in accordance with the published instructions of the
jointing system manufacturer including the neat removal of any plastics coatings to pipes.
3. Pipe and jointing fittings within a system shall be fully compatible. A complete system shall be of one
manufacturer’s supply only.
4. Operatives shall be fully trained by the proposed manufacturer in the use and installation of its
proposed products.
5. Submit to the CA prior to the commencement of the Works documentary evidence that operatives
have undertaken such training by the joint system manufacturer.
6. The Contractor shall implement a suitable methodology and recording procedure to enable the
craftsman or workman responsible for any work to be identified including the joints made by each
operative and the sequence in which they were made. The methodology and recording procedure
shall be agreed with the CA prior to commencement of the installation.
7. Procedures shall be adopted to ensure that all joints are successfully made and fluid-tight before
systems are filled and pressure-tested. Documentation shall be available for inspection by the CA.
8. The contractor shall mark the end of each tube prior to crimping the joint to ensure and demonstrate
that the pipework was fully inserted into the fitting when made.
9. The contractor shall consider the routing of pipework and in particular the location of joints with
regard to the health and safety risk a joint failure could present.
10. Account shall be taken of the overall dimensions of fittings in order to achieve neat and economic
installations.
11. Pipes shall be cut square and true using tube cutters. Pipe ends must be de-burred internally and
externally, prior to insertion with fittings.
12. No oils shall be used for lubrication of pipe cutting or fitting insertion.
13. Only press-fit tools which will not operate with an incorrectly set-up joint and/or inadequate power
supply, and will not disengage until the joint is completed, shall be used.
14. Tools shall be regularly cleaned and otherwise maintained to the manufacturers’ published
instructions.
15. Bending of pipework must be undertaken utilising bending tools approved by the pipe manufacturer,
hand bending of press-fit pipework will not be permitted. No heat shall be directly applied to the pipe
for bending purposes.
16. Bending radii for pipes shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.
17. Pipe supports shall comply with the requirements of the manufacturer.
18. Connections to equipment items shall be by threaded or flanged press-fit conversion fittings.
19. Connections to dissimilar metals shall only be undertaken utilising couplings approved by the
pipework manufacturer.
20. Press-fit joints shall not be made within 300mm of brazed or welded joints.
21. All systems shall be leak tested on completion.
22. Water treatment regimes shall be to the approval of the manufacturer of the tube/fittings.
23. All metallic pipework systems shall be earth bonded to comply with the requirements of the current
edition of BS 7671.
24. Testing and inspection of press fit joints
25. Checking of each operatives work shall be carried out by the operative’s supervisor on a random basis
and the results recorded for review at progress meetings. Non-destructive checking shall be
undertaken on approximately 10% of all joints. Non-destructive checking shall be evenly distributed
over the whole of the Works and shall be evenly split between all operatives employed on the Works.
26. Should any joint fail then a further 15 joints by that operative shall be immediately checked.
27. Should any of the second batch of joints fail then the CA shall have the right to instruct the cutting out
and replacement of all joints and the replacement of all responsible operatives previously employed
on site at no additional cost. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures, subject to agreement
with the CA, in order that subsequent jointing shall be in compliance with the required standards.
K. Refrigerant Pipework
1. The installation shall be executed by competent qualified/certified refrigerant operators fully

experienced in the type of work being carried out.
refrigerant and oil used.
4. Pipework shall be dry, completely free from scale and internally degreased.
6. Venting of refrigerant to atmosphere will not be allowed during installation, commissioning and
maintenance. Connections shall be provided to allow abstraction of the refrigerant charge into
purpose gas bottles using refrigerant recovery equipment. Each machine shall be provided with a
liquid receiver to hold the full refrigerant charge.
7. Each refrigerant circuit shall be protected by a pressure relief device on the high- pressure pipework
complying with BS EN 378.
8. Resiliently mounted oil-filled refrigerant pressure gauges of minimum 65mm diameter, fitted with
means of isolation, on compressor suction and discharge with pressure calibrated in kPa and Bar and
saturation temperature for the refrigerant used calibrated in °C
9. Each compressor shall be provided with a suction gas strainer.
10. The installation shall comply with BS EN 378.
13. Brazing and bronze welding shall be executed by competent qualified/certified operators fully
experienced in the type and size of work being carried out. Brazers shall hold a valid certificate of
competency issued by an approved body. Brazers without valid certificates and those without relevant
brazing work experience within the preceding three months shall undertake an approved competency
test, witnessed and certified by an approved body. Submit a copy of current certificates for all brazers
for examination by the CA before any works are commenced.
14. Copper joints shall be silver soldered, brazed or bronze welded to suit the operating temperature and
pressure and shall comply with BS EN 14324. In addition the recommendations of the HVCA and
Copper Development Association shall be adhered to.
16. The ends of the pipework shall be cleaned and reamed out to the original internal diameter
before brazing.
17. Oxygen free dry nitrogen shall be passed continuously through the pipework at minimal pressure and
at an adequate velocity during brazing or soldering to eliminate internal oxidation. All excess solder
and flux shall be removed on completion of joints.
18. Piping and other components which have been prepared and are not to be used immediately shall be
capped and sealed. During installation no component or length of tubing shall be left un-blanked
longer than necessary for installation.
19. The ingress of moisture, dirt and any other contaminants to the interior of pipework and other
components shall be prevented during storage.
20. Arrange all exposed pipe runs to present neat appearance, parallel with other pipe or service runs and
building structure. Ensure all vertical pipes are plumb or follow building line.
21. Space pipe runs in relation to one another, other services runs and building structure, allow for
specified thickness of thermal insulation and ensure adequate space for access to pipe joints, etc.
22. On completion of all site joints but immediately before connecting to the system components high
pressure oxygen free dry nitrogen shall be flushed through the pipe,
23. Provision should be made for the Employers maintenance technicians to be able to conduct
thorough leak tests so joints in void spaces should be avoided.
24. Insulate the entire length of pipework and to avoid contact between copper and galvanising of
support tray as detailed in Section 230710 (Insulation).
25. Include expansion joints if required to accommodate expansion and contraction. Cold bridging is to be
prevented.
26. Discharge pipes likely to cause burns to personnel shall be shielded.
27. Refrigerant pipework shall be adequately supported with maximum support spacing as follows:
a. Pipe nominal bore 15 to 28 (mm) – Continuous support
b. Pipe nominal bore 28 to 54 (mm) - Spacing 2.0 (m)
c. Pipe nominal bore 54 to 67 (mm) - Spacing 3.0 (m)
28. Where the pipework greater than 28mm cannot be adequately supported at the spacing indicated
directly from the building structure, continuous proprietary channel, angle or tray support systems
shall be provided. Pipework shall be supported using sheradised steel clips with a rubber or plastic
sleeve to prevent chafing or vibration.
L. Valve installation
1. Provide valves with stems upright or horizontal. Valve stem position shall be arranged to allow access
for maintenance. No valve shall be installed with stem pointing down unless approved by the CA.
2. Provide gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off service and isolating service, and to isolate
equipment, part of systems and vertical risers, except in steam and condensate return piping systems.
3. Provide chain wheel operator for valves located 2m to 5m above floor for sizes 100mm and above,
unless valves are above suspended ceiling. Provide gear drive as required.
4. Install valves in accessible locations. Verify with the CA and ensure these are positioned on the
coordination drawings.
5. Valves shall be provided on all pipework wherever necessary to achieve proper isolation and
regulation of the whole systems. They shall be installed to isolate and balance every section of the
pipework network including but not limited to the following locations:-
a. To isolate each item of equipment including heat transfer terminal units
b. To isolate every section of the pipework network including sub-branch mains, sub-circuits and to
multi-connections to heat transfer terminal units
c. To regulate and balance the flow through every section of the pipework network including
subbranch mains, sub-circuits, and to multi-connections to heat transfer terminal units
d. To isolate, regulate and balance the flow to any item of equipment supplied by or, to be
connected to the systems, by others (Should the equipment or plant not be connected up prior to
balancing, temporary by-pass connections and a regulating valve shall be installed to achieve
balancing)
e. To isolate, and allow the removal of all control valves, flow meters, strainers, and other similar
pipeline ancillaries
f. To isolate each float operated valve
M. Painting and corrosion protection
1. Painting General
a. Provide a painted finished to all steel pipework, fittings, ancillaries, and supports including plant
and equipment in a colour approved by the CA.
b. Following delivery storage and installations on site make good any damage to finishes, by
cleaning, degreasing and refurbishing.
c. Use a zinc rich metallic priming paint to BS 4652 and gloss finishing coat where indicated.
d. Comply with requirements of BS 54693 and BS 6150.
e. Ensure that gloss finishing paints are of machine finish grade having high adhesion, high
resistance to solvents, mineral oils, chipping and impact damage.
f. Use heat resistant paints for surfaces over 80°C.
g. Ensure metal surfaces are thoroughly cleaned, all mill and welded scale removed and finally
degreased.
h. All ferrous metals used for the supports and brackets of pipework and plant items shall be cleaned
by wire brushing to remove dirt, scale and corrosion, and all grease shall be removed prior to
painting to BS 5493. All brackets and supports shall be painted two coats of zinc rich primer, prior
to fixing, and a further touch up coat immediately on fixing. An additional coat of oil based finish
paint of Approved colour shall be applied to all brackets and supports in plantrooms and where
visible, on final installation in lieu of the second coat of zinc rich primer. Where materials are
prefabricated off site, a coat of primer shall be applied immediately following fabrication and prior
to dispatch to site.
2. Painting Pipework
a. All black tube, fittings and black ferrous pipework ancillaries shall be cleaned by wire brushing to
remove dirt, scale and corrosion and all grease shall be removed all in accordance with BS 4232
prior to painting. Painting shall comprise one coat zinc rich primer applied immediately on
installation and a further coat of oil based flat finish to an Approved colour prior to completion.
Where pipework is to be insulated however, the finish coat shall be a second coat of zinc rich
primer applied immediately before the insulation is applied. Where materials are prefabricated off
site, a coat of primer shall be applied immediately following fabrication and prior to dispatch to
site.
b. Where black, galvanised, plastic, cast iron or copper pipework is exposed to view and is fixed
immediately adjacent to wall or ceiling areas or rooms other than plantrooms the finish coat of the
pipework shall be painted using suitably based paints to match the colour finish of the
surrounding walls or ceilings if applicable.
c. Paint materials shall be suitable for the operating temperature of the pipework installation.
3. Cleaning and Painting Equipment
a. All items of equipment shall be clean and free from dirt, rust, scale and corrosion, and all excess
grease shall be removed prior to painting.
b. Where equipment has been finish painted at works all minor marks or scratches on the finished
item shall be repaired on site by rubbing down filling and 'touch up' painted by using the
manufacturers specific paint to provide an exact colour match and finish. Damage to finishes
which in the CA’s opinion cannot be successfully repaired in this manner or where colour matching
is not satisfactory shall be replaced by utilising new parts, panels, etc., or by an 'on site' complete
re-spray or repainting of the entire item of plant and equipment.
c. All other items of equipment primed or unpainted including pipework and ancillaries shall be
painted/sprayed on site with two coats oil based undercoat and one coat oil based flat finish to an
Approved colour.
4. Galvanised Finishes
a. All materials which are galvanised finish shall be clean and free from dirt grease and corrosion.
Where minor remedial works are necessary and on Approval only the repair to the finish shall be
carried out using two coat application of a cold galvanising zinc rich 2-pack epoxy primer. If in the
opinion of the CA the repair would not be satisfactory or suitable then the item of work requiring
repair shall be removed from site and be galvanised by the hot dipped method or as otherwise
approved.
5. Special Paint Finishes
a. All ferrous metals exposed in areas of very high humidity, permanently damp conditions or
exposed to the weather (this shall apply whether or not the services are insulated) shall be painted
with 2 coats of zinc rich 2-pack epoxy primer and one coat flat finish to an Approved colour.
6. Types of Paints Used
a. The Contractor shall prepare for Approval a schedule of painting finishes before any painting
operation commences. The schedule shall indicate in detail the following: -
b. Item to be painted
c. Standard finish
d. Proposed primer and flat finish to be applied
e. Name and type of paint proposed
f. Proposed colour sample
g. The schedules referred to above shall be approved or alternative colours and type of paint
required shall be stated.
h. The recommendations of BS EN ISO 14713 shall be followed utilising a corrosivity category C5

(Table 1) and a high durability classification (10 to 20 years)
i. In general the following types of paint and preparations will be considered acceptable:
j. Ferrous metal - Internal - zinc rich primer to BS EN ISO 14713 (min 40% zinc phosphate) plus oil
based flat finish.
k. Ferrous metal - External or damp conditions - 2 Pack epoxy zinc phosphate primer to BS EN ISO
14713.
l. Galvanised finishes - Patch repairs - 2 Pack epoxy zinc rich primer to BS EN ISO 14713.
m. Galvanised ferrous metal - rubbed lightly with abrasive paper cleaned with white spirit and one
coat etching primer, one coat of zinc rich primer and one coat oil based finish either gloss or flat
to match the location.
n. Copper - Rubbed lightly with abrasive paper cleaned with white spirit and then two coats of oil
based undercoat and one coat oil based gloss finish or flat finish.
o. Plastic - cleaned and degreased then one coat undercoat and one coat gloss finish or flat finish.
p. All paint shall be applied to the manufacturers recommended dry film thickness and shall be
suitable for the substrate/overcoating finish and intended operating conditions.
q. Conditions under which painting is carried out shall be within tolerance limits set by the paint
manufacturer for the particular application.
N. Health and Safety
1. All products shall comply with the relevant standards referred to in this specification and the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
2. Copies of manufacturer’s health and safety guidance advice for the products shall be held on site and
be available for operatives. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed at all times.
3. The use of paint and other finishes materials shall follow the requirements of the Control of
Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations (COSHH).
4. The surface spread of flame category of the paint finishes shall be selected to comply with Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
A. Perform testing procedure in the presence of the CA, the Employer and personnel of the Municipality
having jurisdiction and the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Section 230010. Piping not
indicated in specific Section shall be tested 1-½ times the operating pressure unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
B. Complete and pressure test pipe before insulation or other finish work is applied. Covering of work before
acceptance is prohibited.
C. Do not test relief valves, pressure-reducing valves, valves, or equipment beyond its rated capacity.
D. Refrigerant pipework - testing
1. After completion, the refrigerant pipework shall be subjected to pressure and leakage testing as BS EN
378.
2. After installation of pipework and prior to sealing of insulation joints and starting of equipment,
pipework should be pressure tested, held for 24 hours and checked for leaks, vacuumed/dehydrated
and held for 12 hours (minimum).
3. Refrigerant charge weight shall be calculated, to the actual installed length of pipework in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The charging shall be carried out with an appropriate
charging station.
4. All pipework shall be labeled with a reference number or other identification relating to the respective
condensing unit served. Identification shall be at 3m intervals and be clearly visible.
5. Refrigerant pipework shall be tested for leakage using oxygen free dry nitrogen prior to connection of
external units and application of pipework insulation.
E. Chilled Water, Condenser water and LTHW Piping System
1. Flush entire system with fresh water by circulation and periodically clean strainers. Continue flushing
until strainers show no visible sediment, then drain system.
2. Circulate entire system with a detergent or other chemical and water solution to remove scale and rust
for 8 hours. Drain and re-flush with clear water. After completion of the cleaning-flush-out described
above, piping shall be filled with low mineral content water.
3. Pressure test with water at 1-½ times the working pressure, but not less than 862kPa, for 3 hours with
no decay in pressure. Visually inspect joints for leaks, repair or replace, and retest.
4. Upon completion of cleaning, and testing, piping shall be filled with domestic water with rust inhibitor.
Tag each system in a manner that is visible, as follows: "This system has been chemically cleaned and
treated." Do not disturb unless accepted by CA.
F. Clean Strainers:
1. Remove, clean and re-install each strainer screen as specified below after systems have been
flushed:
a. Clean each strainer after all adjustments have been made and system has operated a minimum of
24 hours but before the final test and balancing operation is started.
b. Certain screen may remain out of the strainer body after removal during the final cleaning only as
directed by the CA
G. Underground Hydronic Piping Field Test
1. Test the inner pipes of this system hydrostatically to 1.5 times the working pressure of the line. Repair
any leaks found and repeat test.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Provide cleaning as needed to perform testing indicated under Site Quality Control of this Section.
3.5 PIPING SYSTEM LEAK REPAIR
A. Repair leaks which occur during the period of warranty, including any building damage or refinishing costs,
at no cost to Employer.
B. Repair all defects, which develop under tests promptly and repeat the tests. No caulking of screwed joints,
cracks, or holes shall be permitted.
C. Repair leaks in copper tubing by melting out the joint, thoroughly cleaning both parts, and re-soldering
the joint. Refrigeration piping repairs shall meet requirements of ASME B31.5.
D. Minor leaks in welded joints shall be chipped out and re-welded. A general sweating of a welded joint shall
be a cause for rejection of the entire joint.
E. Repair leaks in threaded pipe by replacing the thread or the fitting or both. Any replacement piece shall be
the same length as the piece removed.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Read this Section in conjunction with other related Divisions, the Particular Specification, Schedules,
Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B. Section Includes
1. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork systems.
2. Sheet metal plenums, factory fabricated and job constructed.
3. Fire barrier duct wrap.
D. Definitions
1. Ductwork and Plenum Sizing: Ductwork and plenum sizes on the design drawings state inside clear
dimensions.
2. For other definitions refer to CIBSE, ASHRAE and B & ES (formally HVCA) Standards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers Drawings:
a. Submit ductwork manufacturers drawings
b. Submit typical shop standards and/ or B & ES (Building & Engineering Services Association) details
for each class of duct specified, including particulars such as gauge sizes, welds, joint details and
fitting configurations prior to start of work.
c. Include elevations/sections and show all terminal unit and air device connections.
d. Shop Drawings shall be at a minimum scale of 1:50.
2. Co-ordinated working drawings:
a. Submit coordinated working drawings indicating all of the HVAC services (ductwork, pipework,
etc.) which have been fully co-ordinated with all other services (electrical, plumbing, fire
protection, etc.) including their relation to the structure and building fabric.
b. The Co-ordinated working drawings shall be as defined in section 230010 of the specification
3. Product Data on materials and components for use.
4. Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of
the system.
5. List of tests included.
9. Submit a packaging, storage and installation Method Statement
10. Submit a Quality Plan
11. Summary of deviations from the Specification
12. Submit written report confirming ductwork will be fabricated and installed in accordance with B & ES
(formally HVCA) Standards.
1.3 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 Execution and Closeout Requirement, and
submit the following:
1. Warranties as stated elsewhere
2. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
1.4 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
or specified in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards
1. 1. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the B & ES
(formally HVCA).
a. DW 144 Specification for sheet metal ductwork: Low, Medium and high pressure/velocity air
system.
b. DW 145 Guide to good practice for the installation of fire and smoke dampers
c. DW 143 A practical guide to ductwork leakage testing
d. DW 172 Specification for kitchen ventilation systems
2. British Standards, including;
a. BS EN 13501 (Fire Resisting Ductwork)
b. BS 8313 (Accommodation of Building Services in Ducts)
a. UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
b. UL 555 Fire Dampers
4. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA Standards
a. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
b. NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems
c. NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking operations.
6. International Mechanical Code, IMC.
7. Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA Standards.
a. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
b. ANSI/ SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
c. SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems
d. SMACNA HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
e. ANSI/ SMACNA 008 IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction
8. Above referenced standards may be superseded by notes and details on the Design Drawings and in
the Specification.
B. Where 2 or more references conflict, the most stringent shall take precedence as determined by the CA.
C. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 230010 Quality Requirements.
D. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
or delay to the Works.
A. Accept materials on Site in original factory packaging labeled with manufacturer's identification.
B. Store and handle sealant and fire stopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Store and handle stainless steel materials with factory applied adhesive protective paper maintained
through installation.
D. Protect and store all materials from weather, construction dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage in
original wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Flow Diagrams: Contract Documents may include flow diagrams as a part of the Design Drawings. These
flow diagrams are not for the purpose of giving physical dimensions or locations but rather to make clear
the interconnections, by the duct systems, of the various units of the process. If an item is indicated on
either the flow diagram or on the Design Drawings, but not on both, it shall be assumed that the
Contractor has included such item in his estimate of the cost of the work and that he shall provide the
same.
2.2 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of
manufacturers
B. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the B & ES as their
latest specifications DW144, DW 145, DW 143, DW 172, TR/19 and SMACNA as appropriate. Copies of the
documents shall be kept on site at all times.
C. Ductwork shall be constructed from hot dipped galvanised steel to BS EN 10142 unless stated elsewhere in
the specification or on the drawings.
D. The approval of the CA shall be obtained where other forms of construction or jointing are dictated by
restrictions on space or access.
E. Sizes of ductwork indicated are clear internal dimensions. Where applicable make allowance for internal
lining.
F. Fire and/or smoke dampers shall be installed where ductwork penetrates fire compartment walls or floors.
The only exception being fire rated ductwork where fire dampers shall only be installed where detailed on
the drawings.
G. Components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Liquid and mastic sealants used to seal longitudinal seams and joints shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions. The sealants shall be suitable for the full range of conditions and
temperatures to which the ductwork will be exposed and shall be fully guaranteed for a minimum of 10
years. All sealants shall conform to Class 0 fire performance (Class 0 is a Class 1 material as defined in BS
476-7 which has a fire propagation index (l) of not more than 12 and sub-index (i1) of not more than 6).
I. Electrical bonding terminals shall be provided as necessary to ensure electrical continuity in accordance
with BS 7671 (latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations) and local regulations and codes.
J. Ductwork shall be true in section, correctly aligned, rigid and free from movement, vibration,
independently supported and free from all contact with the building structure.
K. All bolts and nuts shall be of either stainless steel or mild steel protected by the electro-galvanising, or
sheradising.
L. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all site dimensions and the preparation of drawings.
M. Any deviation from the routes indicated on the drawings shall be subject to the approval of the CA.
N. Materials of accessories/components shall be compatible with the ductwork in which they are incorporated
and the finishes shall comply with any special requirements. Casing losses of accessories/components shall
also be compatible.
O. Full technical details of all accessories/components to be provided within ductwork systems shall be
submitted to the CA for approval.
P. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Authority having Jurisdiction for all necessary
inspections and obtaining all approvals for ductwork sections or systems.
Q. Ductwork fabrication
1. Ductwork shall be fabricated to meet the leakage classification in accordance with DW 144.
2. B & ES DW 144 Ductwork classification and air leakage limits;
Duct pressure class Static pressure limit Maximum Air leakage limits
velocity m/s l/s per m2 of duct

surface area
Positive Pa Negative Pa
Low-pressure Class A 500 500 10 0.027 x p0.65
Medium-pressure 1000 750 20 0.009 x p0.65

Class B
High-pressure Class C 2000 750 40 0.003 x p0.65
3. Internal jointing of ducting shall be avoided wherever possible, but if unavoidable, joints shall be
constructed so as to minimise air turbulence at these sections. They shall give a smooth internal
surface with no reduction in cross sectional area of duct. Approval shall be required before internal
jointing is utilised.
4. Where ducting is exposed ensure that the seams are concealed from view to provide a neat
appearance.
5. Liquid or mastic sealant shall be used on all longitudinal and cross joints at works. 'Socket and spigot'
and 'cleated' joints made on site, joints shall be applied during or after assembly of the joints to suit.
6. The use of self-adhesive tape as a primary sealant over both longitudinal and cross joints on air supply
and air extract ductwork is not permitted.
7. Self-tapping screws will not be permitted unless in circumstances where the use of rivets and nuts and
bolts are not practicable and shall be subject to the written approval of the CA.
8. Ensure that there are no sharp edges or corners on cut edges on ductwork, flanges and supports. Raw
edges on ductwork, formed seams, welds and rivets shall be painted with two coats of zinc rich paint
at works and again after erection.
9. All ductwork shall be adequately stiffened, and where necessary braced to prevent drumming or
vibration and ducts shall be free from internal sharp edges or projections.
10. In special cases where internal stiffening is found necessary, these shall be streamlined and details
shall be approved by the CA.
11. The use of panel stiffening on rectangular ductwork shall be subject to the approval of the CA.
12. Where rigid slab insulation is to be applied to ductwork, plain construction shall only be acceptable.
13. Ductwork connections to plant and equipment (e.g. heating, cooling coils etc.) shall, in the case of
bolted flanges, be provided with matching flanges of similar size and thickness. Sheet metal returned
flanges shall not be permitted. Where connections have transformations with angles on one side to
axis more than 25° splitters shall be provided. Splitters shall not obstruct the use of access doors.
14. Ductwork hangers and supports shall be adjustable for height, spaced to ensure adequate support and
where practicable, fitted at each ductwork joint or spaced at not more than the maximum centres in
DW 144 for rectangular, circular and flat oval horizontal ducting. Securing of formed brackets to
corners of ductwork as a means of suspension shall not be permitted.
15. Supports for vertical ductwork in buildings shall generally be located at each floor slab but subject to a
maximum spacing of 4 metres.
16. All ductwork shall be securely supported from the building structure and an approved inert packing
material shall be provided between ducts and supports to prevent direct contact of the ducting with
the structure.
R. Stainless steel ductwork
1. Wherever specified elsewhere or shown on the drawings, ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured
from stainless steel to DW144.
S. Aluminum ductwork
1. Where stated elsewhere or indicated on the drawings, aluminium ductwork and fittings shall be
manufactured from aluminium sheet to DW144.
T. Ductwork and finishes for special locations
1. External ductwork and special locations
a. For external ductwork exposed to the weather and for ducting adjacent to air washers, fresh air
and exhaust louvres, spray coils and humidifiers, black steel sheet galvanised after manufacture
shall be used. Where this is not possible due to construction difficulties then galvanised sheet
steel ductwork with two coats of cold galvanising zinc rich epoxy ester primer at cut edges will be
permitted.
b. The ductwork adjacent to such items of plant shall in addition be coated with two coats of black
bitumastic paint for at least 2 metres and on louvres for a distance equal to twice the louvre
height and in all cases the duct shall slope down towards a plugged drain point.
c. A minimum ductwork thickness of 1.2mm shall be used.
2. Kitchen exhaust ductwork and steam/moisture producing apparatus
a. Kitchen exhaust air ductwork fabrication and installation shall comply with the recommendations
of B & ES DW 172 and as detailed elsewhere within this specification.
b. On kitchen exhaust ductwork and steam/moisture producing apparatus, the ductwork from the
apparatus or canopy within the kitchen fire compartment shall be constructed in stainless steel
sheet to the same specification and installation details as galvanised sheet metal ductwork unless
stated otherwise.
c. On kitchen exhaust ductwork from apparatus or canopies subject to grease laden air the
ductwork, within the kitchen fire compartment, shall be of fully welded construction from a
minimum 1.2mm stainless steel.
d. Ductwork from steam/moisture producing apparatus slip joints in the direction of the flow of
condensation shall be used and longitudinal joints shall not be on the bottom of the ductwork.
e. All exposed ductwork within kitchens shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
f. Where kitchen exhaust ductwork extends beyond the kitchen fire zone, fire rated ductwork shall
be used to comply with BS 476-24, ISO 6944 and NFPA as detailed elsewhere in this specification.
g. For ductwork systems where this clause is applicable the complete ductwork sections shall slope
towards drain points throughout its entire length or where applicable to an agreed and approved
distance from the canopies or steam moisture producing apparatus. The minimum slope of
ductwork shall be 2% or 8.3% on ductwork runs exceeding 25m and at the base of all vertical
risers.
U. Access doors
1. Access/inspection doors shall be provided as detailed below and in accordance with the requirements
stated elsewhere (Section 230010 – General Specification).
2. Access/inspection openings shall be provided for inspection, cleaning, adjustment, calibration and
maintenance of all ductwork systems. Access shall be provided to all ductwork ancillaries such as
bends, fittings, dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, heating and cooling coils, etc.
3. Access/inspection openings in metal ductwork shall be provided in accordance with DW 144 Part 7,
Section 20 and Appendix M Table 25 Level 2 unless otherwise stated.
4. For kitchen ventilation ductwork, access doors for cleaning shall be provided at distances not
exceeding 3 metres and adjacent to all fittings (i.e. bends, etc.). On horizontal duct runs the access
doors shall be on the side of the duct with the underside of the door at least 50mm above the
underside of the duct. On vertical ducts cleaning doors shall be provided at each floor level.
5. Location of access/inspection openings shall be located to ensure safe and ease use without
obstruction from other services and the building structure.
6. The number of access panels provided for cleaning purposes shall suit the method cleaning to be
adopted as agreed with the CA and in accordance with EN 12097 and NB & ES TR/17 and to comply
with health and safety recommended methods.
7. The Contractor shall demonstrate physically and with a method statement that the systems can be
inspected, maintained and cleaned. The approved (by the Contractor) method statement shall be
included in the operating and maintenance manual.
8. Access panels/doors shall not be less than 200mm x 150mm. Where the duct size is below 150mm x
150mm access panels shall be fitted both sides of the duct.
9. Inspection covers for visual inspection of internal elements shall not be less than 150mm diameter.
10. Small size access openings on ductwork shall not project into the airstream.
11. A flexible copper link electrically bonded between the door and frame shall be provided where the
ductwork either contains or has fixed to it, electrical equipment or accessories.
12. Where duct sizes permit, provide larger access doors up to 600mm x 300mm to enable fire damper
fusible linkages to be accessible, thus facilitating single handed to head and shoulder access. Where
duct connections to dampers are smaller than 150mm the ducting local to the dampers shall be
expanded to accept the smallest size access doors.
13. Access doors shall be of the insulated double skin 1.00mm thick galvanised steel type having a
compressible fire resistant gasket on the periphery. A handling ring and stainless steel retaining wire
shall be provided between the door and the frame. The frame shall be pre-drilled for fixing to the duct
opening either flush or surface mounting to suit the application. The frame shall be fitted with a
minimum 1.4mm thick stainless steel sliding latches to engage with lugs fitted to the door to provide a
quick action door location. When fixing the frames to the ductwork fire resistant sealant shall be used.
14. Man access doors shall be provided where it is necessary to gain access inside ductwork connections
between items of equipment (eg heating and cooling coils, front withdrawal air filters, etc.) and where
access is required to multiple fire dampers in large ducts. These doors shall be sized to suit the
equipment installed and shall not be less than a clear opening size of 600 mm square. Ensure that the
floor is of sufficient strength to comply with safety standards and safety bars are provided where
necessary. For safety reasons incorporate operating handles both inside and outside the duct to
prevent personnel being trapped inside the duct.
15. Access doors on insulated ductwork shall be of the insulated double skin 1.6mm thick galvanised steel
type having a flat bar external stiffening frame fitted with a neoprene airtight sealing gasket, the door
suitably hinged and sealed against a mild steel flat bar frame assembly drilled and bolted to ductwork.
The doors shall be provided with quick release fasteners and robust handles on both sides to enable
doors to be opened without difficulty, especially on the negative pressure side of systems.
V. Test holes
1. Test holes in ductwork shall be provided to allow complete testing and commissioning of the system
in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Codes and BSRIA recommendations.
2. Test holes shall be drilled in accordance with DW 144 for metal ductwork.
3. All holes shall be plugged, using effective removable plastic airtight sealing plugs. Samples of plugs
4. Where test holes are to be drilled in external ductwork, these shall not be located in the top of the
duct, or in any location which may allow water or sand to penetrate the duct if the sealing plug is
dislodged.
W. Provision for controls and instrumentation
1. Where control sensors, thermostats, pressure switches, instruments are installed in sheet metal
ductwork provide mounting flanges or plates, additional stiffening and bracketing to ensure that no
vibration or strain is applied to the ductwork or the control instrument and that the fixing is a rigid
mounting. On insulated ductwork, extend hole such that it finishes flush with the insulation.
X. Air turning vanes
1. Air turning vanes shall be provided on all supply air 90° bends, branches, etc., except on ductwork up
to 150 mm wide, and shall be purpose made from preformed double aerofoil section 0.8 mm thickness
galvanised steel blades at 44 mm pitch of a maximum length of 1250 mm between fixings or division
plates on ducts wider than 1250 mm. Fixing shall be by means of galvanised mounting plates spot
welded to the blade and secured to the ends of the blades and the ductwork walls at 150 mm centres.
2. Where indicated adjustable air turning vanes shall be provided to regulate the volume of air passing
through a branch 'take off'. They shall be of the same construction as the turning vanes and shall have
an adjustable bracket which shall be accessible from outside the duct to enable balancing of the
airflow through the branch.
Y. Ductwork connections to builders work holes
1. Where ductwork, fan inlets or outlets connect directly to a builders work duct/hole or wall, the hole
shall have a hardwood timber frame or angle/channel iron mating frame built in onto which the sheet
metal connection shall be made utilising an angle iron flange and gasket.
Z. Flexible joint connections
1. Flame proof flexible connections shall be fitted on all inlets and outlets of axial flow fans, centrifugal
cased fans and air handling units (if fans in units do not have flexible connections). They shall also be
fitted to all ductwork systems crossing building expansion joints and/or rocker slabs.
2. Flexible connections shall prevent all transmission of vibration.
3. Install flexible joint connections in accordance with DW 144.
4. All flexible connections shall conform to BS EN 1366-2 and comply with the Local Authority
requirements.
5. The material used for the flexible connections shall withstand the specified conditions of temperature
and air pressure, and shall comply with the standards of air-tightness. The material shall be fire
resistant and comply with the NFPA requirements unless otherwise stated.
6. The minimum distance between duct ends shall not be less than 50mm with a maximum dimension of
250mm. The flexible connection shall not restrict airflow within the ductwork system, nor should the
joint be used to correct alignment of the ducts.
7. On rectangular connections, the material shall be held in place by a mating flange with a backing
plate.
8. Flexible connections to circular ducting on fan inlet spigots shall be secured by clip band fasteners
having adjustable screws or toggle fittings.
9. The material is to be fitted to give a tightly clamped joint with no air gaps, the connection remaining
flexible without strain and distortion, and shall be correctly aligned.
10. The flexible material and the joints shall comply with the standard of airtightness specified for the
ductwork system of which it forms part.
11. A flexible copper link shall be provided across the flexible connection where the ductwork either
contains or has fixed to it, electrical equipment or accessories.
12. Flexible connections shall not be painted.
AA. Flexible ducting
1. Flexible ducting shall be provided for the final connections between ductwork, terminal units, diffusers
and where indicated on the drawings. They shall comply with BS 476 and to the requirements of the
local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. Flexible ductwork shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 13180 (Dimensions and mechanical
requirements of flexible ducts) and BSRIA Guide BG 43/2013.
3. Flexible ducting shall comply with the same leakage rates as the ductwork system in which they are
installed.
4. Flexible ductwork shall be constructed with either a polyester laminate or aluminium laminate inner
lining supported by an encapsulated high tensile galvanised steel wire helix, fibre-glass or mineral
wool insulation and a reinforced aluminium laminate outer cover.
5. Flexible ductwork shall not pass through any fire resisting walls, floors or cavity barriers.
6. Flexible ductwork shall not be connected to fire dampers.
7. Flexible ductwork shall be pulled taut to ensure that the full internal diameter is obtained and flow
resistance is minimised. This is considered to have been achieved if the duct is extended to 90% of its
maximum length.
8. The flexible ductwork shall not restrict airflow within the ductwork system, nor should the joint be used
to correct alignment of the ducts. Ensure that flexible ductwork does not become kinked or flattened.
9. Flexible connections shall be kept as short as possible and shall be supported rigidly to prevent
movement due to air flow. A maximum interval between supports of 600mm shall be provided or as
recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is the smaller.
10. Maximum lengths shall be 1.0 metre (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) and all ducting shall be
adequately supported to prevent oscillation and noise generation.
11. Steel wire helical reinforcement in flexible ducts is to be carried over the spigots of grilles and diffusers
and connections to these items are to be painted matt black for the visible depth.
12. Changes of direction shall be avoided where possible, if they are required long radius bends and no
kinking or flattening of ducting will be allowed. The minimum bending radius shall be equivalent to
twice its nominal diameter or at the bending radius quoted by the manufacturer, whichever is greater.
13. All bends in flexible ducting shall be carefully formed to prevent puncturing on the inside radii with
consequent increase in pressure drop.
14. Joints shall be made by means of hose type metal clamps which tighten around the circumference of
the ducting and be finally sealed with 100 mm wide adhesive tape.
15. Flexible ducting shall be of the insulated type for all supply air ductwork and return air ductwork.
Flexible ductwork insulation shall be factory applied and shall not be insulated at site.
16. On ductwork where the surrounding air dew point temperature is below the supply air temperature an
additional 25 mm of mineral fibre flexible insulation shall be provided with a suitable vapour barrier.
17. Flexible ducting shall be rot, fungus and corrosion resistant.
BB. Ductwork supports
1. Ductwork shall be supported in accordance with DW 144.
2. Ductwork supports shall be arranged so that minimum stress is imposed upon the ductwork and
additional supports shall be provided either side of equipment such as attenuators, coils, etc.
3. Where the duct is large enough to allow human access for cleaning, the duct and its supports shall
withstand the additional load and the type and access components should allow the cleaning person
to enter and exit the duct in a safe manner.
4. Where the duct is large enough to allow cleaning machinery and/or human access for cleaning, the
duct and its supports shall withstand the additional load and the type and access components should
allow the cleaning equipment and/or person to enter and exit the duct in a safe manner.
5. Ensure that all materials used are compatible.
CC. Bird wire guards
1. Supply and install bird screens of 13 mm stainless steel wire mesh on all intake and extract louvres to
atmosphere unless otherwise stated. The wire gauge shall be not less than 1 mm.
DD. Fire rated and/or temperature rated ductwork
1. Fire resisting ventilation duct: Is a duct or ductwork system used for the distribution, or extraction of
air designed and tested to satisfy the criteria of test defined in BS 476-24, ISO 6944, NFPA and in
compliance with the Local Codes and Regulations.
2. Smoke extract/outlet duct: Is a duct or ductwork system used for the extraction of products of
combustion, designed and tested to satisfy the criteria of test defined in BS 476-24, IS0 6944 and
NFPA. Additionally this duct must prove by test that within the fire compartment, its cross sectional
area is maintained above 75% when subjected to the full fire temperature.
3. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere the fire rated ductwork system shall meet the requirements for
stability, insulation and integrity when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 24.
4. The ductwork shall have an applied coating that has an inherent insulation fire barrier in fire conditions
for 2 hours @ 400°C.
5. Fire rated ductwork shall be installed where stated in the specification and as indicated on the
drawings.
6. Fire rated ductwork shall be manufactured and installed by a specialist providing a system tested and
certified to BS 476-24, IS0 6944, NFPA and with the Local Codes and Regulations for the required
rating. The company shall be accredited and a Certificate of Conformity shall be issued for every
system. The complete system (design, manufacture, installation and certification) shall be by a single
company to ensure a single source of responsibility.
7. Systems shall be capable of meeting the requirements for minimum periods of fire resistance as
detailed in the NFPA Standards unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
8. Fire rated ductwork shall be constructed and protected to ensure that the stability, integrity and
insulation of the ductwork system is maintained for the required duration. Supports and fixings shall
be of sufficient strength and arranged to ensure that the ductwork is maintained in position
throughout the period.
9. Testing to the requirements of BS 476-24 and IS0 6944 shall be by a recognised accredited laboratory
(i.e. NAMAS/UKAS) and in accordance with the Local Codes and regulations.
10. Where the duct passes through compartment walls the space between the duct and the wall shall be
reinforced and packed with proprietary fire stopping material to maintain the stability and integrity of
the system for the required period and shall match the integrity of the compartment wall
11. Drop rods and exposed bearers to be insulated in accordance with manufacturers recommendations
and instructions.
12. In the case of existing metal ductwork where the application of fire insulation cladding material to
provide fire resistance is required, the installer shall check the construction standard of the duct for
conformity with the appropriate standards and submit a report to the CA prior to commencement of
the Works.
13. The complete fire rated ductwork system (design, manufacture, installation, insulation, fire stopping
and certification) shall be installed by the manufacturer and the manufacturer shall be certified to BS
ISO 9001.
14. The fire rated ductwork system shall be tested and certified to BS EN 12101.
2.3 PERFORMANACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Rectangular ductwork passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be sleeved and packed with a sound
absorbent material to eliminate noise transmission to and from the structure and from room to room.
B. The ducts shall be properly and correctly constructed with all necessary accessories to minimise waste of
energy and pressure losses due to eddies, vortices etc. and shall not create, amplify or transmit any noise
or vibration.
C. At each point where a duct passes through a roof or external wall the duct shall be caulked air tight and a
weather 'cravat' or other purpose made arrangement shall ensure a waterproof and weatherproof fixing.
D. All joints shall be lapped, creased, and secured for air tight connection. All slip-joints shall be lapped in
direction of air flow.
E. Joints in air chambers and plenum shall be caulked air tight. Bottoms of all such air chambers resting on a
masonry or concrete floors shall be gasketed or caulked to prevent air leakage.
F. Ducts containing air exhausted from toilets, where located in return air spaces or masonry return air risers,
shall have all joints and seams sealed to be air tight and all shall tested in accordance with DW 143 Class B.
G. Where ductwork is spot welded, all welds shall be wire brushed and the prepared surface shall be treated
with cold galvanising zinc rich epoxy ester primer.
H. Provide splitter dampers, complete with adjusting handle or similar device to all branches of the supply air
ducts to regulate air flows along the main duct and the branch ducts, whether they are specifically
indicated on the Tender Drawings or not.
I. Provide opposed blade type volume control dampers to all branch ducts whether indicated on the
Drawings or not.
J. Provide fire dampers where ducts cross fire compartments whether indicated on the Drawings or not. Fire
damper construction shall comply with the NFPA and local code requirements.
K. Provide flanged joints to plant and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate maintenance. All flanged joints in
ductworks shall be made up with rubber gaskets or suitable mastic material in accordance with DW/144
and NFPA requirements. Apply sealant, adhesives and tapes to joints for sealing. All such material shall
comply with the requirements of DW/144 and NFPA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINIATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Ductwork Installation
1. Any section of ductwork causing noise due to poor construction shall be removed, corrected and
reinstated at no cost or delay to the Works.
2. Ensure that long runs of air ducts incorporate the necessary provision for absorbing movement due to
expansion or contraction resulting from thermal change.
3. During installation the installer shall ensure that dust and debris are prevented from entering the
ductwork system and that the installation is clean prior to commissioning. Commissioning shall not
commence until the cleanliness of the ductwork system has been inspected and certified.
4. Alter duct sizes on basis of equal friction where required to facilitate installation co-ordination.
5. At exposed duct penetrations of wall, floors, and ceilings, provide sheet metal angle type escutcheon
plates with a factory applied powder coated finish in a RAL colour.
6. Run duct straight and parallel with adjacent wall, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
7. Ductwork shall penetrate walls perpendicularly unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
8. Pitch the sides of "diverging" or "converging" airflow with a maximum of 1 to 3 taper
9. Duct openings:
a. Provide airtight rubber grommets openings where required to accommodate thermometers,

smoke detectors, controllers, etc.
b. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems. On completion of air flow
testing, plug the holes as stated elsewhere and re-instate insulation to provide a continuous
insulation and vapour barrier and identify location on ductwork.
c. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork for insertion of instruments, install insulation
material inside the circular opening to provide a continuous insulation and vapour barrier and
identify location on ductwork.
d. At fire/ smoke dampers, allow adequate length of duct to install access door.
10. Volume control dampers:
a. Install damper where specified and where indicated on the drawings.
b. Install a damper in every branch, this may be omitted where the branch supplies only one outlet
or inlet which include a volume control damper.
11. Ducts and duct support shall not contact ceiling framing and wires.
B. External ductwork Installation;
1. Make ducts subject to rain watertight.
2. Construct to ensure water run-off:
C. Sound- rated ducts penetrating acoustical wall floors, and ceilings, either;
1. Where possible avoid duct penetrations through sound-rated walls, floors, and ceilings.
2. Provide packing for unavoidable duct penetrations as recommended by acoustical consultant.
D. Duct Hangers and Supports Installation, General
1. Support horizontal ducts with hangers of size and spacing as indicated in B & ES DW144 Standards.
E. Air duct accessory installation
1. Install following equipment and materials detailed in Section 233300
a. Balancing dampers
b. Fire/smoke dampers
c. Control dampers
d. Sound attenuators
e. Air monitors
f. Duct mounted smoke detector
g. Duct Drains
2. Duct Drains
a. At low points moisture collection
b. 25mm drain. Type M copper
c. S-Strap (or P-trap) for water seal. Minimum depth of trap 1¼ times maximum static pressure
differential inducts section.
d. Run drain to nearest plumbing drain. Terminate with 25mm minimum air gap.
e. Provide tee connection in drain
A. Air leakage testing
1. Up to 10% of low pressure duct systems shall be tested for air leakage in accordance with DW143 and
DW144 Table 17. The systems shall be randomly selected by the CA.
2. 100% of medium and high pressure ductwork shall be tested in accordance with DW143 and DW144
Table 17.
3. All kitchen extract and smoke extract systems shall be tested.
4. All laboratory and specialist extract systems shall be tested
5. Air leakage tests shall be to the pressures recommended in DW 144 and DW 143 for the classification
of the selected ductwork unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
6. Tests shall be carried out as the Works proceed and prior to the application of insulation.
7. In the event of test failure of the randomly selected section, the CA shall have the right to select two
further sections at random for testing. Where successive failures are identified the CA shall have the
right to require the installer to apply remedial attention to the complete ductwork system and carry re-
testing at no cost to the contract.
8. Should any air leakage test fail the CA shall have the right to instruct the air leakage testing of all
medium and low pressure ducts at no additional cost to the Contract.
9. The installer shall provide documented evidence of the calculations used to arrive at the allowable loss
for the section to be tested. The results of the test shall be witnessed and signed.
10. On completion of all air leakage testing the installer shall submit a report signed by a competent
person confirming the results of the leakage tests.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Ductwork internal cleanliness
1. The level of cleanliness and protection shall be as defined in B & ES TR/19 and provided to protection,
delivery and installation standard PDI (Protection, Delivery and Installation) Level 2 unless otherwise
stated.
2. In addition to the requirements of B & ES TR/19 all open ends of ductwork shall be provided with a
factory seal, during transit and protection during site storage.
3. At a time agreed with the CA, but prior to practical completion, the installer shall demonstrate the
internal cleanliness of all ductwork systems are within the recommendations contained within B & ES
TR/19 by the deposit thickness test (DTT). Sufficient samples shall be taken to demonstrate the overall
cleanliness of all ventilation systems.
4. Any systems or parts of systems found to be outside the specified limits shall be cleaned by the
installer and retested until the results are satisfactory at no cost to the contract.
5. A certificate of cleanliness shall be submitted to the CA detailing the DTT tests as part of a ductwork
completion report and included in the record documentation. The report shall include details of any
systems that were cleaned, the cleaning method used and COSHH data on any chemicals used for
cleaning or biocidal treatment. Recommendations for future testing and cleaning shall also be
provided in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 233116 - NON-METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Specification, Schedules, Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B. All ductwork shall be non-metal ductwork shall only be used where specifically stated elsewhere in the
specification or on the drawings
C. Non-metal ductwork shall not be used for;
1. Fire resistant ductwork
2. Kitchen/grease exhaust systems
3. Adjacent to any mechanical or electrical heat sources
D. Section Includes
1. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork systems.
E. Related Work Sections and Documentation
F. Definitions
1. Ductwork and plenum sizing: Ductwork and plenum sizes on the Design Drawings state inside clear
dimensions.
2. For other definitions refer to CIBSE, ASHRAE and B & ES (formally HVCA) Standards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers Drawings:
a. Submit ductwork manufacturers drawings
b. Submit typical shop standards and/or B & ES (Building & Engineering Services Association) details
for each class of duct specified, including particulars such as gauge sizes, welds, joint details and
fitting configurations prior to start of work.
c. Include elevations/sections and show all terminal unit and air device connections.
d. Shop Drawings shall be at a minimum scale of 1:50.
2. 2. Co-ordinated working drawings:
a. Submit coordinated working drawings indicating all of the HVAC services (ductwork, pipework,
etc.) which have been fully co-ordinated with all other services (electrical, plumbing, fire
protection, etc.) including their relation to the structure and building fabric.
b. The co-ordinated working drawings shall be as defined in section 230010 of the specification
3. Product data on materials and components for use
the system.
9. Method Statement
10. Quality Plan
11. Summary of deviations from the Specification
12. Submit written report confirming ductwork has been fabricated and installed in accordance with B &
ES (formally HVCA) Standards.
a. Include component list with manufacturer's reference numbers, descriptions of materials and
A. The ductwork sub-contractor shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design, fabrication and
installation and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified to ISO
9001 and 14001.
marking.
C. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
1. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the B & ES.
a. DW 144 Specification for sheet metal ductwork: Low, Medium and high pressure/velocity air
system.
b. DW 145 Guide to good practice for the installation of fire and smoke dampers
c. DW 143 A practical guide to ductwork leakage testing
d. DW 154 Specification for plastic ductwork
e. DW 191 Code of practice for resin-bonded glass fibre ductwork
2. British Standards, including
a. BS EN 13501 (Fire Resisting Ductwork)
b. BS 8313 (Accommodation of Building Services in Ducts)
a. UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
b. UL 555 Fire Dampers.
a. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
b. NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems.
c. NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking operations.
a. International Building Code (IBC).
b. International Mechanical Code (IMC).
6. Above referenced standards may be superseded by notes and details on the Design Drawings and in
the Specification.
D. Where 2 or more references conflict, the most stringent shall take precedence as determined by the CA.
E. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 230010 Quality Requirements.
F. All non-metal ductwork shall be manufactured from materials with zero ozone depletion potential (CFC
and HCFC free) and low Global Warming Potential (GWP). Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, written
confirmation from the manufacturer(s) that the products to be installed are CFC and HCFC free.
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer at no additional
cost.
A. Accept materials on Site in original factory packaging labeled with manufacturer's identification.
B. Store and handle sealant and fire stopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Store and handle stainless steel materials with factory applied adhesive protective paper maintained
through installation.
D. Protect and store all materials from weather, construction dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage in
original wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Flow Diagrams: Contract Documents may include flow diagrams as a part of the Design Drawings.
These flow diagrams are not for the purpose of giving physical dimensions or locations but rather to
make clear the interconnections, by the duct systems, of the various units of the process. If an item is
indicated on either the flow diagram or on the Design Drawings, but not on both, it shall be assumed
that the Contractor has included such item in his estimate of the cost of the work and that he shall
provide the same.
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of
manufacturers
B. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the B & ES as their
latest specifications DW144, DW 145, DW 154, DW 143, DW 191 and TR/19 as appropriate. Copies of the
documents shall be kept on site at all times.
C. Non-metal ductwork shall only be used where stated within the specification or detailed on the drawings
D. Plastic ductwork shall be in compliance with DW 154 (Specification for plastics ductwork)
E. Resin Bonded Glass Fibre ductwork shall be in compliance with DW 191 (Code of practice for resinbonded
glass fibre ductwork)
F. Pre-insulated ductwork shall be in compliance with BS EN 13403 (Ductwork made from insulation duct
boards)
G. Turning vanes shall be manufactured from the same material as the ductwork
H. All ductwork fittings (bends, take-offs, etc.) shall be factory fabricated, site fabrication will not be permitted.
I. The approval of the CA shall be obtained where other forms of construction or jointing are dictated by
restrictions on space or access.
J. Sizes of ductwork indicated are clear internal dimensions. Where applicable make allowance for internal
lining.
K. Fire/Smoke dampers shall be installed where ductwork penetrates fire compartment walls or floors as
detailed elsewhere.
L. Components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
M. Electrical bonding terminals shall be provided as necessary to ensure electrical continuity in accordance
with BS 7671 (latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations) and Local Codes.
N. Ductwork shall be true in section, correctly aligned, rigid and free from movement, independently
supported and free from all contact with the building structure.
O. Ensure that there are no sharp edges or corners on cut edges on ductwork, flanges and supports.
P. All bolts and nuts shall be of either stainless steel or mild steel protected by the electro-galvanising, or
sheradising.
Q. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all site dimensions and the preparation of drawings.
R. Any deviation from the routes indicated on the drawings shall be subject to the approval of the CA.
S. Materials of accessories/components shall be compatible with the ductwork in which they are incorporated
and the finishes shall comply with any special requirements. Casing losses of accessories/components shall
also be compatible.
T. Full technical details of all accessories/components to be provided within ductwork systems shall be
submitted to the CA for approval.
U. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Authority having Jurisdiction for all necessary
inspections and obtaining all approvals for ductwork sections or systems.
V. Ductwork fabrication
1. Ductwork shall be fabricated to meet the leakage classification in accordance with DW 154.
2. B & ES DW 154 Ductwork classification and air leakage limits;
Duct pressure class Static pressure limit Maximum Air leakage limits
Positive Pa Negative Pa velocity l/s per m2 of duct

surface area
m/s
Low-pressure Class A 500 500 10 0.027 x p0.65
Medium-pressure Class B 1000 750 20 0.009 x p0.65
High-pressure Class C 2000 750 40 0.003 x p0.65
3. Internal jointing of ducting shall be avoided wherever possible, but if unavoidable, joints shall be
constructed so as to minimise air turbulence at these sections. They shall give a smooth internal
surface with no reduction in cross sectional area of duct. Approval shall be required before internal
jointing is utilised.
4. Where ducting is exposed ensure that the seams are concealed from view to provide a neat
appearance.
5. The jointing of non-metal ductwork shall be selected to suit the ductwork material being used and
shall be compliance with DW 154 and the manufacturers recommendations.
6. The use of self-adhesive tape as a primary sealant over both longitudinal and cross joints on air supply
and air extract ductwork is not permitted.
7. All ductwork shall be adequately stiffened, and where necessary braced to prevent drumming or
vibration.
8. In special cases where internal stiffening is found necessary, these shall be streamlined and details
9. The use of panel stiffening on rectangular ductwork shall be subject to the approval of the CA.
10. Where rigid slab insulation is to be applied to ductwork, plain construction shall only be acceptable.
11. Ductwork connections to plant and equipment (e.g. heating, cooling coils etc.) shall, in the case of
bolted flanges, be provided with matching flanges of similar size and thickness. Where connections
have transformations with angles on one side to axis more than 25° splitters shall be provided.
Splitters shall not obstruct the use of access doors.
12. Ductwork hangers and supports shall be adjustable for height, spaced to ensure adequate support and
where practicable, fitted at each ductwork joint or spaced at not more than the maximum centres in
DW 154 for rectangular, circular and flat oval horizontal ducting or the manufacturers
recommendations. Securing of formed brackets to corners of ductwork as a means of suspension shall
not be permitted.
13. Supports for vertical ductwork in buildings shall generally be located at each floor slab but subject to a
maximum spacing of 2.4 metres.
14. All ductwork shall be securely supported from the building structure and an approved inert packing
material shall be provided between ducts and supports to prevent direct contact of the ducting with
the structure.
W. Pre-insulated ductwork
1. Pre-insulated ductwork shall be manufactured from rigid non fibrous resin insulation of minimum
30mm thickness and with silver aluminium foil on both sides to form a vapour seal.
2. The ductwork shall either be fabricated by the manufacturer or a Contractor approved and trained by
the manufacturer.
3. The pre-insulated ductwork shall be UL listed as a Class 1 air duct.
4. In addition to the details specified elsewhere pre-insulated ductwork shall not be used where subject
to mechanical damage (i.e. plantrooms, low level, exposed in car parks), externally or where the
temperatures could exceed 80°C.
X. Ductwork finishes for special locations
1. External ductwork
a. For external ductwork exposed to the weather the ductwork shall be manufactured from UV
resistant material.
2. Ductwork on steam/moisture producing apparatus
a. Ductwork from steam/moisture producing apparatus slip joints in the direction of the flow of
condensation shall be used and longitudinal joints shall not be on the bottom of the ductwork.
b. For ductwork systems where this clause is applicable the complete ductwork sections shall slope
towards drain points throughout its entire length or where applicable to an agreed and approved
distance from the canopies or steam moisture producing apparatus. The minimum slope of
ductwork shall be 2% or 8.3% on ductwork runs exceeding 25m and at the base of all vertical
risers.
Y. Access doors
1. Access/inspection openings shall be provided for inspection, cleaning, adjustment, calibration and
maintenance of all ductwork systems. Access shall be provided to all ductwork ancillaries such as
dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, heating and cooling coils, etc.
2. Access/inspection openings in pre-insulated ductwork shall be provided in accordance with DW 144

Part 7, Section 20 and Appendix M Table 25 Level 2 unless otherwise stated.
3. Access/inspection openings in glass fibre ductwork shall be provided in accordance with DW 191
Section 8 unless otherwise stated.
4. Access/inspection openings in plastic ductwork shall be provided in accordance with DW 154 Part 6,
Section 15 and Appendix D Table 14 unless otherwise stated.
5. Location of access/inspection openings shall be located to ensure safe and ease use without
obstruction from other services and the building structure.
6. The number of access panels provided for cleaning purposes shall be in accordance with B & ES TR/17
(Cleanliness of Ventilation Systems) and to suit the method cleaning to be adopted as agreed with the
CA and in compliance with the Local Authority health and safety recommended methods.
7. The Contractor shall demonstrate physically and with a method statement that the systems can be
inspected, maintained and cleaned. The approved (by the Contractor) method statement shall be
included in the operating and maintenance manual.
8. Access panels/doors shall not be less than 200mm x 150mm. Where the duct size is below 150mm x
150mm access panels shall be fitted both sides of the duct.
9. Inspection covers for visual inspection of internal elements shall not be less than 150mm diameter.
10. Small size access openings on ductwork shall not project into the airstream.
11. A steel retaining wire shall be provided between the door and the frame.
12. Where duct sizes permit, larger sizes up to 600mm x 300mm shall be provided to enable fire damper
fusible linkages to be accessible, thus facilitating single handed to head and shoulder access. Where
duct connections to dampers are smaller than 150mm the ducting local to the dampers shall be
expanded to accept the smallest size access doors.
13. The access doors shall be of the same material as the ductwork and having a compressible fire
resistant gasket on periphery. On insulated ductwork the access panels shall be of the insulated double
skin type. A handling ring and stainless steel retaining wire shall be provided between the door and
the frame. The frame shall be pre-drilled for fixing to the duct opening either flush or surface
mounting to suit the application. The frame shall be fitted with a minimum 1.4mm thick stainless steel
sliding latches to engage with lugs fitted to the door to provide a quick action door location.
14. Man access doors shall be provided where it is necessary to gain access inside ductwork connections
between items of equipment (e.g. heating and cooling coils, front withdrawal air filters, etc.) and where
access is required to multiple fire dampers in large ducts. These doors shall be not less than a clear
opening size of 600 mm square. Ensure that the floor is of sufficient strength to comply with safety
standards and safety bars are provided. For safety reasons incorporate operating handles both inside
and outside the duct to prevent personnel being trapped inside the duct.
Z. Test holes
2. Test holes shall be drilled in accordance with DW 154.
3. All holes shall be plugged, using effective removable rubber airtight sealing plugs. Samples of plugs
duct, or in any location which may allow sand or rainwater to penetrate the duct if the sealing plug is
dislodged.
AA. Provision for controls and instrumentation
1. Where control sensors, thermostats, pressure switches, instruments are installed in non metal
ductwork provide mounting flanges or plates, additional stiffening and bracketing to ensure that no
vibration or strain is applied to the ductwork or the control instrument and that the fixing is a rigid
mounting. On insulated ductwork, extend hole such that it finishes flush with the insulation.
BB. Air turning vanes
1. Air turning vanes shall be provided on all supply air 90° bends, branches, etc., except on ductwork up
to 150 mm wide, and shall be purpose made from preformed section of the same material as the
ductwork blades as detailed in DW154 Fig 9. Fixing shall be by means of galvanised mounting plates
spot welded to the blade and secured to the ends of the blades and the ductwork walls at 150 mm
centres.
2. Where indicated adjustable air turning vanes shall be provided to regulate the volume of air passing
through a branch 'take off'. They shall be of similar construction to turning vanes and shall have an
adjustable bracket which shall be accessible from outside the duct to enable balancing of the airflow
through the branch.
CC. Ductwork connections to builders work holes
1. Where ductwork, fan inlets or outlets connect directly to a builders work duct/hole or wall, the hole
shall have a hardwood timber frame or angle/channel iron mating frame built in onto which the
ductwork connection shall be made utilising an angle iron flange and gasket.
DD. Flexible joint connections
1. Flame proof flexible connections shall be fitted on all inlets and outlets of axial flow fans, centrifugal
cased fans and air handling units (if fans in units do not have flexible connections). They shall also be
fitted to all ductwork systems crossing building expansion joints and/or rocker slabs.
2. Flexible connections shall prevent all transmission of vibration.
3. Install flexible joint connections as DW 144 and DW 154 as appropriate.
4. All flexible connections shall conform to BS EN 1366-2 and comply with the Local Authority
requirements.
5. The material used for the flexible connections shall withstand the specified conditions of temperature
and air pressure, and shall comply with the standards of air-tightness. The material shall be fire
resistant and comply with the NFPA requirements.
6. The minimum distance between duct ends shall not be less than 50mm with a maximum dimension of
250mm. The flexible connection shall not restrict airflow within the ductwork system, nor should the
joint be used to correct alignment of the ducts.
7. On rectangular connections, the material shall be held in place by a mating flange with a backing
plate.
8. Flexible connections to circular ducting on fan inlet spigots shall be secured by clip band fasteners
having adjustable screws or toggle fittings.
9. The material is to be fitted to give a tightly clamped joint with no air gaps, the connection remaining
flexible without strain and distortion, and shall be correctly aligned.
10. The flexible material and the joints shall comply with the standard of airtightness specified for the
ductwork system of which it forms part.
11. A flexible copper link shall be provided across the flexible connection where the ductwork either
contains or has fixed to it, electrical equipment or accessories.
12. Flexible connections shall not be painted.
EE. Flexible ducting
1. Flexible ducting shall be provided for the final connections between ductwork, terminal units, diffusers
and where indicated on the drawings. They shall comply with BS 476, BS EN 13180 (Dimensions and
mechanical requirements of flexible ducts) and BSRIA Guide BG 43/2013 and to the requirements of
the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. Flexible ducting shall comply with the same leakage rates as the ductwork system in which they are
installed.
3. Flexible ductwork shall not pass through any fire resisting walls, floors or cavity barriers.
4. Flexible ductwork shall not be connected to fire dampers.
5. Flexible ductwork shall be pulled taut to ensure that the full internal diameter is obtained and flow
resistance is minimised. This is considered to have been achieved if the duct is extended to 90% of its
maximum length.
6. The flexible ductwork shall not restrict airflow within the ductwork system, nor should the joint be used
to correct alignment of the ducts. Ensure that flexible ductwork does not become kinked or flattened.
7. Flexible connections shall be kept as short as possible and shall be supported rigidly to prevent
movement due to air flow. A maximum interval between supports of 600mm shall be provided or as
recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is the smaller.
8. Maximum lengths shall be 1.0 metre and all ducting shall be adequately supported to prevent
oscillation and noise generation.
9. Steel wire helical reinforcement in flexible ducts is to be carried over the spigots of grilles and diffusers
and connections to these items are to be painted matt black for the visible depth.
10. Changes of direction shall be avoided where possible, if they are required long radius bends and no
kinking or flattening of ducting will be allowed. The minimum bending radius shall be equivalent to
twice its nominal diameter or at the bending radius quoted by the manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
11. All bends in flexible ducting shall be carefully formed to prevent puncturing on the inside radii with
consequent increase in pressure drop.
12. Joints shall be made by means of hose type metal clamps which tighten around the circumference of
the ducting and be finally sealed with 100 mm wide plastic adhesive tape.
13. Flexible ducting shall be of the insulated type for all supply air ductwork and return air ductwork.
Flexible ductwork insulation shall be factory applied and shall not be insulated at site.
14. On ductwork where the surrounding air dew point temperature is below the supply air temperature an
additional 25 mm of mineral fibre flexible insulation shall be provided with a suitable vapour barrier.
15. Flexible ducting shall be rot, fungus and corrosion resistant and shall generally be constructed with a
woven fibreglass coated with neoprene inner lining, galvanised steel helical spring and a woven fibre-
glass impregnated and coated with neoprene outer cover retaining a neoprene impregnated
reinforcement cord.
FF. Ductwork supports
1. Ductwork shall be supported in accordance with DW 154 and the manufacturer’s recommendations as
appropriate.
2. Ductwork supports shall be arranged so that minimum stress is imposed upon the ductwork and
additional supports shall be provided either side of equipment such as attenuators, coils, etc.
3. Where the duct is large enough to allow human access for cleaning, the duct and its supports shall
withstand the additional load and the type and access components should allow the cleaning person
to enter and exit the duct in a safe manner.
4. Where the duct is large enough to allow cleaning machinery and/or human access for cleaning, the
duct and its supports shall withstand the additional load and the type and access components should
allow the cleaning equipment and/or person to enter and exit the duct in a safe manner.
5. Ensure that all materials used are compatible.
GG. Bird wire guards
1. Supply and install bird screens of 13 mm square plastic coated wire mesh on all intake and extract
louvres to atmosphere unless otherwise stated. The wire gauge shall be not less than 1 mm.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Rectangular ductwork passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be sleeved and packed with a sound
absorbent material to eliminate noise transmission to and from the structure and from room to room.
B. The ducts shall be properly and correctly constructed with all necessary accessories to minimise waste of
energy and pressure losses due to eddies, vortices etc. and shall not create, amplify or transmit any noise
or vibration.
C. At each point where a duct passes through a roof or external wall the duct shall be caulked air tight and a
weather 'cravat' or other purpose made arrangement shall ensure a waterproof and weatherproof fixing.
D. All joints shall be lapped, creased, and secured for air tight connection. All slip-joints shall be lapped in
direction of air flow.
E. Joints in air chambers and plenum shall be caulked air tight. Bottoms of all such air chambers resting on a
masonry floor shall be gasketed or caulked to prevent air leakage.
F. Provide splitter dampers, complete with adjusting handle or similar device to all branches of the supply air
ducts to regulate air flows along the main duct and the branch ducts, whether they are specifically
indicated on the Drawings or not.
G. Provide opposed blade type volume control dampers to all branch ducts whether indicated on the
Drawings or not.
H. Provide fire dampers as indicated on the Drawings and where ducts cross fire compartments. Fire damper
construction shall be as detailed in Section 233300 (Air Duct Accessories) and comply with the NFPA
requirements.
I. Provide flanged joints to plant and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate maintenance. All flanged joints in
ductworks shall be made up with rubber gaskets or suitable mastic material in accordance with NFPA
requirements. Apply sealant, adhesives and tapes to joints for sealing. All such material shall comply with
the requirements of DW 144, DW 154 and NFPA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely completion and notify the Engineer of the
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Ductwork Installation
1. Any section of ductwork causing noise due to poor construction shall be removed, corrected and
reinstated at no expense to the contract or delay to the programme.
2. Ensure that long runs of air ducts incorporate the necessary provision for absorbing movement due to
expansion or contraction resulting from thermal change.
3. During installation the installer shall ensure that dust and debris are prevented from entering the
ductwork system and that the installation is clean prior to commissioning. Commissioning shall not
commence until the cleanliness of the ductwork system has been inspected and certified.
4. Where it is necessary to amend duct sizes for co-ordination with other services to facilitate installation
this shall be on the basis of equal friction.
5. At exposed duct penetrations of wall, floors, and ceilings, provide plastic angle type escutcheon plates.
6. Run duct straight and parallel with adjacent wall.
7. Duct shall penetrate perpendicular to wall unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
8. Pitch the sides of "diverging" or "converging" airflow with a maximum of 1 to 3 taper
9. Duct openings:
a. Provide openings where required to accommodate thermometers, smoke detectors, controllers,

etc.
1) Insert through airtight rubber grommets.
b. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems:
1) Complete with metal cap with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.
2) On completion of air flow testing re-instate insulation to provide continuous insulation and
vapour barrier and identify location on ductwork.
c. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork for insertion of instruments, install insulation
material inside metal ring.
d. At fire/ smoke dampers, allow adequate length of duct to install access door.
10. Volume control dampers:
a. Install damper where specified and where indicated on the drawings.
b. Install damper in every branch.
11. Ducts and duct support shall not contact ceiling framing and wires.
B. External ductwork Installation;
1. Make ducts subject to rain watertight.
2. Construct to ensure water run-off:
C. Sound- rated ducts penetrating acoustical wall floors, and ceilings, either;
1. Where possible avoid duct penetrations through sound-rated walls, floors, and ceilings.
2. Provide packing for unavoidable duct penetrations as recommended by acoustical consultant.
D. Duct Hangers and Supports Installation, General
1. 1. Support horizontal ducts with hangers of size and spacing as indicated in B & ES DW144 Standards.
E. Air duct accessory installation
1. Install ductwork accessories as detailed on the drawings and in Section 233300
2. Duct Drains
a. At low points moisture collection
b. 25mm drain. Type M copper
c. S-Strap (or P-trap) for water seal. Minimum depth of trap 1¼ times maximum static pressure
differential inducts section.
d. Run drain to nearest plumbing drain. Terminate with 25mm minimum air gap.
e. Provide tee connection in drain
A. Air leakage testing
B. Up to 10% of low pressure duct systems shall be tested for air leakage in accordance with DW 143 and DW
154. The systems shall be randomly selected by the CA.
C. 100% of medium and high pressure ductwork shall be tested in accordance with DW143 and DW154.
D. All laboratory and specialist extract systems shall be tested
E. Tests shall be to the pressures recommended in DW 143 and DW 154 for the classification of the selected
ductwork.
F. Air leakage testing shall be in accordance with DW 154 and the procedures as DW 143 unless otherwise
stated.
G. Tests shall be carried out as the Works proceed and prior to the application of insulation.
H. In the event of test failure of the randomly selected section, the CA shall have the right to select two
further sections at random for testing. Where successive failures are identified there shall be the right to
require the installer to apply remedial attention to the complete ductwork system and carry re-testing at
no cost to the contract.
I. Should any air leakage test fail the CA shall have the right to instruct the air leakage testing of all medium
and low pressure ducts at no additional cost to the Contract.
J. The installer shall provide documented evidence of the calculations used to arrive at the allowable loss for
the section to be tested. The results of the test shall be witnessed and signed.
K. On completion of all air leakage testing the installer shall submit a report signed by a competent person
confirming the results of the leakage tests.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Ductwork internal cleanliness
1. The level of cleanliness and protection shall be as defined in B & ES TR/19 and provided to protection,
delivery and installation standard PDI (Protection, Delivery & Installation) Level 2 unless otherwise
stated.
2. In addition to the requirements of B & ES TR/19 all open ends of ductwork shall be provided with a
factory seal, during transit and protection during site storage.
3. At a time agreed with the CA, but prior to practical completion, the installer shall demonstrate the
internal cleanliness of all ductwork systems are within the recommendations contained within B & ES
TR/19 by the deposit thickness test (DTT). Sufficient samples shall be taken to demonstrate the overall
cleanliness of all ventilation systems.
4. Any systems or parts of systems found to be outside the specified limits shall be cleaned by the
installer and retested until the results are satisfactory at no cost to the contract.
5. A certificate of cleanliness shall be submitted to the CA detailing the DTT tests as part of a ductwork
completion report and included in the record documentation. The report shall include details of any
systems that were cleaned, the cleaning method used and COSHH data on any chemicals used for
cleaning or biocidal treatment. Recommendations for future testing and cleaning shall also be
provided in the O & M manuals.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Divisions, the General Requirements, the
Particular Specification, Schedules, Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B. Section Includes, but not limited to;
1. Fire dampers
2. Smoke dampers.
3. Combined fire/ smoke dampers
4. Control motorized dampers.
5. Balancing dampers
6. Fire exhaust duct dampers.
7. Sound attenuators
8. Ductwork access doors
9. Duct air flow stations and transmitters.
10. Duct smoke detectors.
C. Related Work Divisions and Documentation
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit Product Data on all materials, accessories and components for use.
2. Manufacturers Drawings
a. Submit manufacturer’s drawings of factory fabricated assemblies.
b. Manufacturer’s drawings shall be at a minimum scale of 1:50.
c. Include the duct accessories on the co-ordinated working drawings.
5. Submit a packaging, storage and installation Method Statement
6. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
7. Sound attenuators:
a. Submit pressure drop information.
b. Submit factory certified acoustical performance and test reports indicating sound attenuation
dynamic insertion loss and self-generated noise level in octave band sound power level.
8. Submit static pressure drop data for each smoke and fire/smoke damper for actual installation
conditions. Select damper with a not to be exceeded 25Pa pressure drop. The damper size shall be
larger or the same size as the ductwork. Provide ductwork transitions and larger damper to satisfy
static pressure drop requirements.
C. Test Reports:
a. Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with this Section and
governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosive
resistance and compressive strength.
D. Maintenance Data:
1. Submit maintenance instructions and include this data and product data in maintenance manuals.
E. Supplementary Product Literature:
F. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
G. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
H. Include details of all air duct accessories on the fully coordinated drawings.
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of the
equipment and materials and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards,
certified to ISO 9001 and 14001.
marking.
C. Flame-proofing treatments subject to deterioration from moisture or humidity shall not be acceptable.
D. Smoke dampers, fire dampers and combined smoke/ fire dampers shall be classified by UL as a leakage
rated damper for use in smoke control systems, under UL 555 S, and shall bear a UL label attesting to same
and shall be approved by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
E. Demonstrate resetting of fire dampers to Authority Having Jurisdiction and the CA.
F. Accessories shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and NFPA 101, as applicable. Fire and fire/smoke
dampers shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
G. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
1. British Standards Institute (BS)
3. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) Standards:
a. UL 33 Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
b. UL 555 Fire Dampers.
c. UL 555 S Smoke Dampers.
5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, ASHRAE Standards.
H. Provide mock-ups and testing and inspections in accordance with Section 230010 Quality Requirements.
I. Mock-ups
1. Provide a field mock-up of proposed contractor fabricated balancing dampers.
2. Provide a field mock-up fire/smoke damper installation complete with wall framing, wallboard, wall
opening filler pieces, perimeter mounting angles, sleeve, breakaway duct connections, and access
door. Obtain the CA approval of the mock-up prior to starting damper installation.
J. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
to the Works.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All ductwork accessories shall be fully assembled and individually packed at the manufacturer’s works with
the equipment reference details on the outside of the packaging.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect all materials from weather, construction dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage by storing in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide systems and products from one of the listed manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers.
B. Provide systems and products a single manufacturer.
C. All materials shall be strictly in accordance with this specification.
D. All acoustic components shall be made from materials with zero ozone depletion potential (CFC, HFC and
HCFC free). Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, written confirmation from the manufacturer(s) that the
products to be installed are CFC, HFC and HCFC free.
E. Testing evidence shall be provided for all acoustic infill material and submitted to the CA showing that the
fibres from which the products are made are not classified as a possible carcinogen as detailed by
European Directive 97/69/EC. Fibres shall also comply with the requirements as stated elsewhere and with
HSE guidelines.
2.2 CONTROL AND BALANCING DAMPERS
A. General
1. On ductwork air distribution and extract/exhaust systems control/balancing type dampers shall be
installed at the following positions in addition to the locations indicated elsewhere to regulate air flow,
whether indicated on the drawings or not and where indicated elsewhere.
a. At terminal grilles, diffusers, outlets, etc., unless a terminal balancing damper is specified with the
terminal unit grille, diffuser, etc
b. Within sub-branch ducts which serve 3 or more terminal units, grilles, diffusers, etc
c. Within branch or zone ducts
d. Within the main supply, return or extract/exhaust duct which carries the total air flow, located in
the plantroom near to the fan and on the plant side of any attenuator, to regulate the total air
volume
e. On fresh air inlets, exhausts and return air arrangements to regulate the volume
2. Where automatic constant or variable volume regulators are provided to terminals units balancing
dampers will not be required.
3. The number and location of dampers shall be in accordance with the latest editions of CIBSE
Commissioning Code Series A - Air Distribution and BSRIA AG3 Commissioning air systems to facilitate
balancing and regulation of the complete and/or part of the system.
4. The exact location of the damper shall be determined by the installer and shall be subject to approval
by the CA. Care shall be taken to ensure that noise is not generated within the ductwork or breakout
noise is not generated which would exceed the noise level rating of the area or area served as stated
elsewhere.
5. Where regenerated noise is unavoidable, in areas served or adjacent to the damper provide as
required acoustic internal lining to reduce the regenerated noise level to an acceptable level and if
necessary, acoustic wrapping around the damper shall be provided to reduce the breakout noise.
Where internal lining is installed the ductwork cross sectional area shall be maintained.
6. Dampers shall be in accordance with DW 144 or DW 154 as appropriate unless stated otherwise.
7. All dampers shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. Automatic control dampers
1. Where dampers are automatically controlled, motors or thrusters shall be rigidly mounted onto the
damper frame and adequately sized to satisfactorily operate the damper as stated elsewhere.
2. The motor / thruster manufacturer’s instructions shall be complied with and the unit shall be carefully
aligned.
3. The construction of the dampers shall be as for manual multi-blade dampers.
C. Single-blade dampers
1. Shall be single or double skin steel single blade in accordance with DW 144.
D. Multi-blade dampers
1. Multi-blade dampers hall be multi-leaf opposed blade type with the damper blade traversing the
narrower dimension of the ductwork.
2. Dampers shall be sized and selected to limit the face velocity to a maximum of 7.0 m/s when fully
open and shall have a free area not less than 82% of the ductwork area unless stated otherwise.
3. Casing frames shall be constructed from 1.2 mm mild steel galvanised channel outer frame and 1.0
mm galvanised steel inner frame to give a double skin construction.
4. Frames shall have all welded corner integral flanges for duct connections and the frame shall contain
die cast zinc alloy gears, out of the air stream, operating the blades from either an externally mounted
low torque hand wheel and spring loaded locking gear with pointer indicator, or a motor driven unit.
5. Damper blades shall be of the aerofoil low aspect ratio, stainless steel construction with nonferrous
bearings at both ends of each blade.
6. Damper blades shall be a maximum length of 1200 mm and a maximum width of 75 mm and where
dampers are required in large ducts or large louvres, etc., a galvanised steel channel frame connecting
strips shall be provided to house banks of individual dampers.
7. Where automatic operation is required a geared drive spindle shall be provided, in lieu of the control
box and hand-wheel, to suit the motor driven link or spring assembly control unit.
E. Airtight dampers
1. Where dampers are required for automatic control or a tight shut off is necessary then a fixed
compressible neoprene or rubber gasket shall be provided along the entire length of the tips of the
blades to ensure an airtight seal between blades and the frame. In all cases, air tight dampers shall be
provided on all fresh air inlet and exhaust dampers (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) in addition to
any other locations specified.
2. Airtight dampers shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 1751
3. The construction of the dampers shall be as for multi-blade dampers.
F. Iris control dampers
1. Shall be of the multi-plate circular shutter type dampers constructed in galvanised sheet steel with a
lockable controller lever, control scale and pressure differential measuring connections located either
side of the shutter blades.
2. Dampers shall be sized and selected to limit the velocity to a maximum of 5 m/s and shall have a free
area not less than 95% of the ductwork area when fully open unless stated otherwise.
3. On circular ductwork above 800 mm diameter dampers shall be of the multi-leaf opposed blade type
as specified elsewhere with circular spigot flange connections to suit the size of adjoining ductwork.
G. Non – return dampers
1. Shall be the 'off centre pivot' weighted multi-leaf parallel blade type damper constructed in galvanised
sheet steel contained in a galvanised sheet steel frame with flanges to suit the ductwork connections
and shall have neoprene strips at the ends of the blades to provide an air tight shut off against air flow
in the opposing direction to the normal air flow.
2. Dampers shall have a minimum free area of 90% and a pressure drop not in excess of 30 Pa when fully
open under fan pressure unless stated otherwise.
2.3 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire dampers shall be provided and installed wherever ductwork systems pass through fire compartment
walls, floors and wherever deemed necessary by the Civil Defence or Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B. Dampers shall have UL label consistent with fire rating of the partition in which they are installed.
C. All fire dampers shall be shall be tested and must fully comply with BS 476-20
D. The complete fire damper assembly shall have a fire resistance rating equal to the fire barrier it penetrates.
E. The fire dampers shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
F. Fire damper installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with DW 144 and DW 145.
G. The Contractor shall submit to the CA prior to ordering the equipment evidence of the fire rating of all fire
dampers in accordance with the above standards
C. Fire dampers shall be installed within the thickness of the structure, set up in the open position and 'fired'
to ensure satisfactory closure.
H. Fire dampers shall be tested by competent persons on completion of the installation.
I. Fire dampers shall be of the quick release stainless steel folding curtain type with the blades mounted
outside of the air stream and shall provide positive closure to maintain integrity and not permit the
passage of flame in accordance with BS 476-20
J. Fire dampers shall be constructed of 1.2mm (minimum) galvanised steel casings with continuously welded
corners and spigot connections formed as an integral part of the construction for ease of duct attachment.
Ensure damper casings meet the equivalent air leakage performance standard for the ductwork system
they are installed.
K. Fire dampers shall also be complete with installation frames or an alternative building in fixing method
(depending on the type of fire rated structure) which has been tested by the manufacturer to meet the fire
rating requirements and approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
L. Under no circumstance shall the fire damper rely on the associated ductwork for support.
M. Unless otherwise stated the 0.8mm stainless steel folding curtain shall be held open outside of the air
stream by an easy maintenance UL listed fusible link mechanism (rated at 74 °C)
N. The fire damper shall have stainless steel side seal gaskets inserted to minimise blade end clearance, thus
retarding and further impending the spread of smoke and other products of combustion and stainless
steel constant tension closure springs to ensure correct operation regardless of whether the damper is
horizontally or vertically mounted.
O. External indicators shall be fitted on the damper casing and sight apertures to provide visual indication of
damper blade position. Integral torsion springs shall ensure automatic external indication in either the
horizontal or vertical application.
P. The bottom blade of the folding shutter shall be fitted with a manual release device to facilitate the
opening of the damper from either side of the damper.
Q. Provision shall be made to remotely indicate that a fire damper is in the closed position.
R. The Contractor shall demonstrate that satisfactory access for operating and resetting of all dampers in their
installed locations has been provided and that fire links can be replaced. Where more than one fire
damper is installed in a frame ensure access is provided to all fire dampers.
S. The Contractor shall confirm with all relevant authorities that fire and smoke dampers are acceptable prior
to ordering of equipment.
T. Dampers installed in aluminum and stainless steel ducts shall be stainless steel.
2.4 SMOKE CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Provide smoke dampers in smoke partitions in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 101, local regulations and
as indicated on the drawings.
B. All smoke dampers shall be tested and must fully comply with BS 476-20. The damper shall be tested both
sides of the installation.
C. Each damper shall be classified by UL as a leakage rated damper for use in smoke control systems under
the latest version of UL 555 S, and shall be UL marked to indicate compliance. The damper manufacturer
shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes. Having a single damper size
tested and UL qualified is not acceptable.
1. As part of the UL qualification, smoke dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate, both to
open and close, under HVAC system operating conditions, with pressures of at least 0.25kPa (25mm) in
the closed position, and 10m/s air velocity in the position for normal operation.
2. Dampers and their actuators shall be qualified under UL 555 S to an elevated temperature of 177°C.
Actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of fabrication. The assembly shall
meet UL 555 S qualifications for dampers and actuators.
D. The complete smoke damper assembly and installation shall have a fire resistance rating equal to the fire
barrier it penetrates.
E. The smoke dampers shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
F. The damper installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with DW 144 and DW 145.
G. Under no circumstance shall the fire damper rely on the associated ductwork for support.
H. Smoke control dampers shall be arranged to fail safe in the event of mechanical or electrical failure unless
stated otherwise elsewhere.
I. Dampers shall have fully welded galvanised steel casings and spigot connections. Damper blades shall be
formed of stainless steel and of sealed aerofoil riveted double skin construction. The design shall ensure
low closed blade smoke leakage at ambient temperature.
J. The dampers shall be of the motorised open / spring closure type (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) and
all dampers shall be complete with a motor actuator suitable for a 230v supply. The damper shall be
arranged to open when a power supply is provided to the actuator or alternatively by depressing the
switch on the motor.
K. The dampers shall have suitable voltages and controls to allow the dampers to be controlled by the smoke
control system and / or fire alarm system
L. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere closure of the damper shall be achieved by:
1. Smoke control system and/or fire alarm system
2. Interruption of mains power (depending on fire control philosophy)
3. Depressing the lighted indicator
M. The damper motor shall be provided with two auxiliary contacts for remote monitoring of the damper
open and closed status.
N. Dampers shall incorporate visual indication of the damper blade position.
O. The dampers shall be complete with installation frames or alternative fixing method (depending on the
type of fire rated structure). The dampers shall be mounted with the installation frames in accordance with
the manufacture’s recommendations.
P. On large ducts, it may be necessary to have a multi-damper assembly mounted within a frame. Local
authority and CA approval shall be obtained for all multiple damper assemblies.
Q. The actuator and control assemblies shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
R. Operation of all smoke dampers shall be demonstrated to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and CA.
S. Each damper shall be tested during commissioning and the commissioning documentation shall include a
report scheduling all dampers with the test results.
T. Dampers installed in aluminum and stainless steel ducts shall be stainless steel.
2.5 COMBINED FIRE/ SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Provide combined fire/ smoke dampers at fire rated/ smoke partitions/structure and walls in accordance
with NFPA 90A and NFPA 101. Refer to the Fire Strategy Report, Design Drawings and diagrams.
B. Combined Fire/Smoke Dampers shall be to the same specification as Smoke Dampers but shall include a
fusible link.
C. Unless otherwise stated the 0.8mm stainless steel folding curtain shall be held open outside of the air
stream by an easy maintenance UL listed fusible link mechanism (rated at 74 °C)
2.6 PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Pressure relief dampers shall be provided where indicated on the drawings or stated in the specification.
B. The pressure relief dampers shall be designed to maintain a pre-set pressure differential across a partition
wall or within a duct system and shall be selected to operate over the mid-range of the damper.
C. The damper shall incorporate balanced aerofoil blade(s) which shall be capable of regulating the room or
duct pressure within a tolerance band of ±3Pa over the specified air flow range.
D. Control pressures shall be factory set, but shall have the facility to adjust the blade weights at site if
required and approved by the CA.
E. The pressure relief dampers shall be manufactured from aluminium extrusions, unless stated otherwise
elsewhere. The blade pivot mechanism shall incorporate nylon bushes and stainless steel pins to ensure a
maintenance free operation.
F. All pressure relief dampers shall be airtight and tested in accordance with BS EN 1751 (Aerodynamic
testing of dampers and valves) Class 2
G. Where pressure relief dampers are installed in fire rated walls or are specified as fire rated they shall be
tested in accordance with BS EN 1634-1 (Fire resistance & smoke control tests for door and shutter
assemblies) and have a 2 hour (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) classification in accordance with BS EN
13501 (Fire classification of construction products).
2.7 SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Attenuators shall be installed to achieve the stated noise levels with minimum resistance (maximum 50Pa
unless stated otherwise elsewhere) to air flow.
B. The Contractor shall undertake the final selection of sound attenuation equipment to satisfy the particular
performance requirements of the specification and the spatial allowances based on final plant/equipment
selection and final co-ordinated installation drawings
C. The Contractor shall undertake the redesign of the final acoustic requirements associated with approved
alternative equipment or materials which subsequently varies the Works in any way whatsoever.
D. Attenuators shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Attenuators shall be delivered to site and stored with ends sealed to prevent contamination or damage.
F. The direction of airflow through the attenuator shall be clearly marked on the external casing.
G. Attenuator ratings shall be determined in accordance with BS EN ISO 7235.
H. Static pressure loss of attenuators shall not exceed those specified at the required airflow.
I. The dynamic insertion loss of attenuators shall include the effect of any facing materials.
J. Casings shall be manufactured from galvanised mild steel sheet of not less than 0.8mm thickness with
continuously lock-formed joints and constructed to minimise air leakage. The casing construction shall be
in accordance with NFPA 90A standard and the ductwork specification for the connecting ductwork as
stated elsewhere.
K. The internal fill material shall be protected with galvanised perforated sheet metal not less than 0.8mm and
comply with high velocity ductwork recommendations of HVAC DW 144.
L. The acoustic infill material shall be inorganic mineral or glass fibre of a density sufficient to obtain the
specified acoustic performance and packed to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. The infill
materials shall be non-combustible, inert, non-hygroscopic, rot and vermin proof. All internal surfaces shall
be non-shedding and sealed against fibre release.
M. The infill material shall be guaranteed against erosion and to enable airway velocities of up to 25 m/s.
N. Infill materials shall be inherently non-combustible and limit the surface spread of flame to Class 1 when
tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited.
O. Vapour barriers which are not an inherent part of the acoustic material, shall be of minimum thickness not
exceeding 0.07mm and shall be installed unstressed. The material shall be inherently non-combustible and
limit the surface spread of flame to Class 1 when tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not
emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited. Membranes used shall be suitably supported and fixed. Any loss
of acoustic performance due to this treatment will be deemed to be accommodated in the overall
performance of the noise control equipment.
P. Splitters shall have aerodynamic leading and trailing fairings. Square ends will not be acceptable unless
approved by the CA.
Q. Side attenuator elements shall be fitted as standard to reduce noise breakout and assist in smooth airflow.
R. L-section and T-section splitter attenuators shall be designed for smooth air flow. Splitters in bend
attenuators shall be fitted perpendicular to the plane of the bend.
S. Horizontal splitter elements shall be stiffened to prevent flexing or airway restriction and provide retention
of acoustic infill.
T. Splitters shall preferably be in a vertical orientation and shall be a tight-fit within the casing. The
configuration shall have a regular splitter/airway dimension across the full width of the unit.
U. Attenuators shall be of rigid construction and shall not distort or rely upon the ductwork for support and
where required intermediate stiffeners shall be fitted for rigidity.
V. In plantrooms it is preferred that attenuators be located immediately before penetration of the plantroom
enclosure but where this is not possible external acoustic lagging shall be installed on the ductwork
between the attenuator outlet and the plantroom enclosure to prevent noise break in to the distribution
ductwork.
W. Acoustical fill material shall be protected with polymer (Mylar) sheeting.
X. Attenuators located in kitchen extract systems shall have a protective coating to permit cleaning and
grease removal approved by the CA.
2.8 AIR TRANSFER/CROSS TALK ATTENUATORS
A. Provide straight through attenuators for air transfer and cross talk applications as indicated in the
schedules, on drawings or where required to prevent noise transfer between rooms.
B. The air transfer system shall match the acoustic performance of the intervening wall or ceiling system. If
cross talk is being assessed between two adjacent spaces with different noise criteria, then the lowest
criteria shall be used.
C. For non-ducted type units the attenuator cross section shall be sized to maintain a maximum pressure
drop of 5 Pa.
D. For ducted type units the attenuator cross section shall be sized to maintain a maximum pressure drop of
10Pa (unless stated otherwise elsewhere).
E. Construction of air transfer/cross talk attenuator shall be as described under the clause Sound Attenuators.
2.9 2.9 ACOUSTIC DUCT LININGS
A. Acoustic linings shall not be used inside ductwork unless indicated as being required and approved by the
CA.
B. Linings shall not reduce the required airway dimensions and the size of ductwork shall be increased such
that the internal cross-sectional area is maintained at the size indicated. Insulation materials shall
accurately fit the internal surfaces of the duct.
C. Inspection covers, in accordance with DW144, shall be provided at both ends of ductwork sections over
900mm long and one end for ductwork less than 900mm long, containing sound absorbent linings.
D. Infill materials shall be inherently non-combustible and limit the surface spread of flame to Class 1 when
tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited.
E. The lining material shall be protected against product migration and erosion and shall be securely retained
by 0.8mm (minimum) perforated galvanised steel sheet, hot dip galvanised after perforation.
F. Edges and joints shall be protected to prevent the lining lifting due to the action of the airflow.
2.10 2.10 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURES
A. Acoustic enclosures shall provide an overall sound reduction index (SRI) of not less than that stated
elsewhere. Full allowance shall be taken of any loss due to doors, windows, ventilation openings and panel
joints.
B. Doors, access panels, windows and ventilation ducts or electrical cable penetrations shall be treated so as
to maintain the specified acoustic performance of the assembled enclosure.
C. Panels shall be structurally self-supporting without additional stiffening. All necessary steelwork shall be
provided and be galvanised after manufacturer.
D. Demountable sections shall be designed to allow safe working and handling and provide easy disassembly
and re-assembly.
E. Removable panels shall give access to items requiring cleaning, adjustment, replacement and other
maintenance. Where enclosures are designed for personnel access, internal lighting and viewing panels
shall be provided. Access doors shall open from both sides.
F. Enclosure panels shall be constructed from galvanised mild steel sheet at least 1.6 mm thick or as
otherwise stated. The absorbent internal lining shall be faced with a protecting membrane and be retained
by perforated galvanised mild steel sheet. The infill media shall be compression packed to prevent
settlement together with provision inside the panel to prevent settling as necessary. Fibres of infill media
shall comply with the requirements as stated elsewhere.
G. The assembled enclosure shall be designed and constructed to withstand the particular site operating
conditions. External enclosures shall be suitably weatherproofed and designed for the site conditions
including sand, wind, high temperatures, salt etc.
H. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere the internal surfaces of the enclosure panels shall be designed to give
the following minimum average sound absorption coefficients when tested in accordance with BS EN ISO
354.
Frequency (Hz) 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K
Minimum average absorption coefficient 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.7
(α)
I. The enclosure shall be isolated from the noise-producing equipment and also be isolated from the
building structure.
J. Provisions shall be made to dissipate heat emitted from the noise-producing equipment where necessary.
2.11 EXTERNAL ACOUSTIC DUCT LAGGING
A. Provide external acoustic lagging where indicated. It shall consist of a resilient layer wrapped around the
duct together with an outer high mass skin. The total composite shall be inherently non-combustible and
limit the surface spread of flame to Class 1 when tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not
emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited.
B. The thermal performance of all insulation shall be maintained for a minimum of the plant design life.
C. On surfaces operating below ambient temperature a complete vapour barrier seal shall be provided.
D. Vapour barriers shall be continuous and the integrity maintained.
E. Proprietary acoustic lagging products shall be approved by the CA before commencement of the Works.
Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, details that define the materials to be used including thermal
conductivity and acoustic performance, life expectancy, method of application and fire performance.
F. All joints of the outer mass skin system shall be staggered and lapped by no less than 50mm. Direct butt
joints shall not be permitted.
G. All insulating material and associated products shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and instructions.
H. Fibres of infill media shall be comply with the requirements as stated elsewhere.
2.12 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Duct Smoke Detectors
1. Duct mounted smoke detectors shall be supplied and wired as detailed elsewhere and shall be
installed in the ducts described under this section.
2. Provide necessary hardware for mounting particularly on circular ducts, and provide duct transitions as
required in accordance the minimum velocity requirements for the accepted submitted duct smoke
detector.
B. Ductwork Access Doors
1. Ductwork access shall be provided as detailed in the General Specification Section 230010 in addition
to the details stated below.
2. Ductwork access doors shall be constructed from close fitting rigid galvanized steel assemblies with
sealing gaskets. For insulated ductwork a minimum 25mm thick insulation with sheet metal cover shall
be provided.
3. Provide a minimum of 2 No. hinges and 2 No. sash locking devices. Provide additional hinges for
larger sizes.
4. Access door shall be pressure rated meet or exceed to the duct system, which is installed.
5. Application:
a. Access doors shall be provided as indicated in B & ES (formally HVCA) DW144 and TR17 and shall
provide for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire
dampers, smoke dampers, combined fire/smoke dampers, before humidifiers and duct heating
coils.
b. In addition, provide access doors at 15m on center in long duct runs to facilitate cleaning. Review
locations prior to fabrication.
c. Doors shall be square, sized to 3/4 of the larger of the duct width or height, but no smaller than
200mm x 200mm nor no larger than 600mm x 600mm.
C. Duct accessories materials shall be constructed to the same standards or higher as the ductwork system in
which they are installed.
D. Applications
1. Fire dampers:
a. Provide at locations, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where
required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
b. Provide fire dampers complete with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct
connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings, and hinges.
c. Fire damper units having dampers, sleeves, angles, and breakaway duct connections constructed
as an integral unit shall be acceptable if UL labeled as an assembly.
2. Balancing dampers, low pressure:
a. Provide balancing dampers as indicated elsewhere and on the drawings.
3. Motorised and balancing dampers, medium and high pressure:
a. Provide motorised and balancing dampers on systems as indicated in the typical details, diagrams
and Design Drawings. Do not use splitter dampers except where specifically indicated on the
Design Drawings.
2.13 FABRICATION
A. Construct and test fire dampers in accordance with UL 555. Each fire damper shall have a UL fire protection
rating, as required to match the fire compartmentation rating, and shall include a UL label in accordance
with established UL labeling procedures. Fire dampers shall be accepted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
B. Construct fire damper fusible links to UL 33 for service intended.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and the specified standards.
B. Sound attenuators shall be installed as indicated on the Design Drawings and supported from structural
members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No rigid connection shall exist between
sound attenuators and partitions, walls and ceilings.
C. For connections to medium and high-pressure fans, install 3mm thick neoprene pad over fabric and hold in
place with additional metal strips.
D. Test holes
2. Test holes shall be drilled in accordance with DW 144 for metal ductwork.
3. All holes shall be plugged, using effective removable rubber airtight sealing plugs. Samples of plugs
duct, or in any location which may allow rainwater to penetrate the duct if the sealing plug is
dislodged.
E. Provision for controls and instrumentation
1. Where control sensors, thermostats, pressure switches, instruments and the like specified elsewhere
are installed in sheet metal ductwork provide mounting flanges or plates, additional stiffening and
bracketing to ensure that no vibration or strain is applied to the ductwork or the control instrument
and that the fixing is a rigid mounting.
2. On insulated ductwork, extend hole such that it finishes flush with the insulation.
F. Install fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combined fire/ smoke dampers in accordance with
manufacturer's printed installation instructions including provisions for any supplementary framing and
blocking of metal or wood studs in drywall partitions.
G. Install control motorized dampers in locations indicated on the Design Drawings, controls schematics and
in an accessible location. Coordinate mounting of damper operators and control devices.
H. Install duct mounted smoke detectors in ducts upstream of associated smoke damper and fire/ smoke
dampers per manufacturer's printed installation recommendations. Assure the minimum air velocity at the
sampling tube location per manufacturer's recommendation.
I. Install duct airflow stations in locations indicated on the Design Drawings and comply with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
A. Sound Attenuators Testing: A fully independent testing firm shall provide documentation and test results
certifying compliance with this Section. Standard module testing shall be conducted in accordance with
industry standards. The sound attenuator shall be acoustically tested with metal inlet and outlet duct
sections while under the rated airflow conditions. The noise reduction data shall include the effects of
flanking paths and vibration transmission. Test results shall be certified by the testing agency and be made
available to the CA for acceptance. The test results shall include a complete description of test conditions
and measurement procedure.
B. Testing and Commissioning
1. All ductwork testing to be in accordance with commissioning related activities as detailed elsewhere.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 233400 – HVACS FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. HVAC Fans
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all fans, indicating construction, dimensions,
weights, performance and maintenance requirements.
2. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each fan.
a. Schedule of starting and full load currents
b. Details of connections for fans
c. Fan characteristic curves with operating point clearly indicated. Fan curves shall indicate air
volume, static pressure, fan speed and absorbed power.
d. Sound pressure spectrums
e. Vibration mounting details, including isolation efficiency on high and low speed
f. Fan motor rating and design absorbed power
g. Fan and motor speeds
h. Drive belt sizes
i. External to unit, static and total pressures
j. All fan accessories (i.e. anti-vibration supports, flexible connections, etc.)
4. Submit performance curves showing head, volume flow rate, efficiency and absorbed power of each
fan shall be submitted to the CA prior to equipment being ordered. Fan curves shall indicate
performance under all likely operating conditions. Fan test data shall comply with BS 848-1 and BS
ISO 13347. Data shall be related to fan speed to allow the effect of speed changes to be assessed.
5. Submit electrical data, including motor starting requirements.
6. Submit acoustic data for all fans provided on the project. Provide sound data in octave band sound
power at specified operating condition and at full capacity for fan inlet, outlet and casing radiated
level.
7. Submit maximum vibration levels for the assembled fan. At a minimum, vibration levels shall not
exceed 50dB re 1 micro G at 1/ 3 octave band readings from 5Hz to 100Hz frequency.
C. Manufacturers Certified Drawings.
1. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every fan. The drawing information shall include
a. Manufacturer
b. Model
c. Fan Type.
d. Wheel Type
e. Pressure Class
f. Arrangement
g. Size
h. Air Flow Capacity
i. Static Pressure
j. Drive
k. Motor kW and Fan kW
2. Installation drawings showing fan layout and connections. Include setting out drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
D. Calculations:
1. The external static pressure (ESP) calculation shall be submitted for each fan system at the time of
material submittal approval.
2. External static pressure calculations based on approved installation drawings taking into account the
actual resistance of all duct fittings (including grilles, sound attenuators etc.) as provided by the
manufacturers of such item for approval by the CA before final selection of fans.
3. Fan resistances shall take account of the pressure drop across filters in a dirty condition.
E. Test Reports:
1. Fans shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
2. Submit factory test reports and certificates of all factory quality control programmes
4. Provide copies of the certified test data.
1. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,
and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in
maintenance manuals.
H. Seismic Qualification Certificates (if seismic criteria apply to project):
1. Provide the following for fans, accessories and components from the manufacturer.
a. Basis for certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled
components or on calculation.
b. Dimensioned outline drawings of equipment: Identify centre of gravity and locate and describe
mounting and anchorage provisions.
c. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements.
I. Supplementary Product Literature:
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the fan components.
J. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
K. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
b. Include recommendations for unit maintenance.
c. Include instructions for lubrication, wiring diagrams, and preventive/ routine maintenance check
list.
d. Include full factory testing and commissioning data
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of fans for
HVAC applications and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified to
ISO 9001 and 14001.
marking.
C. Manufacturer shall assure that all equipment provided does not exceed maximum allowable vibration
peak-to-peak displacement data listed in the latest ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.
D. All fans shall be labelled with the CE marking confirming compliance with the Eurovent recommendations
E. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
a. BS 848 & BS EN 5802 (Fans for general purposes)
b. BS ISO 13347 (Determination of fan sound power levels)
c. BS EN 12101 (Smoke extract fans)
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, UL Standards:
7. International Electro technical Commission, IEC Standards.
F. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 230010 Quality Requirements.
H. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose
and shall, where applicable, conform to the standards of and shall comply with Local By-laws and
Regulations.
I. All materials required for installation under these specifications shall be subject to the acceptance of the
CA. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a first class
standard article to the CA's acceptance shall be provided.
A. Fans shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at the factory. Mark the fan unit room
locations and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
B. Each fan shall have lifting lugs of shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement.
C. Deliver fans with motors, sheaves and belts completely assembled and mounted in units.
D. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid
damage to components, enclosures and finish.
E. Unit shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Fans shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
A. Do not operate fans for any purpose including construction activities, temporary or permanent, until
ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, damper control is in operation, and
fan has been run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide fans and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers.
B. Fans shall have the performance and duty as stated elsewhere and include any allowance required to meet
manufacturing and testing tolerances.
C. Fans shall be selected to deliver the required air volume flow rate and meet the noise levels indicated. Any
allowances required to meet manufacturing tolerances shall be included.
D. All motors shall be selected to operate at a maximum of 1450 rpm and frequency of 50Hz unless stated
otherwise elsewhere.
E. All fan resistances stated in the equipment schedules have been calculated based on a particular selection
of equipment. The Contractor shall recalculate the total system resistances based on the final selection of
plant and installation drawings and revise the fan resistance as necessary to achieve the design air volume
flow. Similarly, if the fan power requirements and sound power level changes, the Contractor shall reselect
the necessary motor size, wiring and suitable attenuation to achieve the noise levels stated elsewhere at no
additional cost.
F. The Contractor shall ensure that the fan is capable of generating sufficient pressure to meet the required
volume flow in the ductwork system as installed including any effect on fan performance from suction and
discharge connections.
G. Fan resistances shall take account of pressure drop across filters in dirty conditions.
H. Air distribution systems in new and existing buildings shall comply with the requirements of the Authority
Having Jurisdiction and meet the recommended minimum standards.
I. Individual components shall, in addition to the requirements of this section, comply with other relevant
sections of this specification.
J. Manufacturing drawings shall be submitted to the CA of all fans for approval prior to manufacture.
K. Fans shall be installed in a manner strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
L. All fans shall be tested in accordance with the current editions of BS 848-1 and BS ISO 13347.
M. Fan impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the works of the manufacturer and test
certificates issued to the CA.
N. Where sound power levels have been indicated these shall be the maximum sound power levels.
O. Fans shall be constructed to proven design standards and shall be capable of withstanding the pressures
and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty, during starting, during stopping
and during speed and duty changes. Fan casings shall be of substantial construction, adequately stiffened
and braced to prevent vibration and drumming. Bolted inspection covers shall be provided to allow easy
access to internal working parts. Lubrication points shall be extended to accessible positions external to
the casings.
P. Unless otherwise stated all fans installed in air distribution systems shall have a minimum total efficiency at
the system operating conditions as follows:
Air volume Efficiency
Up to 1 m³/s 65%
Over 1 m³/s up to 2 m³/s 70%
Above 2 m³/s 75%
Q. Externally mounted fans and internal exposed surfaces on fans handling outside air shall be protected
against corrosion from high ambient temperatures, sand, wind and salt laden atmosphere.
R. Fan motors on axial flow fans shall be pre-wired to an external electrical terminal box to IP55 unless stated
otherwise.
S. Fans and drives shall be mounted on rigid base-frames or support structures to ensure that proper
alignment is maintained.
T. Belt-driven fans shall be capable of running continuously at 10% in excess of the selected duty speed and
shall have a minimum of two belts. A set of replacement belts and pulleys shall be provided and issued to
the Client at practical completion.
U. Where duplicate (run & stand-by) extract fans are specified or indicated on the drawings for toilet extract
systems they shall discharge into a common outlet plenum, via a shutter to prevent reverse flow through
the stand-by fan. The fans shall have automatic change-over on hours run or failure of the lead fan.
V. All fans shall be provided with a metal identification plate indicating area served, fan reference, flow rate
(m³/s), power (kW), speed (RPM), static pressure (Pa) and size of unit.
W. Motors and drives
1. Centrifugal fans shall be belt-driven unless otherwise indicated. All other fans shall be direct coupled
unless handling hazardous substances where they shall be driven as required by the application and
provided with protection to the drive to ensure safe operation of the fan.
2. Each motor shall comply with BS 4999, BS 5000, and BS EN 60034 and shall be of such a size and type
to start and drive the equipment under normal conditions of service without overloading.
3. Where mounted in external air, or highly moisture laden atmosphere, they shall be weatherproof or
separately protected. Motors in hazardous atmospheres shall be flameproof, certified to BS EN 60079.
4. Motors shall comply with other relevant sections of this specification.
5. Nameplates shall be positioned so that they are readable from normal access positions.
6. Motors arranged for automatic starting shall have a label of durable material, not less than 150mm x
100mm in size, permanently affixed in a prominent position and having, in clearly inscribed characters,
the legend:
a. Danger - This motor is automatically controlled and may start without warning. Isolate before
inspection.
7. Vee-belt drives shall comply with BS 3790. A minimum of two belts shall be provided and the drive
sized so that the rated output of the motor can be transmitted with one belt removed.
8. All final motor selections shall be agreed with the CA prior to any equipment being ordered
X. Guards
1. All power transmission shafts, belts and pulley drives shall be guarded and be in compliance with PD
5304 (Guidance on safe use of machinery; published by the British Standards Institute).
2. Fan guards shall be purpose-made by the manufacturer or to the approval of the manufacturer and be
constructed from galvanised or stainless steel wire.
3. Guards shall be installed to prevent inadvertent contact with dangerous parts of machinery and the
mesh size and/or the location of the guard shall prevent finger contact with any enclosed danger
point.
4. Construction and installation shall ensure strength and rigidity and it shall not be possible to remove
any guard or access panel without the aid of a tool.
5. Where required removable access panels shall be provided to permit tachometer readings to be made
of motor and drive shafts and belt tension to be tested.
6. For duplicate motor installations, the guard provided shall be designed to protect both drives. All
fixings and mountings shall be installed to facilitate change-over of the drive.
Y. Vibration isolation
1. General
a. Supply and install vibration isolators on all fans and drives to ensure that undue movement and
vibration is not transmitted to the building, other supporting structure or ductwork. All anti-
vibration mountings shall be selected, supplied and fixed by the Contractor.
b. Isolators must be selected for the operating weight of equipment and shall be positioned for
equal deflection.
c. Mountings shall be clearly and permanently marked with their load capacity and colour coded to
BS1726 to enable easy identification during installation.
d. Mountings shall be constructed of materials that are passive or have low levels of electrolytic
action
e. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that all mountings are appropriate for the design
loads, operating and environmental conditions that shall prevail. Particular attention shall be paid
to mountings exposed to atmospheric conditions to prevent corrosion.
f. The Contractor shall provide all necessary information, including but not limited to actual plant
loads and running speeds, to the vibration isolation specialist/supplier to enable final isolator
selections to be made. Selection shall allow for uneven load distributions such that the minimum
deflection is achieved on all vibration isolators under normal operating conditions.
g. The Contractor shall confirm to the CA the final vibration control equipment selections and their
compliance with the specification prior to commencement of the Works.
h. Pipework and ductwork connections to equipment mounted on anti-vibration mounts shall not be
rigid. Flexible couplings or connections shall be installed.
2. Helical steel spring mounts
a. Helical steel spring mounts shall comprise single or multiple spring elements fitted to a plated
steel base plate. A rubber/neoprene pad shall be bonded beneath the bottom plate.
b. All mountings shall incorporate a lockable levelling device. There shall be provision for bolting
through the base plate in at least two places.
c. The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height and be
selected to have at least 50% overload capacity.
d. Vertically restrained spring mounts
e. Mountings shall be as described under the clause for helical steel spring mounts but include a
mechanism that provided an adjustable vertical limit stop to prevent spring extension when load is
decreased.
f. Mountings used in the external environment shall be adequately protected against environmental
and atmospheric degradation.
3. Turret compression mountings
a. Turret compression mountings shall comprise a synthetic formulated rubber compound turret in
compression between two steel plates with complete lateral freedom for deformation. All metal
surfaces must be covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads to and bottom. Bolt holes
shall be provided in the top and bottom plates to facilitate fixing.
b. The rubber turret shall be resistant to oil, saline conditions, sunlight, corrosion and ozone.
c. Turret compression mountings shall not be employed where temperatures exceed the
manufactures recommendations.
4. Helical spring compression hangers
a. Spring compression hangers shall comprise a helical steel spring fitted with acoustic rubber end
caps fitted incorporated within a steel hanger box.
b. The lower box hole diameter shall be adequately sized to provide free drop rod movement up to
15° from vertical in any direction in order to compensate lateral movement.
c. The hanger bracket shall be designed to carry five times overload without failure.
d. Where hangers incorporate a positioning device, the adjustment system shall incorporate a
locking mechanism to prevent the hanger going out of adjustment as a result of vibration or
unauthorised tampering.
e. Spring hangers shall be installed to support all ductwork connected to rotating and reciprocating
machinery within plantroom areas or within 30 m of the plant whichever is the lesser.
5. Neoprene element hangers
a. The hanger shall be essentially as described under the clause helical spring compression hangers
except it shall incorporate a neoprene in shear element. The element moulded in special
formulated rubber compound shall be resistant to oil, sunlight, corrosion and ozone.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Shall be of the high efficiency backward curved aerofoil bladed type and be either single inlet single width
or double inlet double width type as indicated.
B. Fan casings shall be constructed from mild steel sheet, with welded or riveted joints and welded angle
stiffeners, constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller. Casings shall be rigid without deflection,
drumming or excessive vibration.
C. For toxic or hazardous application fan casing shall be gas tight all welded construction.
D. Finishes and materials of construction shall not be affected by gases handled by the fan or the local
environment.
E. Unless otherwise indicated the complete fan assembly shall be painted with two coats of primer finish and
two coats of flat or gloss finish at the manufacturer’s works to an approved colour.
F. Inlet eyes shall be of the curved aerofoil profile to streamline the airflow into the impeller and of adequate
diameter to allow withdrawal of the impeller without splitting the fan scroll. G. A drain connection shall be
provided at the base of the fan scroll.
G. Permanent indicators shall show the direction of rotation of the impeller. Casings shall have access panels
incorporating air seals to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller.
H. The fan outlet shall be flanged and drilled to suit connections to the ductwork system flexible connections.
I. Unless otherwise stated impellers shall be of mild steel protected against corrosion. Impellers shall be
keyed to the driving shaft or fixed with tapered bush fittings.
J. Each fan impeller shall have a separate shaft. Where necessary, fan shafts shall be connected with flexible
couplings to ensure correct alignment.
K. Each fan impeller shall be supported by an individual bearing system. Bearings shall be ball or roller type
and shall be self-aligning. Indirectly driven fans shall be provided with pedestals incorporating two
bearings. Bearings on the non-driven side of the fan shall be provided with a scroll stiffening framework
supported from the fan base to maintain bearing position and alignment.
L. The impeller shaft shall be of solid stainless steel adequately sized such that its first critical speed is not
reached before the design fan speed is obtained.
M. The motor shall be a fan cooled squirrel caged type EFF 1 rating mounted on adjustable sliding rails.
N. Belt-driven centrifugal fans and drive motors shall be located on a common base.
O. Anti-vibration mountings to prevent the transmission of noise or vibration to the structure shall be
provided as detailed elsewhere.
P. Fans fitted with guide vanes shall have backward curved blades. The guide vane assembly control
actuator(s) shall be supplied by the fan manufacturer.
Q. The guide vane assembly control shall fully modulate throughout the operating range of the system
volumes served by the controlled fan. The static pressure/volume characteristics of this operating range at
the fan discharge shall be as indicated.
R. Spring-return actuators used for fan guide vane control shall open or close the guide vanes as indicated on
control power failure.
S. Fit safety guards on air inlet and air outlet connections where these are freely accessible to personnel in
accordance with BS 848-5.
2.3 AXIAL FANS
A. Axial flow fans shall be of the long casing pattern with a heavy gauge, mild steel casing flanged and drilled
at each end. Casings shall be hot dip galvanised and be fully air tight.
B. Axial fan motors shall have non-overloading characteristics within the normal working range.
C. Fans shall be suitable for either vertical or horizontal mounting. Anti-vibration mountings to prevent the
transmission of noise or vibration to the structure shall be provided as detailed elsewhere.
D. Air-tight inspection doors shall be provided giving access to fan impeller and motor and other
components requiring regular servicing or maintenance.
E. The impeller shall be multi-blade aerofoil section constructed from high density PVC, reinforced glass fibre,
or die-cast aluminium alloy with provision for manual adjustment of the blade angle.
F. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced. They shall be subject to X-ray tests and documented
results shall be submitted to the CA. Impellers for variable pitch fans shall in addition be checked over the
full blade angle range for vibration in accordance with BS ISO 10816
G. Multi-stage fans shall be arranged with contra-rotating stages. They shall be coupled together in the
sequence and arrangement recommended by the manufacturer.
H. Motors in the air stream shall be totally enclosed squirrel cage induction type with roller type bearings.
I. The casing shall be fitted with an external electrical terminal box to IP55, unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
J. Safety guards shall be provided on air inlet and air outlet connections where these are freely accessible to
personnel.
2.4 VARIABLE PITCH AXIAL FANS
A. Variable pitch axial fans shall comply with the requirements detailed in the axial flow fan clause.
B. Fans with automatically variable pitch shall be controllable through a range of sufficient angularity to vary
volume and pressure across the system design range.
C. The variable pitch mechanism and control actuator shall give fully modulated control of the fan air volume
rate to match the system characteristic as indicated.
D. Pitch angle control shall be provided from sensors provided as part of the control system. Safety facilities
shall be incorporated to prevent blade settings being increased beyond the maximum design.
2.5 PROPELLER FAN
A. Propeller fans shall be ring or diaphragm mounted as indicated to suit the application.
B. Impellers shall be constructed of mild steel protected against corrosion, aluminium or as a one piece
polypropylene moulding and comprise 3 or 4 blades. The impeller shall be secured fixed to the motor
shaft with key and keyway, locked by a setscrew.
C. The motor shall be suitable for continuous operation and provided with a sealed external electrical
terminal box to IP55.
D. Safety guards shall be provided on air inlet and air outlet connections where these are freely accessible to
personnel.
E. The fan shall be capable of reverse flow.
F. Non-return shutters shall be fitted to all fans discharging externally to the building.
2.6 ROOF EXTRACT FANS
A. Roof extracts units shall be curb mounted vertical discharge propeller or aerofoil driven type and shall be
of robust manufacture.
B. Cowls and bases shall be manufactured from materials which are resistant to the weather sand, salt and
solar radiation, and appropriate to the location of the fan.
C. Casings shall be complete with integral weatherproofing provisions suitable for direct fixing to the building
structure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
D. Adequate access to electrical terminals and lubrication points shall be provided by means of either hinged
cowls or access panels. A sealed IP65 electrical terminal block shall be provided. E. The roof unit shall be
finished to an approved colour.
E. Back-draught dampers and/or fire release dampers shall be provided where indicated.
F. Bird guards of not greater than 25 mm mesh shall be provided as an integral part of the unit.
G. An inlet attenuator shall be provided as indicated on the drawings or in the schedules.
H. Impellers shall be multi-bladed steel on aluminium or steel hub and shall be directly connected to a fan
cooled squirrel cage induction type motor.
2.7 AEROFOIL BIFURCATED FANS
A. Fans and ancillaries shall be constructed to withstand the rated temperatures for the required duration as
stated elsewhere.
B. High temperature units shall be suitable for operation in air stream temperatures up to 230°C unless
otherwise stated.
C. Axial flow fans shall be long casing adjustable pitch aerofoil bladed type, which shall have non overloading
characteristics.
D. Casings shall be mild steel with continuously welded joints and be lined or finished as indicated.
E. Casings shall be of the same thickness throughout unless otherwise indicated, and shall extend the overall
length of the impeller, hub, and motor protection tunnel where applicable, and have circular flanged ends.
F. The impeller shaft shall have a seal at the tunnel wall to prevent leakage in either direction between the
motor tunnel and the fan interior.
G. Drive motors for axial flow fans of the bifurcated type shall be located out of the air-stream.
H. A sealed IP55 electrical terminal block shall be provided, unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
I. All fans shall be single type and shall be completed with mounting feet, rubber type anti-vibration
mountings to specification detailed elsewhere, mounting mild steel brackets and hangers.
2.8 AXIAL FANS USED FOR SMOKE EXHAUST:
A. Smoke extract fans and dual purpose smoke extract fans shall comply and be certified with the
requirements of BS EN 12101-3 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B. Fans and ancillaries shall be constructed to withstand the rated temperatures for the required duration as
indicated. Motors and drives shall be similarly constructed or protected and ventilated to ensure that they
are not subjected to fire conditions.
C. Units shall be suitable for normal operation in ambient conditions up to 60°C and high temperature
conditions up to 300°C for 1 hour or 400°C for 2 hours as stated elsewhere.
D. Motors shall be pre-wired with high temperature rated cable to an external terminal box through high
temperature flexible conduits. All components shall be rated for the operating conditions.
E. The casing shall be fitted with an external terminal box to IP55 or IP 65 where mounted externally, unless
F. The fans shall have fabricated steel airfoil propellers.
G. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanised steel to BS EN 10142
2.9 KITCHEN EXTRACT FANS (NOT APPLICABLE TO SMALL DOMESTIC IN-LINE KITCHEN FANS)
A. Backward inclined Belt Driven Centrifugal with motor, belts etc. out of air stream especially configured for
food service applications unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
B. Fan shall in accordance with be UL 705 & UL 762 for kitchen applications and rated to 400°C. Fan shall also
be AMCA certified.
C. All steel fan components shall be epoxy coated and suitable for outdoor installation.
2.10 LABORATORY EXHAUST FANS
A. All Laboratory Exhaust fans shall be designed and constructed for use in Laboratory exhausts and provide a
high velocity vertical discharge air plume that prevents the exhaust re-entering the building. The fans shall
also entrain outside air with the primary air to produce a diluted exhaust air stream.
B. The fan assemblies shall be a complete package from a single manufacturer and include fans, mixing
plenums, isolation dampers, controls, wiring, vibration isolation and silencers to provide a complete
installation.
C. Each installation shall consist of multiple fans located on a double walled plenum with by-pass dampers
and shall be designed for mounting on standard roof curbs without the need for guy wire supports.
D. The fans shall be of the direct drive mixed flow type with all welded steel construction and non-stall and
non-overloading performance characteristics with stable operation at all points on the fan curves.
E. The motors shall be isolated from the primary exhaust air and visible and accessible for inspection and
maintenance.
F. Each system shall be provided with “rubber in shear” vibration isolation.
G. Each fan shall be fitted with a silencer nozzle and acoustic wind bands. The win bands being provide for
the secondary induction of ambient air which shall take place downstream of the fan impellor and shall be
designed to ensure that they do affect the power consumption or static pressure.
H. Fixed discharge guide vanes shall be provided on each fan to improve the fan efficiencies.
I. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel
J. A bolted access door shall be provided for the fan impellor inspection.
K. The fan motors shall have sealed bearings with a life of 200,000 hours.
L. The inlet mixing plenum shall be provided by the fan manufacturer and sized to support the weight and
performance of the scheduled fans without the need of any supporting guy wires or supports. The plenum
shall include hinged access doors and safety screens over the primary air inlets.
M. By-pass dampers shall be provided with mixing plenum for outside make-up with the primary exhaust air.
N. Pressure controlled dampers (adjustable up to 750Pa) shall be provided.
O. Each fan connection shall be provided with a motorised low leakage isolation damper constructed of
aluminium aerofoil extrusions and epoxy coated. The dampers shall be set to open when the fan is
energised and close, via a spring return when de-energised unless stated otherwise elsewhere. P. Vortex
breakers shall be provided on all side inlets and multiple fan plenums.
P. Every fan shall be provided with airflow traverse probes mounted on the fan inlet and providing a
continuous air volume measurement. The probes shall consist of multiple total and static pressure sensors
connected to an averaging manifold. The sensors shall not protrude beyond the surface of the probe and
shall not be affected by contamination normally present in the airflow system. All probes shall be factory
mounted. The probes shall be capable of providing a steady non pulsating signal of the total and static
pressure with an accuracy of ±3% of actual flow.
Q. Acoustic silencers nozzles shall be provided as an integral part of the exhaust fan discharge nozzle and
shall not increase the height of the overall assembly. The silencers shall be constructed with an outer shell
of fibre reinforced plastic and perforated corrosion resistant steel. The silencer nozzles shall be coloured to
match the fans and shall be in accordance with the equipment schedules.
R. The mixing box shall be complete with low leakage aerofoil opposed blade motorised dampers which shall
be sized to minimise pressure drop and noise. Rain hoods shall be provided with each damper.
S. The exhaust fan sets shall be supplied complete with the fan manufacturers control system which shall
modulate the number of fans operating the fan speeds and the by-pass dampers to ensure that the static
pressure set point is maintained whilst maintaining the minimum outlet velocity and stack height and
minimising energy usage. The control system shall be self-contained for each fan set and shall interface
with the site wide BMS (where provided) to monitor the controls and as a minimum shall provide full
control of the fans as detailed elsewhere and shall include, but not limited to;
1. System static pressure
2. Fan run time
3. VFD frequency
4. Fan power consumption
5. Fault status
T. The complete fan set system shall be designed to be low profile and finished in a colour as specified
elsewhere and in accordance with the equipment schedules.
2.11 PLUG FANS
A. Plug fans shall not be used, unless specifically specified as an integral part of an air handling unit, refer to
section 237310.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install flexible connections (specified in Section 233113) between fan inlet and discharge ductwork.
C. Ensure that isolation mounts are not bridged by rigid connections such as electrical conduits or
obstructions.
D. Supply and install sheaves as necessary for final air balancing.
E. Set roof-mounted fans on curbs. Provide drip pan for collecting condensation as required.
F. Pipe drainage from centrifugal fans to the nearest drain or roof drain.
3.3 START-UP
A. Inspect equipment after installation to verify installation is in accordance with the Specification, equipment
is lubricated, proper belt tension and that equipment is otherwise ready to operate.
B. Undertake pre-start-up checks in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Codes.
C. Check all fan interlocks and controls (fire alarm, smoke management, etc.) have been installed and are
either operational or set to a safe mode.
D. Perform airside testing and commissioning as specified elsewhere.
E. Provide the services of manufacturer's representative for instruction of Employer's operating personnel.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled

components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Prepare test
and inspection report.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start fans to confirm proper
motor rotation and operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices.
3. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Start-up Services
3.5 A DJUSTMENT, CLEANING & COMMISSIONING
A. Testing and Commissioning
1. Refer to Section 230010 for testing and commissioning standards.
2. The Contractor shall coordinate all testing and commissioning requirements with other related
equipment including the controls and installation.
B. All fans shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide fan manufacturer authorized trained and certified representative to provide site training for facility
operating staff on all aspects of the fans including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault
finding for all types of fans used on the project.
B. Notify the CA in advance to schedule and coordinate training sessions with end user. Refer to Division 23
Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections for all training requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 233610 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Variable Air Volume units (VAV)
2. Constant Volume units (CAV)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s product data on all Units, indicating dimensions, maximum and minimum air
volumes, pressure drop, acoustic data, heating capacities and controls details.
the system.
3. Submit Manufacturer’s Certified Drawings:
5. Quality Plan
6. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
C. Test Reports:
1. Variable Air Volume units shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
D. Installation Instructions:
E. Maintenance Data:
1. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for motor and drive replacement, and spare
parts lists. Include product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.
F. Supplementary Product Literature:
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the VAV and CAV Unit components.
G. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
H. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of variable air
volume units and accessories and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards,
marking.
C. All VAV and CAV units shall be labelled with the CE marking confirming compliance with the Eurovent
recommendations
D. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards including;
a. BS EN 12589 (Ventilation of buildings; Air terminal Units)
b. BS EN 1751 (Ventilation of buildings; Air terminal Devices)
c. BS 4857 (Method of testing terminal re-heat units)
2. B & ES (formally HVCA) DW 144 AND 143
F. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA and at no additional
cost to the Contract.
A. VAV and CAV Units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at the factory. Mark the VAV
and CAV Units locations and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid
C. Unit shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. VAV & CAV Units shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
A. Do not operate the variable volume units for any purpose including construction activities, temporary or
permanent, until ductwork is clean and system filters are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide factory packaged and tested VAV and CAV Units from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of
manufacturers.
B. Casings for all types of unit shall be corrosion resistant and of rigid construction. All components in contact
with the air stream shall be manufactured from non-corrodible materials.
C. Units shall be selected to achieve the specified noise levels in the areas served or affected by the units.
D. Thermal insulation and acoustic linings shall be non-combustible and shall not support bacterial growth
E. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Galvanised unless stated otherwise.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Galvanised unless stated otherwise.
3. Special protection applications: Where stated elsewhere the VAV and CAV Units shall be provided with
special protective coatings or be manufactured from a specific material to suit the site conditions.
2.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) UNITS
A. VAV units shall be selected to provide the outputs as detailed in the equipment schedules or on the
drawings when operating at the specified conditions and parameters.
B. The design, construction, materials and finishes of all units shall be suitable for the locations, climatic and
operating conditions.
C. The VAV units shall be suitable for the air application and be suitable for use with the specified air flow
rates and operating pressure conditions.
D. The units shall be suitable for operating and maintaining the required air volume flow dependent on the
dictates of the control, irrespective of the system inlet pressure
E. All units shall be factory calibrated to the maximum and minimum airflows specified elsewhere. The
operation and accuracy shall be demonstrated at the factory prior to delivery to site.
F. Every VAV unit shall be pre-wired at the manufacturer’s works and powered and operated by a single
phase power source unless otherwise indicated. G. All pre-wiring shall comply with BS 7671.
G. All VAV units shall be double skin construction made from a minimum 0.8mm thick (inner and outer skin)
galvanised sheet steel stiffened to prevent drumming, mechanically sealed and gasketed to form a leak
proof construction complying with BS EN 1751 Class A and B & ES DW 144 Class A, unless otherwise stated
elsewhere.
H. Drilled mild steel lugs shall be provided by the manufacturer where required for fixing.
I. All VAV Units shall incorporate integral vapour sealed thermal/acoustic insulation. All thermal/acoustic
materials shall be inherently non-combustible and limit the surface spread of flame to Class 1 when tested
in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited. Only
nonflammable adhesives shall be used. Exposed surfaces shall be bonded or covered to prevent erosion
and securely fixed in place. All cut edges shall be sealed to prevent erosion.
J. All acoustic/thermal components shall be made from materials with zero ozone depletion potential (CFC
and HCFC free). Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, written confirmation from the manufacturer(s) that
the products to be installed are CFC and HCFC free.
K. For all thermal/acoustic infill material test evidence must be available and submitted to the CA showing
that the fibres from which the products are made are not classified as a possible carcinogen as detailed by
European Directive 97/69/EC.
L. Units shall be clean and rust free with a totally unblemished casing finish prior to site delivery.
M. Every VAV Unit shall be provided with a protective wrapping at the manufacturer’s works. The protective
wrapping shall be retained in place whilst stored on site and only removed just prior to installation to
protect from damage and dust/dirt ingress.
N. Each unit shall be complete with a unique identification reference label fitted at the manufacturer’s works.
The identification reference shall be clearly visible through the wrapping. The text and method of
reference shall be as agreed with the CA prior to ordering and shall be utilised in the record
documentation.
O. The control unit, shall consist of a throttling damper or air valve, electric actuator, velocity reset controller
and flow measuring device. The throttling damper shall have a shut off leakage complying with BS EN
1751 Class 4.
P. The velocity reset controller shall control the air flow to within ±5% of the design value (unless stated
otherwise elsewhere), regardless of change in the static pressure in the duct system. The controller shall
reset the airflow as commanded by the room temperature sensor with the same accuracy, unless stated
Q. Actuators, reset controllers, circuitry, attenuators and distribution boxes shall be provided and installed at
the factory and must be integrated into the unit casing. The control equipment shall be easily accessible.
R. The controllers shall be of the same manufacturer as the BMS and shall be fully compatible with the BMS
protocol provided.
S. A "flow cross" air volume measuring station shall be fitted in the inlet duct to facilitate direct reading of
airflow on site. The pressure differential flow grid shall be provided with capped test pressure tapping’s.
T. A suitably sized access panel shall be provided in the underside of each unit to facilitate inspection and
maintenance of all internal mechanisms and moving parts. Thrusters shall be readily removable from the
units.
U. Maximum permissible air leakage with the outlet blanked off shall be 2% of maximum rated airflow against
an inlet pressure of 1500 Pa on the high pressure inlet unless otherwise stated.
V. Regulators shall have the specified maximum and minimum volumes, so as to give the required airflow
within a tolerance of ±5% over an inlet pressure range of 100 - 1500 Pa.
W. Each unit shall facilitate adjustment to the airflow limits, calibration and resetting on site. A fully site
resettable controls calibration chart for setting of airflow on site shall be securely attached to each unit and
detailed in the operating and maintenance manuals.
X. Air inlet and outlet ductwork spigots shall be in accordance with B & ES DW 144 for the respective
pressures.
Y. All units shall be designed and selected so as not to exceed the noise rating indicated when installed in the
areas served and allowing for the cumulative effect of all units operating together. Units shall be of the
type which have reducing sound power levels for induct and radiated noise as the unit closes down to its
minimum air volume rating. The VAV boxes shall be provided with attenuator modules (from the same
manufacturer) were necessary to achieve specified NR levels.
Z. The VAV unit manufacturer shall supply all necessary controllers, temperature sensors, transformers etc.
AA. unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
BB. The VAV unit set point shall be capable of remote reset via a reset signal from the BMS.
CC. All VAV units shall be factory tested and delivered to site complete with pre-piped valves set, BMS
Outstation installed and pre-wired unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
DD. Where sound attenuators are specified to meet the acoustic requirements, the attenuator shall be supplied
by the VAV Unit manufacturer and to the same specification as detailed in section 233300, unless stated
EE. Where heater batteries are specified, they shall be supplied by the VAV Unit manufacturer as an integral
part of the VAV Unit and to the same specification as detailed in section 238216, unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
2.3 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME (CAV) UNITS
A. Where CAV Units are specified they shall be to the same specification and the same Manufacturer as the
VAV Units
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and conditions
affecting performance of the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely completion and
notify the CA of the unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All Units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for the particular application.
B. The installation shall prevent the transmission of noise and vibration to the building or to adjacent services.
C. Where specified, provide each heating coil piping high point with an easily accessible automatic air vent
and low point with a drain cock.
D. All VAV & CAV units installed within false ceilings shall ensure access for maintenance and servicing
is provided. Coordinate with all involved parties on site for the provision of maintenance access panels for
the units mounting inside false ceiling. Units shall be installed to permit commissioning and maintenance.
The Contractor shall ensure that casings, false ceilings and other concealment are arranged to permit these
functions to be carried out in a proper and satisfactory manner.
E. The method of commissioning the units shall be in accordance with CIBSE guidance. The exact method of
commissioning shall be agreed and approved with the CA to suit the particular installation.
3.3 START-UP
A. Inspect equipment after installation to verify installation is in accordance with the Specification and that
equipment is otherwise ready to operate.
B. Provide the services of manufacturer's representative for starting up units and instruction of Employer's
operating personnel.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components
and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Prepare a test and
inspection report.
B. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING & COMMISSIONING
2. The installer shall coordinate all testing and commissioning requirements with other related
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide a manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide site training for facility operating
staff on all aspects of the VAV & CAV units including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault
finding for all types of units used on the project.
B. Notify the CA in advance to schedule and coordinate training sessions with end user. Refer to elsewhere
for all training requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Grilles, diffusers, and accessories associated with air distribution systems.
2. Weather and sand trap louvres
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all inlets and outlets, indicating construction,
dimensions and performance.
the system.
3. Submit product data covering each item together with a schedule of air devices indicating type, air
volumes, pressure drops, air throw, noise levels, face & neck size, frame size, mounting type, finish,
material, all components, application and noise level.
4. Submit a sample of every diffuser and grille type to be used for approval by the CA.
C. Test Reports:
1. Submit test reports and certificates of all factory quality control programmes
E. Supplementary Product Literature:
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the inlets and outlets.
F. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
G. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of grilles,
diffusers and louvres for HVAC applications and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality
management standards, certified to ISO 9001 and 14001.
B. Manufacturer shall certify cataloged performance and ensure correct application of air device types.
2. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards, particularly the following;
a. BS EN ISO 7730 Ergonomics of the thermal environment – Analytical determination &

interpretation of thermal comfort using calculation of the PMV & PPD indices & local thermal
comfort criteria
b. BS EN ISO 5135 Determination of sound power levels of noise from air terminal devices, air
terminal units and valves
c. BS EN 13030 Performance testing of louvres
3. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA Standards:
D. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 230010 Quality Requirements.
E. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
F. Coordination
1. Review requirements of air devices as to neck size, frame size, finish and type of mounting prior to
submitting Installation Drawings and air device schedules.
2. Check location of outlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural
features, reflected ceiling plan, symmetry and lighting arrangement.
A. Grilles, diffusers and louvres shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at the factory. Mark the
unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
C. Unit shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers
B. Grilles, diffusers and louvres shall be provided to handle the required air quantities as stated elsewhere
whilst meeting the specified design criteria in respect of noise and comfort. The final selection of all grilles,
diffusers and louvres shall be by the manufacturer to ensure that the stated design criteria are achieved,
subject to agreement by the CA.
C. The acoustic performance of all diffusers, grilles and other terminal devices shall be in accordance with BS
EN ISO 5135.
D. Prior to the equipment being ordered, the Contractor shall verify the selection data.
E. The final layout shall be subject to agreement with the CA. The Contractor shall allow for detailed
locations being adjusted suiting final setting out of ceilings, floors and walls.
F. All grille and diffuser borders shall be co-ordinated with the ceiling type and shall be approved by the CA
prior to an order being placed.
G. The Contractor shall liaise with the manufacturer to ensure compatibility and co-ordination between the
grille/diffuser and ceiling support system.
H. The Contractor shall provide a method statement to the CA outlining the final fixing methods and details
of all grilles, diffusers and louvres prior to installation.
I. Wherever indicated the room noise level rating shall not be exceeded with the system operating at its
maximum duty and taking into account the accumulative effect of the diffusers, area served, and noise
regenerated by regulating/balancing dampers immediately behind the diffuser or grille to provide the
correct air volume flow rate.
J. Diffusers shall be draught free, shall provide rapid mixing of primary and re-circulation air to ensure that
the design air movement and room temperature gradient is not exceeded. In this respect the maximum
velocity at 1.5m height shall not exceed 0.25m/s and the room temperature gradient shall not exceed 2°C
from floor to normal office ceiling height unless otherwise stated. The PMV (Predictive Mean Vote) shall be
in the range +0.5/-0.5 with a PPD (Predicted Percentage of Dissatisfied) of less than 15%.
K. All supply air diffusers shall be suitable for operation at 5% more and 25% less than scheduled duty
without causing objectionable air velocities at the occupied level.
L. Air diffuser pressure drops shall be selected at a minimum to ensure that the Noise Rating of the diffuser is
achieved.
M. All grilles, diffusers and louvres shall be provided to a RAL colour and finish as specified elsewhere.
N. A sample of every grille, diffuser and louvre shall be provided for CA approval prior to manufacture. All
approved samples shall be retained for quality control and shall not be incorporated within the works
unless agreed by the CA.
O. Duct mounted grilles and diffusers shall be fitted with volume control regulators, adjustable from the unit
face unless otherwise indicated.
P. Grilles and diffusers visible in rooms shall be secured by concealed fixings wherever possible.
Q. Mitres, end caps and corners shall be welded in such a manner so that it does not show on the surface.
The diffuser or grille face shall have the joint filled and finished so that it does not shoe. The joint shall
remain concealed after the finish has been applied.
R. Grilles and diffusers shall be capable of being easily cleaned by having faces readily accessible or by
removable centre cores unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
S. All grilles and diffusers shall be provided with a neoprene or other sealing strip to provide a permanent
seal against the adjacent surface and as a means of absorbing variations in the surface.
2.2 PLENUM BOXES
A. Where indicated in the equipment schedules, in the specifications or on the drawings, grilles and diffusers
shall be provided with plenum boxes which shall be manufactured and supplied by the diffuser
manufacturer to match the size and output of the diffuser.
B. Plenum boxes shall be to the same specification as the connecting ductwork (i.e. B & ES DW 144) and fitted
with round inlets suitable for flexible connections and iris type balancing dampers unless otherwise stated.
C. Where connected to insulated ductwork the plenum box shall be insulated to the same standard as the
connecting ductwork.
D. The plenum boxes shall be sized to suit the diffuser neck connection.
E. The dimensions of the plenum box shall be as recommended by the diffuser manufacturers and shall be of
adequate dimensions to ensure correct diffuser performance in terms of noise level, throw and pressure
drop.
F. Plenum boxes shall ensure an equal air distribution across the face of the supply air diffuser/grille.
G. Where indicated elsewhere or where required to meet the specified noise levels the plenum boxes shall be
provided with 25mm acoustic insulation lining with black glass tissue facing density of 48kg/ m³ fastened
to the plenum box with non-flammable adhesive and mechanical fastener to reduce noise generated inside
duct due to the air flow turbulence before reaching the diffuser.
H. The plenum box shall be equipped with a built-in volume control damper operated from the face of the
diffuser.
I. Where appropriate plenum boxes shall be provided with galvanised steel perforated plates to achieve
equal air distribution and pressure drop across the whole face of connecting grilles or diffusers. The details
of all plenum boxes shall be submitted to the CA for approval prior to ordering
J. Where plenum boxes are fitted with an opposed blade damper, dampers shall not be required on the neck
of the diffuser being served.
2.3 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS
A. Linear slot diffusers shall be suitable for both supply and return air.
B. The frame and deflection blades shall be made of extruded aluminum unless otherwise stated.
C. Diffuser shall have single or multiple slots, with adjustable pattern controller. The number of slots shall be
as indicated in the equipment schedules or on the drawings. The final selection shall be by the diffuser
manufacturer to ensure that the stated design criteria are achieved, subject to agreement by the CA.
D. The linear slot diffusers shall incorporate 180° fully adjustable air flow patterns and flow control vanes
capable of deflecting air from full horizontal to straight down or at any intermediate setting.
E. All supply air linear slot diffusers shall be of the high induction type to ensure a rapid decay of the supply
air velocity and temperature differential. F. Air Flow Rate:
1. The linear slot diffuser shall provide stable air discharge when utilised for constant or variable volume
air flow rates.
2. Provide vanes capable of controlling air patterns and flow rates without the use of an additional
damper.
F. Where linear diffusers are mounted in a continuous line, there shall be provision for ensuring alignment
between consecutive diffusers and each diffuser shall be provided with means to ensure uniform air flow
distribution along the diffuser.
G. Concealed alignment strips shall be provided to ensure square butting and proper alignment of diffusers.
Where diffusers are provided in sections the sizes of the individual section shall be selected to provide as
regular an appearance as possible without the use of short closure pieces.
H. Active sections of linear diffusers shall be provided with plenum boxes fabricated by the diffuser
manufacturer to match output of the diffuser.
I. Ceiling mounted linear diffusers shall be fitted into the ceiling grid with the plenum box properly secured
to the diffuser and sealed against air leakage.
J. All necessary diffuser and plenum box supporting and fixing brackets for the installation shall be provided.
K. Dummy lengths of linear diffuser shall be provided with blanking plates, unless such plates are to be
omitted to provide a return air path.
L. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all site dimensions necessary for setting out and
manufacturing diffusers. This shall include any angles involved.
M. Diffuser fixing methods shall be compatible with the ceiling type used. Corner pieces shall be supplied to
ensure continuation of esthetic appearance.
2.4 VARIABLE VOLUME LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS
A. Variable air volume linear slot diffusers shall be to the same specification as linear slot diffusers, but
supplied complete with a plenum box incorporating an automatic flap. The flap shall have a balance weight
which adjusts the setting to maintain a constant discharge velocity without the need of an external power
supply.
B. Variable volume diffusers shall be of the adjustable linear slot type and be able to vary the supply air
volume between 100% and 25%,
C. The diffusers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium with black plastic control blades unless
2.5 SIDE WALL GRILLES
A. Linear slot diffusers shall be suitable for both supply and return air.
B. The frame and deflection blades shall be made of extruded aluminum unless otherwise stated.
C. Provide double deflection registers with a frame and 2 no sets of vertical and horizontal blades used to
deflect air direction in both the horizontal and vertical planes.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, all side wall grilles shall be provided with a damper of the opposed blade
multileaf type or rhomboidal type.
E. The blades of all grilles shall be adjustable from the front and shall have a friction device to retain set
positions. The air flow rate controller of all grilles shall be adjustable from the front.
F. Fastening options: Concealed spring fastening in finished areas and visible screw fastening in unfinished
areas.
2.6 EGG CRATE GRILLES
A. Egg crate grilles shall only be used for return air, unless stated otherwise elsewhere and shall consist of a
square pattern core of extruded anodised aluminium, providing a minimum 80% free area.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, all egg crate grilles shall be provided with a damper of the opposed blade
multi-leaf type adjustable from the front face.
C. The rear assembly shall be stove enameled black sheet steel
D. Fastening options: Concealed spring fastening in finished areas and visible screw fastening in unfinished
areas.
2.7 AIR TRANSFER GRILLES
A. Transfer grilles shall be of the non-vision type with inverted ‘V’ vanes.
B. The frame and blades shall be made of extruded aluminum unless otherwise stated.
C. The free area shall be at least 80% unless otherwise stated.
D. Where transfer grilles are visible from both sides and located within a wall or similar thick structure a
second grille shall be provided with one grille located each side of the opening.
E. Where located in doors they shall be provided with a telescopic flush fitting installation frame suitable for
the door width.
F. Where air transfer grilles are located within fire compartment doors or partitions an intumescent fire
damper with the same fire rating as the door or partition may be used, subject to approval by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All intumescent fire dampers shall be tested in an independent laboratory in
accordance with BS 476 Part 8. Intumescent dampers shall be mould, rot and insect resistant and shall be
of the low air flow resistant design and manufacture.
2.8 NON-VISION GRILLES
A. Non-vision grilles shall be with inverted ‘V’ vanes.
B. The frame and blades shall be made of extruded aluminum unless otherwise stated.
C. The free area shall be at least 80% unless otherwise stated.
D. Where non-vision grilles are visible from both sides and located within a wall or similar thick structure a
second grille shall be provided with one grille located each side of the opening.
E. Where non vision grilles are located within fire compartment partitions an intumescent fire damper with
the same fire rating as the partition may be used, subject to approval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
All intumescent fire dampers shall be tested in an independent laboratory in accordance with BS 476 Part
8. Intumescent dampers shall be mould, rot and insect resistant and shall be of the low air flow resistant
design and manufacture.
2.9 LINEAR BAR GRILLES
A. Linear bar grilles shall be suitable for either supply or return air applications and shall be of the double
deflection type with a combination of fastened profile front horizontal blades and individually adjustable
vertical rear blades. Linear bar grilles shall be either straight or curved shapes to suit the interior geometry
of the served space. The linear bar grilles shall be provided with an integral opposed blades damper. The
opposed blade damper shall be fastened to the rear frame of the register by means of an S-clamp. Corner
section pieces shall be supplied to ensure continuation of esthetic appearance.
B. Fastening options: Concealed spring fastening in finished areas and visible screw fastening in unfinished
areas.
2.10 LOUVRE FACED CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Ceiling diffusers shall be suitable for both supply and return air and shall have a louvered face with
removable core, providing a horizontal discharge pattern, which can provide a 1, 2, 3 or 4 way discharge as
detailed elsewhere.
B. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere louvre face diffusers shall be manufactured from aluminium and shall be
powder coated to a RAL colour as agreed with the CA.
C. Diffusers shall be selected to provide adequate air distribution and mixing with room air and ensure that
the air velocities within the occupied zone are maintained within the specified limits. Baffle plates shall be
provided as necessary or as indicated to avoid local obstruction.
D. Unless otherwise indicated in the schedules or on the drawings each diffuser shall be provided with an
opposed blade damper and a means of altering the discharge air flow pattern. All dampers shall be
adjustable from the front of the diffuser.
E. Diffusers with ducted connections shall be provided with plenum boxes selected and fabricated by the
diffuser manufacturer to match the output of the diffuser. Each plenum shall be sealed against air leakage
to the back of the diffusers.
F. Where a diffuser is directly connected to a stub duct which has a straight length of less than two equivalent
diameters, an equalising deflector shall be used.
G. Circular diffusers, with adjustable air flow pattern, shall have the cone retained by a screwed spindle fitted
with upper and lower stop pins or other approved method subject to the approval of the CA.
H. Diffusers shall be provided with border styles that are compatible with the adjacent ceiling systems and
that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support.
I. Diffusers shall be installed flush with the ceiling. Where diffusers are suspended (with no ceiling) the
manufacturer’s recommendations should be obtained.
J. Provide gaskets and seals with all units and accessories as required to prevent air leakage.
K. All diffuser fixings shall be fully concealed.
2.11 PERFORATED PLATE CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Perforated plate ceiling diffusers shall be suitable for both supply and return air and shall have a louvred
face which shall provide a high induction and rapid air velocity decay when utilised for supply air.
B. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere louvre perforated plate diffusers shall be manufactured from aluminium
and shall be powder coated to a RAL colour as agreed with the CA.
C. Diffusers shall be selected to provide adequate air distribution and mixing with room air and ensure that
the air velocities within the occupied zone are maintained within the specified limits. Baffle plates shall be
provided as necessary or as indicated to avoid local obstruction.
D. Unless otherwise indicated in the schedules or on the drawings each diffuser shall be provided with an
opposed blade damper and a means of altering the discharge air flow pattern. All dampers shall be
adjustable from the front of the diffuser.
E. Diffusers with ducted connections shall be provided with plenum boxes selected and fabricated by the
diffuser manufacturer to match the output of the diffuser. Each plenum shall be sealed against air leakage
to the back of the diffusers.
F. Where a diffuser is directly connected to a stub duct which has a straight length of less than two equivalent
diameters, an equalising deflector shall be used.
G. Circular diffusers, with adjustable air flow pattern, shall have the cone retained by a screwed spindle fitted
with upper and lower stop pins or other approved method subject to the approval of the CA.
I. Diffusers shall be installed flush with the ceiling. Where diffusers are suspended (with no ceiling) the
manufacturer’s recommendations should be obtained.
J. Provide gaskets and seals with all units and accessories as required to prevent air leakage.
K. All diffuser fixings shall be fully concealed.
2.12 SUPPLY/ EXHAUST DISC VALVES
A. Air valves shall be constructed from powder coated steel to a RAL colour approved by the CA unless stated
otherwise elsewhere and shall be provided with sub-frames formed to provide a seating ring for the face
section. Flanges shall be provided with sealing gaskets.
B. The air volume shall be adjusted by rotating the central disc to alter the space between the disc and valve
ring. The adjustment shall be capable of being locked.
2.13 JET NOZZLES
A. Jet Nozzles shall be suitable for long throw distances with good acoustic properties.
B. Jet nozzles shall be of the manually adjustable type unless otherwise stated and shall consist of discharge
nozzle with spherical outlet mounted in housing. A mounting flange and round rear connection spigot
shall be provided for direct connection to a circular duct or to a purpose made plenum, supplied by the
diffuser manufacturer.
C. The adjustment facility shall allow variation in discharge angle. Adjustment angular range shall be 30° in
any direction unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
D. The discharge nozzle and mounting flange shall be made of aluminum. The connection element shall be
made of rolled galvanized sheet steel.
2.14 CEILING SWIRL DIFFUSERS
A. Ceiling swirl diffusers shall be designed to deliver high air volumes at low noise levels. The swirl discharge
of the supply air shall provide high induction resulting in a fast decay of the supply air velocity temperature
differential
B. Swirl diffusers shall be with either circular or square faceplate as indicated in the schedules or on the
drawings.
C. The faceplate shall be manufacturer from galvanised steel.
D. The air control blades shall be of the adjustable type.
E. The faceplate shall be removable, held in place with a central screw fixing covered with a decorative cap.
F. The diffuser shall be supplied complete with a side entry plenum box (acoustically lined) by the
manufacturer.
G. The plenum shall be provided with volume control damper.
I. Swirl diffusers shall be installed flush with the ceiling. Where diffusers are suspended (with no ceiling) the
manufacturer’s recommendations shall be obtained.
2.15 FLOOR SWIRL DIFFUSERS
A. The floor swirl air diffusers shall be installed flush with the raised floor and comprise of radially arranged
slots designed to generate a twist effect with the supply air to provide a high induction effect.
B. The diffusers shall be manufactured in either polycarbonate or aluminium as detailed in the equipment
schedules or on the drawings and in a RAL colour to the CA requirements.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, the floor outlets shall be capable of withstanding point loads of 200kg.
D. The diffusers will be complete with;
1. Dirt collecting basket
2. Air flow control device
3. Clamp insert and protective collar
E. The Contractor shall allow for the grilles to be re-located once after the initial installation.
2.16 FLOOR MOUNTED OUTLETS (DATA ROOMS, COMPUTER ROOMS, ETC.)
A. Floor mounted outlets shall be of a heavy duty construction suitable and sized for a standard floor tile
replacement unless otherwise indicated.
B. Unless indicated otherwise, the floor outlets shall be capable of withstanding a minimum point load of 400
kg.
C. Outlets shall be constructed from mild steel, aluminium or plastic as detailed in the schedules or on the
drawings.
D. The grilles shall be flush mounted and the same depth as the floor in which they are installed.
E. The unit shall incorporate a galvanised mild steel dirt basket, removable from above the floor. The basket
shall incorporate an in-built galvanised steel throttling device.
F. The manufacturer’s limitations on flow rate, discharge velocity and temperature shall be complied with in
the selection and commissioning of the grilles.
G. The grilles shall incorporate an anti-static coating.
H. All grilles shall be supplied complete with opposed blade dampers accessible from above.
I. The Contractor shall allow for the grilles to be re-located once after the initial installation.
2.17 DISPLACEMENT VENTILATORS
A. Displacement ventilators shall be manufactured from galvanised mild sheet steel or aluminium as indicated
with perforated face panels, base plate and circular/rectangular connection collars for ducts.
B. Displacement diffusers shall be selected to ensure the maximum face velocity does not exceed 0.2m/s,
unless otherwise stated
C. Ventilators shall be suitable for floor mounting and the outlet surfaces shall be to the shapes and sizes
indicated.
D. Ventilators shall contain low resistance baffle, equalising grid or other device to ensure even distribution
over the perforated face panels.
E. Perforated face panels shall be designed to be removable for cleaning, maintenance or replacement of air
distribution components.
2.18 WEATHER LOUVERS
A. Weather louvers shall be used on air intakes and air discharge on exterior facades to protect against the
direct ingress of rain. Louvres shall be designed to prevent water carry over through the louvres for the
stated size and air volume.
B. The louvre system shall achieve minimum resistance to airflow, with louvre blades aerodynamically shaped
with no sharp edges or protrusions.
C. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere all-weather louvres shall have a minimum 50% free area
D. Louvres shall be mounted in large section angle frame having intermediate uprights as necessary for rigid
support of the louvres. An effective weather and acoustic seal shall be achieved using packing and filling
materials as necessary and as approved by the CA.
E. Frames and blades shall be fabricated from galvanised mild steel sections and sheet, or from aluminium
alloy of adequate stiffness to prevent vibration and/or damage as indicated. All smoke/fire rated systems
shall be manufactured from steel and not aluminium F. Louvres shall be fully protected against corrosion.
F. Louvre blades shall be roll formed to an aerodynamically efficient profile and clipped to concealed
structural supporting mullions with efficient water drainage on to sill.
G. The louvre system shall achieve the minimum aerodynamic performance coefficients (CV) and weathering
classification against as indicated when tested in accordance with BS EN 13030.
H. The louvers shall be supplied complete with all necessary fixings, flanged, etc for installation into the
builders work or other suitable opening or support frame.
I. Stainless steel vermin/insect screens shall be fitted to all external louvres and shall be removable for
cleaning.
J. Each louvre assembly shall be complete with integral drip channel and drain outlets as necessary.
2.19 SAND TRAP LOUVERS
A. Sand trap louvers shall be used on air intakes as a pre-filter for protection of air conditioning plants as
indicated in the equipment schedules or on the drawings. The sand trap louvers shall have a high degree
of separation of sand and large dust particles, even in cases of high dust concentrations.
B. The sand trap louvers shall contain vertically arranged blade sections and holes for sand drainage ensuring
the sand trap is self-cleaning and maintenance free. They shall be designed to separate large particles of
sand and dust from air stream at low velocities and shall have a maximum pressure drop of 25Pa with a
face velocity of 1.0m/s. Sand Trap Louvres shall have the following minimum efficiency, when tested in
accordance with B & SE
C. Specification for the determination of the collection efficiency of sand trap louvres;
Particle size Filtration efficiency
350 to 700 90%
75 to 700 60%
D. The frame shall be minimum 1.5mm thick from formed galvanized steel sheet. The blades shall be
minimum 1.2mm thick from formed galvanized steel sheet.
E. Stainless steel vermin/insect screens shall be fitted to all external louvres and shall be removable for
cleaning.
2.20 ACOUSTIC LOUVRES
A. Acoustic louvres shall be manufactured to the same specification as weather louvres, but shall incorporate
the additional requirements detailed below.
B. Acoustic louvres shall provide insertion losses under operating conditions of not less than those stated
elsewhere. Static pressure losses, under maximum operating duties shall not exceed those stated
elsewhere.
C. The louvre assembly shall be constructed to provide inherent structural rigidity and ensure adequate blade
support across the whole louvre width.
D. Louvre blades shall be constructed from galvanised mild steel not less than 0.7mm thickness and shall be
of an aerofoil or similar configuration. Each blade shall positively retain the acoustic infill and shall have a
galvanised perforated sheet steel lower and solid upper face.
E. The acoustic infill within the blades shall consist of inert, rot and vermin proof, non-hygroscopic mineral
wool or glass fibre of a density sufficient to achieve the stated acoustic performance, packed and
compressed so as to eliminate voids due to settling. The acoustic infill shall be inherently non-combustible
and limit the surface spread of flame to Class 1 when tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not
emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited. Fibres of infill media shall be comply with the requirements as
stated elsewhere.
F. All gaps between the outside of the louver frame and the builders work opening or duct shall be made
good and sealed to the full depth with dense grout and/or dense non-hardening mastic sealant.
G. All acoustic louvers shall be delivered to site with protective packaging and labelled to indicate unit
reference, location and description.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for advising the acoustic louvre supplier of the final manufacturing
sizes allowing for suitable tolerance spacing to builders work, cladding or ductwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. All ducted diffusers and grilles shall be independently supported and not rely on the ceiling or wall finish
for any support.
C. All floor voids which are utilised as supply air plenums shall be tested for airtightness in accordance with
BSRIA specification BG 12/2010 (Floor void airtightness) D. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets dull
black.
D. Provide slack wires, cables and other support devices as required to comply with seismic requirements as
detailed in the Specification and on the Design Drawings.
E. All grilles and diffusers are referenced in the schedules and on the drawings. The Contractor shall utilise
this referencing system and expand where necessary to provide every grille and diffuser with a unique
reference, which shall be included on the “as built” drawings and the O & M manuals.
equipment.
B. All grilles, diffusers and louvres shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to
handover.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Filters, housings and gauges required to meet specific air quality criteria.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. For each filter bank submit the following:
a. Filter type.
b. Number.
c. Size(s).
d. Air flow.
e. Face velocity.
f. Overall height.
g. Overall width.
h. Initial pressure drop.
i. Final recommended pressure drop.
j. Main access side.
k. Location of gauge.
C. Test Reports:
1. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for filter replacement and spare parts lists.
Include this data in the maintenance manuals.
1. Warranties.
B. Submit written confirmation that new filters are installed throughout the project prior to final acceptance.
C. A complete set of new filters, in original cartons shall be provided to the Employer for future use.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of filters for
HVAC applications and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified to
ISO 9001 and 14001.
marking.
1. British Standards, including
a. BS EN 779 (Particulate air filters for general ventilation – Determination of the filtration
performance).
b. BS EN 1822 (High efficiency air filters (EPA, HEPA & UPLA) – Performance & testing)
3. Provide filter media that is UL 900, Class-2 listed and approved by the Municipality and the Civil
Defence authorities having jurisdiction.
4. European Committee of Air-Handling and Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturers, EUROVENT

Standards, including:
a. EUROVENT 4/ 5 Method of Testing Air Filters Used in General Ventilation.
5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, ASHRAE Standards:
a. ANSI/ ASHRAE 52.2 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size.
F. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose
and shall, where applicable, conform to the standards of and shall comply with Local By-laws and
Regulations.
G. All materials required for installation under these specifications shall be subject to the acceptance of the
A. Units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at factory. Mark the room locations and unit
reference on the outside of the shipping box.
C. Filters shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Manufacturer’s: Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of
manufacturer’s
B. All filters shall comply with the requirements of this specification unless stated otherwise.
C. Filter performance shall be measured in accordance with Eurovent standard 4/5, BS EN 779 and BS EN
1822 (HEPA filters).
D. Face velocities across filters shall be limited to a maximum of 2 m/s and shall not exceed the
E. Filter unit or panels shall be selected to be of uniform size and pressure drop.
F. Filter media shall not be subject to erosion, deterioration or to the effects of temperature and high
humidity’s and shall be manufactured from non-deleterious materials.
G. Filter material shall be non-hygroscopic, shall not support vermin and shall be proof against fungal and
bacterial growth and attack.
H. Filters shall be non-flammable and comply with BS 476.
I. Frames, casings and filter cell holding frames shall be classified non-combustible when tested in
accordance with BS 476.
J. When exposed to heat or flame, the filter shall not generate significant quantities of smoke or toxic fumes
into the air-stream.
K. Filter material or wetting agents shall not be carried over in the air-stream.
L. Adequate access shall be provided for cleaning, removal and refitting of all filter cells and replacement of
gaskets in filter holding frames.
M. Combined pre-filters and main filters shall each be capable of being changed without disturbing the other
filter.
N. Filters shall be complete with robust purpose made holding frames which shall not distort in operation and
with seals to prevent air leakage or bypass.
O. Purpose made seals shall be provided to minimise air leakage around filters and the effectiveness of the
seals shall not be impaired by periodic removal and refitting of the filter cells.
P. The entire framework shall be securely fixed in position with all edges and joints effectively sealed to
prevent air leakage.
Q. Subsequent to commissioning and immediately prior to practical completion all disposable filters shall be
replaced. In addition one complete set of replacement media shall be provided for each disposable filter
and handed to the Client. Where disposable filters are attached to mounting grids or frames, other than by
quick release fastenings, sufficient frames shall be provided to meet the above requirements.
R. Subsequent to commissioning and immediately prior to practical completion all non-disposable filters shall
be cleaned and sufficient replacements of each size and type to allow individual units to be changed shall
be provided.
S. A copy of the type test certificate, issued by a NAMAS accredited air filter testing laboratory, shall be
submitted to the CA for each type of filter.
2.2 PANEL FILTERS
A. Pre-filters shall be arranged in flat or angle bank configuration, applicable to the required duty and each
cell shall consist of a pleated synthetic fibre element bonded to prevent fibre migration and impregnated
with special adhesive. The element shall be supported by a galvanised wire mesh backing and enclosed
within an aluminium or plastic frame; cardboard frames will not be accepted.
B. The average arrestance shall be a minimum of 87% when tested in accordance with BS EN 779 class G3
unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
C. Panel filters shall be selected to have a maximum initial resistance of 70Pa unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
D. Where filters are contained within air handling units they shall be in a standard air handling section and
arranged for front or side withdrawal depending upon space limitations. E. Filters shall be of the disposable
type unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 BAG FILTERS
A. High capacity bag filters shall be arranged in a flat bank and shall comprise a permanent corrosionresistant
holding frame housing a synthetic fire retardant media. The element shall be enclosed within aluminium,
galvanised steel or plastic frame; cardboard frames will not be accepted.
B. The media cartridge shall be pre-formed and shall be in accordance with BS EN 779 class F7 with an
average efficiency of 80-90% unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
C. Filters shall be capable of remaining fully inflated within the airstream.
D. Bag filters shall be selected to have a maximum initial resistance of 75Pa unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
E. Where filters are contained within air handling units they shall be in a standard air handling section and
arranged for front or side withdrawal depending upon space limitations. F. Filters shall be of the disposable
2.4 HIGH EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE AIR (HEPA) FILTERS
A. HEPA filters shall be of the close pleated very high efficiency type and be arranged in a flat bank. They shall
comprise a permanent corrosion-resistant holding frame housing a synthetic fire retardant media.
B. The element shall be enclosed within aluminium, galvanised steel or plastic frame; cardboard frames will
not be accepted.
C. The media cartridge shall be pre-formed and shall be in accordance with BS EN 1822 class H13 with a
collection efficiency of at least 99.95% and a penetration efficiency of 0.05% unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
D. HEPA filters shall be selected to have a maximum initial resistance of 250Pa unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
E. Where filters are contained within air handling units they shall be in a standard air handling section and
arranged for front or side withdrawal depending upon space limitations. E. Filters shall be of the disposable
2.5 ACTIVATED CARBON FILTERS
A. Activated carbon filters shall be of the chemically enhanced carbon pleated panel type and comprise cells
containing activated carbon granules selected to suit the contaminants as indicated elsewhere. The carbon
granules shall be bonded to prevent the release of carbon particulates into the air stream.
B. Evidence as to both efficiency and adsorption capacity of the adsorbent at the indicated levels shall be
submitted to the CA for acceptance.
C. Air filters shall comprise of absorbent bed filled with uniform thickness of activated carbon granules,
constructed to prevent settlement and voids do not occur.
D. The media shall be of a disposable or reactivated type as indicated and housed in a permanent corrosion
resistant holding frame. Cell construction shall include provision to prevent migration of the filter media.
E. Each filter assembly shall include two detachable test sections for use in predicting the service life of the
filter assembly. The test sections shall be exposed to full air flow and be removed and replaced by a spare
after 6 and 12 months operation and returned to the manufacturer for analysis of saturation and report on
service life remaining. The Contractor shall be responsible for this removal and replacement during the
defects liability period and shall include for the spares, the manufacturer's costs for the analysis/report
shall be included in the contract cost. Allowance shall be made for housing the test sections as part of the
filter assembly.
F. All metallic parts shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
G. Where filters are contained within air handling units they shall be in a standard air handling section and
arranged for front or side withdrawal depending upon space limitations.
2.6 FILTER MANOMETERS
A. All filters shall be provided with an inclined manometer or differential pressure gauge which shall indicate
the actual pressure drop across the filter. Gauge dials shall be 100mm in diameter.
B. The filter clean and dirty pressures shall be indicated.
C. Where dirty filter monitoring is provided, each filter shall have a differential pressure sensor to indicate to
the control panel or BMS, as appropriate, filter dirty conditions and alarm.
2.7 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide filter media that is UL 900, Class-2 listed and approved by the Municipality and the Civil Defence
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All filter efficiencies shall be in accordance with EUROVENT 4/ 5. Filters tested to ANSI/ ASHRAE 52.2 and
ANSI/ ARI 850 will be accepted with the approval of the CA and subject to demonstrating that the filter
performance is equivalent to or exceeds the EUROVENT standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air treatment equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. All filter banks shall be constructed and assembled to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide
appropriate caulking felt, rubber or neoprene gaskets as necessary.
C. Fan systems shall not be operated unless all filter banks are in place.
D. Install filter bank housing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with other trades
and existing conditions to assure that side access doors can be fully open for proper filter replacement.
E. Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gauges on outside
of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and calibrate each gauge, all in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training
1. Provide air filter and air filter housing manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide site
training of facility operating staff on proper handling and installation of the various types of filters
used on the project.
2. Notify the CA in advance to schedule and coordinate training sessions with end user. Refer to Division
23 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections for all training requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 234300 – ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Kitchen exhaust air units
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all fans, indicating construction, dimensions,
weights, performance and maintenance requirements.
2. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each Kitchen exhaust air unit.
a. Submit the following information, where applicable, to the CA for approval in accordance with the
b. Schedule of starting and full load currents
c. Details of connections for fans
d. Fan characteristic curves with operating point clearly indicated. Fan curves shall indicate air
e. Sound pressure spectrums
f. Vibration mounting details, including isolation efficiency on high and low speed
g. Fan motor rating and design absorbed power
h. Fan and motor speeds
i. Drive belt sizes
j. Filter sizes and efficiencies
k. Fan static and total pressures
l. External to unit, static and total pressures
m. Attenuator insertion losses
n. All Unit accessories (i.e. volume control dampers, pressure gauges, etc.)
3. Provide predicted sound power levels for all openings including, fresh air intake, supply air, return air
and exhaust air openings and casing radiated noise as indicated per the unit drawings and equipment
schedules.
4. Submit maximum vibration levels for the assembled units at the points indicated for each unit where
the unit structure integrates with the building support structure. At a minimum, vibration levels shall
not exceed 50dB re 1 micro G at 1/ 3 octave band readings from 5Hz to 100Hz frequency.
1. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every kitchen exhaust air unit. The drawing
information shall include
a. Unit Model
b. Unit arrangement
c. Information on all external connections
d. Information on overall sizes
e. Overall operating weight, and sizes, sections weight, point of supported weight load,
f. Unit construction details and thermal break unit construction detail.
g. Fan Selection Data:
h. Filtration Data
D. Calculations:
1. The external static pressure (ESP) calculation shall be submitted for each kitchen exhaust air unit
system at the time of material submittal approval.
actual resistance of all duct fittings (including kitchen extract canopy, sound attenuators etc.) as
provided by the manufacturers of such item for approval by the CA before final selection of units.
E. Test Reports:
1. Kitchen exhaust air unit’s shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
1. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and
drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring
diagrams in maintenance manuals.
1. For kitchen exhaust air unit accessories and components from the manufacturer.
a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled
b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify centre of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the kitchen exhaust air unit
components.
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 Execution and Closeout Requirement and as stated
elsewhere and submit the following:
3. Include component list with manufacturer's reference numbers, descriptions of materials and
4. Include recommendations for unit maintenance.
5. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, belt tension
adjustments, wiring diagrams, and preventive/ routine maintenance check list.
6. As-built Manufacturers Certified Drawings shall indicate the information detailed above.
7. Provide spare parts as detailed elsewhere
8. Provide a complete set of spare filters for all kitchen exhaust air unit s as specified in Section 234100
Particulate Air Filters.
A. All Kitchen Exhaust Units shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience in the design and manufacture of kitchen
exhaust air unit s. The manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management
C. The manufacturer shall have a committed customer care and technical support team, complimented by a
dedicated service team providing a call out service within the country the kitchen exhaust air unit s are
installed.
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards;
7. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, ARI Standards:
a. ANSI/ ARI 850 Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment.
8. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, ASHRAE Standards:
a. ANSI/ ASHRAE 52.2 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size.
9. European Committee of Air-Handling and Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturers, EUROVENT

Standards:
a. EUROVENT 4/ 5 Method of Testing Air Filters Used in General Ventilation.
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers’
B. This section includes the requirements for the design, construction and installation of kitchen exhaust air
unit s and components
C. All kitchen exhaust air unit s shall be as detailed in the equipment schedules and as indicated on the
design drawings.
D. All kitchen exhaust air unit s shall be designed and tested in accordance with BS EN 1886 and BS EN 13053.
E. The kitchen exhaust air unit s assembly and construction of panels to the frames shall provide minimum air
leakage Class-A according to EUROVENT Standard 2/2.
F. The duties and performance of the units shall be in accordance with the details indicated elsewhere and
include any allowance required to meet manufacturing tolerances.
G. All filter banks shall be constructed and assembled to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide
appropriate caulking felt, rubber or neoprene gaskets as necessary.
H. Individual components shall, in addition to the requirements of this section, comply with other relevant
I. In addition to the testing requirements stated elsewhere, standard factory tests shall be performed on each
unit and shall be completed and factory certified. The fans shall be factory run tested to ensure structural
integrity and proper RPM. All electrical circuits shall be tested to ensure correct operation before shipment
of the unit. Units shall pass factory quality control and testing and be thoroughly cleaned prior to
shipment. The results and a compliance statement shall be submitted to the CA prior to delivery to site.
J. All sections of the units, including those that are split for shipment, shall be thoroughly cleaned externally
and internally prior to wrapping for shipment. All scratches to painted surfaces both inside and out shall be
cleaned and repainted and the interior of the unit shall be completely vacuumed to remove all dust, metal
shavings or other debris. Wrap each section shipment with suitable protection to ensure delivery free from
deterioration.
K. Where stated elsewhere the manufacturer shall include a provision for the witnessing of the standard
factory tests as described above and inspection during assembly of each kitchen exhaust air unit.
L. Where units are delivered to site disassembled, the manufacturer shall allow for the site erection of the
units.
M. The manufacturer shall undertake a pre-commission check to ensure suitability for dynamic commissioning
and a report shall be issued to the CA.
N. Units and their components shall incorporate lifting facilities for installation.
O. Units shall be draw-through type.
P. All necessary penetrations in the kitchen exhaust air unit casing e.g. to accommodate controls items etc.,
shall be undertaken at the factory. Penetrations shall not be permitted on site.
Q. Electrical work shall conform to IEC Standards and as stated elsewhere.
R. Electrical characteristics of equipment shall be as detailed in the Equipment Schedules and Drawings and in
accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
1. Kitchen exhaust air units shall be comply with same standards as the Air Handling Units. Refer to
Section 237310 Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units, in addition to the clauses below
2. All metal components shall be epoxy coated (inside and outside of the unit) and the complete
installation shall be resistant to grease and suitable for steam cleaning.
2.3 EXTERNAL UNITS
1. External kitchen exhaust air unit s shall be constructed to the same standards as the Air Handling Units.
Refer to Section 237310 Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
2.4 ACCESS SECTIONS:
1. Access sections in kitchen exhaust air units shall be to the same standards as the Air Handling Units.
2.5 UNIT DAMPERS:
1. Kitchen exhaust air unit dampers shall be constructed to the same standards as the Air Handling Units.
2.6 AIR FILTER SECTION:
1. Kitchen exhaust air unit filters shall be to the same standards as the Air Handling Units. Refer to
Section 237310 Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units, in addition to the details specified below.
2. All filters in including the housing used in the kitchen exhaust air unit shall be UL listed
3. Primary/Pre Filter:
a. The average arrestance shall be 90% when tested in accordance with BS EN 779 clause G4 as
stated elsewhere.
4. Secondary filters
a. The media cartridge shall be pre-formed and shall be in accordance with BS EN 779 class F7 with
an average efficiency of 80-90%.
5. High Efficiency Particulate Air Filters (HEPA Filters)
a. The metal cased media cartridge shall be pre-formed and shall be in accordance with BS EN 1822
class F13 with an average efficiency greater than 99.95%% or class F14 with an average efficiency
greater than 99.995% as indicated elsewhere.
6. Activated carbon filters
a. Activated carbon filters shall remove by absorption gaseous odorous substances and
contaminants including ozone to less than 0.06ppm and shall consist of rechargeable cells carbon
granules with a non-woven synthetic fibre backing layer.
b. The filter shall include one cell constructed from clear panels which can be seen to change colour
when the filter requires changing.
c. Where Ultra Violet lamps are specified the Activated Carbon Filter shall be installed downstream.
7. Ultra Violet (UV) lamp modules
a. Ultra Violet lamps shall be provided to remove grease from the air stream which has not been
removed by the canopy grease filters. The UV lamps generate ozone which oxidises the grease
molecules.
b. An activated carbon filter shall be provided downstream of the UV lamps to remove the ozone.
8. Electrostatic precipitator filtration systems for use in kitchen exhaust systems
a. Electrostatic precipitators shall be designed to remove grease, gaseous particulates and odours
from the kitchen exhaust system.
b. Each kitchen exhaust electrostatic precipitator system shall comprise of the appropriate number of
modules, selected according to the manufacturer’s air volume flow rates for each module.
c. Electrostatic Precipitators shall be of the low air resistance 2-stage type, with first stage charging
the particles and the second stage where the particles are retained on collector plates.
d. The collecting shall be of aluminium construction with stainless steel ionizing electrodes mounted
in a rigid frame. The high voltage insulators shall moulded from self-glazing ceramic and shall
contain no high voltage penetrations
e. Each electrostatic module shall be provided with a 230V 50Hz power supply. LED power indicator
shall be provided on the casing of the unit for status. Unit shall be provided with wiring terminal
block and disconnect switch.
f. The collecting plates for the Electrostatic Precipitator shall include a built-in cleaning system,
which shall apply detergent, wash and rinse water via spray nozzles from a oscillating manifolds to
the air entering and air leaving sides of the collectors.
g. Each Electrostatic Precipitator shall include a programmable control system supplied by the
manufacturer specifically for the filtration system. The controls shall include a programmable time
clock to sequence the wash cycles, on/off times, etc.
9. Filter monitoring
a. All filters shall be provided with pressure differential sensors connected to the BMS for monitoring
of filter status.
2.7 FANS
A. Kitchen exhaust air unit fans shall be to the same standards as the Air Handling Units. Refer to Section
237310 Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units, in addition to the details specified below.
B. All fan motors shall be rated to a minimum of IP55 and suitable for continuous running with an air
temperature of 65°C unless stated otherwise elsewhere. C. All fans shall be UL listed.
C. All fans shall be provided a minimum 10% pressure margin with al filters fully loaded.
D. All kitchen exhaust air unit fans shall be invertor controlled to maintain a constant air volume during filter
loading.
E. All fan motors shall not be less than 4 pole unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
2.8 CONTROLS
A. All kitchen exhaust air units shall be provided with a pre-wired and tested, factory supplied control system
to control and monitor the operation of the kitchen exhaust air unit.
B. The controls shall be mounted in a purpose made control panel from heavy gauge steel mounted on the
kitchen exhaust air unit unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
C. The controls shall monitor the pressure drop of each filter and identify when the filter needs to be
replaced.
D. The invertor controlled fan shall vary the fan speed to maintain a constant air, based upon a pressure
sensor and regardless of the condition of the filters.
E. The controls shall be suitable for connecting to the BMS
2.9 NAMEPLATE
A. Each kitchen exhaust air unit shall be complete with a unique identification reference label (as indicated in
project documents) fitted at the manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be clearly visible
through the wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as approved by the CA prior to ordering
and shall be utilised in the record documentation. In addition to this a securely attach nameplate on each
fan coil unit showing manufacturer name, serial, model number etc. is required.
2.10 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide filter media that is UL listed and approved by the Municipality and the Civil Defence authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. All filter efficiencies shall be in accordance with ANSI/ ASHRAE 52.2 and ANSI/ ARI 850 or EUROVENT 4/
5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air treatment equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Units shall be installed and securely anchored on concrete frames or steel sub frames and as indicated on
the drawings.
C. Fan systems shall not be operated unless all filter banks are in place. At Taking-Over, prior to final
approval, all filters used during construction shall be removed and replaced with new filters throughout.
D. Supplementary steelwork necessary to support the unit shall be designed, supplied and installed by the
Contractor. The steelwork shall be galvanised after manufacture and painted to match the unit.
E. Install filter bank housing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with other trades
and existing conditions to assure that side access doors can be fully open for proper filter replacement.
F. Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gauges on outside
of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and calibrate each gauge, all in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
G. External connections passing through panels shall be provided with flexible air tight gaskets.
H. The discharge ductwork connection shall be suitable to maintain the aerodynamic performance of the fan.
I. Units shall be installed plumb and level.
J. Connect supply and return ducts to units with flexible duct connectors as detailed above. Comply
with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections and in compliance with the local authority
requirements.
K. Earth all equipment and wiring in accordance with requirements as stated elsewhere.
L. Equipment Start-Up
1. Provide certified factory trained and certified technician for start-up of all units in accordance with
manufacturer's procedures.
2. Coordinate all start-up activity with the CA. The Contractor shall not start up or run the units without
prior authorization from the CA. Unit shall be vacuumed clean internally and externally at completion
of construction and prior to starting of equipment. Interior of unit shall also be wiped clean with a 50/
50 IPA solution utilizing a non-shedding cloth.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training
1. Provide air filter and air filter housing manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide Site
training of facility operating staff on proper handling and installation of the various types of filters
used on the project.
2. Notify the CA 10 days in advance to schedule and coordinate training sessions with end user. Refer to
Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections for all training
requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 237213 – HEAT WHEEL AIR TO AIR ENERGY

RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Thermal Wheels Air to Air Energy Recovery
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all heat recovery systems, indicating
construction, dimensions, weights, performance and maintenance requirements.
2. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each heat recovery system.
a. Type
b. Height
c. Width
d. Supply and return air volumes
e. Thermal performance and efficiency at specified air volumes
f. Air entering, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures (supply & return).
g. Air leaving, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures (supply & return).
h. Air pressure drops.
4. Unit Casing:
a. Frame and panel construction and materials
b. Insulation data
c. Access and clearances
d. Coating and finishes.
e. Drain.
f. Power
g. Controls
C. Test Reports:
1. Heat wheels shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the components.
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 23 0010 (General Specification), and submit the following:
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of energy
recovery heat wheels and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified
to ISO 9001 and 14001..
marking.
a. BS EN 308 for testing and rating of heat exchangers.
3. Factory Mutual System, FM Standards
4. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA Standards
6. International Building Code, IBC.
7. International Mechanical Code, IMC.
8. AHRI Standard 1060 for the rating of air-to-air heat exchangers for energy recovery ventilation
equipment
9. Eurovent certified in accordance with Operational Manual OM-10 (Heat recovery devices –
Specifications, terminology, classification & functional characteristics)
10. International Electro-technical Commission, IEC Standards
A. Units shall be shipped fully assembled and protected up to practical shipping and lifting limitations. Units
not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and
orientation in direction of airflow. Each section shall have lifting lugs to allow for field rigging and final
placement of section.
B. Delivery:
1. Where the Heat Wheels are mounted within Air Handling Units they shall be completely assembled
and mounted in the Air Handling Units and all wiring installed to a connection point on the outside of
the Unit.
2. Protect Heat Wheels from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical and mechanical
damage.
C. Storage:
1. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic by storing in factory applied
protection/wrapping.
2. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish.
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Work of this Section includes the design and manufacture of heat wheel air to air energy recovery
equipment, which includes air handling units components required for energy recovery.
B. Energy recovery capacities shall be as detailed in the equipment Schedules and Drawings.
A. All heat wheel energy recovery equipment shall be from a single manufacturer.
B. Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers’.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The air to air energy recovery units shall be selected to provide the energy recovery as detailed in the
equipment schedules or on the drawings when operating at the specified conditions and parameters
unless stated differently elsewhere within the specification, drawings or schedules.
B. The air to air energy recovery units selection shall make allowance for the reduction in efficiencies which
will occur between maintenance periods due to the build-up of dirt and debris. A minimum requirement is
to ensure that the energy recovery units day one efficiencies are 5% above the scheduled values unless
stated otherwise elsewhere
C. Electrical characteristics of equipment shall be as per the Schedules and Design Drawings and in
accordance with the requirements as stated elsewhere.
2.4 THERMAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY EXCHANGER
A. Rotating regenerative air-to-air energy recovery units shall transfer sensible or total energy between the
exhaust and intake airstreams, as detailed in the equipment schedules or on the drawings and shall be
either mounted within an Air Handling Unit or duct mounted as detailed.
B. The energy recovery unit shall incorporate the following;
1. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section
2. Supported rotor on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings
3. Tapered roller bearing for horizontal mounting of wheels
C. The energy recovery wheels shall be designed and manufactured to maximise the sensible and latent
energy recovery and include a desiccant coating to ensure that the latent energy recovery obtained.
D. The thermal wheel rotor media shall be composed of aluminium foil or other approved heat exchange
media, coated to prohibit corrosion and surface oxidation. The media shall also be treated with a desiccant
coating having the necessary hygroscopic properties where total energy extraction is specified. The
desiccant coating and the heat exchange media shall be inorganic, not support bacteria, fungi or mould
growth and shall be coated to prohibit corrosion.
E. Thermal wheel energy exchangers shall have a minimum sensible and latent efficacy of 75% which shall be
certified by an independent company when tested in accordance with the following;
1. BS EN 308 for the testing and rating of heat exchangers.
equipment
3. ASHRAE 84-78P
F. Thermal wheel energy exchangers shall be Eurovent certified in accordance with Operational Manual
OM10
G. Thermal wheels shall consist of a rigid galvanised mild steel casing protected against corrosion, containing
a sectioned wheel with radial reinforcement
H. Thermal wheels shall be selected with the minimum pressure drop.
I. The media shall be easily cleanable and dry particles up to 800 microns, unless stated otherwise, shall pass
freely through the media.
J. The unit shall be provided with a factory set (site adjustable) purge sector designed to limit cross
contamination to less than 0.04% of the exhaust air-stream concentration. The wheel shall be certified by
an independent test laboratory for cross contamination using tracer gas SF6 or equivalent.
K. The rotor shall be speed controlled via an inverter allowing a turn down ratio as indicated and shall be
suitable for interfacing with the BMS as indicated elsewhere.
L. Provision shall be made for adjustment of drive belt or drive chain tension.
M. Where indicted the complete wheel and motor drive shall be mounted within an air handling unit section.
Access doors shall be located on each side of the energy recovery unit in the adjacent intake and exhaust
ductwork.
N. The wheel manufacturer shall guarantee wheel efficiency and shall provide certified wheel selection and
performance curves for approval. The efficiency shall be guaranteed for 5 years with a maximum drop in
efficiency of 5%.
O. The maximum rotation speed shall be 20 rpm and maximum face velocity shall be 2.5 m/s.
P. Controls: Panel, factory mounted and wired to motor with air stream thermostat and manual motor starter
for field wiring; with pilot light indication of rotor rotation and provisions for setting maximum and
minimum speed.
Q. Rotation Detection: - Electronic control module, electromagnetic sensor, and iron shuttle factory wired and
mounted, with alarm bell for field wiring and mounting, and remote alarm capability..
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on each unit required by the project and shall be completed and
factory certified and test certificates issued. All electrical circuits shall be tested to ensure correct operation
of unit. Units shall pass factory quality control and testing and be thoroughly cleaned prior to shipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. The air to air energy recovery unit shall generally be installed within Air Handling Units at the
manufacturer’s works. Where this is not possible due to the physical size of the thermal wheels they shall
be installed at site and the thermal wheel manufacturer shall provide training of the Contractor for the
proper and correct means of unit installation. Any openings within the AHU casings for electrics, controls,
etc. shall be pre-made at the AHU factory, it will not be acceptable to make openings in the AHU casings at
site.
C. Coordinate work with other trades for external connections to units including but not limited to electrical
and temperature control.
D. Start-Up
1. Inspect equipment after installation to verify installation is in accordance with the Specification,
manufacturer’s recommendations, equipment is lubricated, proper belt tension and that equipment is
otherwise ready to operate.
2. Undertake pre-start-up checks in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Codes.
3. Check all interlocks and controls have been installed and are either operational or set to a safe mode.
4. Perform airside testing and commissioning as specified elsewhere.
E. Site quality control
1. The commissioning specialist shall inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections. Prepare a test and inspection report.
F. Adjustment & cleaning & commissioning
1. Testing and Commissioning
a. Refer to Section 230010 for testing and commissioning standards.
b. The installer shall coordinate all testing and commissioning requirements with other related
G. All heat wheels shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide a manufacturer authorized trained and certified representative to provide site training for facility
operating staff on all aspects of the fans including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault
finding for all types of heat wheels used on the project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 237216 – HEAT PIPE AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Heat Pipe Air to Air Energy Recovery
1.2 SUBMITTALS
a. Type
b. Height
c. Width
d. Air volume
4. Unit Casing:
b. Insulation data
d. Coating and finishes.
e. Drain.
C. Test Reports:
1. Heat pipes shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
1. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for cleaning and replacement. Include product
data, shop drawings in the maintenance manuals.
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of energy
recovery heat pipes and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified to
ISO 9001 and 14001..
marking.
b. BS 5141 for testing and rating of heating and cooling coils.
c. BS EN 305 & 306 for testing and rating of heat exchangers.
equipment
7. Eurovent certified in accordance with Operational Manual OM-10 (Heat recovery devices –
Specifications, terminology, classification & functional characteristics)
B. Delivery:
1. Where heat pipes are mounted within Air Handling Units they shall be completely assembled and
mounted in the Air Handling Units at the AHU manufacturers works.
2. Protect heat pipes from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage.
C. Storage:
2. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, and filters are in
place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Work of this Section includes design and manufacture of energy recovery equipment, which includes
air handling units components required for energy recovery.
B. Energy recovery capacity and/or coil capacities are to be as per the equipment Schedules and Drawings.
A. All heat pipe air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall be from a single manufacturer.
B. Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The air-to-air energy recovery units shall be selected to provide the energy recovery as detailed in the
B. The air-to-air energy recovery units selection shall make allowance for the reduction in efficiencies which
C. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure in accordance with BS 5141
D. Heat exchangers: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure in accordance with BS EN 305
& 306
E. Insulation and seals shall meet NFPA 90A.
2.4 HEAT PIPES (WRAP AROUND TYPE)
A. General
1. Heat pipes shall be of the wrap around type for dehumidification of the supply air and shall be located
within Air Handling Units as detailed in the equipment schedules or on the drawings.
2. The heat pipes shall be provided as an integral part of the Air Handling Units and installed and tested
at the Air Handling manufacturers works.
3. Wrap around heat pipes shall be wrapped around the main AHU cooling coil. The wrap-around heat
pipes shall pre-cool the fresh/return air which is then passed through the cooling coil. The cooled
dehumidified air is then passively reheated by the heat pipe on the downstream side of the cooling
coil to the supply air condition.
B. Heat pipe coils
1. Fins - The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall be of the
continuous plate type to maximize the external surface area rather the individually finned tube pattern.
The fins shall be of the louvered type to optimize the airside heat transfer and spaced at such a
distance as required by the conditions specified.
2. Tubes – The tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C106 for heat exchanger use.
Tube diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface to enhance the internal surface area and
prevent pooling of liquid. The minimum thickness of the tube shall be 0.35mm. The number of rows of
tubes shall be selected to achieve the performance stated in the equipment schedules or on the
drawings. Multiple row heat pipes shall have tubes in a staggered, equilateral pattern to optimize the
airside heat transfer.
3. Tubes and fins shall be provided with electro tined coating and provided with 5-year corrosion
warranty.
C. Casing
1. Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The casing shall
incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates around both the precool and reheat heat pipe
blocks. Cover boxes shall be provided around the wrap-around pipes both to protect the exposed
pipes and to rigidly join the two sections. Extra sheet metal shall be provided to ensure rigidity during
manufacture and transport.
D. Working Fluid
1. Unless stated elsewhere the refrigerant shall be R134a. The heat pipe circuits shall be factory
charged and hermetically sealed with the complete refrigerant charge.
E. Circuitry
1. Heat pipes shall be formed from an array of complete loops such that the working fluid flows around
the loop in only one direction i.e. liquid and vapour flow in the same direction to ensure that returning
liquid is not entrained by the vapour.
2. There shall be multiple loops in the heat pipe and each loop shall be individually charged. Heat pipes
with header assemblies containing a single circuit are not acceptable as a single leak will render the
entire heat pipe inoperative.
3. When multiple row heat pipes are used, the rows shall be connected together in a counter flow
orientation to optimize the performance of the heat pipe. Rows shall not be manifolded together.
4. Heat pipe loops shall be arranged to slope down to the precool side to allow gravity assisted liquid
return to maximize the internal heat transfer.
F. Performance
1. Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified conditions when subject to the air volumes
given in the specification. Heat pipe performance shall be independently type tested and certified in
line with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 for testing and rating of heating and cooling
coils and BS EN 305 & 306 for testing and rating of heat exchangers. All software used to predict the
performance of heat pipes shall be based upon the results of these independent tests.
2. The heat pipe shall have a third-party independent test report conducted by a certified laboratory.
G. Installation
1. The heat pipe shall be designed to fit around the main cooling coil and its dimensions shall be
selected so as to allow this. Once installed within the AHU both the heat pipe and cooling coil shall be
blanked-off to ensure that there is no air bypass around the fin blocks of either the heat pipe or
cooling coil.
2. The base of the air treatment section of the AHU shall form a continuous drain pan extending under
the heat pipe and the cooling coil. The Drip pan shall be as detailed for the Air Handling Unit in
specification Section 237310.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The heat pipe shall be installed and tested at the Air Handling Unit manufacturer’s factory in accordance
with the heat pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. All heat pipe coils shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
1. Refer to Section 230010 Systems Commissioning.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 237219 – FIXED PLATE AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY

RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Fixed Plate Air to Air Energy Recovery
1.2 SUBMITTALS
a. Type
b. Height
c. Width
d. Supply and return air volumes
4. Unit Casing:
b. Insulation data
d. Coating and finishes
e. Drain
f. Controls
C. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials and systems.
D. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
E. Test Reports:
F. Plate heat exchangers shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
G. Submit factory test reports and certificates of all factory quality control programmes
H. Provide list of tests included.
I. Provide copies of the certified test data.
J. Installation Instructions:
K. Maintenance Data:
L. Supplementary Product Literature:
M. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
N. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of fixed plate
energy recovery equipment and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards,
certified to ISO 9001 and 14001..
marking.
equipment
7. Eurovent certified in accordance with Operational Manual 10/1 (Heat recovery devices – Specifications,
terminology, classification & functional characteristics)
B. Delivery:
1. Where the plate heat exchangers are mounted within Air Handling Units they shall be completely
assembled and mounted in the Air Handling Units at the AHU manufacturers works and all wiring
installed to a connection point on the outside of the Unit.
2. Protect plate heat exchangers from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical and
mechanical damage.
C. Storage:
2. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, and filters are in
place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 2.1 GENERAL
A. The Work of this Section includes design of heat recovery equipment, which includes air handling units
components required for heat recovery.
B. Energy recovery capacities shall be as detailed in the equipment Schedules and Drawings.
A. All heat wheel energy recovery equipment shall be from a single manufacturer.
B. Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The air to air energy recovery units shall be selected to provide the energy recovery as detailed in the
B. The air to air energy recovery units selection shall make allowance for the reduction in efficiencies which
C. Fixed plate air-to-air plate heat exchangers shall be manufactured and tested to the same standards as the
AHU’s in which they are installed.
D. Insulation and seal shall meet NFPA 90A.
2.4 AIR TO AIR PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
A. Air-to-air fixed plate heat exchangers shall be located within Air Handling Units as detailed in the
equipment schedules or on the drawings.
B. Plate to plate heat exchangers shall be of the diagonal cross flow type manufactured from separating
epoxy coated profiled aluminium unless stated otherwise in the equipment schedules or on the drawings.
C. The unit shall be sealed to prevent leakage or cross contamination. The maximum air leakage shall be less
than 0.1% of the peak air flow when tested in accordance with BS EN 1886.
D. Condensate drainage shall be provided in every direction and the exchanger shall be mounted over a
stainless steel removable drain tray. A condensate drain shall be routed from the drain tray to the nearest
floor gully or drain.
E. Motorised face and bypass dampers shall be fitted unless otherwise stated within the equipment schedules
or on the drawings. All dampers shall comply with BS EN 1751 Class 2 for air leakage
F. The minimum thermal efficiency shall not be less than that stated in the equipment schedules or on the
drawings.
G. The plate heat exchanger shall be Eurovent certified in accordance with Operational Manual OM-08
H. The plate heat exchanger shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 308 (Heat Exchangers – Test procedure
for establishing the performance of air to air heat recovery devices).
I. The heat exchanger elements shall be designed to withstand the external and differential pressures without
deformation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and
conditions affecting performance of the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely
completion and notify the CA of the unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The plate heat exchanger shall be installed and tested at the Air Handling Unit manufacturers factory in
accordance with the plate heat exchanger manufacturers recommendations.
B. All plate heat exchangers shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
1. Refer to Section 230010 Systems Commissioning.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 237223 - PACKAGED (RUN-AROUND COIL) AIR TO

AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Run-Around Coil (RAC) Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment
1.2 SUBMITTALS
a. Details each heat transfer coil, including;
1) Type
2) Height
3) Width
4) Rows
5) Capacity (kW, l/ s, kg/ s)
6) Air entering, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures
7) Air leaving, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures
8) Air pressure drop
9) Air velocities through coils
10) Water entering temperature
11) Water leaving temperature
12) Water pressure drop
13) Water connection sizes
14) Coating and finishes.
4. System design
a. Pipework sizes
b. Pump data
c. Pressurisation unit details
d. Drain
e. Power
f. Controls
7. Product Data: Indicate dimensions, weights, thermal performance, electrical details (where
appropriate), coil performance and finishes of materials.
8. Submit detailed information on component pressure drops.
C. Test Reports:
1. Heat transfer coils shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
D. Installation Drawings:
1. Submit co-ordinated layout installation showing pipework routing, all pipework accessories (valves,
controls, air vents, drain cocks, etc.).
2. Submit system schematic layout, indicating flow rates, temperatures, pipe sizes, etc.
3. Submit system power and control wiring diagrams.
E. Installation Instructions:
F. Maintenance Data:
1. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for cleaning and replacement. Include
product data, shop drawings in the maintenance manuals.
G. Supplementary Product Literature:
H. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
I. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
b. Include recommendations for system maintenance including all components.
c. Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, belt tension adjustments, wiring
diagrams, and preventive/ routine maintenance check list.
3. As-built Drawings shall show total unit configuration in direction of airflow, unit dimensions, and field
duct connection details.
A. Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalogue
data on total product offering.
B. Heat Recovery Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components that issues
complete catalog data on total product offering.
C. Manufactured in facility registered to IS0 9001:2000/ EN IS0 9001:2000/ ANSI/ ASQC Q9001:2000.
1. British Standards including:
a. BS EN 12451 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for heat exchangers
b. BS 5141-1 Specification for air heating and cooling coils. Method of testing for rating of cooling
coils.
c. BS 5141-2 Specification for air heating and cooling coils. Method of testing for rating of heating
coils.
d. BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications
and test methods.
a. ARI 410 Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
5. International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC Standards.
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA.
A. Units shall be shipped fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped
fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and orientation in
direction of airflow. Each section shall have lifting lugs of shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final
B. Delivery: Deliver units to Site completely assembled and mounted in units.
C. Storage: Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish.
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until
ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Work of this Section includes design of heat recovery equipment, which includes air handling units
components required for heat recovery.
B. Heat recovery capacity and/or coil capacities are to be as per the Particular Specification, Schedules, and
Design Drawings.
A. Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Air Coils: Coil design and sizing shall be based on figures obtained from performance tests described in BS
5141 for cooling and heating coils.
B. Electrical work shall conform to IEC Standards.
C. Electrical characteristics of equipment shall be as per the equipment schedules and Drawings and in
accordance with the requirements of the Distribution Company having jurisdiction.
D. Adhesives and insulation materials shall have a composite fire and smoke hazard rating per NFPA 90A and
UL 181, manufacturer labeled accordingly.
2.4 RUN AROUND COILS
A. General
1. Run around coils shall be as detailed in the equipment schedules and on the drawings.
2. The system shall include an energy recovery coil in the supply air and a closed circuit interconnecting
pumped pipework distribution to a second energy recovery coil in the return air system.
3. Run around coils shall comply with the requirements for coils in this specification and as detailed
specification section 238216.
4. The manufacturer shall provide a complete system package consisting of pipework, energy recovery
coils, circulating pump, expansion vessel, power supplies and controls.
5. The system shall be as detailed in the equipment schedules and on the drawings, but shall have a
minimum overall efficiency of not less than 45% unless stated otherwise elsewhere
6. The pipework shall be arranged to provide full flow through the supply and return coil when the
controls indicate that useful energy can be recovered.
7. All pipework and pipework ancillaries shall be in accordance with section 232113 of the specification.
8. Run and stand-by pumps shall be provided and comply with the requirements of Section 232123 and
be constructed with cast iron bodies, bronze impellers and mechanical seals driven by totally enclosed
or drip proof fan cooled motor suitable for single phase electricity supply. The valving arrangement
shall include isolating valves, strainers and non-return valves as detailed elsewhere.
9. An altitude gauge and cock shall be provided on the system connection to the expansion vessel,
together with a safety valve on the pump discharge, set to discharge at a pressure of 5 bar unless
indicated otherwise.
10. The expansion vessel shall be of steel construction with internal flexible rubber diaphragm, suitable for
water, pre-charged with inert gas.
11. The system shall be complete with drain and make up valve with hose connection and vent cock.
12. The pressurisation units shall be selected to accommodate the expansion in the system.
B. COILS
1. Coils shall be selected to match the duties stated in the equipment schedules or on the drawings.
2. Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full design air flow is evenly dispersed across the full
coil face area.
3. The fluid pressure drop through coils utilizing water as the fluid shall not exceed 30kpa
4. Coil design and sizing shall be based on figures obtained from performance tests described in BS 5141
for cooling and heating coils.
5. Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before leaving
the manufacturer's works. An independently witnessed test certificate shall be issued to the CA for
each coil. Each coil shall be indelibly marked with the details of the test.
6. Coils shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works to a minimum of 1.5 times the working
pressure or 8 bar gauge pressure whichever is the greater.
7. The flow and return battery connections shall be labeled and the air flow direction shall be indelibly
marked on the battery casing.
8. Coils shall be mounted so that they can be removed from the side without dismantling the ductwork
or the entire air handling unit. The shop drawings shall be submitted to the CA, indicating the
maintenance access and replacement spaces required for acceptance.
9. Flow and return headers shall be arranged to ensure equal flow through all tubes. Provision shall be
made for expansion and contraction of the tubes and for effective venting and draining of the coil.
Each coil shall be provided with a full-bore dirt pocket with drain valve on the lower connection.
10. The tube and fin spacing shall be arranged to ensure maximum heat transfer efficiency with minimum
coil depth and air resistance. Fins shall not be more closely spaced than 330 per metre.
11. Fins shall make firm and continuous contact with the primary tubes and be constructed from copper or
aluminium, as detailed in the equipment schedules or on the drawings.
12. Aluminium fins shall not be less than 0.4mm thick and copper fins not less than 0.3mm thick. Frames
shall be stainless steel.
13. To combat the area acid and salt atmospheric conditions cooling coils with aluminium fins shall be
epoxy coated and coils with copper fins shall be electro tinned. The coils shall have a warranty of 10
years against corrosion.
14. Coils with minor damage to fins shall be combed straight. Coils with extensive fin damage will not be
acceptable.
15. Tube wall thickness and coil construction shall be suitable for the system operating pressures and
temperatures, but not less than 0.7mm.
16. Connections shall be clear of coil casings with disconnection joints positioned to permit full withdrawal
and removal of coils without extensive dismantling of adjacent pipework, ductwork or other
equipment.
17. Coils shall be mounted in a mild steel framed casing having a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm. Casings
shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 after manufacture. The casing shall be
of adequate strength for the size of the coil.
18. Coils shall comprise solid drawn seamless copper tubes unless otherwise stated. Copper tube shall
comply with BS EN 12451 and have suitable wall thickness for the pressure application.
19. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
20. Unless otherwise indicated each coil shall be provided with a self-sealing combined pressure and
temperature test point on the flow and return.
A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the system components and shall be completed and factory
certified.
B. System components shall pass factory quality control and testing and be thoroughly cleaned prior to
shipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades for external connections to units including but not limited to electrical
and temperature control.
B. Install all components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unit shall be installed plumb and
level.
C. Start-Up
1. Inspect equipment after installation to verify installation is in accordance with the Specification,
manufacturer’s recommendations, equipment is lubricated and that equipment is otherwise ready to
operate.
2. Undertake pre-start-up checks in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Codes.
3. Check all interlocks and controls have been installed and are either operational or set to a safe mode.
4. Perform airside testing and commissioning as specified elsewhere.
A. The commissioning specialist shall inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including connections. Prepare a test and inspection report.
B. Testing and Commissioning
2. The installer shall coordinate all testing and commissioning requirements with other related
END OF SECTION
SECTION 237310 - CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Air handling units.
2. The mechanical Services particular specification, drawings and schedules.
C. Related Divisions and Documentation
D. General:
1. Air handling unit (AHU) shall mean an assembly of packaged plant components.
2. The duties and performance of the units shall be in accordance with the details indicated elsewhere
and include any allowance required to meet manufacturing tolerances.
3. Individual components shall, in addition to the requirements of this section, comply with other relevant
4. Air handling units shall be fully assembled and tested at the manufacturer’s works to demonstrate that
aerodynamic performance, air leakage, air flow, design resistance and noise levels are in compliance
with the specification and performance requirements. The results and a compliance statement shall be
submitted to the CA prior to delivery to site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 Submittal Procedures and as stated elsewhere
and submit the following.
B. Technical Submittals:
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all AHU components, indicating unit
2. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each Air Handling Unit.
b. Details of connections for fans
c. Fan characteristic curves with operating point clearly indicated. Fan curves shall indicate air
d. Sound pressure spectrums
e. Vibration mounting details, including isolation efficiency on high and low speed
f. Coil pressure drops, air side and water side
g. Coil air on and air off conditions
h. Coil water on and water off temperatures
i. Fan motor rating and design absorbed power
j. Fan and motor speeds
k. Drive belt sizes
l. Filter sizes and efficiencies
m. Fan static and total pressures
n. External to unit, static and total pressures
o. Heat recovery details (i.e. thermal wheels, plate heat exchangers, etc.)
p. Humidifier model and rating
q. Attenuator insertion losses
r. All AHU accessories (i.e. volume control dampers, pressure gauges, etc.)
4. Provide predicted sound power levels for all openings including, fresh air intake, supply air, return air
and exhaust air openings and casing radiated noise as indicated per the unit drawings and equipment
schedules.
5. Submit maximum vibration levels for the assembled units at the points indicated for each unit where
the unit structure integrates with the building support structure. At a minimum, vibration levels shall
not exceed 50dB re 1 micro G at 1/ 3 octave band readings from 5Hz to 100Hz frequency.
1. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every AHU. The drawing information shall
include
a. Unit Model
b. Unit arrangement
c. Information on all external connections
e. Overall operating weight, and sizes, sections weight, point of supported weight load,
f. Unit construction details and thermal break unit construction detail.
g. Fan Selection Data:
h. Cooling, Heating and Heat Recovery Data
i. Filtration Data
j. Humidifier Data
D. Calculations:
1. The external static pressure (ESP) calculation shall be submitted for each AHU system at the time of
actual resistance of the Air Handling Unit components and all duct fittings (including grilles, sound
attenuators etc.) as provided by the manufacturers of such items for approval by the CA before
final selection of units.
E. Test Reports:
1. AHU’s shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
1. Provide the following for AHU’s, accessories and components from the manufacturer.
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the AHU components.
c. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, belt tension
adjustments, wiring diagrams, and preventive/ routine maintenance check list.
4. Provide spare parts as detailed elsewhere
5. Provide a complete set of spare filters for all AHUs as specified in Section 234100 HVAC Particulate Air
Filters.
A. All Air Handling Units shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience in the design and manufacture of AHU’s. The
manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified to
ISO 9001 and 14001.
dedicated service team providing a call out service within the country the AHU’s are installed.
D. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Drawings or in
the Specification, the Works shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards and codes.
The current editions of the publications listed below form a part of this Section.
a. BS EN 1886 – Air Handling Units – Mechanical performance
b. BS EN 13053 – Air Handling Units – Ratings and Performance
6. All Air handling Units shall be Eurovent Certified
13. ARI 410 Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. International
Electrotechnical Commission, IEC Standards.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
1. 1. Listed and labelled as defined in IEC by a testing agency acceptable to the Municipality and Utility
Authority having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
G. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose
and shall, where applicable, conform to the standards of and shall be approved from Local By-laws and
Regulations.
H. All materials required for installation under these specifications shall be subject to the acceptance of the
A. Units shall be shipped fully assembled (on factory installed base rails/ mounting legs) up to practical
shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have labels and airflow arrows on
each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow.
B. Each section shall have lifting lugs of shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of section.
C. Deliver units to Site with fan motors, sheaves and belts completely assembled and mounted in units.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Air handling units shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes the requirements for the design, construction and installation of air handling units
and components.
B. All AHU’s shall be designed and tested in accordance with BS EN 1886 and BS EN 13053.
C. The AHU assembly and construction of panels to the frames shall provide minimum air leakage Class-A
according to EUROVENT Standard 2/2.
D. The duties and performance of the units shall be in accordance with the details indicated elsewhere and
include any allowance required to meet manufacturing tolerances.
E. Individual components shall, in addition to the requirements of this section, comply with other relevant
F. Air handling units shall be fully assembled and tested at the manufacturer’s works to demonstrate that
aerodynamic performance, leakage air flow, design resistance and noise levels are in compliance with the
specification and performance requirements. The results and a compliance statement shall be submitted
to the CA prior to delivery to site.
G. Where units are delivered to site disassembled, the manufacturer shall allow for the site erection of the
units.
H. The manufacturer shall undertake a pre-commission check to ensure suitability for dynamic commissioning
and a report shall be issued to the CA.
I. Units and their components shall incorporate lifting facilities for installation.
J. Units shall be draw-through type, unless specifically required as blow-through units.
K. Fresh air and exhaust connections shall be provided with tight shut-off dampers arranged to close when
the system shuts down unless otherwise stated.
L. All necessary penetrations in the air handling unit casing e.g. to accommodate controls items etc., shall be
undertaken at the factory. Penetrations shall not be permitted on site.
M. Electrical work shall conform to IEC Standards and as stated elsewhere.
N. Electrical characteristics of equipment shall be as detailed in the Equipment Schedules and Drawings and in
accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Units shall be designed and constructed to minimise distortion, damage and drumming in operation and at
the maximum pressures generated by the fan operating under closed head conditions.
B. The unit framework shall be rigid enough to prevent distortion during transportation and after final
assembly on site. Framework shall be fabricated from 3mm sheet steel unless otherwise stated.
C. Individual components and sections shall be assembled using proprietary and proven fastening
techniques. Locking devices shall be used with all fastenings which are subject to vibration.
D. Casings shall generally be of constant cross-sectional dimensions and designed to promote even air
distribution across the face of all components.
E. Casings shall be complete with internal flanged joints.
F. Each section shall be identified by a clear stencil description on the external surface.
G. Units shall be corrosion resistant and constructed free of condensation.
H. Airtight seals shall be provided between the sections and completely around each access and unit panel.
Jointing methods shall ensure the unit is not less airtight than the related ductwork system.
I. Unit sections shall be fabricated from pressed multi-angled supports forming a pillar and post or box
frame construction with purpose made corner joints. Rebates in the frame shall allow the access and infill
panels to be flush with the frame and create a smooth surface inside and out.
J. Panels shall be manufactured from heavy gauge galvanised mild steel sheets at least 1.2 mm thick. Panels
shall be double skinned with high density acoustic and thermal insulation between the skins.
K. The casing insulation properties:
1. Compliant with BS 476-6:1989+A1:2009 and BS 476-7
2. Adhesives and insulation materials shall have a composite fire and smoke hazard rating in compliance
with NFPA 90A and UL 181 and labelled accordingly.
3. CFC and HCFC free
4. Inorganic, vermin proof and non-hygroscopic
5. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum thickness shall be:
a. 50 mm for units 1.0 m³/s or greater
b. 25 mm for units less than 1.0 m³/s
c. Thermal conductivity no greater than 0.03 W/mK
L. Casing insulation shall be fixed securely to the panel and protected to prevent migration of fibre into the
air flow.
M. All insulation components shall be made from materials with zero ozone depletion potential (CFC and
HCFC free). Submit to the CA, prior to ordering, written confirmation that the products to be installed are
CFC, HFC and HCFC free.
N. For all insulation infill material test evidence must be available and submitted to the CA showing that the
fibres from which the products are made are not classified as a possible carcinogen as detailed by
European Directive 97/69/EC. Fibres shall also comply with the requirements as stated elsewhere. O.
Hollow section frame posts, where used, shall be insulated as for the casing.
O. Thermal breaks shall be provided in the frame construction.
P. The design of the unit shall ensure that there is no cold bridging and no direct metallic contact between
the inside and outside of the cabinets.
Q. External and internal casing finish and colour shall be as manufacturer’s standard unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
R. Panels and frames shall be assembled with a closed cell self-adhesive neoprene foam gasket layer installed
in between them to prevent air leakage, reduce vibration noise, minimized thermal losses.
S. All panels shall be removable and sealed against the framework. The seal shall be mechanically fixed to
the panel.
T. Unless otherwise stated the minimum sound attenuation of the casing shall be:
Panel
thickness
Hz 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8k
50mm db 17 18 24 29 23 33 42 45
25mm db 22 26 26 37 38 39 47 35
U. All section casings shall have the same cross-section and shall be identical in appearance
V. Where units are large enough for man access the bottom/floor panels shall be suitably strengthened to
facilitate entry for maintenance (support weight of two men, tools and equipment) without deformation
and/or damage to internal finishes. The units shall have weatherproof bulkhead lighting and switches and
non-slip floor surfaces. Lights shall be operable from inside and outside.
W. Where flexible connections are mounted within the air handling unit they shall be to the same specification
as described elsewhere.
X. Visual inspection port holes shall be provided of at least 200 mm diameter and one per 900mm height of
section in each of the following sections unless otherwise stated:
1. Fan section
2. Humidifier section
3. Access sections
4. Cooling coil section
Y. Bulkhead lighting shall be provided and each bulkhead light shall be wired to its own internal and external
on/off switch in each of the following sections:
1. Fan section
2. Humidifier section
3. Access sections
4. Cooling coil section
Z. The unit shall be delivered on a base frame constructed from galvanised steel. The base frame shall be
pre-drilled for fixing holding down bolts and shall have removable lifting lugs.
AA. Air intake louvres shall prevent the ingress of rain and sand and shall incorporate an insect screen. The
colour and finish shall be approved by the CA prior to manufacture.
2.3 EXTERNAL UNITS
A. Where units are located externally they shall be weatherproofed including associated control panels.
B. Units shall have a weatherproof outer casing with a pitched roof constructed of watertight metal decking
with water seals in all joints having suitable eaves overhang and complete with gutters and drains.
C. The casings of all external units exposed to a saline environment (within 20km of the sea, unless stated
otherwise) shall be designed and tested to withstand 500 hours salt spray exposure in accordance with
ASTM B117.
D. Access doors shall be lockable.
E. Bulkhead light fittings shall be provided in each section with a weatherproof external switch with all wiring
contained in galvanised mild steel conduit.
2.4 ACCESS SECTIONS:
A. Access sections shall be provided with hinged doors to allow entry for internal inspection purposes.
B. Access sections shall be provided to facilitate access to upstream and downstream faces and internal parts
of all sections in the unit including thermostat, detector, air-flow switch and other control/monitoring
positions within the unit.
C. Access panels and hinged doors shall be 600mm wide minimum and sized for the full height of the AHU.
D. Access panels shall be secured with proprietary quick-release captive fastenings consistent with effective
air sealing. Hinged doors shall be retained with clamping type latches.
E. Self-tapping screws and set screws shall not be acceptable as panel fastening
F. Quick release and totally removable access door shall be provided at filter sections with side rail mounting.
G. All seals shall be designed for normal maintenance operations for a minimum of 10 years
2.5 UNIT DAMPERS:
A. Unless otherwise stated dampers shall be double skin aerofoil multi-leaf opposed blade, fabricated from
stainless steel with maintenance free nylon bearings and complete with suitable linkages. Unless otherwise
indicated, air leakage through dampers when in the closed position shall not exceed 5% of the maximum
design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total pressure.
B. Each damper section shall be provided with a duct connection flange.
C. Mounting brackets and actuators shall be supplied by the controls specialist
2.6 MIXING BOXES/DAMPER SECTION
A. Mixing box sections shall be supplied having double skin aerofoil parallel blade dampers positioned across
each air opening fabricated from stainless steel with maintenance free nylon bearings and complete with
suitable linkages.
B. On fixed quantities of mixed air, dampers shall be sized to give equal velocities through each damper.
C. Hinged access doors shall be provided into the damper mixing box section.
D. Each damper section shall be provided with a duct connection flange.
E. Mounting brackets and actuators shall be supplied by the controls specialist
2.7 AIR FILTER SECTION:
A. Filters within air handling units shall be as detailed elsewhere and shall operate with not less than the
efficiencies specified.
B. Filter performance shall be measured in accordance with Eurovent standard 4/5 and BS EN 779.
C. Face velocities across filters shall be limited to a maximum of 2 m/s.
D. Filter unit or panels shall be selected to be of uniform size and pressure drop
E. Filter media shall not be subject to erosion, deterioration or to the effects of temperature and shall be
manufactured from non-deleterious materials.
F. Filter material shall be non-hygroscopic, shall not support vermin and shall be proof against fungal and
bacterial growth and attack.
G. Filters shall be non-flammable and comply with BS 476.
H. Frames, casings and filter cell holding frames shall be classified non-combustible when tested in
accordance with BS 476.
I. When exposed to heat or flame, the filter shall not generate significant quantities of smoke or toxic fumes
into the air-stream.
J. Filter material or wetting agents shall not be carried over in the air-stream.
K. Adequate access shall be provided for cleaning, removal and refitting of all filter cells and replacement of
gaskets in filter holding frames.
L. Combined pre-filters and main filters shall each be capable of being changed without disturbing the other
M. filter
N. Filters shall be complete with robust purpose made holding frames which shall not distort in operation and
with seals to prevent air leakage or bypass.
O. Purpose made seals shall be provided to minimise air leakage around filters and the effectiveness of the
seals shall not be impaired by periodic removal and refitting of the filter cells.
P. The entire framework shall be securely fixed in position with all edges and joints effectively sealed to
prevent air leakage.
Q. Subsequent to commissioning and immediately prior to practical completion all disposable filters shall be
replaced. In addition one complete set of replacement media shall be provided for each disposable filter.
For cleanable units, sufficient replacements of each size and type to allow individual units to be changed
shall be provided. Where disposable filters are attached to mounting grids or frames, other than by quick
release fastenings, sufficient frames shall be provided to meet the above requirements.
R. A copy of the type test certificate, issued by a NAMAS accredited air filter testing laboratory, shall be
submitted to the CA for each type of filter. R. Filter Mounting Frame:
1. Mounting frames shall be manufactured from galvanized steel and designed to ensure that the filter
can be accessed.
2. Frame mounting frame or rails shall be sealed for a minimal air leak Class F5-7 according to
EUROVENT Standard EN 779.
S. Primary/Pre Filter:
1. Pre-filters shall be arranged in flat or angle bank configuration, applicable to the required duty and
each cell shall consist of a pleated synthetic fibre element bonded to prevent fibre migration and
impregnated with special adhesive. The element shall be supported by a galvanised wire mesh
backing and enclosed within a stout fibre board frame with integral grid for added reinforcement.
2. The average arrestance shall be 87% when tested in accordance with BS EN 779 class G3 or G4 as
stated elsewhere.
3. Filters shall be contained in a standard air handling section and arranged for front or side withdrawal
depending upon space limitations.
4. Panels shall be of the disposable type unless otherwise indicated.
T. Secondary filters
1. High-capacity bag filters shall be arranged in a flat bank and shall comprise a permanent corrosion
resistant holding frame housing a synthetic fire-retardant media.
2. The media cartridge shall be pre-formed and shall be in accordance with BS EN 779 class F7 with an
average efficiency of 80-90% or class F9 with an average efficiency of 95% as indicated elsewhere.
3. Filters shall be capable of remaining fully inflated within the airstream.
4. Filters shall be contained in a standard air handling section and withdrawal/access shall be as indicated
U. Activated carbon filters
1. Activated carbon filters shall comprise cells containing activated carbon granules selected to suit the
contaminants as indicated elsewhere.
2. Evidence as to both efficiency and adsorption capacity of the adsorbent at the indicated levels shall be
submitted to the CA for acceptance.
3. Air filters shall comprise of absorbent bed filled with uniform thickness of activated carbon granules,
constructed to prevent settlement and voids do not occur.
4. The media shall be of a disposable or reactivated type as indicated and housed in a permanent
corrosion resistant holding frame. Cell construction shall include provision to prevent migration of the
filter media.
5. Each filter assembly shall include two detachable test sections for use in predicting the service life of
the filter assembly. The test sections shall be exposed to full air flow and be removed and replaced by
a spare after 6- and 12-months operation and returned to the manufacturer for analysis of saturation
and report on service life remaining. The Contractor shall be responsible for this removal and
replacement during the defects liability period and shall include for the spares, the manufacturer's
costs for the analysis/report shall be included in the contract cost. Allowance shall be made for
housing the test sections as part of the filter assembly.
6. All metallic parts shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
7. Filters shall be contained in a standard air handling section and shall have withdrawal facilities as
indicated.
V. Filter Manometers
1. All filters shall be provided with an inclined manometer or differential pressure gauge which shall
indicate the actual pressure drop across the filter.
2. The filter clean and dirty pressures shall be indicated.
3. Where dirty filter monitoring is provided, each filter shall have a pressure sensor to indicate to the
control panel or BMS, as appropriate, filter dirty conditions.
2.8 WATER COIL SECTION:
A. Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full design air flow is evenly dispersed across the full coil
face area.
B. Coil design and sizing shall be based on figures obtained from performance tests described in BS 5141 for
cooling and heating coils.
C. Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before leaving the
manufacturer's works. An independently witnessed test certificate shall be issued to the CA for each coil.
Each coil shall be indelibly marked with the details of the test.
D. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere the maximum water coil pressure drop shall be as stated below;
1. Cooling – 20Kpa
2. Heating – 15kpa
E. Coils shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works to a minimum of 1.5 times the working pressure
or 8 bar gauge pressure whichever is the greater.
F. The flow and return battery connections shall be labelled and the air flow direction shall be indelibly
G. Coils shall be mounted in the unit casing so that they can be removed from the side without dismantling
the entire unit.
H. Coils with minor damage to fins shall be combed straight. Coils with extensive fin damage will not be
acceptable and shall be replaced.
I. Flow and return headers shall be arranged to ensure equal flow through all tubes. Provision shall be made
for expansion and contraction of the tubes and for effective venting and draining of the coil. Each coil
shall be provided with a full bore dirt pocket with drain valve on the lower connection. J. Coils
shall be arranged in sections to facilitate removal.
J. The tube and fin spacing shall be arranged to ensure maximum heat transfer efficiency with minimum coil
depth and air resistance.
K. Tube wall thickness and coil construction shall be suitable for the system operating pressures and
temperatures.
L. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere coils shall be manufactured from 16mm (OD) copper tube with a
minimum wall thickness of 0.4mm and a 35mm pitch.
M. Connections up to and including 50 mm diameter for water pressures up to 350 kPa shall be screwed to BS
EN 10226-1. Larger sizes and connections for pressures over 350 kPa shall be flanged to BS EN 1092.
Connections shall be clear of coil casings with disconnection joints positioned to permit full withdrawal and
removal of coils without extensive dismantling of adjacent pipework, ductwork or other equipment.
N. Coils shall be mounted in a mild steel framed casing having a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm. Casings shall
be hot dip galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 after manufacture. The casing shall be of
adequate strength for the size of the coil.
O. Coils shall comprise solid drawn seamless copper tubes unless otherwise stated. Copper tube shall comply
with BS EN 12451 and have suitable wall thickness for the pressure application. Headers shall be either
copper or steel as stated elsewhere.
P. Fins shall make firm and continuous contact with the primary tubes and be constructed from aluminium or
copper as stated elsewhere and have a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall be of the “rippled or
louvered” type to suit the air flow requirements and be spaced at distance to suit the specified
performance of the coils.
Q. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and removable
plates.
R. Unless otherwise indicated each coil shall be provided with a self-sealing combined pressure and
temperature test point on the flow and return. All coils shall include an air vent and drain plug. T. Coils
shall be of the cartridge type.
S. Access Panel:
1. Removable panels shall be assembled at coil section casing walls.
2. Panels shall be bolted externally for air-tightness, easy removal and quick reassembly to facilitate
access for servicing and maintenance.
T. Chilled Water
1. Cooling coil face velocities shall not exceed 2.0 m/s and the resistance to airflow shall not exceed
125Pa unless otherwise indicated.
2. The air velocity across the coil shall be such that free water shall not be carried over from the coil to
the air-stream.
3. Unless otherwise indicated coils shall be constructed from copper tubes with continuous aluminium
fins pressure bonded to the tubes through mechanical expansion and all housed in stainless steel
frames. Fins shall have solid drawn spacing collars.
4. All coils shall be provided with durable flexible epoxy polymer coating to protect the coil fins from
corrosion due to salt and sand laden air. The coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation
and have a uniform dry film thickness between 0.8 to 1.2mil on all surface areas including the fin
edges. Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to no less than 1000 hours salt spray
per ASTM B117-90. The coil selection shall include the de-rating of the output due to the coating and
the coating shall have a minimum 15-year guarantee.
5. Cooling coil casings shall incorporate an insulated watertight drain tray complete with drain
connection. Trays and drains shall be arranged with longitudinal and cross gradients to ensure total
removal of all condensates. Drain trays shall be insulated from the factory with 12 mm thick closed cell
elastomeric foam rubber insulation
6. Unless otherwise indicated drain trays shall be fabricated from AISI 316 stainless steel of minimum
1mm thickness and be provided with a threaded drain outlet. The condensate drainpipe connection
through the unit casing shall be insulated from the factory with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric
foam rubber insulation and sealed with plastic grommet.
7. Large coils constructed in two horizontal sections they shall have separate connections/headers and
shall be assembled correctly to ensure that the top section condensate flows evenly onto the lower
section. Where this is not possible a separate condensate baffle/catch plate shall be installed with a
separate drain to the coil drain pan.
8. Unless otherwise indicated, PVC eliminator blades retained in galvanised steel plate shall be provided
after each coil and shall be located such that any carry over will collect and fall into the drain pan.
Eliminator sections shall be positioned to avoid damage from adjacent heater batteries and shall be of
materials unaffected by such heat. An access door shall be provided between the coil and eliminator
plates.
U. Heating Coils
1. Heating coil face velocities shall not exceed 3 m/s and the resistance to airflow shall not exceed 65Pa
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, heat transfer surfaces shall consist of multiple seamless copper tubes with
extended surface of aluminium fin plates having solid drawn collars through which the tubes pass.
the coating shall have a minimum 15-year guarantee.
4. The assembled fin blocks shall be supported with galvanised sheet steel framing, having end plates
with accurately formed collars for tube support, allowing tube movement during expansion and
contraction without abrasion or chafing. The fin block tubes shall be extended and brazed into
seamless copper headers.
5. Flow and return headers shall be arranged so as to provide reverse return water flow and with the
return header at the air inlet face of the coil. Return bends shall be of copper of the same diameter as
the tubes and shall be brazed into the expanded fin block tube ends.
6. Large coils shall be split horizontally for ease of handling and installation.
7. Coil blocks shall be insulated and fitted with removable galvanised sheet steel metal enclosures.
V. Cooling Coils - Direct Expansion
1. Unless otherwise indicated coils shall be constructed from continuous aluminium/plate fins,
mechanically bonded to seamless refrigerant quality copper tubes.
the coating shall have a minimum 15 year guarantee.
coil depth and air resistance.
4. Direct-expansion refrigerant cooler coil materials shall be selected to minimise electrolytic action.
5. Coils shall be mounted in the unit casing so that they can be removed from the side without
dismantling the entire unit.
6. Refrigerant circuitry shall be designed to ensure equal distribution of refrigeration to each circuit
across the whole face of the coil.
7. Return or suction connections shall be arranged to ensure complete drainage of oil in the evaporator.
8. The design of the refrigerant passages in direct expansion type evaporators shall be such that any oil
present is always carried back to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity reduction.
9. The complete evaporator coil shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works to twice the
working pressure. After testing, the coils shall be dehydrated under vacuum and charged with nitrogen
before sealing.
10. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.0 m/s unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
11. Evaporator and refrigeration shall be compatible with regard to duty and capacity control.
12. Evaporators shall be dehydrated and charged with an inert gas and sealed after manufacture.
13. Cooling coil casings shall incorporate an insulated watertight drain tray complete with drain
connection. Trays and drains shall be arranged with longitudinal and cross gradients to ensure total
removal of all condensate. Drain trays shall be insulated from the factory with 12 mm thick closed cell
elastomeric foam rubber insulation
1mm thickness and be provided with a threaded drain outlet. The condensate drain pipe connection
through the unit casing shall be insulated from the factory with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric
foam rubber insulation and sealed with plastic grommet.
15. Intermediate drain trays shall be provided where the coil height exceeds 1metre and for each
additional 1metre of coil height.
16. On large coils constructed in two horizontal sections they shall have separate connections headers and
shall be assembled correctly to ensure that the top section condensate flows evenly onto the lower
section. Where this is not possible a separate condensate baffle/catch plate shall be installed with a
separate condensate baffle/catch plate shall be installed with a separate drain to the coil drain pan.
Eliminator sections shall be positioned to avoid damage from adjacent heater batteries
18. and shall be of materials unaffected by such heat. An access door shall be provided between the coil
and eliminator plates.
19. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
W. Electrical heater batteries
1. Electrical heater batteries shall consist of a number of heating elements of the enclosed type mounted
in a sheet steel casing. Elements shall be so arranged to permit removal without dismantling
2. Unless otherwise indicated the resistance to the air flow through the battery shall not exceed 25 Pa
and the face velocity shall not exceed 6m/s nor be less than 2m/s.
3. An isolator and a hazard warning sign clearly indicating the operating voltage shall be fitted
immediately adjacent to the heater access opening.
4. In the proximity of hot areas, the electrical wiring insulation shall be suitable for the maximum
temperature.
5. The connections from each element shall be extended to a terminal box housed in an accessible
position with conduit/cable entry provision. They will be secured to the terminal box with airtight
glands and will be linked with either copper bus-bars or terminals as necessary to achieve step control
requirements stated elsewhere.
6. The number of elements in the heater shall be the same as or a multiple of the number of steps in the
controller. All heaters and heater sections of more than 3kW loading shall be balanced over three
phases and the complete heater bank shall be arranged for balanced operation on a three phase, four-
wire system.
7. The elements shall be equally spaced over the open duct area.
8. The whole unit will be housed in a casing manufactured to the same dimensions as the air handling
unit.
9. Each electrical heater battery shall be complete with a manually reset thermal cut-out that provides an
audible or visual alarm signal on high temperature as indicated elsewhere.
10. Unless otherwise indicated, the control of electrical heater batteries, except for remote boosters, shall
be interlocked with the system fan motor starter and an air flow sensing device to ensure that the
heater operates only when the fan is running and air flow is established.
11. Electrical heater batteries which are installed as boosters in branch ducts shall each have a local air
flow sensing device to ensure that the heater operates when air flow is established.
2.9 CONDENSATE DRAINS
A. Provide condensate drains to all cooling coils, humidifier sections and recuperator sections of the air
handling units.
B. Condensate drains shall be run in a safe manner to discharge over an appropriate gully or to a sump as
indicated.
C. Connections shall be made by the Contractor, with glass "U" traps having a water seal depth of not less
than twice the fan static pressure, together with a tapping for maintaining the water seal. Where necessary
the trap shall be protected against accidental damage. D. The drains shall discharge into a tundish.
D. Drains on pans under negative pressure are to have the outlet positioned low enough to prevent
condensation being held in the drip tray.
E. Where drains have to run across a walkway the Contractor shall provide a permanent step over. Where
possible this should be avoided.
F. Drains shall comply with recommendations in CIBSE Technical Memorandum TM13 and HSE L8.
2.10 2.10 HUMIDIFIERS
A. Steam Humidifiers
1. Humidification shall be achieved by the use of dry sterile steam generated by an automatic steam
humidifier selected to meet the duties as stated elsewhere. For the avoidance of doubt the humidifier
shall be selected to meet the final commissioned duty of the AHU inclusive of any use of the 10%
additional spare capacity of the fan duty described elsewhere in this specification.
2. Distributor pipes shall be positioned to ensure equal mixing across the airway. In no circumstances
shall the distributor pipes be less than 75% of the width of the airway and shall be designed for the air
handling unit section in which they are installed.
3. Injection pipes for introduction of dry steam from the unit into the air-stream shall be fabricated in
stainless steel.
4. The manufacturer’s recommendations regarding unobstructed space downstream of the humidifier

shall be adhered to.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, the control of humidifying plant shall be interlocked with the system fan
motor starter and a local air flow sensing device to ensure that the humidifying plant operates only
when the fan is running and full air flow in the humidifying section is established.
6. The unit shall be arranged to fail safe on interruption of the water or electrical supply.
7. Unless otherwise indicated the unit shall be supplied with a fully modulating control system operating
between 10% and 100%. Below 10% output shall be on-off only.
8. The unit shall be supplied with a control system which provides compatibility with the overall control
system. Provision for remote indication shall be provided to the main control panel or BMS as
indicated.
9. Packaged electric generator units shall be contained in sheet metal stove enamelled cabinets for wall
or floor mounting. Cabinets shall be provided as two separate compartments, one containing the
boiler and the other the controls. Casings shall be insulated as necessary to prevent accidental contact
with hot surfaces
10. Casings shall be provided with lockable front access doors permitting full access to either
compartment. Sufficient ventilation shall be provided to prevent overheating
11. Drainage, including unit drains, shall be arranged to discharge safely and incorporate an air break.
12. The unit shall be the electrode boiler type steam humidifier complete with stainless steel steam
distributor pipes within the humidifier section of the air handling unit. The electrode shall be accessible
for cleaning and not to be the disposable type.
13. The boilers outlet shall be connected by steam hoses up to 2 m in length to steam distributor pipes in
the AHU.
14. The unit shall be designed for connection to a standard water supply with no necessary water
treatment.
15. The unit shall have the following connections:
a. Steam outlet pipe(s)
b. Cold water connection with solenoid feed valve and strainer
c. Drain connection with solenoid drain/blow-down valve cited with manual override, installed into
manifold and to building by others
16. A suitable sized cold water supply shall be connected to the unit which shall comply with the Water
Supply Regulations.
17. The humidifier shall be complete with disposable scale collection bag and shall have impulse flushing
to minimise sludge build-up.
18. Steam injection pipes/hoses shall be thermal insulated where installed outside of the ductwork or air
handling units.
19. The units shall be suitable for connecting to a 3 phase and neutral electrical supply. Unit terminals
shall be shrouded.
20. The control board shall have facility for remote indication including "change of scale collector bag".
B. Adiabatic humidifiers
1. The humidifier shall be selected to meet the duties as stated elsewhere.
2. For the avoidance of doubt the humidifier shall be selected to meet the final commissioned duty of the
AHU inclusive of any use of the additional spare capacity of the fan duty described elsewhere in this
specification.
3. The installation and humidifiers shall comply with:
a. Water Bylaws Scheme and must be WRAS approved.
b. European CE Directives
c. Health & Safety hygiene standards including the CIBSE TM 13 and EN 13779:200
4. The water supply and distribution system must be designed, assembled and operated with regard to
the risk of legionella and comply with HSE standards.
5. The humidifier shall be capable of modulating and controlling the humidity to ±2%rRH subject to
temperature control.
6. Distributor pipes shall be positioned to ensure equal mixing across the airway. In no circumstances
shall the distributor pipes be less than 75% of the width of the airway and shall be designed for the air
handling unit section in which they are installed.
7. The manufacturer’s recommendations regarding unobstructed space downstream of the humidifier

shall be adhered to.
8. Unless otherwise indicated, the control of humidifying plant shall be interlocked with the system fan
motor starter and a local air flow sensing device to ensure that the humidifying plant operates only
when the fan is running and full air flow in the humidifying section is established.
9. The unit shall be arranged to fail safe on interruption of the water or electrical supply.
10. Unless otherwise indicated the unit shall be supplied with a fully modulating control system operating
between 10% and 100%. Below 10% output shall be on-off only.
11. The unit shall be supplied with a control system which provides compatibility with the overall control
system. Provision for remote indication shall be provided to the main control panel or BMS as
indicated.
12. Manifold shall be a factory assembled units consisting of air and water piping and atomising heads.
The nozzles shall be fully assembled on stainless steel manifolds with compressed air blow down and
pre-commissioned.
13. The nozzle shall be robustly constructed for a long service life and guaranteed for 10 years operation
and be guaranteed to be drip free atomisation.
14. The nozzle shall be constructed from solid brass and plated with polished chrome to resist corrosion,
allow easy cleaning and not support microbial growth.
15. The humidifier system shall be designed and constructed from non-corrosive materials for hygienic
operation with accessibility for easy dismantling and cleaning.
16. At start up the humidifier system shall automatically purge the supply water line direct to drain to
ensure a clean, fresh cold water supply is used for humidification.
17. At shutdown the air shall automatically ‘run-on’ to ensure all nozzles are fully purged of water and the
humidifier shall automatically drain whenever not in operation.
18. During periods of low use or no humidity demand the system shall automatically run flush cycles to
prevent water stagnation. Timings and frequency shall be programmable for optimum water
consumption and convenience.
19. The humidification control panel shall be at least IP54 rated as standard, with separated electrical and
water compartments and be powder coat painted. Casings shall be provided with lockable front access
doors permitting full access to all compartments and with sufficient ventilation to prevent overheating
20. The air-lines and water lines shall include automatic pressure regulating valves, pressure gauges, water
modulating valves, solenoid valves and pressure switches.
21. The units shall be suitable for connecting to the works electrical supply.
22. The electrical compartment shall have secondary panel cover and all terminals shall be shrouded.
23. The humidifier shall be supplied with a programmable microprocessor controller including 5 year
memory battery back-up, analogue output short circuit proof wiring and real time clock.
24. The unit shall include a service due hour counter and real time hour counter to ensure automatic
maintenance alerts
25. The unit shall be designed for connection to a 22mm water supply unless otherwise stated.
26. The system shall incorporate an automatic blow-down technique to empty the water lines of all liquid
on shut down to prevent freezing
27. The system shall be capable of interface with the BMS / controls system / control panel with the
necessary monitoring and control functions as indicated elsewhere. The Contractor shall be
responsible to ensure co-ordination between all parties.
2.11 HEAT RECOVERY
A. Plate heat exchanger
1. Plate to plate heat exchangers shall be of the diagonal flow type manufactured from separating
aluminium plates with a PVC coating or stainless steel plates as indicated elsewhere.
2. The unit shall be adequately sealed to prevent leakage or cross contamination.
3. The exchanger shall be mounted over a stainless steel removable drain tray.
4. Where indicated face and bypass dampers shall be fitted and shall be suitable for motorisation.
5. The minimum thermal efficiency shall not be less than that stated elsewhere.
6. The heat exchanger elements shall be designed to withstand the external and differential pressures
without deformation.
B. Run Around Coils
1. Run around coils shall comply with the requirements as stated for cooling coils stated elsewhere.
2. The AHU manufacturer shall provide a complete package consisting of pipework, circulating pump and
expansion vessel.
3. The pipework shall be arranged to provide full flow through the supply coil at all times.
4. Pumps shall be constructed with cast iron bodies, bronze impellers and mechanical seals driven by
totally enclosed or drip proof fan cooled motor suitable for single phase 230V electricity supply. An
isolating valve and strainer shall be provided on the inlet and an isolating valve on the discharge.
together with a 15 mm safety valve on the pump discharge, set to discharge at a pressure of 5 bar
unless indicated otherwise.
6. The expansion vessel shall be of steel construction with internal flexible rubber diaphragm, precharged
with inert gas.
C. Thermal Wheel Heat Exchanger
1. Rotating regenerative air-to-air heat recovery units shall transfer sensible or total heat as indicated
elsewhere between the exhaust and intake airstreams.
2. The heat recovery wheels will be designed and manufactured to maximise the sensible and latent heat
recovery and include a desiccant coating to ensure that the latent heat recovery obtained.
3. The heat wheel shall include the following:-
a. Integral purge section
b. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section
c. Supported rotor on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings.
4. Tapered roller bearing for horizontal mounting of wheels
5. Heat wheels shall consist of a rigid mild steel casing protected against corrosion, containing a
sectioned wheel composed of aluminium foil or other indicated heat exchange media, treated with a
coating having the necessary hygroscopic properties where total heat extraction is specified.
6. The coating or the heat exchange media shall not support bacteria, fungi or mould growth and shall
be coated to prohibit corrosion.
7. The media shall be easily cleanable and dry particles up to 800 microns, unless stated otherwise, shall
pass freely through the media.
8. The unit shall be provided with an adjustable purge sector designed to limit cross contamination to
less than 0.04 % of the exhaust air-stream concentration. This media shall be rigidly held in place.
9. The wheel shall be certified by an independent test laboratory for cross contamination using tracer gas
SF6 or equivalent.
10. The rotor shall be speed controlled via an inverter allowing a turn down ratio as indicated and shall be
suitable for interfacing with the BMS as indicated elsewhere.
11. Provision shall be made for adjustment of drive belt or drive chain tension.
12. Thermal wheel heat exchangers shall have a minimum thermal efficacy of 70%.
13. The complete wheel and motor drive shall be mounted within an air handling unit section. Access
doors shall be located on each side of the heat recovery unit in the adjacent intake and exhaust
ductwork.
14. The maximum rotation speed shall be 20 rpm and maximum face velocity shall be 2.5 m/s.
15. An integral factory mounted control panel shall be provided wired to the motor with air stream
thermostat and manual motor starter for field wiring; with pilot light indication of rotor rotation and
provisions for setting maximum and minimum speed.
16. Changeover Control:- Electronic automatic summer changeover system for field mounting of room
and outdoor air temperature sensors, to provide maximum rotor speed when air temperature is less
than outdoor air temperature.
17. Rotation Detection: - Electronic control module, electromagnetic sensor, and iron shuttle factory wired
and mounted, with alarm bell for field wiring and mounting, and remote alarm capability.
D. Heat pipes (wrap around type)
1. General
a. Heat pipes shall be included within the AHU and wrapped around the main cooling coil. The wrap-
around heat pipes pre-cool the fresh/return air allowing more of the cooling coil surface to be
utilized for the removal of moisture. The dehumidified air is then passively reheated by the heat
pipe to the supply condition.
b. Heat pipes shall comprise, a precool fin block upstream of the main cooling coil linked to a reheat
fin block downstream of the cooling coil by means of ‘wrap-around’ pipes.
c. All coils shall be provided with durable flexible epoxy polymer coating to protect the coil fins from
corrosion due to salt and sand laden air. The coating process shall ensure complete coil
encapsulation and have a uniform dry film thickness between 0.8 to 1.2mil on all surface areas
including the fin edges. Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to no less than
1000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90. The coil selection shall include the derating of the
output due to the coating and the coating shall have a minimum 15 year guarantee.
2. Fins
a. The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall be of the
continuous plate type to maximize the external surface area. The fins shall be of the louvered type
to optimize the airside heat transfer and spaced at such a distance as required by the conditions
specified elsewhere.
3. Tubes
a. Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C106 for heat exchanger use. Tube
diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface to enhance the internal surface area and
prevent pooling of liquid. The number of rows of tubes shall be selected to suit the application.
Multiple row heat pipes shall have tubes in a staggered, equilateral pattern to optimize the airside
heat transfer.
4. Casing
a. Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The casing shall
incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates around both the precool and reheat heat pipe
blocks. Cover boxes shall be provided around the wrap-around pipes both to protect the exposed
pipes and to rigidly join the two sections. Extra sheet metal shall be provided to ensure rigidity
during manufacture and transport.
5. Working Fluid
a. The refrigerant shall be R134a and the heat pipe circuits shall be factory charged and hermetically
sealed with the calculated weight of refrigerant.
6. Circuitry
a. Heat pipes shall be formed from an array of complete loops such that the working fluid flows
around the loop in only one direction i.e. liquid and vapour flow in the same direction to ensure
that returning liquid is not entrained by the vapour.
b. There shall be a multitude of loops in the height of the heat pipe and each loop shall be
individually charged. Heat pipes with header assemblies containing a single circuit are not suitable
as a single leak will render the entire heat pipe inoperative.
c. When multiple row heat pipes are used the rows shall be connected together in a counter flow
orientation to optimize the performance of the heat pipe. Rows shall not be manifolded together.
d. Heat pipe loops shall be arranged to slope down to the precool side to allow gravity assisted
liquid return to maximize the internal heat transfer.
7. Performance
a. Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified conditions when subject to the air
volumes given in the specification. Heat pipe performance shall be independently type tested and
certified in line with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 pt1 / European Standards EN
305 & 306 / American Standards ARI 410 for testing and rating of heat exchangers. All software
used to predict the performance of heat pipes shall be based upon the results of these
independent tests.
8. Installation
a. The heat pipe shall be designed to fit around the main cooling coil and its dimensions shall be
selected so as to allow this. Once installed within the AHU both the heat pipe and cooling coil
shall be blanked-off to ensure that there is no air bypass around the fin blocks of either the heat
pipe or cooling coil. A drip tray shall be provided below the heat pipe/cooling coil as specified
elsewhere.
9. Independent Test Report
a. The heat pipe should have a third party independent test report conducted by a certified
laboratory.
10. Manufacturing Experience
a. The heat pipe manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in manufacturing of
heat pipes and must have heat pipes commissioned for a minimum period of 5 years.
11. Selection Criteria
a. The number of rows and fins spacing shall be selected to achieve the most optimum performance
of heat pipe throughout the year, based on the design criteria stated elsewhere.
2.12 FANS
A. Fans shall have the duty as stated elsewhere when operating at a maximum of 50Hz.
B. All fan resistances stated have been calculated based on a particular selection of equipment. The final
selection of plant duties by the Contractor, such as filters, coils, attenuators, diffusers etc., and the actual
ductwork fabrication drawings may produce different pressure drops and therefore the Contractor shall
recalculate the total system resistances based on the final selection of plant and revise the fan resistance as
necessary to achieve the design air volume flow.
C. Similarly, if the fan power requirements and sound power level changes, the Contractor shall reselect the
necessary motor size, wiring and suitable attenuation to achieve the designed noise rating level stated
elsewhere at no additional cost.
D. Selection of fans shall take into account the factors influencing noise levels, including fan speed, velocities,
inlet and discharge conditions.
E. Any allowances required to meet manufacturing and testing tolerances shall be included.
F. Outlet velocities shall not exceed 10 m/s unless indicated otherwise.
G. Fan drives or impellers shall be arranged to allow a 10% variation in airflow either volume flow rate or
pressure drop for final site adjustment as agreed with the CA. A set of replacement belts and pulleys shall
be provided and fitted where required at no additional cost to the contract.
H. All fans shall be tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 5801:2008, BS 848-1:2007 and BS ISO 13347. Fan
impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the works of the manufacturer and test certificates
issued to the CA.
I. Manufacturer’s test certificates, acoustic data and fan curves shall be submitted to the CA. Fan curves shall
indicate performance under all likely operating conditions.
J. Fan resistances shall take account of pressure drop across filters in dirty conditions.
K. Centrifugal fans shall be belt-driven unless otherwise stated.
L. Fans shall generally be of the high efficiency (minimum 75% efficiency) backward curved bladed type,
double inlet double width and for casings shall be of the lock-form casing type, all welds heavy sheet steel,
or split flanged type on the larger fans, adequately braced and stiffened with steel angle with the bottom
of the discharge outlet level with the axis of the impeller.
M. A bolted on access door shall be provided on the fan scroll to allow inspection and cleaning of the
impeller. Inlet eyes shall be of the curved aerofoil profile to streamline the airflow into the impeller and of
adequate diameter to allow withdrawal of impeller without splitting the fan scroll split cased fans shall be
assembled on site by a qualified millwright to ensure that the fan set is correctly assembled and aligned. A
drain plug shall be fitted at the base of the fan scroll.
N. The fan outlet shall be a spigot connection to suit connections to the ductwork system flexible connections
within the fan section, or externally, depending on the anti-vibration requirements stated elsewhere.
O. The fan supporting side frame shall be constructed in angle frame or steel plate and shall be fixed to the
fan casing to provide the required angle for the fan discharge arrangement shown elsewhere.
P. Impellers shall be of welded steel constructed on a case steel hub suitable bored and key-wayed for
mounting the shaft and shall have high grade steel plate aerofoil blades or stitched welded to a rigid back
plate. The impeller shaft shall be of solid high grade steel adequately sized such that its first critical speed
is not reached before the design fan speed is obtained. The fan shaft shall be supported at each side of
the impeller with either sealed for life bearing or double roller bearings.
Q. The shaft shall be connected to the motor drive by cast steel machined pulleys, key-wayed and fixed onto
the far and drive shaft by an Approved manner and a multi Vee belt drive arrangement complete with a
protective wire guard. The motor shall be a TEFC type mounted on adjustable sliding rails.
R. The fan casing, side frames, bearing supports and motor shall all be mounted on a heavy steel one piece
channel on hollow section base frame and supported on independent spring type anti-vibration
mountings, within the fan section as selected by the AHU manufacturer and in accordance with anti-
vibration details contained elsewhere in this specification.
S. The fan sections shall be complete with an approved reinforced steel base to facilitate maintenance within
the fan section.
T. Fan Construction:
1. Blades of the fans shall be from galvanized steel.
2. Backward fan's blades shall be treated with epoxy paint.
3. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced within fan operating speed in compliance to DIN
IS0 Standard 1940.
4. Standard fan bearings shall be "eccentric clamp bearing" type, single row ball bearing, mounted in
pressed steel housing, pre-lubricated and sealed for life.
5. Reinforced fan bearings shall be "self-aligning double rows ball bearing", mounted in cast iron housing
and re-greaseable.
6. Bearing's nominal life expectancy shall be 40,000 L10 operating hours (in accordance with DIN ISO 281
Section-1). Rated bearing life can reach up to 200,000 L10 hours.
U. Belt drives
1. Belt drives shall comply with BS 3790 and be capable of transmitting at least the rated power output of
the driving motor at any stage of operation with one belt removed. Unless otherwise indicated, not
less than two belts per drive shall be used and all multi-belt drives shall use matched sets. Belts shall
be of rubber and fibre V section unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pulleys shall be correctly aligned in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3. Where duplicate motors are provided and fixed, the spare motor shall be complete with an adjusting
device to allow belt tensioning and shall be in all respects ready for operation. The centre-to-centre
dimensions between the common driven pulley and the duplicate driving pulleys shall be the same.
4. Provision shall be made to permit drive alignment and adjustment of belt tension.
V. Guards
1. All power transmission shafts, belts and pulley drives shall be guarded and be in compliance with PD
5304.
2. Fan guards shall be purpose-made by the air handling unit manufacturer or to the approval of the air
handling unit manufacturer and be constructed from galvanised or plastic coated steel wire.
3. Guards shall be installed to prevent inadvertent contact with dangerous parts of machinery and the
mesh size and/or the location of the guard shall prevent finger contact with any enclosed danger
point.
4. Construction and installation shall ensure strength and rigidity and it shall not be possible to remove
any guard or access panel without the aid of a tool.
5. Removable access panels shall be provided to permit tachometer readings to be made of motor and
drive shafts and belt tension to be tested.
6. Guards shall be designed for the extreme motor position.
7. For duplicate motor installations, the guard provided shall be designed to protect both drives. All
fixings and mountings shall be installed to facilitate change-over of the drive.
W. Fan Motors and drives
1. All motors shall comply with BS 4999, BS 5000, and BS EN 60034 and shall be of such a size and type
to start and drive the equipment under normal conditions of service without overloading.
2. Where mounted in external air, or highly moisture laden atmosphere, they shall be weatherproof or
separately protected and shall be a minimum of IP55.
3. Motors in hazardous atmospheres shall be flameproof, certified to BS EN 60079.
4. Motors shall comply with other relevant sections of this specification.
5. Fan motor shall be suitable to operate with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
6. Standard fan's motor shall be a Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled type (TEFC).
7. Motor's frame shall be from aluminium or cast iron.
8. Motor shall be able to operate at 50°C operating temperature unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
9. All motors shall be provided with thermal overload protection "Normally Closed Thermostat" (PTO) as
a standard accessory.
10. Nameplates shall be positioned so that they are readable from normal access positions.
11. Motors arranged for automatic starting shall have a label of durable material, not less than 150mm x
100mm in size, permanently affixed in a prominent position and having, in clearly inscribed characters,
the legend:
a. Danger - This motor is automatically controlled and may start without warning. Isolate before
inspection.
12. All final motor selections shall be agreed with the CA prior to any equipment being ordered
13. Vee-belt drives shall comply with BS 3790. A minimum of two belts shall be provided and the drive
sized so that the rated output of the motor can be transmitted with one belt removed. A complete set
of spare belts shall be provided.
X. Fan and Motor Mounting Frame:
1. The fan and motor shall be installed on a common base frame.
2. The base frame shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel.
3. Motor rail shall be a slide rail type for flexible belt tensioning.
4. The base frame shall be isolated from floor panel with anti-vibration spring isolator.
5. The fan shall be isolated to discharge panel with flexible fan connection.
Y. Variable speed drives
1. Variable speed drives shall be provided where indicated.
2. Variable speed motors, drives, control gear and accessories shall be selected by a specialist variable
speed drive manufacturer as a complete package. The specialist shall ensure that the unit is capable of
providing sufficient power and torque to enable the driven unit to start and operate properly
throughout the speed range. The drive shall be capable of providing the additional capacity as
indicated elsewhere.
3. The system shall be capable of interface with the BMS / controls system / control panel with the
necessary monitoring and control functions as indicated elsewhere. The Contractor shall be
responsible to ensure co-ordination between all parties.
4. The drive manufacturer, controls specialist and commissioning engineers shall co-ordinate the setting
to work of the variable speed drives.
5. Equipment shall be provided to maintain radio frequency interference and mains harmonic distortion
within acceptable levels as indicated elsewhere.
6. Drives shall be the inverter type. Provision shall be made for the controllers to be by-passed in the
event of failure and the equipment manually operated at full speed. Inverters shall be pulse width
modulation type, complete with short circuit, earth fault, over voltage, under voltage and over
temperature protection. Inverter drives shall provide soft start facilities.
7. Motors shall be selected with sufficient capacity to allow operation at any point in their curve with
overheating limited so that the motor remains within its insulation classification.
8. Inverters shall be adequately ventilated, by natural means if practical, so that the temperature remains
within the normal operating range.
9. Noise and vibration emission from the equipment shall be treated to ensure that the system complies
with the acoustic and vibration requirements stated elsewhere.
10. Inverters shall have the following characteristics:
a. Starting current not to exceed full load starting current
b. Near unit power factor throughout the speed range without the use of power factor correction
equipment
c. Independently adjustable ramp control for increase/decrease speeds
d. Capable of connecting to a reverse wind milling fan without causing tripping and able to return to
correct speed
e. Local control operation capability
f. Facility to set all operating parameters with door closed and without the use of additional
instrumentation
g. Provide the following protection:
h. Motor phase to phase and earth fault
i. Over voltage and under voltage
j. Inverter and motor overheat
k. Stall protection
l. Loss of control signal and auxiliary control voltage
m. Current limit by electronic shutdown prior to fuse action
n. Provide digital readout for :
o. Output frequency
p. Hand or auto mode
q. Motor current
r. Torque
s. Power
t. DC link voltage
u. Temperature
v. Fault memory
w. Provide remote monitoring of all operating conditions and full control capability
11. Enclosure construction shall provide protection of appropriate IP rating to BS EN 60529.
12. Inverters shall be CE marked to meet EMC requirements.
2.13 NAMEPLATE
A. Each Air Handling Unit shall be complete with a unique identification reference label (as indicated in
project documents) fitted at the manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be clearly visible
through the wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as approved by the CA prior to ordering
and shall be utilised in the record documentation. In addition to this a securely attach nameplate on each
fan coil unit showing manufacturer name, serial, model number etc. is required.
2.14 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: In addition to the testing requirements stated elsewhere, standard factory tests shall be
performed on each unit and shall be completed, and factory certified. The fans shall be factory run tested
to ensure structural integrity and proper RPM. All electrical circuits shall be tested to ensure correct
operation before shipment of the unit. Units shall pass factory quality control and testing and be
thoroughly cleaned prior to shipment.
B. All sections of the units, including those that are split for shipment, shall be thoroughly cleaned externally
and internally prior to wrapping for shipment. All scratches to painted surfaces both inside and out shall be
cleaned and repainted and the interior of the unit shall be completely vacuumed to remove all dust, metal
shavings or other debris. Wrap each section shipment with suitable protection to ensure delivery free from
deterioration.
C. Witness of Factory Standard Tests: As stated elsewhere the manufacturer shall include a provision for the
witnessing of the standard factory tests as described above and inspection during assembly of each air
handling unit, fresh air handling unit and heat recovery unit specified for the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All Air Handling Units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Units shall be installed on concrete frames or steel sub frames as indicated.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, there shall be a clearance of at least 150mm between the underside of the AHU
and its base or the plant room floor. The bottom of the unit shall be located at such a height that an
adequate water seal, to suit the air pressure inside the unit, can be provided on coil drains.
D. Supplementary steelwork necessary to support the air handling unit shall be designed, supplied and
installed by the Contractor. The steelwork shall be galvanised after manufacture and painted to match the
air handling unit.
E. Pipework and electrical cable entry points to the unit shall be sealed after installation to maintain the
airtightness of the unit.
F. Valves and strainers on all pipework connections shall be pipeline size, not connection size.
G. External connections passing through panels shall be provided with flexible air tight gaskets.
H. Airtight sleeves shall be provided for control sensors, instruments and test holes
I. The discharge ductwork connection shall be suitable to maintain the aerodynamic performance of the fan.
J. Install all components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
K. Units shall be installed plumb and level.
L. All units shall be installed and securely anchored on concrete housekeeping pads.
M. Equipment Start-Up
1. Provide certified factory trained and certified technician for start-up of all units in accordance with
manufacturer's procedures.
2. Coordinate all start-up activity with the CA, Engineer and Commissioning Authority. The Contractor
shall not start up or run the units without prior authorization from the CA. Unit shall be vacuumed
clean internally and externally at completion of construction and prior to starting of equipment.
3. Interior of unit shall also be wiped clean with a 50/ 50 IPA solution utilizing a non-shedding cloth.
4. Install all filters inside the unit prior to start-up and testing.
5. Replace all filters prior to practical completion as stated elsewhere.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of the specifications. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Valves and strainers on all pipework connections shall be pipeline size, not connection size.
2. Connect condensate drain to condensate drain line/system. Install condensate trap of adequate depth
to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B. Connect supply and return ducts to air handling units with flexible duct connectors as detailed above.
Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.
C. Ground equipment and wiring in accordance with requirements as stated elsewhere.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled

components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Prepare test
and inspection report.
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit
operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
A. A. Testing and Commissioning
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices.
4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Start-up Services
B. B. All air handling units shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to
handover.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide AHU manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide Site training for facility operating
staff on all aspects of the AHU’s including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault finding for
all types of AHU’s used on the project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 238123 – COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Close Control Unit (CCU): Indoor and outdoor units, humidifiers, heating coils, controls, and
accessories for computer room cooling and heating application.
C. Related Work Section and Documentation
D. General:
1. Computer room air conditioning units shall mean an assembly of packaged plant components to form
precision unit to maintain close control of the temperature and humidity within the rooms specified.
4. All computer room air conditioning units shall be fully assembled and tested at the manufacturer’s
works to demonstrate that all parameters are in compliance with the specification and performance
requirements. The results and a compliance statement shall be submitted to the CA prior to delivery
to site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all computer room air conditioning units,
indicating construction, dimensions, weights, performance and maintenance requirements.
2. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each computer room air conditioning unit.
a. Model number of unit.
b. Sensible and total cooling capacities
c. Sensible heat ratio (SHR)
d. Chilled water flow rates and temperatures
e. Entering and leaving air temperatures and humidities.
f. Unit water side pressure drop
g. Unit air flow and external static pressure
h. External static pressure
i. Unit sound power level @ 1.0m
j. Details of acoustic treatment to achieve the specified noise levels
k. Unit Energy Efficiency Rating (EER)
l. Filter performance
m. Heating capacity.
n. Humidifier capacity
o. Voltage and power consumption in kW for each unit.
p. Starting amp draw.
q. Rated load amp draw.
1. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every computer room air conditioning unit.
2. Certified drawings of floor stands and intake and discharge ductwork where specified
D. Test Reports:
1. All computer room air conditioning units shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
G. Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive
replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop Supplementary Product
H. Literature:
3. Spare Parts: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
a. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
b. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of computer
room air conditioning units for HVAC applications and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality
B. The manufacturer shall have a committed customer care and technical support team, complimented by a
dedicated service team providing a call out service within the country the computer room air conditioning
units are installed.
C. Computer room air conditioning unit manufacturers shall have a readily available service department
located to perform necessary repairs on short notice, within 24 hours to any emergency calls 7 days
per week.
D. Materials used in fire-rated assemblies shall bear the UL or other approved testing laboratory, Classification
marking.
and specified in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following
standards, codes and statutory documents.
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards including;
a. BS EN 14511 – Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages & heat pumps
b. All fans shall be tested in accordance with BS 848
c. All filters shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 779
d. BS 5141-1 – Specification for air heating and cooling coils, Method of testing for rating of cooling
coils.
2. BSRIA Guidance Note BG 5/2003 – Cooling solutions for IT
8. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM International Standards:
H. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose
and shall, where applicable, conform to the standards of and shall be approved from:
1. Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
2. Local By-laws and Regulations.
A. All computer room air conditioning units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at the
factory. Mark every unit with room location and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
B. Each computer room air conditioning unit shall have lifting lugs of shipping skid to allow for field rigging
and final placement.
C. Deliver units completely assembled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Scope of Work.
1. Supply and installation of Indoor and outdoor units, humidifiers, heating coils, cooling coils, controls,
and accessories for computer room cooling and heating application.
A. All computer room air conditioning units of the same type shall be through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. All computer room air conditioning units shall be specifically designed to provide precision control of the
room temperature and humidity, by automatically controlling and monitoring the cooling, heating,
humidification and de-humidification outputs.
C. All computer room air conditioning units shall have the performance and duty as stated elsewhere and
include any allowance required to meet manufacturing and testing tolerances.
D. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations regarding installation (including installation clearances),

operation, and maintenance.
E. All computer room air conditioning units shall have one of the following configurations as detailed in the
equipment schedules;
1. Single circuit chilled water
2. Dual circuit chilled water
3. Single circuit D-X (air cooled)
4. Dual circuit D-X (air cooled)
5. Dual circuit Chilled Water/D-X (air cooled)
F. Where dual circuit units are specified the units shall be provided with 2 independent systems each rated at
100% of the unit duty and in the event of a failure on one of the systems the stand-by system shall
automatically start and raise an alarm.
G. All dual circuit units shall be provided with dual power supply connections for resilience.
H. All computer room air conditioning units shall be designed for 24/7 operation
I. All computer room air conditioning units shall be sized to fit through a standard door unless otherwise
stated elsewhere.
2.3 2.3 MATERIALS
A. Cabinet and Frame
1. The cabinet shall be manufactured from an extruded aluminium frame with galvanised sheet steel
panels and be designed such that the maximum deflection of any span of the plan and/or frames does
not exceed the limit of 4 mm/m as per CEN2A.
2. All panels shall be completely removable to maximise access.
3. The aluminium frame and the galvanised steel panels shall be coated with epoxy baked powder paint
in a RAL colour as agreed with the CA.
4. The units shall be internally lined with thermal and acoustic insulation having a density of not less than
75kg/m³, providing an overall thermal transmission coefficient not to exceed 0.02W/m°C to prevent
condensation from occurring and achieve the specified acoustic performance.
5. The insulation shall be Class O fire resistant to BS 476 and shall not absorb moisture and must be rot
resistant.
6. Sound reduction effect of the panels (measure under test by R = delta L x 10 log S/A, where delta L is
the difference in sound pressure level across wall in dB the panel surface in M2 and A acoustic
absorption of the test room in m2) shall not be less than.
Mid- Hz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

frequency
Reduction dB 15 21 29 31 35 40
value
7. The front panel shall be full height and assembled on hinges for access and shall be with fast closing
lock. The hinge arrangement shall allow for door opening/removal for improved access
8. The fastening method, together with door seals and framework gaskets shall ensure good air tightness
able to comply with class B of Eurovent Leak Test Rates.
B. Fan Section
1. The unit fans shall be of the double width, double-inlet type utilising backward curved impellers with
direct drive centrifugal fans and integral EC motors. The fan shall be rigidly mounted on a base plate
isolated from the main structure to prevent vibration transmission, and shall be dynamically and
statically balanced.
2. All fans shall be speed controlled to match the room load demand and minimise energy unless stated
3. The fans shall be selected to deliver air at the required static pressures, whilst maintaining low noise
levels and low speeds.
4. EC Motor:
a. Motors shall be of direct current, electronically commutated type. Each motor shall have an
integral power supply; external power supplies are not acceptable.
b. All motors shall be complete with a transformer and suitable for single phase power supply (230
volts, 1 phase, 50Hz) up to 3.0KW or three phase power supply (400 volts, 3 phase 50Hz) for
motors over 3.0KW.
c. Filters are required to meet the harmonic requirements of BS EN 61000-3-2 and shall be supplied
and fully wired by the fan coil manufacturer. The motor should be insulated to Class B with the
enclosure to IP54 unless stated otherwise.
d. Fan motor shall be constant torque brushless DC motor which is able to sense the torque applied
to the motor shaft by the blower wheel and then self-adjust to maintain a constant value to get
more even airflow over a wider range of static pressures.
e. Motor shall have robust electronics that allow the motor to operate trouble-free in the event of
power irregularities without spark gap, short power-line interruptions or under-voltage conditions.
f. EC motors shall have moisture resistant design
C. Chilled water Unit
1. Cooling Coil
a. Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full air flow is evenly dispersed across the full coil
face area.
b. The coil design will ensure that the water pressure drop through cooling coil is minimised and the
maximum pressure drop at design conditions shall be 20kPa unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
c. Coil design and sizing shall be based on figures obtained from performance tests described in BS
5141 for cooling and heating coils.
d. Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before
leaving the manufacturer's works. An independently witnessed test certificate shall be issued to
the CA for each coil.
e. The unit shall be fitted with 2 port modulating control valve.
f. Coils shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works to a minimum of 20 bar gauge pressure.
g. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
h. Cooling coils shall have a large surface area to maximise heat transfer and shall be manufactured
from copper pipework with mechanically bonded aluminium fins with solid drawn spacing collars.
The fins shall be coated with a non-stick acrylic film (hydrophilic) to provide additional corrosion
protection and efficient water removal for improved performance.
i. The air velocity across the coil shall be such that free water shall not be carried over from the coil
to the air-stream.
j. A full width condensate drain pan constructed from AISI 316 stainless steel of minimum thickness
1mm shall be provided under the cooling coil. The condensate drain pipe connection through the
unit casing shall be insulated from the factory with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam
rubber insulation and sealed with plastic grommet.
D. D-X Unit
1. Cooling Coil (Evaporator)
a. Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full air flow is evenly dispersed across the full coil
face area.
b. Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before
c. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
d. Cooling coils shall have a large surface area to maximise heat transfer and will be manufactured
from refrigeration quality copper pipework with mechanically bonded aluminium fins with solid
drawn spacing collars. The fins shall be coated with a non-stick acrylic film (hydrophilic) to provide
additional corrosion protection and efficient water removal for improved performance.
e. The air velocity across the coil shall be such that free water shall not be carried over from the coil
to the air-stream.
f. A full width condensate drain pan constructed from AISI 316 stainless steel of minimum thickness
1mm shall be provided under the cooling coil. The condensate drain pipe connection through the
unit casing shall be insulated from the factory with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam
rubber insulation and sealed with plastic grommet.
2. Compressor
a. The units shall utilise hermetic scroll compressors, fitted with crankcase heaters to guard against
refrigerant migration during the off cycle and to eliminate oil foaming on starting.
b. Refrigerant circuits shall utilise a zero ODP (ozone depleting potential) refrigerant.
c. The compressors shall be charged with ester oil.
3. Condensing Unit
a. The condensing units shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant steel and shall be suitable for
external mounting.
b. The condensing unit design capacity shall be achieved at the maximum ambient conditions
indicated. Units shall be capable of running continuously at the lowest step of cooling capacity
without any adverse effect.
c. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from refrigeration quality copper tube with a secondary
surface of aluminium fins mechanically bonded to the tube.
d. The condenser coils shall be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminium plate fins, weather proof treated against corrosion and saline conditions
factory applied protective coatings with a minimum 5 year warranty unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
e. The coils shall be circuited for sub-cooling and shall have guard protection for the condenser fins.
Coils shall be leak tested at the factory at 30 bar.
f. The fans shall be axial flow type with low noise paddle type blades. The fans shall be designed
and selected to minimise noise and power input. This shall be achieved by means of a factory
fitted pressure actuated head pressure controller which varies the speed of the fan to provide
optimum head pressure control under varying ambient conditions. The units shall be fitted with a
weatherproof mains isolator. All motors shall have thermal overload protection and fan guard
protection.
4. Refrigerants and refrigerant pipework
a. Refrigerants used shall be as stated elsewhere. No refrigerant comprising or containing CFC or

HCFC’s shall be used. All refrigerants used shall be in compliance with the local authority
requirements and be approved by the CA prior to ordering.
b. Any refrigerant used shall be fully compatible with all materials comprising the complete
refrigeration system.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for the sizing of all refrigerant pipework between the
computer room air conditioning unit and the condensing unit.
d. The manufacturer shall provide refrigerant pipework adaptor kits for connections to the indoor
and outdoor units.
e. Enclosed spaces containing refrigerant equipment shall be provided with refrigerant leakage
detection. Detectors shall be selected to suit the refrigerant. The detection system shall be
capable of providing remote indication of an alarm condition. The alarm shall be transmitted to
the building management system or other controls system. As indicated in the schedules units
shall be located within equipment or provided with a remote sensor for location within
equipment. All leakage signals shall be alarmed.
f. Refrigerant pipework for all DX-Units units shall comply with the requirements of the Section
232113 (Hydronic piping) including all pipeline accessories.
g. All refrigerant pipework shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations.
h. Refrigerant pipe network shall be restricted to the total pipe length, maximum pipe length,
maximum branch lengths, maximum separation and height difference between indoor and
outdoor units associated with the installation requirements of the specific manufacturer.
i. Suction and discharge refrigerant piping shall be of dehydrated copper tube.
j. All refrigerant pipework shall be insulated in accordance with Section 230710 (Insulation)
E. Electric Heater Battery
1. The electric heater battery shall be a thyristor-controlled matrix of electric heater elements sheathed in
stainless steel to prevent corrosion. These shall be phase balanced and sized to maintain room
conditions when the system is calling for dehumidification and shall be used for initial building
heating.
2. The electric heater battery shall be fitted with auto and manual reset overheat cut-out protection.
F. Humidifier
1. The humidifier shall be of the direct steam injection type and designed to ensure that only clean sterile
steam is supplied to the conditioned space
2. The direct steam generator shall be constructed in two sections from all welded stainless steel.
Multiple electrical heater elements fitted in the hot section with an integral overheat thermostat shall
ensure safety under low water or loss of water conditions. In the cold section, the water level shall be
maintained by a float switch controlling a water solenoid valve, which shall be linked to the leak
detection alarm and close if a water leak is detected. An overflow shall be fitted.
3. The humidifier shall be provided with modulating capacity control from 20% to 100% of the steam
output to ensure accurate control of the conditioned space
4. The humidifier cylinder operating life shall be maximised by the use of an integral water conductivity
sensor to monitor the water conductivity level and determine, via integral software when the bottles
should be flushed and refilled with fresh water to limit the build-up of impurities and scale deposits.
5. Prior to placing an order the Contractor shall confirm to the manufacturer the supply water
conductivity to ensure the correct cylinder selection.
G. De-humidification
1. All computer room air conditioning units with heating and humidification specified shall be provided
with de-humidification control. When the room humidity rises above a pre-set level the controls shall
automatically reduce the fan speed by 20% (adjustable) and provide 100% cooling with reheat.
2. During the de-humidification cycle the return air shall monitored and if the temperature falls below a
pre-set minimum the de-humidification cycle is cancelled until the room air temperature increases.
H. Filters
1. The filters shall be of the replaceable type and constructed of non-woven reinforced synthetic fabric
encased in a rigid cardboard frame to BSEN 779 unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
2. All filters shall be provided with a differential pressure switch to provide an alarm via the BMS when
the filter pressure drop reaches a pre-set level (adjustable) and requires replacing.
I. Controls
1. The control panel shall contain the contactors, overloads, relays for each item of electrical equipment
and the electronic control system. All circuits are to be protected by miniature circuit breakers or
fuses.
2. The controls shall be interfaced with the site Building Management System (BMS) and shall be fully
compatible requiring no additional software or proprietary cabling and shall be fully pre-programmed
with an IP address.
3. The computer room air conditioning units controller shall comply with European Directive 2002/95/EC
and connected to a back-lit LCD display. LED’s shall not be acceptable.
4. The electrical control panels shall conform to the international and local regulations.
5. Dual power supplies
a. Where dual power is specified, they shall provide automatic changeover to the stand-by supply in
the event of a power failure.
b. The changeover switch position, status and supply priority setting shall be configurable via the
units LCD display facia and monitored via the BMS.
6. Electronic Controls
a. The close control units shall be provided with their own integral controls which shall be supplied
by the CCU’S manufacturer/supplier, to maintain the room design conditions. The BMS shall
monitor the common faults from the CCU’s. The BMS shall also monitor the position of the local
isolator.
b. The CCU’S master controller shall incorporate a Lon Works or Modbus based interface, such that
the detailed status of the CCU’s can be interrogated remotely. The following shall be provided for
each CCU’S for interrogation via the interface:-
c. A full BMS interlink is required to enable the remote monitoring and alarm signals of each
individual unit, all of the messages on each unit shall be duplicated on the BMS facia mounted
graphic display.
7. Humidity Controls
a. All humidifier parameters and alarms shall be controlled and monitored and the following shall be
available on the facia LCD display and via the BMS;
1) 1). Supply water conductivity
2) 2). Steam output (kg/h)
3) 3). Current rating (A)
4) 4). Status mode (Start-up, running, filling, draining)
8. Fascia
a. The fascia shall contain an LCD display, with facilities to fully interrogate the unit, including the
following which shall be available on the BMS:
1) Return air temperature (high and low limit)
2) Return air humidity (high and low limit)
3) Supply air temperature (high and low limit)
4) Supply air volume
5) Fan run hours
6) Humidifier bottle change
7) Air flow fail
8) Overheat cut-out
9) Flood alarm
10) Power failure
11) Manual Off
12) Manual On
13) Filter Change
14) Alarm Log (minimum of the last 100 alarms in chronological order)
9. In addition to the display items described, the microprocessor shall allow the review of the following
without the ability to change any setting:
a. Temperature set point
b. Temperature/humidity high limit
c. Temperature/humidity low limit
d. Fan running hours
e. Running hours for each compressor
f. Alarm occurrence
10. An air flow pressure sensor shall provide a visual alarm on the unit facia and via the BMS in the event
of a failure of the unit air flow.
11. The microprocessor shall have two levels of security each protected by a pass code. In the first level
the following set points shall be adjusted:
a. Temperature
b. Temperature high limit
c. Temperature low limit
d. Humidity high limit
e. Humidity low limit
12. In the second level of security accessed by a separate pass code, the following control variables shall
be programmable:
a. Proportional band
b. Integral action time
c. Dead band
d. Delay on start
e. Reset of fan running hours
f. Water Detection
13. Fire shut down
a. All computer room air conditioning units shall be provided with terminals to shut down the unit in
the event of a fire.
14. Remote ON/Off
a. All computer room air conditioning units shall be provided with terminals for remote
enable/disable via the BMS
J. All computer room air conditioning units shall be supplied complete with a water detection system each
with 10 metre sensor cable (unless otherwise stated elsewhere0 for location below the unit; an audible
alarm shall sound with remote indication via the BMS.
K. Floor stands
L. Each sensible cooler shall be supplied complete with a galvanised steel floor stand with a height to match
the false floor void.
M. Factory performance test
1. Unless stated otherwise a full load factory performance test shall be undertaken on one type of each
computer room air conditioning unit specified. The test shall ensure that the specified performances
are achieved.
2. Factory performance tests shall be conducted on a certified test bed at project specific design
conditions. The manufacturer shall supply a certified test report to confirm performance as specified.
Certification documents for the test facilities shall be made available upon request from the
manufacturer for inspection.
3. A certified test report of all data shall be submitted to the CA prior to completion of the project. The
factory certified test report shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer's company. Pre-printed
certification will not be acceptable; certification shall be in the original.
4. Performance test shall be witnessed by Client or his representative (if desired). The Client or his
representative shall be notified 14 days in advance to witness the factory performance test. The
Contractor shall include the costs for 3 persons for the visit including business class air fare and hotel
accommodation for the witness personnel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units as shown on the Design Drawings and in accordance with Shop Drawings and other applicable
data provided by manufacturer.
B. Install the computer room air conditioning units in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Refrigerant System Leak Testing
1. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including vacuum pump and gauges. Test the piping system
before insulation is installed and remove control devices before testing. Ensure that the entire piping
systems are leak tested, either as a whole or in sections, but leave no part untested.
2. Charge piping systems with refrigerant purge all air and run all equipment for 24 hours and handover
the system free from leakage. Test fails if leakage is observed or pressure drop exceeds 5% of test
pressure.
3. Notify the CA at least 24 hours before performing leak test.
4. Repair piping systems which fail required piping test by disassembly and re-installation, using new
materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop leak compounds, mastics
or other temporary repair methods.
5. Recharge with refrigerant piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
A. Engage a factory authorized representative to inspect, test, and adjust field assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Prepare a test and inspection
report.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements and humidifiers through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3.4 START UP INSTRUCTION
A. Provide computer room air conditioning unit manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide
site training for facility operating staff on all aspects of the units including but not limited to operation,
maintenance and fault finding for all types of units used on the project.
A. Refer to Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all testing and commissioning requirements with other related equipment
including the controls and installation.
C. At practical completion all filters shall be replaced
END OF SECTION
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEMS AIR-CONDITIONER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Split System Air Conditioning Units.
a. Ducted Split Units
b. Room mounted Split Units
1. Division 22: Plumbing Works Section
2. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) Work.
3. Division 26: Electrical Work Sections.
D. General:
1. Split System Air Conditioning Units shall mean a factory assembled packaged indoor D-X air
conditioning terminal unit connected to an external condenser unit via refrigerant pipework and shall
include all controls.
4. Split System Air Conditioning indoor units shall be fully assembled and tested at the manufacturer’s
works to demonstrate the performance is in compliance with the specification and performance
requirements. The results and a compliance statement shall be submitted to the CA prior to delivery
to site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheets for the indoor and outdoor units indicating the
following.
a. Unit Model:
1) Unit arrangement and information on all external connections.
2) Provide information on overall sizes, overall operating weight and sizes, sections weight, point
of supported weight load,
3) Unit construction details and thermal break unit construction detail.
b. Condenser Selection:
1) Compressor type.
2) Refrigerant type.
3) Refrigeration circuits arrangement, details and capacity control.
4) Technical performance of condenser.
5) Condenser Fan Air Flow Capacity.
6) Condenser coil type and performance.
7) Condenser Fan Static Pressure and Total Pressure.
8) Condenser Fan Drive.
9) Compressor Motor (kW).
10) Condenser Fan (kW).
c. Evaporator Selection:
1) Evaporator coil type and performance.
2) Evaporator Fan type.
3) Wheel type.
4) Fan Class.
5) Arrangement.
6) Size.
7) Air Flow Capacity.
8) Static Pressure and Total Pressure.
9) Motor (kW) and Fan (kW).
d. Cooling and Heating:
1) Coil type
2) Coil Height
3) Coil Width
4) Rows
5) Capacity (Total and Sensible kW)
6) Air entering, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures
7) Air leaving, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures
e. Unit Casing
1) Frame and panel construction and materials
2) Filter type and performance
3) Insulation data
4) Vibration isolation provision or requirement
5) Access and clearances
6) Coating and finishes
f. Connections: Size, Type and Location:
1) Air
2) Refrigerant piping
3) Drain
4) Power
5) Controls
2. Submit detail information on internal component pressure drops, fan pressure allowance for dirty filter
pressure drops and available external static pressure at unit discharge and unit intake
3. Submit sound power levels by octave band for each indoor unit at rated capacity and at Low /
Medium/ High speed. Data shall be provided at unit discharge, intake and cabinet radiated level. If
unit sound power levels exceed values scheduled in the contract documents, submit detailed plan
outlining steps to meet design noise levels.
4. Submit sound power levels by octave band and maximum vibration levels for the assembled outdoor
units at the points the unit structure integrates with the building support structure. Submit details of
Variable Speed Drive units including manufacturer's details.
C. Test Reports:
3. Split System Air Conditioning units shall be factory tested for proper operation prior to shipment.
Submit factory test reports.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life.
1. Submit co-ordinated layout installation showing pipework routing and all pipework accessories.
2. Submit system schematic layout, indicating plant reference, capacities, pipework accessories, pipe
sizes, etc.
4. On all Installation Drawings reference the proposed insulation to be applied to the pipe work and
equipment. Provide insulation application details for the various types of insulation to be used.
drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the system components.
following:
c. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, wiring
d. Include full factory testing and commissioning data.
A. All Split System Air Conditioning units shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience in the design and manufacture of Split
System Air Conditioning units. The manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the highest quality
dedicated service team providing a call out service within the country the Split System Air Conditioning
units are installed.
or indicated in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards
a. All fans shall be tested in accordance with BS 848
b. All filters shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 779
c. All refrigeration systems and heat pumps utilised on Split System Air Conditioning units shall
comply with BS EN 378
d. All refrigeration pipework shall comply with BS EN 12735
e. All Split System Air Conditioning units indoor shall be tested in accordance with BS 4856 Parts 1, 2
3 & 4 as applicable.
2. All Split System Air Conditioning units shall be Eurovent Certified
3. Underwriters' Laboratories, UL Standards Compliance.
a. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation. All equipment shall comply with NEC requirements.
b. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labelled as defined in NFPA 70, Article
100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
a. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labelled as defined in IEC by
a testing agency acceptable to the Municipality and Utility Authority Having Jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
b. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall comply with the EC requirement for
machinery Electromagnetic and Pressure Equipment Directive, 98/37/EC
1. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems are in accordance
with the indicated performance requirements.
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA, at no additional cost.
4. All tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standard or equivalent international
standard.
A. The indoor and outdoor units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at factory. Mark the
unit room locations and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
B. Support piping to prevent damage to pipe and coil headers during Shipping and Restrain fans and other
components to prevent damage during shipping.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid
D. Units shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. All equipment and components shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide factory packaged and tested Split System Air Conditioning units from one of the manufacturers in
the schedule of manufacturers.
B. Split System Air Conditioning units shall be selected to provide the outputs as detailed in the equipment
schedules or on the drawings when operating at the specified conditions and parameters on medium
speed unless stated differently elsewhere within the specification, drawings or schedules.
E. All refrigeration pipework shall comply with the relevant section of the Hydronic pipework specification
Section 232113.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Ducted Split Units
1. Ducted concealed indoor units and outdoor condensing units for cooling and heating with
interconnecting refrigeration pipework. Each outdoor condensing unit shall be equipped with
compressors and shall serve 1 No. individual indoor fan or air handling unit. The capacity of the
outdoor units shall match the capacity of the indoor units.
B. Room Mounted Split Units
1. Decorative wall or floor mounted indoor units and outdoor condensing units for cooling and heating
modes with interconnecting refrigeration pipework. Each outdoor condensing unit shall be equipped
with a compressor and shall serve 1 No. individual indoor unit. The capacity of the outdoor units shall
match the capacity of the indoor units.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Ducted Split Units
1. Indoor Units:
a. Indoor units shall be of the horizontal concealed type. Indoor units shall be factory assembled
units complete with fan, cooling coil, filter, condensate drain and controls.
b. The unit fan and coil capacities shall be as detailed in the equipment schedules and indicated on
the Design Drawings.
c. Casings
1) Unless otherwise indicated, casings shall be provided as part of the unit to enclose the entire
coil, fan, motor, and filter sections.
2) Casings shall be corrosion resistant and of rigid construction being adequately stiffened to
prevent drumming, vibration and distortion.
3) Sharp edges shall be removed and joints sealed with mastic.
4) Unless indicated otherwise the indoor unit casing shall be manufactured from a minimum
1.0mm galvanized sheet metal for air volumes up to 200l/s and 1.2mm for air volumes at or
above 200l/s.
5) Casings shall be lined with thermal and acoustic insulation to maintain air borne and breakout
noise within the specified limits and to conserve energy. Insulation shall be high density with
class ‘O’ fire rating and to the required thickness. It shall be securely attached to the unit
without leaving any pockets or un-insulated casing. The thermal insulation and acoustic lining
shall support bacterial growth and shall be manufactured from materials with zero ozone
depletion (CFC and HCFC free). Prior to placing orders submit to the CA written confirmation
from the manufacturer confirming all proposed materials are CFC and HCFC free. The
insulation shall comply with UL04, NFPA 90A.
d. Fan & Motor
1) Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with anti-vibration mountings. The motor and
fan shall be mounted on a detachable mounting plate that can be removed from the fan
coil unit enclosure as one assembly. The cable connections to the fan motor shall be
of sufficient length to facilitate the mounting plate and the assembly to be opened up
for cleaning the fan and motor.
2) Fans shall be directly driven, forward curved, double inlet double width (DIDW) centrifugal
type and capable of delivering the required air volume against the external resistance as
indicated.
3) Fan scrolls and impellers shall be either galvanized steel or aluminium.
4) Each fan shall have its own resiliently mounted motor. The fan and motor unit shall be
statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be provided with permanently lubricated, self-
aligning ball bearings.
5) The fan layout and suction chamber design shall be arranged to provide as even a velocity
profile as possible across the coil.
6) Fan motors shall comply with requirements as stated in specification section 233400 (Fans)
7) Fan motors shall be three speeds or variable speed, totally enclosed type or open drip proof
for protection against dust, external rotor, and permanent split capacitor type. Power factor
shall be 0.95 or better.
8) Fan motor bearings shall be of the sealed for life ball race type with a manufacturers’
minimum life expectancy of 40,000 hours under typical operating conditions. Overload
protection shall be afforded to each individual motor by an auto resetting thermal contactor.
9) Motor insulation shall be to class ‘B’ with the enclosure to IP44 unless stated otherwise.
10) All Indoor Units with EC motors shall be complete with a transformer and suitable for single
phase power supply (240 volts, single phase 50Hz). All EC motors shall comply with the
requirements detailed specification section 238219 (Fan Coil Units).
e. Terminal Box:
1) All indoor units shall be provided with factory installed pre-wired terminal box to IP44 with
the fan motor wired to the box.
f. Coils (Heating & Cooling)
1) The direct expansion cooling coils shall utilise either R410A or R134A unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
2) Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full air flow is evenly dispersed across the full
coil face area.
3) Coil air velocities no greater than 2.0 m/s at medium speed unless otherwise stated.
4) Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before
leaving the manufacturer's works. An independently witnessed test certificate shall be issued
to the CA for each coil.
5) Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
6) Coils shall be constructed of staggered heavy wall seamless copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins.
7) Expansion valve/ capillary tube shall be provided and installed at the cooling or condensing
unit in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
g. Drain Pans
1) The condensate drain pan shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall be
under the entire length and width of the cooling coil including the headers and return bends.
The pan shall be adequately treated against corrosion and pitched for positive drainage with
the unit-installed level.
2) The entire underside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with minimum 6mm closed cell
fire retardant polyurethane insulation 20 kg/m³ density to ensure that no condensation is
formed on the underside.
3) Where the connection cannot be taken from the bottom of the pan a local sump shall be
formed in the bottom of the pan and a side outlet drain connection provided. The drain
connection shall be threaded for easy connection.
4) Drain pans shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to setting the units to work.
5) Where a gravity drain system cannot be provided due to site constraints provide condensate
pumps at the discretion of the CA at no additional cost. The operation of condensate pumps
(where required) shall be checked by pouring a small quantity of water into the drip tray prior
to setting the units to work.
h. Filter
1) The units shall be provided with a washable/cleanable panel filter located at the inlet section.
Filters shall be contained in lightweight frames arranged to facilitate replacement. They shall
seal positively against sealing strips fixed to the unit.
2) Filters shall be capable of being removed without contacting the dirty media.
3) Access to the filter shall be obtained without major dismantling of the unit, ceiling where
applicable or connecting ductwork.
4) Air filters shall have a performance classification grade 3 when tested in accordance with BS
EN 779 unless otherwise indicated.
5) Prior to practical completion all filters shall be cleaned or replaced with new as applicable.
i. Electric Resistance Heating Coils
1) Electric heater batteries where specified shall consist of a number of heating elements of the
enclosed type mounted in a sheet steel casing. Elements shall be so arranged to permit
removal without dismantling the Indoor Unit.
2) Unless otherwise indicated the resistance to the air flow through the battery shall not exceed
25 Pa and the face velocity shall not exceed 6m/s nor be less than 2m/s.
3) An isolator and a hazard warning sign clearly indicating the operating voltage shall be fitted
4) In the proximity of hot areas, the electrical wiring insulation shall be suitable for the maximum
temperature.
5) The connections from each element shall be extended to the Indoor Unit terminal box. The
connections shall be secured to the terminal box with air tight glands and will be linked with
either copper bus-bars or terminals as necessary to achieve step control requirements stated
elsewhere.
6) The number of elements in the heater shall be the same as or a multiple of the number of
steps in the controller. All heaters and heater sections of more than 3kW loading shall be
balanced over three phases and the complete heater bank shall be arranged for balanced
operation on a three-phase, four-wire system.
7) The elements shall be equally spaced.
8) The whole unit will be housed in a casing manufactured to the same dimensions as the Indoor
Unit.
9) Each electrical heater battery shall be complete with a manually reset thermal cutout that
provides an audible or visual alarm signal on high temperature cut-out as indicated elsewhere.
10) Unless otherwise indicated, the control of electrical heater batteries shall be interlocked with
the fan motor starter and an air flow sensing device to ensure that the heater operates only
when the fan is running and air flow is established.
11) Electrical heater batteries shall be nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and
hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for
overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection.
j. Acoustics
1) The indoor units shall be selected to meet the specified noise criteria. Allowance shall be
made for the accumulative effect of a number of units and any other equipment operating in
the same space.
2) Unless otherwise indicated the fans shall be selected and set at medium (design) speed
operation to give the specified NR levels.
3) Standard manufacturer’s acoustic data is generally based on typical rooms with a series of
assumptions. Provide acoustic data for the units based on actual site conditions. Due
consideration shall be given to the surface finishes and noise interferences from adjacent
spaces.
4) At the request of the CA arrange to test the units at design conditions at no extra cost.
Provide NR measurements
5) Tests requested to establish the NR level of individual units shall be conducted at the design
condition for the unit on test. The NR level recorded shall be the maximum level of two
recordings taken at 1.5m from the discharge grille and 1.5m from the intake grille.
6) Indoor units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and
shall have minimum vibration during operation. Anti- vibration mounting shall be provided to
prevent the transmission of noise and vibration to the building or to adjacent services.
7) Should the vibration be excessive and not within the acceptable standards, provision of
adequate vibration isolation shall be provided.
2. Outdoor Units:
a. The outdoor condensing units shall be of the air-cooled type for cooling and heating (if specified)
capacity as indicated in the equipment schedules and design drawings.
b. The outdoor units shall be designed for low noise operation and shall comply with the external
noise criteria detailed elsewhere.
c. The outdoor unit shall comprise of condenser fans, condenser coils, compressor, refrigeration
accessories and safety control all assembled in a common casing, wired and tested at the factory.
The unit shall be supplied from the factory with an operating charge of refrigerant and dehydrated
compressor oil.
d. The compressors shall be of the hermetic sealed reciprocating or scroll type, mounted on external
spring isolators, provided with crankcase heater, accumulator and muffler and located in a
separate section isolated from the condenser coil and fans.
e. The condenser fans shall be of the propeller type, arranged for either vertical or horizontal
discharge, weather proofed, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven by a totally enclosed
and permanently lubricated resiliently mounted electric motor. Fans shall have safety guards.
f. The condenser coils shall be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminium plate fins, weatherproof treated against corrosion and saline conditions with
factory applied protective coatings.
g. The coils shall be circuited for sub-cooling and shall have guard protection for the condenser fins.
h. The casing shall be fully weatherproofed for outdoor installation and proof treated against
corrosion and saline conditions factory applied protective coatings, manufactured from a
minimum 1.5mm galvanised sheet steel. It shall be provided with openings for power and
refrigerant connection with removable panels for easy access to all internal components. A hinged
access door shall be provided on the control panel.
i. Electrical panels shall be factory wired and provided with a lockable door and a minimum of IP55
construction
j. The unit shall be provided with all necessary refrigeration accessories, which shall include but not
limited to the following.
1) Filter drier.
2) Sight glass.
3) Suction and discharge shut-off valves.
k. The unit shall be provided with all necessary controls such as but not limited to high & low
pressure switches, over current relay, reverse phase, protector, anti-short cycle timer, with required
contactors for fan motors and compressor compatible with single or double stage room
thermostat as per refrigerant circuit.
3. Controls
a. The indoor units and the outdoor units shall be equipped with factory wired and built-in direct
digital control DDC for the control and monitoring of the units from the BMS.
b. All units shall be supplied with a remote control unit to provide the following control functions;
1) Operational setting:
a) Start/ Stop.
b) Operation Mode.
c) Temperature Setting.
d) Air speed switching.
e) Air flow direction.
2) To monitor the following:
a) Status.
b) Error and error content.
c) Filter sign.
d) Operating mode.
e) Temperature setting.
f) Indoor intake air temperature.
g) Air speed and flow switching.
3) Scheduling of the following:
a) Start and stop per day.
b) Minimum setting.
c. All units shall be provided with connections to the project BMS for monitoring the unit operation
and set points.
B. Room mounted Split Units
1. Indoor Units:
a. Indoor units shall be of the exposed decorative encased type. Indoor units shall be factory
assembled units complete with fan, cooling coil, filter, condensate drain and controls.
b. The unit fan and coil capacities shall be as detailed in the equipment schedules and indicated on
the Design Drawings.
c. Casings
1) The indoor unit casings shall be provided as part of the unit to enclose the entire coil, fan,
motor, and filter sections.
2) The indoor unit casing shall be epoxy powder coated, corrosion resistant and of rigid
construction being adequately stiffened to prevent drumming, vibration and distortion.
3) Sharp edges shall be removed and joints sealed with mastic.
4) Unless indicated otherwise the indoor unit casing shall be manufactured from a minimum
1.0mm galvanized sheet metal for air volumes up to 200l/s and 1.2mm for air volumes at or
above 200l/s.
5) Casings shall be lined with thermal and acoustic insulation to maintain air borne and breakout
noise within the specified limits and to conserve energy. Insulation shall be high density with
class ‘O’ fire rating and to the required thickness. It shall be securely attached to the unit
without leaving any pockets or un-insulated casing. The thermal insulation and acoustic lining
shall not inhibit or support bacterial growth and shall be manufactured from materials with
zero ozone depletion (CFC and HCFC free). Prior to placing orders submit to the CA written
confirmation from the manufacturer confirming all proposed materials are CFC and HCFC free.
The insulation shall comply with UL04, NFPA 90A.
d. Fan & Motor
1) Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with anti-vibration mountings. The motor and
fan shall be mounted on a detachable mounting plate that can be removed from the fan
coil unit enclosure as one assembly. The cable connections to the fan motor shall be
of sufficient length to facilitate the mounting plate and the assembly shall be opened up
for cleaning the fan and motor.
2) Fans shall be directly driven, forward curved, double inlet width (DIDW) centrifugal type and
capable of delivering the required air volume against the external resistance as indicated.
3) Fan scrolls and impellers shall be either galvanized steel or aluminium.
4) Each fan shall have its own resiliently mounted motor. The fan and motor unit shall be
statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be provided with permanently lubricated, self-
aligning ball bearings.
5) The fan layout and suction chamber design shall be arranged to provide as even a velocity
profile as possible across the coil.
6) Fan motors shall comply with requirements as stated in specification section 233400 (Fans)
7) Fan motors shall be three speeds or variable speed, totally enclosed type or open drip proof
for protection against dust, external rotor, and permanent split capacitor type. Power factor
shall be 0.95 or better.
8) Fan motor bearings shall be of the sealed for life ball race type with a manufacturers’
minimum life expectancy of 40,000 hours under typical operating conditions. Overload
protection shall be afforded to each individual motor by an auto resetting thermal contactor.
9) Motor insulation shall be to class ‘B’ with the enclosure to IP44 unless stated otherwise.
10) All Indoor Units with EC motors shall be complete with a transformer and suitable for single
phase power supply (240 volts, single phase 50Hz). All EC motors shall comply with the
requirements detailed specification section 238219 (Fan Coil Units).
e. Terminal Box:
1) All indoor units shall be provided with factory installed pre-wired terminal box to IP44 with
the fan motor wired to the box.
f. Coils (Heating & Cooling)
1) The direct expansion cooling coils shall utilise either R410A unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
2) Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full air flow is evenly dispersed across the full
coil face area.
3) Coil air velocities no greater than 2.0 m/s at the specified speed unless otherwise stated.
4) Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before
leaving the manufacturer's works. An independently witnessed test certificate shall be issued
to the CA for each coil.
5) Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
6) Coils shall be constructed of staggered heavy wall seamless copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins.
7) Expansion valve/ capillary tube shall be provided and installed at the cooling or condensing
unit in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
g. Drain Pans
1) The condensate drain pan shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall be
under the entire length and width of the cooling coil including the headers and return bends.
The pan shall be adequately treated against corrosion and pitched for positive drainage with
the unit-installed level.
2) The entire underside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with minimum 6mm closed cell
fire retardant polyurethane insulation 20 kg/m³ density to ensure that no condensation is
formed on the underside.
3) Where the connection cannot be taken from the bottom of the pan a local sump shall be
formed in the bottom of the pan and a side outlet drain connection provided. The drain
connection shall be threaded for easy connection.
4) Drain pans shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to setting the units to work.
5) Where a gravity drain system cannot be provided due to site constraints provide condensate
(where required) shall be checked by pouring a small quantity of water into the drip tray prior
to setting the units to work.
h. Filter
1) The units shall be provided with a washable/cleanable panel filter located at the inlet section.
Filters shall be contained in lightweight frames arranged to facilitate replacement. They shall
seal positively against sealing strips fixed to the unit.
2) Filters shall be capable of being removed without contacting the dirty media.
3) Access to the filter shall be obtained without major dismantling of the unit, ceiling where
4) Air filters shall have a performance classification grade 3 when tested in accordance with BS
EN 779 unless otherwise indicated.
5) Prior to practical completion all filters shall be cleaned or replaced with new as applicable.
i. Electric Resistance Heating Coils
1) Electric heater batteries where specified shall consist of a number of heating elements of the
enclosed type mounted in a sheet steel casing. Elements shall be so arranged to permit
removal without dismantling the Indoor Unit.
2) Unless otherwise indicated the resistance to the air flow through the battery shall not exceed
25 Pa and the face velocity shall not exceed 6m/s nor be less than 2m/s.
3) An isolator and a hazard warning sign clearly indicating the operating voltage shall be fitted
4) In the proximity of hot areas, the electrical wiring insulation shall be suitable for the maximum
temperature.
5) The connections from each element shall be extended to the Indoor Unit terminal box. The
connections shall be secured to the terminal box with air tight glands and will be linked with
either copper bus-bars or terminals as necessary to achieve step control requirements stated
elsewhere.
6) The number of elements in the heater shall be the same as or a multiple of the number of
steps in the controller. All heaters and heater sections of more than 3kW loading shall be
balanced over three phases and the complete heater bank shall be arranged for balanced
operation on a three-phase, four-wire system.
7) The elements shall be equally spaced.
8) The whole unit will be housed in a casing manufactured to the same dimensions as the Indoor
Unit.
9) Each electrical heater battery shall be complete with a manually reset thermal cutout that
provides an audible or visual alarm signal on high temperature cut-out as indicated elsewhere.
10) Unless otherwise indicated, the control of electrical heater batteries shall be interlocked with
the fan motor starter and an air flow sensing device to ensure that the heater operates only
when the fan is running and air flow is established.
11) Electrical heater batteries shall be nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and
hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for
overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection.
j. Acoustics
1) The indoor units shall be selected to meet the specified noise criteria. Allowance shall be
made for the accumulative effect of a number of units and any other equipment operating in
the same space.
2) Unless otherwise indicated the fans shall be selected and set at medium (design) speed
operation to give the specified NR levels.
3) Standard manufacturer’s acoustic data is generally based on typical rooms with a series of
consideration shall be given to the surface finishes and noise interferences from adjacent
spaces.
4) At the request of the CA arrange to test the units at design conditions at no extra cost.
Provide NR measurements
5) Tests requested to establish the NR level of individual units shall be conducted at the design
condition for the unit on test. The NR level recorded shall be the maximum level of two
recordings taken at 1.5m from the discharge grille and 1.5m from the intake grille.
6) Indoor units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and
shall have minimum vibration during operation. Anti- vibration mounting shall be provided to
prevent the transmission of noise and vibration to the building or to adjacent services.
7) Should the vibration be excessive and not within the acceptable standards, provision of
adequate vibration isolation shall be provided.
2. Outdoor Units:
a. The outdoor condensing units shall be of the air-cooled type for cooling and heating capacity as
indicated in the equipment schedules and design drawings.
b. The outdoor units shall be designed for low noise operation and shall comply with the external
noise criteria detailed elsewhere
c. The outdoor unit shall comprise of condenser fans, condenser coils, compressor, refrigeration
accessories and safety control all assembled in a common casing, wired and tested at the factory.
The unit shall be supplied from the factory with an operating charge of refrigerant and dehydrated
compressor oil.
d. The compressors shall be of the hermetic sealed reciprocating or scroll type, mounted on external
spring isolators, provided with crankcase heater, accumulator and muffler and located in a
separate section isolated from the condenser coil and fans.
e. The condenser fans shall be of the propeller type, arranged for either vertical or horizontal
discharge, weather proofed, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven by a totally enclosed
and permanently lubricated resiliently mounted electric motor. Fans shall have safety guards.
f. The condenser coils shall be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum plate fins, weather proof treated against corrosion and saline conditions
factory applied protective coatings.
g. The coils shall be circuited for sub-cooling and shall have guard protection for the condenser fins.
h. The casing shall be fully weatherproofed for outdoor installation and proof treated against
corrosion and saline conditions factory applied protective coatings, manufactured from a
minimum 1.5mm galvanised sheet steel. It shall be provided with openings for power and
refrigerant connection with removable panels for easy access to all internal components. A hinged
access door shall be provided on the control panel.
i. Electrical panels shall be factory wired and provided with a lockable door and a minimum of IP55
construction
j. The unit shall be provided with all necessary refrigeration accessories, which shall include but not
1) Filter drier.
2) Sight glass.
3) Suction and discharge shut-off valves.
k. The unit shall be provided with all necessary controls such as but not limited to H.P., L.P.
l. switches, over current relay, reverse phase, protector, anti-short cycle timer, with required
contactors for fan motors and compressor compatible with single or double stage room
thermostat as per refrigerant circuit.
3. Controls
a. The indoor units and the outdoor units shall be equipped with factory wired and built-in direct
digital control DDC for the control and monitoring of the units from the BMS.
b. All units shall be supplied with a remote control unit to provide the following control functions;
1) Operational setting:
a) Start/ Stop.
b) Operation Mode.
c) Temperature Setting.
d) Air speed switching.
e) Air flow direction.
2) To monitor the following:
a) Status.
b) Error and error content.
c) Filter sign.
d) Operating mode.
e) Temperature setting.
f) Indoor intake air temperature.
g) Air speed and flow switching.
3) Scheduling of the following:
a) Start and stop per day.
b) Minimum setting.
c. All units shall be provided with connections to the project BMS for monitoring the unit operation.
C. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Refrigerant pipework for all split system air conditioning units shall comply with the requirements of
the Section 232113 (Hydronic piping) including all pipeline accessories.
2. All refrigerant pipework shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations.
3. Refrigerant pipe network shall be restricted to the total pipe length, maximum pipe length, maximum
branch lengths, maximum separation and height difference between indoor and outdoor units
associated with the installation requirements of the specific manufacturer.
4. Suction and discharge refrigerant piping shall be of dehydrated copper tube.
5. All refrigerant pipework shall be insulated in accordance with Section 230710 (Insulation)
D. NAMEPLATE
1. 1. Each indoor and outdoor unit shall be complete with a unique identification reference label (as
indicated in project documents) fitted at the manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be
clearly visible through the wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as approved by the CA
prior to ordering and shall be utilised in the record documentation. In addition to this a securely attach
nameplate on each unit showing manufacturer name, serial, model number etc. is required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for the installation of any equipment.
C. Locate equipment as indicated on the Design Drawings to provide best possible connection arrangement
and accessibility for maintenance and servicing. Provide clearances on all sides of equipment as required
by the Statutory Authorities or manufacturer, whichever is greater.
D. Install items of equipment with due regard to Architectural treatment and ensure all items are level and
finished in keeping with good workmanship.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Indoor and Outdoor Units
1. Install indoor and outdoor units where indicated on the drawings, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published installation instructions and with recognised industry practices, to ensure
that units are in accordance with requirements and serve intended purposes.
2. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof decking and piping, as
necessary to interface installation of indoor and outdoor units with other work.
3. Provide access space around indoor and outdoor units for service as indicated, but in no case less than
that recommended by manufacturer. In isolated cases where free access around unit is restricted,
provide necessary catwalk to the acceptance of the CA.
4. Install floor mounted outdoor units on 150mm high reinforced concrete pad, 75mm larger on each
side than unit’s base unless indicated otherwise elsewhere.
5. Mount units on vibration isolators in accordance with the contract documents and manufacturers
recommendations.
6. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation
requirements of the electrical section of the HVAC installation and the requirements of applicable
sections of Division 26 Electrical Work Sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring
installation is acceptable.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning, Flushing and Inspecting:
1. Refer to other sections in Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections.
2. Clean and flush and vacuum system of all air and dirt. After flushing, remove, clean and replace all
filters. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports, accessory items and any
leaks.
A. Refrigerant System Leak Testing
2. Charge piping systems with refrigerant, based upon the actual pipe lengths installed and purge all air
and run all equipment for 24 hours and handover the system free from leakage. Test fails if leakage is
observed or pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.
B. The system manufacturer shall inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including connections and prepare a test and inspection report for submission to the CA.
C. Equipment Start-Up
1. Follow manufacturer's instructions and have manufacturer's representative present to certify the
installation.
2. Check each item of equipment to ensure proper electrical connections, etc., and to verify proper
operation.
3. Upon completion of installation of equipment start-up, operate equipment to demonstrate capability

and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then re-test to demonstrate
compliance.
4. Check, verify and demonstrate remote signals operation.
5. Carry out all indicated electrical tests as applicable.
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
E. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment. Start-up Services
B. All units shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide site training for facility operating staff
on all aspects of the indoor & outdoor units including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault
END OF SECTION
SECTION 238129 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS

(AND VARIABLE REFRIGERANT
VOLUME)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
C. Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems (VRF) and variable refrigerant volume (VRV)
1. Ducted Split Units
2. Room mounted Split Units
D. Related Work Sections and Documentation
E. General:
1. A variable refrigerant flow (VRF)/ variable refrigerant volume (VRV) system shall consist of an externally
mounted condenser section housing compressor(s) and condenser heat exchanger interconnected to
multiple indoor direct expansion (DX) evaporator fan coil units, via a single set of refrigerant pipework.
2. The duties and performance of the indoor units shall be in accordance with the details indicated in the
equipment schedules and on the drawings and include any allowance required to meet manufacturing
tolerances.
3. The Contractor shall appoint a specialist manufacturer to undertake the detailed design, installation
and commissioning of the system based upon the design drawings, scheduled duties and performance
criteria detailed in the specification.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheets for the indoor and outdoor units indicating the
following;
a. System details:
1) Manufacturer’s technical details
2) Provide information on overall sizes, overall operating weight and sizes, sections weight, point
of supported weight load for all equipment.
3) Construction details including thermal break details.
b. Outdoor Unit Selection:
1) Compressor type
2) Refrigerant type
3) Refrigeration circuits arrangement, details and capacity control.
4) Technical performance of condenser
5) Condenser Fan Air Flow Capacity
6) Condenser coil type and performance
7) Condenser Fan Static Pressure and Total Pressure
8) Condenser Fan Drive
9) Compressor Motor (kW).
10) Condenser Fan (kW).
c. Indoor Unit Selection (for each component)
1) Evaporator Selection:
a) Evaporator coil type and performance.
b) Evaporator Fan type
c) Wheel type
d) Fan Class
e) Arrangement
f) Size
g) Air Flow Capacity
h) Static Pressure and Total Pressure
i) Motor (kW) and Fan (kW).
2) Cooling and Heating:
a) Coil type
b) Coil Height
c) Coil Width
d) Rows
e) Capacity (Total and Sensible kW)
f) Air entering, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures
g) Air leaving, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures
3) Unit Casing
a) Frame and panel construction and materials
b) Filter type and performance
c) Insulation data
d) Vibration isolation provision or requirement
e) Access and clearances
f) Coating and finishes
4) Connections: Size, Type and Location:
a) Air
b) Refrigerant piping
c) Drain
d) Power
e) Controls
2. Submit detail information on internal component pressure drops, fan pressure allowance for dirty filter
pressure drops and available external static pressure at unit discharge and unit intake
3. Submit sound power levels by octave band for each indoor unit at rated capacity and at Low
/Medium/High speed. Data shall be provided at unit discharge, intake and cabinet radiated level. If
4. Submit sound power levels by octave band and maximum vibration levels for the assembled outdoor
units at the points the unit structure integrates with the building support structure. Submit details of
Variable Speed Drive units including manufacturer's details.
C. Test Reports:
3. VRF/VRV indoor and outdoor units shall be factory tested for proper operation prior to
shipment. Submit factory test reports.
4. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or
service life.
1. Submit co-ordinated layout installation showing pipework routing and all pipework accessories.
2. Submit system schematic layout, indicating plant reference, capacities, pipework accessories, pipe
sizes, etc.
4. On all Installation drawings reference the proposed insulation to be applied to the pipework and
equipment. Provide insulation application details for the various types of insulation to be used.
drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop
1. Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the system components.
following:
A. The complete VRF/VRV system shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience in the design and manufacture of VRF/VRV
systems. The manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management
dedicated service team providing a call out service within the country the VRF/VRV systems are installed.
c. All refrigeration systems and heat pumps utilised on VRF/VRV systems shall comply with BS EN
378
d. All refrigeration pipework shall comply with BS EN 12735
e. All Split System Air Conditioning units indoor shall be tested in accordance with BS 4856 Parts 1, 2
3 & 4 as applicable.
2. All VRF/VRV units shall be Eurovent Certified
3. Institute of Refrigeration Safety Codes of Practice
a. Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation. All equipment shall comply with NEC requirements.
b. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labelled as defined in NFPA 70, Article
100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
7. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
a. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labelled as defined in IEC by
a testing agency acceptable to the Municipality and Utility Authority Having Jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
b. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall comply with the EC requirement for
machinery Electromagnetic and Pressure Equipment Directive, 98/37/EC
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA, at no additional cost.
standard.
A. The indoor and outdoor units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at factory. Mark the
unit room locations and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
B. Support piping to prevent damage to pipe and coil headers during Shipping and Restrain fans and other
D. Units shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. All equipment and components shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete and operational VRF/VRV system from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of
manufacturers.
B. The VRF/VRV system shall be selected to provide the outputs as detailed in the equipment schedules or on
the drawings when operating at the specified conditions and parameters and the indoor unit on medium
speed unless stated differently elsewhere within the specification, drawings or schedules.
E. All refrigeration pipework shall comply with the relevant section of the Hydronic pipework specification
Section 232113.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Zoning of the evaporator and condenser units shall be as indicated on the design drawings and/or in the
Particular Specification.
B. Where VRF/VRV systems are specified as heating and cooling the system shall be configured to provide
simultaneous heating and cooling (i.e. some indoor units operating in cooling mode and some operating
in heating mode depending on the requirements of specific zone).
C. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere VRF/VRV systems shall use two pipe refrigerant circuits (liquid & suction
gas) with gas flow devices that determine the required gas flow rate to a particular indoor unit. A three
pipe system may be an acceptable alternative subject to the acceptance of the CA
D. The VRF/VRV system controls shall monitor the refrigerant mass flow and oil flow to ensure an optimum
energy efficient performance. This shall be achieved by the use of variable speed compressors and
condenser fans operating in unison adjusting their frequency in reaction to the refrigerant mass flow
conditions and operating pressures and temperatures.
E. In spaces containing multiple indoor units a maximum of two indoor units shall be controlled by one local
space temperature sensor unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
F. No space temperature sensors shall be placed outside of the space they control. Sensors shall be room
mounted (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) in a position agreed with the CA.
G. Facilities shall be provided to allow the building occupier to modify the controls such that each individual
indoor unit can be controlled from a room temperature sensor, with the need for only minor additional
wiring or controls software or hardware to be installed by the occupier.
H. Each indoor unit shall be connected to an intelligent outstation which shall be connected to the building
management system.
I. Each VRF/VRV system shall be provided with a dedicated controller which shall be capable of providing
individual control of each unit connected to the system and shall also be linked to the building
management system to allow central reporting and control of all VRF/VRV systems.
J. Evaporator units shall be selected to avoid low ‘off coil’ temperatures and shall have air distribution
through the selected diffusers designed to avoid the ‘dumping’ of cold air.
K. Condensing units shall be located externally to minimise air recirculation, solar gain and noise nuisance.
Their performance shall be unaffected by local constraints and be positioned with full access for safe
maintenance.
L. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the discharge of refrigerant gases to atmosphere
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Indoor units
1. Indoor units shall be of either the horizontal concealed type, ceiling mounted cassette type or
decorative wall or floor room mounted type as detailed in the equipment schedules and on the
drawings.
2. Indoor units shall be factory assembled units complete with fan, evaporative cooling coil, electronic
expansion device, filter, condensate drain and controls.
3. The unit fan and coil capacities shall be as detailed in the equipment schedules and indicated on the
Design Drawings.
4. Casings
a. Unless otherwise indicated, casings shall be provided as part of the unit to enclose the entire coil,
fan, motor, and filter sections.
b. Concealed indoor unit casings shall be corrosion resistant and of rigid construction being
adequately stiffened to prevent drumming, vibration and distortion. Indoor units
c. Sharp edges shall be removed and joints sealed with mastic.
d. Unless indicated otherwise the indoor unit casing shall be manufactured from a minimum 1.0mm
galvanized sheet metal for air volumes up to 200l/s and 1.2mm for air volumes at or above 200l/s.
e. Casings shall be lined with thermal and acoustic insulation to maintain air borne and breakout
noise within the specified limits and to conserve energy. Insulation shall be high density with class
‘O’ fire rating and to the required thickness. It shall be securely attached to the unit without
leaving any pockets or un-insulated casing. The thermal insulation and acoustic lining shall not
inhibit or support bacterial growth and shall be manufactured from materials with zero ozone
depletion (CFC and HCFC free). Prior to placing orders submit to the CA written confirmation from
the manufacturer confirming all proposed materials are CFC and HCFC free. The insulation shall
comply with UL04, NFPA 90A.
5. Fan & Motor
a. Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with anti-vibration mountings. The motor and fan
shall be mounted on a detachable mounting plate that can be removed from the indoor unit
enclosure as one assembly. The cable connections to the fan motor shall be of sufficient
length to facilitate the mounting plate and the assembly to be opened up for cleaning the fan
and motor.
b. Fans shall be directly driven, forward curved, double inlet double width (DIDW) centrifugal type
and capable of delivering the required air volume against the external resistance as indicated.
c. Fan scrolls and impellers shall be either galvanized steel or aluminium.
d. Each fan shall have its own resiliently mounted motor. The fan and motor unit shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be provided with permanently lubricated, self-aligning ball
bearings.
e. The fan layout and suction chamber design shall be arranged to provide as even a velocity profile
as possible across the coil.
f. Fan motors shall comply with requirements as stated in specification section 233400 (Fans)
g. Fan motors shall be either three speeds or variable speed, totally enclosed type or open drip proof
for protection against dust, external rotor, and permanent split capacitor type. Power factor shall
be 0.95 or better.
h. Fan motor bearings shall be of the sealed for life ball race type with a manufacturers’ minimum life
expectancy of 40,000 hours under typical operating conditions. Overload protection shall be
afforded to each individual motor by an auto resetting thermal contactor.
i. Motor insulation shall be to class ‘B’ with the enclosure to IP44 unless stated otherwise.
j. All Indoor Units with EC motors shall be complete with a transformer and suitable for single phase
power supply (240 volts, single phase 50Hz). All EC motors shall comply with the requirements
detailed specification section 238219 (Fan Coil Units).
6. Terminal Box:
a. All indoor units shall be provided with factory installed pre-wired terminal box to IP44 with the fan
motor wired to the box.
7. Coils (Heating & Cooling)
a. The direct expansion cooling coils shall utilise a refrigerant with a zero Ozone Depletion Potential
(ODP) and a low Global Warming Potential (GWP) such as R410A or R32 unless stated otherwise
elsewhere.
b. Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full air flow is evenly dispersed across the full coil
face area.
c. Coil air velocities no greater than 2.0 m/s at the specified speed unless otherwise stated.
d. Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before
e. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and
removable plates.
f. Coils shall be constructed of staggered heavy wall seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminum fins.
g. Expansion valve/ capillary tube shall be provided and installed at the cooling or condensing unit in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
8. Drain Pans
a. The condensate drain pan shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall be under
the entire length and width of the cooling coil including the headers and return bends. The pan
shall be adequately treated against corrosion and pitched for positive drainage with the unit-
installed level.
b. The entire underside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with minimum 6mm closed cell fire
retardant polyurethane insulation 20 kg/m³ density to ensure that no condensation is formed on
the underside.
c. Where the connection cannot be taken from the bottom of the pan a local sump shall be formed
in the bottom of the pan and a side outlet drain connection provided. The drain connection shall
be threaded for easy connection.
d. Drain pans shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to setting the units to work.
e. Where a gravity drain system cannot be provided due to site constraints provide condensate
(where required) shall be checked by pouring a small quantity of water into the drip tray prior to
setting the units to work.
9. Filter
a. The units shall be provided with a washable/cleanable panel filter located at the inlet section.
Filters shall be contained in lightweight frames arranged to facilitate replacement. They shall seal
positively against sealing strips fixed to the unit.
b. Filters shall be capable of being removed without contacting the dirty media.
c. Access to the filter shall be obtained without major dismantling of the unit, ceiling where
d. Air filters shall have a performance classification grade 3 when tested in accordance with BS EN
779 unless otherwise indicated.
e. Prior to practical completion all filters shall be cleaned or replaced with new as applicable.
10. Acoustics
a. The indoor units shall be selected to meet the specified noise criteria. Allowance shall be made for
the accumulative effect of a number of units and any other equipment operating in the same
space.
b. Unless otherwise indicated the fans shall be selected and set at medium (design) speed operation
to give the specified NR levels.
c. Standard manufacturer’s acoustic data is generally based on typical rooms with a series of
consideration shall be given to the surface finishes and noise interferences from adjacent spaces.
d. At the request of the CA arrange to test the units at design conditions at no extra cost. Provide NR
measurements
e. Tests requested to establish the NR level of individual units shall be conducted at the design
condition for the unit on test. The NR level recorded shall be the maximum level of two recordings
taken at 1.5m from the discharge grille and 1.5m from the intake grille.
f. Indoor units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and shall
have minimum vibration during operation. Anti- vibration mounting shall be provided to prevent
the transmission of noise and vibration to the building or to adjacent services.
g. Should the vibration be excessive and not within the acceptable standards, provision of adequate
vibration isolation shall be provided.
B. Outdoor Units:
1. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere the outdoor condensing units shall be of the cooling only or high
efficiency heat pump air-cooled type for cooling and heating as indicated in the equipment schedules
and design drawings.
2. The outdoor units shall be designed for low noise operation and shall comply with the external noise
criteria detailed elsewhere
3. The outdoor unit shall comprise of high efficiency variable speed invertor controlled compressors,
invertor controlled condenser fans, condenser coils, refrigeration accessories and safety control all
assembled in a common casing, wired and tested at the factory. The unit shall be supplied from the
factory with an operating charge of refrigerant and dehydrated compressor oil.
4. The compressors shall be of the high efficiency invertor driven scroll type, mounted on external spring
isolators, provided with crankcase heater, accumulator and muffler and located in a separate section
isolated from the condenser coil and fans.
5. The condenser fans shall be of the propeller type, arranged for either vertical or horizontal discharge,
weather proofed, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven by a totally enclosed and
permanently lubricated resiliently mounted electric motor. Fans shall have safety guards.
6. The condenser coils shall be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded
to aluminum plate fins, weather proof treated against corrosion and saline conditions factory applied
protective coatings.
7. The coils shall be circuited for sub-cooling and shall have guard protection for the condenser fins. Coils
shall be leak tested at the factory at 30 bar.
8. The casing shall be fully weatherproofed for outdoor installation and proof treated against corrosion
and saline conditions factory applied protective coatings, manufactured from a minimum 1.5mm
galvanised sheet steel. It shall be provided with openings for power and refrigerant connection with
removable panels for easy access to all internal components. A hinged access door shall be provided
on the control panel.
9. Electrical panels shall be factory wired and provided with a lockable door and a minimum of IP55
construction.
10. The unit shall be provided with all necessary refrigeration accessories, which shall include but not
a. Filter drier
b. Sight glass
c. Suction and discharge shut-off valves
11. The unit shall be provided with all necessary controls such as but not limited to H.P., L.P. switches, over
current relay, reverse phase, protector, anti-short cycle timer, with required contactors for fan motors
and compressor compatible with single or double stage room thermostat as per refrigerant circuit.
C. Controls
1. The VRF/VRV system shall be provided with factory wired and built-in direct digital control DDC for the
control and monitoring of the units from the project Building Management System. The central control
system shall provide the following control functions, via the BMS;
a. Control
1) Individual control of all indoor units, including start/stop, set point control, and fan speed.
2) Flexible group/zoning control
3) Fire system interlock
b. Monitoring
1) Graphical visualisation of every system
2) Indoor & outdoor operational mode
3) Alarm monitoring
4) Energy monitoring
2. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere every indoor unit shall be supplied with a remote control unit to
provide the following control functions;
a. Operational setting:
1) Start/ Stop.
2) Operation Mode
3) Temperature Setting
4) Air speed switching
5) Air flow direction
b. To monitor the following:
1) Status
2) Error and error content
3) Filter sign
4) Operating mode
5) Temperature setting
6) Indoor intake air temperature
7) Air speed and flow switching
c. Scheduling of the following:
1) Start and stop per day
2) Minimum setting
3. All units shall be provided with connections to the project BMS for monitoring the unit operation and
set points.
D. Refrigerant Pipework
1. Design, supply, install, test and commission all interconnecting refrigeration pipework between the
external and internal units.
2. All refrigerant pipework shall be installed in accordance with the VRF/VRV system manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. All refrigeration pipework shall comply with the relevant section of the Hydronic pipework specification
Section 232113 in addition to the clauses below.
4. The installation shall be executed by competent qualified/certified refrigerant operators fully

experienced in the type of work being carried out.
5. Configure the VRV systems with spare connections on the refrigerant controllers to allow for future
flexibility on piping of internal units
refrigerant and oil used.
8. Pipework shall be dry, completely free from scale and internally degreased.
10. The installation shall comply with BS EN 378.
13. The CA will place a strong emphasis on the standard of brazing and the associated quality control
14. Brazing and bronze welding shall be executed by competent qualified/certified operators fully
experienced in the type and size of work being carried out. Brazers shall hold a valid certificate of
competency issued by an approved body. Brazers without valid certificates and those without relevant
brazing work experience within the preceding three months shall undertake an approved competency
test, witnessed and certified by an approved body. Submit a copy of current certificates for all brazers
for examination by the CA before any works are commenced.
15. Copper joints shall be silver soldered, brazed or bronze welded to suit the operating temperature and
pressure and shall comply with BS EN 14324.
17. The ends of the pipework shall be cleaned and reamed out to the original internal diameter
before brazing.
18. Dry nitrogen shall be passed continuously through the pipework at minimal pressure and at an
adequate velocity during brazing or soldering to eliminate internal oxidation. All excess solder and flux
shall be removed on completion of joints.
19. Piping and other components which have been prepared and are not to be used immediately shall be
capped and sealed. During installation no component or length of tubing shall be left un-blanked
longer than necessary for installation.
20. The ingress of moisture, dirt and any other contaminants to the interior of pipework and other
components shall be prevented during storage.
21. Arrange all exposed pipe runs to present neat appearance, parallel with other pipe or service runs and
building structure. Ensure all vertical pipes are plumb or follow building line.
22. Space pipe runs in relation to one another, other services runs and building structure, allow for
specified thickness of thermal insulation and ensure adequate space for access to pipe joints, etc.
23. On completion of all site joints but immediately before connecting to the system components high
pressure nitrogen shall be flushed through the pipe,
24. Provision should be made for the Employers maintenance technicians to be able to conduct
thorough leak tests so joints in void spaces should be avoided.
25. Insulate the entire length of pipework as detailed in specification section 230710 (Insulation) and avoid
contact between copper and galvanising of support tray.
26. Pipework insulation shall be as detailed in section 230710 (HVAC Insulation) section of the
specification.
27. External refrigerant pipes subject to solar radiation shall either be shielded or have weather-proofed
closed-cell insulation applied, of the correct thickness, with a reflective or of a light coloured finish.
28. Include expansion joints if required to accommodate expansion and contraction. Cold bridging is to be
prevented.
29. After completion, the refrigerant pipework shall be subjected to pressure and leakage testing as BS EN
378.
30. After installation of pipework and prior to sealing of insulation joints and starting of equipment,
pipework should be pressure tested, held for 24 hours and checked for leaks, vacuumed/dehydrated
and held for 12 hours (minimum).
31. Refrigerant charge weight shall be calculated, to the actual installed length of pipework in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The charging shall be carried out with an appropriate
charging station.
32. Refrigerant pipework shall be continuously supported on a proprietary galvanised channel, angle or
tray support system.
33. Pipework shall be supported using sheradised steel clips with a rubber or plastic sleeve to prevent
chafing or vibration.
34. The arrangement of pipework and support shall be agreed with the CA before commencement of the
Works
35. The fixing and/or supports shall not allow any vibration to be transmitted to the structure.
36. All pipework shall be labelled with a reference number or other identification relating to the respective
condensing unit served. Identification shall be at 3m intervals and be clearly visible.
37. After installation of pipework and prior to sealing of insulation joints and starting of
38. Electrical cables shall not be fixed to refrigerant pipework.
E. Refrigerant leak detection
1. Enclosed spaces containing equipment or pipework charged with refrigerant shall be provided with
refrigerant leak detectors if required by BS EN 378 Part 1.
2. The detection system shall be capable of providing remote indication of an alarm condition.
3. The alarm shall be transmitted to the building management system or other controls system as
indicated
4. Detectors shall be wall mounted and shall alarm concentrations of refrigerant in excess of 500 ppm.
5. Where required units shall be located within equipment or provided with a remote sensor for location
within equipment.
F. Condensate Pipework
1. Connections to a condensate drainage system shall be provided to discharge water from the fan coils
into the above ground drainage system.
2. Gravity condense pipework shall be laid to fall at a gradient of not less than 1 in 100.
3. All condensate pipework shall be insulated as detailed in specification section 230710 (Insulation) to
prevent surface condensation.
4. All condensate pipework from evaporator units shall discharge into the foul water drainage stacks via
an approved trap arrangement unless indicated differently on the drawings.
5. The condensate drain shall be adequately fixed from soffit to a suitable fall. Minimum sizes shall allow
for adequate discharge.
6. Condensate traps shall be included in full compliance with CIBSE and HSE Legionella control
recommendations before discharging into a suitably sized trapped tundish.
7. Where adequate falls cannot be achieved a condensate pump with integral level switches shall be
provided. Obtain approval prior to any condensate pumps being installed.
8. Where flexible braded hose is utilised on pumped systems it shall be adequately supported for its
entire length and comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
9. All condensate pipework shall be provided with sealed and locked joints.
G. Nameplate
1. Each indoor and outdoor unit shall be complete with a unique identification reference label (as
indicated in project documents) fitted at the manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be
clearly visible through the wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as approved by the CA
prior to ordering and shall be utilised in the record documentation. In addition to this a securely attach
nameplate on each unit showing manufacturer name, serial, model number etc. is required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for the installation of any equipment.
C. Locate equipment as indicated on the Design Drawings to provide best possible connection arrangement
and accessibility for maintenance and servicing. Provide clearances on all sides of equipment as required
by the Statutory Authorities or manufacturer, whichever is greater.
D. Install items of equipment with due regard to Architectural treatment and ensure all items are level and
finished in keeping with good workmanship.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Indoor and Outdoor Units
1. Install indoor and outdoor units where indicated on the drawings, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published installation instructions and with recognised industry practices, to ensure
that units are in accordance with requirements and serve intended purposes.
2. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof decking and piping, as
necessary to interface installation of indoor and outdoor units with other work.
3. Provide access space around indoor and outdoor units for service as indicated, but in no case less than
that recommended by manufacturer. In isolated cases where free access around unit is restricted,
provide necessary catwalk to the acceptance of the CA.
4. Install floor mounted outdoor units on 150mm high reinforced concrete pad, 75mm larger on each
side than unit’s base unless indicated otherwise elsewhere.
5. Mount units on vibration isolators in accordance with the contract documents and manufacturers
recommendations.
6. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation
requirements of the electrical section of the HVAC installation and the requirements of applicable
sections of Division 26 Electrical Work Sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring
installation is acceptable.
A. Cleaning, Flushing and Inspecting:
1. Refer to other sections in Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections.
2. Clean, flush and vacuum system of all air and dirt. After flushing, remove, clean and replace all filters.
Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports, accessory items and any leaks.
A. Refrigerant System Leak Testing
2. Charge piping systems with refrigerant, based upon the actual pipe lengths installed and purge all air
and run all equipment for 24 hours and handover the system free from leakage. Test fails if leakage is
observed or pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.
B. The system manufacturer shall inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including connections and prepare a test and inspection report for submission to the CA.
C. Equipment Start-Up
1. Following receipt and acceptance, by the CA, of the installation inspection report the manufacturer
shall;
a. Check each item of equipment to ensure proper electrical connections, etc., and to verify proper
operation.
b. Upon completion of installation of equipment start-up, operate equipment to demonstrate

capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then re-test to
demonstrate compliance.
c. Check, verify and demonstrate remote signals operation.
d. Carry out all indicated electrical tests as applicable.
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
E. Test and adjust controls and safety devices.
F. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. All units shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide site training for facility operating staff
on all aspects of the indoor & outdoor units including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault
END OF SECTION
SECTION 238216 – AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Read this Section in conjunction with other related Divisions, the General Requirements, the Particular
B. Section Includes
1. Duct mounted heating and cooling coils (water, electric & direct expansion)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for all air coils, indicating construction,
dimensions, weights, performance and maintenance requirements.
2. Submit a detailed performance schedule, for each air coil.
a. Coil water flow rate
b. Coil pressure drops, air side and water side
c. Coil capacity
d. Coil air on and air off conditions
e. Coil water on and water off temperatures
f. Number of rows
g. Number of fins
1. 1. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every air coil. The drawing information shall
include
a. Coil Model
b. Coil arrangement
c. Information on all pipe connection sizes
e. Unit construction details and thermal break unit construction detail.
D. Test Reports:
1. Air coils shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
1. Submit maintenance instructions. include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance
manuals.
A. All air coils shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience in the design and manufacture of air coils.
The manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified
to ISO 9001 and 14001.
C. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Drawings or in
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards, including
a. BS 5141-1 – Specification for air heating and cooling coils, Method of testing for rating of cooling
coils.
b. BS 5141-2 – Specification for air heating and cooling coils, Method of testing for rating of heating
coils.
6. Eurovent certification and publications
13. ARI 410 Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. International
Electrotechnical Commission, IEC Standards.
standard.
A. All coils shall be shipped individually packed at the factory with the coil location and reference on the
outside of the shipping box. The packaging shall be sufficiently robust to prevent damage during shipping
B. Support piping to prevent damage to pipe and coil headers during Shipping and other components to
prevent damage during shipping.
damage to components, enclosures and finish. All coils shall be handled and stored in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Air coils shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes the requirements for the design, construction and installation of air coils and
components.
B. Provide air coils and products from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of manufacturers.
C. The duties and performance of the air coils shall be in accordance with the details indicated elsewhere and
include any allowance required to meet manufacturing and testing tolerances.
D. Coils shall incorporate lifting facilities for installation if dry weight exceeds 25kg.
E. All air coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with BS EN 1886 and BS EN 13053.
F. Individual components shall, in addition to the requirements of this section, comply with other relevant
2.2 WATER COILS:
A. General:
1. Coils shall be selected and located to ensure the full design air flow is evenly dispersed across the full
coil face area.
2. Coil design and sizing shall be based on figures obtained from performance tests described in BS 5141
for cooling and heating coils.
3. Coils shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance. All coils shall be tested before leaving
the manufacturer's works. An independently witnessed test certificate shall be issued to the CA for
each coil. Each coil shall be indelibly marked with the details of the test.
4. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere the maximum water coil pressure drop shall be as stated below;
a. Cooling – 20Kpa
b. Heating – 15kpa
5. Coils shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works to a minimum of 1.5 times the working
pressure or 8 bar gauge pressure whichever is the greater.
6. The flow and return battery connections shall be labelled and the air flow direction shall be indelibly
7. Coils shall be mounted so that they can be removed without dismantling the attached ductwork.
8. Coils with minor damage to fins shall be combed straight. Coils with extensive fin damage will not be
acceptable and shall be replaced.
9. Flow and return headers shall be arranged to ensure equal flow through all tubes. Provision shall be
made for expansion and contraction of the tubes and for effective venting and draining of the coil.
Each coil shall be provided with a full bore dirt pocket with drain valve on the lower connection.
coil depth and air resistance.
11. Tube wall thickness and coil construction shall be suitable for the system operating pressures and
temperatures.
12. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere coils shall be manufactured from 16mm (OD) copper tube with a
minimum wall thickness of 0.4mm and a 35mm pitch.
13. Connections up to and including 50 mm diameter for water pressures up to 350kPa shall be screwed
to BS EN 10226-1. Larger sizes and connections for pressures over 350kPa shall be flanged to BS EN
1092. Connections shall be clear of coil casings with disconnection joints positioned to permit full
withdrawal and removal of coils without extensive dismantling of adjacent pipework, ductwork or
other equipment.
14. Coils shall be mounted in a mild steel framed casing having a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm. Casings
shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 after manufacture. The casing shall be
of adequate strength for the size of the coil.
15. Coils shall comprise solid drawn seamless copper tubes unless otherwise stated. Copper tube shall
comply with BS EN 12451 and have a minimum wall thickness of 0.4mm unless stated otherwise and
the thickness shall be suitable shall for the pressure application. Headers shall be copper unless stated
16. Fins shall make firm and continuous contact with the primary tubes and be constructed from
aluminium or copper as stated elsewhere and have a minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall be of
the “rippled or louvered” type to suit the air flow requirements and be spaced at distance to suit the
specified performance of the coils
17. Unless otherwise indicated each coil shall be provided with a self-sealing combined pressure and
temperature test point on the flow and return. All coils shall include an air vent and drain plug.
18. Coils shall be of the cartridge type.
19. Access Panels shall be provided upstream in the ductwork
B. Chilled Water
1. Cooling coil face velocities shall not exceed 2.0 m/s and the resistance to airflow shall not exceed
125Pa unless otherwise indicated.
2. The air velocity across the coil shall be such that free water shall not be carried over from the coil to
the air-stream.
3. Unless otherwise indicated coils shall be constructed from copper tubes with continuous aluminium
fins pressure bonded to the tubes through mechanical expansion and all housed in stainless steel
frames. Fins shall have solid drawn spacing collars.
5. Cooling coils shall be installed on an insulated watertight drain tray complete with drain connection.
Trays and drains shall be arranged with longitudinal and cross gradients to ensure total removal of all
condensate. Drain trays shall be insulated with a minimum 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam
rubber insulation
1mm thickness and be provided with a threaded drain outlet. The condensate drain pipe connection
shall be insulated with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam rubber insulation and sealed with
plastic grommet.
7. Large coils constructed in two horizontal sections shall have separate connections/headers and shall
be assembled correctly to ensure that the top section condensate flows evenly onto the lower section.
Where this is not possible a separate condensate baffle/catch plate shall be installed with a separate
drain to the coil drain pan.
Eliminator sections shall be positioned to avoid damage from adjacent heater batteries and shall be of
materials unaffected by such heat. An access door shall be provided between the coil and eliminator
plates.
C. Heating Coils
1. Heating coil face velocities shall not exceed 3 m/s and the resistance to airflow shall not exceed 65Pa
2. Unless otherwise indicated, heat transfer surfaces shall consist of multiple seamless copper tubes with
extended surface of aluminium fin plates having solid drawn collars through which the tubes pass.
4. The assembled fin blocks shall be supported with galvanised sheet steel framing, having end plates
with accurately formed collars for tube support, allowing tube movement during expansion and
contraction without abrasion or chafing. The fin block tubes shall be extended and brazed into
seamless copper headers.
5. Flow and return headers shall be arranged so as to provide reverse return water flow and with the
return header at the air inlet face of the coil. Return bends shall be of copper of the same diameter as
the tubes and shall be brazed into the expanded fin block tube ends.
6. Large coils shall be split horizontally for ease of handling and installation.
7. Coil blocks shall be insulated and fitted with removable galvanised sheet steel metal enclosures.
2.3 COOLING COILS - DIRECT EXPANSION
A. Unless otherwise indicated coils shall be constructed from continuous aluminium/plate fins, mechanically
bonded to seamless refrigerant quality copper tubes.
B. All coils shall be provided with durable flexible epoxy polymer coating to protect the coil fins from
corrosion due to salt and sand laden air. The coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation and
have a uniform dry film thickness between 0.8 to 1.2mil on all surface areas including the fin edges.
Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to no less than 1000 hours salt spray per ASTM
B117-90. The coil selection shall include the de-rating of the output due to the coating and the coating
shall have a minimum 15 year guarantee.
C. The tube and fin spacing shall be arranged to ensure maximum heat transfer efficiency with minimum coil
depth and air resistance.
D. Direct-expansion refrigerant cooler coil materials shall be selected to minimise electrolytic action.
E. Coils shall be mounted so that they can be removed from the side without dismantling the attached
ductwork.
F. Refrigerant circuitry shall be designed to ensure equal distribution of refrigeration to each circuit across the
whole face of the coil.
G. Return or suction connections shall be arranged to ensure complete drainage of oil in the evaporator.
H. The design of the refrigerant passages in direct expansion type evaporators shall be such that any oil
present is always carried back to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity reduction.
I. The complete evaporator coil shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s works to twice the working
pressure. After testing, the coils shall be dehydrated under vacuum and charged with nitrogen before
sealing.
J. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.0 m/s unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
K. Evaporator and refrigeration shall be compatible with regard to duty and capacity control.
L. Evaporators shall be dehydrated and charged with an inert gas and sealed after manufacture.
M. Cooling coils shall be installed on an insulated watertight drain tray complete with drain connection. Trays
and drains shall be arranged with longitudinal and cross gradients to ensure total removal of all
condensate. Drain trays shall be insulated with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam rubber insulation
N. Unless otherwise indicated drain trays shall be fabricated from AISI 316 stainless steel of minimum 1mm
thickness and be provided with a threaded drain outlet. The condensate drain pipe connection through the
unit casing shall be insulated with 12 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam rubber insulation and sealed
with plastic grommet.
O. Intermediate drain trays shall be provided where the coil height exceeds 1metre and for each additional
1metre of coil height.
P. On large coils constructed in two horizontal sections they shall have separate connections headers and
shall be assembled correctly to ensure that the top section condensate flows evenly onto the lower section.
Where this is not possible a separate condensate baffle/catch plate shall be installed with a separate
condensate baffle/catch plate shall be installed with a separate drain to the coil drain pan.
Q. Unless otherwise indicated, PVC eliminator blades retained in galvanised steel plate shall be provided after
each coil and shall be located such that any carry over will collect and fall into the drain pan. Eliminator
sections shall be positioned to avoid damage from adjacent heater batteries and shall be of materials
unaffected by such heat. An access door shall be provided between the coil and eliminator plates.
R. Where coil connections pass through the casing they shall be complete with sealing rings and removable
plates.
2.4 ELECTRICAL HEATER BATTERIES
A. Electrical heater batteries shall consist of a number of heating elements of the enclosed type mounted in a
sheet steel casing. Elements shall be so arranged to permit removal without dismantling
B. Unless otherwise indicated the resistance to the air flow through the battery shall not exceed 25Pa and the
face velocity shall not exceed 6m/s nor be less than 2m/s.
C. An isolator and a hazard warning sign clearly indicating the operating voltage shall be fitted immediately
adjacent to the heater access opening.
D. In the proximity of hot areas, the electrical wiring insulation shall be suitable for the maximum
temperature.
E. The connections from each element shall be extended to a terminal box housed in an accessible position
with conduit/cable entry provision. They will be secured to the terminal box with air tight glands and will
be linked with either copper bus-bars or terminals as necessary to achieve step control requirements stated
elsewhere.
F. The number of elements in the heater shall be the same as or a multiple of the number of steps in the
controller. All heaters and heater sections of more than 3kW loading shall be balanced over three phases
and the complete heater bank shall be arranged for balanced operation on a three-phase, four-wire
system.
G. The elements shall be equally spaced over the open duct area.
H. The whole unit will be housed in a casing manufactured to the same dimensions as the ductwork.
I. Each electrical heater battery shall be complete with a manually reset thermal cut-out that provides an
audible or visual alarm signal on high temperature as indicated elsewhere and terminals for BMS
monitoring.
J. Unless otherwise indicated, the control of electrical heater batteries, except for remote boosters, shall be
interlocked with the system fan motor starter and an air flow sensing device to ensure that the heater
operates only when the fan is running and air flow is established.
K. Electrical heater batteries which are installed as boosters in branch ducts shall each have a local air flow
differential pressure switch to ensure that the heater operates when air flow is established.
2.5 HEAT RECOVERY
A. Run Around Coils
1. Run around coils shall comply with the requirements as stated for cooling coils stated elsewhere.
2. The coil manufacturer shall provide a complete package consisting of pipework, circulating pump and
expansion vessel.
3. The pipework shall be arranged to provide full flow through the supply coil at all times.
4. Pumps shall be constructed with cast iron bodies, bronze impellers and mechanical seals driven by
totally enclosed or drip proof fan cooled motor suitable for single phase 230V electricity supply. An
isolating valve and strainer shall be provided on the inlet and an isolating valve on the discharge.
together with a 15 mm safety valve on the pump discharge, set to discharge at a pressure of 5 bar
unless indicated otherwise.
6. The expansion vessel shall be of steel construction with internal flexible rubber diaphragm, precharged
with inert gas.
B. Nameplate:
1. Each air coil shall be complete with a unique identification reference label (as indicated in project
documents) fitted at the manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be clearly visible
through the wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as approved by the CA prior to
ordering and shall be utilised in the record documentation. In addition to this a securely attach
nameplate on each air coil showing manufacturer name, serial, model number etc. is required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All air coils shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Suspend all coils independently of the associated ductwork from the structure with elastomeric hangers.
C. Provide each piping high point with easily accessible automatic air vent and each low point with a drain
cock.
D. Do not support piping connections from coil.
E. All air coils shall be demountable from the ceiling void for maintenance purposes without causing damage
to the associated ductwork and insulation.
F. All air coils shall be installed with due considerations to access for maintenance and servicing.
Coordinate with all involved parties on site for the provision of maintenance access panels for the units
mounting inside false ceiling. Units shall be installed to permit commissioning and maintenance. The
Contractor shall ensure that casings, false ceilings, suspended floors and other concealment are arranged
to permit these functions to be carried out in a proper and satisfactory manner.
G. The method of commissioning the units shall be in accordance with CIBSE guidance. The exact method of
H. Supplementary steelwork necessary to support the air coils shall be designed, supplied and installed by the
Contractor. The steelwork shall be galvanised after manufacture and painted to match the air handling
unit.
I. Pipework and electrical cable entry points to the unit shall be sealed after installation to maintain the
airtightness of the ductwork.
J. External connections passing through the coil casing shall be provided with flexible air tight gaskets.
K. Airtight sleeves shall be provided for control sensors, instruments and test holes
L. Units shall be installed plumb and level.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect condensate drain to condensate drain line/system. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to
seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
C. Ground equipment and wiring in accordance with division 26.
1. Refer to Section 230010
3. All air coils shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 238219 - FAN COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Fan Coil Units - Horizontal and Vertical for Concealed Installations
2. Fan Coil Units - Horizontal for Exposed Installations
D. General:
1. Fan Coil Unit (FCU) shall mean a factory assembled packaged air conditioning terminal unit.
4. Fan Coil units shall be fully assembled and tested at the manufacturer’s works to demonstrate that
aerodynamic performance, air leakage, air flow, design resistance and noise levels are in compliance
with the specification and performance requirements. The results and a compliance statement shall be
submitted to the CA prior to delivery to site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data sheet indicating dimensions, weights, coils performance
(i.e. sensible, total heat transfer capacity), on/off coil conditions, sound power levels, fan performance,
fan curves, motor electrical characteristics, motor type, finish of materials, material of construction,
filter media, filter sizes, and filter quantities, electrical heater capacities, required clearance, entering
water temperature, water flow rates, water pressure drop, air pressure drop, furnish specialties and
accessories.
2. Submit detailed equipment schedule, with each fan coil individually tagged/referenced, area
served/room number, unit style/configuration (i.e. 2 pipe or 4 pipe unit), mode, unit type (single or
double skin), model number, dimensions (L x W x H), number of coils & rows of each coil, fan speed,
on coil/off coil temperatures, fin spacing, air flows, cooling (sensible and latent) , heating capacity,
external static pressure, power requirements (motor watts at each fan speed), entering water
temperature, water flow rates, water pressure drop, air pressure drop, left or right-hand piping
configuration.
3. Submit fan curves for each fan coil unit with specified operating point clearly plotted. Fan curves shall
indicate air volume, static pressure, fan speed and absorbed power
4. Submit sound power levels by octave band for each fan coil unit at rated capacity and at Low /
Medium/ High speed. Data shall be provided at unit discharge, intake and cabinet radiated level. If
C. Manufacturers Certified Drawings:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of
field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include cabinet
construction details: panel gauge, removal method for access panel, cabinet mounting method, and
filter and fan motor removal method.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Calculations
1. The external static pressure (ESP) calculation shall be submitted together with FCU selection at the
time of the material submittal. External static pressure calculations based on approved shop drawings
taking into account the actual resistance of all duct fittings (including grilles and sound
attenuators etc.) as provided by the manufacturers of such item for approval by the CA before
final selection of units.
E. Test Reports:
3. Fan coil units shall be factory tested for proper operation prior to shipment. Submit factory test
reports.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life.
F. Samples:
1. Submit sample fan coil unit with material submittal: one unit – size/type/model to be selected by the
CA, pre-piped, with factory-applied colour finish, and factory-installed piping package:
a. Sample unit shall comply with the specification in all respects.
b. Provide sample unit, pre-piped with piping accessories arranged as per the drawing details.
c. Configure sample unit to allow the fan to operate at all three speeds after temporary power
is provided.
d. The sample units shall be maintained on site as a benchmark for evaluation of the units installed.
G. Installation Instructions:
H. Maintenance Data:
I. Seismic Qualification Certificates (if seismic criteria applies to project):
1. Provide the following for fan coil units, accessories and components from manufacturer.
J. Supplementary Product Literature:
K. Submit a summary of deviations from the contract documents (if any).
L. Submit details of the manufacturers Quality Plan.
following:
4. Provide spare parts as detailed elsewhere.
A. All Fan Coil Units shall be sourced from a single manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years’ experience in the design and manufacture of FCU’s. The
manufacturing facilities shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards, certified to
ISO 9001 and 14001.
C. The manufacture shall have a committed customer care and technical support team, complimented by a
dedicated service team providing a call out service within the country the FCU’s are installed.
D. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Drawings or in
c. All Fan Coil Units shall be tested in accordance with BS 4856 Parts 1, 2 3 & 4 as applicable.
2. All Fan Coil Units shall be Eurovent Certified (Eurovent 6/3)
3. All Fan Coil Units shall be manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned as recommended in CIBSE
TM43
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
1. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labelled as defined in IEC by a
testing agency acceptable to the Municipality and Utility Authority Having Jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
2. All wiring shall comply with BS 7671
with the specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the CA, at no additional cost.
standard.
G. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose
and shall, where applicable, conform to the standards of and shall be approved from Local By-laws and
Regulations.
H. All materials required for installation under these specifications shall be subject to the acceptance of the
A. Units shall be shipped fully assembled & individually packed at factory. Mark the fan coil unit room
locations and unit reference on the outside of the shipping box.
B. Each fan coil unit shall have lifting lugs of shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement.
C. Support piping to prevent damage to pipe and coil headers during Shipping and Restrain fans and other
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Fan coil units shall be provided with a warranty as detailed in Division 230010.
A. Do not operate fan coil units for any purpose including construction activities, temporary or permanent,
until pipework and ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, damper control is
in operation, and fan has been run under observation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes the requirements for the design, construction and installation of fan coil units and
components.
B. Provide factory packaged and tested fan coil units from one of the manufacturers in the schedule of
manufacturers.
C. Fan coil units shall be selected to provide the outputs as detailed in the equipment schedules or on the
drawings when operating at the specified conditions and parameters on medium speed unless stated
differently elsewhere within the specification, drawings or schedules.
D. Fan coil units shall operate within +10% of the specified cooling capacity and within +5% of the specified
air volume.
E. Fan Coil Unit construction: Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment schedules, drawings or particular
specification.
1. Fan coil units with air volumes of less than 500l/s shall be single skin construction providing the
specified noise criteria can be achieved, alternatively use double skin units.
2. Fan coil units with air volumes of 500 l/s and above shall be double skin construction. The casing
thickness shall be sufficient to comply with the specified noise criteria, however it shall not be less than
12.5mm
3. Fan coil units with air volumes of 1200 l/s and above shall comply with the Air Handling Unit
Specification.
4. Fan coil units installed in ambient air (non-air conditioned space) shall comply with the Air Handling
Unit Specification.
5. All coils shall be provided with a flushing bypass to allow the hydraulic systems to be flushed without
passing dirty fluids through the coils. Flushing bypasses shall be provided to all coils irrespective if
these are shown on drawings or not. All bypasses shall be removed upon completion of works.
6. Calculate the final fan coil unit external static pressure based upon the Installation drawings and final
grille/diffuser selections. Revise fan coil unit selections as required, at no additional cost to the
employer.
7. Review all fan coil units specified conditions and parameters using coordinated shop drawings. Revise
fan coil unit selections as required, at no additional cost to the employer.
2.2 CASING
A. Unless otherwise indicated, casings shall be provided as part of the unit to enclose the entire coil, fan,
motor, and filter sections.
B. Each ducted fan coil units shall be provided with factory manufactured plenums for discharge connections
unless otherwise indicated. Any spigots not used shall be capped off with a blanking plate.
C. Casings shall be corrosion resistant and of rigid construction being adequately stiffened to prevent
drumming, vibration and distortion.
D. Sharpe edges shall be removed and joints sealed with mastic.
E. Unless otherwise indicated all concealed fan coil units shall be provided with integral return air plenum
chamber by the fan coil unit manufacturer, the plenum may be omitted if the Contractor can demonstrate
that the specified room noise levels can be achieved without a plenum. The plenum shall include an
acoustic lining (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) and an access panel for filter removal. Any spigots not
used shall be capped off with a blanking plate.
F. Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with anti-vibration mountings. The motor and fan shall be
mounted on a detachable mounting plate that can be removed from the fan coil unit enclosure as
one assembly. The cable connections to the fan motor shall be of sufficient length to facilitate the
mounting plate and the assembly shall be opened up for cleaning the fan and motor. It shall also be
possible to remove the fan impeller scroll casing in order to clean the fan blades.
G. Single Skin Unit
1. Unless indicated otherwise, fan coil unit casing and plenum chambers shall be manufactured from a
minimum 1.0mm galvanized sheet metal for air volumes up to 200l/s and 1.2mm for air volumes up to
500l/s.
2. Casings shall be lined with thermal and acoustic insulation to maintain air borne and breakout noise
within the specified limits and to conserve energy. Insulation shall be high density with class ‘O’ fire
rating and with a minimum thickness of 12mm. It shall be securely attached to the unit without
leaving any pockets or un-insulated casing. The thermal insulation and acoustic lining shall not inhibit
or support bacterial growth and shall be manufactured from materials with zero ozone depletion (CFC
and HCFC free). Prior to placing orders submit to the CA written confirmation from the manufacturer
confirming all proposed materials are CFC and HCFC free. The insulation shall comply with UL04, NFPA
90A.
H. Double Skin Unit
1. Unless indicated otherwise, fan coil units with air volumes of 500l/s and above shall be of double skin
construction with the inner and outer skin manufactured from 1.2mm galvanized sheet metal.
2. Casings shall be lined with thermal and acoustic insulation to maintain air borne and breakout noise
within the specified limits and to conserve energy. Insulation shall be high density with class ‘O’ fire
rating and with a minimum thickness of 12mm. It shall be securely attached to the unit without
leaving any pockets or un-insulated casing. The thermal insulation and acoustic lining shall not inhibit
or support bacterial growth and shall be manufactured from materials with zero ozone depletion (CFC
and HCFC free). Prior to placing orders submit to the CA written confirmation from the manufacturer
confirming all proposed materials are CFC and HCFC free. The insulation shall comply with UL04, NFPA
90A.
2.3 FAN & MOTOR
A. Fan:
1. Fans shall be directly driven, forward curved, double inlet width (DIDW) centrifugal type and capable of
delivering the required air volume against the external resistance as indicated.
2. Fan scrolls and impellers shall be either galvanized steel or aluminium.
3. Each fan shall have its own resiliently mounted motor. The fan and motor unit shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. Fans shall be provided with permanently lubricated, self-aligning ball bearings.
4. The fan layout and suction chamber design shall be arranged to provide as even a velocity profile as
possible across the coil.
B. Motor:
1. In addition to that indicated below fan motors shall comply with requirements as stated elsewhere
2. AC Motors:
a. Motors shall be three speeds, totally enclosed type or open drip proof for protection against dust,
external rotor, and permanent split capacitor type. Power factor shall be 0.95 or better.
b. Bearings shall be the sealed for life ball race type with a manufacturers’ minimum life expectancy
of 40,000 hours under typical operating conditions. Overload protection shall be afforded to each
individual motor by an auto resetting thermal contactor.
c. Motor insulation shall be to class ‘B’ with the enclosure to IP44 unless stated otherwise. All FCU’s
with EC motors shall be complete with a transformer and suitable for single phase power supply
(240 volts, single phase 50Hz).
3. EC Motor:
a. Motors shall be of direct current, electronically commutated type. Each motor shall have an
integral power supply; external power supplies are not acceptable.
b. All FCU’s with EC motors shall be complete with a transformer and suitable for single phase power
supply (240 volts, single phase 50Hz).
c. Filters are required to meet the harmonic requirements of BS EN 61000-3-2 and shall be supplied
and fully wired by the fan coil manufacturer. The motor should be insulated to Class B with the
enclosure to IP44 unless stated otherwise.
d. Fan motor shall be constant torque brushless DC motor which is able to sense the torque applied
to the motor shaft by the blower wheel and then self-adjust to maintain a constant value to get
more even airflow over a wider range of static pressures.
e. Motor shall be with gradual speed change for start, stop and discrete speed changes to eliminate
the occupant’s awareness of the change.
f. Motor shall have programmable controls including alarm outputs, speed monitoring, rotation
direction, start/ stop ramp rates, on/off blower delays-all stored in the motor’s microprocessor.
g. Motor shall have robust electronics that allow the motor to operate trouble-free in the event of
power irregularities without spark gap, short power-line interruptions or under-voltage conditions.
h. EC motors shall have moisture resistant design
4. Terminal Box:
a. All fan coil units shall be provided with factory installed pre-wired terminal box to IP44 with the
fan motor wired to the box.
2.4 COILS (HEATING & COOLING)
A. Unless otherwise indicated, cooling and heating coils shall be formed of seamless copper tubes and shall
have the duties as indicated. Coils shall be provided with mechanically bonded aluminium fins. Fins to be
punched with die formed collars to afford maximum heat transfer surface area with the tubes. All coils are
to be unhanded and circuited to optimise output but ensure free venting and free draining.
B. Each coil shall be provided with a key operated drain and vent. Access to the drain and/or vents shall not
be hindered or restricted by other component.
C. Cooling coils shall be a minimum 4 rows and heating coils shall be a minimum 2 rows.
D. Coil water velocities shall be no greater than 1.5 m/s and air velocities no greater than 2.0 m/s at the
specified speed unless otherwise stated.
E. Cooling coils & heating coils shall be selected so that pressure drop does not exceed 15 KPa and 10 KPa
respectively unless otherwise stated.
F. Every coil shall be leak tested using dry air under water to 20 bar. Every coil to valve connection should be
tested under water.
G. Cooling coils shall be suitable for the chilled water flow and return temperatures required for the project.
H. For units catering for a high proportion of latent heat removal (SHR ratio less than 0.6), the coils shall be
shall be coated with a durable flexible epoxy polymer coating to protect the coil fins from corrosion.
I. Coil must be provided with end sockets and shall have female pipe threads. These sockets shall be shipped
with plastic caps.
J. The water connections shall be situated either on the left side or the right side of the unit to suit the
installation requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that FCU’s are ordered with the
connections on the correct side of the unit.
2.5 DRAIN PANS
A. Drain pans shall be one piece and positioned to collect and retain all condensate generated by the coil and
valve assemblies.
B. The drain pan shall be constructed of one piece die formed stainless steel (SS 304) minimum 1 mm thick or
1.2mm polyester powder coated galvanised steel and pitched for drainage to collect and retain all
condensate generated by the coil and valve assemblies. The size of the drain connection shall be adequate
to deal with the condensate and capable of adequately discharging condensate to condensate drain
without allowing condensate to collect in pockets or remain as standing water in the drain pan.
C. The entire underside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with minimum closed cell fire retardant
polyurethane insulation 20 kg/m³ density and to ensure that no condensation is formed on the underside
in compliance UL04, NFPA 90A and AHJ.
D. An extension drain pan shall be provided for installation under the valve package. Drain pans shall be large
enough to collect all condensate from the coils, return bends and pipework connections.
E. Where the connection cannot be taken from the bottom of the pan a local sump shall be formed in the
bottom of the pan and a side outlet drain connection provided. The drain connection shall be threaded for
easy connection.
F. Drain pans shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to setting the units to work.
G. Where a gravity drain system cannot be provided due to site constraints provide condensate pumps at the
discretion of the CA at no additional cost. The operation of condensate pumps (where required) shall be
checked by pouring a small quantity of water into the drip tray prior to setting the units to work.
2.6 FILTER
A. Fan coil units shall be provided with a washable/cleanable panel filter located at the inlet section. Filters
shall be contained in lightweight frames arranged to facilitate replacement. They shall seal positively
against sealing strips fixed to the unit.
B. Filters shall be capable of being removed without contacting the dirty media.
C. Access to the filter shall be obtained without major dismantling of the unit, ceiling where applicable or
connecting ductwork.
D. Air filters shall have a performance classification of Eurovent Grade G3 when tested in accordance with BS
EN 779 unless otherwise indicated or MERV 6 with minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a
minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
E. Prior to practical completion all fan coil unit filters shall be cleaned or replaced with new as applicable.
2.7 ELECTRIC RESITSANCE HEATING COILS
A. Electric heater batteries shall consist of a number of heating elements of the enclosed type mounted in a
sheet steel casing. Elements shall be so arranged to permit removal without dismantling the Fan Coil Unit.
B. Unless otherwise indicated the resistance to the air flow through the battery shall not exceed 25 Pa and the
face velocity shall not exceed 6m/s nor be less than 2m/s.
C. An isolator and a hazard warning sign clearly indicating the operating voltage shall be fitted immediately
adjacent to the heater access opening.
D. In the proximity of hot areas, the electrical wiring insulation shall be suitable for the maximum
temperature.
E. The connections from each element shall be extended to the Fan Coil Unit terminal box. The connections
shall be secured to the terminal box with air tight glands and will be linked with either copper bus-bars or
terminals as necessary to achieve step control requirements stated elsewhere.
F. The number of elements in the heater shall be the same as or a multiple of the number of steps in the
controller. All heaters and heater sections of more than 3kW loading shall be balanced over three phases
and the complete heater bank shall be arranged for balanced operation on a three-phase, four-wire system.
G. The elements shall be equally spaced.
H. The whole unit will be housed in a casing manufactured to the same dimensions as the Fan Coil Unit.
I. Each electrical heater battery shall be complete with a manually reset thermal cut-out that provides an
audible or visual alarm signal on high temperature cut-out as indicated elsewhere.
J. Unless otherwise indicated, the control of electrical heater batteries shall be interlocked with the fan motor
starter and an air flow sensing device to ensure that the heater operates only when the fan is running and
air flow is established.
K. Electrical heater batteries shall be nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum,
mounted in ceramic inserts in galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection.
2.8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Transformers shall be provided as necessary to give the correct electrical supply to the unit controls.
B. Comply with the requirements as detailed elsewhere.
2.9 ACOUSTICS
A. Fan coil units shall be selected to meet the specified noise criteria. Ensure that due allowance is made for
the accumulative effect of a number of fan coils and any other equipment operating in the same space.
B. Unless otherwise indicated the fans shall be selected and set at medium (design) speed operation to give
the specified NR levels.
C. Standard manufacturer’s acoustic data is generally based on typical rooms with a series of assumptions.
Provide acoustic data for fan coil units based on actual site conditions. Due consideration shall be given to
the surface finishes and noise interferences from adjacent spaces.
D. At the request of the CA arrange to test the FCU’s at design conditions at no extra cost. Provide NR
measurements
E. Tests requested to establish the NR level of individual units shall be conducted at the design condition for
the unit on test. The NR level recorded shall be the maximum level of two recordings taken at 1.5m from
the discharge grille and 1.5m from the intake grille.
F. Where the specified noise criteria cannot be achieved with standard fan coil units, provide purpose
made a fan coil unit with ECM motors, double skin unit , multiple smaller units etc. or attenuators on the
fan coil units. The fan total resistance shall be recalculated to accommodate the total pressure drop
including attenuators.
G. Fan coil units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and shall have
minimum vibration during operation. Anti- vibration mounting shall be provided to prevent the
transmission of noise and vibration to the building or to adjacent services.
H. An acoustic liner to all fan coil unit ductwork shall be provided, unless otherwise stated, made up of black,
strong, durable, dimensionally stable woven glass fabric with zero fibre migration of 15 mm thickness and
48 kg /m3 density up to a length of 3.0 meter from the face of the unit. The beginning and finish shall be
held in position by metal strip and with approved adhesive applied sufficiently.
I. Flame proof flexible ductwork connections shall be fitted on all intake and discharge connections of fan
coil units to prevent the transmission of vibration through the ducts to occupied spaces. Flexible
connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated canvas. Connections shall fit closely
and be secured in airtight fashion to connections to ductwork, and FCU. The material shall have a
penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested in accordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible
and without strain or distortion. Flexible connections shall be 150 mm minimum in width.
J. Should the vibration be excessive and not within the acceptable standards, provision of adequate vibration
isolation shall be provided.
2.10 NAMEPLATE
A. Each fan coil unit shall be complete with a unique identification reference label (as indicated in project
documents) fitted at the manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be clearly visible through
the wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as approved by the CA prior to ordering and shall
be utilised in the record documentation. In addition to this a securely attach nameplate on each fan coil
unit showing manufacturer name, serial, model number etc. is required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before fan coil unit installation, examine for unit support and locations, piping, and electrical connections
to verify actual locations, sizes, installation tolerance, clear space recommended by the manufacture and
other conditions affecting performance, maintenance, and operation.
B. Fan coil unit locations indicated on drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before
undertaking piping and electrical connections.
C. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and conditions affecting performance of
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All Fan Coil Units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. The installation shall prevent the transmission of noise and vibration to the building or to adjacent services.
C. Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers.
D. Provide each piping high point with easily accessible automatic air vent and each low point with an
accessible drain cock.
E. Do not support piping connections from water coil.
F. All fan coil units shall be demountable from the ceiling void for maintenance purposes without causing
damage to the associated ductwork and insulation.
G. All fan coil units installed within the false ceilings shall give due considerations to access for maintenance
and servicing. Coordinate with all involved parties on site for the provision of maintenance access panels
for the units mounting inside false ceiling. Units shall be installed to permit commissioning and
maintenance. The Contractor shall ensure that casings, false ceilings, suspended floors and other
concealment are arranged to permit these functions to be carried out in a proper and satisfactory manner.
H. The method of commissioning the units shall be in accordance with CIBSE guidance. The exact method of
I. Fan Coil Unit Installation Requirements
1. At the time of "testing and commissioning" all the throwaway filters shall be replaced by permanent
filters for each fan coil unit.
2. The units shall be installed level to ensure that condensate from the drain pan flows freely. Provide
insulated drain lines with falls of 1:100 or as indicated on the drawings.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Connect piping to fan coil unit to the factory fitted hydronic piping package. Install piping package at
site if shipped loose.
1. Valves and strainers on all pipework connections shall be pipeline size, not connection size.
2. Connect condensate drain to condensate drain line/system. Install condensate trap of adequate
depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors as detailed above. Comply
with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.
C. Ground equipment and wiring in accordance with requirements as stated elsewhere.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components
and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Prepare a test and
inspection report.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
C. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Start-up Services
B. All fan coil units shall be cleaned on the completion of commissioning and prior to handover.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide FCU manufacturer trained and certified representative to provide site training for facility operating
staff on all aspects of the FCU’s including but not limited to operation, maintenance and fault finding for all
types of FCU’s used on the project.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 239000 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Read this Section in conjunction with other related Division 230010, the Particular Specification, Schedules,
B. Section Includes
1. Building Management systems and controls materials and workmanship
D. Definitions
1. BMS shall mean the Building Management Systems/Controls for the automatic control, and
monitoring of the Engineering Services, including all control/starter panels, control wiring and power
wiring from the control/starter panels to the field mounted plant and equipment as detailed within
Division 230020 (Particular Specification).
2. Exposed defines equipment, cables, etc. which are visible, on the roof, in service tunnels, in rooms
without ceilings or within open grid ceilings.
3. Concealed defines equipment, cables, etc. which are not normally visible, as in plenums, chases, shafts
and above ceilings.
4. Ambient defines the normal temperature to which the equipment, cables, etc. is exposed.
E. General:
2. All control panels and starter panels shall be fully assembled and tested at the controls specialists’
works to demonstrate that they are in compliance with the specification and performance
requirements. The results of the workshop testing and a compliance statement shall be submitted to
the CA prior to delivery to site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit for approval by the CA manufacturer’s technical product data for all equipment, plant,
components, accessories, etc. that are to be used on the project demonstrating compliance with the
specification.
2. The following information shall be submitted to the CA for review and comment prior to manufacturer
and installation:
a. System Configuration:
1) Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location and type of all control
panels.
2) Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.
3) Modularity.
4) Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement.
b. Points schedule for each point in the BMS, including:
1) Point Type.
2) Object Name.
3) Expanded ID.
4) Display Units.
5) Controller Type.
6) Address
c. Equipment schedules (listing control sensors, valves, computer hardware and software and any
other devices)
d. Power cable sizing calculations
e. Technical details of all field and panel mounted equipment
f. Control valve schedule
g. Schedule of proposed set points
h. Specification of front-end terminal equipment
i. Front-end colour graphics pages
j. Schedule of alarms and priorities
k. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus.
l. Room Schedule including a separate line for each unit indicating location and address. Details of
all BMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.
m. Product data sheets or marked catalogue pages including part number, photo and description for
all products including software.
n. Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration.
o. Provide technical details for each cable (type, size, function, tag, etc.).
p. Provide identification tags for all control equipment on the appropriate mechanical/ electrical
sections.
q. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy management software
provided for this project.
r. A signed certificate stating that the BMS Contractor 'has read the performance and functional
requirements, understanding them and his technical proposal shall comply with all parts of the
Specification'.
s. Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with this Section and
governing regulations
t. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials and systems.
u. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
1. The controls specialists certified drawings shall include the following.
a. Network schematic (detailing all computer hardware, interfaces, locations and cable specifications)
b. Submit schematic wiring diagrams for all control panels and starter panels indicating the detailed
wiring arrangements within the panels and all outgoing controls and power circuits.
c. Submit detailed control panel general arrangement drawings indicating the size, instrumentation,
construction, access, weight, etc.
d. Submit coordinated working drawings indicating all of the BMS services (Cable routing, control
devices etc.) which have been fully co-ordinated with all other services (electrical, HVAC, plumbing,
fire protection, etc.) including their relation to the structure and building fabric. The electrical
installation details shall include; identifying the power, control and network cables and the
proposed method of containment and cable types)
e. All instrument installation plans, detailed panel diagrams, point to point wiring diagrams, control
loops and control diagram including detailed sequence of operation using the accepted part
numbers.
f. BMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.
g. Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.
D. Test Reports:
1. Control panels shall be factory tested for operation prior to shipment.
1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and installation method statement, which shall include;
a. Testing and commissioning
b. Proving of the system and demonstration
c. Off-site works inspection and testing
d. Installation of site wiring
1. Submit maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings,
and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.
1. Submit supplementary product literature including statements from the manufacturers of the
individual components for the design life of the products and materials to be installed.
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning frequency.
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 (General Specification) and the following.
B. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of control
systems for HVAC applications and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality management standards,
C. Materials used in fire-rated assemblies shall bear the UL, or other approved testing laboratory,
Classification marking, acceptable to the Local Authority having jurisdiction.
D. Flame-proofing treatments subject to deterioration from moisture or humidity shall not be acceptable.
E. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements shown on the Drawings or
specified elsewhere, the Works shall be in accordance with provisions of the following standards and
codes. The current editions of the publications listed below form a part of this Section.
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards.
G. Where 2 or more references conflict, the most stringent shall take precedence as determined by the CA.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall be listed and labelled as defined in IEC/NEMA by a
testing agency acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
I. All materials supplied and installed shall be new and the best quality obtained for the intended purpose
and shall, where applicable, conform to the standards of and shall be approved from Local Bylaws and
Regulations.
J. All materials required for installation under these specifications shall be subject to the acceptance of the
K. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
3. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the BMS Contractor of his
standard.
A. All control panels and starter panels shall be shipped fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging
limitations. Panels not shipped fully assembled shall be assembled at site by the Controls System Specialist.
Each section shall have lifting lugs for shipping to allow for field rigging and final placement of section.
B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site as detailed elsewhere
1. All plant, equipment, components and accessories shall be stored and handled in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Protective covers shall be provided for all plant, equipment, components and accessories, with the
references and details of the contents located on the outside of the shipping box/packaging.
C. Storage
1. Store in dry and dust free locations.
2. Retain protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
D. Handling
1. Protect the equipment against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All plant, equipment, components and accessories installed in the Works shall be approved by the CA prior
to ordering.
B. All plant, equipment, components and accessories shall be as far as it is practicable of the same
manufacture and style to provide conformity and to simplify maintenance.
C. The controls system shall comply with the following EC Directives:
1. Low voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and amendments 93/68/EEC
2. Construction Products Directive 89/106/EEC
3. General Product Safety Directive 92/59/EEC
D. Ensure that the controls system/BMS installation complies with BS 7671.
E. Control panels shall comply with BS EN 60439-1 and BS EN 61439 -2 Low voltage switchgear and control
assemblies.
F. Ensure that the controls system/BMS installation can operate with the electricity supply.
G. Ensure that the controls system/BMS installation complies with:
1. The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2005 (SI 2005/281).
2. BS EN 61000-6-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).Generic standards. Immunity for residential,

commercial and light industrial environments
3. BS EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).Generic standards. Immunity standard for

industrial environments.
4. BS EN 61000-6-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).Generic emission standards. Emission standard

for residential, commercial and light industrial environments.
H. All materials shall be strictly in accordance with this specification.
I. Materials and their method of application shall not constitute a known risk to health during application or
use.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
A. General
1. All grouped controls shall be enclosed in a purpose-made panel. Motor starters and controllers for
mounting in the panel shall comply with BS EN 60947. Panels shall provide the BS EN 60947 degree of
protection indicated.
2. Purpose-made panels shall comply with the requirements for assemblies contained in BS EN 61439
and BS EN 61439 -2
3. Control panels shall be manufactured, equipped, wired and tested by the manufacturer at works
before delivery to site.
4. Unless otherwise indicated 15% spare back-plate capacity shall be provided. The power distribution
system within panels shall be sized to allow additional switchgear to suit the spare capacity provision.
5. All control panels providing electrical supplies to or control of mechanical services plant and
equipment shall be constructed to comply with the latest relevant statutes, regulations and standards.
6. Clean schematic diagrams shall be provided, contained in a plastic pocket fixed permanently within
each door or within a purpose made housing.
7. Indicating lamps, instruments and controls shall be, as far as is practicable, of the same manufacturer
and style to provide uniformity of appearance and to facilitate maintenance.
8. Externally visible equipment shall be flush mounted with minimum projection and fixed securely to the
front of panels.
B. Construction
1. Panels shall be designed to be wall mounted (with external fixing lugs) or floor standing as appropriate
and shall be constructed from galvanised steel plate of not less than 2mm thickness.
2. Detachable gasketed gland plates for cable/wiring entry shall be provided on all appropriate
elevations.
3. Surfaces shall be properly prepared before final finishing. All sections of the control panel shall, prior
to assembly, be degreased and chromate etched followed by two coats of primer before being stove
enameled. The panel external colour shall be as agreed with the CA prior to manufacturer.
4. Finished panels shall be without sharp edges and exposed fastenings smooth surfaced. All exposed
screws, bolts and similar fastenings shall be protectively plated.
5. Panels shall be adequately protected against damage or deterioration during and after delivery and
installation on site until practical completion. Cleaning, making-good and re-spraying shall be carried
out at no cost to the contract.
6. The maximum height shall be 2200mm, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Panels wider than 1600mm shall be manufactured in sections unless otherwise indicated. Each section
shall be supplied with fully numbered interconnecting terminals. Sections shall be bolted and wired
together on site after positioning by the controls manufacturer.
8. Unless otherwise indicated the doors shall be 800mm maximum in width and shall be fitted with
concealed hinges to facilitate the removal of the door panel if required.
9. A minimum of two doors are to be provided on any panels wider than 800mm. Doors shall be
complete with dust excluding gaskets around their perimeter.
10. Doors shall be secured by integral handle with provision for locking, such provision being not more 2
metres above floor level. One key shall fit all locks provided on all panels delivered to the site.
11. Panels shall be located so that full and safe access is obtained to itself, other apparatus, terminals and
interconnecting wiring.
12. Panels shall be drip-proof, dust-proof and vermin proof with a minimum standard of protection to
IP54 for internal units or IP65 for externally mounted panels unless otherwise indicated.
13. The temperature rise in motor control panels shall not exceed the limits stated in BS EN 61439.
Control panels shall be adequately ventilated and temperature controlled to maintain the internal
operating conditions to ensure satisfactory operation of all panel mounted equipment. As necessary
internal forced cooling, ventilation grilles, internal anti-condensation heaters and thermostats shall be
provided.
14. Internal lighting and external lap-top shelves shall be provided as appropriate.
15. Insulating rubber matting of the appropriate voltage grade shall be provided and extend the full
length of the control panel at the front and where, accessible, at the rear.
16. Panels not mounted on concrete plinths shall be provided with a purpose made steel plinth to match
the panel. Plinths shall be a minimum of 100mm high unless otherwise indicated.
17. All panels shall be provided with fixing holes. Large panels or panels exceeding 50kg shall be provided
with detachable lifting eyes.
18. A power outlet shall be provided inside the panel complete with 30 mA RCD protection.
19. Equipment shall be shrouded as necessary to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
20. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere control panels shall be Form 2, type 2 with the exception of the
following which shall be Form 4;
a. Smoke control panels, including car park exhaust
b. Generator backed control panels
c. Where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
d. Project specific critical systems as detailed elsewhere
21. Form 2 panels shall comprise compartment assemblies complying with BEAMA Installation
recommendations for Form 2, type 2 of BS EN 61439. They shall be provided with a physical vertical
delineation between the power section and the BMS/controls section.
22. Equipment, busbars and wiring shall be either totally enclosed or protected as required by BS EN
61439-6for the class of panel.
23. Form 4 panels shall be a CE marked, ASTA certified, multi-cubicle, type-tested assembly (TTA) to BS EN
61439-1 with Form 4 segregation in accordance with BEAMA Installation recommendations. They shall
be constructed to ensure separation of busbars from all functional units and separation of all
functional units from one another. Separation of terminals for external conductors associated with a
functional unit from those of any other functional unit and the busbars.
C. Electrical isolation
1. All control panels shall be provided with a door interlock isolator controlling the main incoming
supply. The isolator shall be capable of making and breaking on full load without damage.
Additionally, the isolator shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts to isolate any secondary supplies to
the control panel.
2. All terminals of the isolator (incoming and outgoing) are to be shrouded to prevent accidental contact.
3. As indicated the control system only shall be energised whilst the incoming supplies are isolated. A
suitable by-pass fuse shall be fitted with the necessary shrouding and identification.
4. The panel shall be constructed such that power (400/230V) equipment is located behind the
interlocked isolator door
5. Control (extra low voltage) equipment shall be located within a separate section to ensure segregation
from power equipment.
D. Control panel wiring
1. Internal power wiring shall be identified by colour code in accordance with BS 7671. Control circuit
and other wiring shall be to BS 6231.
2. All cables shall be colour coded and numbered using a proprietary marking system comprising plastic
ferrules of the correct size for the cable. Cables shall be identified at both ends and shall be cross
referenced with the wiring diagram.
3. All terminals shall be permanently identified by colour coded inserts with black lettering and shall be
cross-referenced with the panel wiring diagram.
4. Power and control cables shall be terminated using crimp type connectors or other approved
termination devices. Soldered terminations will not be accepted.
5. Low voltage power and extra low voltage wiring shall be segregated throughout the panel.
6. Provision shall be made for the earthing of all non-current carrying panel and equipment metalwork
including panel door(s). All necessary electrical bonding shall be provided. A copper earth bar rated
for the panel fault current shall be provided for connection of the incoming earth and the field power
circuit protective conductors. Access shall be provided for making connections to the earthing system.
7. All internal wiring shall be enclosed within wire-ways. Internal wiring that is required to pass between
the power and control sections of the panel shall be enclosed within separate or segregated wire-ways
to ensure electrical separation of the power and control systems.
8. Individual terminals shall be provided for each connection entering or leaving the panel and shall be
sized with regard to the type and size of cable taking into account the maximum circuit loading and
length (volt drop).
9. Terminals for power and control wiring shall be located within their respective panel sections, where
applicable.
10. Separate terminals shall be provided for the connection of the screening of screened or shielded
cables.
11. No external wiring will be permitted to extend beyond the incoming/outgoing terminals of the panel,
except those cables which are terminating directly onto BMS outstation devices.
12. Looms shall be limited in size to permit tracing, identification and replacement of faulty cables.
13. Busbars where installed, shall be rated to withstand, at any position the full fault level related to the
largest protective fuse that could be used with the main panel isolator. They shall be fully insulated
throughout their length and shall be mounted within a separate labelled enclosure within the panel.
E. Internal equipment
1. A technical summary identifying makes of generic components to be mounted in or on control panels

shall be submitted to the CA for comment prior to manufacturer.
2. No equipment shall be incorporated into a control panel unless it conforms to the requirements of the
relevant British Standard(s) or carrying the appropriate ASTA BEAB approved mark or other approved
testing standard certificate.
3. Equipment shall be positioned within the panels to provide a neat and orderly arrangement.
4. Equipment shall not be fixed to openable doors.
5. Internal equipment shall be fixed to purpose-made rails or mounting bars. All fixings shall incorporate
shake-proof washers or other vibration resisting fastenings.
6. All starters, relays etc. shall be of the open type and shall be suitable for DIN rail mounting.
7. All outgoing power supplies to remote equipment shall be individually protected by HRC fuses or
MCB’s.
8. Fuses/MCBs shall be grouped and mounted so as to be readily accessible without danger.
9. All fuses and MCB's shall be identified on a permanently marked fuse chart mounted inside the panel.
10. Unless otherwise indicated a minimum of 3 spare fuses for each size and type used shall be mounted
in a suitable carrier within the panel.
11. Where short circuit ratings are specified, documentary evidence of compliance with such requirements
shall be provided.
12. Overload settings shall be set to suit the load served and the settings recorded in the record
documents.
F. Motor starters and speed control
1. All starters shall be by the same manufacturer.
2. Starters shall incorporate overload and single-phase protection and auxiliary contacts as required.
Starters shall comply with BS EN 60947-4-1 and incorporate overload protection devices complete
with manual reset buttons. Reset buttons shall be fully accessible without removing the starter cover
3. Unless otherwise stated starting methods shall be as follows:
a. Up to and including 5kW Variable speed drive (where possible) or direct-on-line
b. Over 5kW Variable speed drive
4. The BMS Contractor shall consult the manufacturer where necessary to ensure the correct overload
protection.
5. Starters shall also comply with the specific requirements detailed elsewhere.
6. Starters shall be of open type for mounting in common cupboard type enclosure with one main supply
isolator for the complete panel, unless otherwise stated.
7. Any limitation on starting currents, as might be imposed by the Supply Authority, shall be complied
with. Where the indicated starting methods do not satisfy the limitations, a suitable alternative starter
shall be provided as agreed with the CA prior to commencement of the Works.
8. Variable speed drives shall be installed as specified elsewhere in this specification
G. Automatic control
1. For the control of electrical equipment, which is not interlocked, an 'ON/OFF' rotary type switch shall
be fitted on the front of the panel for each item of plant.
2. Where interlocks are required an 'ON/OFF' switch shall be fitted for the master and a 'HAND/
OFF/AUTO' switch shall be fitted for each item of dependent plant. The switch positions shall be
clearly indicated, and each switch shall be clearly labelled to show which item of plant it controls.
3. Duty/standby plant shall have individual 'HAND/OFF/AUTO' switches but shall be interlocked to
prevent both items of plant running together.
4. Control relays shall be of the transistorised plug-in type, with test facility and indication, robust in
construction and mounted on a terminal base with the number of contacts commensurate with the
duty they are to perform.
H. Indicator lamps
1. Single lamps shall be of the transformer lamp type or LED type as indicated.
2. Neon indicators will not be permitted.
3. Indicating lamps shall generally conform to the following colour code:
Colour Operating status

Red Trip or fault
Yellow(Amber) Alarm / Attention / Caution
Green Equipment running
White(clear) Power available / Condition healthy
Blue Closed
4. Lamps and holders shall be arranged so that replacement of lamps and cleaning of lenses can be easily
effected.
5. Where indicator lamps are not immediately adjacent to their associated switches they shall be clearly
labelled.
6. A lamp test facility shall be provided on all panels.
7. The following shall be provided:
a. Red/yellow/blue phase healthy indication
b. Panel control circuit healthy indication
c. Field control circuit healthy indication
I. Identification and labeling
1. Wiring shall be adequately colour coded and numbered and indicated on the schematic wiring
diagrams and schedules, using a proprietary cable marking system comprising permanently fixed
plastic ferrules of the correct size for the cable.
2. All terminals shall be adequately numbered, as indicated on the schematic wiring diagrams. Hand
written numbering shall not be accepted.
3. All items of internal panel equipment shall be readily identified with clearly visible labels. Such labeling
shall correspond in detail with the panel wiring diagrams.
4. All labels shall be engraved on traffolyte or similar engraving laminate and shall be fixed by means of
3mm chrome screws or plastic rivets. Unless otherwise indicated black lettering on white background
shall be provided. Warning labels shall have red lettering on a yellow background. Details of
engraved labels shall be provided to the CA for approval prior to manufacture.
5. All panels and individual panel sections shall be provided with exterior labels to BS 5499-5 indicating
the voltage within the panel and clear warnings of risk and instructions for isolation.
6. All switches, controls and indicators on control panels shall be labelled as to function and associated
plant.
J. Local interfaces
1. Where indicated control panels shall have a fascia mounted keypad and display for local interrogation,
set point alteration and command execution. It shall be possible to communicate with the entire
network from the unit.
2. Where indicated control panels shall have a fascia mounted socket to allow local interrogation, set
point alteration, and command execution via a portable computer or palm top device.
3. It shall be possible to communicate with all the controllers located within the associated control panel.
As indicated the BMS Contractor shall provide the portable computer or palm top device, all necessary
software, software licenses, and peripheral equipment.
K. Control panel testing
1. Control panels shall be fully equipped, wired and tested before delivery to site.
2. Unless otherwise indicated the following tests and inspections shall be undertaken at the
manufacturer’s works in the presence of the CA. The control panel manufacturer shall provide written
evidence for the following points, including appropriate certification, that the panel has been tested in
accordance with the specification prior to inspection by the CA.
a. Functional testing including simulation of operation, sequencing, interlocking and automatic

controls
b. Demonstrating time delays and protection relay setting
c. Checking all labelling, cable numbering etc and compliance with wiring diagrams and schematics
d. High voltage pressure test of 2kV followed by an insulation test
e. Demonstrating that all MCBs or fuses are of the correct type and rating
f. Testing of all transformers for correct polarity and ratio and protection relays for correct operation.
g. Demonstrating access to all equipment especially devices requiring adjustment.
h. Demonstrating access for all incoming cables and for outgoing power and control cables together
with provision of suitable gland plates
i. Demonstrating compliance with the BS 7671
j. Demonstrating the provision to maintain the internal environment of the panel
k. Demonstrating sufficient spare capacity as required by the specification
l. Visual inspection, to include but not limited to:
m. Neatness and size of cable looms
n. Tightness of all connections, bolted power connections and bus-bar bolts tightened to the correct
torque.
o. Segregation of power cabling and switchgear from control cabling and electronic equipment.
p. Shrouding of non-isolated equipment, switches, lamps etc
q. Panel metalwork and finish quality
r. Any other tests required by the CA.
3. The CA shall be given 10 working days written notice of all testing and inspections unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the CA within 5 working
days of the tests unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
5. Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that it is protected from dirt, damage and moisture.
Sensitive electronic components shall be removed and stored separately.
6. On completion of all field wiring to the power section the flash test shall be repeated followed by an
insulation test. All isolators shall be closed and power fuses fitted. Control fuses and other low
voltage equipment fuses shall be removed for the duration of the test to avoid damaging any extra-
low voltage equipment. Flash tests shall be performed for mains powered equipment only.
7. Before the power is switched on, all new connections into the panel shall be checked and the
interlocks re-checked before the plant is operated.
8. On completion of the installation, including all field wiring, a complete panel test and inspection shall
be undertaken on-site in the presence of the CA. The tests and inspections shall be as undertaken at
the manufacturer’s works unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FIELD DEVICES
A. General
1. A schedule of field devices shall be submitted to the CA, cross referenced to the points schedule and
showing the total number and specification of the devices to be supplied. The information shall
include manufacturer, model, range, accuracy, flow characteristics, working/operating and static
pressure ranges.
2. Sensors shall be selected to have a suitable measuring range and IP rating for their required
application.
3. As detailed elsewhere in the specification samples shall be submitted for all field devices exposed to
view for approval by the CA prior to ordering. As detailed elsewhere exposed equipment may require
special finishes to match the interior design.
4. Sensors shall be located to achieve representative and accurate readings of the controlled or
monitored medium. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for the correct output and positions for
sensors. Where sensor positions are indicated the BMS Contractor shall advise any corrections to the
CA at a very early stage of the project.
5. All field devices shall in all cases be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
6. Sensors, detectors and associated meters shall have a proven record of precision and reliability when
used with BMS and building services systems.
7. All devices shall be installed with adequate access and clearance to permit maintenance, testing and
removal of any item. Inspection of all wiring connections shall be possible without removal of the
component.
8. Each device shall be labelled and the location of concealed devices marked and recorded.
9. Where a device type is not stated the BMS Contractor shall submit data to the CA for approval.
B. Temperature Sensors
1. General
a. Temperature sensors shall comply with the following minimum requirements, unless stated
otherwise elsewhere:
Fluid Temperature range °C Sensor accuracy °C

Air -10 to +40 ± 0.5
Flue gas +30 to +850 ±3
Chilled water -10 to +30 ± 0.25
Condenser water 10 to +60 ± 0.25
Water -10 to +150 ± 0.5
b. Where a fluid is not identified the error range shall be agreed with the CA.
c. Drift shall be less than 0.1K per year.
d. Thermistor sensors shall have a hysteresis error which shall not exceed 0.5%.
e. Temperature sensors shall be thermistor types unless otherwise indicated. Compensation for the
non-linear characteristic shall be such that the accuracy at range ends shall not exceed ±5% and at
the set point ±2%.
f. Sensor ranges shall be chosen so that the range extends to those which might be experienced
under plant fault conditions
g. Strap-on temperature sensors shall not be utilised, without the written consent of the CA.
2. Pipe mounted immersion sensor
a. The full active length of the sensor shall be immersed in water.
b. Allow adequate space so that sensors can be removed from their immersion pockets.
c. Immersion pockets shall be stainless steel and appropriate pressure rating. Pockets shall be free
issued to the pipework Contractor for installation in positions as indicated by the BMS Contractor.
d. Immersion temperature sensors shall be installed into pockets with the facility for removal without
disruption to the system(s). Immersion pockets shall be filled with a heat conducting compound
e. Unless otherwise indicated a Binder test point or an additional immersion pocket, adjacent to the
sensor, shall be provided for test purposes
f. Sensors shall be positioned not less than 12 pipe diameters downstream from a point of mixing to
take account of stratification.
3. Immersion sensors for air ducts
a. Sensors for air temperature in ductwork shall be located in positions to most effectively sense the
measured condition.
b. The full active portion of the sensor probe shall be exposed to the air flow.
c. The active portion of the probe shall be located central to the airflow.
d. A test hole shall be provided adjacent to every sensor with plug when not in use.
e. Probe-type sensors shall not be used in areas where stratification can occur.
f. Sensors positioned near to coils shall be shielded against radiative heat transfer.
g. Return air duct sensors shall be located near to the occupied space to avoid heat gain or loss and
radiant effects influencing readings.
h. Sensors shall be positioned in an area of representative air flow.
i. Sensors representing zone temperature should be offset to account for heat gains.
j. Sensors used for determining the dew-point shall be of material and construction suitable for use
in moist air.
4. Capillary sensors with probes
a. The device head must be higher than the sensor probe
b. The sensor probe should be tilted downwards
c. The ambient temperature at the device head must always be higher than the temperature to
which the sensor probe is exposed
d. The sensor element must always point downwards. The capillary should not form a U-shape
e. The capillary should not be bent too tightly (radius of bend > 50mm)
5. Averaging sensor (ducts and air handling units)
a. Allow a distance of at least 50 mm between any heat exchanger and the sensor
b. The entire length of an averaging sensor must be fully inside the air-duct
c. The sensor element must be evenly distributed over the full cross-section and adequately secured
d. to prevent vibration
e. The sensor element shall be installed in the air flow, downstream of the eliminator plate when air
washers are used for humidification
6. Room sensor
a. Unless otherwise indicated sensors shall be installed at a height of 1.5 m in occupied spaces and at
least 50 cm from any adjacent walls.
b. A sensor shall be located in an area representative of the entire control zone and located away
from heat sources.
c. Sensors shall not be located near air currents generated by diffusers or openable windows and not
be exposed to direct solar radiation
d. External wall locations shall be avoided where possible. Insulated back-plates shall be provided
for external wall locations.
e. Conduit entry points to the sensor wall box shall be sealed where there is a risk of air from another
zone flowing over the sensor element.
7. Outdoor air temperature sensors
a. Sensors shall have protection to IP67 unless otherwise stated.
b. Sensors shall be complete with a radiation shield.
c. Sensors shall not be located on facades affected by significant rising heat or facades which will be
heated by solar radiation.
d. Sensors shall not be located under eaves, above windows, ventilation extracts or subject to wind
influence.
e. Ensure accessibility for safe inspection and maintenance.
C. Humidity sensors
1. Humidity sensors shall be of good stability and have a humidity range of 10% - 90% with a sensor
accuracy of ± 5% RH.
2. Drift shall not exceed 2.5% of the full range per year.
3. Humidity sensor/stat – duct location
a. The air velocity in the vicinity of the sensor shall not exceed 10 m/s.
b. Sensors shall not be located in areas where there is no air flow.
c. A test hole shall be provided downstream of each sensor, plugged off when not in use.
d. Sensors shall be positioned beyond the spray distance of humidifiers.
4. Humidity sensor/stat – room location
a. Unless otherwise indicated sensors shall be installed at a height of approximately 1.5 m in the
occupied space and at least 50 cm from adjacent walls or directly adjacent to doors.
b. Sensors shall not be exposed to direct solar radiation or be located near heat sources and be
protected from airborne contaminants.
c. Sensors shall be located adjacent to the space dry-bulb temperature sensor unless otherwise
indicated.
d. External wall locations shall be avoided except were unavoidable. Insulated back-plates shall be
used for external wall locations.
D. Air pressure sensors
1. Unless otherwise stated air pressure sensors shall have a sensor accuracy of ±2% of the reading.
Sensors shall be supplied complete with pressure connections and connecting tubes.
2. Pressure sensors for measuring air at pressures greater than 1 bar shall be rated to meet two times the
maximum pressure and 1.5 - 2 times the working pressure.
3. DP sensors for measuring air at duct pressure shall have an accuracy of 1% and a resolution of 0.1%.
The sensors shall be supplied complete with pressure connections and connecting tubes. Ensure a
steadying zone upstream and downstream of the orifice plate/flow grid.
E. Differential pressure air switches
1. Differential pressure switches for fan proving and filter monitoring and sensors for VAV static pressure
control shall be supplied complete with duct connections and PVC connecting tubes of suitable length.
The range and hysteresis adjustments shall be concealed to prevent tampering.
2. Error shall not exceed ± 2% of full range after 200ms with a hysteresis of less than 0.4% and repeatable
within 0.25%.
F. Indoor air quality sensors
1. CO2 sensors shall have an accuracy of ±2% (indicated value).
2. Indoor air quality (mixed gas) sensors shall detect combinations of pollutant gases
3. Duct mounted sensors shall be located in the return air duct from the space as close as possible to the
room extract point(s).
4. Room mounted sensors shall be located in a representative location at a height of approximately 1.5m
above the floor and at least 50 cm from adjacent walls or directly adjacent to doors unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Flow velocity/flow rate sensors
1. Air velocity sensors shall comply with the following minimum requirements
Sensor Sensor range Sensor accuracy

Pitot static tube 3 to 80 m/s ±2% of reading
Thermo-electric 0 to 20 m/s ±3% of reading or ±0.1 m/s whichever
anemometer is the greatest
2. Sensors shall be positioned at an adequate distance from bends, tees, fans and coils such that the
centre line velocity is representative of the average velocity.
3. Averaging velocity sensors across the duct shall be used where the minimum separation distance from
a flow disruption is not available. The flow grid shall be sized correctly for the duct dimensions.
H. Differential pressure switches (liquids)
1. Differential pressure switches for water applications shall be rated to meet 2 times the static pressure
and/or 4 times the working pressure. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel and switch housing
protection to IP67 standard. The range and hysteresis adjustments shall be concealed to prevent
tampering. The HVAC Contractor shall install the differential pressure switches and connect suitable
pressure pipes to service isolating cocks.
2. Error shall not exceed ± 2% of full range after 200ms with a hysteresis of less than 0.4% and repeatable
within 0.25%.
I. Flow meters
1. Flow meters shall comply with the following minimum requirements:
Meter Meter range Meter accuracy

Fuel flow meter 0 to 10 Hz 3% of reading
Water flow meter >5:1 2% of reading
Electricity meter - 1.5% of reading
2. Meters shall be complete with suitable pulse contacts.
J. Thermostats
1. Error shall not exceed those stated below for a particular type, where a type is not identified the error
shall be agreed with the CA.
Type Error
Bimetallic ± 5% full range
Liquid expansion ± 5% full range
Vapour expansion ± 1.5% full range
Electronic ± 1% full range
K. Light level sensors
1. Outside light sensors shall have a range of 10-2000 lux with an output of 4-20mA and be mounted in
an IP67 enclosure. The sensor shall be mounted in an open position not subject to shade.
2.4 FIELD CONTROLLERS
A. General
1. Field controllers shall comprise distributed intelligence controllers including outstations, unitary
controllers and terminal unit controllers.
2. All field controllers shall perform all control actions independently of the operator workstation. The
units shall operate with the loss of shared data through the use of default values and final data reading
before the loss of network communications.
3. Unless otherwise indicated construct field controller enclosures shall give the following minimum
degree of protection in accordance with BS EN 60529:
a. Internal and plant room applications IP54.
b. External applications IP65.
c. Where located inside a control panel protected to IP54 the controller protection shall be IP41.
4. Controllers shall be modular construction and designed to allow the removal and replacement of
devices without the need for rewiring of field wiring. Enclosures shall be lockable.
5. Unless otherwise indicated include provision for a future 20% increase.
6. Terminals shall be the screw down clamp-type fixed to purpose made mountings. Terminals carrying
different voltages shall be segregated into groups.
7. Field controllers shall be suitable for operating normally within the following environmental ranges
unless otherwise indicated:
a. Temperature 0°C to 50°C
b. Relative humidity 10% to 100%
8. Field controllers shall be protected against the effects of moisture, dust, dirt and gases.
9. Where controllers are free issued to terminal unit manufacturers the BMS Contractor shall also free
issue associated interface relays and transformers as required.
10. Provide internal power back-up which shall hold the controller memory for a minimum period of 72
hours and maintain the controller’s clock function for a period of two years unless otherwise stated.
The internal power back-up unit shall be easily replaceable. The interval between battery maintenance
inspections shall not be less than 12 months. Battery monitoring functions shall be provided.
11. Controllers shall have the facility to be fully configured and accessed by a portable computer and via
the operator workstation. Password access shall allow the display of all configuration details
associated with the field controller. Configuration details shall be easily altered by system operators.
12. Field controllers shall incorporate a panel mounted operator interface.
13. The controllers shall include run-time totaling routines to enable run-time for each item of plant
selected. A different maximum run-time for each item of plant shall be allowed together with
interrogation of the controller for a point-by-point summary of run-time totals and limits. An alarm
signal shall be provided when the maximum run-time is reached.
14. Controllers shall include routines necessary to confirm that specific items of plant are functioning
correctly and this can be performed by monitoring physically separate but functionally related sensors,
switches or transducers. An alarm shall be raised if the expected response has not been established by
a preset time following switching on of plant. The preset time shall be adjustable. It shall be possible
to operate any specified standby plant.
15. The field controller shall be capable of logging selected hard and soft points and shall have sufficient
memory to log the equivalent of seven days data at 15 minute intervals for 50% of the total number of
physical points unless otherwise stated. Logging frequency and start/stop times shall be adjustable.
B. Controller inputs
1. The interfaces for field controllers shall be appropriate for gathering data from sensors and devices.
2. All inputs shall be scanned at intervals not exceeding 1 second and protected against spurious out-
ofrange signals including those caused by contact noise or bounce.
3. Ensure that errors introduced by the analogue to digital conversion of inputs do not exceed 0.1% of
the analogue value.
C. Analogue input
1. Variable currents (4-20 mA), variable voltages (0-10V) or variable resistances.
2. Routines necessary to process analogue inputs shall be resident at the field controller.
3. Ensure that a minimum and maximum limit value can be defined for each analogue input and each
limit is associated with a configured response.
4. The field controller shall detect open or closed circuit faults and raise an alarm on the operator
workstation.
5. Ensure that non-linear inputs can be calibrated/scaled
6. It shall be possible to define a relationship between an analogue point threshold value and a digital
point status.
D. Digital inputs
1. Derived from volt-free contacts (max 24 volts/20mA). Allow the interface to be selected to monitor a
normally open or normally closed circuit.
2. Routines necessary to process digital inputs shall be resident at the field controller.
E. Pulsed inputs
1. Derived from volt-free contacts (max 24 volts/20mA) at a pulse frequency of up to 32Hz.
2. Routines necessary to process pulsed inputs shall be resident at the field controller.
3. The inputs used to monitor fluctuating pulse rate shall have operator adjustable limits.
4. The field controller shall have the following capabilities:
a. Storage of cumulative totals.
b. Operator re-set facility of cumulative totals via the workstation.
c. Facility to combine counts from separate pulsed inputs.
d. Ability to calculate the number of pulses per unit time through addition and/or subtraction.
e. Ability to compare the number of pulses with preset limits on the basis of total number of pulses
per unit time and the time required for a total number of pulses.
f. Ability to convert pulsed readings into quantifiable values.
g. Alarm facility based on a user defined limit being exceeded.
h. Controller outputs
i. Controller interface characteristics unless otherwise indicated:
j. Isolation between controllers and networks shall meet the requirements of pr EN 13646.
k. Analogue output shall be as variable currents (4-20 mA) or variable voltages (0-10V). It shall be
possible to characterise analogue outputs in order to obtain a near linear response from the
controlled items of plant.
5. Ensure that digital outputs can be selected as ‘normally closed’ or ‘normally open’.
6. Errors introduced by the digital to analogue conversion of outputs shall not exceed 0.1% of the digital
value.
7. In the event of power failure, output devices shall be capable of being driven to their preset, fully
open/closed position.
8. Field controller interfaces shall be capable of providing control signals to actuators and switching
devices.
9. Field controllers shall be capable of receiving feedback signals which allow the comparison between an
output signal to a controlled device and its actual condition.
10. Routines shall be configurable, such that one or more events maybe enabled in direct response to any
defined logical relationship between the status of a number of physical or soft-points.
F. Outstation input and monitoring devices
1. These shall be provided by the use of a portable device such as a laptop or netbook PC or touch
screen handheld device. All devices shall be fully capable of interfacing with the outstations via a WiFi
or Bluetooth wireless connection.
2. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere 2 number Palmtop CE devices shall be provided. If there are less
than five outstations on the system then one unit shall be provided. The local interface shall provide
all the functions available at the central system
2.5 ACTUATORS
A. Actuators shall be selected with adequate force/torque for the required applications.
B. Actuators and linkages for valves and dampers shall operate smoothly from fully open to fully closed
without binding and with adequate torque to overcome the resistance of the actuator mechanism and the
flow and to provide the specified close off ratings.
C. Linkages shall be clearly marked with the clamping position such that after maintenance or replacement
the mechanism is able to operate correctly.
D. Fit actuators with visual position indication.
E. Actuators shall incorporate a disconnection device to allow manual operation of the valve or damper in the
event of actuator failure.
F. Where detailed elsewhere include position feedback devices suitable for connection to the BMS.
G. Actuators shall be protected both electrically and mechanically against the effects of valve or damper
seizure.
H. Ensure that there is sufficient space so that actuators can be removed for testing and maintenance.
Actuators shall incorporate electronic motor overload protection.
I. Actuators shall be 24V and accept typical control signal types unless otherwise indicated. Where line
voltage actuators are used, local means of isolation shall be provided.
J. Actuators shall be protected to the IP rating for their required application.
K. The BMS Contractor shall fit actuators and required linkages to dampers and control valves.
L. Actuators shall be supplied complete with all necessary mounting brackets and linkages.
2.6 VALVES
A. Valve bodies shall be suitable for the medium, the temperature and the operating and test pressure of the
fluid system.
B. Valves shall have the correct authority without excessive pressure drop and shall pass the required flow at a
pressure drop within the maximum differential pressure rating of the valve.
C. The control valve sizing method shall be agreed with the CA.
D. Ensure system operating pressures, test pressures, pump heads and pressure drops through heat
exchangers and associated pipework are known before control valves are selected.
E. Unless otherwise indicated select valves to provide an authority of 0.3 to 0.5 for diverting applications and
0.5 for mixing applications.
F. Valves shall have port characteristics appropriate for the intended function.
G. All modulating control valves shall be selected for equal percentage or linear characteristics according to
system type, to provide near linear characteristics between the valve position and heating/cooling power
as delivered to the air or water-based system.
H. The range-ability of the selected valves shall be large enough to provide stable control under low load
conditions.
I. Control valves shall be free issued by the BMS Contractor to the HVAC Contractor for installation. The BMS
Contractor shall instruct on their correct installation allowing for service and replacement.
J. Valves shall not be installed with their spindles in the horizontal position or with the actuator at the
bottom.
K. Unless otherwise stated all two and three port control valves shall be plug and set types with tight shut-off
and having a linear total flow characteristic. Rotary shoe and butterfly type valves shall not be used.
L. All modulating actuators shall be low voltage, self-stroking and have position indicators and manual
override facilities. Modulating valve actuators shall incorporate positive feedback monitoring.
M. Where necessary valve stems shall be supplied fitted with spindle heat barriers, heaters and shields to
prevent actuator over-heating or condensation causing malfunction.
2.7 DAMPERS
A. Provide visual position indicators on all damper actuators installed so that they are clearly visible.
B. Damper characteristics shall be as linear as possible and modulating dampers shall be sized correctly to
give adequate authority.
C. Actuators shall have end switches for indicating the safe condition/interlock of plant/monitoring by the
BMS (DDC).
D. Modulating dampers shall incorporate positive feedback monitoring.
2.8 VARIABLE SPEED INVERTER DRIVES
A. Inverters shall be the pulse width modulation type and shall allow the interfacing requirements as detailed
elsewhere.
B. All inverters shall be of the same manufacture and installed fully in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Inverters shall provide the following protection functions:
1. Phase loss detection (both motor and line).
2. Earth leakage.
3. Over-voltage fault.
4. Under-voltage fault.
5. Over-load/under-load fault.
6. Overheat fault.
7. Stall protection.
8. Loss of control signal.
9. Loss of auxiliary control signal.
10. Over-current protection.
D. Operation of any of these faults shall cause electronic shutdown without fuse blowing.
E. Inverters shall have the following characteristics:
1. Starting current not to exceed full load starting current
2. Near unit power factor throughout the speed range without the use of power factor correction
equipment
3. Independently adjustable ramp control for increase/decrease speeds
4. Capable of connecting to a reverse windmilling fan without causing tripping and able to return to
correct speed
5. Local control operation capability
6. Facility to set all operating parameters with door closed and without the use of additional
instrumentation
F. Equipment shall be provided to limit radio frequency interference and mains harmonic distortion.
G. The inverter enclosure shall be dust and damp proof and shall be protected to the IP rating suitable for the
application in accordance with BS EN 60529. Adequate ventilation for cooling shall be provided.
H. Inverters shall have a back lit display and alpha numeric keypad.
I. Inverters shall be capable of electronic maintenance without the motor being connected.
J. Where a switch disconnector is installed between an inverter and the associated motor, an early break
connect on the switch disconnector shall be provided to disable the inverter.
2.9 CONTROL FUNCTIONS AND ROUTINES
A. Control interlocks
1. The BMS shall be capable of providing all control interlocks as detailed elsewhere.
B. Building/plant protection
1. Provide protection routines to operate the plant in order to protect the building fabric and its contents
against the effects of condensation and high internal temperatures.
2. If the internal air temperature rises above the pre-set protection temperature, the cooling system and
related plant shall be turned on and heat supplied to maintain the air temperature at or above the
protection set-point temperature.
3. The building/plant protection routine shall override other control functions unless otherwise indicated.
4. Protection shall operate whenever the normal ait conditioning/cooling is switched off.
C. Safety interlocks
1. All safety interlocks shall be hardwired and have precedence over all other control functions. Safety
interlocks shall only be reset manually and locally (not from the operator workstation). All hardwired
safety interlocks shall have corresponding software interlocks to prevent cascading nuisance alarms.
D. Fire interlocks
1. All fire interlocks shall be hard wired. In the event of a fire, all non-essential plant shall be shut down
by a signal generated by the fire alarm unless otherwise stated.
E. Time schedules
1. Each field controller shall be capable of enabling plant according to multiple pre-set time programmes.
It shall be possible to schedule each item of plant for a minimum of three separate switching periods
per 24 hours. Separate schedules shall be capable of being defined for each day of the week.
2. Time schedules shall be capable of:
a. Grouped to form global time schedules
b. Defined on a weekly basis on a single ‘page/screen’
c. Defined 12 months in advance.
d. Copied from existing schedules
e. Linked to optimum start/stop control facilities.
f. Accommodating leap years.
g. Fixed extensions and contractions (the time schedule shall revert to the ‘normal’ switching periods
following the extension/contraction period)
3. Provide:
a. Time schedule override facility to accommodate holiday periods, etc.
b. Optimum start/stop over-ride facility for user-defined override days. Optimum start/stop control
shall be enabled following the override period.
c. Operator over-ride facility.
F. Plant start/stop control
1. Field controllers shall be capable of starting and stopping plant according to the sequences indicated
including any specific requirements for ‘off’ position or status of plant items, valves and dampers, etc.
2. Field controllers shall be capable of automatically enabling standby plant on failure of duty plant and
automatically report plant failure alarms at the operator workstation. The failure of a flow switch or
other device shall not continuously cycle plant.
3. If a flow switch fails the operator shall have the option to force either the duty or standby plant to
come on.
4. Provide the operator with the option to override any start/stop action configured within the field
controllers. When reverting to normal automatic control, ensure that the original programme is
automatically reinstated and updated to the correct time.
5. Provide delayed plant-starting facilities in order to reduce power surges. It shall be possible to start
plant sequentially by adjusting the delay period for each item of plant.
6. Delayed plant starting shall initiate following power failure/re-instatement and plant shut down/restart
on fire/fireman override.
7. Provide the operator with a facility to specify minimum on/off cycle times and/or the maximum
number of starts per hour for specified items of plant.
8. Provide a plant protection routine that enables the operator to select and automatically run items of
plant for short periods during out of season shut down. Run periods shall be operator adjustable.
G. Sequence control
1. Provide sequence control routines to automatically sequence the operation of multiple items of plant
by monitoring load parameters and efficiently matching the plant to the load.
2. It shall be possible to define different automatic sequences of control. Provide the operator with a
facility to override the automatic sequence and define an alternative sequence.
3. Set-point values for each control action shall be variable and adjustable by the operator and
associated alarm limits shall be modified automatically.
4. The operator shall be capable of adjusting switching control differentials to prevent short cycling.
5. Routines shall include a facility to operate all plant ancillaries associated with sequence control, unless
these have been specifically excluded.
6. Routines shall include the facility to proceed with the defined sequence when one of the items of plant
in the sequence is isolated or fails to operate (unless the safety requirements dictate otherwise). Ensure
that failed items of plant are removed from the sequence.
H. Plant rotation control
1. The relevant field controllers shall be capable of alternating the lead plant items where duty and
standby equipment is installed. This shall be achieved both by an operator command and on a
timescheduled basis.
2. The rotation control shall be capable of being provided on the basis of run hours, elapsed time and
calendar basis.
3. Provide routines to ensure that when the maximum number of start/stop cycles for a particular plant is
reached then its schedule is automatically modified eg by rotating the standby equipment or changing
the lead machine.
4. Ensure that each item of plant operated under rotation control can operate at any stage of the rotation
sequence as indicated
5. The plant rotation control shall accommodate a plant failure condition, in such a way that a failed item
of plant is ‘replaced’ by the next in the rotation cycle. An alarm condition shall be raised in response to
plant failure.
6. Rotation control shall be capable of being initiated outside normal operating periods.
I. Optimum start/stop for cooling systems
1. Provide an optimum-start routine for the cooling system to compute the daily minimum pre-cool
period necessary to achieve target comfort conditions at occupation start time. Provide an optimum
stop routine to compute the earliest time for the cooling system to be shut down in order to retain
minimum comfort conditions in the space at the end of occupation.
2. The optimum start/stop routines shall have access to the system real-time clock, calendar facility and
time programme to define the occupation periods.
3. Routines shall be capable of operating the ventilation system for building purging prior to optimum
start of cooling plant.
4. It shall be possible to apply optimum start/stop control both to individual zones and overall plant
operation.
5. Provide routines to operate chillers and ventilation plant as necessary to achieve the required target
conditions while ensuring that heating and cooling systems do not conflict in any controlled zones.
6. Provide the operator with the facility to adjust the following cooling system optimum start/stop
parameters.
a. Target temperature for optimum start.
b. Maximum pre-cool period.
c. Earliest time for building purging during out of hours period.
d. Inside and outside temperature limits for building purging.
e. Separate time/temperature relationships for optimum start and optimum stop.
f. Minimum space temperature during building purging.
7. The internal and external air temperature sensors associated with the optimiser shall be positioned
correctly in order to provide representative readings.
J. Optimum start/stop for heating systems
1. Provide an optimum-start routine for the heating system to compute the daily minimum pre-heat
period necessary to achieve target comfort conditions at the start of occupation. Provide an optimum
stop routine to compute the earliest time for the heat source to be shut down in order to retain
minimum target comfort conditions in the zone at the end of occupation.
2. The optimum start/stop routines shall have access to the system real time clock, calendar facility and
time programme to define the occupation periods.
3. It shall be possible to apply optimum start/stop control both to individual zones and overall plant
operation.
4. The routines shall operate the heating and ventilation plant as necessary to achieve the required target
conditions, and that the heating and cooling systems do not conflict in any controlled zone.
5. Provide independently adjustable start and stop comfort conditions.
6. Ensure that weather compensation control can be inhibited during pre-heat periods.
7. The heating plant shall go into full heating mode with full re-circulation of air (if relevant). Ensure a
return to normal fresh air control following the optimum start period.
8. Provide the optimum start/stop routines with an automatic self-learning process that seeks to reduce
any error in achieving the target conditions at the target time.
9. Provide the operator with the facility to adjust the following parameters:
a. Target temperature for optimum start.
b. Maximum pre-heat period.
c. Target temperature for optimum stop.
d. Minimum space temperature for out-of-hours periods.
e. Enable/disable the self-adaption function.
f. Default limit time for handover to the weather compensation routines after the start of
occupation.
10. The internal and external air temperature sensors associated with the optimiser shall be positioned
correctly in order to provide representative readings.
K. Weather compensation
1. Provide weather compensation routines to control the cooling system in relation to external weather
conditions. Provide the operator with the option to adjust temperature and flow-rate settings for the
cooling system to re-define the weather compensation.
2. Provide automatic adjustment to the weather compensation by comparing measured and required
space temperatures with the outside conditions, and provide the facility to correct the compensation
where a significant difference between the two space temperatures occurs.
3. Abrupt changes in the cooling system performance or space temperature shall not adversely affect the
automatic adaptive compensation process.
4. Provide a single weather compensation curve for each zone irrespective of the number of temperature
sensors provided in the zone.
5. The routines shall respond to the reset signals arranged to achieve boost, night set-back and chiller
safety.
6. Air temperature sensors associated with the compensator shall be positioned correctly in order to
provide representative readings.
L. Enthalpy
1. This shall be achieved by comparing the return air temperature and humidity with the fresh
air/external air temperature and humidity, to determine if the fresh air is beneficial to achieve the
design conditions.
M. Load shedding
1. Where detailed in elsewhere the system shall be capable of monitoring the overall rate of electrical
power consumption and if a pre-set demand level is projected to be exceeded, the system shall be
capable of shedding electrical load in a pre-determined manner.
2. The system shall be capable of as many levels of load priority as are necessary to meet the
requirements as indicated. The order of priority in each level shall be capable of rotation if required.
3. Under conditions of partial/total power loss the system shall be able to trim demand in a controlled
manner to match available power from stand-by generator sets.
4. If load shedding routines are set up the facility to log consumption continuously shall be provided.
5. Similarly, the system shall be capable of enabling loads in a controlled sequence to restore normal
operation.
N. Cascade start
1. The control system shall prevent the simultaneous operation of heavy electrical loads at start up by
incorporating time delays between plant start-up signals.
2.10 BMS CONFIGURATION
A. General
1. Unless otherwise stated the controls system/BMS system shall have the facility to monitor and/or
control the following plant/system functions:
a. External Conditions - temperature and humidity.
b. Internal Room Conditions - temperature.
c. Plant/System Status - run, tripped, fault, alarm, low level, etc.
d. Plant Time Scheduling - on/off control.
e. Optimum usage of plant.
f. Plant cycling "duty sharing".
g. Energy consumption
h. Mains failure plant operational routine.
i. Fire off interlock (for logging purposes).
j. Archive/trend logging/contingency logging.
2. All equipment shall be manufactured such that it shall not generate electrical interference beyond
acceptable limits.
3. All equipment shall be suitably protected against spikes and harmonics on the incoming electrical
supply and against electromagnetic radiation from site portable radios, etc. Any equipment limitations
shall be stated in the tender.
B. Point Capability
1. The BMS Contractor shall produce a points schedule based on the controls and BMS equipment
proposed to be supplied to meet the requirements of the specification AND DRAWINGS. If any points
are omitted state the reasons for so doing.
2. A schedule of outstations shall be submitted, showing the points connected to each indicating the
input/output capacity supplied and the spare capacity available for future additions.
3. The system shall be capable of supporting the type and number of hardware points listed as indicated
and shall support all software points, programming etc necessary for the specified control sequences.
4. Each control panel shall be provided with a minimum quantity of 15% surplus of hardware points of
each point type at the time of tender.
5. The BMS Contractor shall clearly state the used and spare point capacity for each controller.
C. Password protection
1. The BMS software shall be protected from unauthorised entry.
2. Unless otherwise indicated provide, as a minimum, password-protected operator access for the
following levels:
a. Level 1 Ability to display all point data
b. Level 2 As level 1 with ability to initiate data logging functions
c. Level 3 As level 2 with ability to change user-adjustable set points and time
schedules
d. Level 4 As level 3 with ability to change control strategies, schematic/graphics functions

and password assignment.
3. Password-protected operator access shall be set up for both operator workstations and field
controllers which have an operator interface. A common overall system password set and procedure
shall be provided whether access is gained from operator terminals, portable terminals or keypads on
single or multi-site schemes.
4. Passwords shall permit at least 6 alpha/numeric characteristics and users shall be able to change their
password/pin numbers at will.
5. At operator terminals a user logging-on shall be recorded with time and date. Unless otherwise
indicated logging off shall be command or time-out from non-use of the keyboard or mouse with the
event again recorded.
D. System communications
1. General
a. The system communications shall allow the full transfer of monitored, logged, alarm, backup and
configuration data between the operator workstation and addressable field controllers.
b. The communication protocol selected shall seek to achieve error-free data transfer and shall
include an error detection check, error correction and/or re-try technique. The protocol shall limit
re-transmission and raise an alarm condition on failure.
c. The available bandwidth shall be sufficient to avoid excessive delays in transmitting data. The
maximum permissible time delay shall not exceed that indicated.
d. Modems shall comply with BS 6320 and the speed of modems shall be as indicated. Connections
to telecommunication systems shall comply with BS 6701.
e. Provide an ISDN link if defined unless otherwise indicated.
f. Field-level protocols shall:
1) Run on the required communications media
2) Provide a communications throughput sufficient for the intended application
3) Provide appropriate network topology options
4) Allow sufficient maximum physical segment length
5) Allow sufficient maximum number of nodes for each physical segment and the logical
network
6) Provide sufficient maximum distance between nodes
7) Make use of off-the-shelf network devices such as repeaters, bridges and routers
8) Allow control devices to be powered from the network where indicated.
g. Ensure that the field-level protocols are compatible with fully developed network configuration
and management tools.
2. Direct interoperability
a. Ensure that each of the protocol’s objects and attributes are consistent with the achievement of
the specified level of direct interoperability.
b. Ensure that each of the protocol’s arrangements for physical connection, data packaging, network
management and error detection/correction are the same.
3. Gateways
a. Gateways shall:
1) Transfer the specified maximum number of points
2) Limit loss of functionality to the level specified
3) Add functionality where specified
4) Limit any time delay across the gateway to the maximum indicated
b. Ensure that the specified contingency and alarm measures in response to a failure of the gateway
are met.
c. The gateway shall be capable of any modification in response to any future changes relating to the
type and amount of data transferred over it.
d. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of any gateways.
e. If gateways or any other network devices are not indicated but are required to make the network
function correctly they shall be provided.
4. Communication networks
a. All addressable control devices shall be addressed over the communication network.
b. The bandwidth and subsequent speed of communications shall be sufficient to meet the
requirements as indicated.
c. No cross corruption of data shall occur when the system shares a communication network with
other IT based systems.
d. Network testing, identification and documentation shall comply with BS EN 50174.
e. All network devices shall be compatible with the network and are capable of operating such that
the required throughput of data is achieved.
f. BMS devices to be directly connected onto the Intranet/Internet shall be TCP/IP compatible.
g. Where radio communications are employed the radio transmitter/receiver and the BMS
components shall be adequately powered. The lifespan of batteries shall be as indicated. Radio
communications devices and associated BMS components shall be easily accessible to allow the
change of batteries. The attenuation of radio signals shall not hinder effective data
communications.
h. Mains-born signaling shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 50065-1:2001+A1:2010
i. Provide the necessary equipment to ensure that there is no mutual interference between the
signaling system of the electricity utility and mains-borne signaling of the BMS.
2.11 INTEGRATION WITH FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS
A. The BMS Contractor shall liaise with the fire alarm specialist and all other relevant parties in the integration
of the systems.
B. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible in conjunction with others in obtaining all necessary approvals
from the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
C. The fire detection system shall operate autonomously and will not be affected by any failure of the BMS.
The BMS shall not be affected by any failure of the fire detection system or fails safe as appropriate.
D. The loss of electrical power to the BMS will have no adverse effects on the fire detection system.
E. A full cause and effect testing programme shall be developed in conjunction with the fire alarm specialist
and agreed with the CA.
F. The integrated system shall be fully commissioned.
G. Provide the display of fire alarm detector status information on the BMS operator workstation as detailed
elsewhere
H. Provide any specified building graphics/schematics on the BMS operator workstation indicating the
location of fire detector heads or zones, as indicated, along with their respective status.
I. The fire alarm condition shall automatically display the appropriate building graphic/schematic along with
relevant detector head status or zone status as indicated.
J. Any time delay in receiving the fire alarm data at the operator workstation shall not exceed the maximum
as stated.
K. Provide fail-safe, hardwired interlocks using volt-free contacts between the BMS field controllers and items
of plant.
L. Use relay logic and/or microprocessor-based logic.
M. Any specified building services control actions shall operate correctly in response to the status of the fire
detection system.
2.12 OPERATOR WORKSTATION
A. Operational characteristics
1. The control of plant shall be independent of the operator workstation. Provide complete system
integrity such that the network of field controllers will continue to fully operate following a failure of
the operator workstation.
2. No data of a control nature shall be transferred between field controllers via the operator workstation
3. The operator workstation shall communicate with all addressable field controllers. The appropriate
control strategy configuration data shall be capable of being downloaded to all addressable field
controllers.
4. Provide a means of displaying and modifying each addressable field controller’s control strategy, time
schedules and set-points via the operator workstation.
5. All control strategies and associated control parameters shall be altered via the operator workstation.
6. The operator shall be capable of re-scheduling plant operation times. Re-scheduling shall be capable
of being applied globally to a number of items of plant at one or more sites (or one or more
controllers on one site) as selected by the operator.
7. The operator workstation shall incorporate a data storage management system that warns against
impending on-line storage overflow and allows for data archiving to, and retrieval from, off-line
nonvolatile media. The operator shall be prompted at pre-defined intervals to carry out the data
archiving procedure.
8. It shall be possible to perform a complete backup of the operator workstation comprising control
strategies, set-points and logged data.
9. Provide an electronic data archival device that uses readily available non-volatile media that is
appropriate for long term storage of system software, configuration data and logged data (including
alarm data).
10. Allow the transfer of data from the system memory and other storage devices to the archive mediums,
and vice versa for the preparation of reports.
11. The backup data shall be capable of being fully re-loaded and that selected files from the backup data
can be re-loaded.
B. Processor
1. The processor speed of each operator workstation shall be adequate to meet the data processing
requirements. Delays in processing system data shall not exceed that indicated. All necessary power
supply and interconnecting leads shall be provided.
C. Monitor
1. Unless otherwise indicated provide a minimum of 2No 19” widescreen LCD flat screen colour monitor
with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels complete with adjustments for display positioning,
screen brilliance and contrast.
D. Keyboard
1. Provide QWERTY keyboards with full upper/lower case ASCII key-set, numeric keys and mouse. The
keyboard shall also include dedicated, or user defined ‘soft’ keys, which initiate the most frequently
used functions.
2. Systems incorporating a touch-screen facility in place of a keyboard shall be provided with a keyboard
connection and associated functionality.
E. Printer
1. Provide an A4 colour printer as indicated. The printer shall be capable of printing:
a. All monitored and logged data (including graphs of logged data)
b. All point data (hard and soft)
c. Graphics, control logic diagrams and plant/building schematics in colour
d. Alarm data/text and to list any appropriate action to be taken.
e. Systems help text.
f. Reports in letter quality format.
2. The automatic printing of alarm data shall be capable of being switched on/off.
3. The BMS Contractor shall provide sufficient paper and ink until practical completion, at which point the
printers shall be reloaded with a fresh supply and the end user issued with two boxes (5000 sheets) of
spare paper as well as two full sets of branded ink cartridges.
F. Monitoring and logging functions
1. All monitored point data shall be displayed at the operator workstation. Analogue, digital and
softpoints shall be displayed simultaneously.
2. All changes made by the operator (eg set-point changes) shall be logged and identified by both
operator and date/time stamp.
3. Provide a facility to allow the display, at the operator workstation, of ‘real time’ data superimposed on
plant schematics with a refresh rate not exceeding 20 seconds unless otherwise indicated.
4. Ensure that a minimum of four ‘real time’ data points can be displayed simultaneously, in the form of
data plots, with a time delay not exceeding 20 seconds.
5. Provide a facility to allow the monitoring and display, on the same ‘page’, of common criteria/plant
functions.
6. Any hard or soft-point log shall be capable of being displayed and stored on the operator workstation.
7. Logs shall be capable of being set up from the operator workstation and logging times and logging
intervals shall be adjustable between 1 second and 24 hours.
8. The operator workstation shall have sufficient data storage capacity to accommodate the defined
amount of logged data and that the data can be backed up.
9. Provide a facility to allow the simultaneous display of different logged data. This function shall be
operator adjustable.
10. Provide a facility to allow the export of logged data to other software packages as indicated.
G. Graphics
1. The BMS Contractor shall include for system graphics print-outs for review by the CA and off-site
demonstration of the graphics before final incorporation into the BMS.
2. The BMS shall incorporate a colour graphics package to be installed at the operator’s terminal/desktop
computer. The system shall be an active graphics presentation and include the following features
a. Provide a software library of plant schematics and symbols, the format/contents shall be agreed
with the CA.
b. The operator shall be able to select a plant location and associated control panel from a plan and
via a hierarchical set of graphic layouts select a particular plant, point or point attribute.
c. A detailed schematic of each plant area or individual plant monitored or controlled by the system
shall be available for viewing and interrogation at the operator’s terminal. The schematics shall
illustrate the status and analogue values of all points associated with the selected plant. The value
of such points shall be updated while the schematic is displayed to the user.
d. Provide a facility to allow the operator to generate additional schematics and symbols.
e. The system shall accommodate the addition of 20% extra graphics ‘pages’.
f. Provide a facility to allow the operator to modify plant schematics and to generate new ones.
g. The graphics shall be capable of being displayed in a layered approach (building layout graphics
down to plant subsystems and components). The operator shall be able to modify the structure of
the layered approach.
h. Graphic selection and use shall be primarily mouse driven. However, the user shall also be able to
access data direct by reference to a point or report name.
i. Multi-level password protection shall be provided for all interfaces.
j. Print outs of all system graphics shall display the date, time and external ambient temperature and
humidity conditions.
k. The operator shall be able to select and modify any point attribute as required.
l. The operator shall be able to change alarm limits or set points associated with a point or allow
access to the DDC programme code.
H. Help and assistance
1. Provide a facility to allow the display of help text covering all operator functions and system fault
conditions.
2. Provide a facility to allow the display (including a hard copy) of points list (hard and soft-points) and
control strategy logic schematics.
I. Energy monitoring and targeting software
1. Provide a facility to allow the direct transfer of recorded energy consumption and external air
temperature readings from the BMS to monitoring and targeting software in an agreed format.
J. Maintenance management software
1. Provide a facility to allow the direct transfer between the BMS and maintenance management
software. The format and scope of the exported data shall be as agreed with the CA.
K. System alarms
1. System alarms shall meet the following requirements unless otherwise indicated:
a. Alarms shall be displayed on a rolling basis in chronological order.
b. The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms, including muting of audible or flashing
annunciators. A facility shall be provided to silence audible alarms or inhibit flashing annunciators
without performing alarm acknowledgement.
c. The operator shall be able to alter the limits at which the measured values cause alarms to be
triggered. Alarm limits shall accommodate sliding limits e.g. set point changes.
d. Alarms shall be differentiated by means of alarm type and identification.
e. Alarms shall be prioritized, including a high priority that will be annunciated regardless of other
activity and a low priority or information status that is only annunciated on demand.
f. The time taken to receive alarms shall be as indicated.
g. The reception and acknowledgement of alarms shall take precedence over other operations and
shall not hinder user log-in.
h. Allow the user to acknowledge alarms individually and on a group basis.
i. Provide distinction between active alarms whose condition are not cleared and unacknowledged
alarms.
j. Alarm data shall provide:
1) Condition identity
2) Condition value
3) Alarm source
4) Alarm time and date
5) Acknowledgement status.
k. Allow alarms to be automatically redirected to other user interfaces.
l. Provide sufficient data storage capability for the storage of alarms. Any stored alarm data shall be
analysed in conjunction with other monitored conditions or stored logged data. An alarm review
facility shall be provided.
m. The operator shall be able to define:
1) The requirement for acknowledgement of alarms
2) A time programme for annunciation of alarms to different destinations
3) Text messages associated with alarm conditions.
2.13 ENERGY METERING
A. The controls system/BMS shall monitor and record energy consumption data from all meters as identified
elsewhere via pulsed inputs.
B. Data logging requirements
1. All meters shall have data logging capability and be connected to the BMS for centralised monitoring
and recording. The minimum requirement shall be as below;
a. Provision of hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual energy consumption for each meter.
b. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months, and years for trend analyses.
c. Determine out of range values and alert building operators to unusually high consumption.
d. Record peak energy consumption for each meter.
C. The protocol selected for the communications interfaces shall be co-ordinated with the meter
supplier/manufacturers and fully developed, proven and tested off-site prior to installation.
D. As indicated the BMS shall include the facility to generate, either automatically or via operator command,
daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly or annual reports of energy consumption for operator selectable times of
day, on an individual meter, tenant, floor zone or energy type basis which can be printed, archived or
exported to third party proprietary applications as required.
E. Reports shall be produced in an agreed Microsoft office format.
2.14 CONNECTION TO PLANT AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all devices and terminals necessary to connect the BMS to items of plant and control equipment.
B. Take account of any existing services that have to remain in continuous operation. Agree with the CA the
method by which controls system/BMS equipment can be installed without disrupting the operation of the
building services.
C. Where plant and control equipment are supplied by others, provide the Project Supervisor with adequate
details of installation requirements. Provide this information in time and in sufficient detail to enable any
other Contractor’s and their suppliers to incorporate the BMS connection facilities before delivering their
equipment to site.
D. Where plant is subject to warranty by others, obtain clearances in writing from those concerned that the
proposed connections or modifications do not invalidate the warranties.
E. Ensure that modifications carried out as a result of the contract are fully documented and do not affect the
satisfactory operation of safety devices connected to any plant or systems affected directly or indirectly by
the controls system/BMS works. Carry out proving tests to the satisfaction of the CA.
F. Ensure that the use of existing relays, contactors, starters and switches as part of the BMS installation is
fully documented.
G. Provide interlocks as indicated to establish and maintain safe/pre-determined plant conditions under all
modes of operation including loss, reduction and restoration of power.
H. All safety hardwired interlocks shall be wired to failsafe on loss of power, or on relay coil failure, or on open
circuit.
I. Unless otherwise indicated all interlocks shall use voltage-free contacts and 24v AC or DC relays and field
wiring.
J. Complete all wiring and testing of all hard wired safety interlocks to ensure safe and/or sequenced
operation of the plant before the controls system/BMS is set to work. Arrange interlocks to prevent unsafe
or out of sequence operation of the plant by the BMS.
K. Ensure that plant does not operate using the BMS until all interlocks have been tested to the satisfaction of
the CA.
L. Provide manual control facilities to enable plant maintenance/facilities staff to operate essential plant in
the event of BMS failure and for routine test purposes. Unless otherwise stated facilities shall include:
1. Start/stop operation of the plant
2. Automatic operation of motorised control devices such as valves and dampers, etc if the BMS is
operating
3. Manual setting of motorised control devices such as valves and dampers, etc if the BMS has failed.
M. The manual control facilities shall not override safety devices or hard-wired interlocks.
N. The contact materials for volt-free contacts shall be suitable for use in the installation and at the required
voltages and currents. Unless otherwise indicated screw down or locking spade terminals shall be used for
electrical connections to volt-free contacts.
O. Provide additional contacts for signaling and remote operation purposes from starters as stated elsewhere.
P. The BMS Contractor shall liaise with and obtain all necessary information from the relevant supplier when
additional facilities are to be fitted to control equipment supplied by others.
Q. Connections to packaged plant shall be made within the packaged plant control panel. Fit an additional
enclosure where this is not possible
2.15 CABLING
A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with BS 7671 and the requirements as stated elsewhere.
B. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for power, control and network communications wiring. This
includes the provision of primary and secondary containment as necessary and indicated.
C. Low voltage power, extra low voltage control and network cabling shall be segregated throughout the
installation. Under no circumstances shall power and control/network wiring be run in the same
containment, regardless of the cable types. Control cabling shall be routed clear of all lighting ballasts and
other electromagnetic devices that may damage the integrity of the control signal. Control system/BMS
cabling shall not be mixed with cabling associated with other services.
D. The types of cable installed shall not prejudice the operation of the controls system/BMS.
E. Ensure that the cross-sectional area of cables is sufficient to ensure that sensor circuit resistance limits are
not exceeded.
F. The method of installation and routing of cables shall not compromise the satisfactory operation of the
controls system/BMS.
G. All cabling shall be adequately protected from the environment through which it passes to avoid the
possibility of mechanical damage or electromagnetic interference.
H. Install cabling and conduits associated with sensors in a manner that prevents spurious transfer of moisture
and heat etc from external sources to sensing devices.
I. Communications cables as used on a network system shall be shielded twisted pair, with the shield
earthed. The conductor cross sectional area, cable capacitance and length of runs shall not impair
performance or violate the manufacturer’s recommended network constraints.
J. Where Ethernet or similar carrier technology is utilised, cables specific to that technology shall be
employed.
K. All extra low voltage controls system/BMS cables shall be run in screened twisted pair cables with the
shield earthed at one end only.
L. Cables shall be affixed to tray, drawn into conduit or trunking and protected as agreed with the CA to suit
the various environmental, local and mechanical locations. Cable containment details shall be as indicated
elsewhere.
M. Cable specifications shall meet the manufacturer’s requirements, particularly respecting overall resistance
and capacitance limits.
N. No joints shall be allowed in cables, where these prove necessary the cables shall be joined using an
approved housing, securely fixed and having cable securing clamps and shall be approved by the CA. Any
such connecting boxes shall be shown on the record drawings.
O. All field cables shall be the LSF type.
P. Power and control cables associated with the operation of life safety plant shall have fire rating
classifications CWZ to BS 6387 and shall be approved by the CA and Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to
installation.
Q. Field switch disconnectors and junction boxes associated with life safety plant shall be fire rated.
R. All cables shall have identification sleeves at their terminations which combine the requirements of BS 7671
with those for specific circuit identification as detailed elsewhere. The identification shall be consistent with
the relevant wiring diagrams.
S. Electrical installations shall be undertaken by companies experienced in Electrical Installation Contracting

and shall be approved by the CA. Test and completion certificates shall be issued following completion of
each section of the installation and for the completed installation.
T. Use of existing cabling and wire ways
1. Confirm by testing that any existing means of network communication is of a suitable standard for
satisfactory operation of the BMS. Any tests shall be performed in compliance with BS EN 50174.
Ensure that the potential corruption of data cannot arise.
2. At the time of tender state in writing whether or not existing cabling is suitable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing the installation examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and
conditions affecting performance of the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely
completion and notify the CA of the unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All controls equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Control components shall be adequately supported to ensure no strain is imposed on components.
C. All equipment shall be installed to ensure safe access for operation and maintenance. Access shall be fully
demonstrated to the CA when requested.
3.3 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING
A. General
1. The BMS Contractor will be required to demonstrate every function and interlock relating to the
automatic controls. These demonstrations shall be conducted under simulated occupancy and shall
include but not be limited to:-
a. All automatic temperature and humidity control functions including high limit and safety cut-outs.
b. All safety devices and 'position under failure settings' such as normally closed damper positions;
normally open valves; gas cut off valves; isolation of ventilation plant etc., shall be demonstrated.
c. All automatic smoke detectors mounted within ductwork and their associated interlocks shall be
demonstrated including the 'plant available for use' facility offered to the Fire Officer in emergency
situations.
d. All optimiser and time clock energising of plant shall be demonstrated and set to the values stated
in the specification. Demonstration of any optimiser shall include the switching of all required
plant during 'non occupation periods' under simulated high internal and internal condensation
conditions.
e. All controls associated with terminal units (FCU’s, VAV, etc.). Spot checks shall be made by the CA
to ensure correct operation of the terminal units including temperature, volume and pressure
checks.
2. Include for carrying out the tests as stated, together with such additional inspections and tests during
the process of manufacturing, installation or otherwise as the CA shall prescribe, to prove the physical
characteristics of all materials and manufactured parts incorporated in the Works, ensure the overall
suitability of all equipment, and to satisfy the requirements of the Local Authority.
3. The testing and commissioning shall be co-ordinated with all other trades and shall be performed in a
systematic and methodical manner in accordance with the contract programme.
4. The BMS Contractor shall ensure satisfactory completion of the testing and commissioning together
with the recording of results.
5. Appoint a “competent person” to supervise the whole of the testing, commissioning, system proving,
system demonstration and instruction of the employer’s staff.
6. Include for all expenses, labour, materials, tools, equipment, plant, calibrated instruments and
attendances required for inspections, testing, commissioning and demonstrations of the control
systems.
7. System commissioning shall be in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code C - Automatic Controls
and as indicated elsewhere.
8. Undertake the following:
a. Off-site testing and demonstrations
b. Testing, pre-commissioning checks, commissioning, regulation and setting to work of the controls
systems
c. Preparation of comprehensive programmes, commissioning plans, schedules and method

statements and procedures supported by risk assessments for the pre-commissioning checks,
setting to work, commissioning, system proving and environmental testing
d. Provide and submit standard pro-forma for the various requirements for commissioning records
and certification for agreement with the CA prior to commencement on site
e. Monitor progress against the programme of works and provide weekly reports detailing progress
of testing and commissioning activities
f. Maintain a diary/log of all significant activities and document any faults, snags or queries and how
these were resolved. The diary/log shall be fully noted and available for inspection by the CA at
g. any time.
h. Ensure all certification is attained and witnessed as necessary for inclusion in the record
documentation
i. Provide and submit a report for every test, demonstration, or commissioning activity witnessed,
together with an engineering appraisal on the performance, either on or off-site
j. As necessary co-ordinate and liaise with the Employer’s representative
k. Co-ordinate, give notice and obtain all approvals from the necessary authorities
l. Provide operator training and demonstrations to the Employer’s staff or representative
9. At the completion of the BMS Contractor’s commissioning and prior to any final approval from the CA,
record the simultaneous internal and external dry and wet bulb temperatures. Should the contract
programme determine that such temperature recording tests occur during partial load conditions then
the BMS Contractor will be required to return to site and repeat the tests. This rechecking shall occur
during the months of January/February and July/August unless otherwise notified by the CA.
B. Programme
1. Within one month of appointment (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) submit to the CA a preliminary
commissioning programme. The programme shall be of the itemised bar chart format and shall clearly
indicate the proposed approach and all key activities including off site testing, witnessing etc.
2. Prior to commencement on site (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) the HVAC Contractor, BMS
Contractor and commissioning specialist shall together produce a detailed and final commissioning
programme. This document shall amplify and expand upon the preliminary commissioning
programme and include all necessary detailed method statements and procedures. The programme
shall be fully integrated with all other site activities envisaged to be occurring during the period of
commissioning and shall also indicate all necessary witnessing and acceptance dates.
3. Review and update the commissioning programme at agreed intervals and if necessary revise and
amend the programme to suit the progress of the contract works. Due account shall be taken of any
phasing requirements.
C. Reports
1. Submit to the CA written reports signed by a qualified person to confirm that:
a. Prior to installation - all system designs can be commissioned
b. Post installation - installations are complete and ready for testing and commissioning
c. Pre-commissioning checks –pre-commissioning checks and all off-site testing has been completed
d. Commissioning and testing –demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and confirm
that the controls system has been correctly tested and commissioned and achieving the specified
performance.
2. The final documentation of reports and completed record sheets shall be compiled into a control
systems commissioning manual for inclusion in the operating and maintenance documentation.
D. Instruments for testing and commissioning
1. All instruments shall be provided by the BMS Contractor.
2. Submit to the CA a schedule detailing the equipment and instruments to be used in the testing and
commissioning of the controls systems.
3. Ensure all instruments are correctly calibrated and are marked with a unique reference for
identification. Submit evidence of correct calibration of all instruments used in connection with
commissioning and testing to the CA prior to commencement of the Works. Test methods shall be
demonstrated to the CA where required.
4. Instrument calibration data and identification shall be included on the respective test record sheets.
E. Off-site testing
1. The BMS Contractor shall include for off-site testing of all control panels, control application software
and user interface software unless otherwise indicated.
2. Equipment shall be tested for duty and performance at works prior to dispatch. Test to the
appropriate British Standard or the requirements stated elsewhere if these exceed the British Standard.
Carry out all tests required by legislation under the direction of a competent person.
3. Works testing shall be to the satisfaction of the CA.
4. Include in the contract price all off site testing costs and meet all expenses of the CA and three other
members of the design team (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) to attend inspections and witness
tests at a manufacturer’s or other location away from the site, whether in the project country or
abroad.
5. Notify the CA eight weeks (unless otherwise stated elsewhere) in advance of such tests and submit a
programme and method statements for the inspections and witness tests.
6. Method statements shall clearly detail the testing methods being proposed, test rig set up, design
performance criteria to be met, testing equipment and be supported by risk assessments. The detailed
testing procedures shall be agreed with the CA prior to the tests being carried out.
7. The final method statement shall be submitted to the CA 4 weeks prior to the proposed test date
(unless otherwise stated elsewhere).
8. The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the equipment can meet the specified deign performance and
requirements. Where the equipment is required to perform in different modes, then the design
performance for each mode of operation shall be tested and certificates provided for all modes of
operation. These shall include part load tests where equipment is designed to operate through a
range or modulate between minimum and maximum design performances.
9. All plant or equipment shall be tested prior to witnessing by the CA and confirmed readiness for CA
attendance.
10. If testing indicates non-compliance with the specification submit immediately details of the
noncompliance and proposals for corrective action. No additional costs or extension to the
programme will be allowed for re-testing or other non-compliance corrective action.
11. Duplicate signed certificates of tests carried out at the manufacturer's works for any items of plant or
equipment shall be forwarded to the CA within 3 working days of the tests and prior to delivery of
equipment to site. All certificates shall be signed by a competent person and witnessed.
12. Where required by the CA tests will be required to be repeated on site to prove the operating
performance.
13. Each item tested at works shall be stamped or fitted with a plate to provide the following minimum
data:
a. Normal working conditions
b. Test conditions
c. Individual equipment reference
d. British Standards applicable
e. Date of test
f. Manufacturer’s details
14. Upon successful completion of the testing the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and returned to
new condition and correctly packaged for delivery to site.
15. No inspection or testing by the CA or his authorised representative nor the witnessing of satisfactory
tests nor the authorising of dispatch to site shall in any way relieve the BMS Contractor of any of his
obligations under the contract, nor shall it in any way limit the right of the CA to reject such items after
delivery to site if they subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or unsuitable for their
intended purpose.
16. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all materials, apparatus and equipment
required for the execution of the works are ordered sufficiently early to ensure delivery to site at the
correct time as required by the construction programme. It shall be the responsibility of the BMS
Contractor to ensure that adequate time is available for inspection and/or testing by the CA, including
the giving of required due notice. No materials, apparatus or equipment subject to inspection and/or
test will be recognised as complete and ready for dispatch until after such inspections and tests have
been satisfactorily carried out and no claim for delay will be allowed unless the CA has failed to carry
out inspection or to waive inspection after being given the specified period of notice.
accordance with the requirements of the specification, and to require the BMS Contractor to repair,
make adjustments, modification or replacement of the defective items before dispatch to site. If the
defective item be adjudged by the CA to be unsuitable for repair, adjustment or modification, then it
shall be replaced by a completely new item at the expense of the BMS Contractor.
18. Testing shall be to the satisfaction of the CA and certificates of all such tests shall be provided to the
CA within 3 days of testing and copies included in the operating and maintenance documentation. All
certificates shall be signed by a competent person and witnessed.
19. Ensure that as much pre-commissioning work as possible is performed off-site as agreed with the CA.
F. Pre-commissioning checks
1. The BMS Contractor shall undertake all necessary pre-commissioning works and checks as detailed in
the CIBSE Commissioning Codes and the BSRIA Application Guides stated elsewhere.
2. Ensure that each system, including components, or item of equipment is complete and in a safe
condition prior to start-up.
3. All necessary notices shall be displayed.
4. The BMS Contractor shall submit to the CA a written report, including record sheets, for each system
indicating completion of the pre-commissioning works and checks.
5. System commissioning shall not commence until the pre-commissioning works and checks have been
completed and accepted as satisfactory by the CA.
G. Test certificates
1. Ensure test certificates include as a minimum:
a. Project title
b. Contractor’s name
c. Specific location of the item in the Works, including plant identification, system etc
d. Details of the plant / equipment, including manufacturers’ reference number permanently marked
in a conspicuous position on the item concerned.
e. Date, time and duration of inspection / test
f. Weather conditions during the test, where applicable
g. Details of the test / inspection
h. Instruments used, serial numbers, and calibration dates, where applicable
i. Number and type of deficiencies found, where applicable
j. Any corrective action taken, where applicable
k. Itemised readings for all tests, where applicable
l. Name and signature of those inspecting / witnessing test / testing
m. Other relevant particulars.
2. Test certificates must be issued in duplicate to the CA within 5 working days of the test (unless
otherwise stated elsewhere).
3. Maintain records of all specified inspections and tests performed including third party and copies of
works test certificates on site
4. An additional copy of every test certificate relating to site tests of the completed installation or parts
thereof shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual specified elsewhere.
H. System demonstration
1. The BMS Contractor shall:
a. Give 10 working days’ notice (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) to the CA of his intention to
undertake the acceptance demonstrations and witnessing.
b. Ensure that sufficient on-site resources are available to facilitate the demonstration and witnessing
process.
c. Submit to the CA a detailed programme of the demonstration and witnessing activities prior to
commencement.
d. Issue a complete commissioning report to the CA prior to commencement of the demonstration

and witnessing period. The report shall contain the commissioning point-to-point checklists and
details of commissioning values and parameters installed, signed and dated accordingly. The
report shall be revised as necessary on successful completion of the demonstration.
2. The BMS Contractor shall verify all commissioning data by means of filed measurement with calibrated
instruments.
3. The following shall be demonstrated and verified, but not limited to, in the presence of the CA:
a. The BMS hardware is installed in accordance with the requirements
b. Any operator software and associated graphics
c. All safety related functions
d. The control of main and/or critical items of plant along with a random sample of other points
e. All plant restarts according to that specified after building failure and local power failure
f. All power meter data-points to ensure that they match the meters
g. All optimiser and time clock energising of plant. Demonstration of any optimiser shall include the
switching of all required plant during ‘non occupation period’ under simulated frost and internal
condensation conditions.
h. Verification that all safety-related functions perform to that specified, eg plant shutdown on fire
condition. To be operational prior to starting the plant and demonstrated as agreed with the CA
prior to starting plant in BMS auto-mode.
i. Verification that all plant restarts according to that specified after building power failure and local
power failure
j. Verification that power meter data-points match the meters.
k. Fault conditions for all critical alarms, safety devices and control interlocks shall be simulated and
proved effective as soon as practical once BMS control mode is selected.
l. All controls associated with terminal units. Random checks at the discretion of the CA to
demonstrate correct operation of the units including temperature, volume and pressure checks as
necessary.
m. Sensors to ascertain accuracy within limits. Humidity sensors shall be checked for accuracy using a
wet/dry bulb thermometer.
n. Fire condition including operation of plant available to the Fire Officer in an emergency situation.
o. Points witnessing:
1) If less than 300 points demonstration of all points
2) Between 300 and 1000 points demonstration of 50% with a minimum of 300
3) If more than 1000 points demonstration of 20% with a minimum of 500 points
p. The CA reserves the right to witness 100% of the points if the failure rate is greater than 5%.
q. A sample of specific functions as directed by the CA e.g. 10% of alarms and 10% of data logging
r. The operation of several identical items of plant in detail with the others witnessed on a random
basis
s. Verification of the system security access
t. The control of critical items of plant.
u. Dynamic graphics.
4. The BMS Contractor shall ensure sufficient man-power, test equipment, consumable items and
portable communications equipment to conduct the demonstration efficiently.
5. Trend graphs will be provided to demonstrate the stable control of the plant. Simulated inputs will be
employed to check stability over the design environmental range.
I. Environmental testing
1. Carry out environmental testing to prove the performance of the systems.
2. Environmental testing shall be undertaken in all rooms provided with temperature &/or humidity
control.
3. As directed by the CA provide a temporary installation of portable recorders together with adequate
charts at no cost to the contract to simultaneously record temperature and humidity
4. The corresponding external conditions shall also be recorded at regular intervals whilst the tests are in
progress.
5. All rooms shall be tested until stable design conditions are proven.
6. The final locations of the test instruments shall be agreed with the CA prior to commencement of the
environmental testing period.
7. Maintain and check all portable recorders during the period of testing
J. Performance testing
1. Demonstrate the performance of installations including single, standby, multi-duty plants and systems,
and plants specified for future use.
2. Apply artificial loads or provide test arrangements to simulate the full range of operating conditions
and duties of the systems.
3. Demonstrate by measured tests that noise criteria indicated have been achieved.
4. Air circulation and distribution shall be demonstrated after the systems have been balanced to provide
the correct air quantities. Smoke tests may be required at the discretion of the CA to prove
distribution.
K. Authority witnessing and testing
1. As part of the commissioning procedure the BMS Contractor shall arrange for all necessary checks and
witnessing by the Local Authority, Government Offices, Statutory Authorities, etc.
2. Such witnessed tests and signed certificates of acceptance shall be obtained.
L. Electrical services
1. Inspection and testing shall be carried out during installation and after completion of the works.
2. Tests shall be carried out on site after completion to ascertain the insulation resistance of the
conductors, cables and accessories and fittings to earth and between poles, the electrical continuity of
metal sheaths surrounding conductors, and the polarities of all accessories and fittings, complying with
the BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations.
3. The BMS Contractor shall issue an electrical installation certificate as required by BS 7671 at the
practical completion of the works
4. Following the satisfactory conclusion of final inspections and tests on completed sections of the works,
the BMS Contractor shall commission each section of the electrical installation and leave it in full
working order.
5. The electrical commissioning shall include:
a. The energising of electrical distribution circuits and equipment that have previously been
inspected, tested, and found satisfactory and capable of being energised with complete safety.
b. The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in accordance with the
directions of the CA or, failing such directions, in accordance with sound engineering practice.
c. The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including that supplied and
installed under other contracts, as detailed elsewhere.
d. The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the carrying out, where
required, of further tests and the making of all necessary adjustments so as to obtain optimum
performance.
6. Static testing
a. Progressive static testing shall include the following tests, but other tests may be required and
witnessed:
1) Insulation resistance
2) Earth fault loop impedance
3) Earth continuity
7. Unless otherwise indicated all tests shall be undertaken in the presence of the CA who shall have been
duly notified. Triplicate copies of test certificates covering all tests carried out on the completed
installation shall be submitted to the CA.
3.4 TRAINING
A. The BMS Contractor shall provide user training course(s) for the Employer’s personnel in the operation,
maintenance and programming of the controls system.
B. Submit to the CA for approval a detailed training programme and method statement for the training of the
Employer’s staff 12 weeks (unless stated otherwise elsewhere) before commencement of training.
C. Include adequate periods to instruct the Employer’s staff in the operating and maintenance of the Works.
Submit to the CA for approval a detailed training programme and method statement for the training of the
Employer’s staff.
D. Training shall be provided by competent instructors. All associated training equipment required by the
instructors to enable the training to be demonstrated effectively shall be provided.
E. Employ the services of relevant specialists and suppliers necessary for this purpose and provide each
person with a comprehensive set of teaching notes and diagrams.
F. All the associated training equipment required by the trainer(s) to enable the training to be demonstrated
effectively shall be provided.
G. All health and safety issues relating to the Works shall be brought to the attention of all attendees.
H. All attendees shall be provided with the appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
I. Where necessary provide off-site training at the BMS Contractor training facility.
J. A training manual, together with a comprehensive set of teaching notes and diagrams, shall be provided
for each operative
K. For all instruction periods maintain training records which shall be submitted to the CA on completion. All
attendee names shall be recorded, and signatures obtained from all attendees confirming they have
understood the training given. A schedule of names shall be provided within the operating and
maintenance documentation.
L. ‘Formal’ presentations shall be carried out over ‘half day’ periods.
M. As an indication, the training for operating staff should include, but not be limited to:
1. Building services system scope (demonstrated with the aid of schematics and/or other drawings/visual
aids). To include an overview of the purpose and normal operating functions of the Works and
explaining the philosophy and method of control used.
2. Demonstration and training of the building control system, including.
a. Operation of user terminals
b. Use of displays and add or change graphics/ schematics
c. Call up and viewpoint-data from plant schematics and/or points lists
d. Overrides
e. Acknowledge system alarms and setting up alarm routines
f. Undertaking basic alterations
g. Time and occupancy programmes
h. Control set-points
i. Setting up trend logs
j. Testing and routine inspection of sensors and actuators
k. Adding analogue and digital inputs/outputs to the system
l. Re-load system software/configuration details
m. Add/modify passwords/monitor system security
n. Instruction on the procedures for fault-finding, tuning, maintenance, testing and routine
inspection and to assess the nature of faults and extent of remedial action required.
o. Instruction on the configuration of outstation
p. Specific system structures, including outstations and control strategy overviews
q. Back-up of the system and archive logged data.
3. An electronic projector style ‘walk through’ of the operation and maintenance manuals, highlighting
important areas of health and safety together with all other items of importance.
4. Highlighting, demonstrating and providing delegate experience in all maintenance procedures

identified in the O&M Manuals.
5. Physical tour(s) of inspection of the Works illustrating aspects covered in the ‘classroom’ and the
location of essential isolating points of all incoming services.
6. Explaining and illustrating all operator alarms, their possible causes and actions required.
7. Explaining all known and typical fault scenarios which are capable of being recognised and/ or rectified
by the operators.
8. Identifying and demonstrating all safety equipment and interlocks including all interlocks with other
suppliers’ systems /equipment.
9. Identifying the noise levels in the various areas and highlighting the need for any protection required.
10. Specifying and illustrating any hazards associated with the Works and the methods employed to deal
with them.
11. Providing instruction on the correct operation of plant items and the safe limits of their operation.
12. Explaining the mode of operation and sequence of events resulting from both power failure and fire
alarm conditions.
13. Demonstrating any alarms and explaining they’re meaning and possible causes.
14. Highlighting any associated hazardous maintenance materials which may require special disposal
considerations.
15. Highlighting the signs, cause and effect of known/ possible breakdown or fault conditions.
16. Indicate and demonstrate (where practicable) arrangements made for access and removal of specific
items of equipment or key large or heavy subassemblies/components.
17. Demonstration of the safe day to day running and maintenance of all systems, plant and equipment.
18. Providing sufficient expertise to address delegate questions.
19. The training for the operation of the controls, monitoring or BMS installations shall include as a
minimum:
a. Initial training at the works of the controls supplier including hands on experience of equipment
and software similar to the installation.
b. Instruction on the procedures for testing and routine inspection of sensors and actuators to
enable the operator to assess the nature of faults and extent of remedial action required.
c. The provision of all appropriate reference and training manuals.
d. Complete initial instruction prior to commissioning of the installed system.
e. Site instruction on the installed system.
N. It is envisaged that the scheme shall comprise not less than 2 number 1week periods for six persons
(unless stated otherwise elsewhere). The first session would commence immediately after first fix
installation and the second at three weeks before Practical Completion. During these periods formal
classroom instructions on the Systems and their operation, including controls operation, under normal and
fault conditions shall be given. This shall occupy approximately 50% of each session with the remaining
period consisting of field demonstration.
O. The BMS Contractor shall be available following practical completion as stated elsewhere to assist the
Employer's personnel in the operation of the various systems during occupation of the building.
P. The BMS Contractor shall provide off-site communications support through a modem connection during
the defects liability period of 12 months, unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
3.5 POST – HANDOVER CHECKS
A. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere, during the 12 months after practical completion and in consultation
with the CA undertake to:
1. Fine tune the controls/BMS installations
2. Ensure the requirements for fine tuning are incorporated in the commissioning specification
3. Ensure that fine tuning activities are programmed, planned in advance and agreed with the CA and
employer prior to commencement
4. Ensure that fine tuning activities are planned with regard to the health and safety of occupants and
such that any disturbance to them is minimised
5. Provide a mechanism by which the Employer can provide feedback on the performance of the building
both before and after fine tuning
6. Attend meetings as requested by the CA to deal with issues arising from fine-tuning of the controls
system.
B. The costs for fine-tuning and adjustment of the controls systems during the 12 months after practical
completion shall be included in the contract price unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
C. As agreed with the CA the BMS Contractor shall include the following as part of the post-handover checks
a. Check that each of the following meets the specified requirements.
1) Internal air temperature
2) Relative humidity
3) CO2 control
4) Ventilation rates
b. Revising all BMS time schedules to match the building occupiers’ operational requirements.
c. Energy consumption (ensure that the pulse-input counters match the meters)
d. Control set-points meet the specified requirements.
e. Control strategies:
1) Check that control strategies are appropriate for the intended application.
2) Check that the control strategy has been implemented and commissioned correctly.
3) Check that the control strategy is still appropriate for the intended use.
f. Network communications:
1) Check that all relevant field controllers communicate properly.
2) Check for correct sharing between controllers of relevant data and correct inter-controller
operation.
g. Control loop settings result in accurate and stable control.
h. Check that all self-learnt characteristics are valid.
i. All relevant field controllers communicate properly.
j. Check for correct sharing between controllers of relevant data and correct inter-controller
operation.
k. Occupant controls work correctly.
l. Check the accuracy and location of sensors
m. Check actuators operate correctly.
n. Check that dampers and valves are not jammed and that they operate as intended.
o. Incorporate all plant and system settings within the O & M following the fine tuning.
3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. The BMS Contractor shall provide the following documentation as part of the overall record
documentation for the project
B. System documentation shall be provided at contract completion and in a format compatible with the
overall project record documentation.
C. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided and a preliminary copy shall be made available to
the CA in sufficient time for comments to be incorporated.
D. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be as detailed elsewhere.
3.7 SOFTWARE
A. Two complete sets, unless otherwise indicated, of all software developed by the BMS Contractor shall be
provided for retention by the Employer.
B. Allowance shall be made to up-date the software as maybe necessary during the defects period.
C. Obtain on behalf of the end user all appropriate licenses, permissions, copyright waivers, rights of use and
the like from the owners of the software rights. Ensure that the end user is properly registered with the
software supplier for support and appropriate updating.
D. Back-up copies of all system configuration files and master software disks shall be supplied in an
appropriate lockable storage facility. All system and data files shall be current as at the hand-over date,
disks to be suitably identified and directories and files cross-referenced in the maintenance manuals. In
addition to the operating software, each disc will also contain a complete set of original set points for all
conditions. The storage unit and key shall be handed to the Employer at handover.
E. A further copy of all master software, system configuration files etc shall be maintained off-site by the BMS
Contractor for a minimum period of three years or as otherwise indicated.
F. All passwords shall be provided at handover.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Perform final clean of all control panels, equipment plant and surfaces following installation and
commissioning and prior to practical completion.
END OF SECTION
Mahavir Shah/Ashveen Jeetun
Buro Happold Consulting Engineers Limited
Po Box 117291
Dubai
UAE
T: +971 (0) 4 518 4000
F: +971 (0) 4 335 8190
Email: mahavir.shah@burohappold.com
NCD P3 Carpark
50% Detailed Design Specifications - Mechanical, Public Health and
Fire Protection
DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-ME-000002
0052253
29 March 2023
Revision 01

00 AJ 15/02/23 NM
01 90% Detailed Design AJ 29/03/23 NM

Specification Files/DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-PH-000002.docx
This report has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and information of Binyah for the purposes set out in the
author Ashveen Jeetun
date 29/03/23
approved Neil Mowat
signature
date 29/03/23
Contents
SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - PLUMBING
SECTION 220100 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220519 METERS & GAUGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220573 – FACILITY DRAINAGE MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 2205756 – FACILITY DRAINAGE PIPING CLEANOUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220716 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 221123 – DOEMSTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 221200 - FACILITY POTABLE WATER STIRAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 221429 – SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 231010 – FUEL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Table of Tables
Table of Figures
Glossary
Term Definition
SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - PLUMBING
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
A. General
1. This section defines the minimum public health services installation requirements for the ‘DGDA Car
park P3 KSA’. The section shall be read in conjunction with the complete specification requirements;
however, particular reference shall be given to Division 20 – General MEP Requirements, and all other
MEP divisions of the specification documentation.
2. Where a discrepancy is identified between the requirements of the specification and the drawings, the
specification is to take precedence and the discrepancy notified to the Engineer for the necessary
action to be implemented.
3. Pipework materials for all public health services shall be in accordance with the material standards /
requirements as listed within the particular specification.
4. Contractor shall comply with particular and standard specification, where a discrepancy is identified
between the requirements of the particular and standard specification, the particular specification
takes precedence and the discrepancy notified to the Engineer for the necessary action to be
implemented.
5. The specification shall be read in conjunction with Employer requirements and drawings. Employer
requirements also form part of contract documents.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the complete Public Health services installation as
described herein and indicated on the detail design drawings and equipment schedules. This particular
specification includes the Public Health services associated with this development only. The Public Health
services associated with this package shall include but not be limited to the following systems:
1. Domestic Hot & Cold-Water Services:
2. Above Ground Foul & Waste Water Drainage: Kitchen drainage
3. Condensate drainage: Drainage venting
4. Landscape planter drainage (cross check specialist drawings): Above Ground Surface Water Drainage:
5. Below slab Foul & Waste Drainage Car park drainage
6. Fuel oil installation:
7. All builders work in connection with Hot and Cold, Above Ground Foul and Waste Water Drainage,
Condensate drainage, Above Ground Surface Water Drainage, Below Slab Fouls & Waste Drainage.
8. Coordination with all MEP Contractors, Main Contractors, structural drawings, interior Designer and
other third parties
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
A. DGDA Car park P3 project consists of 4 level basements, ground floor and roof. The car park includes
occupancy such as car park, MEP tanks, rooms, toilets, lobby and supporting Landlord FOH and BOH areas.
The Prime objective of the Public Health services installations shall be to provide a fully functional
environment via discrete efficient and fully maintainable systems and equipment.
B. Public health services for DGDA Car park P3 project is executed in 2 phases.
1. Phase 1 works include all basement related works including B4 level below slab drainage and services
within B1 level to B4 level.
2. Phase 2 works include above ground, for which design is not included in this package.
C. The main objectives shall be to:
1. Ensure that all water supplies are clear, odorless, tasteless and wholesome for use.
2. Provide potable water in the amount and at the pressure required by the building occupancy and type
of plumbing fixtures specified in interior designer’s schedule / specifications.
3. Prevent contamination from non-potable liquids, solids or gases.
4. Maintain a velocity of 1.0 - 2 m/s in the water supply piping to prevent noise and decrease the danger
of surge pressure shock (water hammer). Water hammer arrestors shall be considered within the
installations, wherever appropriate. Install water hammer arrestors for each fixture or group of fixtures.
5. Ensure that hot water is stored and supplied to appliances at safe water temperatures as mentioned in
design criteria and standards section of this specification Thermos static mixing valve shall be provided
for safe temperature.
6. Ensure flow rates to fixtures are limited to Green Building and Regulations & Specifications.
Prevent the transmission of foul air into the building.
7. Minimise the frequency of any blockage and provide access to enable the clearance of any such
blockage.
8. Provide efficient conveyance of discharge from sanitary, kitchen and wash-down facilities to enable the
correct function of each appliance.
9. The system operates without blockage.
10. The flooding frequencies shall be limited to a minimum
11. Backflow preventer shall be provided for sewer and storm connection to infrastructure network to
avoid surcharge from infrastructure network, back to DGDA Car park.
12. Coordination with other services prior to starting of works.
1.5 DOMESTIC COLD WATER SERVICES DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
A. The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the complete domestic water services installation
as described herein and indicated on the Tender drawings and equipment schedules.
B. Water tank filling:
1. Individual, appropriately sized, metered branch water connections is extended from the local water
authority water mains from the point of connection for the development. In addition to authority water
supply, tanker supply connection is provided. The main incoming cold-water supply to the
development shall consist of 1 x nos. water supply mains entering the building at Basement one high
level. The main incoming water connection will feed the Domestic Water storage tanks, the Firefighting
water tank and serve as a make-up water source to irrigation water tank.
2. Particle filters with automatic back wash is provided in the incoming before filling the raw water tank.
3. The incoming potable water line is sized to fill the fire water tank in 8 hours as per NFPA regulation.
4. The main incoming cold-water pipe shall run at high level in the domestic water plant room and shall
feed the raw water storage tanks as indicated within the public health services drawings. The incoming
supply shall be complete with the following valve arrangement upon entry:
a. Double Check Valve:
b. Strainer:
c. Pressure reducing valve:
d. Main Water Meter (MEWA):
e. Drain down Valve and
f. Isolation Valve
5. The cold-water feed supplying the water tanks (potable water tanks, fire-fighting water tanks and
irrigation tanks) shall be provided with the following valve arrangement:
a. Isolation Valves
b. Solenoid valve linked to the level regulators
c. Float valve assembly
d. Cold water feed to irrigation tank shall be provided with backflow preventer.
6. The TSE water from municipality network shall be used as primary source for irrigation and shall feed
the irrigation tanks. The potable water feed to the irrigation water tank shall be used as a water make-
up source in case of emergency only. The TSE water make-up shall be provided with the following
valve arrangement:
a. Isolation Valves
b. Solenoid valve linked to the level regulators
7. The raw water tank shall be provided with tanker fill connection and shall be used as a potable water
make-up source in case of emergency only. The cold water feed supplying the potable water tanks
shall be provided with the following valve arrangement:
a. Tanker fill cabinet with orifice at Grade level.
b. Isolation Valves
C. Domestic water tanks storage, filtration, disinfection:
1. The domestic water tanks for the project is located at basement level-1 and water storage for the car
park shall be based on the maximum consumption over a 2 days period. The raw water tank
accommodates 1.0 day of domestic water demand of DGDA Car park and filtered water tank
accommodates 1.0 day domestic water demand.
2. The water tank construction is of GRP type located within pump room.
3. The raw water from raw water tank is transferred to filtered GRP tanks by means of transfer pump. The
transfer pumped line is provided with inline multimedia filter and copper silver disinfection unit. The
transfer pump sets shall consist of a variable speed pump set working on a duty/standby mode. The
pump set shall be a complete package unit complete with all valves, fittings, control panels, flexible
connection, etc.
4. The raw and filtered water storage tank are divided into two compartments with interchanging valves
for easy maintenance / cleaning without water supply interruption for the development. The water
tanks shall be equipped with access ladders, float ball valves, overflows, drain pipe with isolation valve,
water level indicators, vents and temperature/volume monitoring system with a local visual display and
a common alarm fault connection to the BMS.
5. Water tank shall be provided with internal and external GRP Ladder and aluminium access door. Both
GRP ladders and aluminium access should have WRAS approval.
6. The RCC tanks shall lined with ‘GRP’ liners suitable for potable water installations.
7. All raw and filtered water tanks are provided with circulating pumps to avoid stagnation of water, as
stagnation water encourages legionella bacteria growth.
8. In order to mitigate the harmful effects of legionella, copper silver ionization system is provided in the
design. This will control the legionella growth effectively and shall placed in the transfer water line
from the bulk raw water tank so that all water downstream the bulk water tank shall be bacteria free.
D. Fire water tank and Irrigation water tank storage:
1. Incoming potable water shall feed fire water tank and irrigation tank. The water tanks will consist of
two equal sized compartments for maintenance with internal and external GRP Ladder and aluminium
access door.
2. The water storage tank is divided into two compartments with interchanging valves for easy
maintenance / cleaning without water supply interruption for the development. The water tanks shall
be equipped with access ladders, float ball valves, overflows, drain pipe with isolation valve, water level
indicators, vents and temperature/volume monitoring system with a local visual display and a common
alarm fault connection to the BMS.
3. Refer to fire protection and Landscape specification for detailed specification related to fire water tank
and irrigation tank.
E. Domestic water distribution:
1. The DGDA Car park is provided with ambient cold water supply for all areas. The water supply
distribution from basement -1 filtered water tanks is supplied through booster pump sets.
2. The ambient cold water is supplied to,
a. Landlord toilets
b. General cleaning purpose including carparks, roof, waste room, pump room
3. The water distribution to the DGDA Car park is of pressurized boosted upfeed water supply system.
Booster pump sets are provided to distribute potable water supply within the establishment.
4. Booster pumps will provide continuous and reliable water supply at minimum 1.5 to 2.0 bar to remote
hose bibs. The system shall be provided with appropriate surge protection and the flow velocity of the
water distribution system to reduce possibility of water hammer.
5. Main boosted water supply is routed at high level of basement and is raised to individual building
through dedicated risers located within shaft.
6. Long runs of pipe to outlets shall be provided with circulation system to avoid stagnation.
7. Control valves shall be installed at base of risers, on horizontal branch serving the toilets and each
zone as required for ease of maintenance and repair. Control valves shall be located at accessible
location like ceiling voids, back of house area, plant rooms, service space etc.,
8. All the toilets hand spray, hose bib taps, water supply to water features shall be provided with back-
flow preventer. All landlord potable water supplies to tenants are to be provided with a suitable
backflow prevention device within the unit.
9. Pressure reducing valves shall be provided to limit the water pressure to 2.0 bars at the farthest point
on the network.
10. All the main plants; booster pump, transfer pump, circulating pump, copper silver ionization units,
filtration system, water level indicators, water meters, etc. shall be interfaced with Building
Management System (BMS).
11. Hose bibs accessible to public shall be of lockable type fitting.
12. Piping system shall incorporate thermal expansion joints and building structural joints as per pipe
manufacturer recommendation.
13. Water supply piping shall not be routed in Electrical and ELV rooms.
14. Water supply shall be provided with insulation and aluminium cladding where pipes are exposed to
direct sunlight and pipe runs in plant room. All internal and external cooled cold water supply pipes
shall be insulated.
15. All pipework passing through adjoining fire compartments shall be fire sleeved and sealed.
16. Components of a potable water supply piping installed along driveways, parking garages or other
locations exposed to damage shall be recessed into wall or otherwise protected in an approved
manner.
17. Care shall be taken to ensure balanced supplies are achieved by the use of appropriate pressure
regulating devices and selection of suitable mixing devices (with both thermostatic and pressure
control). Pressure reducing valves shall be located around the cold water distribution system to ensure
each zone is provided with the pressure set by the design of the system and to ensure that excessive
pressures do not occur to any of the outlets.
18. All pump sets shall be a package unit complete with all valves and accessories; IV’s/NRV’s/FC’s, control
panels, accumulators for free standing or set mounted pumps, suction & delivery transducers, etc.
19. The MEP contractor shall review the suction manifold exact requirement based on selected pump sets,
NPSH calculation shall be provided to the Engineer for review during material and shop drawing
submittal.
F. Cold Water specialties:
1. Pressure reducing valves shall be provided at each level and shall be pre-set at a pressure to
accommodate the losses through the pipework to the appliance of the index run and provide a 3 bar
at the tenant outlets.
2. Appliances shall be fitted with flow restrictors to limit the amount of water used during its use and to
comply with KSA Green Building requirements. Sanitary schedules provided by the architect and client
shall be in-line with KSA Green Building requirements, the MEP contractor shall notified to the
Engineer where a discrepancy is identified.
3. Thermostatic mixing valves (TMV 3) shall be provided on all washbasins, showers as indicated on the
drawing to ensure a safe deliverable temperature to avoid the risk from scalding.
4. Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in the toilet/pantry cores to minimise the risk of damage
against surge occurring due to sudden closure of sanitary valves.
5. Backflow prevention devices shall be installed as necessary to prevent cross-contamination. Hose bib
taps, etc. shall be fitted with non-removable vacuum breaker devices.
6. Health faucet within the WC cubicles shall be provided with vacuum breakers.
1.6 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICES – PARTICULAR SPCEIFICATION
A. Cold water storage tanks
1. Cold water storage tanks shall be of the capacities and types indicated on the Drawings and/ or listed
in the Technical Schedules.
2. Installation arrangements indicated on the Drawings shall apply for the following:
a. Tank types and construction:
b. Locations and sizes of connections:
c. Connections for level indication/control, level alarm and similar fittings:
d. Access and
e. Compartmentation.
3. Tanks with multiple compartments shall be constructed such that all connections and accessories shall
be repeated in each compartment to facilitate independent operation of each compartment.
4. Covers on free standing tanks shall be constructed from bolted ribbed aluminium sheets with readily
removable sections for access to ball valves/ delayed action ball valve and for cleaning access. Covers
not capable of supporting the weight of maintenance personnel shall be fitted with appropriate
warning notices.
5. All tanks shall be installed and/or lined in strict compliance with Manufacturers’ instructions taking into
account support, allowable deflection and future maintenance. Freestanding tanks shall be sited on
either flat continuous foundations, close centre beams, pier walls or bearer beams.
6. Tank supports shall accommodate the self-weight of the tank full with its contents.
7. The tanks shall be complete with all necessary bracing devices, brackets, stays etc.
8. Any internal tank metalwork shall be Grade 316L stainless steel.
9. All tanks over 1300 mm deep shall be provided with a fixed non-metallic or nylon coated internal and
mild steel or aluminium external access ladder for each compartment adjacent to the manhole location
to facilitate regular maintenance. Ladders over 2000 mm high shall be fitted with hoops to BS 4211.
Ladder widths shall be a minimum of 400mm, step spacings shall be no greater than 250mm and the
last step shall be no greater than 500mm from the tank bottom.
10. All connections to tanks shall be extended clear of thermal insulation to permit subsequent
disconnection of connecting pipework without disturbing the insulation. Connecting pipework shall be
supported separately to avoid its weight being carried on the tank connections.
11. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings the following shall apply:
a. Connections shall be flanged stools/studded flanged pads or screwed bosses in accordance with
the Pipework, Fittings and Valves Section of this Specification. Connections to concrete tanks shall
incorporate puddle flanges.
b. Ball float valves, delayed action ball valves, contents and temperature gauges etc., shall be in
accordance with the Pipework, Fittings and Valves Section of this Specification.
c. Thermal insulation shall be in accordance with the Thermal Insulation Section of this Specification.
d. Site testing and cleaning of tanks shall be in accordance with the Commissioning and Testing Sec-
tion of this Specification.
e. Disinfection of tanks and associated connecting services shall be in accordance with the Water
Treatment System Section of this Specification.
f. Outflow connections shall be taken off the side of each storage compartment.
g. Drain connections shall be taken off the bottom of each storage compartment.
h. Tanks with manhole accesses from side shall have a minimum manhole dimension of 1500mm
wide and 800mm height with safety handrail as per manufacturer recommendation.
i. At least one vent pipe of 110mm diameter shall be provided for each 40m2 of tank area with
insect screening and vent cowl.
j. Overflow shall be provided for each tank. Overflow pipes diameter shall have minimum 1.5times
incoming pipe diameter. Over flow pipes shall be located above high level boss connection. Suffi-
cient space shall be provided between incoming pipe and overflow pipes.
k. Insect/mosquito screens shall be fitted to overflow, warning and vent pipes with a mesh gauge no
greater than 0.65mm.
l. A dial thermometer shall be fitted to each tank compartment.
m. A hydrostatic contents gauge is to be provided for each storage compartment
n. Connections shall be provided for the following BMS detectors in each storage compartment:
1) Temperature side boss connection (location in bottom 30% of tank).
2) Contents low level, side boss connection (location at the same height as the pump disable
float).
3) Contents high level, side boss connection (located between the warning pipe and overflow
level). Connections shall be provided in each tank compartment for the booster pump/
transfer pump set low level disable float switch.
12. All Water tanks suction manifold shall be provided with a properly sized vortex inhibitor based on
manufacturer’s recommendation. The MEP contractor shall provide associated details for Engineers
review and approval.
13. All water tanks shall be supplied with level regulators consisting of 5 sensor probes. The level sensors
shall be radar type and shall consist of the following but not limited to;
a. 316 Stainless steel stem of length suitable for depth of reservoir. 6mm NPT mounting thread.
b. Low level sensor – interfaced with the booster/transfer pump sets for run-dry protection.
c. High level sensor – interfaced with the solenoid valves on the water make-up system of each water
tank.
d. Level sensors – monitoring water tanks capacity at 25%, 50% and 75%.
e. Wiring from switches to receiver - transmitter.
f. The level regulators shall be interfaced with the BMS system for water consumption monitoring.
B. Concrete Tanks for Potable Water Use
1. This specification covers work, materials and equipment required for preparing concrete structures and
installing a GRP tank lining system to contain the stored water volume. Lining should be installed as
per manufacturer instructions. GRP lining should have WRAS approval.
2. A coating vapour barrier shall be applied to the external surfaces of the concrete tank.
3. The Sub-Contractor shall invite the Construction Stage Supervisor to inspect the work after each stage.
a. Surface Preparation:
1) New concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to surface preparation.
2) Check for excess moisture in accordance with ASTM D 4263
3) Remove all oil, grease, dirt, water or other contaminants in accordance with ASTM D 4258 and
SSPC-SP 1.
4) Abrasive grit blast, wet abrasive blast or high pressure jet blast all internal surfaces to remove
all laitance, efflorescence, surface hardeners, curing compounds and loose concrete. A sur-
face texture similar to that of medium-coarse sandpaper should be achieved.
5) Thoroughly clean all blasted surfaces to remove dust, debris and sludge
6) Repair and remove or fill cracks, voids and other surface irregularities using an approved
patching material
7) Grind all form ties or other metallic protrusions below the surface and then patch or fill using
approved patching material.
8) All expansion joints and movement cracks wider than 1.6mm shall be repaired with elasto-
meric caulking material applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
9) Thoroughly vacuum clean all surfaces to remove remaining dust.
b. Lining:
1) Tank linings shall be Sheet waterproofing membrane and shall be tailor made by Sikaplan or
equivalent.
2) The Sheet waterproofing membrane shall be of a potable water grade which has been tested
to BS 6920 and approved by the UK’s WRAS (or approved equivalent authority) for use in
contact with potable water. Sheet waterproofing membrane based on flexible polyolefin (FPO-
PE) with a glass fibre inlay for restraint.
3) The lining, underlay and tank connections including accesses shall all be made and/or in-
stalled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
4) Clean and dry, homogeneous, free from oil and grease, dust and loose, friable particles. Paint,
cement laitance and other poorly adhering materials must be removed.
5) A cushion layer of geotextile (non-woven fabric) with min. density of 300 g/sqm must be laid
underneath the membrane.
6) Loose laid and mechanically fixed according to manufacturer recommendations.
7) All membrane overlaps must be welded i.e. using hand welding guns and pressure rollers or
automatic heat welding machines with individually adjustable and electronically controlled
welding temperatures.
8) Welding parameters, such as speed and temperature must be established with trials on site,
prior to any welding works.
9) Sarnafil® T Prep (or equivalent) must be used for seam preparation and cleaning of slightly
soiled membrane surfaces.
10) Sarnafil® T Clean (or equivalent) must be used for seam cleaning of soiled membrane sur-
faces.
11) Any persons entering the tank for installation or inspections, once the liner is present, shall
wear clean rubber soled footwear
C. Sectional GRP Water Tanks
1. Tanks shall comply with BS EN 13280.
2. Tanks shall be glass reinforced plastic hot press moulded at 140°C, the moulded plastic shall have a
minimum of 30% glass content, UV stabilized isophthalic unsaturated polyester resin to BS 5734 : Part
5.
3. Tanks shall have externally flanged sides and internally flanged base unless stated in equipment
schedule.
4. Panel surfaces shall be smooth and crevice free to provide a hygienic finish and be dimensionally
accurate.
5. Tanks shall where require, be internally braced using stainless steel grade 316L stainless steel tie rods.
All external bracing shall be galvanised RHS.
6. All tanks shall be provided with a 600 mm diameter minimum maintenance access point complete with
a hinged or screw type heavy duty self-draining cover with vermin proof air vent (screen not exceeding
0.65 mm aperture open area minimum 37%) per compartment.
7. All tanks shall include a central division panel unless specified otherwise, the partition shall be full
height made from standard panels and be capable of working normally with either side empty.
8. All tank panels shall be pre-insulated, top, sides and base with 40 mm thick low density polyurethane
(CFC Free) providing a minimum ‘U’ valve of 0.60 W/m²°C, from flange to flange using standard hot
press moulded panels. The insulation shall be fully vapour sealed using a smooth, crevice free, UV
stabilised skin matching the colour of the tank panel.
9. Holes cut through the insulation shall be fully vapour sealed with a weatherproof recessed shrouding
from the outer surface of the insulation skin to the tank panel.
10. Tanks shall not be filled for at least 24 hours after the joints and internal surfaces are fully dry.
D. Potable Water Booster Pump Sets
1. Cold water pressure boosting sets shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed in the
Technical Schedules.
2. The boosted cold water supply shall consist of a variable speed cold water booster set pumps (with a
duty/ duty-assist/ standby) arrangement as indicated within the public health services drawings. In
general, the booster pumps shall be a fully packaged, factory assembled, self-contained unit with
automatic changeover configuration mounted on a fabricated steel baseplate complete with hydraulic
accumulator, interconnecting pipework in stainless steel Grade 316L, integral control panel with full
wiring for operation. The complete package shall be finished at the manufacturer's factory with a
suitable corrosion resistant undercoat and hard gloss or hammer finish top coat in manufacturer's
livery. All controls and mains switching devices are to be housed in a steel enclosure with a minimum
rating of IP55 with all the necessary terminals, labels, inter-connections, wiring diagram and spare
fuses (if fitted).
A 4-pole door interlocked isolator must be incorporated into the incoming mains supply. A break tank
level monitoring system comprising of a high and low level float less electrode relay control devices
and associated slave relays and lamps is to be incorporated into the control panel. Each tank section
(where applicable) shall be monitored separately with provision for each tank to be isolated from the
monitoring circuit by means of a panel mounted selector switch. Volt free contacts for both high and
low level conditions are to be provided. The pump set shall be complete with pressure transducers on
both the suction & delivery manifold. Hydraulic accumulator/pressure vessels shall be provided in
order to limit the number of start stops of the booster pump and shall be sized as per manufacture’s
recommendation. MEP contractor shall cost for additional pressure vessel if required based on
manufacture’s requirement.
3. Additional pressure vessels shall be provided as part of the package in order to limit the number of
start stops of the booster pump and shall be sized as per manufacture’s recommendation. MEP
contractor shall cost for additional pressure vessel if required based on manufacture’s requirement
4. The pumps shall be of the in-line vertical multi-stage design.
5. Pumps, control panel, VFD, pressure vessel, suction and discharge manifold shall be from same
manufacturer.
6. The variable speed pressure boosting system shall be a fully automatic self-contained pre-fabricated
unit complete with pumps, isolating valves, non-return valves, common headers, sensors and all
required fittings assembled on a skid ready for plug and pump operation.
7. The complete system shall be factory assembled at the manufacturer’s own factory premises and
tested for full functionality
8. All Basement booster pumps shall be connected to Essential power supply to operate during power
failure.
9. Sets shall be provided as complete Works assembled and tested fully automatic packaged units
mounted on a common base frame and comprising:
a. The Headers shall be SS316 material with high quality extruded joints without corners or crevices.
b. Direct coupled duty and standby pumps as indicated on the Technical/equipment Schedules.
c. The pumps shall be connected in parallel. Each pump shall be complete with isolating valves on
the suction and delivery connections, strainer on the suction connection and non-return valve on
the delivery connection only.
d. Dry running protection should be provided based on a digital signal for suction lift application
whereas pressure sensing method can be used in conditions of positive inlet pressure.
e. Diaphragm type pressure vessels of fabricated steel construction incorporating a butyl rubber dia-
phragm or removable bag. The internal surfaces shall be coated with epoxy polyester resin or
other finish suitable for the application. Finishes to vessels on potable water systems shall be
agreed with the Local Water Supply Authority. Vessels shall be charged with nitrogen to the
correct system pressure at the commissioning stage.
f. Vessel/s shall be sized to limit pump starts to 10 per hour and shall be capable of receiving and
discharging the scheduled design flow rate between pump starts.
g. Interconnecting pipework, fittings and valves
h. Pressure switch for pump and solenoid valve
i. High and low pressure pump cut-out switches.
j. The set mounted starter/control/indication panel including:
1) Main incoming supply electrical isolator interlocked with panel door
2) Pilot lamp to indicate panel ‘live’
3) Starter for each pump motor with facilities for automatic duty pump/s selection and changeo-
ver.
4) Microprocessor controller including facility to interrogate the unit.
5) LCD display of system pressure, fault etc
6) Two sets of volt-free contacts to relay common fault condition to an external source to
indicate either of the following:
7) Common fault alarm
8) Unit lock out.
9) The pumps used in the system are fitted with a TEFC (totally enclosed, fan-cooled), 2-pole
standard motor with principal dimensions to EN standards.
10) The typical electrical data of the motors should be as below
a) Motor efficiency : IE3 / IE5 for 11 kW and below
b) Enclosure class : IP55
11) Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
a) VFD shall automatically boost power factor at lower speeds.
b) The VFD shall be able to provide its full rated output current continuously at 110% of
rated current for 60 seconds.
c) Switching of the input power to the VFD shall be possible without interlocks or damage to
the VFD at a minimum interval of 2 minutes.
d) Switching of power on the output side between the VFD and the motor shall be possible
with no limitation or damage to the VFD and shall require no additional interlocks.
e) The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation, minimized
internal losses, and greatly increased fan life.
f) VFD shall provide full torque to the motor given input voltage fluctuations of up to +10%
to -15% of the rated input voltage.
g) The VFD shall provide internal DC link reactors to minimize power line harmonics and to
provide near unity power factor. VFD’s without a DC link reactor shall provide a 5%
impedance line side reactor.
12) Controls & Monitoring
a) The control panel should have an intelligent microprocessor control unit developed by
the pump manufacturer
b) The controller shall be microprocessor based capable of having software changes and
updates via personal computer (notebook). The controller user interface shall have a VGA
display with a minimum screen size of 3-1/2” x 4-5/8” for easy viewing
c) The controller shall display the following as status readings from a single display on the
controller (this display shall be the default):
i. Set value of the control parameter (set point)
ii. Current measured value of the control parameter, (typically discharge

pressure)
iii. Most recent existing alarm (if any)
iv. System status with current operating mode
v. Status of each pump with current operating mode and rotational speed as a
percentage.
vi. Flow estimation
d) The system controller shall be able to accept up to seven programmable set-points via a
digital input, (additional input/output module may be required).
e) The controller shall have advanced water shortage protection. When analog sensors (level
or pressure) are used for water shortage protection, there shall be two indication levels.
One level is for warning indication only (indication that the water level/pressure is getting
lower than expected levels) and the other level is for complete system shutdown (water
or level is so low that pump damage can occur). System restart after shutdown shall be
manual or automatic (user selectable).
f) The system pressure set-point shall be capable of being automatically adjusted by using
an external set-point influence. The set-point influence function enables the user to adjust
the control parameter (typically pressure) by measuring an additional parameter
(Example: Lower the system pressure set-point based on a flow measurement to
compensate for lower friction losses at lower flow rates).
g) The pump system controller shall be mounted in an IP54 approved enclosure. The control
panel shall include main disconnect, circuit breakers for each pump and the control
circuit.
h) The controller shall be capable of receiving a redundant sensor input to function as a

backup to the primary sensor (typically discharge pressure).
i) The controller shall have a pump “Test Run” feature such that pumps are switched on
during periods of inactivity (system is switched to the “off” position but with electricity
supply still connected). The inoperative pumps shall be switched on for a short period 24
hours, 48 hours or once per week (user selectable).
j) The actual pump performance curves (5th order polynomial) and the efficiency curve of
the pump shall be loaded into the pump system controller in order to optimize the
energy efficiency of the Cascade control.
k) The controller shall have the intelligence to monitor the pump performance and ensure
that the pump does not run out of the curve by taking appropriate action like calling
additional pumps or regulating the speed so that the pump operates in the safe area of
the curve.
l) An empty pipe fill mode shall be available to fill an empty pipe in a short period of time,
and then revert to the PID controller for stable operation
13) Hard wired interlocks in the event of a critical alarm with the low temperature hot water,
chilled water or condenser water installations, as applicable.
14) The Sub-Contractor shall note that in some instances headers on Boosters may need to be
removed to allow sets to pass through structural openings. MEP contractor shall cost for the
dismantle and assemble of equipment and plants in and out of the plantroom/s and for any
associated material handling. MEP contractor shall also cater for manufacturer’s representative
to be present during such instances and ensure that the plants warranties are not jeopardize.
15) The MEP contractor shall coordinate with the Main contractor and Structural Engineers for the
final layout and detailing of the GRP water tanks plinths. Setting-out drawings shall be
submitted for Engineers review based on final GRP water tank selection.
E. Transfer Pump Sets (Variable Speed)
1. Transfer sets shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed in the Technical Schedules.
2. The pumps shall be of the in-line vertical multi-stage design.
3. The variable speed transfer system shall be factory assembled at the manufacturer’s own factory
premises and tested for full functionality. The system shall be fully automatic self-contained
prefabricated unit complete with pumps, isolating valves, non-return valves, common SS316 headers,
float switches, gauges and all required fittings assembled on a steel skid ready for plug and pump
operation. The panel could be based on the common skid or on a separate stand or even wall
mounted.
4. The control panel shall have an integrated control unit developed by the pump manufacturer with
easy- to-operate user interface that can display the relevant status of the pumps and alarms for each
pump and also communicate with building management system by digital volt free signals.
5. The discharge and suction side of the pump shall be connected by a common header SS316
6. The system shall be controlled by a dedicated controller produced by the Pump manufacturer
dedicated for the system being proposed. The system shall be controlled by the digital signals from
the float switches
7. Dry running protection shall be provided based on a digital signal for suction lift application.
8. The pumps used in the system shall be fitted with a TEFC (totally enclosed, fan-cooled), 2-pole
standard motor with principal dimensions to EN standards.
9. The typical electrical data of the motors should be as below & shall have a built-in thermistor (PTC)
a. Motor efficiency: IE3
b. Enclosure class: IP55
10. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
a. VFD shall automatically boost power factor at lower speeds.
b. The VFD shall be able to provide its full rated output current continuously at 110% of rated current
for 60 seconds.
c. Switching of the input power to the VFD shall be possible without interlocks or damage to the VFD
at a minimum interval of 2 minutes.
d. Switching of power on the output side between the VFD and the motor shall be possible with no
limitation or damage to the VFD and shall require no additional interlocks.
e. The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation, minimized internal
losses, and greatly increased fan life.
f. VFD shall provide full torque to the motor given input voltage fluctuations of up to +10% to -15%
of the rated input voltage.
g. The VFD shall provide internal DC link reactors to minimize power line harmonics and to provide
near unity power factor. VFD’s without a DC link reactor shall provide a 5% impedance line side
reactor.
11. Controls & Monitoring
a. The pump system controller shall be a standard product designed, developed and manufactured
by the pump manufacturer for transfer application.
b. The controller shall be microprocessor based with non-re-programmable electronic hardware.
c. The controller shall display the following as status from the facia of the panel:
1) Power on indication
2) Running indication per pump
3) Fault indication per pump
4) Auto mode indication per pump
5) General alarm indication.
6) Water shortage indication
d. The controller shall have as a minimum the following features
1) Over current protection
2) Thermal overload protection with manual reset.
3) Automatic alternation per cycle
4) Automatic changeover to available pump in case of fault.
5) Automatic sequencing of pumps.
6) Built in start-up delay timer between pumps.
7) Dry run protection by float switch.
8) Automatic reset of dry running fault.
9) Volt free contacts for common alarm, each pump running & each pump fault 10). System
restart after shut-down shall be automatic.
10) The pump system controller shall be mounted in an IP54 approved enclosure. The control
panel shall include a main disconnect, circuit breakers for each pump and the control circuit.
11) The user interface of the system controller shall have the following operating buttons:
a) Main isolator for power connect/disconnect
b) Push button for assigning each pump in auto mode.
c) Push button for each pump stop.
d) Push button with spring return for each pump manual/test run.
F. Domestic Water Treatment
1. The water treatment plant shall be designed based on the site wide water quality and the treated
water from the plant shall meet the standards of the water intended for the consumption as
recommended by the World Health Organization (W.H.O)
2. The complete treatment plant shall be fully automatic with minimal manual intervention with link to
the BMS system.
G. Multi Media Sand Filter Unit
1. Vessel: The filter vessels shall be fabricated from high grade steel and lined with a controlled thickness
of epoxy paint. The vessels shall be coated outside by a zinc chromate primer.
2. Valves: Automatic diaphragm valves shall be installed to control the operating steps. A Hydraulically
operated dedicated pilot valve shall control the opening and closing of the valves.
3. Media: The Filter-Clear multimedia sand filter bed shall consist of a top layer of uniformly graded
granular form of anthracite with bulk density. The intermediate layer shall consist of lime free,
chemically inert, carbonate free and long lasting silica sand. The under bed shall consist of a layer of
gravel, of granular material of extraordinary density available in graded sizes for fine filtration.
4. Flow Controls: The filters shall be provided with automatic self-adjusting flow controls. This shall
ensure proper flow rate during the operating cycle in order to prevent loss of filter media during
backwash and to save water during the conditioning rinse cycle.
5. Controls: The filter shall be equipped with electronic devices programmer with logic function enable to
program the backwash cycle of the filter at any time of day. The programmer shall be complete with
soft keyboard and LCD display shall be housed in case with IP65 rated cabinet with transparent cover.
6. During the backwash cycle, the unit under backwash shall receive the water from the duty pump. The
water treatment equipment supplier shall be capable of the necessary interfacing from the filter
controller and the feed pump control panel.
7. The tank is manufactured in steel-sheet (electrical welding) with stamped and flanged bottom. The
relevant painting process is as follows:
a. Inside: Sandblasting SA 2 ½ 3 according to SIS 05-59-00 norms, dual compound liquid grey
epoxy- polyamide primer, white solvent less quick-drying food-grade epoxy liquid paint and brick
red solvent less quick-drying food-grade epoxy liquid paint. Total Thickness 230÷250 micro mm
b. Outside: Sandblasting SA 2 ½ according to SIS 05-59-00 norms, dual compound grey epoxy poly-
amide primer and quick-drying polyurethane paint. Total Thickness 80÷100 micro mm.
H. Legionella Prevention By Copper Silver Ionization System
1. Copper silver ionization disinfection purpose is preventing the growth of legionella & biofilm for
domestic water. This shall be installed at basement B2 level for raw water holding tank (534CUM). One
recirculation pump shall be used with circulation duration 20hours per day.
2. Description of each Copper silver ionization unit
a. Each copper (Cu) silver (Ag) ionization (CSI) system must be designed to treat continuously and
automatically the water flow to eliminate and/or prevent the presence of biofilm and Legionella of
the incoming potable water mains and the water in circulation systems of storage tanks by means
of dosing of accurate concentrations of ions.
b. The proposed Copper Silver Ionization unit should have KIWA certification for Legionella
prevention: electromechanical techniques.
c. In order to ensure that the CSI system is capable of accurately and individually controlled dosing
of the correct and required concentrations of copper and silver ions per litre water, the system
must consist of two or more electrolysis cells containing at least one pair of copper electrodes and
one pair of silver electrodes.
d. In addition, the system’s electronic control unit of the ionization process must contain feature that
each ionization chamber is controlled by high precision current control technology ensuring
continuous optimum dosage accuracy of each of the separate Cu and Ag electrolysis processes
and also that each of the individual electrodes remain free from scaling and other complexing
processes, elements that will significantly reduce the proper functioning of the ionization process.
This then also enhances a minimum of periodic quarterly maintenance intervals.
e. Length and diameter of the ionization chambers and the separate copper and silver electrodes.
Bifipro XVI: Each set of copper and silver electrodes will have its own ionization chamber with
length of approx. 52 cm and an outer diameter of 63 mm. Length of copper electrodes should be
40cm with a diameter of 19 mm; length of silver electrodes should be 10 – 20 cm with a diameter
of 19mm.
f. The communication and monitoring Control box for standard controller is equipped with an
Ethernet connection for monitoring in a LAN or via open VPN internet communication for
monitoring. The costumer can get the results of the monitoring via the LAN by means of an
explorer on the LAN-iP address or on protected project website.
g. Flow meter (magnetic-inductive) must be part of the ionization unit and will precisely measure
flow in the range of 1-100 l/min or higher. EC conformity 2004/108/EC. EN standard EN 60947-5-9:
2007.
h. Setting of the copper and silver electrolysis processes:
1) Dosage must be proportional to flow as well as an independent process for copper and silver
ions
2) Dosage must be proportional to flow and in case of a circulation system also proportional to
the incoming copper ion concentration and proportional to the incoming silver ion
concentration
i. Control: Mandatory Online Monitoring – The equipment works completely standalone and the on-
board monitor program provides data for the local office website & also to the manufacturer for
proper system monitoring. Parameters are shown in graphs from total, peak and average flow, the
amount of released copper and silver and the results in the concentration of copper and silver ions
of the flow passed through the ionization cells.
j. Silco Sensor control – To adjust and control the copper and silver ion concentrations the water in
the storage tank has to be continuously analysed. The analysis equipment is of a make of a hybrid
electrochemical sensor as a complete analytical package for trace analysis of dissolved copper and
silver in aqueous systems, online and real-time measurements and either inline or handheld.
Levels of detection (LOD) for Cu is 10 ppb and Ag 1 ppb.
I. Domestic Hot Water Services Storage 100 Litre and below
1. Hot water supply in the development is limited to landlord areas, as the tenants are responsible for
providing their own means of generating and storage of domestic hot water. The hot water supply is
provided to landlord toilet wash basins, prayer room ablutions, janitor sinks.
2. Hot water shall be generated by localized electric water heaters.
3. The hot water temperature to appliances, where applicable, shall be temperature controlled via a
Thermostatic Mixing Valve (TMV) as detailed within the following table extracted from Table 8 of The
Institute of Plumbing – Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Application Appliance

Type
3 All Ablution
3 Public WHB
4. TMV = Thermostatic mixing valve installed to prevent the risk of scalding.
5. Provide UL listed or British standard equivalent, BEAB and WBS approved glass lined, packaged electric
water heaters as per requirements of Appendix A or approved equivalent. Refer to Water Heater
schedule for performance requirements.
6. Provide heaters with complete CFC-free insulation coverage, finished enamelled steel jacket and
enclosure for contractors and controls.
7. Provide heater to accept electric power at 220V 1-phase 50 Hz.
8. Individual electrical water heaters (unvented type) shall be provided for Landlord toilets. The hot water
cylinder shall consist of the following but not limited to:
a. Factory fitted temperature/pressure relief valve.
b. Strainer
c. Drain cocks
d. Wall/ceiling mounting bracket set
e. Expansion vessel
f. Tundish
g. High limit hot water thermal cut-out
h. The unit shall be complete with all the necessary electrical components. The electricity supply
should be fused and be via a double pole isolating switch.
i. The drain pipe shall be trapped and shall be able to sustain high temperature (60-90 degrees)
j. Built in magnetic contractors with 220 V holding coil including 220V transformer, control circuit
switch, fuses, element ‘ON’ pilot light and externally mounted toggle switch
k. Factory fitted temperature and pressure relief valve.
l. Replaceable long life alloy sheath element.
m. Cold water diffuser
n. Externally adjustable immersion thermostat. 10-700C max – lockable in hot or mid-range position
o. Magnesium anodes
p. Heating elements with stainless steel sheathing
q. High limit control with manual rest
r. Drain valve.
s. 1 meter of 3-core cable
9. All water heaters shall be mounted from the concrete or steel structure. The supporting details shall be
submitted to the structural Engineer for approval. Any secondary supporting steel or support
arrangement shall be provided by the contractor to support the water heater.
10. All water heaters shall be provided with a drain pipe which shall be of HDPE material, which shall join
to the nearest floor trap.
11. Water heaters shall have heating coil with recovery time of 1 hour. Heaters with heating time more
than 1 hour shall not be installed.
J. Metering Strategy
1. The incoming potable water supply from authority is provided with authority bulk meter and all other
meters in the project are landlord sub-meters linked to BMS.
2. All sub meters shall have data logging capabilities and be connected to a central building monitoring
system so that information on the interior water consumption can be recorded and monitored.
3. A double check valve shall be installed after all water meters to avoid contamination of the potable
water system in areas where there’s a risk of water stagnation like bib taps, garbage room, waste
rooms. All sub meters shall be fitted with a pulse output facility thereby allowing the meter to be read
and monitored by the site BMS system.
4. Approved MEWA water meter shall be installed on the main incoming potable water to the building as
per local utility provider. MEWA water meter and shall be complete with strainer, isolating valves, non-
return valve, test points, drain cocks, etc. Each meter shall be capable of providing data to the BMS;
data from each meter shall be collected via the BMS for reporting via monitoring software.
5. MEWA water meters shall be provided in a dedicated water meter room/ valve chamber as indicated
within the public health services drawings Landlord water meters shall not be located in MEWA water
meter room/ valve chamber.
6. All MEWA water meters shall be supplied by MEWA, MEP contactor shall finalize the water meter
schedule and submit to MEWA. All fees to be paid by the client.
K. Hot And Cold Water Distribution Pipework & Valves
1. The cold and hot water pipework materials shall be as mentioned in Public Health Services Pipework
Materials Schedule.
2. Throughout the installation, valves shall be installed to isolate all items of plant and equipment with
further isolating valves being provided on all main sub-circuits to facilitate maintenance. Drain valves
and air valves shall be installed at all low and high points to enable each section to be isolated and
drained. In addition to the above requirements servicing valves shall be provided on the connection to
all appliances. All dead legs shall be kept to the absolute minimum. Valves shall be installed in
pipework so as to be easily accessible for operation with due regards being given to the building and
the area in which they are fixed. Valves installed in inaccessible positions in the opinion of the Engineer
shall be repositioned at the Contractors expense. Pressure reducing valves shall also be provided on
the main distribution pipework to areas shown in the design drawings. The pressure reducing valves
shall be pre- set at a pressure to accommodate the losses through the pipework to the appliance of
the index run and provide a minimum pressure of 1.5bar and maximum pressure of 3 bars at the
outlet. The pressure reducing valves shall be fitted with manometer on both high and low pressure.
The Contractor shall supply and install all ancillaries required by the Commissioning Engineer to
commission the system. The Contractor shall provide drawings showing location of expansion bellows,
isolating valves, pressure reducing valves, air release valve, drain valves, water meters, and all ancillaries
required to make the system fully functional before commencement of works. The drawings shall
include the locations and sizes of access traps.
3. Class O flexible, closed cell, elastomeric, nitrile rubber shall be installed on all pipes to offer reliable
protection against condensation and effectively prevents energy loss. Location includes concealed
distribution routes, within plant rooms, risers, external locations and voids. In areas where it is exposed
to traffic or subject to damage, (i.e. plant rooms, parking and access routes) the pipework & lagging is
to be protected with flat aluminium-zinc coated steel. Where exposure to sunlight or daylight is a
possibility the protection must be fit for purpose and have suitable properties to ensure it does not
deteriorate in appearance or performance. Refer to Section 220 719 in standard specification.
4. Pipe identification shall be as per BS 1710:1984.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible to connect the water pipes and install all appliances supplied by
others.
6. On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall fully flush, pressure test, chlorinate and set to
work the complete hot and cold water system in accordance with the relevant sections of this
Specification.
7. All pipe sizes shown on the drawings are based on nominal diameters, contractor shall ensure that the
specified pipe material have the same internal bore diameter as per the detail deisgn drawings.
1.7 ABOVE GROUND FOUL, WASTE AND KITCHEN DRAINAGE DESCRIPTION OF WORKS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Car park drainage:
1. Basement level ramps and car parking area (traffic areas) that receive water shall drain into the foul
water drainage below ground network through channels and car park gullies, via a dedicated network,
prior to discharge into the foul water network. The basement slab is a flat design with no slope
towards drain. The treated waste water is discharged to sump pit. The sump pits will be provided with
pumping arrangement in main works package. The pumps will lift the underground sump drainage to
external manhole located at grade level. The valves will be placed in separate valve chamber for easy
access and maintenance.
2. The plot basement is divided into 3 zones, each zone provided with dedicated petrol interceptor, sump
pit, valve chamber.
B. Pump room, water tank room drainage:
1. Pump rooms, water tank room, plant rooms located in basement are provided with area drain/ channel
drain with integral trap and are connected to car park sump via gully trap.
C. Foul drainage
1. It is considered the foul drainage from plot is pumped drainage system with 2 no. foul sump pit and
gully trap to collect and then pump to external manhole.
D. Storm drainage
1. The storm water strategy for the project is to free discharge storm to road network.
E. The primary drainage system shall consist of a gravity system, wherever gravity drainage is deemed
possible. Pumped drainage shall be used only where the invert level of the external drainage network is
found insufficient.
F. Drainage systems will comprise the following sub-systems:
1. Above ground and below ground foul and vent drainage system
2. Above ground kitchen waste drainage
3. Above ground rainwater drainage
4. Podium landscape drainage
5. Car park drainage
6. Condensate drainage
7. Water tank and pump room drainage
8. Sump and pumps
G. Sanitary drainage from building is collected in an sewer sump pits and then pumped discharged to
infrastructure manhole through pressure break chamber.
H. Sanitary drainage from basement level toilets located below grade level are collected in an sump pit and
then pumped discharged to infrastructure manhole through pressure break chamber.
I. The foul water (from WC and Urinal) and waste water (from sink, basin, shower, ablution, etc.) shall be
collected separately via the foul and waste stacks respectively.
J. All proposed pump room shall be provided with floor drainage, the drain pipe shall be discharged to
nearest basement drainage system.
K. All high-level drainage installations shall be designed in such a way to protect the areas below with no
installations above kitchens, restaurants. If unavoidable the drainage runs must be complete with stainless
steel drip trays and leak detection as per the local authority requirements.
L. Drainage piping shall not run within elevator machine rooms, telephone rooms, IT rooms, electrical rooms
(both HV and LV) and closets, generator rooms (except for pipework directly associated with the generator
unit(s) and control/security room(s).
M. Drainage piping shall be provided with cleanouts/ access points at every 15m and at every change in
direction.
N. Piping system shall include thermal expansion joint fitting, building structural joint fitting and associate
supports system shall be in accordance with pipe manufacturer recommendation.
O. All pipework passing through adjoining fire compartments shall be fire sleeved and sealed.
P. Any connections to the local authority sewer networks shall be complete with suitable back flow preventers
to protect the development in the event that the authority network floods.
Q. Components of a drainage system including gravity and pressure piping installed along driveways, parking
garages or other locations exposed to damage shall be recessed into wall or otherwise protected in an
approved manner.
1.8 ABOVE GROUND FOUL, WASTE AND KITCHEN DRAINAGE PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the complete above ground foul and waste water
services installation as described herein, 100%CD, and equipment schedules. The Contractor shall connect
the waste and install all appliances supplied by others
B. Foul and waste drainage systems has been designed to convey all effluent from various sanitary appliances,
drainage outlets, etc. by gravity / pumped discharge to the external drainage network.
C. The system design is based on the secondary ventilated system and ventilated discharge branch
configuration.
D. Main ventilating pipework has been designed to suit the design of both the above and below ground
drainage systems, terminating to atmosphere at roof level.
E. The Contractor’s shall be responsible for the following performance objectives for the above ground
drainage systems:
1. Ensure that all the installation is compliant with Riyadh Municipality requirements
2. Provide all foul drainage above ground pipework to serve the new sanitary appliances and other
drainage outlets throughout the buildings
3. Base the above ground foul drainage design on above specified configuration
4. Provide adequate drainage facilities for the mechanical services equipment and plants
5. Discharge all drainage from plant rooms and mechanical equipment into trapped floor gullies,
connected to the foul drainage above ground system.
F. The Contractor shall:
1. Coordinate, supply, install, test and commission the complete above ground drainage systems, as
described herein and indicated on the detail design drawings and equipment schedules
2. Install the system using the minimum pipework and fittings necessary to carry away all foul discharges
from the building to the below ground drainage system, quickly, quietly and with freedom from
nuisance or risk of injury to health
3. Prevent air from the discharge pipes from entering the building. Clearly identify all pipelines
4. Install all drainage pipework to convey discharges without crossflow, back fall, leakage or blockage
5. Adequately test, clean and maintain the system at all times throughout the construction process.
6. Not use short radius bends in the foul drainage above ground system.
7. Make all branches to horizontal discharge pipework at high level any floor using 45° branches swept in
the direction of flow where possible.
8. Install access doors or caps on sanitary pipework to facilitate rodding and maintenance access to
installed pipework.
9. Co-ordinate access through Architectural casings with pipe accessories.
10. Design all discharge and ventilation pipework installation within designated service ducts or integrated
ceiling voids.
11. Co-ordinate removable access panels with the drainage access points to enable maintenance to
discharge pipework.
12. Install exposed pipework to a high standard, true to line, with adequate support fixings.
13. Test all discharge and ventilation pipework at various stages and on completion of the installation to
ensure compliance with the statutory requirements
14. Ensure appliances drain quickly, quietly and completely at all times without nuisance or risk to health.
15. Ensure pressure fluctuations in pipework do not vary by more than plus or minus 38mm water gauge
and traps retain a water seal of not less than 25mm.
16. Ensure pipe routes are shortest practicable, with as few bends as possible and no bends in wet portion
of soil stacks, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
G. All drainage systems shall be provided with access pipes and access doors on all main discharge pipes
accordingly,
1. Vertically:
a. At every level, as a minimum, located at floor level plus 1200mm at each installed position, to the
centreline of the access fitting
b. on stub stack connections at floor level plus 1200mm to the centreline of the access fitting or
above the fittings spill-over level
c. as required to facilitate access for testing
d. on vertical pipework above and below any offset
2. Horizontally,
a. where shown on the public health systems drawings
b. all changes in direction
c. on all horizontal floats
H. All the drainage risers shall be provided with fire rated access panels as per Riyadh Municipality
requirement. MEP contractor shall liaise with the Main Contractor, ID & Architect to ensure that the access
panel requirements are provided.
I. The building shall be provided with a complete secondary ventilated above ground foul and waste water
drainage system sized sufficiently to receive discharge drainage from all appliances and mechanical plant.
All ventilation pipework shall be laid to a slight fall in the direction away from the main foul and waste
stacks.
J. All Basement B4 sump pumps shall be connected to Essential power supply to operate during power
failure.
K. All pumped drainage shall be connected to a pressure break chamber prior to connect to the main
drainage outfall. MEP contractor shall verify the pressure break chamber capacity & sizing based on
L. The MEP contractor shall ensure that the drainage installation shall be as per Riyadh Municipality
requirements and bring any discrepancies to the attention of the design engineers. MEP contractor shall
make provision for the following even though if these are not shown on the design drawings.
1. The main drainage headers, final inspection chambers, first and last manholes shall be provided with a
dedicated vent pipe terminating at roof level or as shown by the design drawings.
2. All air wells or services risers shall be provided with floor drains at the base connected to the car park
drainage system or to the waste water network via a running trap where condensate drain shall be
used to keep the trap wet.
3. All sump pumps shall be provided with an emergency connection point. Capped connection points
shall be provided with valve arrangement on the pumps discharge pipes allowing easy connection or
portable pumps if required.
4. Vent pipes shall be provided after floor drains in general as per Riyadh Municipality requirement.
M. The building shall be provided with a complete secondary ventilated above ground foul and waste water
drainage system sized sufficiently to receive discharge drainage from all appliances and mechanical plant.
All ventilation pipework shall be laid to a slight fall in the direction away from the main foul and waste
stacks.
N. Typically the above ground foul and waste drainage system is made up of a 160/110mm main soil and
waste stacks which receives discharge from the following appliances:
1. WCs
2. Floor Drains
3. Balcony drains
4. WHBs
5. Janitors Sinks
6. Showers
7. Kitchen Sinks
8. Dish Washers
O. All discharge from grey water appliances shall pass through a floor drain via a back inlet gully before
connecting to the above ground drainage headers. Floor drains shall be provided in each wet area and
each individual WC cubical in accordance with the local regulations and as indicated within tender
drawings.
P. A separate network shall be installed for the F&B and main kitchen restaurant waste; all F&B waste pipes
shall be in HDPE.
Q. Discharge stacks and branch waste pipework shall be in HDPE and those running in occupied areas shall
generally be installed in HDPE silent with increased level of sound proofing. Adequate provision shall be
made to deal with horizontal and vertical thermal expansion in accordance with the pipe manufacturers
recommendations. The drainage pipe material running vertically/horizontally in shafts and false ceiling
shall comply with the following acoustic requirement.
1. Wherever low noise and acoustic requirements, use silent HDPE pipes and brackets along with the
normal HDPE pipes, similar to silent-db20.
2. Smooth-walled Silent-db20 pipes DN 56 to DN 150 with smooth ends and fittings with vibration
dampers in the impact zone and smooth inner surface made of mineral-reinforced PE-S2
3. The pipe density shall be 1700 kg/m3
4. Standards according to DIN4109 and DIN 4102.
5. Silent-db20 sound-absorbing drainage system with tested sound levels (Lin) of 17 dB(A) to 27 dB(A),
depending on the construction project, in accordance with DIN 4109 in the room diagonally
underneath.
6. For building drainage systems in accordance with EN 12056 in conjunction with DIN 1986-100, Silent-
db20 pipes and fittings are tested and approved inside buildings in accordance with EN 1519-1.
7. Product material: PE-S2, mineral-reinforced polyethylene, halogen-free
8. Linear expansion: 0.17 mm/m*K
9. Building material class: DIN 4102-B2, normally inflammable
10. UV resistance: The addition of approx. 2% soot largely protects the product material against ageing
and embrittlement from sunlight.
11. Laying as per manufacturer guidelines in accordance with EN 12056 and DIN 1986-100.
12. In accordance with DIN 4109, the drainage system is to be separated from the building structure to
prevent the transmission of structure-borne sound.
13. Pipe brackets, clamping connectors, electro fusion couplings and butt welding’s etc to be from the
same manufacturer specially made for the silent pipe.
R. All above ground foul and waste drainage suspended pipework shall be laid to fall in the direction of flow
to maintain a self-cleansing velocity based on the flow capacity. Pipes shall be installed with levelled soffit
to avoid hydraulic jump.
S. Access shall be provided at 1.2m above FFL on all above ground foul and waste drainage stacks at each
level for rodding access, these shall be used in the event of a blockage within the above ground system.
Rodding eyes shall be provided to all suspended drainage at any change of direction, they shall be
provided to all foul / grey water headers / floats positioned in a fully accessible area for rodding purposes
in the event of a blockage. The Contractor shall issue drawings showing access and rodding eyes prior to
commencement of works.
T. The MEP contractor shall liaise with third parties & detail the builder’s work requirement for water and
drainage services on their shop drawings.
U. The foul water shall discharge to the external manholes and these pipes shall terminated 1.5m outside the
building with gully trap on waste lines as indicated by the drawings. Any drainage below grade level shall
be collected to the foul water sump pits in the basement, whereby the foul water shall be pumped out to
the main drainage outfall via a pressure break chamber.
V. Pipe identification shall be as per BS 1710:1984.
W. Vent pipe shall be provided at the starting point of horizontal drainpipes.
X. The Contractor shall supply and install all ancillaries required by the Commissioning Engineer to
commission the system. The installation shall be flushed and tested as required and on completion of all
works. The Contractor shall set to work the system after completion of all installation, testing and
commissioning.
Y. Traps
1. Pipework connections to WCs or similar soil appliance shall comprise a suitable rigid non-translucent
moulded white, e.g., push fit connector complete with synthetic sealing rings. Each connector shall be
British Board of Agreement Certified.
2. The use of helical or spiral flexible connectors will not be permitted.
3. All waste traps shall have a minimum water seal of 75mm and shall be fully ventilated in order that the
seal may be maintained.
4. Wash hand basins: 32mm diameter union outlet, 75mm seal, two piece white bottle trap with chrome
plate finish or as specified in Architect’s sanitary ware schedule.
5. Shower trays: minimum 50mm diameter, 75mm seal two piece ‘P’ traps, copper to BS 2871 or as
indicated on the detail design Drawings.
6. Sinks: 38mm diameter, 75mm seal two piece ‘P’ or ’S’ traps to suit installation, PVC.
7. Condense line connections: 50mm diameter, 75mm seal, two piece ‘P’ trap, copper to BS 2871
Z. Fire Stopping
1. All plastic pipework over and above 40mm diameter shall be fitted with an intumescent fire sleeve
where this pipework passes through fire compartment wall and floors, etc
AA. Car Park Drainage
1. Basement car park shall be provided with parking drains, channel drains, below ground piping, sump
and pump to collect and discharge the waste water collected within basement and from the basement
entrances.
2. Each car park zone is provided with minimum parking drains that collect water from parking floor.
3. Channel drains shall be provided at the bottom of ramps, particularly at entry levels, to remove water
swiftly and prevent ponding.
4. Load class of parking drains shall be class D400 and shall be made of ductile iron. Load class of
channel drains shall be class D400 and shall be in accordance with BS EN 1433 Drainage channels for
vehicular and pedestrian areas. Classification, design and testing requirements, marking and evaluation
of conformity. Drains shall be made of ductile iron.
5. Parking drain and Channel drain outlets will include an in-built removable sediment bucket.
6. Parking drains are provided for the car park drainage, which shall be collected through to sump pits.
The pumped foul water drain shall be routed at high level and connect to the main foul outfall via a
pressure break chamber.
BB. Condensate Drainage
1. Condensate recovery is not considered in the project, as the condensate generation is considerably
less in city of Riyadh. A condensate drainage system shall be provided from all landlord mechanical air
handling equipment and will connect to the sanitary waste network. A minimum air break of twenty-
five (25) mm must be provided between the condensate piping and the wastewater pipe.
2. Tenant shall connect condensate drain for tenant HVAC equipment’s to waste stub out.
3. Condensate drain from various air conditioning units will not be permitted to be connected to the
rainwater network.
4. All condensate drainage from the FCU’s (excluding office level and corridor) shall be connected to the
nearest floor gully via waterless traps (hepvo or equivalent) floor drain. Condensate drains shall be in
uPVC with insulation.
5. Insulation shall be installed on all drains to offer reliable protection against condensation. Location
includes concealed distribution routes, within plant rooms, risers, external locations and voids. In areas
where it is exposed to traffic or subject to damage, (i.e. plant rooms, parking and access routes) the
pipework & lagging is to be protected. Anywhere exposure to sunlight or daylight is a possibility the
protection must be fit for purpose and have suitable properties to ensure it does not deteriorate in
appearance or performance.
6. Class O flexible, closed cell, elastomeric, nitrile rubber shall be installed on all drains to offer reliable
protection against condensation. Location includes concealed distribution routes, within plant rooms,
risers, external locations and voids. In areas where it is exposed to traffic or subject to damage, (i.e.
plant rooms, parking and access routes) the pipework & lagging is to be protected with flat aluminum-
zinc coated steel. Where exposure to sunlight or daylight is a possibility the protection must be fit for
purpose and have suitable properties to ensure it does not deteriorate in appearance or performance.
Refer to Section 220 719 in standard specification.
7. Access shall be provided at 1.2m above FFL on all above condensate drainage stacks at each level for
rodding access; these shall be used in the event of a blockage within the above ground system.
Rodding eyes shall be provided to all suspended drainage at any change of direction. The Contractor
shall issue drawings showing access and rodding eyes prior to commencement of works.
8. The contractor shall refer to the Mechanical tender drawings for exact location of FCU’s / AHU’s and
price for the secondary condensate drainage connecting to the main condensate stacks located in core
shaft. Please refer to the PH general notes drawings for secondary condensate pipe sizes.
9. Workmanship
a. Install pipes, fittings and accessories in accordance with BS 8000-13, BS EN 12056-2 and
b. Obtain all components for each type of pipework from the same manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Inspect components carefully before fixing and reject any which are defective.
d. Ensure cut ends of pipes to be clean and square with burrs removed.
e. Allow for thermal and building movement when jointing and fixing.
f. Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose, ensuring that jointing material does not
project into bore of pipes, fittings and appliances.
g. Avoid contact between dissimilar metals and other materials which would result in electrolytic
corrosion.
10. Provide access covers and cleaning eyes as necessary in convenient locations, to permit adequate
testing and cleaning of pipework.
11. Prevent entry of foreign matter into any part of system by sealing openings during construction. Fit all
access covers and cleaning eyes as work proceeds.
CC. Sump Pits and Sump Pumps
1. Foul drainage and car par drainage that cannot be discharged to the sewerage system by gravity shall
be discharged into a tightly covered and vented sump from which the liquid shall be lifted and
discharged into the gravity drainage system by automatic pumping equipment with the correct
backflow prevention devices & pressure breakers.
2. A check valve and a full open isolation valve shall be installed in the pump discharge line. Access shall
be provided to such valves. The valves shall be located above the sump cover or, where the discharge
pipe is below grade, the valves shall be accessibly located outside the sump below grade in an suitably
sized access pit with a removable access cover.
3. Sump pit depth from invert of inlet pipe shall be minimum 1200mm. The sump volume shall consider
accidental sprinkler discharge flow rate established based on maximum of 4 no. sprinkler discharge.
The sump pit with pump shall be accessible and sizing of sump shall consider sump pit volume, pump
size and maintenance access.
4. Sump pit and valve pit shall be fitted with double sealed access covers and shall comply with BS EN
124, suitable rated for vehicular traffic. Access covers shall be outside of car park slots, kerbs, car
stoppers and pedestrian walkways.
5. Sump pit shall be vented in accordance with SBC 701.
6. The pumping equipment is to be designed to achieve the calculated flow rates and be installed in duty
and assist mode
7. If a pumped discharge is required, an essential power source is to be connected along with a fault link
to the property BMS. The pumping equipment is to be controlled via locally mounted control panels.
DD. Lift pit drainage
1. Lift shafts those terminate at an level above basement level shall be provided with drainage system
connected to above ground drainage system.
2. Lift with pits those below basement finished floor level shall be provided with sump at its lowest level
with water level sensors to indicate presence and accumulation of fluid within the pit. These shall be
connected to the main DGDA Car park control room to alert the appropriate staff.
3. Sump shall be provided with removable grating within lift pit and shall be adequately sized to fit
pumps.
4. All lift pits at basement level shall be provided with a 600x600x600mm deep sump pit for collecting
any water ingress to the lift pit.
5. The lift pit sumps shall be located on the door opening side of the pit to ensure the pits can be visually
inspected and a permanent submersible pump dropped to the sump for emptying.
6. Leak detection sensors to be added for all lift pits
7. Fire lift pits shall have permanent drainage provision to comply with NFPA code.
EE. Water tank and pump room drainage
1. Potable water tank, fire tank, irrigation tank and associated pump rooms and water feature pump
room and other mechanical plant rooms shall be provided with drainage provision. The tanks shall be
provided with drain pipes with isolation valve, overflow pipes, vents, sumps etc.,
2. The pump room shall be provided with sumps, channel drains, floor drains, funnel floor drains, sump
pit with sump pump (if required).
3. The final discharge of tank and pump room drain shall connect to gulley traps before connecting to
the foul network or car park sump pit.
FF. Planter Drainage
1. Planter drains shall be routed towards waste network. Sand traps shall be provided on the main planter
drain line prior to the discharge to sump pit. Sand trap location shall be as per mentioned in drainage
drawing.
2. Planter drainage shall be fully detailed by the landscape specialist. MEP contractor shall coordinate
with the landscape specialist for the exact location and setting out of planter drains from planters,
floor channels, etc.
GG. Irrigation system
1. A Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) water connection will be provided from the infrastructure network and
will extend to the irrigation storage tank. Incoming authority TSE supply is routed in high level of
basement to the location of irrigation water tank.
2. The design of any irrigation tanks, low-evaporative irrigation systems, irrigation pump systems, and
plant or feeder systems including any TSE water treatment will be the responsibility of the Landscape
consultant and should be encompassed within their scope of works or their specialist sub-consultant.
3. The spatial requirements for these elements should be provided by the irrigation consultant to the
architect for incorporation to the base plans space planning.
1.9 ABOVE GROUND SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE
A. The storm system shall consist of roof drainage systems, ground level landscape drainage, balcony
drainage coordinated with equipment, shafts, structure, floor slope, and parapet.
B. Rainwater system primarily consists of primary and secondary overflow drainage system with each
designed for 75mm/hr rainfall intensity.
C. Rainwater outlets/gutter outlets from the roof shall connect to the internal rainwater pipes and drop
through the building and shall free discharge to road network.
D. The roof drain will incorporate a flashing flange in which the slab water proofing membrane shall
terminate, so that any leak in roof floor finish shall be contained/ collected within the drain.
E. All horizontal pipework run at high level under roof areas or in locations where condensation is likely to
occur is to be provided with a minimum of 25 mm closed cell elastomeric foam insulation.
F. The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the complete above ground surface water
drainage services installation as described herein and indicated on the tender drawings and equipment
schedules.
G. The contractor shall install pipework fittings and accessories to ensure that:
1. Appliances drain quickly, quietly and completely at all times without nuisance or risk to health.
2. Discharge is conveyed without cross flow, back fall, leakage or blockage.
3. System can be adequately tested, cleaned and maintained.
4. Pipe routes are shortest practicable, with as few bends as possible and no bends in wet portion of soil
stacks, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
H. The Building shall be provided with a complete above ground surface water drainage system which collects
surface water from roof, terrace areas, planters and car park via surface water outlets and channels
sufficiently sized to discharge the total surface water flowrate based on a rainfall intensity of 75mm/hr. The
roof outlets shall be domed shaped with gravel guard on normal roofs and flat on roof with pedestrian
access.
I. The drainage suspended pipework shall be laid to fall in the direction of flow to maintain a self-cleansing
velocity based on the flow capacity. Pipes shall be installed with levelled soffit to avoid hydraulic jump.
J. Surface water pipework shall be in HDPE and those running in occupied areas shall generally be installed in
HDPE silent with increased level of sound proofing. Adequate provision shall be made to deal with
horizontal and vertical thermal expansion in accordance with the pipe manufacturers recommendations.
K. Surface water outlets shall be provided at the low points of each individual roof area to avoiding ponding
and all roof finishes shall be laid in the direction of the outlet.
L. The Contractor shall supply and install all ancillaries required by the Commissioning Engineer to
commissioning.
M. Workmanship
1. The Contractor shall
a. Install the rainwater system in accordance with BS 8000-13 and manufacturer's recommendations
b. to ensure complete discharge of rainwater from building without leaking.
c. Handle, store and securely fix all products and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
d. Obtain all components for each type of pipework and guttering from same manufacturer, unless
otherwise indicated.
e. Inspect components before fixing and reject any which are defective. Ensure cut ends are clean
and square with burrs removed.
f. Allow for thermal and building movement when fixing and jointing.
1.10 BELOW SLAB & EXTERNAL DRAINAGE
A. The Contractor’s shall be responsible for the following performance objectives for the above ground
drainage systems:
1. Ensure that all the installation is compliant with local authority requirements
2. Base the above ground foul drainage design on above specified configuration
3. Provide adequate drainage facilities for the mechanical services equipment, plant rooms and water
tank room.
4. Discharge all drainage from plant rooms and mechanical equipment into trapped floor gullies,
connected to the foul drainage system.
B. The Contractor shall:
1. Coordinate, supply, install, test and commission the complete drainage systems, as described herein
and indicated on the tender drawings
2. Install the system using the minimum pipework and fittings necessary to carry away all foul discharges
from the building to the below ground drainage system, quickly, quietly and with freedom from
nuisance or risk of injury to health
3. Prevent air from the discharge pipes from entering the building.
4. Install all drainage pipework to convey discharges without crossflow, back fall, leakage or blockage
5. Adequately test, clean and maintain the system at all times throughout the construction process.
6. Not use short radius bends in the drainage system.
7. Make all branches to horizontal discharge pipework at high level any floor using 45° branches swept in
the direction of flow where possible.
8. Install access doors or caps on sanitary pipework to facilitate rodding and maintenance access to
installed pipework.
9. Co-ordinate access through Architectural casings with pipe accessories.
10. Test all discharge and ventilation pipework at various stages and on completion of the installation to
ensure compliance with the statutory requirements
11. Ensure appliances drain quickly, quietly and completely at all times without nuisance or risk to health.
12. Ensure pressure fluctuations in pipework do not vary by more than plus or minus 38mm water gauge
and traps retain a water seal of not less than 25mm.
13. Ensure pipe routes are shortest practicable, with as few bends as possible and no bends in wet portion
of soil stacks, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
14. Wrapping for underground pipework shall be provided as per pipe manufacturers recommendation.
15. All installation shall be coordination with structure before installation.
16. Water proofing membrane shall be terminated within channel drains, area drains, parking drains, floor
drains, floor cleanouts in coordination with structural engineer and drain manufacturer
recommendations.
C. All drainage systems shall be provided with access pipes and access doors on all main discharge pipes
accordingly,
1. Horizontally,
a. where shown on the public health systems drawings
b. all changes in direction
c. in horizontal run for every 15m.
D. The below slab drainage shall consist of conveying drainage from the basement level-4 to the sump pits
through network of underground pipes, parking drains, channel drains, gulley trap essentially pumped to
external manholes through pumping arrangement.
E. Below slab pipes shall not be less than 110mm diameter and shall be laid as steep to achieve self-cleansing
velocity of 0.75m/s. Pipes shall be installed with levelled soffit to avoid hydraulic jump.
F. The below slab drainage shall generally be vented by the secondary vent pipe, where required. Pipes shall
be in HDPE with Electro fusion joints. Bedding shall be done as per BS EN 1295 and as recommended by
manufacturer.
G. All Car park drainage pipework shall be resistant against hydrocarbons.
H. Basement wastewater shall be collected by a number of channel drains and parking drains with integrated
sand traps and discharged to sump pit.
I. As the basement level under slab drainage is installed under a separate contract, the MEP contractor shall
be responsible for installing all associated pump discharge pipes, ventilation including all other
connections to the above slab drainage systems to ensure a fully coordinated and working drainage
system upon completion.
J. MEP contractor shall be responsible to carry out a CCTV survey of the in-slab drainage network to verify
the current state of the installation and allow for all necessary measures to clean and maintain the drainage
network.
K. Drainage pipes shall be installed to maintain self-cleansing velocity of 0.75 m/s.
L. Parking drains are provided for the car park drainage, which will be collected to pumping stations. Pumped
foul water drain shall be routed at high level and connect to the main foul outfall via a pressure break
chamber.
M. All parking drains shall be provided with integral strainer baskets to intercept any debris during general
wash- down to protect the below-slab drainage network.
N. Pipe identification shall be as per BS 1710:1984.
O. The Contractor shall supply and install all ancillaries required by the Commissioning Engineer to
commissioning.
P. Below slab pipes shall not be less than 100mm diameter and shall be laid as steep as practicable with the
as per below list Pipes shall be installed with levelled soffit to avoid hydraulic jump.
Q. The below slab drainage shall generally be vented by the secondary vent pipe and where required
dedicated vent pipe shall be installed. Pipes shall be in HDPE in general. Bedding shall be done as per BS
1295 and as recommended by manufacturer.
R. Storm and sewer external connections with municipality drainage networks shall be done as per the design
drawings.
S. Vent pipe shall be taken from the first manhole and to be terminated at first mechanical level.
T. Pressure break chambers shall be provided for pressurized lines before connecting to the FIC.
U. Gully trap shall be provided for the waste lines before connecting to the external manhole.
V. All Car park drainage pipework shall be resistant against hydrocarbons.
W. Oils collected by the petrol interceptors shall be collected by the specialist sub-contractor and disposed, as
per local requirements.
X. Existing services shall be surveyed and relocated if necessary for the new connections for water drainage
and storm drainage.
Y. If the basement level under slab drainage is installed under a separate contract, the MEP contractor shall
be responsible for installing all associated sump pumps, pump discharge pipes, ventilation including all
other connections to the above slab drainage systems to ensure a fully coordinated and working drainage
system upon completion. MEP contractor shall be responsible to carry out a CCTV survey of the in-slab
drainage network to verify the current state of the installation and allow for all necessary measures to clean
and maintain the drainage network.
Z. Existing external manholes invert levels shall be surveyed and coordinated with other services prior to
connection at site.
AA. The following gradient shall be maintained for self-cleansing velocity
Peak Flow (l/s) Pipe size (mm) Minimum gradient

<1 100 1 in 40
>1 100 1 in 80
150 1 in 1120
BB. Access shall be provided for testing, inspection, maintenance and removal of debris. All manhole covers
shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS EN 124. The minimum opening of manhole designed for
man entry shall comply with the safety requirements in force at the place of installation. Generally, this is
considered to be at least 600mm x 600mm. The appropriate class of manhole to be used shall depend on
the place of installation. All manhole covers shall be double sealed for air and water tightness.
CC. End caps shall be provided for all pop-ups. The end caps shall be coordinated with pipe manufacturer.
DD. Areas which can be used by pedestrians ad pedal cyclists
1. Group 1 (min. class A 15)
EE. Footways, pedestrian areas and comparable areas, car parks or car parking decks
1. Group 2 (min. class B 125)
FF. For gully traps installed in the area of kerb side channels of roads which when measured from the kerb
edge, extend to a maximum of 0.5m into the carriage way and a maximum of 0.2m into the footway.
1. Group 3 (min. class C 250)
GG. Carriageways of roads (including pedestrian streets), hard shoulders and parking areas, for all types of road
vehicles
1. Group 4 (min. class D 400)
HH. Areas imposing high wheel loads e.g. docks, aircraft pavements
1. Group 5 (min. class E 600)
II. Areas imposing particularly high wheel loads e.g. aircraft pavements
1. Group 6 (class F 900)
JJ. All manhole sizes and type shall be as per Riyadh Municipality requirement. MEP contractor shall ensure
that the installation of all manholes complies with Riyadh Municipality standards even if the manholes type
and sizes are different on the design drawings. Any discrepancies shall be communicated to the design
engineers.
KK. All external manholes shall be provided with access ladders as per Riyadh Municipality requirements.
LL. All in-slab drainage / below ground drainage pipework passing through the raft and through the water
proofing membranes shall be provided with puddle flanges. MEP contractor shall price for the puddle
flanges within the submission and provide relevant details for approval.
MM. MEP contractor shall make provision for rocker joints at connections to each below ground manholes, gully
traps, pressure break chambers, etc. Puddle flanges shall also be provided in instances where the drainage
pipes has to cross the water proofing membrane before connecting to the pits.
NN. Where pipelines must be cast in or fixed to structures (including manholes, catch pits and inspection
chambers) provide short length or rocker pipes near each external face, with flexible joint at each end:
Pipe size (DN) Distance to first joint from Short length of pipe to next
structure (mm) coupling (mm)
100 - 450 150 600
451 – 750 150 1000
750 and above 150 1250
OO. Where pipelines need not be cast in or fixed to structures (e.g. walls to footings) provide either:
1. short length or rocker pipes as specified above, or
2. openings in the structures to give 50 mm minimum clearance around the pipeline and closely fit a
rigid sheet to each side of opening to prevent ingress of fill or vermin.
PP. All car park drainage chambers including manholes, pump and valve chambers, etc. formed within the
basement structure shall be complete with a 6mm GRP lining.
QQ. All sump pits shall be provided with emergency pipe connection, vent pipes, cable ducts connections, etc.
Chain pulley arrangement shall be provided in each sump pit for removal of sump pumps in case of
maintenance
RR. Sump pit manhole covers shall be adequately sized based on the size of the sump pumps. This is to ensure
that sump pumps are easily lifted through the manhole covers during maintenance period.
SS. All deep manholes and sump pits shall be provided with rungs for man entry.
TT. All sump pits shall be provided with vent pipes, cable ducts connections, etc.
UU. In addition to the standard testing and commissioning requirements of this specification a CCTV survey
with full report shall be carried out on completion as part of the record information for the installation.
VV. The drainage works shall include all floor clean out (FCO) points, pump discharge pipes, chamber
ventilation pipes and cabling ducts contained integral within the structural slab to ensure a fully integrated
drainage system can be completed and put into operation by this work package.
WW. Refer to manhole schedule for sizes of manhole covers.
XX. Where drainage pipelines are cast within a deep structural slab the contractor shall provide adequate
support for the drainage pipelines in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code
requirements including the following,
1. A secondary drainage pipework support system shall be provided to fix drainage at correct gradients
within the structural slab.
2. The secondary support system shall prevent any lateral movement or sagging of the drainage whilst
the concrete slab is being poured.
YY. Workmanship
1. Install pipes, fittings and accessories in accordance with BS 8000-13, BS EN 12056-2 and
2. Obtain all components for each type of pipework from the same manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Inspect components carefully before fixing and reject any which are defective. Ensure cut ends of
pipes to be clean and square with burrs removed.
4. Allow for thermal and building movement when jointing and fixing.
5. Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose, ensuring that jointing material does not project
into bore of pipes, fittings and appliances.
6. Avoid contact between dissimilar metals and other materials which would result in electrolytic
corrosion.
7. Provide access covers and cleaning eyes as necessary in convenient locations, to permit adequate
testing and cleaning of pipework.
8. Prevent entry of foreign matter into any part of system by sealing openings during construction. Fit all
access covers and cleaning eyes as work proceeds.
ZZ. Backflow preventer
1. Drainage pipework from fire pump room, generator room shall be provided with backflow preventer.
1.11 EFFLUENT/SUMP PUMPS
A. The unit shall be provided complete with anti-corrosion coated receiver tank with two submersible sewage
pumps, one duty and one standby, all necessary controls including rotary-contact level switches, control
gear with mains operated alarm and volt-free contacts for remote failure indicators. Control gear shall be
arranged for automatic changeover after each pumping sequence.
B. Wastewater and sewage pump with maintenance-free and liquid less cooling system for permanent
operation in dry or submerged installations.
C. The pump design must allow an unrestricted free passage of fibres and particles up to 80 mm to pass
through the pump.
D. A connection between the pump housing and the stator housing must be without the use of bolts to
ensure easy inspection and service of impeller and shaft seal.
E. The unit shall be damp and flood-proof suitable for placing in an unventilated area.
F. Each pump shall be suitable for pumping surface waste water containing small solids and be capable of
operation with fluids at temperatures of up to 50 degree C and complete with an automatic thermal cut-
out to protect the pump at higher temperatures.
G. Submerged pump installation, pump installed on auto-coupling system. It is required that the pump
installed on auto-coupling system features a guide claw with a leak-proof nitrile rubber gasket for
increased system efficiency
H. The pump must have a built-in thermal switch in motor windings along with a moisture switch
I. Motors shall be protected against damage from dry operation, over frequent starting and jammed
impeller.
1. Insulation class F (155°C)
2. Enclosure class IP68
3. The motor must be cooled without the use of any cooling liquid (liquid-less cooling). This applies to
pumps in both dry and submerged installations.
4. Power cable featuring wires for thermal motor protection in the motor windings
J. Operation and control of duplicate drainage pump installations shall be as follows:
1. The selected duty pump shall start on the liquid level rising to operate the 'Start Duty Pump' control
and shall stop on a fall in the liquid level operating the 'off' control.
2. The standby pump shall automatically operate in unison with the duty pump if the liquid level rises to
operate the 'Start Standby' control.
3. In the event of failure of the duty pump the standby pump shall operate when the liquid level rises to
operate the 'Start Standby' control.
4. At the end of each pumping cycle, the duty and standby pumps shall automatically change over, i.e.,
the standby pump would become the lead duty pump for the following pumping cycle and vice-versa.
5. The alarm system shall operate if the liquid level rises to operate the 'High Water Alarm' control.
6. The pump set shall be complete with a local wall mounted starter/control/indication panel comprising:
a. Main incoming supply electrical isolator interlocked with panel door.
b. Pilot lamp to indicate panel 'live';
c. Starter for each pump with facilities for automatic duty pump selection and changeover;
d. Run and tripped pilot lamps for each pump;
e. Pilot lamp to indicate high water level in sump;
f. Volt-free contacts for the purposes of remote monitoring
K. The pumps control system shall incorporate facilities allowing connections by others for remote monitoring
by a BMS as follows:
1. Duty Pump Failure.
2. Standby Pump Failure.
3. High Water Level Alarm.
4. Recording of hours run for each pump.
L. Pump construction
1. Pump housing, motor top and Impeller should be Cast Iron. Impeller to be Vortex or closed tube type
2. The Vortex impeller in the pump must be self-cleaning with winglets for improved hydraulic efficiency.
3. Double mechanical cartridge shaft seal allowing rotation in either direction
4. Stainless steel cable plug filled with cast in sealing barrier to prevent moisture from penetrating into
the motor via the cable core
M. Motors shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the 'Electrical Equipment' Section of this
Specification.
N. Voltage, phases and frequency of the electrical supply to each pump are stated in the Technical Schedules.
1.12 FUEL OIL SYSTEM
A. The fuel oil System shall be designed in accordance with relevant local and international regulations. It
shall satisfy the requirements of the local Civil Defence including approval of the local authority having
jurisdiction with regards to design and installation of the entire installation.
B. The objective is to store, distribute and provide for consumption by emergency generator and fire diesel
pump in an efficient and safe manner.
C. Fuel oil day tanks are proposed to be located within generator room or nearby. Fuel oil tanks shall be sized
to deliver 8 hours of fuel supply for generator operation.
D. The pumping of fuel oil from day tank to diesel engine fuel injectors, fuel filtration within generator,
injector bypass, fuel cooling (if any) shall be inbuilt within generator.
E. Level indicators installed in day tanks shall be interfaced with BMS. An alarm signal shall be initiated at fuel
filling point when the day tanks reach desired volume.
1.13 BMS POINTS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING SERVICES
A. The following table sets down the basis for the Points Schedule for the BMS and PMMS systems. It is
recommended that the contract includes for 20% spare of each type of point.
Ref System Description

1. Domestic Cold Water Systems (ap- • Water storage tank temperature (each
plies to each potable and non- tank and each compartment)
potable system including irrigation • Booster sets enable (each booster)
supplies and landscaping / façade • Booster sets common fault alarm (each
maintenance) booster)
• System pressures
• Water flow rates
• Copper Silver Ionization Unit common
fault alarm (each)
• Water consumptions (each meter)
• Signal alarms for:
• Water storage tank high level alarm
(each tank and each compartment)
• Water storage tank low level alarm (each
tank and each compartment)
• Out of limit temperatures (per tank
and compartment)
• Booster common fault (each booster)
• Transfer pump fault (each pump)
• Copper Silver Ionization Unit fault (each)
• Sensor failures (each sensor)
• Water filtration units
• Circulating pumps
2. Sump Pumps (Each) • Foul drainage sump pump enables
(each pump set)
• Monitor sump pump run status (each pump)
• Signal alarms for:
- High level alarm (each sump)
- Foul drainage sump pump
common fault alar
3. Metering • Metering data collection for
cold water as specified and on
Drawings
4. Fuel oil system • Meter, Level, fault status,

control panel
1.14 EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENETS FORPUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING SERVICES
A. Emergency power shall be provided for following equipment’s
Ref System Description

1. • Booster pump
• Sewage Sump pumps
• Car park sump pumps
• Fire lift sump pumps
• Fuel oil pumps
• Storm transfer pumps
1.15 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
A. Polypropylene pipework (PP-RCT)
1. General
a. All materials need to be designed, tested and classified regarding ISO 1043, ISO 9080, ISO 1133
and ISO 1167.
b. Only ready-made coloured compound is allowed.
c. In terms of service life the materials meet the testing requirements as set in EN ISO 15874.
d. The required reference curves of EN ISO 15874 need to be fulfilled.
e. Material data sheets and test protocols from the raw material supplier with MRS (Minimum
Required Strength; a value used for cold water applications 20°C, 50 years) and CRS (Categorised
Required Strength; a value used for hot water pipe applications 70°C, 50 years) need to be
submitted. - All pipes and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer.
2. PP-RCT
a. The material needs to be fully standardised regarding the pipe class PP-RCT
b. Approved MRS of 11,2 Mpa
c. Approved CRS of 5 MPa
d. Color: Green/Grey
3. Metal Inserts
a. All metal inserts need to be from a corrosion resistant, dezincification resistance brass material.
1) The brass resistance should be third party tested and the test reports should be provided.
b. Nickel and chrome plated materials are not allowed due to it`s potential for triggering allergic
reactions and the European drinking water directives for limiting the value for nickel in the water.
4. UV Resistance
a. Pipes and Fittings made of Polypropylen are intended for indoor use, i.e. they are not normally
exposed to UV radiation. Therefore, protection is only important during storage and
transportation.
b. In case pipelines are installed outdoors they need to be protected against the UV-radiation.
5. Fire Conditions
6. Regarding DIN 4102 the material need to be classified as B2. This classification should be
substantiated.
7. Pipes
a. Pipes need to be manufactured regarding DIN 8077/8078 and DIN EN ISO 15874 part 2.
b. For all pipes the inner diameter is the required declaration.
c. All pressure data and safety factors need to be declared along the DIN EN standards regarding the
mentioned material classes.
d. Unless otherwise specified the normal pipe length is 4 m. Other lengths, for example 5,8 m for
deliveries in container, by request.
e. The markings on the pipe need to be along DIN 8077/8078 and DIN EN ISO 15874 and need to be
f. permanent marked every 1 m with the following information:
1) Manufacturer name/sign, material description, standard, pipe series S or SDR, outside

diameter x wall thickness, measurement class, application class with allowable pressure, date
of production and machine number.
8. Fittings
a. Fittings need to be manufactured regarding DIN EN ISO 15874 part 3.
b. All pressure datas need to be analogue DIN EN standards regarding the mentioned material clas-
ses.
c. All fittings need to be injection moulded.
d. Fittings made from segmented pipes need to be bewared of. For the case that these fittings will be
installed the real pressure of this segmented fittings, under consideration of the derating factor,
need to be confirmed by third party approvals.
e. Fittings shall be marked along DIN EN ISO 15874 as follows:
1) Manufacturers name, nominal diameter, material identification, month and year of production
9. Electrofusion fittings
a. Electrofusion fittings need to be from the same raw material as pipes and fittings.
b. The usage of Electrofusion fittings regarding material and allowable pressure is to be confirmed
separately.
c. Each electrofusion welding has to be documented.
d. All electrofusion fittings need to have a label with the welding parameters and a barcode.
10. Jointing
a. Socket welding regarding DVS 2207 part 11 for dimensions up to d125.
b. Butt welding regarding DVS 2207 part 11 for dimensions d160 and above.
c. Electrofusion welding alternative to socket and butt fusion welding.
d. Welding tools (type A) and heating bushes need to be from the same manufacturer.
e. Cooling times after welding need to be respected along the manufacturers and the DVS
guidelines.
11. Expansion
a. The design and the installation of the system need to consider the manufacturers guidelines.
b. It should include measures like expansion bows or loops to contain the expansion.
c. The fixing of the lines needs to consider the expansion of the line and the material along the
guidelines of the manufacturer.
12. Pressure tests
a. All pressure testings for systems should be along the manufactures requirements, the valid stand-
ards and the official regularities.
b. This form of pressure tests has nothing to do with material testings of the raw material supplier or
the manufacturer. Pressure tables for a allowable pressure regarding temperatures and lifetimes
are not valid for these tests and cannot be used.
13. Chemicals
a. If chemicals are used in any way, they need to be usefull for Polypropylene.
14. Applications
a. Cold drinking water
1) Pipes and fittings need to be of PP-RCT material.
2) All fittings need to be from the same material and manufacturer as the pipes. 3). Color:
green
3) Up to d125: SDR 9 or lower, min. 2,0 MPa at 20°C for 50 years lifetime regarding DIN8077.
4) d160 and above: SDR 11 or lower, min. 1,6 MPa at 20°C for 50 years lifetime regarding DIN
8077.
5) The materials need to fulfill the regulations for the contact with drinking water.
6) In addition to the regulations regarding monomers and additives the material shall not have
an influence on either the taste or the odor of the water.
7) The usage for drinking water applications needs to be certified for pipes and fittings.
b. Hot drinking water
1) Pipes and fittings need to be of PP-RCT material because of high temperature resistance.
2) All fittings need to be from the same material and manufacturer as the pipes.
3) All pipes with a fiber-middle-layer to reduce the expansion of the lines.
4) All pipe layers need to be from the same raw material.
5) Color green
6) Up to d125: SDR 9 or lower, min. 2,0 MPa at 20°C for 50 years lifetime regarding DIN8077.
7) d160 and above: SDR 11 or lower, min. 1,6 MPa at 20°C for 50 years lifetime regarding DIN
8077.
8) Pipes and fittings must be applicable for 70°C continuous operating temperature, timewise
higher along the classifications in the standard DIN EN 15874.
9) The materials need to fullfill the regulations for the contact with drinking water.
10) In addition to the regulations regarding monomers and additives the material shall not have
an influence on either the taste or the odour of the water.
11) The usage for drinking water applications needs to be certified for pipes and fittings.
15. Inspection, Testing and Certification
a. ISO certification
1) 1). The Producer of pipes and fittings need to be ISO 9001 certified
2) This certification regulates the quality management of the company.
3) This has nothing to do with the production or the usage of the end product.
b. Production control
1) The production and testing in the company need to be third party controlled by a institute,
like SKZ, MPA, IMA, TÜV, etc. along their guidelines.
c. Drinking water certification
1) Testing of organoleptic properties is carried out on a quaterly basis by an independant test

institute TZW in Germany (an affiliation of the DVGW) or WRAS in Great Britain regarding EN
1422. Only one test is required.
d. End product certification
1) Pipes, fittings and the system need to be certified for all dimensions and materials by an
independent third party institute, like DIN Certco Germany, NSF 14 and AENOR Spain.
2) All test certificates need to be provided.
16. Packaging
a. Fittings
1) All fittings must be packed that they are sufficiently protected against damages and dirtiness
during transportation and storage.
2) All packages must be showing the manufacturer identification and the type, size and quantity
of the products.
b. Pipes
1) All pipes must be packed in bundles with a closed UV protection foil to beware of dust and
water.
2) All packages must be showing the manufacturer identification and the type, size and quantity
of the products.
c. Handling and storage
1) All products should be stored only where there is no effect of ultraviolet radiation, including
daylight.
d. Documentation
1) The Manufacturer/Contractor shall provide the following data as a minimum:
a) Catalogues/Brochures of the products.
b) Dimensional details of pipes and fittings.
c) Manufacturers drawings.
d) ISO 9001 certificate.
e) Product certificates regarding the application.
B. PEX Pipe
All above ceiling (exposed) cold and hot water pipework shall be cross-linked polyethylene pipes PEX-A
manufactured according to Engel Process in accordance to EN ISO 15875.
All cold and hot water pipework embedded in builder’s work be cross-linked polyethylene pipes PEX-A
manufactured according to Engel Process in accordance to EN ISO 15875.
Pipe material shall be polyethylene (PE) which is cross-linked during the manufacturing of the pipe. The
material shall be cross-linked using the Engel process, which changes chemical structure in such a way that
the polymer chains are connected with each other through a three-dimensional network.
The level of cross-linking shall be greater or equal to 70%.
1. Fittings
a. Jointing method: As per manufacturer’s recommendation, fitting connection system to be based

on thermal memory of the pipe
b. Fitting material: DR brass (dezincification resistant)
c. Standards / approvals for pipes and fittings
d. DVGW (Germany)
e. WRAS (UK)
2. Physical Characteristics
Physical Characteristics Value

Pipe roughness 0.0005 mm
Linear coefficient of expansion at 20 ºC 1.4 x 10-4 m/m.ºK
Thermal conductivity 0.35 W/m.K
Oxygen Diffusion According to DIN 4726
In accordance to EN ISO 15875
Tmax: 95 ºC
Pressure: 10 bar
3. Installation
All pipework installation shall in accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendation. The joining of
multi- layer pipe with fittings can be done either using Brass or PPSU fittings as per the manufacture’s
recommendation and installation manual. The installation tools required shall be from the same
manufacture of the pipes.
Minimum internal diameter shall be 14.9mm.
The pipe shall be resistant to all natural constituents of drinking water, disinfectants and cleaning
agent, anti-corrosion agents and common building materials.
The manufacturer shall offer minimum of 50 yrs warrantee for the pipe and 10 yrs for the system Pipes
shall be connected to the fittings through a reinforced plastic wall box with bronze elbow suitable for a
threaded connection. The pex pipe shall be laid within the conduit pipe and shall be installed with all
fittings and accessories from the same manufacture.
C. Plastic Pipework – uPVC (Gravity Pipework)
1. All system pipes are extruded and all system fittings are injection moulded.
2. Pipe and fittings to British Standard 5252:10.A.07
3. PVC-u solvent weld pipe and fittings to BS EN 1329-1:2000, Kitemark certified.
4. PVC-u large diameter solvent weld pipe and fittings to BS EN 1329-1:2000
5. MuPVC (cPVC) solvent weld waste pipe and fittings to BS EN 1566-1:2000, Kitemark certified.
6. Traps and pan connectors to BS 3943, Kitemark certified.
Colour: Grey/white/black
Nominal pressure rating: 0.5 bar
Operating temperatures: PVC-u, 76°C
MuPVC, 80°C
Polypropylene 95°C
7. The above temperatures are based on a continuous flow, for MuPVC (Waste System) and
Polypropylene (Traps), intermittent discharges of up to 100 °C
8. Plastic pipework and fittings jointing shall generally be solvent welded with ring seal joints to
accommodate expansion.
9. Thermal expansion absorption fittings shall be provided as per manufacturer recommendation.
10. Fittings to be tapered on downstream socket.
11. Set pipework accurately to the gradients and at the heights where shown on the drawings. Use swept
fittings where appropriate.
12. Store elastomeric jointing rings in their delivery bags or within protective containers. Do not expose to
direct sunlight.
13. Store pipes clear of ground. Stack pipes on a level surface. Provide side supports; do not stack more
than 7 layers high. Do not expose to direct sunlight.
14. Keep fittings under cover, do not remove from cartons or packaging until required.
15. Store solvent cement and cleaning fluid in a cool place out of direct sunlight and away from any heat
source.
16. Inspect all pipes and fittings carefully before installing, ensure products are clean and free from
contamination. Reject any which are defective.
Installation
17. Performance Criteria
All above ground drainage pipework has been designed to BS EN 12056 Part 2. Install pipework,
fittings and accessories to ensure that:
a. Appliances drain quickly, quietly and completely at all times without nuisance or risk to health.
b. Discharge is conveyed without cross flow, back fall, leakage or blockage.
c. Foul air from the drainage system does not enter the building.
d. Pressure fluctuations in pipework do not vary by more than +/-38mm water gauge.
e. All traps to sanitary appliances to retain a water seal of not less than:
WC’s 50mm
Floor Gully 75mm
WHB 75mm
Urinal 75mm
Bath/shower 50mm
Individual shower 50mm
Washing machine 75mm
f. The system can be adequately tested, cleaned and maintained.
18. Installation Generally
Pipework, fittings and accessories should be installed, ensuring compliance with design and
performance requirements and BS EN 12056, to give a watertight pipework installation.
Obtain all components for each type of pipework from the same manufacturer unless specified
otherwise.
Cut ends of pipes to be clean and square for solvent joints and chamfered for ring seal joints.
Allow for adequate thermal expansion/contraction and building movement when jointing and fixing.
Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose. Prevent entry of foreign matter into any part of
the system by sealing openings during construction. Fit all access covers and cleaning eyes as the
construction proceeds.
19. Access Points
Provide access points for cleaning purposes at the following:
a. Access shall be at all changes of direction and at each floor level (1200mm above finished floor
level) on each soil and waste stack.
b. At every third floor on each ventilating stack.
c. Provide access on all horizontal branch waste floats.
d. Check and place appropriately handed access fittings as required.
e. Locate to allow use of cleaning equipment or the insertion of testing apparatus.
f. When installed in ducts allow clearance for other services also to be accommodated in the duct.
g. Fit all access doors/covers and cleaning eyes as the construction proceeds.
20. Pipe Routes
a. To be the shortest practical, with as few bends as possible.
21. Elastomeric Joint Rings
a. To BS 2494 of type recommended by manufacturer of pipes being jointed.
22. Lubricant
a. Elastomeric ring joints to be jointed using lubricant recommended by the pipework manufacturers
and agreed with the Engineer prior to installation works commencing.
23. Solvent Cement
24. Liquid weld cement to BS 6209 for jointing PVC-u pipe systems as recommended by the pipework
manufacturers and agreed with the Engineer prior to installation works commencing.
25. Base of Stack
a. Base of stack shall be formed using 2 x 45 degree bends connected together by an appropriate
length of pipe or a 90o large radius support bend to ensure that the formed bend is a minimum of
two times the outside diameter of the stack.
26. Couplings and Adaptors
a. Appropriate connections shall be installed to suit pipes and fittings being jointed, soil and waste
system installation shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
27. Bends, Branches and Boss Pipe Connections
a. All branches to be swept in direction of flow at all connections.
b. Ensure factory moulded and/or prefabricated fittings are used.
28. Floor Gullies
a. Compact design PVC-u 75mm trapped floor gully with removable polypropylene baffle for access
and with side sockets to allow waste connections.
29. Vent Stack
a. A vent stack shall be considered part of the system and shall be installed using the same methods
required for the soil and waste stacks.
b. Cross vent connections shall be made via a branch pipe being set at 45 degrees. All cross
connections shall be made above the flood level of any appliances at each floor level.
c. Vent stacks shall connect back into the main soil stack not less than 225mm below the underside
of the roof.
30. Jointing Methods
a. Solvent welding of PVC-u pipework.
b. Clean both the pipe and receiving socket using manufacturer’s cleaning fluid, coat both surfaces
with solvent weld with a clean brush.
c. Insert the socket into the spigot, jointing materials must not project or flow into the bore of pipes
and fitting: wipe off surplus immediately.
d. Allow 3 - 4 minutes for the weld to set. A period of 24 hours is recommended for the joint to fully
set prior to testing.
e. Jointing of ring seal expansion coupling.
f. Chamfer the circumference at the end of the spigot and lubricate the spigot and receiving socket
with silicone lubricant. Insert the spigot fully into the socket, withdrawal pipe to 12mm to allow for
expansion.
31. Support and Expansion
a. Expansion joints must be anchored; the anchor point shall be made utilising the grooves provided
on fittings and the matching engineered bracket. If it is not possible to anchor at the expansion
joint it should be provided directly onto the pipe must be within one metre of the proposed point
of anchorage.
b. Intermediate support must also be provided ensuring expansion can be maintained.
Maximum Distance
Pipe Size - Soil Between Expansion Joints
82mm 4m
110mm 4m
160mm 4m
Pipe Size-Waste
32mm 2m
40mm 2m
50mm 2m
c. Pipework Supports
d. General Requirements
e. Pipework supports shall be provided in accordance with the following table and either side of
bends.
Pipe Size (mm) Vertical Pipes (m) Low Gradient Pipes (m)
Pipe Material
MuPVC (modified unplasticized

32 – 40 1.2 0.5
polyvinyl chloride)
50 1.2 0.9
32 – 40 1.2 0.5
MuPVC (modified unplasticized

50 1.2 0.9
polyvinyl
75 – 100 2.0 1.0
chloride)
150 2.0 1.0
Multiple pipe supports for pipes of differing sizes shall be spaced at intervals required for the smallest
pipe. The type of pipe hanger clip or hoop used shall be selected according to the application, special
provision being made in instances where the piping of tubing is subject to axial movement due to
thermal expansion and/or contraction. All internal pipework shall be supported using protected
holderbats.
The holderbats shall either:
1) Locate around fitting sockets to provide an anchor point for support and as a fixed point to
control thermal movement.
2) Locate around the pipe to act as a support while still permitting free longitudinal movement
of the pipework. Long sections of drains shall be laterally braced to the structure with angle
section mild steel to prevent horizontal movement.
3) Pipes in shafts shall be supported using protected mild steel holderbats bolted together with
cadmium plated mild steel bolts and nuts and screwed to shaft walls using 50mm no. 10
cadmium plated mild steel screws and plastic wall plugs.
Exposed pipework fixed to walls in occupied areas shall be supported using one piece brackets
screwed to walls using 50mm no. 10 cadmium plated mild steel screws and plastic wall plugs. External
pipework shall be supported using one piece pipe brackets screwed to walls using 50mm no. 10
cadmium plated mild steel screws and plastic wall plugs.
Pipe Stack Termination
Soil and waste stacks shall terminate to atmosphere via one of the following methods.
• Carry up full bore to 460mm above roof level.
• Not less than 900mm above head of any opening if the opening is within 3000mm
horizontally from the stack.
• Terminate stack with spigot pipe end and vent cowl.
32. TESTING
a. Testing generally
1) Inform the Main Contractor sufficiently in advance to give him a reasonable opportunity to
observe tests.
2) Check that all sections of installation are securely fixed and free from obstruction and debris.
3) Ensure that all traps are filled with clean water.
4) Carry out tests as specified. After testing, locate and remedy all defects without delay and
retest as instructed. Do not use smoke to trace leaks.
Keep a record of all tests and provide a copy of each to the Engineer.
The Installer is to allow for intermediate testing where work is to be concealed by other installations,
final finishes and to suit phased handover of areas.
33. Pipework Testing
a. Gravity Pipework
1) Initial Test
a) All internal pipework, and jointed external pipework, shall be tested with air as soon as
practicable after installation and before enclosing with shaft walls and suspended ceilings
etc.
b) Open ends of pipe shall be fitted with plugs, one of which shall incorporate a tee-piece
for connection to air pump and manometer. Air shall be pumped until the manometer
indicates the required pressure.
c) Pipes shall be tested by air pressure at 100mm wg (988PA) held constant for 5 minutes.
34. Final Test
a. On completion of installation and connection of all sanitary appliances, a further air test shall be
carried out.
b. Pipes shall be tested by air pressure at 38mm wg (374Pa) held constant for 3 minutes.
35. Test Certificate
a. A test certificate shall be submitted following successful testing of the pipework (please see at-
tached). A water test may also be called for; this will only apply to horizontal runs of pipework and
the section of pipework below the lowest sanitary appliance. The system should be filled up to the
flood level of the lowest sanitary appliance or 6m head.
36. Chemical Resistance
a. PVC pipework is resistant to most common acids. It will be necessary to check on the type of
chemical(s) being discharged prior to installation.
b. UPVC external rainwater pipework shall be installed, using materials complying with BS EN 607.
c. All drainage pipework run in the ceiling voids of the building above occupied areas (or as required
to achieve specified room NC/NR levels for services in Part 2) shall be insulated with acoustic lag-
ging to minimize noise transmission. The acoustic insulation shall be minimum 25mm thick and
shall achieve a minimum noise reduction of 20dBA. The surface density of the insulation shall be
4.5kg/m2 or as required to achieve the necessary sound reduction.
d. The Contractor shall allow for contraction and expansion of pipework and anchoring as required.
Particular attention shall be given to the base of main stacks where long radius bends shall be
provided and suitably anchored/restrained to cater for the higher pressures experienced. The Con-
tractor shall submit suitable fittings and support system as recommended by the manufacturer for
the Engineer’s approval.
D. Underground Drainage Specification (uPVC Buried Pipework)
1. Scope of Works
a. To meet the specific performance criteria detailed within this specification and accompanying
drawings.
b. The completed drainage systems shall meet the performance requirements stated in BS EN 752
Building Drainage, BS EN 12056, the requirements of the Local Municipality
c. The Installer will provide for the supply and installation of all fittings, pipework and ancillary
equipment and is to include for all necessary, jointing, bedding, manhole construction, trenching,
supports etc to allow the whole of the works to satisfy the tests and performance requirements
detailed in this specification.
d. The Installer will be required to identify, protect and maintain any existing live drainage works
adjacent to the site during the construction of all new works.
e. Notwithstanding the normal testing and inspection procedures it will be noted that there is a
requirement under this specification to CCTV survey, video and report on the completed
installation immediately prior to practical completion for this package.
f. The Installer will verify, prior to the commencement of the works detailed in this package, that the
location, size and invert level of all points of connection to existing outfalls are as shown on the
drawings.
g. Reference should be made to the sewer record drawings for the adjacent existing and new
infrastructure systems.
2. Foul Water Drainage
a. The performance objectives are to collect, convey and discharge all foul effluents from within the
confines of the site to the infrastructure system provided adjacent to and around the perimeter of
the site operating under gravity principles, with the exception of the Basement which shall be
provided with pumped systems.
3. Pipework
a. All system pipes are extruded and all system fittings are injection moulded. Pipe and fittings to
British Standard 5252:10.A.07
b. 110 to 315mmmm PVC-u lead free solvent weld soil pipe and fittings to BS EN 1401 (BS 4660),
Kitemark certified. 110 and 160mm Foam core three layer PVC pipe to BBA certificate 95/3086
c. Plastic Inspection Chambers to BS EN 7158:2001, Kitemark certified. Size(s): PVCu 82 -315mm

diameter
d. Colour: Terracotta Brown Nominal pressure rating: 0.5 bar Operating temperatures: PVC-u, 760C
e. The above temperatures are based on a continuous flow, intermittent discharges of up to 1000C
may occur provided they are of less than two minutes duration.
f. Plastic pipework and fittings jointing shall generally be push fit.
g. Set pipework accurately to the gradients and at the heights were shown on the drawings. Use
swept fittings where appropriate.
h. Store elastomeric jointing rings in their delivery bags or protective containers. Do not expose to
direct sunlight.
i. Store pipes clear of ground. Stack pipes on a level surface. Provide side supports; do not stack
more than 7 layers high. Do not expose to direct sunlight.
j. Keep fittings under cover, do not remove from cartons or packaging until required. Store lubricant
in a cool place out of direct sunlight and away from any heat source.
k. Inspect all pipes and fittings carefully before installing, ensure products are clean and free from
contamination. Reject any which are defective.
4. Thermal Movement
a. PVC pipework expands and contracts with changes in temperature, co-efficient of expansion is
0.04mm / m / ±1K.
5. Chemical Resistance
a. PVC pipework is resistant to most common acids. It will be necessary to check on the type of
chemical(s) being discharged prior to installation.
6. Materials
a. All materials used in or upon the works will be to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator
(CA), and where an appropriate Specification issued by the local Municipality is current at the date
of execution of the works, all goods and materials used will be in accordance with that
Specification.
b. Pipes and fittings of a common type shall be procured from the same manufacturer and shall be
jointed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations using the recommended
adaptors and couplings.
c. A list of suppliers from which materials are to be purchased and the materials proposed for
installation in the execution of the works will be submitted to the CA. The information regarding
the names of the suppliers may be submitted at different times as may be convenient but no
source of supply will be changed without the authority of the CA.
d. Samples of the materials listed below and any other materials which the CA may direct to have
used in the works will be deposited with the CA free of cost. The CA’s comments on these samples
must be obtained before any such material is ordered and before the work in question is
commenced, and the CA will keep his supplies up to the same standard throughout the
construction.
e. The Installer is responsible for co-ordinating all works within the Public Highway with the Local
Highway Authority, the Police Authority, relevant Statutory Authorities and any other bodies or
persons that may be affected by the works in progress.
f. The Installer is responsible for co-ordinating all access to site by vehicular traffic with the Local
Highway Authority the Police Authority and any bodies or person that may be affected by vehicle
movements both in and out of the site.
7. Pipes
a. All underground drainage pipework shall be installed using PVCu pipes and fittings.
b. Where pipes are suspended below concrete slabs special attention shall be given to the support
details provided on the drawings with pipes being either encased in concrete to form a downstand
beam arrangement or being supported from the slab using stainless steel hangers and fixings.
c. Where pipes are cut on site ends shall be cut clean and champhered with burrs removed prior to
making the joint. Joints shall be made using the recommended lubricant where appropriate.
d. Pipes shall be protected at all times from the ingress of debris with pipe ends being sealed during
construction.
8. Pipe Bedding Materials
a. Pipe bedding to be generally granular Class B. Any variation will be indicated by the CA on the
drainage layout drawings with reference to details indicated on the detail drawings.
9. Pipework Fittings
a. Terrain 110mm / 160mm DX range of underground fittings incorporates Black Caps designed to
encapsulate the seals and consist as follows
1) PVCu body
2) Black Polypropylene cap
3) EPDM rubber seal
b. Terrain 110mm / 160mm D range of underground fittings (both socket and spigot/socket)
incorporates Terracotta PVCu caps and consist as follows:
1) PVCu body
2) Terracotta colour PVCu Cap
3) EPDM rubber seal
10. Installation
a. All under ground drainage pipework has been designed to BS EN 752. Install inspection chambers,
pipework, fittings and accessories to ensure that:
1) Foul and storm water discharge is drained quickly, quietly and completely at all times without
nuisance or risk to health.
2) Discharge is conveyed without crossflow, backfall, leakage or blockage.
3) Foul air from the drainage system does not enter the building.
4) The system can be adequately tested, cleaned and maintained.
11. Pipe Laying
a. The pipes will be laid and bedded with their inverts to the lines and levels as shown on the
drawings. Under no circumstances should any pipes be laid without the correct bedding material.
b. Pipes with flexible joints will be laid only in straight lines except with the CA’s written permission;
in this case a deviation of greater than 2 degrees per joint will not be permitted. Pipes will be laid
in the opposite direction to the flow so that the spigot end of the pipe is drawn into the socket.
c. Pipes shall be protected at all times from the ingress of debris with pipe ends being sealed during
construction. Properly fitted temporary stoppers will be provided and constantly used to close the
ends of all incomplete pipelines. The stoppers are only to be removed when pipes are being laid
and jointed.
12. Testing
a. Inform the Main Contractor sufficiently in advance to give him a reasonable opportunity to
observe tests.
b. Check that all sections of installation are securely fixed and free from obstruction and debris.
c. Ensure that all traps are filled with clean water.
d. Carry out tests as specified. After testing, locate and remedy all defects without delay and retest as
instructed. Do not use smoke to trace leaks.
1) Keep a record of all tests and provide a copy of each to the Engineer and CA.
2) The Installer is to allow for intermediate testing where work is to be concealed by other
installations, final finishes and to suit phased handover of areas.
3) Tests shall be carried out on the drainage installation as specified, and shall be carried out
under the inspection of and to the approval of the CA.
a) Water/Air Testing of Non-Pressure Pipelines
The air tests will be accepted for preliminary tests as an alternative to the water test. If
pipework fails the air test, as defined in this specification carry out a water test which will
determine acceptability.
b) Obstruction Testing
Ensure all sections to be tested are completely free of obstructions, debris and
superfluous matter before preliminary tests. Demonstrate by drawing a profile or ball
through all pipework before other tests. The profile diameter will not be less than 8%
smaller than the diameter of the pipe under test.
c) Water Test (Non-Pressure Pipeline) Temporarily seal low ends of drains and connections.
Fill system with water to produce 1.2m head at high end and not more than 2.4 at low
end.
Allow the pipeline to stand for two hours for initial absorption, topping up at intervals
before testing.
Loss of water over thirty minutes to be measured by adding water at ten minute intervals
and noting quality required to maintain original level in standpipe.
Loss of water for drain pipes up to 300mm diameter to be not more than:
i. On 100 pipe - 0.05 litres per metre run
ii. On 150 pipe - 0.08 litres per metre run
iii. On 225 pipe - 0.12 litres per metre run
iv. On 300 pipe - 0.15 litres per metre run.
d) Air Test (Non-Pressure Pipeline)
Temporarily seal low ends of drains and connections.
Connect glass ‘U’ tube gauge to drain plug in length of drain under test.
Pump air into test section to 100mm water gauge for pipelines or where gullies and/or
ground floor appliances are connected, of slightly more than 50mm water gauge.
Allow five minutes for stabilization of air temperature.
Adjust air pressure to 100mm or 50mm water gauge as necessary.
Without further pumping, the head of water should not fall by more than 25mm in a
period of five minutes for 100mm water gauge test pressure, and 12mm for a 50mm
water gauge test pressure.
E. HDPE Pipework (Gravity Pipepwork)
1. HDPE for drainage systems shall be in accordance with EN 12056 in conjunction with DIN 1986-100,
DIN 19535-10 and EN 752.
2. The pipes & fittings should be tested and approved by (British Board of Agreement) BBA No.92/2796.
3. Discharge pipes made of tempered PE pipes and fittings with smooth ends must be used for discharge
pipes inside and outside buildings.
4. The requirements of EN 1519 for above ground & EN 12666-1 for buried discharge channels and pipes
should be met.
5. Connections must be with ring seal socket, butt welding and/or electrofusion welding.
6. Laying as per manufacturer guidelines in accordance with EN 12056 and DIN 1986-100, as well as EN
752 and EN 1610.
7. Valid ISO 9001:2008, ISO 140001:2004, OHSAS 19001:2007 certificates of the factories to be provided.
8. 3rd party conformity certificates & other approvals such as SKZ or equivalent must be provided.
9. Pipe fastening by means of zinc-plated pipe brackets for individual fastening to wall and ceiling in
accordance with static requirements.
Product Material: PE, polyethylene

Halogen-free
Linear expansion: 0.17mm/m*k
Temperature resistance: Up to 80°C, short-term 100 °C
Building material class: DIN 4102-B2, normally inflammable
UV Resistance The addition of approx. 2% soot largely protects the product material
against ageing and embrittlement from sunlight.
10. Pipe brackets, ring seal sockets, electrofusion couplings and butt-welding connections are written out
separately in the specifications. Scraps, as well as fastenings and incidentals, are to be factored into the
standard prices or accounted for separately.
11. The pipes, fittings should be from the same manufacturer.
12. All operatives should be trained in welding & jointing techniques by the manufacturer & should be
issued certificates.
F. HDPE Specification (Pressurized Pipework)
1. General requirements.
2. Application: General details applicable to all plastic pipework and fittings.
3. Fluid conveyed: unfiltered cold and hot water and drainage.
4. Working pressure: PN16 or 125% of the system operating pressure, whichever is the more onerous as
approved by the Engineer.
5. Working temperature: cold water system shall be to a maximum 40°C, the hot water system shall be
suitable for a maximum temperature of 70°C, unless specified otherwise in the particular pipework
specification clause.
6. Where reference is made to the use of pipework downstream of the PRV this implies the operating
pressure of the system shall be limited to a maximum 5bar(g). The pipework system used for the cold
and hot water installation shall be the same system for all domestic water systems downstream of the
PRV, or where the system operating pressure is less than 5 bar(g). The pipework system shall be
selected in conjunction with the specialist pipework system manufacturer and shall be rated in
accordance with the specific details given for each type of plastic material specified in the following
clauses of this specification.
TYPES AND FITTINGS:
7. Type: A – HDPE – PE100.
8. Application:
a. Pumped foul and storm drainage
b. All plastic pipework buried below ground for cold water distribution.
9. The Contractor shall ensure the pipework supplier provides full installation and technical details for the
pipework installation. This shall include but not be limited to:
a. Making due allowance when evaluating the installation to ensure the correct HDPE pipe size is
selected, as identified in the table on the drawings. For large diameters the Contractor shall make
due allowance for additional HDPE pipework to maintain the correct flow and pressure losses in
the system.
b. Expansion and contraction engineering detail
c. Fixing and support details, including anchor locations and loads imposed on the structure.
d. Installation details and technical site staff to attend the site as and when required during the
installation of the pipework.
e. Technical details of the pipework specifically in relation to pressure and temperature rating to suit
the conditions in the Middle East
PIPES:
10. Material: High density polyethylene (PE100)
11. Pressure Rating - Water: ISO S5 SDR11; 16 bar (g) at 20 °C (Note: SDR Ratings of pipework shall be
verified and validated by the Contractor as per Manufacturer’s recommendation and shall be approved
by the Engineer and shall be based on the design operating pressure, temperature and ambient
conditions.)
12. Standards: ISO 161-1, ISO 3607, ISO 4427, ISO 8770, ISO 8772, prEN 12201, prEN 13224, DIN 8075, DIN
19535, DIN 19537, WIS 4.32.13.
13. Dimensions: DN15 to DN1000
14. Density:0.95g/cm3
15. WRAS, and BSI Kite Mark approval.
16. Ends: Plain for electro-fusion welding.
17. Finish: Self finish
18. Stability: UV stabilized
19. Tempering: Pipes shall undergo a tempering process at time of production.
Fittings:
20. Material: High density polyethylene (PE100) suitable for potable water.
21. Pressure Rating - Water: ISO S5 SDR11; 16 bar (g) at 20 °C (Note: SDR Ratings of pipework shall be
verified and validated by the Contractor as per Manufacturer’s recommendation and shall be approved
by the Engineer and shall be based on the design operating pressure, temperature and ambient
conditions.)
22. Standards: ISO 161-1, ISO 3607, ISO 4427, ISO 8770, ISO 8772, prEN 12201, prEN 13224, DIN 8075, DIN
19535, DIN 19537, WIS 4.32.13.
23. DVGW, WRAS, and BSI Kite Mark approval.
24. Dimensions: DN15 to DN1000
25. Density: 0.95 g/cm3
26. Type: Electro-fusion welding with a protected wire without medium contact
27. Limited path fusion indicators
28. All transition fittings metal parts material should be stainless steel or corrosion resistance Brass.
29. All backing rings should be PP coated steel.
30. Finish: Self finish
31. Stability: UV stabilized
32. To ensure system integrity all plastic valves, pipes and fittings should be from the same manufacturer.
The welding and the installation should be in accordance with pipe manufacturer guidelines.
G. Ductile-Iron Parking Drains, Area Drains, Funnel floor drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
2. Pattern: Area, Floor, Funnel floor, drain.
3. Body Material: Ductile iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Required.
5. Anchor Flange: Required.
6. Clamping Device: Required.
7. Outlet: Side as shown on drawings.
8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty D400 class
9. Sediment Bucket: removable and required.
10. Top or Strainer Material: ductile iron.
11. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: ductile iron.
12. Top Shape: Square. (400x400mm)
13. Funnel: Required as shown on drawings.
14. Trap Material: Ductile iron.
H. Floor Cleanouts
1. Floor Cleanouts:
a. Size: Same as connected branch.
b. Body: Ductile iron
c. Closure Plug: HDPE.
d. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty D400 class
2. Cleanouts for Plumbing Services
a. The floor cleanouts location shall be coordinated with the interior designer flooring layout or as
acceptable by the Engineer.
b. All concealed cleanouts shall have easy access for cleaning and inspection. Where concealed
cleanouts have no direct access and installed in furred ceiling spaces, cleanouts shall extend up
through floor slab above and the Engineer shall give specific acceptance to its location in the
above floor space
c. Cleanouts in concrete floors shall be complete with polished bronze frame and scoriated nickel
bronze tractor duty cover and internal brass or bronze plug.
d. Cleanouts shall be of Class D400.
e. Cleanouts in floors with a waterproof membrane shall be equal to the cleanouts specified above
but with a flushing clamp device for attaching to the waterproof membrane below finished floor
level.
f. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes up to 100mm pipe diameter and not less
than 100mm for larger piping.
I. Channel Gratings:
1. Prefabricated type within Concrete trench
2. Ductile iron, single piece construction, as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Conform to BS EN 124 D400 heavy duty class.
4. Cover clear opening 250mm or as shown on the Design Drawings.
5. Sediment Bucket: removable and required.
J. Backflow Preventer
1. Prefabricated type
2. Made of polymer
3. Self-closing flap, shall be locked by hand as an emergency closure.
4. Installation area 650x300
K. PUDDLE FLANGES:
1. Puddle flanges for all the crossing of the retaining wall, Irrigation and Fire water tanks shall be
provided with same material of the pipe work. For RCC potable water puddle flanges shall be stainless
steel. Grade-316 with grit bonding.
L. Rainwater Drain
1. These shall be sidewall or dome type as indicated on the Design Drawings. They shall have 100mm
diameter outlets minimum. Dome type for use in flat roofs with safety overflow, flashing clamp and
gravel stop with polyethylene dome. Sidewall for use at junction of roof and parapet, flashing clamp
and loose set grate.
M. Rainwater Area Drain at podium level
1. The 300x300mm square heavy-duty drain with a Dura-Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet,
seepage pan, combination membrane flashing clamp and frame for heavy-duty cast iron loose slotted
grate, with suspended polypropylene sediment bucket. For FOH area, grating type shall be as specified
by landscape specialist.
N. Floor Drain: All floor drains shall be provided with deep seal traps (minimum 50mm).
1. Floor Drain (FD)
a. For use in the finished areas made of chrome plated, cast brass 150mm x 150mm² floor plate (for
areas not specified by Interior designers) with inlet grid and heavy duty stainless steel cover plate
for floor gulley size 75mm diameter.
2. Floor Drain in Mechanical Room
a. For use in the unfinished areas and mechanical rooms made of epoxy coated cast iron body (load
D400) with adjustable collar, clamping device and 150mm diameter grate.
3. Tundish Drain
a. For use in indirect drain as a combination of funnel and floor drains made with adjustable collar,
clamping device and 150mm diameter grate. The funnel for indirect drain shall be round 100mm
diameter or oval type epoxy coated 100mm x 230mm. The indirect waste floor drains, shall be
used for locations where the drainage receives the drip, condensate or waste water from indirect
waste lines. The funnel shall prevent the splashing and direct the waste into the drain. The
exposed portion of the grate shall be used as a drain for any other water on the floor. The funnel
shall be attached to the grate by means of concealed screws and it may be moved to any grate
desired. The round funnel shall be used for single pipe. The oval funnel is ideal for multiple pipes.
The indirect waste drains shall have flanged receptor, bar, grate and funnel.
4. Balcony/ Terrace Drain
a. Single drain made of galvanised steel with a compression sealing flange is set in the balcony slab,
and the rotatable top section is set flush with the surface covering to the acceptance of the
Engineer
O. Channel Drain
1. Heavy duty ductile iron frame and grate (D400 load) and fully sloped channel capable of handling
vehicular traffic.
P. Cleanouts (C.O.)
1. Floor Cleanouts (As per Engineer's approval) in unfinished areas: Use epoxy with integral clamp device,
plug with urethane gasket, bonded to plug and scoriated cover secured with stainless steel screw and
adjustable top.
2. Floor Cleanouts (As per Engineer's approval) in tiled areas: Same as above, with nickel bronze cover
recessed to receive floor finish/ coating.
3. Ceiling Cleanouts: Ceiling cleanouts shall be of the material and size of the pipe it is serving.
Q. Water Hammer Arrestors
1. Pre-charged stainless steel bellows in a stainless steel casing sized according to manufacturer's
recommendations and shall be provided throughout the domestic system in locations determined by
these recommendations.
R. Hose Bib and Vacuum breaker
1. Provide where indicated on the Design Drawings 20mm bronze angle hose gate valve with rubber
composite disc. Vacuum breaker shall be installed to protect against back-sipohonage of polluted
water into the potable water supply. Vacuum breaker consists of a brass body construction, stainless
steel working parts, and a rubber diaphragm and disc.
S. Backflow Preventers
1. Backflow preventers shall be of bronze body with stainless steel trim.
T. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Provide pressure reducing valves were indicated on the Design Drawings. Pressure reducing valves
shall maintain leaving pressures in building floors at maximum 300kPa and in external domestic water
network at maximum 370kPa. Pressure reducing valves shall be of bronze body with stainless steel
trim.
U. Float Valves
1. Provide modulating pivoted controlled float valve in each of the water reservoirs. Float valve shall have
bronze body in accordance with BS 1212: Part 1, size 50mm, brass fulcrum minimum 736mm long,
brass piston with 'O' ring seal, threaded end with lock nuts in accordance with BS EN ISO 228: Parts 1
and 2, removable phosphor bronze seats with pressure rating of 1380kPa and minimum 150mm float
in accordance with BS 1968.
V. Manholes
1. Precast or poured concrete manholes with frames, covers and GRP liner in accordance with the details
on the Design Drawings and RIYADH MUNICIPALITY requirements.
W. Hydro break in rainwater tanks
1. Hydro break Vortex addresses the planning and connection requirements set out in the Floods and
Water
2. Management Act. Where a discharge restriction is in place, hydro brake vortex regulates the surface
water flow to the specified rate.
3. Hydro break manufactured from grade 304 stainless steel, with remote access bypass door. All part are
welded to BS 4872. Hydro break selection shall be as per manufacturer recommendations.
X. Backflow preventer for sewer and storm network:
1. Backflow preventer shall be provided for sewer and storm connection to infrastructure network to
avoid surcharge from infrastructure network, back to DGDA Car park.
2. Back flow preventer shall be of polymer, suitable for HDPE and UPVC connection. Shall have twin-flaps,
self-closing, one of which can be locked manually as an emergency closure.
Y. Water hammer arrestors:
1. The water supply system shall be provided with the water hammer arrestor with the following
specification:
a. Maximum Working Pressure: 350 PSI
b. Temperature: 33°F to 188°F (0.5°C to 87°C)
c. For Commercial and Residential Systems
d. Poly piston with two EPDM O ring
e. Brass Connections, Copper Tube
f. Seamless Chamber and shall have a lead free solder joint for brass thread fitting.
g. Suitable for Potable Water Applications
h. Shall be effective when installed at any angle. (not to be installed in the inverted position)
i. Can be installed in systems without need for access panels
j. The water hammer arrestor shall be sized as per manufacturer recommendation.
k. The arrestor air chamber shall have enough volume to dissipate the kinetic energy generated in
the piping system (As per suppliers calculation)
l. Water hammer arrestor shall be manufactured as per ASSE Standard 1010, 2004
m. WRAS approved
Z. Thermostatic mixing valves:
1. Brass type valves that are designed to blend hot and cold water to ensure constant and controlled safe
outlet water temperature. The valve shall have an adjustable scale of suitable temperature range to
ensure thermal balance throughout the hot water system. The valve shall be equipped with integral
strainers and check valves.
2. Comply with ASSE 1017. Include check stops on hot- and cold-water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet.
3. Pressure rating 10 bar
4. WRAS approved
5. Type TMV 3 shall be installed
AA. Pressure reducing valve:
1. Pressure reducing valves shall be fitted to reduce a higher inlet pressure to a constant downstream
pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/ or varying inlet pressure.
2. Provide pressure reducing valves were indicated on Design Drawings to maintain leaving pressures
directly off the main risers to a floor or zone at maximum 250kPa to 300kPa unless otherwise indicated
in the Particular Specification or on Design Drawings.
3. Pressure rating 10 bar
4. WRAS approved
5. Pressure gauges shall be provided at upstream and downstream of pressure reducing valve
Construction:
a. Connections shall be line size.
b. Bronze body.
c. Stainless steel trim.
d. Pressure reducing valves shall be from a manufacturer in the Vendor List.
e. Valves shall be a single seated, line pressure operated, diaphragm actuated, pilot controlled globe
valve.
f. Valves shall seal by means of a corrosion resistance seat and resilient rectangular seat disc. These
and other parts shall be replaceable in the field.
g. All such service and adjustments shall be possible without removing the valve from the line.
h. The stem of the basis valve shall be guided top and bottom by integral bushings.
i. The basis valve and its control system shall contain no packing glands or stuffing boxes.
j. The diaphragm shall not be used as a seating surface, nor shall the pistons be used as an
operating medium.
k. All internal and exterior ferrous surfaces shall be coated with a high quality, 2-part epoxy primer
and the exterior to then receive a coat of baked enamel paint.
l. The pilot control system shall consist of a 2-way, normally open, direct acting, adjustable spring
loaded, diaphragm-actuated pressure reducing pilot. The stem shall be guided between the dia-
phragm and the seat disc. The pilot control shall be field adjustable with the pressure range of the
spring specified, adjustment shall not exceed a 6:1 ratio.
m. Other control components shall include an ejector, flow control valve, a Y-strainer and 2 ball "stop"
valves for isolating the control system form the main valve.
n. The basis valves shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126/ B rated for 125 Class with ANSI
flanged connections. Valves shall be capable of operating from 0°C to 80°C ambient.
BB. Vacuum breaker:
1. Provide threaded vacuum breakers with ball, spring, O-ring flexible seat and screen.
2. Ball shall be Type-440 stainless steel and seat shall be EPR.
3. Spring shall be Type-316 stainless steel, screen and cap shall be Type-304 stainless steel and threaded
collar shall be Type-416 stainless steel.
4. Brass body.
5. Vacuum breakers shall be from a manufacturer in the Vendor List
6. WRAS approved
7. PN 10 rating
CC. Public Health Services Pipework Materials Schedule
The design is based on the following pipework materials,
Size
System (mm) Material Jointing Pressure Rating
Cold Water Services – Primary 32 – Polypropylene (PP-RP fibre Electro Fusion fit- SDR 7.4 or SDR 9 RP
distribution 355 reinforced) tings
24.5 bar (20°C), 50
years
Cold Water Services – Secondary, 16 – Cross-linked Polyethylene Pushfit and 8 bars (30°C), 50
pipe droppers to fixtures 32 (PEX-A) Pressfit fittings
years
Hot Water Services – Primary 32 – Polypropylene (PP-RP fibre Electro Fusion fit- SDR 7.4 or SDR 9 RP
distribution 355 reinforced) tings
11.9 bar (70°C), 50
years
Hot Water Services – Secondary, 16 – Cross-linked Polyethylene Pushfit and 8 bar (70°C), 50
pipe droppers to fixtures 32 (PEX-A) Pressfit fittings
years
Gravity Sanitary Drain- age foul All Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Solvent weld BS EN 1329 -1:2000,
and wastewater and venting
MuPVC Kitemark
(Above ground)
BS EN 1566 –
1:2000, Kitemark
Gravity Sanitary Drain- age foul All Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Push fit BS EN 1401, Kite-
and waste water and venting
mark
(External buried)
All
Gravity Below slab sewer High Density Polypropylene Electro fusion (50°C), 50 years BS
drainage pipework (HDPE) joints EN 1519
All
Condensate Drainage Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Solvent weld BS EN 1329 -1:2000,
Kitemark
Kitchen drainage services All High Density Polypropylene Electro fusion (90°C), 50 years BS
(Above ground, below slab, (HDPE) joints EN 1519
external buried)
Gravity Rain water All High Density Polypropylene Electro fusion (50°C), 50 years BS
(HDPE) joints EN 1519
(Above ground, below slab and
external buried)
Tank filling pipe (Potable water & All Pressure High Density Electro fusion As per spec
TSE water) Polypropylene (HDPE) WRAS joints
approved
Pumped drainage lines (Storm, All Pressure High Density Electro fusion As per spec
sewer, car park Polypropylene (HDPE) joints
drain) – Above ground and
buried
END OF SECTION
1.16 ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviations used throughout the Mechanical, Electrical and Public Health documents shall have the
meaning ascribed to them below unless their individual use is not consistent with the text in which used.
Abbr. Meaning Product/Equipment, Body,

Standard, Installation,
General, Unit/measurement.
Or Other
" inches U
∆P Differential Pressure Sensor P
°C Degree Celsius U
2P 2-Pole U
4P 4-Pole U
A or Amps Amperes - Electrical Current U
AAV Automatic Air Vent P
ABS Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene P
AC or ac Alternating Current U
ACB Air Circuit Breaker P
ACP Access Control Panel P
ACS Access Control System P
ACV Alarm Check Valve P

AD Access Door (In Duct) P
AD Area Drain P
A-D Analogue to digital O
AD/DA Analogue to Digital/Digital to Analogue O
ADJ Adjacent I
AFFL Above Finished Floor Level M
AFV Auto-Flow Valve P
AHF Active Harmonic Filter P
AHU Air Handling Unit P
AMCA Air Movement And Control Association B
ANSI American National Standards Institute B
AP Access Panel P
ARV Automatic Air Release Valve P
ASCE American Society Of Civil Engineers B
ASHRAE American Society Of Heating Refrigeration And Air Conditioning B
Engineers
ASME American Society Of Mechanical Engineers B
ASTA Association Of Short Circuit Testing Authorities B
ASTM ASTM International, Formerly Known As The American Society For B
Testing And Materials
ATM Automated Teller Machines P
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch P
AV Audio Visual Equipment (General) P
AVS Automatic Valve Sensor Supply (Type Used For Hand Wash Basins) P
AWA Aluminium Wire Armour P
AWS American Welding Society B
AWWA American Water Works Association B
AZCV Automatic Zone Control Valve P
BASEC British Approvals Service For Cables B
BC Bus Coupler P
BD Bidet P
BD Balcony Drain P
BEAMA British Electrical And Allied Manufacturers' Association B
BES Building & Engineering Services Association B
BESA British Engineering Standards Association/ Quoted For Conduit Boxes B
BFV Butterfly Valve P
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International B
BMS Building Management System or Integrated automation system P
BP Binder Test Point P
BS British Standard or BSI Standard Publication S
BS EN European Standard (EN) Adopted by BSI S
BSI British Standards Institute B
BSRIA Building Services Research And Information Association B

BT Bath Tub P
BV Butterfly Valve P
C/O Change Over G
C/V Ceiling Void I
CAV Constant Air Volume Unit G
CB Catch Basin P
CC CCTV Camera P
CCU Close Controlled Unit P
CD Condensate Drain P
CDP Condensate Drain Pipe P
CEA Consumer Electronics Association B
CHWF Chilled Water Flow G
CHWP Chilled Water Pump P
CHWR Chilled Water Return G
CIBSE Chartered Institute Of Building Services Engineers B
CMRR Common Mode Rejection Ratio O
CO Carbon Monoxide G
CO Clean Out P
CP Control Panel P
CP-E Control Panel For Electric Driven Fire Pump P
CPEF Car Park Extract Fan P
CP-J Control Panel For Jockey Pump P
CRAC Computer Room Air Conditioning P
CS Cleaner Socket P
CS Commissioning Set P
CSA Canadian Standards Association B
CSP Chlorosulphonated polyethylene P
CT Current Transformer P
CV Ceiling Void P
CV Control Valve P
CV Check Valve P
D-A digital to analogue O
DAS Distributed antenna system P
DAU Distribution Amplifier Unit P
DB Distribution Board P
dB Decibel U
DB Dry Bulb Temperature U
DC Drain Cock P
DC or dc Direct Current U
DCHWF District Cooling Chilled Water Flow P
DCHWR District Cooling Chilled Water Return P
DEKRA B
DIN Deutsches Institute Für Normung B
DL Door Louver P
DL Drum Louvre P
DOT ‘Draw Out Type’ Or ‘Withdrawable’ ACB P
DP 2-Pole U
DPA Disabled Persons Alarm P
DPCV Differential Pressure Control Valve P
DPS Differential Pressure Switch P
DPV Dry Pipe Valve P
DRP Dry Riser Pipe P
DRV Double Regulating Valve P
DSP Digital signal processing O
DTG Door Transfer Grille P
DV Deluge Valve P
EAD Exhaust Air Duct P
EAG Exhaust Air Grille P
EAL Exhaust Air Louver P
ED Exhaust Diffuser P
EDB Emergency Distribution Board P
EF Exhaust Fan P
EG Exhaust Grille P
EIA
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker P
ELV Extra Low Voltage As Defined In BS7671 G
(Not Exceeding 50 V A.C. Or 120 V Ripple-Free D.C., Whether Between
Conductors Or To Earth)
EMCC Motor Control Centre For Emergency System P
EMDB Main Distribution Board For Emergency Systems P
EN European Standard (EN) Adopted By One Of The Three Recognized B
European Standardisation Organisations
EN DIN European Standard Published By Deutsches Institute Für Normung S
ENA Electrical Networks Association (UK) B
EPO Emergency Power Off P
EPR Etheylene Propylene Rubber P
ES External Signage P
ESMDB Sub Main-Main Distribution Board For Emergency Systems P
ETR Emergency Transformer P
ETS Energy Transfer Station P
EV Exhaust Disc Valve P
F/A From Above I
F/B From Below I
FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel P
FAD Fresh Air Duct P

FAF Fresh Air Fan P
FAHU Fresh Air Handling Unit P
FAL Fresh Air Louver P
FARP Fire Alarm Repeater Panel P
FBA Factory Built Assembly Of Switchgear P
FC Flexible Connection or Connector P
FCO Floor Clean Out P
FCU Fan Coil Unit P
FCU DRAIN Condensate Drain W/ Insulation P
FD Fire Damper P
FD Floor Drain P
FG Floor Gully P
FJ Flexible Joint P
FL Festive Lighting P
FM Facilities Maintenance G
FM Flow Meter P
FMD Flow Metering Device P
FP Flat Panel Screen P
FP-E Electric Driven Fire Pump P
FP-J Jockey Pump P
FV Float Valve P
g Gram U
GEN Standby Generator P
GSM Antenna for Global System for Mobile communication P
GT Gully Trap P
GV Gate Valve P
H/L High Level I
HB Electrical Heater Battery P
HD Hand Drier Supply P
HRC High Rupturing Current P
HS Hand Spray P
HV High Voltage As Defined In BS7671 G
(Normally Exceeding Low Voltage – Refer To LV.)
HVCA Heating Ventilation Contractors Association Or BES (Building & B
Engineering Services Association)
Hz or hz Frequency (k denotes x1000) U
IBC International Building Code S
ICEL Industry Committee For Emergency Lighting B
IEC International Electro-Technical Commission B
IEE Institute Of Electrical Engineers Or Institute Of Engineering Technology B
IEEE Institute Of Electrical And Electronic Engineers B
IESNA Illumination Engineering Society North America B
IET Institute Of Engineering Technology B

IFU Interface Unit P
IOP Institute Of Plumbing B
IPnn Ingress Protection Rating Of ‘Nn’ To BS EN 60529 S
IPS Isolated Power Supply P
ISO International Organization For Standardisation B
ITC Inspector Test Connection P
IV Isolating Valve P
IWB Interactive Whiteboard P
JN Jet Nozzles P
JSF Jet Stream Fan P
kA Kilo Amps or Kilo Amperes U
KED Kitchen Exhaust Duct P
KEF Kitchen Extract Fan P
KEMA DNV KEMA / B
Keuring Van Elektrotechnische Materialen In Arnhem - Hol- land
kg Kilogram U
kPa Kilopascal U
KS Kitchen Sink P
kV Kilo Volts U
kVA Kilo Volt Ampere U
kVAr Kilo Volt Amp reactive U
kW Kilowatts U
l Litre U
L/L Low Level I
l/s Litres Per Second U
LED Light Emitting Diode P
LEF Laboratory Extract Fan P
LFH Laboratory Fume Hood P
LOVAG Low voltage Agreement Group B
LPF Lift Pressurisation Fan P
LPHW Low Pressure Hot Water G
LPI Linux Professional Institute B
LSF Low Smoke and low Fume P
LSOH Low Smoke Zero Halogen. P
LSV Lock Shield Valve P
LV Low Voltage As Defined In BS7671 G
(Exceeding ELV But Not Exceeding 1000 V A.C. Or 1500 V D.C. Between
Conductors, Or 600 V A.C. Or 900 V D.C. Be-
tween Conductors And Earth Refer To ELV And HV)
LV Landing Valve P
m Meter U
M/L Mid-Level I
m/s or ms-1 Meter Per Second U

m³/s-1 CUBIC Metre PER SECOND U
MB Motorised Blind P
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker P
MCC Motor Control Centre P
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker P
MD Motorised Damper P
MDB Main Distribution Board Or Main Switch Panel P
MFAP Main Fire Alarm Control Panel P
MFD Motorised Fire Damper P
MH Manhole P
mic microphone P
MICC Mineral insulated Copper Clad P
mm Milli-meter U
MS Motorised Screen P
MV Motorized Valve P
MVCD Motorised Volume Control Damper P
MVEP Main Voice Evacuation Panel P
MW Mega Watts U
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association B
NC Noise Criteria U
NC or N/C Normally Closed G
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association B
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association B
NETA International Electrical Testing Association B
NFC/UTE
NFPA National Fire Protection Association B
NIC Network Interface Card P
NO or N/O Normally Open G
NRV Non Return Valve P
NSEC
O+M or O&M Operating And Maintenance P
P/S Pressure Switch P
Pa Pascal U
PA Public Address O
PC Pedestrian Counting System P
PC Personnel computer P
PCP Polychloroprene P
PD Parking Drain / Planter Drain P
PDB Panel distribution Board. P
PDU Power Distribution Unit G
PF Pressurization Fan P
PF or pf Power Factor U
PFC Power Factor Correction P
PG Pressurization Grille P
PG Pressure Gauge P
PH Phase U
PHX or PHE Plate Heat Exchanger P
PICV Pressure Independent Control Valve P
Post contract Prior To Ordering Of Equipment And Commencement Of The G
Installation
PPM Parts Per Million U
PROJ Ceiling Projector P
PRV Pressure Relief Valve P
PS Pressure Switch P
PU Pressurization Unit (Chilled Water System) P
PVC Polyvinylchloride G
RAD Return Air Duct P
RAL Reichs-Ausschuss Für Lieferbedingungen Colour Space System S
RCBO Circuit Breaker For Residual Current And Overcurrent Protection P
RCC Rain Water Collection Chamber P
RCCB Residual Current Circuit Breaker P
RD Return Diffuser P
RD Roof Drain P
RE Rodding Eye P
Restricted Earth Fault Protection Or
REF Earth Fault Protection To A Restricted Zone. P
RG Return Grille P
RH Relative Humidity U
RLD Return Linear Slot Diffuser P
RMS Root Mean Square G
RN Riser Nipple P
RPM Revolutions Per Minute U
RRD Return Round Faced Diffuser P
RS 232 Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)-232-F P
(Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment And Data Cir- cuit-
Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange)
RWO Rain Water Outlet P
RWP Rain Water Pipe P
S/N signal to Noise ratio O
SAD Supply Air Duct P
SCU System Control Unit For Fire Alarms P
SD Sliding Door P
SD Supply Diffuser P
SD Shower Drain P
SELV Separated Extra Low Voltage As Defined In BS7671 G

(An Extra-Low Voltage System Which Is Electrically Separated From
Earth And From Other Systems In Such A Way That A Single-Fault
Cannot Give Rise To The Risk Of Electric Shock)
SG Supply Grille P
SHO Shower P
SLD Supply Linear Slot Diffuser P
SMACNA Sheet Metal And Air Conditioning Contractors Association B
SMDB Sub-Main Distribution Board Or Sub-Main Switch Panel P
SP Single Phase G
SP Sewer Pipe / Soil Pipe P
SP&N or SP+N Single Phase And Neutral G
SPF Staircase Pressurisation Fan P
SRD Supply Round Faced Diffuser P
SS System Status Panel - Fire Alarm P
SSPC Society For Protective Coatings B
STL Sand Trap Louver P
STR Strainer P
STS Static Transfer Switch P
SWA Steel Wire Armour P
SWL Safe Working Load G
SWL Swirl Diffuser P
SWP Surface Waste Pipe P
T Temperature Sensor For BMS P
T/A To Above I
T/B To Below I
TAL Transfer Air Louver P
TCV Temperature Control Valve P
TED Toilet Exhaust Duct P
TER Telecoms Equipment Rack P
TG Temperature Gauge P
TH Thermometer P
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association B
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association B
TP Three Phase G
TP&N or TP+N Three Phase and Neutral G
TR or TX Transformer P
TRV Temperature Relief Valve P
TT Temperature Transmitter P
TTA Type Tested Assembly Of Switchgear G
TUV TüV Rheinland B
UL Underwriters Laboratory -USA B
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply P
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply P

V Volts or Voltage U
VA Voice alarm O
VAV Variable Air Volume Unit G
VCB Vacuum Circuit Breaker P
VCD Volume Control Damper P
VDE VDE Association For Electrical, Electronic & Information Tech- nologies B
VFD Variable Frequency Drive P
VOC Volatile Organic Compound P
VP Vent Pipe P
VT Voltage Transformer P
W Watts U
W/P Weather Proof I
WAV Waveform Audio File O
WB Wash Basin P
WB Wet Bulb Temperature U
WC Water Closet P
WD Wide Distance P
WP Waste Pipe P
WRP Wet Riser Pipe P
XLPE Cross-Linked Polyethylene P
ZCV Zone Control Valve P
Appendix A List of Approved Manufacturers
Equipment Approved Manufacturer Notes

Particular
Pumps
Booster Set Grundfos North America &
Pumps / Wilo Europe
Transfer pumps Pullen
(potable water)
Pumps KSB
Xylem Goulds
Lifting Stations Grundfos North America &
(wastewater) Wilo Europe
Xylem Flyght
Circulation Grundfos North America &
Pump (potable Wilo Europe
cold / hot Pullen
water)
Pumps KSB
Xylem Goulds
Sump Pumps Grundfos North America &
(wastewater, Wilo Europe
surface water, Xylem Flyght
condensate)
ABB
Variable Speed North America &
Allen
Drives Europe
Bradley
Danfoss
Seimens
Domestic Cold Water Tanks
GRP Tanks Balmoral All locally

Bridgestone (Middle East)
Mitsubishi represented
or based.
Domestic Hot Water
Electric Water Ariston All locally

Heaters AO Smith (Middle East)
Bradford represented
White or based.
Heatrea Sadia
Water Treatment Appliances
Copper-Silver Hydrotec All locally
Ionization Units Ateka (Middle East)
Holland represented
Water or based.
Culligan
Electromagnetic Hydrotec All locally

Water Culligan (Middle East)
Conditioner Proxa Water represented
Waterbird or based.
Pure Aqua Inc.
Water Filters All locally
Culligan
(RO, UF, Sand (Middle East)
Hydrotec
Filters, Carbon represented
Filters, etc.)
or based.
Grease Kessel All locally
Interceptors ACO (Middle East)
ALuline represented
or based.
Measuring Devices
Kent
Water Meters All locally
Elster
Baylan (Middle East)
represented
or based.
Pressure & Econosto All locally
Temperature Hunter (Middle East)
Gauges Wiess represented
Winters
or based.
Pipes
BSS
Steel Pipe Work Grinnell All locally
and Butt Nippon
Corus (Middle East)
Welded Fittings Surya
Kawasaki represented
or based.
Grooved End Victaulic All locally
Pipe Joints / Grinnell (Middle East)
Fittings National represented
or based.
Acoustic Geberit All locally
Drainage Rehau (Middle East)
Polypipe Terrain
represented
or based.
uPVC / muPVC Polypipe All locally
drainage Terrain (Middle East)
pipework Hepworth represented
Marley or based.
HDPE drainage Geberit – Swiss All locally
pipework Akatherm – (Middle East)
Nederland Valsir – represented
Italy or based.
HDPE drainage George Fisher All locally
pipework Hepworth (Middle East)
(Pressure pipe) represented

or based.
Stainless Steel Blucher All locally
drainage Crane Corus (Middle East)
pipework represented
or based.
PEX domestic Geberit Uponor All locally
services Polypipe Terrain (Middle East)
pipework Aquatherm represented
or based.
PPR - CT Aquatherm All locally
Marley Bänninger (Middle East)
George Fisher represented
Hepworth or based.
HDPE drainage George Fisher All locally
pipework Hepworth (Middle East)
(Pressure pipe) represented
or based.
Stainless Steel Blucher All locally
drainage Crane Corus (Middle East)
pipework represented
or based.
PEX domestic Geberit Uponor All locally
services Polypipe Terrain (Middle East)
pipework Aquatherm represented
or based.
PPR - CT Aquatherm All locally
Marley Bänninger (Middle East)
George Fisher represented
Hepworth or based.
Fittings and Valves
Isolation valves Crane Cal-Val All locally
Watts (Middle East)
represented
or based.
Balancing TA - Tour & All locally
Valves Anderson (Middle East)
Oventrop represented
Hattersley Crane or based.
I-Tap valves
Thermostatic All locally
Mixing Valves Honeywell (Middle East)
Reliance Watts represented
or based.
Hose bib Pegler Zurn All locally

(Middle East)
represented
or based.
Water Hammer Honeywell All locally
Arrestor Reliance Watts (Middle East)
represented
or based.
Pressure Honeywell Crane All locally
Reducing Cal-Val (Middle East)
Valves Hattersley represented
or based.
Y Strainers Hattersley Nexus All locally
Spirax Sarco I-Tap (Middle East)
valves represented
Crane or based.
Check Valves Hattersley Nexus All locally
Spirax Sarco (Middle East)
Crane represented
I-Tap valves or based.
Flexible Pipe Mason Kinetics All locally
Connectors (USA) Weicco (Middle East)
Crane Metraflex represented
or based.
Expansion Mason Metaflex All locally
Joints (Bellows Kinetics (USA) (Middle East)
& Guides) Victaulic represented
Tozen or based.
Air Vents Spirax Sarco All locally
Hattersley (Middle East)
Bell and Gosset represented
or based.
Air Admittance Durgo Studor All locally
Valves (AAV's) OsmaVent (Middle East)
Junter Plastics represented
Polypipe Terrain or based.
Insulation
Fiberglass AFICO All locally
Thermal Kimmco (Middle East)
Insulation Kooltherm Knauf represented
or based.
Closed Cell K-Flex Rubaflex All locally
Rubber Armaflex (Middle East)
Insulation Armstrong represented
Armacell or based.
Thermobreak
Insulation Childers Insulation All locally
Finishes Fosters (Middle East)
Idenden represented
or based.
Insulation Childers Insulation All locally
Adhesives and Idenden (Middle East)
Sealants Fosters represented
or based.
Thermal Manson Armacell All locally
Insulation (Pipe K-Flex (Middle East)
Work) Rubtiex represented
or based.
Other
Channel Drains ACO All locally

/ Gratings Zurn Haurton (Middle East)
Wade represented
or based.
Manhole and MBBM ACO All locally
tank Access GLYNWED (Middle East)
covers Bilco represented
or based.
Rainwater Soak Wavin Stormtech All locally
Away Systems Rigofill (Middle East)
Polystorm represented
or based.
ACO All locally
Floor Drains Delabie Wade (Middle East)
(Plantroom Zurn Kessel represented
gullies, FCO's,
or based.
Floor gullies,
RWO's, back of
house drains),
Gutter outlet
Pipework Mupro Flamco All locally
Support Mason Industries (Middle East)
Hangers (USA) Weicco represented
Hilti or based.
Float Switches Econosto
Kubler Siemens
Fire Barriers, Duffalyte All locally
Fire Sealants Firetherm Hilti (Middle East)
and Smoke Nullifire 3M represented
Stops Astro Flame or based.
Water Leak Kemper JAM All locally

Detection Logstar Hepworth (Middle East)
Systems Liebert PAL-AT represented
Aqua Alarm or based.
TTK
Float and KERAFLO All locally
delayed action CRANE FLUID (Middle East)
ball valve SYSTEMs TECOFI represented
PEGLER or based.
NIBCO
Water tank Sika All locally
lining for RCC Al Bassam (Middle East)
tank represented
or based.
Hose Bib with HATTERSLEY All locally
Vacuum NEWMAN (Middle East)
breaker HENDER LIMITED represented
CRANE FLUID or based.
SYSTEMS
PEGLER NIBCO
Hydro Break ACO All locally
Hydro Break (Middle East)
represented
or based.
BMS & Please refer to the All locally
Automatic Specialist package (Middle East)
Controls
represented
or based.
Notes
The manufacturers detailed above do not override the requirements of the specification or relieve the contractor of their
responsibility of conforming to the specification and local authority requirements. Should any of the above manufacturers listed
not achieve the full specification requirements and/or local authority requirements, they shall not be used unless prior approval is
obtained by the engineer / contract administrator.
The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment used is approved by the local authorities and the engineer prior to placing any
orders.
Where manufacturers have not been listed for any specific items (generally minor items of equipment), the Tenderer shall offer
equipment meeting the full requirements of the tender specification and in keeping with the nature of the installation and the
typical product manufacturers being considered for other similar items.
Wherever possible one manufacturer shall be used for all elements of specific installation areas to enhance compatibility, improve
familiarity within future maintenance procedures and minimise spare provisions required on the site.
The Contractor shall ensure that all manufacturers used are represented locally within the UAE, suitably rated to meet local
conditions and requirements and the products are available to achieve the project deliverables. This does not preclude the
contractors responsibility to order long lead items during the initial stages of the contract.
Appendix B Fuel Oil Approved Manufacturer’s List
S/N Equipment Particular Fuel Oil Approved List of Manufacturers

1 Emergency Vents (UL Listed) Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
2 Double skinned day oil fuel tank Highland, Newberry tanks or Equivalent
(UL Listed)
3 Solenoid valve (UL Listed) IP 65 Jefferson Solenoid valves, FEL valves (UK) or
Equivalent
4 Level indicator IP 67 Vega, Fozmula (UK) or Equivalent
5 Dial gauge FEL valves(UK), Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
6 Pressure gauge Wika Germany or Equivalent
7 Leak detection system Tractek by Tyco or Equivalent
8 Interstitial sensors Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
9 Fuel consumption meters (UL TCS, Liquid control or Equivalent
Listed)
10 Fuel piping Sumitomo (Japan) or Equivalent
11 Pipe fittings NEFIT or Equivalent
12 Oil shutoff valves (UL Listed) Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
13 Oil safety valves (UL Listed) Taylor valves or Equivalent
14 Drain valves (UL Listed) Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
15 Overfill protection valve (UL Listed) Atkinson UK, Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
16 Audio visual level Alarm Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
17 Gate valves & Check valves (UL Morrison Bros USA, Pegler UK, Kitz
Listed)
18 Fuel strainer (UL Listed) Morrison Bros USA or Equivalent
19 Control panel DEWA/ DCD approved
SECTION 220100 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF

PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Division 01 General Requirements, the
B. Section Includes:
1. General requirements for the operation and maintenance of Plumbing.
1. Division 21 Fire Suppression Work Sections.
3. Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections.
4. Division 25 Integrated Automation Work Sections.
5. Division 26 Electrical Work Sections.
6. Division 33 Utilities Work Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements of the submittal procedures and protocols set out by the Employer /
Engineer.
B. Provide the items as referenced in applicable Work Sections for each related Division.
1. Technical Submittals
a. Product Data on materials and components for use.
b. Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life
of the system.
c. List of tests included.
d. Certified test data.
e. A list of suppliers and subcontractors.
f. Summary of deviations from the Specification.
g. Reports of factory witness tests as called for in each section and requested by the Engineer.
h. Valve Tag Charts.
i. Field Test Reports.
j. Authorities Inspection Reports.
k. System Verification Certificates.
l. Special tools recommended by the product manufacturer and required for maintenance.
following:
1. Warranties.
a. Unless otherwise specified in other Work Sections, provide a manufacturer's full warranty covering
all products of this Division, valid for 1 year from date of issue of Taking-Over Certificate,
irrespective of delivery date and trial usage.
b. Provide warranty certificates for all equipment supplied to this project.
2. Guarantee the system for 1 year free maintenance, 5 years for availability of spare parts and technical
assistance. All other works for this section shall be in writing for 1 year, unless specifically stated in the
Specification. All guarantees shall commence after completion of the testing and commissioning and
final acceptance of the complete systems. Promptly repair or replace defective materials or equipment,
workmanship and installation that develop within this period to the Engineer satisfaction at no cost to
the Employer. Damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements shall be remedied and
corrected at no cost to the Employer.
a. Comply with the guarantee requirements of the individual requirements of the individual Work
Sections of Division 22 Plumbing that exceed those of this paragraph.
3. Operation and Maintenance Instruction manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
frequency. Original certificates shall be submitted separately to the Employer.
B. Record Drawings: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
C. Recommended Spare Parts list: As referenced in applicable Work Sections. Spare parts list shall identify
by name, the part numbers and quantities recommended and the current prices.
A. All systems shall comply with the requirements of the Authority having jurisdiction, and shall comply with
B. The manufacturer of materials and equipment shall have adequate ( 5 – 10 years) experience in the design
and manufacture of the respective products unless otherwise stated in other sections of this Specification.
C. Preconstruction Testing / Reports: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
with the specified performance requirements.
E. Comply fully with the edition (including amendments) of each of the referenced in applicable Work
Sections, Standards and other Codes of Practice current at the time of tender.
1.5 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits, licenses, inspections, examinations and fees required for Work of
Division 22 Plumbing.
B. Arrange for inspection of all Work by all concerned by the Statutory Authority having jurisdiction.
C. On completion of the Work, present to the Engineer the final unconditional certificate of acceptance of all
concerned Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction.
D. The installation of gas, fire protection, fuel handling, and domestic water and drainage systems shall be
installed to the construction standards established by the Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction. In no
instance shall the Contractor reduce the standards or scope of Work established by the Contract Drawings
and Specification.
A. Delivery
1. Ensure that materials and equipment are delivered to the Site at the proper time and in such
assemblies and sizes so as to enter into the building and shall be moved into the spaces where they
are to be located without difficulty.
B. Storage
1. Store all equipment and supplies in a manner accepted by the Engineer and per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
2. Store equipment in dry location.
3. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
4. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
5. Protect equipment from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
C. Handling
1. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do
not install damaged equipment or components, replace with new.
A. Temporary Service
1. Refer to the applicable Division of the Contract Documents regarding temporary services, Contractor's
workshop, storage and other such facilities.
2. Do not use any of the permanent Plumbing / Electrical / Mechanical Systems during construction
unless specific written acceptance is obtained from the Engineer. Accepted usage of the permanent
Plumbing / Electrical / Mechanical Systems shall not be construed as acceptance by the Employer.
3. The use of permanent facilities for temporary construction service shall not affect in any way the
commencement day of the warranty period.
B. Be responsible for any cutting and patching involved in getting assemblies into place.
C. Accessibility
1. For operation, maintenance and repair minor deviations from Design Drawings shall be permissible.
2. Group concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers and equipment requiring access, so as to
be freely accessible through access doors.
3. If required, provide catwalk for access to elements.
D. Civil Work Coordination
1. Take into account all of the Civil / Electrical / Mechanical Work performed by other Subcontractors
associated with the installation of electrical, mechanical, plumbing and other facilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Supply, install, test, commission, regulate and set to work the Works.
B. Work Included
1. Sections of Division 22 Plumbing are not intended to delegate functions or to delegate Work to any
specific trade.
2. The Work shall include all labour, materials, equipment, permits and tools required for a complete and
working installation as described but not necessarily limited to items, in the Work Sections of Division
22 Plumbing.
C. Scope of Work
1. This section establishes the requirements for operation and maintenance of all plumbing and drainage
systems in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. Provide all necessary materials, labor, equipment, tools, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding,
supports and supervision to enable safe operation and maintenance of all plumbing and drainage
systems in conformity with the Contract Documents.
D. Equipment Nameplates
1. Provide new apparatus, if required, (including electric motors) with proper nameplates affixed thereto,
showing the size, name of equipment, serial number and all information usually provided, which also
includes voltage, cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and the name and address of the
manufacturer.
2. Nameplates shall be in both English and Arabic languages.
A. Provide products and systems from one of the manufacturers from the approved Vendor List.
B. Plumbing equipment / plant shall be repaired with the use of genuine parts, as per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. All spare parts shall be checked prior installation against damages during transportation and storage.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Standard of Materials and Equipment
1. Refer to applicable Divisions of the Specification.
2. Provide new material and equipment of specified quality, delivered, erected, connected and finished in
every detail and supplied with the acceptance of the Engineer.
3. Where a manufacturer's name and model number is mentioned, it is for the purpose of setting a
standard of quality, performance, capacity, appearance and serviceability.
4. Assume full responsibility for ensuring that when providing other acceptable alternativemanufacturers
all space, weight, connections, power and wiring requirements, etc. are considered and costs therefore
included in the tender. Equipment requiring greater than specified energy requirements or unduly
limiting service space requirements shall not be accepted.
A. Inspection and Testing during Manufacture
1. The Employer's and the Engineer's representatives shall be entitled at all reasonable times during
manufacture to inspect, examine and test on the manufacturer's premises the materials and
workmanship of all plant to be supplied.
2. In accordance with the Contract Documents, notify the Employer's and the Engineer of the time and
location of his manufacturing shop tests for the following, but not limited to listed equipment’s:
a. Sump pumps
b. Grease traps
c. Interceptors.
d. Domestic Cold Water Booster Set Pumps
e. Water filters
f. Water meters
g. Calorifiers
h. Water heaters
i. Anti-vibration and seismic restraints.
3. Such inspection, examination or testing, if made, shall not release the Contractor from any obligation
under the Contract.
4. Where the Contract calls for optional witness tests on the premises of the manufacturer, the
manufacturer shall provide labor, materials, electricity, water, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as
may be required and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such tests.
5. Results, recommendations and reports of all such inspections shall be documented as witnessed in
writing with originals issued to the Employer.
6. Pay for all costs incurred by the Engineer in traveling and expenses to witness the tests on equipment
defined in this Section or as referenced in applicable Work Sections.
7. Shop witness tests shall be optional and Contractor's costs shall be listed individually permitting
deduct should witness test be waived by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
notify the Engineer of the unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
A. Superintendence Staff
1. Maintain at the Site, at all times, qualified personnel and supporting staff with proven experience in
operation, maintenance, testing and adjusting plumbing projects of comparable nature and
complexity.
2. The Contractor's Site supervisory personnel and their qualifications are subject to the acceptance of
the Engineer.
B. Trial Usage
1. The Employer has the privilege of trial usage of Plumbing Systems or parts thereof for the purpose of
testing and learning operational procedures.
2. Carry out trial usage over a maximum period of time as instructed by the Engineer.
3. Carry out the operations only with the express knowledge and under supervision of the trade
specialist who shall not waive any responsibility because of trial usage.
4. Trial usage shall not be construed as Taking-Over of the Work.
C. System Acceptance
1. Submit original copies of letters from the manufacturers of all systems indicating that their technical
representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are satisfied with the method
of installation, connection and operation.
2. These letters shall state the names of persons present at testing, the methods used, and a list of
functions performed with location and room numbers where applicable.
D. Operation and maintenance:
1. General:
a. Operation and maintenance shall comply with the Division 22 Plumbing specifications and
b. All systems shall be released to the Engineer certified ready for use and working in a satisfactory
manner to meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
c. All control systems shall be operational in accordance with the Specification.
d. Provide Technicians capable of performing air and water balance, vibration and noise
measurements.
e. The Technicians shall be subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
f. Each piece of equipment, including motors and controls shall be operated continuously for a
period of not less than 2 hours in the presence of the Engineer before acceptance.
g. Make tests of piping necessary after repair works. No work and equipment shall be insulated or
concealed until it is successfully tested.
h. Each piece of apparatus shall be carefully checked for completeness of connections, accessories,
wiring and controls and be placed in operation, tested and adjusted.
i. Carry out final tests at a time suitable to and in the presence of the Employer and the Engineer.
j. Provide all necessary labor, materials and equipment necessary to assist in the performance of
tests to be conducted by the local inspection authorities.
2. Water Supply Systems
a. The water system shall be cleaned, disinfected and left operational with lines well vented to
prevent the entrapment of air.
b. All safety valves shall be manually operated to ensure reliability.
c. All isolating valves in the system shall be opened completely. However, valves in bypass lines shall
be completely closed.
3. Drainage Systems
a. The drainage systems shall be cleaned, flushed and left operational
b. All floor traps and traps of plumbing fixtures shall be filled with water to prevent the escape of
sewer gases.
c. All sumps with pumps shall be filled with water to the minimum level.
d. All vent pipes shall terminate to the atmosphere, as per recommendations of the local authorities.
e. Sump pumps, grease traps, petrol interceptors shall be left switched on and fully operational.
4. Gas Systems
a. The gas systems shall be left operational with lines well vented and filled with gas.
b. All valves shall be left in the typical operation mode.
c. All safety features (i.e. sensors, automatic shut-off valves) shall be switched on and fully
operational.
3.3 INSPECTION INTERVALS
A. Inspection intervals shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Site conditions shall be taken into consideration, while establishing inspection intervals, especially if the
dry-solid content or sandy liquid is pumped.
C. If not specifically indicated by the manufacturer, pumps and other mechanical equipment used in Plumbing
systems shall be inspected at least once a year.
D. Each piece of equipment shall have its own logbook to record inspections, repairs and tests, as per the
3.4 REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT
A. Repair or replace any material or equipment found defective or cannot pass the tests specified in this
Section at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. Complete correction of defective material or equipment and retesting within the Contract period.
C. If the equipment or material cannot pass the second test, remove the defective equipment and replace it
with equivalent equipment that meets the Specification. Such replacement at no additional cost to the
Employer.
D. Remove defective equipment or material from the Site no later than 15 days from the date of notification
by the Engineer or his representative.
3.5 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A. Properly remedy defects in Work or equipment that appear during tests and test again. Continue until
acceptance by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Common works results for Plumbing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Engineer.
C. Technical Submittals
1. Contract information, indicating names and addresses of Client, project manager, architect, consulting
engineer and installer
2. Names of principal plant, its location and the equipment suppliers’ names and addresses, plus
equipment reference numbers
3. Copies of all test certificates
4. Planned maintenance requirements
5. Schedule of record and shop drawings
6. Method Statements
7. Warranties
8. Operation and Maintenance Instruction manuals
9. Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the
system.
10. Preliminary Quality Plan.
11. Summary of deviations from the Specification.
12. Reports of factory witness tests as called for in each section and requested by the Engineer.
13. Valve Tag Charts.
14. Field Test Reports.
15. Authorities Inspection Reports.
16. System Verification Certificates.
17. Special tools recommended by the product manufacturer and required for maintenance.
18. Coordination Construction Drawings: Prepare and submit to the Engineer for acceptance a
dimensioned layout with required sections of piping for each floor. These drawings shall be used as
coordination drawings and be distributed to all Divisions whose Work is affected. Drawings shall be in
a larger scale, usually 1:20 and shall include piping sections in accordance with planned fabrication, all
pipe and conduit fittings, valves and cleanouts with all dimensions for erection.
a. In addition to the above layouts and sections prepare details indicating sizes and locations of
special details including but not limited to:
1) Sleeves and openings.
2) Inserts and anchors.
3) Access panel openings.
4) Pits.
5) Housekeeping pads, vibration isolators and equipment bases.
following:
1. Warranties.
a. Comply with the guaranteed requirements of the individual requirements of the individual Work
C. Recommended Spare Parts list: As referenced in applicable Work Sections. Spare parts list shall identify by
name, the part numbers and quantities recommended and the current prices.
B. The manufacturer of materials and equipment shall have adequate ( 5 – 10 years) experience in the design
and Specification.
A. Delivery
B. Storage
1. Store all equipment and supplies in a manner accepted by the Engineer and per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
C. Handling
C. Accessibility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Work Included
specific trade.
22 Plumbing.
C. Scope of Work
1. This section establishes the requirements for completing all plumbing and drainage systems in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
supports and supervision to provide complete safe installations in conformity with the Contract
Documents.
3. A complete plumbing and drainage systems including all final connections to plumbing fixtures, floor
trenches, rainwater collection points, grease, sand and oil interceptors, sumps, sump pumps, manholes
and catch basins.
4. Provision of the utility services as necessary to complete the new works as detailed in the
Contract Documents. All proposed new works shall be fully detailed by the Contractor on Shop
Drawings, in Method Statements and submitted for acceptance. No work associated with building
services and utility services shall be undertaken until acceptance from the Engineer.
1. Provide apparatus (including electric motors) with proper nameplates affixed thereto, showing the size,
name of equipment, serial number and all information usually provided, which also includes voltage,
cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and the name and address of the manufacturer.
A. Select products and systems from one of the manufacturers from the approved Vendor List.
2.3 MATERIALS
4. Assume full responsibility for ensuring that when providing other acceptable alternative manufacturers
location of his manufacturing shop tests for the following, but not limited to listed equipment:
a. Sump pumps
b. Grease traps
c. Interceptors.
d. Domestic Cold Water Booster Set Pumps
e. Water filters
f. Water meters
g. Calorifiers
h. Water heaters
i. Anti-vibration and seismic restraints.
under the Contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting mechanical projects of comparable nature and complexity.
the Engineer.
B. Trial Usage
1. The Employer has the privilege of trial usage of Plumbing Systems or parts thereof for the purpose
of testing and learning operational procedures.
2. Carry out trial usage over a maximum period of time as instructed by the Engineer.
3. Carry out the operations only with the express knowledge and under supervision of the trade specialist
who shall not waive any responsibility because of trial usage.
4. Trial usage shall not be construed as Taking-Over of the Work.
C. System Acceptance
1. Submit original copies of letters from the manufacturers of all systems indicating that their
technical representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are satisfied with the
method of installation, connection and operation.
D. Commissioning
1. General:
a. The final start-up operation of all systems shall be coordinated with other trades participating in
the construction.
c. All floor traps and traps of plumbing fixtures shall be filled with water to prevent the escape of
sewer gases.
d. All sumps with pumps shall be filled with water to the minimum level.
e. All control systems shall be operational in accordance with the Specification.
3.3 GENERAL PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Plumbing systems shall be installed with the minimum pipework and fittings required to satisfy Plumbing
systems requirements, as per Division 22 specification.
B. All plumbing systems shall be clearly identified, as per Engineer specifications.
C. Plumbing systems shall provide safe operation for the end user under site conditions.
3.4 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. The water system shall be cleaned, disinfected and left operational with lines well vented to prevent the
entrapment of air.
B. All safety valves shall be manually operated to ensure reliability.
C. All isolating valves in the system shall be opened completely. However, valves in bypass lines shall be
completely closed.
D. All services crossing building expansion joints shall be adequately installed to ensure maintenance free
operation.
3.5 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. All drainage pipelines shall be cleaned, free from deposits or debris.
B. Drainage systems shall be left operational with adequate venting, as per specification, engineering
drawings and local requirements.
C. All access pipes shall be accessible via removable panel to ensure easy maintenance access.
D. All traps and gullies shall be filled with water to prevent sewer gases ingress into the building prior
handover.
E. Pipes shall be adequately installed with allowance for thermal expansion and movements.
F. Drainage systems
3.6 GAS SYSTEMS
A. The gas installation shall comply with the Engineer’s specifications and local authority’s requirements.
B. The gas pipework shall be capable of meeting the design gas demands of the gas appliances, including
future expansion demands.
C. The system shall be automatically controlled preventing potential misuse and shall be provided with
remote consumption monitoring.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Division 01 General Requirements,
the Particular Specification, Schedules, Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B. Related Work Sections and Documentation:
2. Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
3. Design data: Indicate selection calculations
4. Supplementary product literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the
system.
8. A list of proposed suppliers and subcontractors intended to be used.
9. Preliminary method statement
10. Preliminary quality plan
11. Summary of deviations from the specification
12. Manufacturer’s instructions: Indicate manufacturers installation instructions, special procedures, and
external controls
1. Warranties.
frequency. Include adjustment instructions.
B. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of motors.
1. BS 4999-101:1987 General requirements for rotating electrical machines. Specification for rating and
performance
2. BS 5000 Specification for rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications
3. BS EN 60034 Rotating electrical machines
4. BS EN ISO 5198 Centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps. Code for hydraulic performance tests.
Precision class.
5. BS 5257 Specification for horizontal end-suction centrifugal pumps (16 bar)
6. PD 5304 Safe use of machinery
7. BS EN ISO 9906 Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance tests. Grades 1 and 2.
8. BS EN 60335-2-51 Specification for safety of household and similar electrical appliances. Particular
requirements. Stationary circulation pumps for heating and service water installations.
B. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
C. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
3. The provision of testing data or the carrying out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The motors for Plumbing equipment shall be as described by the Particular Specification, Schedules and
Drawings.
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers in the Vendor List.
B. Each motor shall be of such a size and type to start and drive the equipment under normal conditions of
service and selected such that the power curve does not cross the pump curve at any point (non-
overloading).
C. The motor shall be sized to operate continuously without exceeding the horsepower rating regardless of
the flow and head throughout the entire range of operation.
D. Motors shall be 4-pole totally enclosed fan cooled type (TEFC) operating at a speed of 1450RPM, unless
E. Windings shall have Class ‘F’ insulation and shall be mounted on a common base plate and be connected
to its motor via a shrouded flexible coupling.
F. The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type and rated for continuous operation at ambient
temperature not less than 50oC.
G. Direct drive pumps and their drive motors shall be mounted on a common bedplate.
H. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned and shall be realigned by the Contractor after installation.
I. Where mounted in external air, or highly moisture laden atmosphere, they shall be weatherproof or
separately protected.
J. Motors in hazardous atmospheres shall be flameproof, certified to BS EN 60079.
K. Motors shall comply with other relevant sections of this specification.
L. Nameplates shall be positioned so that they are readable from normal access positions.
M. Motors arranged for automatic starting shall have a label of durable material, not less than 150mm x
100mm in size, permanently affixed in a prominent position and having, in clearly inscribed characters, the
legend: Danger: This motor is automatically controlled and may start without warning. Isolate before
inspection.
N. All final motor selections shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to any equipment being ordered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR

PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Flexible pipe connectors.
2. Expansion joints and compensators.
3. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.
4. Fire piping work.
1. Section 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
a. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to- face length,
live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per meter and per assembly, fundamental
frequency of assembly, braid structure and total number of wires in braid.
b. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion
compensation.
3. Design data: Indicate selection calculations
4. Supplementary product literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the
system.
8. A list of proposed suppliers and subcontractors intended to be used.
9. Preliminary method statement
10. Preliminary quality plan
11. Summary of deviations from the specification
12. Manufacturer’s instructions: Indicate manufacturers installation instructions, special procedures, and
external controls
C. Technical Samples
1. Samples: Submit 2 low pressure compensators 20mm size.
1. Warranties.
frequency. Include adjustment instructions.
B. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors,
and guides.
C. Extra Materials: Supply 2 sets of packing for each packed expansion joint.
a. ASTM A269 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
b. Tubing for General Service.
2. Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, EJMA Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERALS
A. The Expansion fittings and loops for plumbing piping shall be as described by the Particular Specification,
Schedules and Drawings.
B. Flexible Pipe Connectors, Steel Piping
1. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
2. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided stainless steel.
3. Pressure Rating: 862kPa and 232°C.
4. Joint: Flanged.
5. Size: Use pipe sized units.
6. Maximum offset: 20mm on each side of installed center line.
C. Flexible Pipe Connectors, Copper Piping
1. Inner Hose: Bronze.
2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
4. Joint: Flanged.
6. Maximum offset: 20mm on each side of installed center line.
7. Application: Copper piping.
D. Expansion Joints, Stainless Steel Bellows Type
2. Maximum Compression: 45mm.
3. Maximum Extension: 6mm.
4. Joint: Flanged.
6. Application: Steel piping 75mm and under.
E. Expansion Joints, External Ring Controlled Stainless Steel Bellows Type
4. Maximum Offset: 3mm.
5. Joint: Flanged.
7. Accessories: Internal flow liner.
8. Application: Steel piping over 50mm.
F. Expansion Joints, Single Sphere, Elbow Compensator
1. Body: Teflon.
2. Pressure Rating, Sizes 20mm to 50mm: 1040kPa and 99°C.
6. Maximum Elongation: 10mm.
7. Maximum Offset: 10mm.
8. Maximum Angular Movement: 15°.
9. Joint: Tapped steel flanges.
11. Accessories: Control rods.
12. Application: Steel piping 50mm and over.
G. Expansion Joints, 2-Ply Bronze Bellows Type
1. Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides.
5. Joint: Soldered.
7. Application: Copper piping.
H. Expansion Joints, Low Pressure Compensator with 2-Ply Bronze Bellows
1. Working Pressure: 510kPa.
2. Maximum Temperatures: 121°C.
3. Maximum Compression: 12.7mm.
4. Maximum Extension: 4.0mm.
5. Joint: Soldered.
7. Application: Copper or steel piping 75mm and under.
I. Expansion Joints, Steel with Packed Sliding Sleeve
1. Working Pressure and Temperature: Class 150.
2. Joint: Flanged.
4. Application: Steel piping 50mm and over.
J. Expansion Joints, Copper with Packed Sliding Sleeve
1. Working Pressure: 862kPa.
2. Maximum Temperature: 121°C.
3. Joint: Flanged.
5. Application: Copper or steel piping 50mm and over.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLAITON
B. Install in accordance with Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) Standards.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment. Provide line size
flexible connectors.
D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated
equipment and anchor another end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise.
E. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement is directed along axis
of pipe only.
F. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus.
G. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops,
pipe offsets and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
H. Substitute grooved piping for vibration isolated equipment instead of flexible connectors. Grooved piping
need not be anchored.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220519 METERS & GAUGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Flow meters, pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps.
2. Thermometers and thermometer wells, static pressure and filter gauges.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Provide list which indicates use, operating range, total range and location.
system.
8. Preliminary Method Statement.
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 017000 Execution and Closeout Requirement and submit
the following:
1. Warranties.
frequency.
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Pressure Gauges
1. 114mm diameter in metal case, glycerin filled phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement,
brass socket and 1% mid-scale accuracy with front recalibration adjustment, black figures on white
background. Provide brass needle or gate valve.
2. Pressure Ranges
a. For types of Service, Air and water: Pressure Range 0 to 690kPa.
C. Pressure Gauge Taps
1. Provide brass needle or gate valve.
D. Pressure/ Temperature Test Plugs
1. Provide pressure or temperature test plugs. Taps shall be 15mm NPT, brass with Nordel core, Model
710. In addition, supply the Employer with 6 Nos. 125mm stem pocked testing thermometers.
E. Stem Type Thermometers
1. 229mm scale adjustable angle, 0.5°C scale division, mercury-free lens, front tube, cast aluminum case,
brass separable socket or flange with perforated stem, and 80mm extension necks on insulated piping.
2. Thermometers shall be installed as indicated on the Design Drawings.
a. Thermometer wells only shall be installed in like manner.
b. All thermometer wells shall be constructed of brass for copper pipes and stainless steel for steel
pipes. Where installed in insulated piping shall have at least 80mm lagging extension.
c. Pressure temperature ratings of each well shall be suitable for the system in which it is installed. All
wells shall be filled with silicon and be complete with caps and chains.
d. Thermometers and thermometer wells shall have the following insertion lengths:
Insertion Length (mm) Pipe Diameter (mm)

Horizontal Piping and Vertical 80 100 125 150 >=200
Piping below 1.8m
Location 65` 65 65 125 125
Vertical Piping above 1.8m 125 125 125 125 200
e. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than indicated to meet manufacturer's standard.
Required ranges in degrees Celsius.
1) Chilled Water: -18°C to 40°C.
2) Heat Recovery: -18°C to 40°C.
3) Heating Water: 0°C to 115°C.
4) Domestic Cold Water: 10°C to 40°C.
5) Domestic Hot Water: 50°C to 65°C.
F. Water Flow Meters
1. Water flow meters shall be provided with a straight reading, dry dial, hermetically sealed register and
magnetic drive. The rotation of the turbine is directly transmitted to the register, and magnetic drive.
2. The meters shall have totalization of flow volume in cubic meter (m³).
3. The meter shall conform to the regulations of the Utility Authority having jurisdiction and shall connect
to the BMS for remote monitoring/ reading.
4. The Contractor shall allow for all water meters to be connected to the BMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install flow meters according to manufacturer's installation instructions. Allow minimum straight length of
10 pipe diameters upstream of metering station and 5 pipe diameters downstream.
B. Provide 2 pressure gauges per pump installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of
pump. Pipe to gauge.
C. Enlarge pipes smaller than 80mm for installation of thermometer wells.
D. Apply thermal grease in thermo wells prior to installation of thermometers.
E. Include supports for meters, gauges and thermometers as needed.
F. Application
1. Flow Metering Stations:
a. Potable cold water as indicated in the Particular Specification and the Design Drawings and as
required for flow control.
2. Pressure Gauges and Taps:
a. Pumps.
b. Piping risers and distribution.
c. PRV stations.
d. Pressure vessels.
e. Expansion tanks.
G. Stem-Type Thermometers:
a. Expansion tank.
H. Pressure/ Temperature Taps:
a. All automatic control and pressure reducing valves on inlets and outlets.
b. Pump inlets and outlets.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERALS
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Valves for Plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMIITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate valve and pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details and piping
connections.
2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
system.
1. Warranties.
frequency. Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.
3. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
B. Extra Materials: Provide 2-valve stem packing for each size and type of valve installed.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of specific
equipment being supplied.
B. Qualifications: Execute Work of this Section only by skilled tradesmen employed by a qualified Plumbing
Subcontractor and regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing equipment.
C. Valves: Provide manufacturer's name, size and pressure rating marked on valve body.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
5. European Commission, EC Standards.
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labelling in place.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECITON
B. General, Valves for Plumbing Services
1. Provide for the installation of sufficient valves, cocks and strainer at appropriate locations to enable the
system to operate to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. No asbestos containing materials shall be employed in any valve.
3. Valves shall bear the BSI Kitemark or equivalent denoting Quality System, accreditation and
compliance with British Standards and where no Kitemark scheme exists, valves shall be manufactured
under an approved BS EN ISO 9001 Quality System. All valves should be from 1 source and 1
manufacturer.
4. In general, all valves of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. All gate, globe, angle, swing
check and butterfly valves as a group shall be by the same manufacturer.
5. All castings shall be clean close grained metal free from rough projections.
6. Unless otherwise specified, valves of 50mm nominal bore and under shall have female ends screwed to
BS 21 and valves 65mm nominal bore and over shall have flanged ends.
7. Special care shall be exercised in the installation of screwed valves to avoid straining their bodies and
preventing the gate or seat from closing tight. The wrench shall always be applied to the side being
attached to the pipe. When attaching pipe to a valve already in place, a second wrench shall be used
to hold the valve while the pipe is being tightened. A pipe shall not be screwed so far into a valve as to
damage the seat.
8. Flanged valves shall have matching flanges manufactured in accordance with BS EN 1092-1.
Composite flanges in accordance with BS EN 1092-1 shall be used when butterfly or other 'inside bolt
circle' valves are installed in copper pipe work systems.
9. All valves which contain copper alloy shall be gunmetal or capable of withstanding dezincification.
10. All valves on potable water services shall be approved by the Utility Authority having jurisdiction and
WRc Approved.
11. Butterfly valves shall be used for size 65mm and above.
C. Isolating Valves
1. For sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze in accordance with BS 5154, MSS SP-80, Class-150,
and PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa. Valves shall be complete with position indicator
and locking device, asbestos free gland packing, with non- rising stem, threaded bonnet, WRc
approved or equivalent, 1-piece wedge and BS 21 taper thread, ISO 7. Valves shall be kitemarked or
acceptable equivalent.
2. For sizes 65mm and above shall be WRc approved ductile iron butterfly valve in accordance with BS EN
593 PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa. Ductile iron body epoxy coated fully lugged
stainless steel disc EPDM liner. Valves sizes up to DN 250 shall have regulating lever. Valves DN 250
and larger shall be supplied with fully enclosed gear operator and memory stop.
D. Regulating Valves
1. Sizes up to and including 50mm valves shall be of the DZR variable orifice double regulating, in
accordance with BS 7350 PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa, non-rising stem, screwed
bonnet, parabolic regulating disc, double regulating (memory stop) device, supplied with 2 test points.
The end connections shall be threaded in accordance with BS 21 (taper), (parallel) and NPT. Valves
shall be kitemarked or acceptable equivalent.
2. Sizes 65mm and above, shall be ductile iron variable orifice double regulating valve, in accordance with
BS 7350 PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa. And shall be with non-rising stem, bolted
bonnet, double regulating (memory stop) device, end connections flanged in accordance with BS EN
1092-1 / ANSI 150. Valves shall be kitemarked or acceptable equivalent.
E. Strainers
1. Strainers, in addition to where indicated on Design Drawings, shall be fitted upstream of all major
items of plant.
2. Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze in accordance with BS EN 1982 LG2 "Y" type strainer
PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa. WRc approved or acceptable equivalent, with Type-
304 perforated stainless steel 40 mesh screen. Strainer shall be with screwed cap and BS 21 taper
threaded, ISO 7.
3. Sizes 65mm and above, shall be cast iron in accordance with BS EN 1562 Grade-220, PN16 for working
pressure in excess to 1,333kPa and shall be flanged in accordance with BS EN 1092-3 PN16/ ANSI
Class-125/ Class-150.
4. Standards screens:
a. For Sizes 50-80mm: Hole Diameter 1.2mm.
b. For Sizes 100-450mm: Hole Diameter 3.0mm.
F. Non-Return Valves
1. Non-return valves shall be fitted where plant operates on an automatic changeover basis or where
flow reversal can occur.
2. Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze in accordance with BS EN 1982 LG2 check valve in
accordance with BS 5154 PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa. Kitemarked or acceptable
equivalent, horizontal swing pattern with threaded cover, nitrile disk, and shall be suitable for
mounting in horizontal and vertical pipe, with vertical flow upwards, end threaded internal BS 21, ISO
7.
3. Sizes 65mm and above shall be ductile iron check valves with lever and air cushion in accordance with
BS EN 12334 PN16 for working pressure in excess to 1,333kPa, of the horizontal swing pattern with
bolted cover, outside lever and air cushion, zinc-free bronze trim and rubber faced disk and flanged in
accordance with BS EN 1092-1 N16 and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical
pipelines.
G. Float Valves
1. Float valves shall be installed as indicated in the Particular Specification and on Design Drawings to
provide consistent level control in reserve supply water storage tanks. The valve shall meet the
requirements of the water By-laws for air gaps and shall be constructed throughout in WRc approved
or acceptable equivalent materials and shall prevent back siphonage. Inlet flow shall be coaxial with
the piston movement, to ensure high discharge capacity and smooth, quiet operation. The valve shall
have 'O' ring piston seals, resilient seated disk, dezincification resistant bronze body and disk
components. All floats shall be manufactured in copper to BS EN 1652 and fabricated using WRc
approved solder and shall be hydraulically tested to ensure buoyancy and constructed in accordance
with BS 1968. Bronze equilibrium float valves up to 75mm and above shall be flanged end in
accordance with BS EN 1092-1 PN16.
H. Drain/ Gland Cocks
1. Drain cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants and as indicated in the Particular
Specification and the Design Drawings.
2. Drain cocks shall be of the hose union pattern gland cock in bronze BS EN 1982 LG2. WRc approved or
acceptable equivalent, asbestos free gland packing and shall be threaded in accordance with BS 21
complete with captive cap. The plugs shall have square head with a slot to indicated plug position.
I. Flow Measurement
1. For the purpose of the flow and temperature measurement and the proportional balancing of water
distribution system, the Subcontractor shall provide a digital microprocessor, flow measurement test
set and shall be suitable for portable or bench mounted use.
J. Air Vents
1. Air bottles shall be made from pipeline size tubing each approximately 230mm long fitted with a cap
and 8mm size air cock. They shall be fitted at equal tees. Where an air bottle is fixed out of reach, an
8mm copper extension tube shall be run from the cap to within 1.5m of the floor, in a position agreed
with the Engineer terminating with an 8mm needle seated key-operating air cock.
2. Automatic air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, nonferrous or stainless steel floats and guides
and non-corrodible valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall have an integral lock shield valve.
Air release pipes shall be run to discharge at a visible position agreed with the Engineer. The air release
pipe work shall be 8mm nominal bore soft copper which shall be clipped neatly to the structure.
K. Temperature and Pressure Gauges
1. Gauges shall be the Bourdon pattern having 100mm diameter dials with black enameled steel case and
dust proof, chromium plated bezel. Gauges shall have indicating black pointed and loose red index
pointer. Pressure gauges shall be installed in pipework or equipment using mild steel connector pipes
incorporating 10mm diameter copper alloy cocks with union tailpieces. Pipework connections shall be
15mm or 10mm nominal bore with welding or screwed sockets.
2. Temperature or thermometer pockets shall be stainless steel or nonferrous metal with 15mm nominal
bore screwed heads and a packet length giving a 75mm immersion depth. Pockets shall be screwed
into 15mm nominal bore mild steel sockets welded to the pipe work. All pockets shall be filled with
suitable heat conductive graphite oil.
3. Pockets in pipework up to 80mm nominal bore shall be installed in bends. Where pockets are installed
in pipework 32mm nominal bore and below the pipework shall be locally increased in cross-sectional
area to accommodate the pockets.
4. Pockets in pipe work 100mm nominal bore and above shall be installed direct into pipework.
Thermometers shall be linear scaled, filled system type, gas filled unless otherwise indicated and in full
accordance with BS EN 13190.
L. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs
1. Plugs shall be of brass construction and shall be fitted into a 15mm B.S.P. female boss. Plugs shall be
supplied complete with cap.
M. Pressure Relief Valves
1. Relief valves shall be ASME rated, direct spring loaded type, lever operated, non- adjustable factory set
discharge pressure.
2. Select valve to suit the actual system pressure and temperature.
3. Pressure relief valves shall be from a manufacturer in the Vendor List.
N. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Pressure reducing valves shall be fitted to reduce a higher inlet pressure to a constant downstream
pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/ or varying inlet pressure.
2. Provide pressure reducing valves where indicated on Design Drawings to maintain leaving pressures
directly off the main risers to a floor or zone at maximum 250kPa to 300kPa unless otherwise indicated
in the Particular Specification or on Design Drawings.
3. Construction:
a. Connections shall be line size.
b. Bronze body.
c. Stainless steel trim.
d. Pressure reducing valves shall be from a manufacturer in the Vendor List.
e. Valves shall be a single seated, line pressure operated, diaphragm actuated, pilot controlled globe
valve.
f. Valves shall seal by means of a corrosion resistance seat and resilient rectangular seat disc. These
and other parts shall be replaceable in the field.
g. All such service and adjustments shall be possible without removing the valve from the line.
h. The stem of the basis valve shall be guided top and bottom by integral bushings.
i. The basis valve and its control system shall contain no packing glands or stuffing boxes.
j. The diaphragm shall not be used as a seating surface, nor shall the pistons be used as an
operating medium.
k. All internal and exterior ferrous surfaces shall be coated with a high quality, 2-part epoxy primer
and the exterior to then receive a coat of baked enamel paint.
l. The pilot control system shall consist of a 2-way, normally open, direct acting, adjustable spring
loaded, diaphragm-actuated pressure reducing pilot. The stem shall be guided between the
diaphragm and the seat disc. The pilot control shall be field adjustable with the pressure range of
the spring specified; adjustment shall not exceed a 6:1 ratio.
m. Other control components shall include an ejector, flow control valve, a Y-strainer and 2 ball "stop"
valves for isolating the control system form the main valve.
n. Valves shall be operationally and hydrostatically tested prior to shipping and shall carry 1 year
limited warranty against failure due to defects in workmanship or materials.
o. The basis valves shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126/ B rated for 125 Class with ANSI
flanged connections. Valves shall be capable of operating from 0°C to 80°C ambient.
p. Valves shall be capable of reducing the line pressure as scheduled in the Particular Specification
and on the Design Drawings.
O. Air Separator
1. Separator shall be tangential type with line size inlet and outlet connections.
2. Separator shall be welded steel with red oxide paint finish, constructed, tested and labeled in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for a working pressure of 862kPa.
3. Separator shall be complete with drain connection and air venting fitting.
4. Separator shall have a removable stainless steel strainer with 4.76mm diameter perforations with a free
area of not less than 5 times the connecting pipe cross sectional area.
P. Vacuum Breakers
1. Provide threaded vacuum breakers with ball, spring, O-ring flexible seat and screen.
2. Ball shall be Type-440 stainless steel and seat shall be EPR.
3. Spring shall be Type-316 stainless steel, screen and cap shall be Type-304 stainless steel and threaded
collar shall be Type-416 stainless steel.
4. Brass body.
5. Vacuum breakers shall be from a manufacturer in the Vendor List.
Q. Hose Bibs
1. Bronze or red brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout.
2. Hose Bibs shall be from a manufacturer in the Vendor List.
R. Back Flow Preventors
1. Provide reduced pressure back flow preventors with 1200kPa working pressure at 60°C temperature
rating, separate strainer and gate valves.
2. 50mm and smaller shall be all bronze, threaded end, with ball valve shut off tested and certified.
3. 65mm and larger shall be ductile epoxy coated body, bronze trim, flanged end, tested and certified.
S. All flanged valves shall be epoxy coated both internally and externally in order to prevent corrosion and
pitting.
T. All valves for the domestic water system shall be approved for use on potable water systems. Valves shall
be WRc approved or acceptable equivalent.
U. The pressure rating of all valves shall be selected to match the pressure in the system at the location the
valve is to be installed.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERA
A. Triple Duty Valves
1. Furnish and install as indicated in the Particular Specification and on the Design Drawings a straight
pattern cut grooved valve designed to perform the functions of a non slam check valve, throttling
valve, shut-off valve and calibrated balancing valve. Verify that the nominal pressure of the selected
valve is not less than 1.5 times the static head on the valve.
2. The valve shall be of heavy duty ductile iron standard cut grooved connections suitable for working
pressure 20 bar connections for operating temperature up to 121°C. The valve shall be fitted with a
bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc EPDM seat insert, stainless steel stem, and chatter preventing
stainless steel spring.
3. The valve design shall permit repacking under full system pressure.
4. Each valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves readings integral check valve to facilitate taking
differential pressure with across the orifice for accurate system balance.
5. As an alternative to the triple duty valve, the use of check valve, shut-off valve and balancing valve as
specified is also acceptable.
B. Suction Diffusers
1. Furnish and install as indicated in the Particular Specification and on Design Drawings an angle pattern
flow straightening fitting equipped with a combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder, flow
straightening vanes, start-up strainer, permanent magnet and adjustable support foot.
2. The combination diffuser-strainer-orifice shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to

the system pump shut off head and shall be with a free area equal to 5 times the cross section area of
the pump suction opening.
3. The length of the flow straightening vanes shall be no less than 2½ times the diameter of the system
pump suction connection.
4. The flow-straightening fitting shall be of cast iron construction with flanged system and flanged pump
connections.
5. The fitting shall have a carbon steel combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with 5mm diameter
perforations to protect the system pump.
6. The full-length carbon steel flow straightening vanes shall provide non-turbulent flow to the suction
side of the system pump.
7. The magnet shall be positioned in the flow of stream to protect the pump seal(s).
8. The start-up strainer shall be of 16-mesh bronze, and the adjustable support foot shall eliminate pipe
strain at the flow fitting/ pump connection. All internal components shall be replaceable.
9. Verify that the nominal pressure of the selected suction diffuser is not less than 1.5 times the static
head on the valve.
10. As an alternative to the suction diffuser, the use of strainer and shut-off valve is acceptable.
C. Thermostatic Mixing Valves
1. The valve shall control the domestic hot water designed with a hot water return pipe work and shall
automatically control temperature of the hot water that circulates through the valve. Thus the thermal
balance is ensured throughout the hot water system. The valve shall have an adjustable scale between
37°C and 65°C. The valve shall be equipped with a bypass located outside the thermal part of the
valve.
2. Group TMV shall be provided where more supply is to more than one appliance.
3. The valve shall be coated with tin/ nickel and having the following technical data:
a. Valve Body: DR Brass.
b. Springs: Stainless steel.
c. O-rings: EPDM.
d. Accuracy: ±2°C < 100kPa Dp.
e. Recommended Differential Pressure: 3kPa to 10kPa.
f. Max. Differential Pressure: 100kPa.
g. Max. Static Pressure: 1000kPa.
h. Pressure Range: PN16.
D. Mixing Valves
1. The valve shall be a failsafe mixing valve for domestic hot and cold water. If the cold water fails, the
valve shuts off the hot water supply within 4 seconds. The mixed water temperature is set by turning
the control knob towards (+) to obtain higher temperatures, towards (-) to obtain lower temperatures.
The temperature setting of the valve is locked by dismantling the handle and turning it 180°C. Then
replace the handle.
a. Valve Body: Brass.
b. Springs: Stainless steel.
c. O-rings: EPDM.
d. Pressure Range:
1) Max. Pressure: 10 Bar.
2) Min. Pressure: 0.2 Bar.
3) Max. Pressure Ratio: 5:1 (hot: cold or cold: hot).
e. Temperature Range:
1) Mixed Water Temperature 30°C to 60°C.
2) Hot Water Temperature 50°C to 80°C.
3) Cold Water Temperature 5°C to 30°C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
B. Prepare valve connections to pipes and equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to
Installation.
B. Provide gate valves for shut-off or isolating service.
C. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Division 01 General Re- quirements,
B. Section Includes
1. Supports, anchors and seals
1. Architectural Specification
3. Section 210548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment.
5. Section 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 013300 Submittal Procedures and submit the fol-
lowing.
1. Submit information as required for support and anchorage to the structure for the equipment,
conduits, piping and ductwork.
1. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings listing all related components of method of connections.
a. Provide brace detail(s), brace connection to system detail(s), and to structure detail(s) and seismic
brace spacing or layout details, and attachment to structural steel details, and support details.
2. Submit, prior to installation, data identifying the various supports to structure connections and seismic
brace structure connections based on coordinated Shop Drawings. Submittal data shall identify the
following:
a. Location of connections.
b. Numerical identification of maximum allowable design value of connecting method.
c. Numerical value of applied load or reaction to the building structure.
d. Type of connection, for example, vertical support, vertical support with bracing.
e. Bracing reaction type, for example, tension only, tension and compression.
3. Product data on materials and components for use.
4. All anchors, inserts or connections to the structure shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance.
Submittal review and/ or acceptance by the Engineer shall not constitute compliance or usability.
system.
11. Preliminary Quality Plan
12. Summary of deviations from the Specifications
1. Warranties.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
A. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of specific
B. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
or specified in the Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the following
standards and codes. The current editions of the publications listed below form a part of this Section.
b. international Plumbing Code, IPC.
c. International Mechanical Code, IMC.
2. American Society of Civil Engineers, ASCE Standards.
C. Suspended piping, ductwork and equipment shall be attached to the structure, supported by and
seismically braced in accordance with the requirements of Section 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls
for HVAC.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Pipe Isolators
1. Provide each hanger or clamp for uninsulated piping with a metal-backed pipe isolating material to
isolate sound vibration and electrolysis. Black tape shall not be acceptable. Isolators shall not be
required for waste, vent, gas and downspout piping.
C. Hanger Rods, General
1. Provide steel hanger rods, appropriately threaded. Provide connection points with jamb nuts or double
nuts.
D. Pipe Hangers and Supports, General
1. Multi-purpose pipe saddles shall be used on pipe sizes 32mm and larger.
2. Miscellaneous hangers, anchors and supports, not detailed on or reference by the Contract
Documents, shall be designed by the Subcontractor to support the combined weight of the pipe, fluid
and pipe insulation and shall have a safety factor of at least 5, based on the ultimate tensile strength of
the material used. Calculation and sketches shall be submitted with signature and stamped by a
Structural Engineer licensed by the Country in which the project is located for review.
3. Provide Type-HP hangers at the first 3 support locations from the equipment.
E. For Non-Seismic Bracing Applications: Provide the following.
1. Duct Hangers and Supports:
a. Provide in accordance with IMC and SMACNA Standards.
b. Provide galvanized steel angles, channels, straps, rods, etc. for duct support. Do not use raw steel.
2. Pipe hangers and Supports
a. Hangers for Uninsulated Steel or Copper Pipe: All sizes: An adjustable wrought steel clevis with
spaced tube, copper-plated for copper piping.
b. Hangers for Cold insulated Steel or Copper Pipe: All sizes: An adjustable wrought steel clevis, sized
to suit 360° high-density insulation insert.
c. Hangers for Hot insulated Steel or Copper Pipe: All Sizes: An adjustable wrought steel clevis, sized
to suit 180°, 20 gauge galvanized metal insulation saddle, 300mm long
d. Hangers for insulated Steel Steam Pipe: Size 65mm and larger. Adjustable roller hanger with steel
yoke and cast iron roller, with welded insulation protection saddle, size to accommodate
insulation.
e. High Density Insulation Inserts: For pipes 65mm and larger use 360° calcium silicate (waterproofed
for chilled water) inserts having a lap jointed 360° sheet metal protective sleeve. Thickness of
insert shall match pipe covering/ insulation thickness. All inserts shall have an independent lab
certified break, crack and/or crush strength equal to or greater than 5 times the applied load. Do
not use inserts at brace connection locations without prior written acceptance from to inserts from
the Engineer. Submit copies of insert-manufacturer’s independent lab test reports. Replace all
cracked, damaged and/or non-compliance inserts at no additional cost to Employer.
f. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers; Steel channels or angles with welded spacers and hanger rods, sized
to support load.
g. Wall support for Pipe, Sizes up to 80mm: Cast iron hooks
h. Wall Support for Pipe, Sizes 100mm and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp,
adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe, sizes 125mm and larger.
i. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp
j. Floor and Roof Support for Hot Pipe, Sizes to 100mm, and all cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange and concrete pier or steel support.
k. Floor and Roof Support for Hot Pipe. Sizes 150mm and larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand,
steel screws and concrete pier or steel support.
l. Beam clamps for pipe hangers shall be complete with safety straps.
m. Design hangers to impede disengagement by movement of supported pipe.
n. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide isolator between
hanger or support and piping.
o. Provide angels or channels to span joints and distribute load.
p. Do not use wire for either temporary or permanent hanger or support purposes.
F. For Seismic Bracing Applications refer to Section 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.
G. Pipe Hangers and Supports
1. Provide miscellaneous steel members, including but not limited to beams and brackets forsupport of
work in this Division, unless specifically included in other Divisions
2. Use felt pad vibration isolators in lieu of copper plating on steel hangers for copper piping.
3. Maximum hanger and support spacing for horizontal piping, on centers, shall not exceed the spacing
listed in the table below. In all cases, avoid concentrating hangers. Evenly distribute the load on the
structural framing system
4. Minimum rod size shall be no less than the size listed in the table below.
5. Minimum Pipe Support Spacing and Hanger Rod Sizes
Nominal Pipe Diameter Copper Steel Plastic Minimum Rod Size
mm Inch m ft m ft m ft mm
12 0.5 1.22 4 1.50 5 .91 3 10
20 0 .75 1.83 6 1.83 6 .91 3 10
25 1 1.83 6 2.13 7 .91 3 10
32 1.25 1.83 6 2.74 9 1.22 4 10
38 1.5 1.83 6 2.74 10 1.22 4 10
50 2 3.05 10 3.05 10 1.22 4 10
64 2.5 3.05 10 3.05 10 1.50 5 12.7
76 3 3.05 10 3.66 12 1.50 5 12.7
100 4 3.05 10 4.57 15 1.50 5 16
125 5 3.05 10 4.88 16 1.83 6 16
150 6 3.05 10 5.18 17 1.83 6 19
200 8 3.05 10 5.79 19 2.13 7 22
250 10 3.05 10 6.70 22 2.13 7 22
300 12 4.88 16 7.00 23 2.44 8 22
350 14 4.88 16 7.62 25 2.44 8 25
400 16 5.12 17 8.23 27 2.74 9 25
450 18 5.12 17 8.53 28 2.74 9 32
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inserts and Drill-In Anchors
1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete
beams wherever practicable. All inserts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and ADCM requirements.
2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete for inserts
carrying pipe over 102mm in diameter or ducts over 1524mm wide.
3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.
4. Locate expansion shields in concrete beams a minimum of 152mm above bottom of beam.
5. Do not use friction spring-type clips.
6. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable after piping is erected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports
1. Support horizontal steel and copper piping per IPC Requirement and requirements of the Civil Defence
Authority having jurisdiction.
2. Support piping joined with grooved couplings in accordance with coupling manufacturer's installation
guidelines.
3. Where pipes are seismically braced, support and brace pipes in accordance with SMACNA or approved
system.
4. Install hangers to provide minimum 12.7mm clear space between finished covering and adjacent work.
Unbraced piping and duct shall conform to the latest code.
5. Support piping within 610mm at each change in direction, at ends of branches, at base and top of
risers, pipes and drops, and wherever necessary to prevent sag, bending or vibration in addition to the
above listed hanger spacing.
6. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 38.1mm minimum after piping is erected.
7. Support horizontal soil pipe on both sides of each joint, with 1524mm maximum spacing between
hangers.
8. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support vertical soil pipe at each floor at joint.
9. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple individual
hangers or trapeze hangers.
10. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
11. Support nonmetallic piping with a sufficient number of hangers to prevent sagging and misalignment.
12. Provide supports and miscellaneous metal such as steel plates, brackets, metal framing, bolts, nuts and
etc. Where exposed to weather, material shall be hot dipped galvanized.
13. Vertical piping shall be supported top and bottom. Equipment shall not be used to support piIing.
14. Install hanger on insulated piping in a manner that does not damage insulation. Provide steel pipe
saddles as required to protect pipe covering. Pipe hangers on insulated piping shall be installed on
the outside of the insulation and not in contact with the pipe, except at seismic pipe bracing when
required. The insulation shall be protected by an 18 gauge galvanized steel shield.
B. Duct Hangers and Supports
1. Where ducts are not seismically braced, use duct hangers, supports and installation in accordance with
SMACNA Standards.
2. Specific details indicated on the Design Drawings shall take precedence over the accepted system.
C. Priming
1. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipes
shafts and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
D. Flashing
1. Flash and counter flash where mechanical equipment passes through weather or waterproofed walls,
floors and roofs.
2. Provide 305mm minimum height curbs for roof-mounted mechanical equipment. Flash and counter
flash with galvanized steel, soldered and waterproofed.
E. Sleeves
1. Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work. Provide suitable reinforcing around sleeves.
2. Where piping or ductwork passes through floor, ceiling or non-fire-rated wall, close off space between
pipe or duct and construction with noncombustible insulation. Provide tight-fitting metal caps on both
sides and caulk.
3. Install chrome-plated escutcheons where piping passes through finished surfaces.
4. Provide pipe sleeves for all mechanical piping.
5. Sleeve pipe shall be adequate to receive both pipe and insulation passing through concrete or
masonry walls or concrete slabs.
6. Seal pipes passing through walls or slabs: Use mastic or oakum seal in the annular space in non-fire
rated walls.
7. Insulated pipe shall be insulated in sleeves, sealed and pointed as above.
8. Install sleeves on pipes as they are being hung, ready for proper placement in wall as wall is being
constructed.
9. Where sleeves have been inadvertently omitted in concrete floors, provide requisite pipe opening by
using properly sized diamond core drills after coordination with the Engineer. Areas located below
drilling operations shall be protected from possible damage.
F. Seismic Restraints
1. Install seismic restraints for pipes, flues, ductworks and equipment in accordance with the above listed
codes and guidelines.
2. Design and install restraints to prevent permanent displacement in any direction caused by lateral
motion, overturning or uplift.
3. Install approved resilient restraining devices as required to prevent flues, ducts and piping motion in
excess of 8mm.
4. Make no rigid connections between equipment, pipes and ducts and building structure that degrade
noise and vibration isolation systems.
5. Coordinate seismic bracing requirements with other sections to result in:
G. Seismic Bracing Installation
1. Piping and Ductwork:
a. Install all bracing and restraints in accordance with referenced "Guidelines".
b. Coordinate seismic bracing and restraints so that required thermal expansion provisions are not
restricted.
c. Provide floor support and bracing of pipe risers in pipe chases and connection risers to
equipment.
2. Flexibly Supported Piping and Ducts:
a. Install and locate restraints to allow normal operation of systems without transmitting vibrations
to building structure.
b. Location of restraints: In accordance with referenced "Guidelines" as specified in this Section.
c. Construction of Restraints: Steel cables, installed slack.
3. Rigidly Mounted Equipment:
a. Secure to floor as required to prevent horizontal motion and overturning
b. Secure to walls or other equipment to prevent overturning.
1) Attach to elements capable of taking calculated seismic loads.
2) Provide steel backing in walls as required to brace equipment and piping from wall.
A. Inspection of bracing devices by manufacturer’s representative of bracing devices and pre-engineered

seismic bracing system.
B. Make all correction recommended by the manufacturer’s representative.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

PLUMBING PIPING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Inertia bases.
2. Vibration isolators.
3. Seismic restraints.
2. Division 22 Plumbing
3. Specification Section 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping And Equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit information as required for support and anchorage to the structure and seismic control for all
the equipment, piping and ductwork.
1. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings listing all related components of method of connections.
a. Provide brace detail(s), brace connection to system detail(s), and to structure detail(s) and seismic
brace spacing or layout details, and attachment to structural steel details, and support details.
2. Submit, prior to installation, data identifying the various supports to structure connections and seismic
brace structure connections based on coordinated Shop Drawings. Submittal data shall identify the
following:
3. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.
system.
12. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting
dimensions.
13. Calculations prepared and signed by Subcontractor’s licensed Structural Engineer registered in the
Country in which the project is located and knowledgeable in Seismic Design
a. Calculations required for supports and bracing for:
1) Sizes and situations not covered by referenced Guidelines of pre-engineered Systems.
2) Where layout differs from design for which calculations are prepared by Licensed Structural
Engineer
3) Include horizontal and vertical reaction loads at connections to building structures for all
seismic restraints, including those covered by referenced Guidelines. Coordinate reaction
loads and attachment details with Licensed Structural Engineer.
C. Submit letter signed by Subcontractor's Structural Engineer performing seismic load calculations in
conformance with this Section, confirming the following items:
1. That the Subcontractor's Structural Engineer has performed calculations for each seismic restraint not
covered by referenced Guidelines and pre-engineered seismic bracing systems as part of this Contract.
2. That the Subcontractor's Structural Engineer has performed calculations for reaction loads to the
building structure for all seismic restraints, including those covered by referenced Guidelines.
3. That the Subcontractor's Structural Engineer has coordinated his bracing layout, reaction loads and
details of structural attachments with work of other trades
4. That the Subcontractor's Structural Engineer has confirmed that proposed system of seismic bracing is
fully compatible with building structure.
5. That a copy of calculations and layout drawings for seismic bracing shall be maintained on
the following:
1. Warranties.
frequency.
A. Provide a Third Party Professional Engineer certified to carry out review of the Seismic Design and having
as minimum 10 years of previous experience in similar projects and appointed by the Subcontractor in
accordance with the requirements specified under this Section to review the Shop Drawings and design,
inspection and audit reports and any other requirements stipulated by the requirements of Section 220548
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing.
b. International Plumbing Code, IPC.
c. International Mechanical Code, IMC.
2. American Society of Civil Engineers, ASCE Standards.
C. Suspended equipment, piping and ductwork shall be attached to the structure, supported by and
seismically braced in accordance with the most current revision of one of the following seismic bracing
system in accordance with the International Building Code (IBC) and ASCE 7 using design parameters as
indicated in the structural design Contract Documents.
1. Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Guidelines for Suspended Piping, Ductwork, Electrical Systems and
Floor Mounted Equipment.
2. International Seismic Application Technology's (ISAT) Seismic Design Manuals, for seismic restraint
system requirements.
3. Seismic bracing system by Unistrut Corporation.
4. Seismic bracing system by Cooper B-Line.
3. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests shall not relieve the Contractor of his
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 INERTIA BASES
A. Structural Bases
1. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets to support equipment and motor, with
motor slide rails.
2. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine and to transmit design
loads to isolators and snubbers.
B. Concrete Inertia Bases
1. Construction: Structural steel channel perimeter frame, with gusseted brackets and anchor bolts,
reinforcing, concrete filled.
2. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.
4. Concrete: Minimum 20mPa concrete.
2.3 VIBRARTION ISOLATORS
A. Open Spring Isolators
1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75% vertical stiffness, with working deflection between
0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity.
2. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 6mm thick neoprene sound pads and zinc
chromate plated hardware.
3. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 1.2mm; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators.
4. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
B. Restrained Open Spring Isolators
2. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 6mm thick neoprene sound pads and zinc
chromate plated hardware.
3. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 1.2mm; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators.
4. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.
C. Closed Spring Isolators
1. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.
3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators and
neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 7mm clearance.
D. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators
1. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.
3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators and
neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 7mm clearance and limit stops
E. Spring Hanger
2. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators.
3. Misalignment: Capable of 20° hanger rod misalignment.
F. Neoprene Pad Isolators
1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads:
a. Hardness: 30 durometer.
b. thickness: Minimum 13mm.
c. Maximum Loading: 345kPa.
d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width.
2. Configuration: Single layer.
3. Configuration: 13mm thick waffle pads bonded each side of 6mm thick steel plate.
G. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 10mm deflection with threaded insert.
H. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber.
I. Seismic Snubbers
1. Type: Non-directional and double acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by
neoprene elements.
2. Elements: Replaceable neoprene, minimum of 18mm thick with minimum 3mm air gap.
3. Capacity: 4 times load assigned to mount groupings at 10mm deflection.
4. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding 3 times rated load capacity of seismic
snubber.
J. Roof Mounting Curb: 350mm high with rigid steel lower section containing adjustable spring pockets with
restrained spring isolators, steel upper section to support rooftop equipment and continuous elastomeric
membrane extending from upper section for counter-flashing over roofing. Provide acoustical package
consisting of interior perimeter angles and cross members to support up to 2 No. layers of gypsum board.
2.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. For Seismic Bracing Applications: Provide the following.
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports
a. Provide in accordance with one of the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing systems.
b. Hangers for single hanger supported piping shall be steel clevis type with spaced tube.
c. Hangers shall be designed and installed to allow for a minimum 40mm of vertical adjustment.
d. Hangers, supports and insulation for conditions which involve thermal and/or building expansion
and contraction shall be engineered based on actual field conditions. Hangers shall be designed
and installed to allow to vertical adjustment.
e. Trapeze supported piping shall be attached to strut channel framing or a structurally engineered
trapeze hanger support as indicated in the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing systems.
f. Items supported by trapeze hangers shall be properly attached at each trapeze location.
g. Hangers and vertical support rods shall be sized and spaced according to the referenced pre-
engineered seismic bracing systems.
h. Hangers shall be secured top and bottom by a double nut assembly to the threaded support
rod(s).
i. Provide a protective barrier between non-compatible dissimilar metals.
j. High density insulation inserts shall not be used at piping seismic attachment locations unless
indicated otherwise in the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing systems.
2. Select and utilize one of the referenced pre-engineered seismic bracing systems for application
throughout the project. Mixing of different types of seismic bracing system shall not be accepted.
3. Application of pre-engineered seismic bracing systems shall be as follows:
a. Designed, engineered and built by the system Subcontractor. Based on the use of one of seismic
bracing systems listed above. These details and seismic bracing Shop Drawings shall be reviewed
and accepted by the Engineer before installation.
b. Select components for struts, strut clamps, strut fittings, strut nuts, hangers, pipe clamps, steel
cable restraints and hardware, in accordance with the selected pre- engineered seismic bracing
system.
c. Once a pre-engineered seismic bracing system is selected for the project and accepted by the
Engineer, the system shall be used for the entire project within a given mechanical system. For
example, if Mason industries the seismic restraint system or acceptable equivalent is used for
ductwork seismic bracing throughout the project. Mixing of different seismic bracing systems shall
not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Bases:
1. Set steel bases for 25mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 50mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
3. Adjust equipment level.
C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.
D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from
installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied,
adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0inches WC, 1.5kPa static pressure and
on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
F. Provide seismic snubbers for all equipment, piping and ductwork mounted on isolators. Each inertia base
shall have minimum of 4 seismic snubbers located close to isolators. Snub equipment designated for post-
disaster use to 1.5mm maximum clearance. Other snubbers shall have clearance between 4mm and 7mm.
G. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for
scheduled distance.
1. Up to 100mm Pipe Size: First 3 points of support.
2. 125 to 200mm Pipe Size: First 4 points of support.
3. 250mm Pipe Size and Over: First 6 points of support.
4. Select 3 hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 25mm static deflection or static deflection
of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25mm static deflection or ½ static
deflection of isolated equipment.
H. Pipe Isolation Schedule
Pipe Minimum Distance From Equipment

Diameter (Pipe Diameters)
(mm)
25 120
50 90
80 80
100 75
150 60
200 60
250 54
300 50
400 45
600 38
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Pipe Markers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for plumbing identification.
2. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, Location, function
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
3. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
11. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
1. Samples: Submit 2 labels 150mm x 150mm in size.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
a. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
identification being supplied.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME Standards: ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification
of Piping Systems.
2. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards: BS 1710: Specification for identification of pipelines and services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers within the Vendor List.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Unless otherwise required by the Utility Company having Jurisdiction:
B. Description: Laminated 3-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 6mm.
3. Background Color: Black.
2.3 TAGS
A. Unless otherwise required by the Utility Company having Jurisdiction.
B. Plastic Tags: Laminated 3-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color
Tag size minimum 40mm diameter.
C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters. Tag size minimum 40mm diameter with smooth edges.
1. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Unless otherwise required by the Utility Company having Jurisdiction
B. Minimum letter height is 30mm for ducts, and 20mm for access door signs and similar operational
instructions.
C. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 20mm to 30mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200mm long color field, 15mm high letters.
5. Over 250mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800mm long color field, 90mm high letters.
6. Equipment: 65mm high letters.
D. Stencil Paint: As specified in Architectural Specification, colors in accordance with ASME A13.1.
2.5 PIPE MARKERS
A. Unless otherwise required by the Utility Company having Jurisdiction:
1. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being
conveyed.
2. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings at least 0.08 mm thick.
3. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum
150mm wide by 0.10mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.6 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 20mm diameter color coded head.
B. Unless otherwise required by the Utility Company having Jurisdiction:
1. Yellow: HVAC equipment.
2. Red: Fire dampers/ smoke dampers.
3. Green: Plumbing valves.
4. Blue: Heating/ cooling valves
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient
adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting.
D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 20mm diameter and
smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 6m on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve
and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
E. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Identification bands shall be applied in a logical and tidy manner with lettering and flow arrows clearly
visible on the pipes and equipment.
H. Where several pipelines are installed in parallel to each other the identification bands shall be applied at
the same location on each pipe.
I. Additional identification bands shall be applied on a regular interval on piping above false ceilings so that
it is clearly visible from the limited number of access panels.
J. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150mm to 200mm below finished grade, directly above buried
pipe.
K. Identify pumps and valves with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, shall be identified
with tags.
L. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
M. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
N. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
O. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
P. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to
equipment.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220573 – FACILITY DRAINAGE MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Drainage manholes.
2. Catch basins and gully-traps.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials used, construction details, supports, water proof details. Indicate
installation, layout, and piping connections.
a. Submit all Shop Drawings to fabricate manholes, catch basins and gully traps indicated with their
physical dimensions, hydraulic calculations and materials used.
2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate product data used for project.
system.
1. Warranties.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
C. Conform to the requirements and acceptance of the Utility Company having Jurisdiction and relevant
Sewerage Services Company.
D. Provide manufacturer's name, size and manufacturing standard marked on the product body.
A. Deliver and store products in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERALS
A. The Contractor shall carryout the detailed survey to identify the location of existing authority manholes and
connect the final drainage connection to the authority manhole. The FIC manholes shall be relocated
according to the actual location of authority manhole.
B. Drainage Manholes, Catch Basins and Gully Traps
1. Drainage manholes, catch basins and gully traps shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of the Utility Company having Jurisdiction and relevant Sewerage Services Company and
as indicated in the Particular Specification and the Design Drawings.
2. Obtain typical details from the Utility Company having Jurisdiction and relevant Sewerage Services
Company for manholes, catch basins and gully traps
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove scale and foreign material before assembly.
B. Prepare manholes, catch basins and gully traps for connection to drainage pipes and equipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install manholes, catch basins and gully traps to the acceptance of Utility Company having Jurisdiction and
relevant Sewerage Services Company.
B. Manholes and gully-traps shall be vented in accordance with Utility Company having Jurisdiction and
relevant Sewerage Services Company.
C. Where it is necessary to install manholes and gully traps in a finished area, the covers shall have equal
finish of the adjacent area.
D. Manholes, gully traps and catch basins shall be installed with clearance of not less than 450mm for the
purpose of rodding and cleaning.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 2205756 – FACILITY DRAINAGE PIPING CLEANOUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Cleanouts for plumbing piping.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate cleanout materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping
connections.
2. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate cleanout data.
system.
1. Warranties.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
C. Cleanouts: Provide manufacturer's name, size and pressure rating marked on valve body.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
5. European Commission, EC Standards.
A. Deliver and store products in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel cleanouts.
C. Provide temporary closures on cleanout. Maintain in place until installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The finish of FCO shall be as per the Architect requirement. The Contractor shall submit the sample for
Engineer's approval. Also, Contractor shall include recessed type of floor clean out in their scope of work if
required by the Engineer.
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the listed manufacturers in the Vendor List.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Cleanouts for Plumbing Services
1. All concealed cleanouts shall have easy access for cleaning and inspection. Where concealed cleanouts
have no direct access and installed in furred ceiling spaces, cleanouts shall extend up through floor
slab above and the Engineer shall give specific acceptance to its location in the above floor space.
2. Cleanouts in terrazzo, tile or carpeted floors shall be complete with nickel bronze frame and square or
round full opening nickel bronze access cover having terrazzo, tile or carpet recesses to permit in
setting of the applicable flooring or floor covering material. Flat top cleanouts without recesses will not
be acceptable.
3. Cleanouts in concrete floors shall be complete with polished bronze frame and scoriated nickel bronze
tractor duty cover and internal brass or bronze plug.
4. Cleanouts in floors with a waterproof membrane shall be equal to the cleanouts specified above but
with a flashing clamp device for attaching to the waterproof membrane below finished floor level.
5. Cleanouts at the base of each vertical stack and rain water leader shall be either Daisy-type or Barrett-
type.
6. Cleanouts extending through walls in finished areas shall have stainless steel covering plates to permit
access to cleanout plugs.
7. Cleanouts in ceiling spaces shall be proprietary screwed type as supplied by the HDPE piping
manufacturer.
8. Where it is necessary to conceal a cleanout plug, a heavy duty stainless steel covering plate shall be
provided, which shall permit ready access to the plug. Cleanout plugs shall be of heavy cast brass, of
the screwed type.
9. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes up to 100mm pipe diameter and not less than
100mm for larger piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove scale and foreign material before assembly.
B. Prepare cleanout connections to pipes and equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction of drainage pipes inside the building and were
indicated in the Particular Specification and on the Design Drawings.
B. Cleanouts shall be not more than 15m apart in horizontal lines. A cleanout shall be provided at or near the
foot of each vertical waste or soil stack.
C. Cleanouts without direct access on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with
finished wall or floor. Pits or chases may be left in the wall or floor, provided they are of sufficient size to
permit removal of the cleanout plug and proper cleaning of the system.
D. Cleanouts shall be installed with a clearance of not less than 450mm for the purpose of rodding and
cleaning.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220716 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Equipment insulation.
2. Covering.
3. Breeching insulation.
1. Section 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for
equipment scheduled.
system.
11. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.
1. Submit 2 samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section
with not less than 3 years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of Work specified in this Section
with minimum 10 years of experience.
a. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate and Flat Bar.
b. ASTM B209/ B209M Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
c. ASTM C177 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
d. ASTM C195 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
e. ASTM C449/ C449M Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement.
f. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
g. ASTM C533 Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
h. ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation
in Sheet and Tubular Form.
i. ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Insulation.
j. ASTM C552 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
k. ASTM C553 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
l. ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
m. ASTM C591 Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
n. ASTM C592 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).
o. ASTM C610 Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation.
p. ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
q. ASTM C795 Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel.
r. ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
s. ASTM D2842 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics
t. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
u. ASTM E96/ E96M Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1) Underwriters' Laboratories, UL Standards:
a) UL 723 Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2) National Fire Protection Association, NFPA Standards
3) North American Insulation Manufacturers Association, NAIMA Standards.
A. Accept materials on Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS SELECTION
B. Insulation Schedule
1. Cooling and Heating Systems:
a. Pump Bodies: Flexible fiber glass blanket complete with 25mm thick (minimum) and 72kg/ m³
density and vapor seal.
b. Flue Gas Breeching: Calcium Silicate complete with 100mm thick (minimum) and stainless steel
cladding.
c. Stacks to Roof: Calcium Silicate complete with 100mm thick (minimum) and stainless steel
cladding.
2. Schedule of Insulation for Equipment and Miscellaneous Applications
a. Rigid board fiber glass completes with 50mm thick (minimum) and 72kg/ m³ density and vapor
seal.
b. Exterior and inside plant room shall be with aluminum cladding.
c. Thickness: 50mm unless otherwise noted above.
2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C553, flexible, non-combustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.052 at 24°C, in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232°C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0% by weight.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/ Pa s m, in accordance with ASTM E96/ E96M.
2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
3. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
C. Tie Wire: 1.22mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300mm centers.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/ Mastic: In accordance with ASTM C195, hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2.3 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.036 at 24°C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0% by weight.
4. Maximum Density: 128kg/ m³.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/ Pa s m, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/ E96M.
3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
C. Facing: 25mm galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
2.4 CELLULAR GLASS
A. Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C552, Grade 2.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.059 at 38°C.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 482°C.
3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/ Pa s m.
4. Water Absorption: 0.2% by volume, maximum.
5. Density: Minimum 109 kg/ m³.
2.5 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C533 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.057 at 148°C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or C518.
3. Density: 249kg/ m³.
B. Tie Wire: 1.22mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300mm centers.
C. Insulating Cement: In accordance with ASTM C449/ C449M.
2.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade-3, in
sheet form.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: 40°C.
3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 25 and smoke developed index of 50, maximum, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and UL 723. Provide for all products of this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign materials removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA Standards
C. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
D. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
E. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to
equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands.
F. Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
G. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.
H. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor barrier
jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
I. For hot equipment containing fluids 60°C or less, do not insulate flanges and unions but bevel and seal
ends of insulation. For hot equipment containing fluids over 60°C, insulate flanges and unions with
removable sections and jackets.
J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets,
with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 40mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150mm long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.
L. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions.
M. Equipment in mechanical equipment rooms or finished spaces: Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish
painting.
N. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier
cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal equipment.
O. Cover glass fiber insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement aluminum
jacket.
P. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
Q. Equipment requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair or Cleaning: Install insulation in a way it can be easily
removed and replaced without damage.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Piping insulation.
2. Jacket Accessories
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for
each service and locations.
system.
11. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and
installation standards shall be achieved.
1. Submit 2 No. samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section
with not less than 3 years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of Work specified in this Section
with minimum 5 years of experience.
a. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate and Flat Bar.
b. ASTM B209/ B209M Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
c. ASTM C177 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
d. ASTM C195 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
e. ASTM C449/ C449M Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement.
f. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
g. ASTM C533 Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
h. ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation
in Sheet and Tubular Form.
i. ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Insulation.
j. ASTM C552 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
k. ASTM C553 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
l. ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
m. ASTM C585 Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for
Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
n. ASTM C591 Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
o. ASTM C592 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).
p. ASTM C610 Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation.
q. ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
r. ASTM C795 Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel.
s. ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
t. ASTM D2842 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
u. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
v. ASTM E96/ E96M Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
a. UL 723 Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association, NAIMA Standards.
A. Accept materials on Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage, by
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES
A. Domestic hot water and cold water pipe installed externally exposed to weather conditions at roof level or
at another location in the building shall be insulated with Phenolic foam or Elastomeric foam with
aluminium cladding. The insulation is required for the mechanical and weather protection.
B. The thickness of foam insulation shall be as follows:
1. Nominal Pipe diameter: 15mm - Phenolic foam 15mm.
9. Nominal Pipe diameter: 100mm and above - Phenolic foam 50mm.
C. Aluminium cladding shall be formed to fit tightly over the outer circumference of the insulation with
longitudinal overlaps of not less than 40mm of the outer part of the overlap, to be secured with self-
tapping screws or rivets of the appropriate type at centres of not more than 150mm.
D. All longitudinal joints shall be hidden from view as far as possible.
E. Circumferential overlaps to be not less than 40mm and secured with secured with self-tapping screws or
rivets of the appropriate type, not less than four, equally spaced.
F. One circumferential joint should be left free at maximum intervals of 5m to allow for expansion and
contraction.
G. All joints shall be so arranged as to shed liquids and shall be sealed with a suitable gun applied water
resistant sealant.
H. All bends and fittings shall be covered with matching aluminium sheet cladding tailored to fit the
application but using specially segmented purpose made pieces, or mitred bends where applicable.
I. All insulation termination points shall be trimmed with compatible aluminium coiled end capping pieces
secured over the aluminium cladding with closed head pop rivets.
J. All aluminium metal work shall be pre-formed, neatly and correctly installed, and manufactured to ensure a
smooth, clean, uniform installation free from sharp and dangerous edges.
K. Minimum thickness of aluminium cladding shall be 0.60mm Class O facing.
L. At the points of support where insulation bears the weight of pipework and contents, purpose designed
load bearing, high density blocks of an approved material shall be installed at all support positions to
facilitate installation of a continuous thickness of insulation and finish.
M. The pipe insulation shall be butted up to the block and the joints sealed with a suitable adhesive tape to
provide a continuous seal through the support.
N. Sharp edges on metal support brackets/ clips shall be ground smooth to ensure that the brackets/ clips do
not perforate the foil facing.
O. Provide insulation to all valves, flanges, strainers and all ancillaries.
P. The insulation shall be suitable for the service to be insulated and provide the same thermal performance
as the adjoining pipework and maintain the continuity of the vapour barrier where required.
Q. The fire rating of the insulation material shall comply with the fire strategy of the development.
1. Domestic Water and Condensate Drain Systems
a. Domestic water in non air conditioned spaces.
b. Cold condensate drains.
c. Condensate drains from cooling coils.
d. Suspended horizontal drains receiving cooling coil condensate.
e. Roof drain receptors.
R. Schedule of Insulation for Condensate Drain Systems
1. Insulation type: Molded fiber glass complete with vapor seal.
2. External pipe work and inside plant room shall be with aluminium cladding.
3. Thickness: 25mm.
S. Drainage Pipework (for Acoustic Purpose)
1. All soil, waste and rain water pipes and fittings above habitable areas shall be acoustically treated.
T. Schedule of Acoustic Insulation for Drainage Pipe work Systems
1. Insulation type: Fiberglass batting.
2. Thickness: 25mm.
U. Vapor barrier: Vapor barrier shall be constructed of a 2mm thick mass loaded, limp vinyl sheet bonded to a
thin layer of reinforced aluminum foil on one side.
V. The decoupling layer shall be a combination of 25mm fiberglass batting, non woven porous scrim- coated
glass cloth, quilted together in a matrix of 100mm diamond stitch pattern which encapsulates the glass
fibers.
W. Pipework in exposed positions shall be insulated, vapour sealed and protected from mechanical damage.
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 25 and smoke developed index of 50, maximum, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and UL 723. Provide for all products of this Section.
2.4 GLASS FIBER
A. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, non-combustible.
1. 'Ksi' value shall be in accordance with ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24°C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 454°C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume.
B. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, non-combustible, end grain
adhered to jacket.
1. 'Ksi' value shall be in accordance with ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24°C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor
transmission shall be in accordance with ASTM E96/ E96M of 0.029ng/ Pa s m.
D. Tie Wire: 1.22mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300mm centers.
E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
F. Insulating cement/ mastic shall be in accordance with ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
G. Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305g/ m² weight.
2. Blanket: 16kg/ m³ density.
3. Weave: 5 x 5.
H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305g/ m² weight.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color
I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color
J. Outdoor Breather Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color
K. Insulating cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C449/ C449M.
2.5 CELLULAR GLASS
A. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C552 1. 'Ksi' value: 0.053 at 38°C.
1. Service Temperature: Up to 482°C.
2. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/ Pa s m.
3. Water Absorption: 0.2% by volume, maximum.
2.6 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE
A. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
1. 'Ksi' value: 0.033 at 24°C.
3. Maximum water vapor permeance: 287 ng/ Pa s m².
2.7 EXPANDED PERLITE
A. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C610, molded.
2. Maximum water vapor transmission: 0.1 perm.
2.8 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C533 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'Ksi' value: 0.057 at 148°C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or C518.
B. Tie Wire: 1.22mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300mm centers.
C. Insulating cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C449/ C449M.
2.9 POLYISOCYANURATE CELLULAR PLASTIC
A. Insulation material shall be in accordance with ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular
plastic.
1. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C585.
2. 'Ksi' value: 0.026 at 24°C, in accordance with ASTM C518.
3. Minimum Service Temperature: -51°C.
5. Water Absorption: 0.5% by volume maximum, in accordance with ASTM D2842.
6. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 4.0 perm in 5.8 ng/ (Pa s m).
2.10 POLYETHYLENE
A. Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, slit lengthwise for installation, complying with
applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
1. 'Ksi' value of 0.036 at 24°C, in accordance with ASTM C177.
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0% by volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.073 ng/ Pa s m, in accordance with ASTM E96/ E96M.
6. Connection: Contact adhesive.
2.11 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation in accordance with ASTM C534 Grade 3;
use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40°C.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.12 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: -18°C.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 66°C.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.0029 ng/ Pa s m (maximum), in accordance with ASTM E96/ E96M.
d. Thickness: 0.25mm.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
B. ABS Plastic
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40°C.
b. Maximum Service Temperature of 82°C.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.018ng/ Pa s m, in accordance with ASTM E96/ E96M.
d. Thickness: 0.76mm.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
C. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220g/ m² plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
D. Aluminum jacket shall be in accordance with ASTM B209/ B209M formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.40mm sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50mm laps.
4. Fittings: 0.4mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 10mm wide; 0.38mm thick aluminum.
E. Stainless steel jacket shall be in accordance with ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.
1. Thickness: 0.25mm.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Metal Jacket Bands: 10mm wide; 0.25mm thick stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign materials removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA Standards.
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies and expansion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps
and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and
vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids 60°C or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel
and seal ends of insulation.
G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 60°C, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish
with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
I. Inserts and Shields
1. Application: Piping 40mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150mm long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.
J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports,
protrusions and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Architectural Specification
K. Pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or finished spaces, less than 3m above finished floor: Finish
with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like
material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover
with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
M. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self- sealing
lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 0.025mm thick aluminum foil sandwiched
between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.
N. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish
as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with
seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Plumbing piping
D. Definitions
2. ABS: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene.
4. PPR: Polypropylene.
5. uPVC: Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride.
6. PE-X: Cross-linked Polyethylene.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Comply with the requirements of the submittal procedures and protocols set out by the Employer /
Engineer.
Provide the items as referenced in applicable Work Sections for each related Division.
A. Technical Submittals
7. Warranties
system.
B. Technical Samples.
following:
1.4 WARRANTIES.
A. Unless otherwise specified in other Work Sections, provide a manufacturer's full warranty covering all
products of this Division, valid for 1 year from date of issue of Taking-Over Certificate, irrespective of
delivery date and trial usage.
B. Provide warranty certificates for all equipment supplied to this project.
a. Comply with the guaranteed requirements of the individual requirements of the individual Work
3. Record Drawings: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
4. Recommended Spare Parts list: As referenced in applicable Work Sections. Spare parts list shall identify
A. All systems shall comply with the requirements of the Authority having jurisdiction and shall comply with
B. The manufacturer of materials and equipment shall have adequate (5 – 10 years) experience in the design
1. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads.
2. BS 143 and 1256 Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron and cast copper alloy.
3. BS 864 Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper and copper alloy.
4. BS 1494 Fixing accessories for building purposes.
5. BS 2633 Specification for Class I arc welding of ferritic steel pipework for carrying fluids.
6. BS 2782-11 Method 1121B, ISO 161-1 Methods of testing plastics. Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and
valves. Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Nominal outside diameters and nominal
pressures. Metric series.
7. BS 2971 Specification for Class II arc welding of carbon steel pipework for carrying fluids.
8. BS 3416 Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold application, suitable for contact with
potable water.
9. BS 3505 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pressure pipes for cold potable
water.
10. BS 3506 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe for industrial purposes.
a. BS 4346 Joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes.
b. BS 4872 Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not
required
c. BS 5292 Specification for jointing materials and compounds for installations using water, low-
pressure steam or 1st, 2nd and 3rd family gases.
d. BS 5391-1 Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pressure pipes
e. BS 6129-1 Code of practice for the selection and application of bellows expansion joints for use in
pressure systems.
f. S 6572 Specification for blue polyethylene pipes up to nominal size 63 for below ground use for
potable water.
g. BS 8558
h. BS 7786 Specification for unsintered PTFE tapes for general use
i. BS 7874 Method of test for microbial deterioration of elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and
pipelines
j. BS 6956 Jointing materials and compounds
k. BS 8537 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. specification for press ends of plumbing
fittings for use with metallic tubes
l. BS 9990 Code of practice for non-automatic fire-fighting systems in buildings
m. BS EN 681 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in water and drainage
n. BS EN 681-1 Part 1: Vulcanised rubber
o. BS EN 681-2 Part 2: Thermoplastic elastomers
p. BS EN 545 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines.
Requirements and test methods
q. BS EN 598 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage applications.
Requirements and test methods
r. BS EN 681 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in water and drainage
applications
s. BS EN 682 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for seals used in pipes and fittings carrying gas
and hydrocarbon fluids
t. BS EN 740 Anaesthetic workstations and their modules. Particular requirements
u. BS EN 969 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for gas pipelines. Requirements
and test methods
v. BS EN 970 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual examination
w. BS EN 1044 Brazing. Filler metals
x. BS EN 1057 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary
and heating applications
y. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints – Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories,
PN designated.
z. BS EN 1435 Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of welded joints
aa. BS EN 1452 Plastics piping systems for water supply. Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U)
bb. BS EN 1514 Flanges and their joints. Dimensions of gaskets for PN-designated flanges
cc. BS EN 1563 Founding. Spheroidal graphite cast iron
dd. BS EN 1714 Non-destructive testing of welded joints. Ultrasonic testing of welded joints
ee. BS EN 10088 Stainless steels
ff. BS EN 10088-2 Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for sheet/plate and strip of corrosion
resisting steels for general purposes
gg. BS EN 10216-1 Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes.
hh. BS EN 10217-1 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical delivery conditions.
ii. BS EN 10224 Non-alloy steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of water and other aqueous
liquids. Technical delivery conditions
jj. BS EN 10241 Steel threaded pipe fittings
kk. BS EN 10253 Butt-welding pipe fittings
ll. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical delivery
conditions
mm. BS EN 12201 Plastic piping systems for water supply. Polyethylene (PE)
nn. BS EN 12449 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for general purposes
oo. BS EN 12451 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for heat exchangers
pp. BS EN 12797 Brazing. Destructive tests of brazed joints
qq. BS EN 12799 Brazing. Non-destructive examination of brazed joints
rr. BS EN 10311 Joints for the connection of steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of water and
other aqueous liquids
ss. BS EN 13076 Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Family A. Type A
tt. BS EN 13077 Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Air gap with non-circular
overflow (unrestricted). Family A. Type B
uu. BS EN 13133 Brazing. Brazer approval
vv. BS EN 13134 Brazing. Procedure approval
ww. BS EN 14324 Brazing. Guidance on the application of brazed joints
xx. BS EN 14623 Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Air gaps with minimum
circular overflow (verified by test or measurement). Family A. Type G
yy. BS EN 60601-2-13 Medical electrical equipment. Particular requirements for the safety and
essential performance of anaesthetic systems
zz. BS EN ISO 1456 Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electrodeposited coatings of nickel, nickel
plus chromium, copper plus nickel and of copper plus nickel plus chromium
aaa. BS EN ISO 7438 Metallic materials. Bend test
bbb. BS EN ISO 8835 Inhalational anaesthesia systems
ccc. BS EN ISO 9000 Quality management systems
ddd. BS EN ISO 9934-1 Non-destructive testing - Magnetic particle testing.
eee. BS ISO 727 Fittings made from unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U), chlorinated
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-C) or acrylonitrile/butadiene/styrene (ABS) with plain sockets for pipes
under pressure
fff. BS ISO 4065 Thermoplastic pipes. Universal wall thickness table
ggg. BS ISO 11922-1 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Dimensions and
tolerances. Metric series
hhh. DIN 8063 Pipe Joints and Pipe Fittings for Pipes under Pressure made of Unplasticized
Polyvinyl Chloride (Rigid PVC)
iii. DIN 50961 Electroplated coatings – zinc coatings on iron and steel – terms, testing and corrosion
resistance
jjj. GIS/PL2 Technical specification for polyethylenme pipes and fittings for natural gas and suitable
manufactured gas
kkk. GIS/PL2-1 Part 1: General & PE compounds for use in PE pipes and fittings
lll. GIS/PL2-2 Part 2: Pipes for use at pressures up to 5.5 bar
mmm. GIS/PL2-3 Part 3: Butt fusion tooling and ancillary equipment
nnn. GIS/PL2-4 Fusion fittings with integral heating element(s)
ooo. GIS/PL2-6 Spigot end fittings for electrofusion and/or butt fusion purposes
ppp. GIS/PL3 Technical specification for self-anchoring mechanical fittings for polyethylene pipe
for natural gas and suitable manufactured gas
qqq. HVCA TR/5 Welding of carbon steel pipework
rrr. WIS No. 4-24-01 Specification for mechanical fittings and joints for polyethylene pipes for
nominal sizes 90 to 1000
sss. WIS No. 4-32-06 Specification for PE electrofusion couplers and fittings for cold water supply for
nominal sizes up to and including 180
ttt. WIS No. 4-32-08 Fusion jointing of polyethylene pressure pipeline systems using PE80 and PE100
materials
1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS:
and Specification.
A. Delivery
1. Provide factory applied plastic and caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through
shipping, delivery, storage and placing in position to prevent pipe end damage and to eliminate the
ingress of dirt and moisture.
B. Storage
1. Store pipe and tube indoors on purpose made racks, to protect from weather.
2. Where it is necessary to store outdoors provide purpose made racks to elevate pipe and tube above
grade and enclose the whole with durable weatherproof covering.
3. Store all supplies in a manner accepted by the Engineer and per manufacturer’s recommendation.
5. Protect supplies from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage,
by storing in original wrapping.
C. Handling
1. Protect flanges and fittings from damage by dirt and moisture by inside storage or by packaging in
durable waterproof wrapping.
2. Handle supplies carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged
pipes / tubes or components, replace with new.
C. Accessibility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Work Included
specific trade.
2. The Work shall include all labor, materials, equipment, permits and tools required for a complete and
working installation as described but not necessarily limited to items, in the mechanical Work Sections
of Division 22 Plumbing.
C. Scope of Work
Documents.
and catch basins.
4. Provision of the utility services as necessary to complete the new works as detailed in the Contract
Documents. All proposed new works shall be fully detailed by the Contractor on Shop Drawings, in
Method Statements and submitted for acceptance. No work associated with building services and
utility services shall be undertaken until acceptance from the Engineer.
1. Select products and systems from one of the manufacturers from the approved Vendor List.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
5. Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or class) indicated for
each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, request proper selection from the Engineer.
B. Pipe Lengths
1. In assembling piping systems, utilize longest available commercial standard piping lengths allowed on
Site to minimize number of piping joints.
C. Pipe Sizes
1. Conflicts or inconsistencies of pipe sizes, arrangements and details for final connections shall be
communicated, resolved and accepted by the Engineer.
D. Piping Diagrams
1. The Contract Documents may include piping diagrams as a part of the Design Drawings. These piping
diagrams are not for the purpose of giving physical dimensions or locations, but rather to show all
various units of the process. If an item is indicated on either the piping diagram or on the Design
Drawings, but not on both, it shall be assumed that the Contractor has included such item in his
estimate of the cost of the work and that he shall provide the same.
E. Piping Layouts
1. The Contract Documents may include piping layouts - they are intended for the Contractor's guidance
and shall not be scaled. Verify accuracy and immediately notify the Engineer of any discrepancies,
which could not be coordinated under the coordination requirement within the Specification ensuring
that they may be resolved prior to actual fabrication, or installation of work.
2. Anticipate and coordinate minor changes in position of piping to meet job conditions. Such minor
changes shall not be made the basis for Request for Information (RFI) and change orders.
3. Promptly communicate to the Engineer any changes affecting accessibility to or clearance around
F. CCTV Survey
1. Should adequate protection to prevent ingress of dirt, debris, etc. into the system is not provided the
Engineer could request flow and / or CCTV tests to be undertaken to demonstrate unobstructed flow
within new and existing pipe work at no cost to the contract.
2.4 COPPER PIPEWORK
A. General
1. Copper tube shall be to BS EN 1057 and BS EN 12449.
2. For heating applications tube shall be R250 to BS EN 1173.
3. R220 tube shall only be used for instrument and gauge connections, below ground services and where
pipes are laid in floor finishes.
4. R290 tube shall not be used.
5. All copper tube shall be BS kite marked.
6. All copper tube shall be certified to be to the requirements of the appropriate Standard.
B. Bends & Fittings
1. Bends, springs and sets in R250 tube up to and including DN42 size may be neatly pulled where
standard fittings cannot be used, or where this will give a neater appearance.
2. Such work showing flattening, ripples or constriction of bore will be rejected.
3. Fittings shall be to BS EN 1254-1 and -2 all resistant to dezincification, for sizes DN6 to DN67.
C. Jointing
1. Joints up to DN67 size shall be made with capillary fittings and connectors with integral lead- free
solder ring, or non-manipulative compression type couplings.
2. Unions, copper to iron adaptors or flanged connections shall be used to connect threaded pipe to
copper tubes.
3. Fittings for brazing shall have socket ends for brazing with copper/silver/phosphorous filler rod to BS
EN 1044 with pressure rating and service conditions equal to the specified tube.
4. For capillary type joints heat shall be applied uniformly around fittings using two or more heat sources
if necessary for larger diameter pipes.
5. Surplus flux and solder shall be cleaned off.
6. Screwed joints shall be made using jointing compounds to BS 5292/BS 6956 or PTFE tape. Joint
reinforcement material shall be inorganic.
7. Joints may be made by an approved roll grooving process, which is BS EN 9001 or BBA certificated,
carried out fully to the manufacturers instructions by trained operatives.
8. Where copper tube distribution branches are used, approved connections with 'push fit' joints may be
used.
9. Press-formed jointing may be used for sizes up to DN 76.
D. Chromium Plating
1. Chromium plating shall be carried out after all pulled bends and soldered joints are completed.
2.5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Ductile iron pipe, mould-cast fittings, accessories and joints for condenser cooling water shall be to BS EN
545. Jointing shall be by flanges.
B. The sealing compound for screwed-on flanges shall be entirely suitable for the fluid content.
C. Gaskets used shall be solely the supply of the pipe manufacturer.
D. Direct-buried pipe shall be fitted with polythene sleeving.
2.6 STAINLESS STEEL PIPEWORK
A. Stainless steel tube up to and including 35 mm outside diameter shall be to BS EN 10312.
B. Bends, springs and sets may be site made where standard fittings cannot be used or where this method
will give a neater appearance.
C. Formed piping shall not show flattening, ripples or constriction of bore.
D. Joints up to DN35 external diameter shall be made with compression fittings to BS EN 1254-2 resistant to
de-zincification. A thin coat of jointing compound to BS EN 751-2 shall be applied to the tube for the
length of the joint prior to assembly.
E. Joints up to DN35 size shall be made with capillary type fittings with integral lead-free solder ring fittings
to BS EN 1254-1 resistant to de-zincification.
F. Flux for capillary fittings shall be phosphoric acid based, as BS 5245. Halogen based flux shall not be used.
Where stainless steel tube is connected to copper tube in a single system, all joints in the system must be
made with phosphoric acid based flux.
2.7 STEEL, BLACK AND HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED
A. Material specifications shall be one of the following as chosen under pipe services:
1. Continuous butt-welded: ASTM A53/ A53M or BS ISO 3601 BW22.
2. Continuous furnaces butt-weld: ASTM A53/ A53M or BS ISO 3601 BW22.
3. Seamless: ASTM A53/ A53M Grade A and B, or BS ISO 3601 HFS22 or HFS27.
4. Electric resistance weld: ASTM A53/ A53M Grade-A and B, or BS ISO 3601 ERW22 or ERW27.
5. Seamless: ASTM A106/ A106M Grade-A and B, or BS EN 10217-3 and BS EN 10217-5.
2.8 THERMOPLASTICS, PIPES & FITTINGS
A. General
1. Pipe and fittings in a system shall be from one manufacturer only.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – Gravity pipework
1. Gravity: PVC-u pipe and fittings shall be to BS EN 1452.
2. Solvent shall be to BS 4346-3 or ASTM F439.
3. Bell and spigot with rubber gaskets.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – Pressurized pipework
1. Class 150 in accordance with AWWA C900 or BS 3506.
2. Maximum allowable working pressure: 1034kPa at 230°C.
3. Ratio of outside diameter divided by wall thickness shall be 18 (SDR 18).
D. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS)
1. ABS pipework and fittings shall be acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene pipe to BS 5391.
2. Class-C solvent-weld in accordance with BS 5392.
3. Gaskets and 'O'-rings on sockets shall be of EPDM.
4. Flanges in accordance with BS EN 1092-1.
5. PB pipe and fittings shall be poly-butylene to BS 7291-1and -2 and copper alloy to BS EN 1254.
6. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene pipe for electro-fusion welding conforming to BS EN 1519, DIN
19535-10, DIN 19537
7. PPR-C: Polypropylene Random Copolymer PPR-C PN 20 SDR 6 conforming to DIN 8077/ DIN 8078.
8. PE-X: Cross-linked Polyethylene pipe conforming to EN ISO 15875
2.9 MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Pipework and fittings shall be indelibly marked at 3m intervals to show: Manufacturer's identification.
B. Appropriate BS number.
C. Symbol for the material (e.g. 'PVC-u'). Nominal size and class.
D. Letters shall be fully legible and not less than 5mm high. Adhesive labels will not be acceptable.
2.10 INSTALLATION
A. Bends and tees shall be easy sweep. Reduced bore branches shall be made by drilling and solvent welding
saddle and spigot branch connections.
B. Connections to pipework of other materials shall be made with correct adaptors.
C. Provide additional supports at all branches and change of direction fittings within 100mm of the fitting.
D. Install all piping in the best workmanlike manner in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
E. The piping indicated on the Design Drawings is diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general run
and connections and may or may not be, in all instances, indicated in its true position. Take responsibility
for the proper erection of systems of piping in every respect suitable for the work intended and as
described in the specifications.
F. Keep plugged or capped all openings in pipe or fittings during installation.
2.11 JOINTS
A. General
1. Flanges shall be stub type to BS EN 1452 for PVC-u and BS 5392 for ABS with galvanized steel backing
rings. Joints between stub flanges and pipes shall be solvent welded.
2. Joints shall be cleaned of all surplus cement immediately after setting.
3. The threaded ends of PVC-u and ABS fittings shall be jointed using PTFE tape only.
4. PVC-u and ABS socket unions shall incorporate flexible 'O' ring seals.
B. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings
1. Grooved type or steel chamfer ends:
a. Gaskets: Synthetic rubber in accordance with ASTM D2000, Grade R 615 BZ.
b. Bolts: Oval neck track type in accordance with ASTM A183.
c. Mechanical couplings shall be equal to Victaulic Style 77 or acceptable equivalent.
2. Grooved end fittings:
a. Grooved type, ductile iron as indicated on the Design Drawings or equal British Standard for
couplings to 250mm, steel ASTM A536, rated 2070kPa working pressure.
b. Companion pipe grooving: In accordance with coupling and fitting manufacturers’

recommendations.
2.12 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be of same manufacture as pipe, fully compatible for jointing, with full bore waterway.
B. Requirements for expanders and reducers shall be as for metal pipe.
C. Correct adaptors shall be used to connect to metallic pipe systems.
D. Bends shall be pre-formed with centreline radius not less than twice nominal pipe size for short radius, and
four times nominal size for long radius requirements.
E. Fittings shall generally be solvent weld jointing type with wall thickness of the highest-pressure class of
pipe.
F. Threaded fittings shall not be used
2.13 EXPANSION UNITS
A. Expansion units shall be fitted where changes of pipe direction cannot accommodate thermal expansion
and be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.14 THERMOPLASTIC VALVES
A. Thermoplastic valves only shall be installed in ABS, PVC-u and PB pipework systems. Solvent-weld valves
shall be provided for sizes up to DN50. DN80 valves shall be flanged. Pipelines requiring regulation shall
have 'B' grade diaphragm valves.
B. Pipelines requiring shut-off provision only shall have ball valves with plain ends for solvent weld jointing in
sizes DN15 to DN80 inclusive.
2.15 SOLVENT CEMENTS
A. Only solvent cements and thinners recommended by pipe and fittings manufacturer shall be used. The
label on the container of solvent cement and/or thinners shall bear the name of the manufacturer,
recommended procedure for use, and safety procedures necessary.
B. Tests shall be made on jointed solvent-pipe and fittings to establish conformity with standards given.
2.16 TESTING
A. General
1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time at which all tests are to be held and shall provide
all the materials, labor and equipment required for testing. Upon completion of the tests, copies of the
complete records shall be given to the Engineer for his retention in accordance with Division 01
General Requirements submittals.
2. The Contractor shall ensure the safety of the pipe work under test and he shall be responsible for the
pipe work and ancillary works during the test and shall replace or repair as directed by the Engineer,
any pipe or fitting which in the opinion of the Engineer has failed to withstand the test.
3. For sizes up to DN90 one hour (min.) shall elapse for each 4 bar working pressure or proportion
thereof, after completion of the last joint before filling the system, and one and a half hours for sizes
DN160 and above.
4. Test pressure shall be applied at least twelve hours after completion of jointing, and full rated pressure
not less than twenty-four hours after completion of jointing.
B. Gravity Sewers
1. Pipelines shall be tested in lengths between manholes by potable water with a minimum head of 3m.
This test shall be carried out prior to backfilling with bedding up to pipe soffit and with pipe joints
clear of bedding. No pipeline shall be accepted if leakage is detected at pipe joints or through the pipe
barrel within 1 hour of the commencement of the test.
2. As soon as possible after a line of PVC pipe has been installed, tested and the trench backfilled a pig or
a ball, so sized that it shall not pass any point in the pipeline that has deflected to a greater degree
than 3% shall be run through the pipe to test for deformation. In the event that the test indicated
excess deflection then affected pipe or pipes shall be replaced.
2.17 FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A. General Requirements
1. All assemblies shall be suitable for the system pressure and operating temperature.
2. All materials shall be resistant to UV light degradation.
3. Electrical continuity shall be maintained across rubber joints.
4. Connections shall be fitted between items of identical diameter. No bushing or other reductions shall
be made.
5. Connections shall have an operational life certified by the manufacturer of not less than 10 years when
operating in the system.
B. Flexible Hose
1. Short connections to equipment shall have integral screwed ends at least one of which shall be a union
fitting.
2. Connections shall not exceed 600mm in length arranged in long-radius bends.
3. Piping shall be woven mesh reinforced to prevent kinking and restriction of bore at bends.
4. Adequate support shall be provided to suspend lengths without loading to plant items and other
services.
5. End threads shall be taper to BS 21/BS EN 10226-1, except that internal parallel threads to BS 21/BS EN
10226-1, designation Rp may be used where allowed specifically in the jointing specification for this
service.
6. Union couplings on flexible piping shall be connected to matching fittings supplied, or approved, by
the manufacturer. The end threads of the matching fittings shall be taper to BS 21/BS EN 10226-1,
except that internal parallel threads to BS 21/BS EN 10226-1, designation Rp may be used in
conjunction with a joint incorporating a female parallel thread fitting and flat fibre washer.
7. Plain end and union fittings shall have provisions for spanners and wrenching tools.
C. Flexible Connectors
1. Flexible connectors shall be soft spherical single convolution EPDM rubber joints of high vibration
isolation efficiency, resilience and noise absorbing properties.
2. Reinforcement shall be steel braid for heating water and nylon braid for chilled and cold-water
applications.
3. Backing flanges shall be mild steel of system pressure rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Identify piping flow direction and contents. Refer to Section 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment.
B. Domestic Water Supply
1. Piping:
a. Free of traps.
b. Slope and valve for complete control and drainage of system with drain cocks at low points and
base of valued riser.
2. Brass or copper piping connecting to galvanized piping: Provide dielectric fittings or flanges.
3. Piping Installation:
a. Install all piping in the best workmanlike manner in accordance with the best practices of the
trade. Tundishes shall be provided on all drains that collect drainpipes from equipment and drain
lines.
b. The piping indicated on the Design Drawings is diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the
general run and connections and may or may not be, in all instances, indicated in its true position.
Take responsibility for the proper erection of systems of piping in every respect suitable for the
work intended and as described in the Specification.
c. Keep all openings in pipe or fitting plugged or capped during installation.
d. Install piping to avoid any interference with the installation or removal of equipment, other piping,
ducts, etc.
e. Place all valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access and regulate and adjust all
packing glands on completion of the work.
f. Install systems ensuring that they can be thoroughly drained, and all air eliminated. Provide drain
cocks at all low points in the systems and air vents at all high points. Indicate accordingly on the
Shop Drawings.
g. During welding or soldering procedures, provide a fire retardant cloth, mat or blanket to protect
the structure and adequate fire protection equipment at all locations where work is being done.
Close off shaft or confine areas with a fire retardant mat or cloth to prevent sparks or pieces of hot
metal from falling down the shaft or area way.
h. Provide sufficient isolation valves in the installations to allow isolation of all floors, on each riser or
specific zones for the purposes of maintenance. Provide adequate drain cocks between isolation
valves to drain the isolated part of the system for the purpose of maintenance. Indicate all
isolation valves on the Shop Drawings.
4. Equipment supplied with below rim water supply connections, may not meet local requirements.
Provide vacuum breakers and/ or check valves, to code requirements. Connection to equipment shall
be with flanges or unions.
C. Plumbing Fixtures
1. Connect up the following equipment provided and/ or indicated under other Sections:
a. Provide water supply fixtures with stop valves.
2. During course of construction:
a. Cover exposed fittings with Vaseline and burlap.
b. Cover fixtures with protective housings.
c. Uncover and thoroughly clean fixtures and fittings when directed.
d. Install fixtures in perfect condition, at completion of job if fixtures are not in perfect condition they
shall be replaced by the Contractor without additional cost.
3. Fixture carrier base plates or feet; lag to slab with lead expansion shields and bolts in all bolt holes.
4. Install all fixtures, drains, cleanouts, etc. in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
5. Connect fixtures complete with supplies and drains, separately trapped with deep seal traps, supported
level and square. Provide chrome plated piping for all exposed water supply, waste and vent
connections complete with C.P. escutcheons.
6. Provide supports required to set fixtures square and level.
7. Fixtures mounted on glazed tile surfaces: Provide ground faces to finished surfaces.
8. Pipe both hot and cold water connections of lavatories and sinks to the cold water supply, except
where hot water provision is required to conform with the Contract Documents.
9. Install water hammer arresters for each fixture or group of fixtures.
10. Provide washrooms groups and branch takeoffs from mains with isolating gate valves. Install stop
valve in each fixture supply.
D. Drainage
1. Pipework:
a. Run pipes in straight lines and at uniform gradients. The minimum gradient shall be in accordance
with normal Code of Practice requirements, except that where such gradient on overhead pipes
would reduce the headroom materially, the gradient may be reduced if so directed by the
Engineer or as referenced in the Contract Documents.
b. In accordance with the latest Codes of Practice there shall be no maximum gradient for soil and
waste water pipe work. No branch drains shall have a lesser grade than that for the main drain to
which it is connected.
c. Make all branch connections on horizontal drainage systems with 135° branch fittings. Do not use
90° branches on horizontal drainage. 90° branches shall be used on vertical pipe work only. All
bends to be long radius except where space conditions preclude their use, submit details for
review by the Engineer prior to installation.
d. Install eccentric reducers in horizontal piping to permit drainage and eliminate air pockets.
e. Where pipe sizes differ from connection sizes of equipment, install reducing fittings close to
equipment. Reducing bushings are not permitted.
f. Sanitary and Storm Drainage: Run piping to main sewers with uniform grade. Trap with deep seal
traps and vent fixtures as required by code.
g. Jointing of Pipe: Compatible with type of pipe used.
2. Access to interior of pipework
a. Sufficient and suitable access shall be provided to enable all pipework to be tested and
maintained effectively. The access covers, plugs or caps shall be sited so as to facilitate the
insertion of testing apparatus and the use of equipment for cleaning and/ or for the removal of
blockages. Their use shall not be impeded by the structure of other services.
b. Vertical rainwater pipework shall be provided with means of access at or near the foot of the stack.
c. Vertical sanitary pipework shall be provided with means of access near to, but above, the spill-over
level of the pipe work likely to be affected by a blockage. Where no sanitary fittings are connected
on a floor to a stack, the means of access shall be provided at or near floor level.
d. Branch discharge pipes serving multiple sanitary fittings shall be provided with means of access at
the head of the branch and at the connection to the stack.
e. Means of access shall be provided at bends in the vertical and in the horizontal plane in long runs.
f. All access covers shall be removed, greased in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements
and bolted back into position.
g. Pipe below Ground Floor Slab:
1) Install soil and grey water drains below Ground Floor slab in preformed trenches.
2) Lay pipe on Class B bedding materials to grades necessary for drainage in accordance with
local code requirements.
3) Backfill preformed trench to within 50mm of finished floor.
4) Seal trench with 50mm concrete pour.
3. Drains shall be laid on a bed of granular material comprising approved gravel graded between 10 mm
and 14 mm and free dust.
4. The bedding material shall be well compacted and shall cover the full trench width.
5. The minimum bedding depth shall be at least 150 mm and shall include a temporary drain to sump for
dewatering if necessary.
6. Where the depth of cover indicated is less than 900 mm, drains shall be encased in concrete with a
minimum thickness in any direction of 150 mm.
7. Where flexible jointing is used on drainage systems the concrete encasement shall be sectionalized to
match the drain jointing with a 20 mm minimum thickness of a compressible material used as a
permanent shutter between sections to permit movement at joints.
8. In all cases the pipes shall be laid direct on the bedding and the use of bricks, blocks, battens or the
like to bring the pipeline to gradient will not be permitted.
9. Back filling shall be of selected excavated material placed and compacted in layer of 300mm up to
ground level.
10. To allow for possible differential movement, rigid pipes shall incorporate a flexible joint in each section
of the pipeline within 150 mm of where the drain leaves any building or connects with any manhole
wall or other structure.
11. The next length of pipe away from the structure shall be kept to a maximum of 600 mm in length and
shall have flexible joints at both ends.
12. Where granular beddings to the pipelines are detailed the minimum thickness of bedding material
beneath the pipe shall be:
a. 150 mm (minimum 100mm under sockets) for pipes not exceeding 300mm internal diameter.
b. 200 mm (minimum 100mm under sockets) for pipes exceeding 300mm internal diameter.
13. Service protection tapes shall be installed above all sewage, drainage and irrigation pipelines and
pressure mains constructed or exposed under this contract excluding individual service connections.
14. For pipelines with the top of the pipe barrel more than 900mm below finished surface level the tape
shall be placed over the centreline of the pipeline at 600mm below finished surface level during
backfilling and compaction operations. For pipelines with less than 900mm cover to the top of the pipe
barrel the tape shall be placed over the centreline of the pipe at 300mm above the top of the pipe
barrel during backfilling, compaction and reinstatement operations
15. The tape shall be continuous over pipelines and at joints between tapes from separate rolls the joint
shall be lapped a minimum of one meter.
16. Tapes shall be durable and detectable by electro-magnetic means using low output generator
equipment. They shall remain legible and colour-fast in all soil conditions at pH values of 2.5 to 11.0
inclusive.
17. The tapes shall be flexible with a minimum width of 150mm and thickness of 150 microns and shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval.
18. Site tests to confirm detectability of the warning tapes after installation and backfill shall be performed
when ordered by the Engineer.
19. Text in Arabic and English indicating the protected services lying below the tape shall be permanent
ink bonded to resist prolonged chemical attack by corrosive acids and alkalis with the message
repeated at a maximum interval of two metres. Tapes shall be colour coded as follows, with black test
as indicated. The sign and styles of the text shall be approved by the Engineer.
a. Sewers: Yellow.
1) CAUTION: Sewer below.
b. Sewage pressure mains: Yellow.
1) CAUTION: Sewage pressure main below.
c. Drains: Yellow.
1) CAUTION: Drain below.
d. Drainage pressure main: Yellow.
1) CAUTION: Drainage pressure main below.
e. Irrigation pressure mains: Orange.
1) CAUTION: Irrigation pressure main below.
E. Support and Fastening
1. The Contractor shall lay out all pipes and fittings and check alignment, internal matching of joints,
gradients and verticals before jointing and securing in position. The minimum clearance between any
pipe and the structure shall be 32mm after insulation has been applied.
2. All reducers shall be eccentric with the taper at:
a. Invert on horizontal pipes to give constant soffit level.
b. The front on vertical pipes to give constant distance between walls and pipes.
F. Vent System
1. In addition to the independent venting system, the soil and waste ventilating stacks shall be extended
above the roof level to provide a system of ventilation which shall permit the admission of air ensuring
that under normal and intended use, the seal of any trap shall not be subjected to a pressure
differential of more than 25mm of water. The vent piping shall, without excluding general piping
requirements described before, be installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the
following:
a. Ventilating pipes shall project through roofs, to vent into open air at the points indicated on the
Design Drawings.
b. The ventilating pipes terminating through the roof shall be fitted with a proprietary vent cowl at
the top, terminating at least 1000mm above the roof or as indicated the Design Drawings and/ or
as required by Statutory Authorities.
c. No vent terminal shall be directly beneath any door, window or other ventilating opening of the
building, nor shall any such vent terminal be within 3,000mm horizontally of such an opening
unless it is at least 900mm above the top of such an opening.
d. All vent and branch vent pipes shall be so graded and connected as to drip back to the soil or
waste pipe by gravity.
e. Where vent pipes connect to horizontal soil or waste pipes, the vent pipe shall be taken off above
the center line of the pipe. The vent pipe shall rise vertically or at an angle not more than 45° from
the vertical, to a point of at least 150mm above the spill over level of the fixture vented before off-
setting horizontally or before connecting to the branch vent.
f. A connection between a vent pipe and a vent stack or stack vent shall be made above the spill-
over level of the highest fixtures served by the vent. Horizontal vent pipes forming branch vents,
relief vents or loop vents shall be above the spill-over level of the highest fixture served.
A. Inspection and Testing
1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time at which all tests shall be held and shall provide all
the materials, labor and equipment required for testing. Upon completion of the test, copies of the
complete records shall be given to the Engineer for his retention in accordance with applicable
Divisions of the Specification.
pipe work and ancillary work during the test and shall replace or repair as directed by the Engineer,
any pipe or fitting, which in the opinion of the Engineer has failed to withstand the test.
B. Drainage Piping Systems, Waste, Vent, Kitchen and Storm Drains
1. Flush pipe with clear water to remove dirt and debris.
2. Test systems in accordance with ICBO, Uniform Plumbing Code or other applicable Sewerage Services
Company, Utility Company having jurisdiction, Municipality having jurisdiction and the Civil Defence
Authority having jurisdiction testing requirements. Test pressure and acceptance criteria are indicated
within each plumbing code. Visually inspect joints for leaks; repair or replace as required and retest.
C. Domestic Water Piping System
1. Flush pipe free of dirt and debris with fresh water.
2. Disinfect lines with fluid chlorine or hypochlorite – follow requirements listed below. Following
chlorination, thoroughly flush complete system until replacement water is same quality as incoming
city water. Submit certification.
3. Pressure test complete system with water at 1½ times the working pressure for 3 hours with no decay
in pressure. Use higher pressure where indicated or where required for building height or by the Utility
Authority having jurisdiction, Municipality having jurisdiction and Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction. Visually inspect joints for leaks, repair or replace and retest.
D. Gravity Drainage
1. Air Test:
a. This test, to detect if all pipes and fittings are airtight, shall be completed in 1 No. operation.
b. For large multi-story systems, the Contractor shall, with the Engineer's prior written acceptance,
test the system in sections.
c. Preparation: The water seals of all sanitary appliances shall be fully charged and test plugs or bags
inserted into the open ends of the pipe work to be tested. To ensure that there is a satisfactory air
seal at the base of stack, or at the lowest plug or bag in the stack, a small quantity of water
sufficient to cover the plug or bag can be allowed to enter the system. 1 No. of the remaining
testing plugs shall be fitted with a tee piece, with a cock on each branch, 1 No. branch being
connected by means of a flexible tube to a manometer.
d. Application: System shall be charged with air until a pressure equal to 35kPa is obtained. The air
inlet cock shall then be closed and pressure in the system shall remain constant for a period of not
less than 15 minutes.
e. Leak Detection: Defects by the air test may be located with the pipe work subjected to an internal
pressure; a soap solution can be applied to the pipes and joints. Leakage can be detected by the
formation of bubbles.
2. Water Test:
a. The part of the system below the lowest sanitary appliance shall be tested by inserting a test plug
in the lower end of the pipe and filling the pipe with water up to the flood level of the lowest
sanitary fixture, provided that the static head does not exceed 6m.
b. Long runs of above ground pipe work in the horizontal plane shall be subjected to the same water
test. This shall be applied by inserting a test plug downstream of the section to be tested and
filling the pipe with water up to the spill over level of the lowest sanitary fixture, upstream of the
section under test, provided that the static head does not exceed 6m.
c. Clean water shall be used and promptly removed upon completion of the test.
3. Gravity Drainage - Performance Tests:
a. Every trap shall retain not less than 25mm of seal when subjected to the appropriate tests given
below.
b. Each test shall be repeated 3 No. times; the trap being recharged before each test and the
maximum loss of seal in any one test measured by a dip stick, shall be taken as the significant
result.
c. To test for the effect of self-siphonage, the waste appliance shall be filled to overflowing level of
discharge in the normal way. WC pans shall be flushed. The seal remaining in the trap shall be
measured when the discharge has finished.
d. For multiple fixtures (combinations of fixtures), it shall be discharged after being filled to overflow
level and the seal remaining in each trap of the multiple fixtures measured when the discharge has
ended. The worst conditions are likely to occur when the fixtures at the top of the building are
discharged.
e. To test the stability of trap seals when water flows down the stack, the appropriate combinations
of fixtures shall be discharged simultaneously with all traps fully charged. The seal remaining in the
traps shall be measured when the discharge has ended.
f. Number of sanitary fixtures to be discharged for performance testing: Refer to Appendix 221000,
Table C.
4. Pumped drainage pipework Testing:
a. Pumped drainage pipe work shall be pressure tested in accordance with ASME B31 for a period of
2 hours.
b. The pipe work shall be tested to 150% of operating pressure or 175kPa whichever is the greater.
c. At the end of the test period the section of pipe work shall be inspected for leakage and if leaks
are observed or pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure then the test is considered to have
failed.
d. Repair sections of failed pipe work by disassembly and reinstallation using new material to the
extent required to overcome leakage. The use of chemicals, stop-leak compound, mastics or other
temporary repair methods is not acceptable.
e. Drain test water from piping system after testing and repair work has been completed.
5. Disinfections Test:
a. Disinfect, in the presence of the Employer and the Engineer, underground water mains after
installation and test in accordance with the requirements of the Utililty Company having
jurisdiction.
b. Disinfect interior and exterior potable water distribution system in accordance with requirements
of Statutory Authorities. Where no prescribed method exists, provide the following procedure:
1) After system is flushed, fill with either 50ppm chlorine water solution and let stand for 24
hours, or 200ppm chlorine water solution and let stand for 3 hours.
2) Flush system with clean potable water until no excess chlorine remains in system.
3) Repeat procedure if contamination still persists after further test.
c. Disinfect water storage tanks for potable water in accordance with AWWA standard or the
requirements of listed authorities. Where no prescribed method exists, provide the following
procedure:
1) Spray walls, floor, stanchions and underside of top with a 200ppm chlorine solution.
2) Fill tank with a 10ppm chlorine water solution and let stand for 2 hours.
3) Drain tank completely before refilling with clean potable water
A. Cleaning: Provide cleaning as needed to perform testing indicated under Site Quality Control of this
Section.
B. Piping System Leak Repair
1. Repair leaks which occur during the period of warranty, including any building damage or refinishing
costs, at no cost to Employer.
2. Repair all defects, which develop under tests promptly and repeat the tests. No caulking of screwed
joints, cracks, or holes shall be permitted.
3. Repair leaks in threaded pipe by replacing the thread or the fitting or both. Any replacement piece
shall be the same length as the piece removed.
C. Leave plumbing piping system operating with work areas clean to satisfaction of Engineer.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Refer to Section 017900 Demonstration and Training for additional demonstration and training
requirements.
B. Demonstration
1. Demonstrate to the Engineer, the features and functions of the system and subsystems, including the
labeling process.
2. Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstration and instructions and arrange to
have the manufacturer's representatives present to assist with the demonstrations.
a. Allow a minimum of 2 No. sessions for performing the prescribed demonstration lasting 4 hours
(i.e. each session lasting 2 hours).
3. Arrange with the Engineer the date and times for performing the demonstrations.
a. The Engineer shall select date and time for demonstration.
C. Training
1. Instruct the Employer and designated representatives in the proper operation and maintenance of the
system.
2. Conduct a training course for members of the operating and maintenance staff as designated by the
Engineer.
3. The training course shall be given at the installation during normal working hours for a total of 2 hours
and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests.
4. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the accepted Operation and Maintenance
(O+M) Manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
END OF SECTION
Appendix C 221000 PLUMBING PIPING
GRANULAR MATERIALS
• Conform to the following gradation requirements
PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT

Tyler Sieve Size Granular Granular “B” Granular Bedding Material
“A”
100.00mm 100 -
22.00mm 100 57-100 100
16.00mm 75-100 - -
12.50mm 65-90 - -
4.75mm 35-55 - 25
1.18mm 15-45 10-85 10
0.30mm 5-22 5-40 5-40
0.075mm 0-8 0-8 0-8
Where granular “A” is obtained from rock quarry sources a maximum of 10% passing the 0.075mm sieve
will be permitted.
• Conform to the following quality requirements
Granular “A” Granular “B” Material
Granular Bedding
Physical Test
Los Angeles
Abrasion
% Loss Maximum 60
% Crushed 50
Minimum
Plasticity Index 0 0
Determine the percentage of crushed minimum by examining the fraction retained on the 4.75mm sieve and
dividing the w eight of the crushed particles by the total w eight retained on the 4.75mm.
Inspecting and Testing
• Gravity Drainage – Performance Tests:
• Number of sanitary fixtures to be discharged for performance testing
Number of fixtures to be discharged simultaneously

Number of fixtures of
each kind on the stack WC WASH BASIN KITCHEN SINK
1 to 9 1 1
10 to 18 1 2
1
19 to 26 2 2
2
27 to 52 2 3
3
53 to 78 3 4
4
79 to 100 3 5
Pumped Drainage Pipework Testing
SECTION 221123 – DOEMSTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
C. General requirements for the domestic water pumps, especially:
1. Domestic Water Booster Set Pumps
2. Domestic Water Transfer Pumps
3. Domestic Water Filter Feed Pumps
4. Domestic Water Recirculation pumps
D. Related Work Sections and Documentation
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Engineer.
C. Technical Submittals
7. Warranties
the system.
In addition to the above layouts and sections prepare details indicating sizes and locations of special
details including but not limited to:
19. Sleeves and openings.
20. Inserts and anchors.
21. Access panel openings.
22. Pits.
23. Housekeeping pads, vibration isolators and equipment bases.
following:
1. Warranties.
2. Unless otherwise specified in other Work Sections, provide a manufacturer's full warranty covering all
products of this Division, valid for 1 year from date of issue of Taking-Over Certificate, irrespective of
delivery date and trial usage.
3. Provide warranty certificates for all equipment supplied to this project.
5. Comply with the guarantee requirements of the individual requirements of the individual Work
7. Record Drawings: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
8. Recommended Spare Parts list: As referenced in applicable Work Sections. Spare parts list shall identify
1. Preconstruction Testing / Reports: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
5. Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
6. Comply fully with the edition (including amendments) of each of the referenced in applicable Work
a. BS EN 1151-1&2
b. BS EN 60335-2.51
c. BS 4082-1.
d. BS 4082-2.
e. BS 5257.
7. Stuffing box housings and pulleys shall be cast iron to BS EN 1561
8. Single stage in-line pumps shall be to BS 5257
9. The hydraulic accumulator shall be a steel shell type with an internal diaphragm to BS 6144 where
applicable.
10. Pump connections shall be screwed to BS 21 for sizes up to 50mm diameter, and flanged to BS EN
1092 to suit the system maximum pressure on sizes 65mm and above.
11. Stainless Steel interconnecting pipework shall comply with EN/DIN 1.4301
12. Flanges shall comply with the requirements of BS 4504.
13. Threaded ends shall be BSP threads complying with DIN 2999-1 standard.
14. The hydraulic accumulator construction shall be based on DIN 4807 T3 and Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC.
15. Pumps shall have the performance and duty as stated elsewhere.
16. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
and Specification.
A. Delivery
B. Storage
1. Store all equipment and supplies in a manner accepted by the Engineer and per the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
C. Handling
4. Be responsible for any cutting and patching involved in getting assemblies into place.
B. Accessibility
a. Civil Work Coordination
1) Take into account all of the Civil / Electrical / Mechanical Work performed by other
Subcontractors associated with the installation of electrical, mechanical, plumbing and other
facilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Work Included
specific trade.
2. The Work shall include all labor, materials, equipment, permits and tools required for a complete and
22 Plumbing.
C. Scope of Work
1. Select pumps to meet the requirements of this specification and the performance duties shown in the
schedules.
2. Ensure pumps and their drives are segregated such that failure of pump seals shall not result in
damage to the drive motor.
3. Ensure pumps are quiet, smooth running and effectively isolated from the building fabric.
4. Provide suitable anti-vibration mountings and flexible connections to all pumps unless stated
otherwise.
5. Ensure that the complete unit is efficiently balanced to eliminate nuisance noise and vibration.
Documents.
B. General:
1. All pumps shall be suitable for the service pumped and the operating temperatures and pressures
stated elsewhere.
2. Pumps shall be capable of providing the duties required at the design operating conditions.
3. The Contractor shall recalculate the total system resistance based upon the final plant selection and
installed drawings and revise the pump duty as necessary to achieve the design flow rate and duty
head.
4. The Contractor shall similarly reselect the necessary electrical requirements or any other variation in
associated equipment caused by a change in system pressure drop.
5. Performance curves showing head, volume flow rate, efficiency and absorbed power of each pump
shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to equipment being ordered. Pump curves shall indicate
performance under all likely operating conditions. Data shall be related to pump speed to allow the
effect of speed changes to be assessed.
6. Pumps shall be selected to ensure that they are not operating at the extremes of their range by basing
the selection on a mid-range impeller.
7. Operate the pumps so as to consume minimum energy consistent with providing the required service
and ensure they are capable of providing an increased duty if required to do so.
8. Where pumps are operated under variable speed control then they shall be selected to the right hand
side of the best efficiency point (BEP). A constant speed pump shall be selected within +/- 20% of the
BEP. For constant flow pumps the contractor shall allow for trimming of the impellor at commissioning.
9. All pumps shall have the motor, motor frame, impeller casing and drives of sufficient size to allow the
capability of a 10% minimum increase in head generated at the stated flow rate by increasing the
impeller size only. The motor shall be selected such that the power curve does not cross the pump
curve at any point (non-overloading).
10. Connecting pipework shall be arranged to ensure that no stresses are transmitted to the pump
casings.
11. Pumps shall be provided with anti-vibration mountings and flexible connections. The Contractor shall
ensure that the complete unit is effectively balanced to eliminate noise and vibration.
12. Pumps shall be arranged to be fully accessible for maintenance with adequate space to allow motors
to be safely removed from the pump assembly and with space for left available lifting equipment if
required.
13. Single case twin impeller/twin motor pumps shall be provided with a blanking plate to allow one pump
to continue operating while the motor of the other is removed.
14. Unless otherwise stated pumps shall have a maximum sound pressure level of 75 dBA at a distance of
1 metre
15. Minimum pumping efficiency shall be 70-75% at the stated duty unless stated otherwise.
16. Pumps on closed circuit systems shall be selected with a maximum operating speed of 1450rpm unless
otherwise stated or agreed with the Engineer.
17. Motors shall comply with the relevant sections of this specification. All motor selections shall be
agreed with the Engineer prior to the equipment being ordered.
18. Where stand-by pumps are indicated with automatic change-over, the change-over shall be initiated
and verified by means of flow sensing devices of an approved type. Non-return check valves, selected
to have low resistance flow, shall be incorporated in each discharge line.
19. Each pump shall be fitted with an isolating valve on the inlet and outlet connections. Valves and
strainers shall be pipeline size, not connection size and shall be in accordance with the relevant
20. Pump connections shall be provided with flanges or unions, as appropriate, to permit the pipework to
be removed for casing and impeller inspection and cleaning without draining the system or major
dismantling of pipework.
21. Pumps shall be complete with a drain plug and, except where the pump is inherently self-venting, a
manual air vent.
22. Bedplates, incorporating drain pans shall have a piped drain arranged to discharge over a protected
tundish.
23. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all dimensions and details to enable pump bases to
be set out.
24. Equipment shall be arranged so that is safely accessible for maintenance.
2.3 SUCTION AND DELIVERY CONNECTIONS
A. Provide pumps with connections appropriate to the maximum working pressure with:
1. Screwed ports for sizes 50mm and below.
2. Flanged connections for sizes 65mm and above.
B. Provide taper pieces where necessary to connect to pipework.
C. Provide isolating valves on the suction and discharge side of each pump.
D. Provide isolating valves, non-return valves and strainers (where shown) of pipeline size does not pump
connection size.
E. Provide altitude gauges, with siphon and cock, on the suction and discharge side of each pump.
1. Each pump shall be provided with two pressure gauges, one connected to the suction side and one to
the discharge side.
2. Where stand-by pumps are installed, one pair of gauges shall be so connected with isolating cocks
that the pressure head of each pump can be read.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. General
B. Pump materials
1. Casings, pedestals, base plates, stuffing box housings and pulleys shall be cast iron. Casings shall be
fitted with air vent and drain plugged tappings.
2. Impellers shall be cast iron, stainless steel, gun metal or bronze to suit the application.
3. Impellers for hot water supply circulators shall be bronze or stainless steel.
4. Shafts shall be stainless steel or carbon steel to suit the application. Stainless steel sleeves shall be
fitted in the wetted section together with mechanical seals.
5. High temperature hot water pumps shall have close-grained cast iron or cast steel casings, nickel iron
impellers and stainless steel shafts.
6. Packed glands shall not be used on variable pressure installations, or where temperatures exceed
115°C.
7. Bearings shall be the heavy-duty ball type. Bearings shall have a minimum life of 30,000 running hours.
8. The permissible service pressure of cast iron pump casings shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. No pump part or component part shall be subjected to a gauge
pressure in excess of 16 bar.
9. Impellers and couplings shall be keyed to the drive shaft. Shafts shall be fitted with water deflectors.
2.5 TYPES OF PUMPS
A. Circulating Pumps
a. Pumps shall be mounted on a common bedplate or steel base frame with the drive motor, except
for vertical pumps, twin pump sets and in-line types.
b. Drip pipes shall be extended from the gland well tapped outlet to a tundish and cleanable drain
pipe system.
B. Direct Coupled Pumps
1. The pump and drive motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron bedplate and be connected with
a guarded flexible coupling. Where appropriate, back pull-out facility shall be provided.
a. Close Coupled Pumps
1) The motor and pump shall be mounted on a cast iron sub-frame and baseplate. The pump
casing shall be vertically split to provide back pull-out facility with casing parting screws.
C. In-Line Pumps
1. Pumps shall have close-coupled motors with spindles at right angles to the pump axis. Inlet and outlet
shall be in the same plane. Units shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. Bearings shall be
pre-packed type.
2. Casing and base shall be of cast iron or bronze. Pumps shall be mounted on a prepared base, or on
wall brackets.
D. Twin Pumpsets
1. Twin pumpsets shall comprise direct-driven horizontal in-line pumps coupled together in parallel with
common inlet and outlet connections. The outlet connection shall incorporate a changeover check
valve.
E. Semi-Rotary Hand Pumps
1. Semi-rotary hand pumps for emptying purposes shall be double acting with a cast iron body, steel
spindle with brass wing, brass suction divider with hinged brass flap valves. Pumps shall be mounted
on a tripod and be provided with three metres length suction and delivery hoses with suitable
connectors.
F. Domestic Water Booster Set Pumps
1. Cold water booster pumps shall be of the centrifugal type or multi-stage as required. Pumps may be
an integral part of a packaged booster set.
2. Cold water booster pumps shall be complete with a motor control starter/control panel, provisions for
water level controls at storage tanks, level sensing devices and interconnecting wiring.
location of his manufacturing shop tests for the following, but not limited to listed equipment:
a. Domestic Water Booster Set Pumps
b. Domestic Water Transfer Pumps
c. Domestic Water Filter Feed Pumps
d. Domestic Water Recirculation pumps
under the Contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PACKAGED DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMP SETS
1. Packaged water booster sets shall comprise all items of equipment or component parts necessary to
form a fully operational booster set.
2. Packaged water booster sets shall meet the requirements of the Local Water Authority.
3. In the event that the pump set may need to be supplied in separate sections to facilitate handling, the
associated re-assembly of the pump set, once in its permanent position on site, shall be carried out in
such a way that the complete booster works like a single unit as indicated by the pump manufacturer’s
catalogues.
4. All pipework, fittings and components shall be approved for use with potable water.
5. The minimum test pressure rating shall be 1.5 times the closed valve head of the booster set.
6. The booster set shall be mounted on a purpose made steel frame with adequate anti-vibration mounts
and flexible couplings to prevent transmission of vibration to the building structure or service
pipework.
7. The booster set shall have duty and stand-by pumps.
8. The pumps shall be high efficiency, vertical single or multistage to suit the application.
9. The pump body shall be cast iron with stainless steel shaft and stainless steel or gunmetal impeller
fitted with mechanical tungsten carbide faced seals.
10. The pumps shall meet the design duty at a maximum speed of 48 rev/s.
11. An integral hydraulic accumulator shall be fitted. The hydraulic accumulator shall be a steel shell type
with an internal diaphragm where applicable.
12. The booster set shall include an integral suction tank located to provide a flooded suction under all
normal operating conditions. The overflow and warning pipe shall each be fitted with a Norscreen
Model 1 screen unit or equal and approved by the Engineer.
B. Pipework & Fittings
1. All pipework shall hold marking with the adequate pressure rating.
2. Fittings shall be either non-dezincifiable capillary type with integral lead free solder ring or non-
dezincifiable copper alloy fittings suitable for silver brazing.
3. Drain valves shall be 15mm diameter gunmetal lockshield.
4. Connections between the booster set and the system piping, the inlets and outlets to the pumps, and
the hydraulic accumulator shall be flanged.
5. Gate valves shall be fitted to the suction and discharge of each pump, to the accumulator connection
and to all gauges, pressure switches etc.
6. Check valves shall be fitted upstream of the gate valves on each pump discharge.
7. The non-return valves shall be designed for optimum flow capabilities in order to reduce pressure
losses. It should essentially be a non-slam type, spring loaded, backflow-proof non-return valve
whereas commercial check-valve type construction is not acceptable.
8. Drain valves shall be fitted on the discharge header and on all sections of isolated pipework.
C. Controls
1. Each pump shall be controlled by an electrical two position pressure switch with a scale range to cover
a band of at least one and a half times the specified values.
2. The pump manifold shall be fitted with a system pressure gauge scaled in bars and be accurate to 2%
of scale width throughout the range. The gauge scale range shall be at least 1.5 times the system
closed head pressure.
3. Low level pump cut-out switches shall be provided.
D. Hydraulic accumulator:
1. The hydraulic accumulator vessel shall be connected to the discharge line of the pipe-work unless
otherwise stated. The hydraulic accumulator can also be incorporated within the confines of the
booster set as an integral part of package provided the size and positioning permits so.
2. The vessel shall have either a replaceable internal membrane or non-replaceable diaphragm and be of
steel construction, with formal approval for use on potable water systems.
3. The accumulator shall have a working pressure suitable for the expected maximum system pressure.
The test pressure will be 1.5 times the maximum working pressure of the vessel.
4. The vessel shall be provided with isolating and drain valves. The valves shall be arranged in such a way
that whilst maintenance procedures are carried out on the vessel the booster set will remain fully
operational.
Note: The hydraulic accumulator for fixed speed booster pump set shall be sized so that the number
of pump starts is limited to twelve per hour, but at least 200 litres, unless otherwise stated.
3.3 IN-LINE DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
B. Arrange the circulating pumps to operate for 24 hours, 365 days per year.
C. Arrange the circulating pumps to operate under the control of the building automation system.
D. Ensure that circulation pumps are capable of providing the duties specified in the equipment schedules
and meet the requirements of Division 22 specifications.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 221200 - FACILITY POTABLE WATER STIRAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. GRP Water Storage Tanks and Reinforced Concrete Water Storage Tank.
1. Structural Specification,
3. Section 220523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.
4. Section 223200 Domestic Water Filtration Equipment.
D. Definitions
1. GRP: Glass Reinforced Plastics.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.
a. Submit manufacture's assembly-type Shop Drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings,

required clearances and methods of assembly of components.
a. Submit manufacture's specifications and installation instructions.
the system.
1. Submit samples of identification materials together with schedule of application.
the following.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
3. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of equipment, control and
accessory, including trouble - shooting maintenance guide. Include this data, product data and Shop
Drawings in maintenance manual.
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers
shall be firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of specified items with characteristics, sizes, and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for
not less than 10 years.
2. Certification, test certificates under specified operation conditions shall be provided by manufacturer
2. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards:
a. BS EN 13280 Specification for glass fiber reinforced plastic cisterns of one-piece and sectional
construction, for the storage, above ground, of cold water.
b. BS EN 13076, Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Unrestricted air gap.
Family-A Type-A.
c. BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dipped galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications
and test methods.
E. Testing and Inspection: Provide as indicated under Site Quality Control within Part 3 of this Section.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to Site under provisions of Section 016000 Product
Requirements.
B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to Site with particular reference to KSA, climatic conditions.
C. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking denting and scoring. Don not
install damaged equipment or components, replace with new.
D. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction
debris and physical damage.
A. Project Climatic Conditions
1. Refer to the Particular Specification for details of the project location and associated climatic
conditions.
2. Climate
a. Violent sand and dust storms of several hours duration occur and even on comparatively still days,
fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
b. All apparatus and equipment shall therefore be so designed and constructed that they
operate satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged and continuous periods in
the conditions stated in the Particular Specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Supply and installation of Water Storage Tanks as indicated in the Particular Specification and on Design
Drawings.
B. Contractor shall provide the tank footing as per manufacturer recommendation and as indicated in the
Particular Specification and on the Design Drawings
2.3 MATERIALS
A. GRP Water Storage Tank and Accessories
1. The manufacturer and design of the hot press molded GRP sectional water storage tanks shall be to
the quality standard requirements of BS EN ISO 9001 and shall comply with BS EN 13280, Glass fiber
reinforced plastic cisterns for cold water storage.
2. Cisterns shall be manufactured by the hot press molded method, glass reinforced plastic, molded at
temperatures up to 150°C using isophthalic unsaturated polyester resins, UV stabilized and 'E'
glassfiber reinforcement, color mid gray.
3. The cistern design shall incorporate 1m x 1m pillow panels to walls of non-insulated cisterns with
provision for flat panels for connections and fittings. Purpose made cover panels 1m x 1m and 1m x
0.5m flat panels positioned to give free draining channels.
4. Base panels available as internally flanged IFB with 1m x 1m flat panels, fasteners internal, or externally
flanged EFB with 1m x 1m flat panels and one pillow sump panel, fasteners external.
5. All surfaces of the panels shall be smooth and crevice free to provide hygienic finish and be
dimensionally accurate with sharply defined profiles.
6. Float valve chambers to be provided with central hinged lockable ABC lid, 1m x 1m in plan, with
options of 180mm, 300mm and 500mm depth with provision for type an air gap in compliance with BS
EN 13076.
7. Man access 600mm diameter hinged lockable ABS lid.
8. All tanks deeper than 1.5m shall be fitted with internal GRP ladders, external standard duty stainless
steel access ladders.
9. Where partitions are required, they shall be of full height using standard panels. Each compartment to
be capable of supporting water on either side with one side empty.
10. Panels to be rigidly supported by a combination of stainless steel tie rods internally and galvanized
box sections externally. Bolts and nuts used in assembly of tanks shall be stainless steel grade 316/ A4.
11. Steelworks designed to BS 5950, internally stainless steel grade 316/ A4 and externally mild steel
galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461. The cisterns to incorporate external wall bracing on depths greater
than 1.5m, and tie rods 2m.
12. Extruded synthetic rubber sealing strip to be used covering full width of panel flange providing a
watertight seal.
13. Certificate of WRc (Water Research Center) approval shall be provided.
14. Composite Material Specifications:
a. Density: 1800Kg/ m³ in accordance with ISO 1183.
b. Water Absorption: 0.18Mg in accordance with ISO 62.
c. Coefficient Thermal Expansion: 2.1 x 10 °C in accordance with ASTM D696.
d. Flexural Strength: 185Mpa in accordance with ISO 178.
e. Flexural Modules: 13Gpa in accordance with ISO 178.
f. Tensile Strength: 90Mpa in accordance with ISO R 3268.
g. Impact Strength: 80Kj/ m² in accordance with ISO 179.
h. Glass Content: 30%.
i. Light Transmission: 0.00.
j. Panel strength shall be fully compliant with BS EN 13280, giving a factor of safety of tanks in
excess of 6 times working pressure against rupture.
15. Insulation of Tank shell/ panels:
a. insulation shall be at least 40mm thick of expanded polystyrene (density grade 30) or
polyurethane foam 25mm thick 40Kg/ m³ insulating material. Insulation shall not be exposed to
external weather conditions, it shall be covered with an external permanently fixed cover made of
the same materials used in the GRP panels which shall be resistant to ultraviolet radiation, weather
protective and water tight.
16. Tank Fittings (all tank compartments above and below ground level)
a. Overflow pipes shall be:
1) Dipped down inside tanks so as to terminate in a position maximum 150mm above bottom of
tanks.
2) Provided with metal hinged flaps at outlets.
3) Discharge in conspicuous position.
4) Strainers with Anti-vortex Plate shall be:
a) 3mm thick brass strainer.
b) with 3mm thick stainless steel anti-vortex plates.
c) with total perforation area of 3mm maximum diameter holes not less than twice of the
cross.
d) section area of pump suction pipe.
b. After installation, tanks shall be filled with water for testing for 24 hours. No leakage shall be
observed at joints.
c. On completion of leak tests, the tank shall be flushed out twice using maximum water pressure
available and all extraneous matter removed including the water used during the operation.
B. Reinforced Concrete Water Storage Tank
1. The main water storage tank shall be reinforced concrete construction and shall be of the capacity and
dimensions as indicated in the Design Drawings.
2. They shall comply with the relevant local authority standards for internal linings.
3. Tanks shall be complete with the following:
a. 800x800 mm openings with sealed manhole cover for each valve / accessory.
b. Manholes shall be double sealed manhole covers. With watertight hinged cover and locking
device.
c. Internal stainless steel ladders.
d. Inlets, outlets over flows, drains and insect proof vent cowls as required on Design Drawings.
4. Tank shall be tested for the water leak test for 24 hours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All tanks shall be installed strictly in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. All cisterns to be installed on either flat continuous foundation or close center beams conforming to
manufacturer's specifications of flatness and deflection.
3. Installation shall be carried out by approved installers.
A. Testing shall be carried out on completion of installation and to be completed within ten working days of
assembly.
B. The testing of panels and sealant shall be as listed by Water Research Center, UK conforming to water
fittings By-Laws Scheme.
C. Civil Work Coordination
1. Take into account all of the Civil/ Mechanical Work performed by all other Subcontractors associated
with installation of electrical, mechanical, plumbing and other facilities.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 221429 – SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Sump pumps
1. Section 220500 Common Results for Plumbing.
2. Section 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.
3. Section 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping.
4. Section 220523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.
5. Section 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
7. Section 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC.
10. Division 27 Communication Work Sections.
11. Division 28 Electronic Security and Safety Work Sections.
D. Definitions
2. ABS: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene.
4. PPR: Polypropylene.
5. uPVC: Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride.
6. CI: Cast Iron
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for each piece of equipment supplied by this section including
but not limited to:
a. Plumbing fixtures and related trims.
b. Pressure reducing valves, gate valves and globe valves.
c. Backflow preventers.
d. Expansion joints and water hammer arresters.
e. Localized water heaters.
f. Floor drains and roof drains.
g. Float valves.
h. Filters.
i. Manholes.
j. Level devices.
k. Sand, oil and grease interceptors.
system.
C. Technical Samples.
the following.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
3. Spare Parts:
a. 2% of the total installed isolating valves, stop cocks, PRVs and NRVs.
b. 2 No. sets of manufacturer recommended spare parts for sump pumps for 2 years of operation.
A. Acceptable manufacturer
1. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of
plumbing fixtures and fittings.
2. All plumbing fixtures shall be of one manufacturer.
3. The Contractor shall execute the work of this section only by skilled tradesmen regularly employed in
the installation of plumbing and drainage systems and Site water supply and drainage services.
4. Consumer Electronics Association, CEA Standards.
5. Lightning Protection Institute, LPI Standards.
6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, IEEE Standards.
7. International Electrical Testing Association, NETA Standards.
8. Telecommunications Industry Association, TIA Standards.
E. Testing and Inspection.
A. Delivery: Provide factory applied plastic and caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps
through shipping, delivery, storage and placing in position to prevent pipe end damage and to eliminate
the ingress of dirt and moisture.
B. Storage: Store pipe and tube indoors on purpose made racks, to protect from weather. Where it is
necessary to store outdoors provide purpose made racks to elevate pipe and tube above grade and
enclose the whole with durable weatherproof covering.
C. Handling: Protect flanges and fittings from damage by dirt and moisture by inside storage or by packaging
in durable waterproof wrapping.
A. Project Climatic Conditions
1. Refer to the Particular Specification for details of the project location and associated climatic
conditions.
2. Climate
a. Violent sand and dust storms of several hours' duration occur and even on comparatively still
days, fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
b. All apparatus and equipment shall therefore be so designed and constructed that they operate
satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged and continuous periods in the
conditions stated in the Particular Specification.
B. Civil Work Coordination
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pipe Lengths
B. Pipe Sizes
1. Conflicts or inconsistencies of pipe sizes, arrangements and details for final connections shall be
resolved as accepted by the Engineer.
C. Piping Diagrams: The Contract Documents may include piping diagrams as a part of the Design Drawings.
These piping diagrams are not for the purpose of giving physical dimensions or locations, but rather to
show all required piping accessories necessary to make clear the interconnections, by the piping system, of
the various units of the process. If an item is indicated on either the piping diagram or on the Design
Drawings, but not on both, it shall be assumed that the Contractor has included such item in his estimate
of the cost of the work and that he shall provide the same.
D. The Design Drawings are intended for the Contractor's guidance. The Design Drawings are schematic and
diagrammatic and shall not be scaled. Verify accuracy and immediately notify the Engineer of any
discrepancies, which could not be coordinated under the coordination requirement within the Specification
ensuring that they may be resolved prior to actual fabrication, or installation of work.
2. Promptly communicate to the Engineer any changes affecting accessibility to or clearance around
E. Should adequate protection to prevent ingress of dirt, debris etc into the system not be provided the
Engineer shall request flow and/ or CCTV tests to be undertaken to demonstrate unobstructed flow within
new and existing pipe work at no cost to the contract.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. iping Materials, General: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or
class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, request proper selection from
the Engineer.
B. Packaged Sump Pumps
1. Provide packaged sump pumps as listed in the equipment schedules indicated on the Design
Drawings. Packaged sump pump shall have a macerator with minimum solid handling capacity of 80
mm diameter.
2. Packaged set, complete pre-built waste water sump ready for installation. Pump housings, impellers,
shafts and pump sleeves shall be all in stainless steel. It shall incorporate a control panel with mains
disconnect switch, high and low level switches and alarms and outputs for remote annunciation at the
BMS.
3. Tank shall be complete with inflow parts, vent part for venting and use as a cable duct, supplied with
plug/ cable inlet, seal, discharge part and damps.
4. Pumps shall be supplied with individual KS floats for automatic level control.
C. Packaged Waste Water Pump Units:
1. Drainage sump pump installations shall comprise duplicate proprietary submersible type sewage
pumps with flameproof electric motors.
2. The drainage sump pump installation shall include pumps (with quick release couplings), guide rails,
lifting chains, discharge pipework and valves, automatic pump controller, pump control float switches
(start/ stop/ alarm), wiring between controller and pumps and sump vent pipe.
3. The pump controller shall comprise heavy gauge robust sheet steel controls cabinet/ enclosure,
powder coated, with lockable quick opening door and IP 55 protection. The controls cabinet/
enclosure shall house all controls devices, components, relays, contactors, switches, warning/ indicator
lamps, etc and include:
a. Door interlocked isolator
b. Pump motors protected by miniature circuit breakers.
c. Power on lamp.
d. High water level (visual and audible) alarm indication.
e. Audible alarm muting switch/ button.
f. Pump failed alarm indication (visual and audible).
g. Run/ trip indicator lamps per pump.
h. Pump run test buttons/ switches.
i. Pump off/ manual/ auto switches per pump.
j. Tripped VFC per pump.
k. Hours run meters per pump.
l. Remote stop/ start facility.
m. Explosion proof.
4. Each pump controller shall be compatible with and interface with the BMS as indicated.
5. The installer shall fully liaise and coordinate with the sump pump manufacturer and BMS/controls
specialist to ensure the BMS/ controls interface requirements are incorporated.
6. The installer shall instruct the equipment manufacture to incorporate any reasonable modifications
necessary to achieve the correct BMS/ controls interface requirements.
7. The pump controller shall include volt-free contacts for communication of the following functions to
the BMS/ controls as follows:
a. Power on/ fuse failure alarm.
b. Pump run status per pump.
c. Pump trip per pump.
d. High water level alarm.
e. Remote stop/ start facility.
8. The sump shall be provided with the GRP lamination and the rungs as per the local authority
standards.
9. Pipe Installation:
a. Install all piping in the best workmanlike manner in accordance with the best practices of the
trade.
b. The piping indicated on the Design Drawings is diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the
general run and connections and may or may not be, in all instances, indicated in its true
position. Take responsibility for the proper erection of systems of piping in every respect suitable
for the work intended and as described in the specifications.
c. Keep plugged or capped all openings in pipe or fittings during installation.
10. Inspection and Testing:
a. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time at which all tests are to be held and shall
provide all the materials, labor and equipment required for testing. Upon completion of the tests,
copies of the complete records shall be given to the Engi- neer for his retention in accordance
with Division 01 General Requirements submittals.
b. The Contractor shall ensure the safety of the pipe work under test and he shall be responsible for
the pipe work and ancillary works during the test and shall replace or repair as directed by the
Engineer, any pipe or fitting which in the opinion of the En- gineer has failed to withstand the test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Identify piping flow direction and contents. Refer to Section 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment.
B. As per manufacturer’s recommendations
A. Inspection and Testing
1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time at which all tests shall be held and shall provide all
the materials, labor and equipment required for testing. Upon completion of the test, copies of the
complete records shall be given to the Engineer for his retention in accordance with applicable
Divisions of the Specification.
pipe work and ancillary work during the test and shall replace or repair as directed by the Engineer,
any pipe or fitting, which in the opinion of the Engineer has failed to withstand the test.
3. Equipment Testing:
a. Sump Pumps:
1) As per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2) Check each sump pump for lift and flow.
3) Check level switches for correct pump operation.
4) Check alternator on duplex units.
5) Check reservoir level controls for correct switching at high medium and low level settings.
Section.
2. Repair all defects, which develop under tests promptly and repeat the tests. No caulking of screwed
joints, cracks, or holes shall be permitted.
C. Leave plumbing piping system operating with work areas clean to satisfaction of Engineer.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
requirements.
B. Demonstration
1. Demonstrate to the Engineer, the features and functions of the system and subsystems, including the
labeling process.
a. Allow a minimum of 2 No. sessions for performing the prescribed demonstration lasting 4 hours
(i.e. each session lasting 2 hours).
a. The Engineer shall select date and time for demonstration.
C. Training
1. Instruct the Employer and designated representatives in the proper operation and maintenance of the
system.
2. Conduct a training course for members of the operating and maintenance staff as designated by the
Engineer.
3. The training course shall be given at the installation during normal working hours for a total of 2 hours
and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests.
4. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the accepted Operation and Maintenance
(O+M) Manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Unvented Electric Domestic Hot Water Heaters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Engineer.
7. Warranties
system.
following:
1. Warranties.
a. Comply with the guarantee requirements of the individual requirements of the individual Work
C. Recommended Spare Parts list: As referenced in applicable Work Sections. Spare parts list shall identify by
name, the part numbers and quantities recommended and the current prices.
1. BS 417-2 Specification for galvanised low carbon steel cisterns, cistern lids, tanks and cylinders Part 2:
Metric units.
2. BS 853 Specification for vessels for use in heating systems. Part 1: Calorifiers and storage vessels for
central heating and hot water supply Part 2: Tubular heat exchangers and storage vessels for building
and industrial services
3. BS 3198 Specification for copper hot water storage combination units for domestic purposes
4. BS 5615 Specification for insulating jackets for domestic hot water storage cylinders
5. BS 8558 2011 Guide to the design, installation, testing and maintenance of services supplying water for
domestic use within buildings and their curtilages - complementary guidance to BS EN 806
6. BS EN 12451 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless round tubes for heat exchangers
7. BS EN 60335-2-73 Household and similar electrical appliances Part 2-73: Particular requirements for
fixed immersion heaters
8. BS EN 60730-2-9 Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use Part 2-9: Particular
requirements for temperature sensing controls
9. BS 853-1. BS 720.
10. BS 7206
11. BS 8558
12. Ensure that all immersion heaters comply with BS EN 60335-2-73 and are provided with a thermostat
to BS EN 60730-2-9.
13. Ensure that all electric domestic water heaters are pre insulated as recommended in BS 1566, BS 3198
or BS EN 12897 as applicable.
14. HSC L8 Legionnaires’ disease - the control of legionella bacteria in water systems
1.5 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS:
and Specification.
A. Delivery
B. Storage
1. Store all supplies in a manner accepted by the Engineer and per manufacturer’s recommendation.
3. Protect supplies from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage,
by storing in original wrapping.
C. Handling
1. Handle supplies carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged
pipes / tubes or components, replace with new.
C. Accessibility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Work Included
specific trade.
22 Plumbing.
C. Scope of Work
Documents.
and catch basins.
B. The electric domestic water heater installation shall be as described in the Particular Specification,
Schedules and Drawings.
C. Furnish and install complete factory assembled packaged system, including auxiliary components and
controls.
D. The Supplier must be capable of providing and supporting any maintenance activities associated with the
equipment by trained personnel.
E. The Supplier must carry a stock of critical parts in the event of breakdown and must be able to supply
consumables under any planned maintenance schedules within a maximum agreed time.
F. The Supplier must be able to provide training to any nominated third party operators using the equipment.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
B. Electric domestic water heaters
1. Ensure that for every electric domestic water heater its construction is as specified on the equipment
schedules.
2. Removable and replaceable electric heating elements shall be provided in the tank, the elements shall
be incoloy sheath, immersion type with low watt density.
3. Water heater shall be factory wired for 3 phase operation with field adjustment to 1 phase as needed
and include internal fusing.
4. Manufacture all units from one of the following materials:
a. copper
b. steel (copper lined)
c. steel (glass-lined)
d. stainless steel
5. Note that where reference is made within the particular specification and on the equipment schedules
to steel calorifiers, this refers to copper-lined steel or glass-lined steel as listed above.
6. Where reference is made within the specification and on the equipment schedules to direct cylinders,
this refers to cylinders provided with an electric immersion heater as their only means of heating.
7. Each calorifier shall have a dial thermometer with lagging extension and isolating cock.
8. Sacrificial anodes shall be provided.
9. Dielectric separation shall be provided.
10. Cylinders shall be fixed to allow for floor finishes.
11. Wall-mounted units shall be securely fixed and orientated, as per the manufacturer’s requirements
(vertical or horizontal).
12. Sufficient clearance shall be maintained to allow withdrawal and replacement of heating elements and
anodes.
13. Hand-holes and man-ways shall be located to face the access positions.
14. Pipe connections shall be independently supported and impose no load on the cylinder.
15. Cylinders connected in parallel shall have fully accessible individual isolating valves.
16. Safety valve discharge pipes shall terminate below floor gulley gratings. Where the termination point is
remote, identification labels shall be fitted.
C. Connections
1. Ensure that every electric domestic water heater is manufactured with all its connections of the
required type and size positioned to suit proper co-ordination with site conditions.
2. Provide the connections shown on the schedule(s) or drawings.
3. Provide each electric domestic water heater with a baffle plate on the cold feed inlet to the unit,
arranged to disperse the incoming cold water and achieve mixing of the cold with the stored warm
water.
4. Where valves are fitted to relieve temperature or pressure, install relief stream piping from them to
discharge to a safe discharge point within the plant room (e.g. a floor drain), terminating 150mm
above floor drains and, where required, incorporating a tundish.
5. Where the electric domestic water heater shell is manufactured to a design pressure lower than the
working pressure of the primary fluid, fit to the shell, in addition to a secondary fluid pressure relief
valve or safety valve, a bursting disc. Install relief stream piping from the bursting disc to a safe
discharge point.
6. Where electric domestic water heater is of the copper-lined steel or glass-lined steel type, fit a vacuum
breaker to the shell to prevent the implosion of the lining.
7. Provide an adequately sized (minimum 100mm clear internal diameter), accessible clean out access
door/port at low level on each electric domestic water heater.
D. Immersion heaters
1. Provide immersion heater(s) where shown on the equipment schedules or drawings, fitted by the
electric domestic water heater manufacturer as an integral part of the unit.
2. Provide each immersion heater with an integral thermostat allowing the heater to maintain the water
temperature at the pre-set value. Unless specified elsewhere arrange the thermostat temperature
setting to be manually adjustable locally to the immersion heater.
3. Ensure that the rating and number of immersion heaters are as shown on the equipment schedules.
E. Sacrificial anodes
1. Provide sacrificial anode(s) in each electric domestic water heater where required by the equipment
schedules or the manufacturer.
F. Thermal insulation
1. Ensure that all electric domestic water heaters are pre insulated by the manufacturer at works using
35mm thick PU-foam having a minimum density of 30kg/m3, or equal and approved by the Engineer.
2. Ensure that all electric domestic water heaters are insulated in accordance with Division 22 of this
specification.
G. Supports
1. Mount each electric domestic water heater on a purpose made support comprising frame, cradle or
feet. Ensure that the support is capable of bearing the weight of the unit when in operation and full of
water, and provides a secure and stable fixing for the electric domestic water heater.
2. Provide protective isolation material between the support frame/cradle/feet and the calorifier or
cylinder shell to prevent electrolytic action between them.
H. Secondary circulating pumps
1. If specified, provide the hot water service secondary circulation pump(s) referred to in particular
section this specification.
2. Where required by the equipment schedules, provide such secondary circulation pump(s) as part of
the electric domestic water heater package. Select each pump to achieve the duty as detailed on the
equipment schedules and in accordance with the requirements of particular section of this
specification.
3. Use pump sets of stainless steel or bronze construction, continuously variable speed centrifugal in line
full-way pattern.
4. Ensure that secondary circulating pump complies with the Division 22 of this specification.
Note: Secondary circulating pumps shall be provided only if specified by the Engineer for the domestic
hot water systems with secondary return pipework.
I. Anti-stratification pumps
1. If specified, provide, for each electric domestic water heater, an anti-stratification (or top to bottom)
pump and the means to control the pump with the objective of raising the entire contents to a
minimum of 60°C for 1 hour per day.
2. Connect each such pump to circulate the water within the electric domestic water heater between a
region near its top and a region near its base.
3. Use pump sets of stainless steel or bronze construction each complete with an isolation valve on the
suction and discharge sides of the pump.
4. Operate each pump via either an adjustable time switch or the automatic control system, for a
minimum of one hour per day at a time when the primary heat source is available.
5. Ensure that anti-stratification pump complies with the Division 22 of this specification.
Note: Anti-stratification pumps shall be provided only if specified by the Engineer.
J. Expansion Vessel
1. For details of the expansion vessels refer to section 223400 Domestic Water Heaters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Electric domestic water heaters shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Any deviations from the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be discussed prior the installation with
the supplier and approved by the Engineer.
3. Electric water heaters shall be installed with adequate access for maintenance and replacement.
4. Ceiling void installations shall be provided with suitable proprietary access panel for access for
maintenance and replacement.
B. Electric domestic water heaters
1. Fit to electric domestic water heaters the following components each as an integral part of the vessel:
a. Pressure and temperature relief valve.
b. High temperature limits control system.
2. In the event of a failure of the temperature control thermostat of any immersion heater, ensure that
the energy input from the immersion heater is automatically cut when the vessel temperature reaches
a maximum of 85ºC. Ensure that the high limit control for units with immersion heaters each have a
manual reset facility.
3. To the cold water supply of each electric domestic water heaters fit the following components:
a. Isolating valve.
b. Strainer.
c. Pressure reducing valve
d. Double check valve.
e. Expansion vessel.
f. Expansion relief valve.
Note: Expansion vessel shall be sized based on the entire domestic hot water system’s capacity
(including flow and return pipework).
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. General:
1. Demonstrate to the Engineer, the features and functions of the system and subsystems.
1. Make all static hydraulic pressure tests at 1.5 times the working pressure defined on the equipment
schedules or to the test pressure determined by standards to which the equipment is manufactured.
2. Prior to commissioning any electric domestic water heater and its associated components, clean, flush
out and sterilize the water distribution system(s) in accordance with Division 22 of this specification.
3. Commission each unit in accordance with this specification and the manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Check the operation of the temperature controls and safety devices of each electric domestic water
heater and, where required to do so, demonstrate them to the Contract Administrator.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 231010 – FUEL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. Fuel Oil piping
2. Fuel Oil Pumps
3. Fuel Storage Tanks
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 230010 Submittal Procedures and submit the following.
1. Submit product data and technical specifications on all materials, equipment and components for use.
2. Submit fully detailed material submittal compliance statements for all components and each item of
equipment used, which forms part of the permanent fuel oil installation.
3. Submit full technical details and product data for the proposed fuel oil storage tanks.
4. Submit a detailed equipment schedule, for each pump to the CA for approval in accordance with the
b. Details of connections for pumps
c. Sound pressure spectrums
d. Pump motor rating and design absorbed power
e. Pump and motor speeds
f. Pump base/mounting details and vibration isolation details
g. External to unit, static and total pressures
5. Submit pump performance curves showing head, volume flow rate, efficiency and absorbed power of
each pump shall be submitted to the CA prior to equipment being ordered. Pump curves shall indicate
performance under all likely operating conditions.
6. Submit, prior to installation, details of all support systems including seismic brackets affixed to the
structure. The submission shall include and identify:
7. All anchors, inserts or connections to the structure shall be submitted to the CA for acceptance.
Submittal review and/ or acceptance by the CA shall not constitute compliance or usability.
8. Submit a list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
9. Submit method statement.
10. Submit verification of fuel oil system flushing.
11. Submit a listing of the names of the welders, together with corresponding marks.
C. Installation Drawings.
1. Submit coordinated layout installation showing all fuel oil piping systems. Include pipework routing,
locations, storage tanks, plant, equipment and applicable details.
2. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every fuel oil tank. The drawing information
shall include
a. Manufacturer
b. Model
c. Dimensioned general arrangement
d. Capacity
e. Details of all pipework and controls connections
f. British Standard reference
3. Manufacturers certified drawings shall be provided for every pump. The drawing information shall
include
a. Manufacturer
b. Model
c. Pump Type.
d. Wheel Type
e. Pressure Class
f. Arrangement
g. Size
h. Flow Capacity
i. Static Pressure
j. Drive
k. Motor kW and Pump kW
D. Calculations
1. External static pressure (ESP) calculations shall be submitted for each pump system at the time of
2. External static pressure calculations shall be based on approved installation drawings taking into
account the actual resistance of all pipework fittings as provided by the manufacturers of such item
for approval by the CA before final selection of units.
3. Calculations prepared and signed by the Contractor’ licensed Structural Engineer shall include:
a. Horizontal and vertical reaction loads at connections to building structures for all seismic
restraints, including those covered by referenced Guidelines. Coordinate reaction loads and
attachment details with Licensed Structural Engineer.
4. Submit a confirmation letter and calculations signed by the Contractors Structural Engineer performing
the seismic load calculations, confirming the design details of all seismic restraint requirements as
detailed elsewhere within the specification
E. Test Reports:
1. Submit a list of all product testing undertaken, including copies of the certified test data. All testing
shall confirm compliance with the relevant standard (i.e. British Standard, European Standard, Etc.).
1. Include a statement from the manufacturers for the design life of the components utilised within the
system.
H. Submit details of all manufacturers Quality Plans.
following:
a. Include schedules of materials and equipment used.
b. Include recommendations for maintenance.
c. As Built drawings
A. The manufacturers shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of fuel oil
tanks, pumps, valves and pipework ancillaries and shall be fully accredited to the highest quality
B. Welders shall be fully qualified and certified by an approved welding bureau for the country in which the
project is located.
1. Each welder shall identify his or her work with a marking stamped on each weld joint of pipe, valve or
fitting.
2. Welders making defective welds after passing qualification test shall be given a re-qualification test
and upon failing to pass shall not be permitted to work on this project.
C. Materials used in fire-rated assemblies shall bear the UL or other approved testing laboratory, Classification
marking.
1. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards, including:
a. BS 799-5 Oil burning equipment – Carbon steel oil storage tanks
b. BS 5410 Code of practice for oil firing
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, UL Standards and particularly:
a. Oil piping in accordance with NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
11. Association of American Railroads, AAR Standards.
standard.
G. Fire precautions
1. Particular attention is drawn to the need for structural and general fire precautions referred to in the
NFPA & BS 5410-2 Section 7&13.
H. Provide a Site Quality Control plan.
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including
B. Protect all pipework, tanks, valves, pumps and ancillaries from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water,
chemical and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
C. Materials shall be stored and adequately protected from damage or deterioration until installed. Protection
shall also cover any adverse effects of environmental conditions prevalent in the stored and installed
location.
D. All pipework, tanks, valves, pumps and ancillaries shall be handled and stored in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall be strictly in accordance with this specification.
B. Pipe Lengths
C. Conflicts or inconsistencies of pipe sizes, arrangements, and details for final connections shall be resolved
and accepted by the CA.
D. Piping Diagrams
1. The Contract Documents may include piping diagrams as a part of the Drawings. These piping
diagrams are not for the purpose of giving physical dimensions or locations but rather to show all
various units of the process. If an item is indicated on either the piping diagram or on the Drawings,
but not on both, it will be assumed that the Contractor has included such item in his estimate of the
cost of the work and that he shall provide the same.
2. The Drawings are intended for the Contractor's guidance. The Drawings shall not be scaled and the
Contractor shall verify accuracy and immediately notify the CA of any discrepancies, which prevents
coordination, fabrication, or installation of works.
4. Promptly communicate to the CA any changes affecting accessibility to or clearance around equipment
or accessories.
2.2 PIPE SERVICES
A. Pipe work services shall include:
1. Oil feed from the oil storage tanks to daily service tank.
2. Fuel oil fill pipework
3. All pipework connections from the daily service tank to the point of use
4. Combined daily service tank dump line and overflow returned to oil storage tanks.
B. Piping shall comply with the requirements detailed in Section 232113 (Hydronic pipework)
C. Pipework shall be installed with a slope (1: 100 minimum) so as to be self-draining with drain cocks at all
low points.
D. Double Pipe Containment
1. All fuel oil pipework which is not located within a tanked area, shall be routed in a double pipe
containment system. All straight sections, fittings and other accessories shall be factory prefabricated
to the required dimensions and designed to minimise the number of field connections. Fabricated
systems, built on-site will not be acceptable.
2. The inner and outer pipes shall be of heavy grade steel to BS EN 10216-1and all joints shall be butt
welded for sizes 50mm and above, and socket or butt welded below 50mm. The inner and outer pipes
shall be fully corrosion protected. Supports shall be designed and factory installed by the
manufacturer. The support spacing shall be as stated elsewhere but shall not exceed 3m intervals. The
supports shall be designed to allow for continuous drainage and airflow within the secondary
containment.
3. The piping shall be designed to allow the installation of a leak detection cable into the containment
pipe. End seals, cleanouts and other accessories shall be factory prefabricated to prevent the ingress of
moisture into the system.
4. The secondary containment system manufacturer shall supply and install a leak detection / location
system. A leak detection system shall be provided for each pipe system and shall consist of a
microprocessor based panel capable for continuous monitoring of leaks/faults.
5. The alarm unit shall operate on the principle of pulsed energy reflection and be capable of mapping
and storing the digitised system map in non-volatile memory. The alarm units shall provide continuous
indication that the sensor cable is being monitored. Following acknowledgement of a minor leak, the
leak detection / location system shall be capable of monitoring the entire sensing cable for additional
leaks, even if they are smaller than the initial leak. The monitoring unit shall report and record, the type
of fault, distance, date and time of an alarm. An RS232 interface port shall be provided for remote
monitoring, via the site BMS where applicable, in addition a common alarm signal shall be provided for
connection to the BMS.
6. Oil containment pipework shall be to the same specification as the service pipe and shall fall to drain in
the oil tank room. A drain shall be run from each containment pipe within the oil storage tank room
and run to terminate over the catch pit sump.
E. Multiple storage tanks with return line connections
1. Where the oil burning system requires the connection of an oil return line to the storage tanks it is
essential that the returned oil always passes back to the tank from which it has been drawn. If this is
not arranged, overflow of the other tanks could occur.
2.3 FUEL OIL TANKS
A. The oil storage tank(s) shall be fully welded carbon steel double skin horizontal cylindrical or rectangular
tanks as detailed elsewhere manufactured in accordance with BS 799-5.
B. The tank shall be fabricated from mild steel plate in compliance with BS 799-5 and shall include lifting lugs.
C. The cavity between the inner and outer skins of the tanks shall be filled with a monitoring fluid which will
detect any leakage from the tank and raise an alarm at the local panel and via the BMS.
D. The inner and outer tanks shall be fully pressure tested at the manufacturers’ works and the test certificates
provided.
E. Testing of Fuel Tanks
1. Before the tank is painted it shall be subject to a pressure test in accordance with BS799, part 5 and
test certificates shall be provided.
F. The fuel oil storage tank shall contain the following connections and fittings for each compartment:
1. Outflow connection
2. Inflow connection
3. Vent and vent relief
4. Drain with plugged drain down valve
5. Sludge outlet with plugged sludge outlet valve
6. Bolted access cover, sealing ring and internal steel access ladder
7. 1 No. external fixed mild steel access ladder adjacent to manholes.
8. Direct reading hydrostatic contents gauge connection
9. Calibrated dipstick
10. Connection for remote reading contents gauge with dial located in the oil fill point box.
11. Visual and audible alarms at the oil fill point as a warning against overfilling the tank.
12. Connection for common low fuel level alarm and (high) overfill alarm.
a. Override the normal control switching and de-energise the oil transfer pumps;
b. Provide visual and audible low level warning at the local control panel;
c. Provide low oil level alarm to the local monitoring panel and/or the BMS (as indicated elsewhere)
to indicate the tank has reached a low oil content (20%)
G. The following information shall be clearly and permanently marked on a nameplate attached to the tank in
a prominent position:
1. The British Standard reference.
2. Nominal capacity of each compartment.
3. Manufacturer’s name, address and contact reference.
4. Date of construction.
H. Painting and cleaning
1. Painting and cleaning shall be in accordance with BS 799-5
2. The external surfaces of tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed from rust, oil or grease and
protected with a suitable rust-inhibiting primer by the manufacturer.
3. Painting comprising at least two coats of bitumastic paint or other oil-resistant paint shall be carried
out as soon as practicable after manufacture of the tanks; any damage to painted surfaces shall be
made good after erection on site.
4. Internal surfaces shall be wire brushed but not painted.
5. Before the tank manholes are secured after painting and cleaning, the tanks shall be inspected, and
any debris removed.
I. Capacity
1. The net capacity of oil storage tanks shall be as defined elsewhere and in accordance with BS 799- 5
J. Design and test conditions
1. Detailed specifications for the design, construction and testing of mild steel oil storage tanks are given
in BS 799-5.
K. Filling of Fuel Oil Tanks
1. As a condition of final handover to the user the tanks shall be filled with the specified oil at practical
completion unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
L. Service tanks
1. Service tanks and fittings shall be designed and constructed in accordance with BS 799-5 and are
defined as not exceeding 1000 litres capacity unless stated otherwise elsewhere.
2. A service tank shall be placed so that any escaping oil cannot reach hot surfaces
3. An overflow pipe shall be run from the service tank to the top of the main storage tank. If this is
impracticable a separate vent pipe may be run from the service tank to the open air where an
accidental overflow will not increase the fire hazard.
4. The vent pipe of the service tank fed by gravity shall be carried to a point as high as the top of the tank
supplying it. The overflow or vent pipe shall comply with the requirements of BS 799-5 and shall not
be less than 30mm bore or less than the diameter of the fill line, whichever is greater.
5. A fire valve shall be fitted on the outlet pipe of the service tank
2.4 FUEL OIL CIRCULATING AND TRANSFER PUMPS
A. Duplicate (duty and standby) oil transfer pumps shall be provided. Pumps shall be used to transfer oil from
the storage tanks to the standby generators’ daily service tanks. Each pump suction connection shall
include isolating valve, strainer and pressure gauge. Each pump discharge connection shall be fitted with
pressure relief valve, pressure gauge, non-return valve and isolating valve.
B. Oil pumps shall be electrically driven positive displacement screw or gear type or of the centrifugal type,
suitable for the viscosity and temperature of the grade of oil to be pumped as stated elsewhere. An
integral pressure relief valve shall be fitted to positive displacement pumps.
C. Pumps for transferring oil from a bulk storage tank shall be switched on and off automatically by means of
a float switch fitted in the service tank unless otherwise stated.
D. Fuel oil pumps shall be in accordance with the requirements as detailed in Section 232123 (Hydronic
pumps).
E. Seals, discs, gland packing, plug lubricants etc. shall be suitable for the fuel oil type specified.
2.5 OIL FILL POINTS CABINETS
A. Oil fill points shall be provided in positions shown on the drawings together with fill pipes to each oil
storage tank. The door shall be lockable, fitted with support struts and handle complete with a shatter-
proof polycarbonate viewing window for reading the contents gauges.
B. Oil fill cabinets shall comply with BS 799
C. Inside a lockable hinged solid steel door each fill box shall contain the following for each storage tank:
1. 65 mm (2½") fill connection with witness hole and non-ferrous screw on cap secured with a chain.
2. 65 mm (2½") screw down type oil isolating valve to BS 5141.
3. Tank visual and audible alarm devices to give a clear warning when the tank has reached its 90% full
condition. The devices shall include fill/test switch and alarm mute button and tank selector switch
4. Dial contents gauge clearly labelled to identify the applicable storage tank or tank compartment
5. Labels on each fill connection to identify applicable storage tank and Class of fuel oil.
6. Light fitting and switch assembly
7. Label indicating Class of fuel oil.
8. Each standby generator shall be provided complete with an integral daily service tank located within a
separate containment tank.
9. A separate filling pipe shall be provided for each tank.
10. Filling pipes shall be self-draining to the storage tank wherever possible. Where this is not possible a
gate valve shall be provided adjacent to the filling point.
11. The cabinet shall also include for a lift out oil drip tray and a glazed weather-sealed lockable fascia
panel marked 'FUEL OIL FILL POINT' and the tank reference number stated over each fill valve.
2.6 PIPEWORK & TANK ANCILLIARIES
A. General
1. All valves, cocks, vents and accessories installed in the Works shall be approved by the CA prior to
ordering.
2. Valves, cocks, vents and accessories shall be as far as it is practicable of the same manufacture and
style to provide conformity and to simplify maintenance.
B. Valves
1. All fuel oil valves shall comply with the requirements for valves detailed in Section 232113 (Hydronic
Piping).
2. Seals, discs, gland packing, plug lubricants etc. shall be suitable for the fuel oil type specified.
C. Oil Tank Contents Gauge
1. Each tank shall be provided with oil contents gauge which shall be of the needle and dial glass fronted
type, 200mm diameter and of a surface mounted pattern. Gauges shall be suitable for use with the 'Air
filled Breakable System' calibrated in litres and connected to a transmitter mounted in an agreed
location with a non-return valve provided as an integral part of the transmitter.
2. Indicators marked in units of volume shall have a litre scale.
3. The connecting capillary shall be neatly pinned along its lengths and connect to the indicator head and
transmitter using the manufacturer's special unions to form a sealed system.
4. The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer of the contents gauges are fully aware of the
dimensions and shape of the oil storage tank and the distance between the tank and gauge positions
and shall include for all commissioning necessary to leave the instrument in correct working order.
5. Contents gauges shall be as listed in the schedule of manufacturers.
D. High Oil Level Alarm
1. An alarm system to indicate a high level condition in each oil storage tank shall be provided and shall
comprise a standard float assembly in each tank compartment with an alarm panel mounted in the oil
fill cabinet.
2. The alarm panel shall incorporate an indicator lamp and an alarm which rings continuously when the
oil reaches a safe high level limit with a cancelling device which shall be the only means of silencing
the alarm. The cancelling device shall automatically reset when the level of oil drops. A test switch to
check alarm and a tank selector switch on multi-tank installations shall also be provided. A six
volt/single phase step down transformer shall be provided within the alarm panel and the float and
panel alarm shall be connected together by an electric cable limiting the volt drop to 3V.
E. Duplex Oil Filter
1. Provide on the common oil feed a 25mm diameter nominal size cast steel duplex oil filter with lift out
replaceable bronze wire mesh elements.
2. The filter shall be selected so that the resistance to fluid flow shall not exceed 1.5 kPa and the element
shall be compatible with the size of the burner jets.
3. The oil filter shall be lever operated to allow the oil stream to be diverted separately through each filter
element or as a combined flow through both.
F. Oil Vent Outlets
1. Oil vent outlets shall be of the cast iron cowl type suitable for fixing to the vent pipe by 3 screws which
shear on tightening to give an un-protruding screw head and shall prevent the ingress of sand, rain
and birds into the vent pipe.
2. Vent pipes shall comply with the requirements of BS 799-5. The vent pipe shall be free from sharp
bends, has a continuous rise and, should be as short as convenient, terminating in the open air in a
position where it cannot be tampered with and shall be visible from the filling point. The end of the
pipe is to be kept away from any zone in which the discharge of air and vapour might be dangerous or
offensive.
3. A separate vent pipe shall be provided for each tank.
4. Where of necessity the vent pipe rises to a considerable height, excessive internal pressure on the tank
may result if overfilling occurs. To prevent possible tank failure due to such an occurrence, a vent-pipe
unloading device shall be provided. The overfill alarm fitted to the vent pipe shall not restrict the oil
flow should an overfill occur.
G. Oil safety cut-out systems
1. Oil safety cut-off systems shall be provided in the oil storage tank rooms and generator rooms. The
system shall be configured such that an event in a generator room shuts off the oil delivery to that
generator room only.
a. 2 No. weight loaded fire cut-off valves located in the common oil feed from the storage tanks – 1
valve per pump set.
b. Manual quick release push button located adjacent to the exit door(s) from the oil storage tank
room.
c. Manual quick release push button located adjacent to the exit door(s) from each generator room.
d. Fusible link located over the oil transfer pumps and also over each Generator Engine.
e. 2 No. cable operated switches to provide two sets of volt free contacts (one normally open and
one normally closed). The volt free contacts shall be used by others to:
1) Override the normal control switching and de-energise the oil transfer pumps
2) Provide an alarm signal to the BMS where installed and a local audible alarm
f. Tension cable and pulleys shall connect components such that operation of system shall cause the
fire cut-off valve to close and produce the signals above.
g. Interface unit to inhibit the oil transfer pumps in event of a fire in the generator enclosures.
2. A float switch shall be installed in the oil storage tank room catchment pit sump. The float switch shall
be of the flameproof type and incorporate a stainless steel float and arm. The float switch shall be
arranged to break contact on a rise to a pre-determined high level to provide signals to:-
a. Provide a visual and audible alarm at the local control panel;
b. Provide alarm signal to the BMS;
c. Override the normal control switching and de-energise the oil transfer pumps.
3. In each oil tank room catchment pit sump a single manually operated semi rotary lever operated pump
shall be provided for emptying oil collected in the sump. The pump shall be complete with a flexible
discharge hose to enable the discharged oil to be pumped into oil drums.
4. Catch pits shall be provided by constructing a concrete or masonry bund around each oil storage tank.
5. Catch pits shall be oil tight and have a capacity at least 10% greater than the total oil storage tank
capacity and capacity of oil that pipework that could drain back to the sump. The bottom of the catch
pit shall be laid to fall to the sump. The catch pit lining system shall be of Glass Reinforced Plastic,
applied in sheets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
B. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work.
C. Examine foundations and bases for suitable conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Oil storage
1. The tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and Local
Authority requirements.
2. Each oil storage tank room shall comply with the requirements of BS 5410-2. Oil storage tanks shall
comply with BS 799 Part 5.
3. The plant room shall have a bund area to contain the tank capacity plus 10% of oil lines and secondary
containment which drain back to the tank bund.
4. Each tank compartment shall be provided with a vent routed to atmosphere. The open end of the vent
shall be turned down and fitted with an open mesh wire cage.
5. Tanks shall be supported on builders work piers spaced in accordance with the British Standard and
finished with non-ferrous bearer strips. Piers shall be graded to ensure the tank base falls towards the
drain connection.
6. Earthing shall be provided, with adequate electrical conductivity, in accordance with BS 7430.
B. Piping Installation
1. Ream pipes and tubes to full inside diameter. Clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside, before
assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping.
2. All fuel oil pipework, valves and accessories shall be installed as detailed in specification Section
232113 (Hydronic Piping).
3. The piping indicated on the Design Drawings is diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general
run and connections and may or may not be, in all instances, indicated in its true position. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper erection of systems of piping in every respect suitable
for the work intended and as described in the Specification.
4. Protection during construction
a. During construction work care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter entering the pipework
either in storage or during installation.
b. Open ends shall be capped with the appropriate pipework fitting. Wooden plugs and the like shall
not be used.
c. Valves fitted on the ends of pipework shall not be accepted as a means of preventing the ingress
of foreign materials.
d. Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean the CA shall have the right to instruct that
pipework so left uncovered to be dismantled for such lengths as the CA requests and the
pipework blown through and/or cleaned at no cost to the contract.
e. Remove all cement adhering to pipework surfaces and brackets.
f. Remove all cement, scale, rust by wire brushing and paint pipework and brackets as stated
elsewhere in the specification.
5. Locate all valves, accessories, etc. to permit easy operation and access, and regulate and adjust all
packing glands on completion of the work.
6. Where pipework is located externally a suitable corrosion-resistant and weatherproof treatment shall
be applied.
7. Where pipelines are required to be located below ground level they shall be laid in concrete trenches
that are adequately drained, readily accessible and provided with removable covers.
8. Install systems in a manner that they can be thoroughly drained and all air eliminated. Provide drain
cocks at all low points in the systems and air vents at all high points. Indicate accordingly on the Shop
Drawings.
9. Oil containment pipework shall be to the same specification as the service pipe and shall fall to drain in
the oil tank room. A drain shall be run from each containment pipe within the oil storage tank room
and run to terminate over the catch pit sump.
10. During welding or soldering procedures, provide a fire retardant cloth, mat or blanket to protect the
structure, and adequate fire protection equipment at all locations where work is being done. Close off
shaft or confine areas with a fire retardant mat or cloth to prevent sparks or pieces of hot metal from
falling down the shaft or area way.
11. Provide sufficient isolation valves in the installations to allow isolation of all floors, on each riser, or
specific zones for the purposes of maintenance. Provide adequate drain cocks between isolation valves
to drain the isolated part of the system for the purpose of maintenance. Indicate all isolation valves on
the Shop Drawings.
12. There shall be no pipeline joints within the thickness of walls or floors.
13. Pipework shall not be embedded in the structure. Where pipes pass through walls or floors a pipe
sleeve shall be built in, comprising a length of tube of the same material as the pipeline or other
equivalent proprietary purpose made sleeve. Pipes passing through external walls, floors and roofs
shall be installed with puddle flanges or sleeves as appropriate and sealed against water, vermin, dust
and the spread of fire.
14. Easy bends or swept tees shall be used; the use of elbows or square tees shall be avoided.
15. Where it is necessary to offset piping to avoid obstructions, use 45° elbows rather than 90°elbows.
16. Provide suitable cleanouts on every other change in direction and slope all pipework to drain cocks.
C. Painting and identification
1. Oil piping shall be painted in distinctive colours in accordance with the requirements of BS 1710. A
numbered disc or tag shall, where necessary, be affixed to each valve in the system, the numbers
coinciding with those indicated in written working instructions on diagrams or on record plans.
2. The installation, materials, workmanship and testing of oil installations shall be in accordance with
NFPA and Local Authority requirements and regulations.
A. Perform testing procedure in the presence of the CA, the Employer and personnel of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
B. The complete pipework installation shall be hydraulically tested after erection. Unless otherwise specified
the test pressure shall be one and a half times working pressure or 7bar, whichever is the greater. The test
pressure shall be maintained without further purging for not less than 30min. These are gauge pressures
(i.e. above atmospheric pressure). If any leakage occurs the test shall be repeated after the leak has been
rectified. When testing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipeline is completely charged with water
and is subsequently thoroughly drained. If there is any possibility of water being retained, even in small
quantities, the test shall be carried out using a light grade of oil.
C. Suction lines that may be subjected to sub atmospheric pressure shall be tested under vacuum so that they
hold a pressure below atmospheric of 0.3bar, i.e. 0.7bar absolute pressure for 30 min with a loss of not
more than 0.03bar. The test shall cover the whole of the suction line from the tank draw-off valve to the
pump inlet and include all valves and filters incorporated in the pipeline.
D. A final operational test using oil under operating conditions shall be applied when the installation is
complete and prior to project completion. This test shall cover the specified conditions of operation
required for the installation and shall be completed to the satisfaction of the CA.
E. Do not test relief valves, pressure-reducing valves, valves, or equipment beyond its rated capacity.
F. Suction lines that may be subjected to sub atmospheric pressure shall be tested under vacuum so that they
hold a pressure below atmospheric of 0.3bar, i.e. 0.7bar absolute pressure for 30 min with a loss of not
more than 0.03bar. The test shall cover the whole of the suction line from the tank draw-off valve to the
pump inlet and include all valves and filters incorporated in the pipeline.
G. Remove, clean and re-install each strainer screen as specified below after systems have been flushed. Clean
each strainer after all adjustments have been made and system has operated a minimum of 24 hours but
before the final test and balancing operation is started.
Section.
END OF SECTION
Ashveen Jeetun
Po Box 117291
Dubai
UAE
T: +971 (0) 4 518 4000
F: +971 (0) 4 335 8190
Email: mahavir.shah@burohappold.com
NCD P3 Carpark
50% Detailed Design Fire Suppression Specifications
DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-ME-000002
0052253
29 March 2023
Revision 01

00 Draft MN 15/01/23 NM
01 90% Detailed Design MN 29/03/23 NM

Specification Files/DG-NCD-408-0000-BNH-SPC-FP-000002.docx
This report has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and information of Binyag for the purposes set out in the
author Manjunath Naik
date 29/03/23
approved Neil Mowat
signature
date 29/03/23
50% Detailed Design Fire Suppression Specifications 29 March 2023
Contents
SECTION 210100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 210500 COMMON WORKS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 210553 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 211000 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 211339 FOAM WATER BASED SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 212050 – Clean Agent Fire Suppression System (Novec 1230)
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - NOVEC SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 3 - DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHING RELEASE SYSTEM
PART 4 - PRODUCTS
PART 5 - EXECUTION
PART 6 - TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 214000 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER STORAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - REFERED DOCUMENTS
Table of Tables
Table of Figures
Glossary
Term Definition
SECTION 210100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIRE

SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Section Includes
1. General requirements for the operation and maintenance of Fire Suppression.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Provide the following items as referenced in applicable Work Sections for each related Division.
B. Post Contract Submittals
1. Shop Drawings.
equipment / system.
7. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used. This shall be in line with the list
of recommended suppliers and manufacturers enclosed elsewhere in the project specification.
8. Method Statements for all activities including installation, inspection, testing and commissioning.
9. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Quality Plan.
10. Summary of deviations, if any, from the Specification. It is expected that the proposal is fully compliant
with the project specification, relevant codes and standards and local civil defence requirements.
a. a. In addition to the above layouts and sections prepare details indicating sizes and locations of
special details including but not limited to:
1) Sleeves and openings.
2) Inserts and anchors.
3) Access panel openings.
4) Pits.
5) Housekeeping pads, vibration isolators and equipment bases.
A. General:
1. Warranties.
a. Unless otherwise specified in other Work Sections provide warranty certificates for all equipment
supplied to this project.
b. Include copies of warranties in the appropriate sections of the Operation and Maintenance (O+M)
Manuals. Original certificates shall be submitted separately to the Employer.
frequency.
A. The manufacturer of all materials and equipment shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design
B. Permits, Fees and Inspections
1. Apply for and obtain all permits, inspections, examinations required for Work of Division 21 Fire
Suppression.
2. Arrange for inspection of all Work by all concerned Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction.
3. On completion of the Work, present to the Engineer the final certificate of acceptance of all concerned
Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction.
4. The installation of gas, fire protection, fuel handling, domestic water and drainage systems shall be
installed to the construction standards established by Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction. In no
instance, shall the Contractor reduce the standards or scope of Work established by the contract
drawings and Specification.
C. Standards and other Codes of Practice: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
D. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
A. Delivery
1. Moving of Equipment: Ensure that materials and equipment are delivered to the Site at the proper
time and in such assemblies and sizes so as to enter into the building and shall be moved into the
spaces where they can be easily located.
2. All materials delivered shall be in accordance with approved material submittals and contractor shall
offer the same for inspection by the engineer prior to use.
3. Rejected and non-compliant materials shall not be kept on the project site.
B. Storage
1. Store all equipment and supplies in a manner accepted by the Engineer.
1.6 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
shop, storage and other such facilities.
B. Accessibility
2. Group concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers and equipment requiring access, shall be
freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Work Included
1. Sections of Division 21 Fire Suppression are not intended to delegate functions or to delegate Work to
any specific trade.
working installation as described but not necessarily limited to items, in the mechanical Work Sections
of Division 21 Fire Suppression.
B. Scope of Work
1. This section establishes the requirements for completing all fire protection in accordance with the
Contract Documents, relevant fire codes & standards and local civil defence requirements.
2. Provide all necessary materials, labour, equipment, tools, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding,
Documents.
3. Complete fire protection system comprising of breeching inlet connections, electric duty & standby
and jockey fire pumps, standpipe wet risers, fire hydrants, fire hose cabinets, sprinkler system, pressure
reducing valves, flow indicators, supervisory fire valves, sprinkler zone control valves, test drains, piping
and accessories, portable and automatic fire extinguishers and controls interconnected to the Building
Automation System (BAS).
C. Related Work Specified in Other Divisions
1. Finished painting and stencilling.
2. Access doors.
3. Fireproofing of access doors.
4. Manholes in concrete for access to all storage tanks. See Design Drawings.
5. Trench covers and frames. See Design Drawings.
6. Cutting and patching, except as noted in the applicable Division of the Specification.
7. Door louvers.
8. Undercutting doors.
9. Louvers and panels in masonry work.
10. Plenums other than sheet metal.
11. Flashing.
12. Gratings.
13. Electrical Service.
14. Fire and Life Safety Systems.
15. Clean-up.
16. Painting.
17. Site Drainage.
18. Site Utilities.
19. Equipment platforms unless specifically called for in the Specification.
a. In exceptional circumstances when over or within 1.6m is unavoidable provide drip pans under
piping, subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
b. All Work within these areas shall be closely coordinated with Division 26 Electrical Work Sections.
c. Drip pans under piping:
1) 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel.
2) Reinforced and independently supported.
3) Watertight.
4) Provide 30mm drain outlet piped to hub floor drain.
2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Water-Based Fire Suppression Systems and Equipment, and Fire Extinguishing Systems.
1. Test, commission, regulate and set to work the Works.
2. Design all necessary facilities required for setting to work commissioning and testing of the completed
installations.
3. Final sign-off shall be by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
4. Any test ports, gauges, test equipment, etc. needed to accomplish the functional performance tests
shall be provided by the Contractor.
5. The Contractor shall provide all documentation of calibration for all controls and equipment being
used.
6. Documentation shall include dates, set points, calibration coefficients, control loop verification, and
other data required to verify system check-out.
7. Documentation shall be dated and initialled by field engineer or technician performing the work.
8. The Contractor shall provide an overview of major system features, components, and arrangements.
9. Provide a statement on appointment and prior to commencement of the Works.
10. Highlight for review by the Engineer any considerations in respect of commissioning.
11. The Contractor shall incorporate into the systems design the essential components and features
necessary to enable the proper preparation and commissioning of the systems.
12. The Contractor shall produce comprehensive commissioning method statements including procedures,
logic diagrams and risk assessments for the pre-commissioning checks, setting to work,
commissioning, system proving and environmental testing of the Works.
13. Maintain a log of all significant activities during the testing, commissioning and system proving
process.
14. Ensure that all plant and system settings are recorded.
15. Provide a report signed, by the Commissioning Specialist confirming, prior to installation that all
system designs can be commissioned.
16. Provide and submit a report for every test, demonstration, balance or commissioning activity
witnessed, together with an engineering appraisal on the performance, either on or off-site.
17. Provide a final commissioning report detailing the results of the commissioning and commenting on
the performance
18. The report shall highlight and confirm that each installation is correctly tested and commissioned and
achieving the specified system performance.
19. Demonstrate that the equipment is capable of the performance and method of operation specified.
20. Demonstrate that the overall and complete systems perform correctly in the required manner and as
intended by the specification.
B. Portable Fire Extinguishers
1. Fire extinguishers and fire blankets shall be maintained at regular intervals all in accordance and as
specially detailed within the said manufacturers Service and maintenance literature and criteria as
stipulated.
2. Inspections and thorough examinations by a competent and accredited contractor inclusive of all
necessary repairs, recharging or replacement of same, such that extinguisher(s) and blankets operate
effectively and safely when duly called upon.
3. All fire extinguishers and fire blankets shall be provided complete with a monthly inspection tag and
shall be duly dated and signed, by the said contractor following inspection of same.
4. All fire extinguishers shall be inspected and approved by the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction, at the time of completion and left in a fully charged condition.
5. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check for any damage or misuse prior to inspection
inclusive of replacement of same.
6. Failures shall include, however not limited to, the following requirement:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
c. Damage that could impair the safe operation or the life of the product.
d. Use of the product prior to handover and receipt of authority approval.
e. Illegible text and operating instructions.
7. 7. It shall be at the Client's discretion that all fire extinguishers and fire blankets inclusive of associated
ancillaries be replaced should a failure rate of 10% of all products be established and it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to replace all such products, in full, at no extra cost to the Client.
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the listed manufacturers within the Vendor List.
In the event the listed products or manufacturers cease to exist or not approved by the local civil defence
authority, then the contractor may propose alternative equal/superior products for engineer’s approval.
B. Expediting of Equipment
1. Continuously check and expedite delivery of equipment and materials. If necessary, inspect at the
source of manufacture.
2. Continuously check and expedite the flow of necessary information to and from all parties involved.
3. Immediately inform the Engineer if information is required from him.
4. Provide equipment delivery records updated monthly or more frequently as required by the Engineer.
2.4 MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting mechanical projects of comparable nature and complexity.
the Engineer.
B. System Acceptance
1. Submit original copies of letters from the manufacturers of all systems indicating that their technical
representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are satisfied with the method of
installation, connection and operation.
3. Submit such letters for the following:
a. Fire protection systems.
b. Automatic fire extinguishing systems.
c. Clean Agent System
C. Commissioning
1. General:
a. The final start-up operation of all systems shall be coordinated with other trades participating in
the construction.
c. All control systems shall be operational in accordance with the Specification.
2. Fire Protection System
a. The fire protection shall be complete with hoses and portable extinguishers all ready for use.
b. The sprinkler and standpipe systems shall be filled with water
c. Safety valves and pressure reducing valves shall all be set to correct operating pressures. Fire
pumps shall be ready to operate via pressure switch control, and the jockey pump shall be
operational maintaining design static pressure in pipe systems. All normally open gate valves in
the system shall be opened with valves in bypass lines completely closed.
D. General Testing: Furnish all labor, material, instruments, supplies and services and bear all costs for the
accomplishment of the test as listed, correct all defects appearing under tests and repeat the tests until no
defects are disclosed; leave the equipment clean and ready for use:
1. Fire protection system test.
2. Fire pumps test.
3. Room integrity test for clean agent rooms.
E. Electrical Equipment Tests: After completion of all electrical power and control wiring the Contractor shall
in conjunction with Division 26 Electrical Work Sections make the following checks:
1. Correct rotation of mechanical equipment.
2. Correct interconnection of control devices.
F. Furnish all necessary supplies, equipment and labor for cleaning, testing, adjusting and starting-up of
equipment, provisional and removal of all temporary piping connections required for tests and dispose of
test water and waste after tests.
G. Make tests of piping necessary during the progress of the Work.
H. Each piece of apparatus shall be carefully checked for completeness of connections, accessories, wiring and
controls and be placed in operation, tested, and adjusted.
I. Carry out final tests at a time suitable to and in the presence of the Employer and the Engineer.
J. Provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment necessary to assist in the performance of tests to be
conducted by the local inspection authorities.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean and remove debris.
END OF SECTION 210100
SECTION 210500 COMMON WORKS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. GENERAL: READ THIS SECTION IN CONJUNCTION WITH OTHER RELATED SECTIONS, DIVISION 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, THE PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION, SCHEDULES, DESIGN DRAWINGS, AND THE
CONTRACT CONDITIONS.
B. SECTION INCLUDES.
1. Pipes, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
2. Standpipe and fire hose, and combination sprinkler and standpipe systems.
1. Division 21 Fire Suppression Work Sections
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Post Contract Submittals
1. 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration
seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.
a. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment (supports, sprinklers, jointing etc.).
b. Provide transparencies wherever possible and provide printed copies in a number as specified
elsewhere in the contract documents.
c. Present a schedule of shop drawings
d. The Engineer shall only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor involved.
e. Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings for all
passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.
f. Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in tunnels,
shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to avoid a conflict of
trades.
g. Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to, all
details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tapings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains, location and
elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and agreement of, all
trades involved.
h. Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof curbs, wall
openings, trenches, pertaining to mechanical work.
i. Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper
coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.
j. Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the preparation of shop drawings.
1) Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
2) Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design
life of the equipment / system.
3) List of tests included
4) Certified test data
5) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials and systems
6) A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used
7) Method Statement
8) Quality Plan.
9) Summary of deviations from the Specification
10) Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Data Include installation instructions and spare parts list.
B. Comply with any environmental performance requirements of the sustainability framework of the Authority
having jurisdiction detailed in the Particular Specification.
A. A. General:
1. Warranties.
a. In accordance with the relevant Conditions of Subcontract.
b. In accordance with the relevant Conditions of Subcontract.
c. One complete hard copy set and one CD set of operation and maintenance manuals shall be
delivered to the Engineer two weeks before the final inspection is held.
d. The O+M manuals shall be installed in 3 ring heavy back note books with the name of the building
and the words "Operation and Maintenance Manuals" permanently affixed to the cover and spine.
O+M manuals and shall include, but not be limited to, the following categories:
1) Index and page numbers.
2) A summary sheet of warranties with the dates noted and a copy of all warranties.
3) List of all subcontractors and suppliers with names, addresses and phone numbers.
4) Certified testing report.
5) Complete start-up operation, and shut-down procedures for each system including sequence
of events, locations of switches, emergency procedures and any other critical items.
6) Lubrication schedules and types of lubricants.
7) Complete set of current shop drawings and equipment description showing all capacities and
other operation conditions.
8) Equipment summary showing all capacities and ratings (HP, Tons, kW, Filter size, etc.).
3. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
A. Compliance with requirements of quality control and assurance under main contract conditions.
B. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience (or approved and equal) in the design and
manufacture of the specific equipment being supplied.
C. Qualifications: Execute Work of this section only by skilled tradesmen employed by a qualified Fire
Protection Subcontractor approved by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and regularly
engaged in the installation of automatic sprinkler systems and other fire protection equipment.
D. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated in the Particular
Specification, Schedules and Design Drawings, the Work shall be in accordance with provisions of the
following standards and codes. The current editions of the publications listed below form a part of this
Section.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME Standards:
a. ASME (BPV IX) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
b. ASME B16.1 grey Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.
c. ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
d. ASME B16.4 grey Iron Threaded Fittings.
e. ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, ANSI/ ASME B16.5.
f. ASME B16.9 Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings.
g. ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded.
h. ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings, ANSI B16.18.
i. ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
j. ASME B16.25 Butt welding Ends.
k. ASME B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
a. ASTM A47/ A47M Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
b. ASTM A53/ A53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, ZincCoated,
Welded and Seamless.
c. ASTM A135 Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe.
d. ASTM A234/ A234M Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
e. ASTM A795/ A795M Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
f. ASTM B32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
g. ASTM B75/ B75M Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
h. ASTM B88/ B88M Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
i. ASTM F438 Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
j. ASTM F439 Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80.
k. ASTM F442/ F442M Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR).
l. ASTM F493 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
3. American Welding Society, AWS Standards:
a. AWS A5.8/ A5.8M Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
b. AWS D1.1/ D1.1M Structural Welding Code - Steel.
4. American Water Works Association, AWWA Standards:
a. AWWA C105/ A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems, ANSI/ AWWA C105/
A21.5.
b. AWWA C110/ A21.10 American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings,
3InThrough 48In (75mm through 1200mm) for Water and Other Liquids.
c. AWWA C111/ A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings, ANSI/
AWWA C111/ A21.11
d. AWWA C151/ A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water, ANSI/ AWWA C151/ A21.51.
a. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory (FPED)
b. UL 262 Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service.
c. UL 312 Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service.
a. NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
b. NFPA 11 Standard for Low, Medium and High Expansion Foam
c. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
d. NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
e. NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and Foam – Water Spray Systems
f. NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
g. NFPA 22 Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
h. NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
i. NFPA 25 Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection
Systems
j. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signalling Code
k. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
l. NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems.
m. NFPA 5000 Building Construction and Safety Code
n. NFPA 17A: Standard on wet chemical extinguishing systems.
o. NFPA 92B: Recommended practice for smoke control
7. Regulations of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
F. Testing and Inspection
1. Conform to UL and FM requirements.
2. Valves: Bear UL/FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on
valve body.
3. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
G. All materials to be used on the project shall be brand new and of high quality. Obtain approval of all
manufacturers from the Engineer and the Employer.
H. All materials to be used on this project shall bear the third-party quality assurance stamp like British
Standard kite mark, UL, FM, LPC and/ or other quality assurance authority as stated herein elsewhere.
I. All materials shall conform to the requirements of the specified British Standards or to other equipment
North American, DIN or European Standards.
A. Delivery: Deliver and store fittings, valves and equipment in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
B. Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work daily.
C. Handling
1. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
2. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect the buildings and structures from damage due to carrying out of this work.
E. Protect all works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all times.
F. Cover all openings in equipment and materials. Cover all temporary openings in ducts and pipes with
polyethylene sheets or caps until final connection is made.
G. The quality of such cover shall be determined with due regard to how long it may be until final connection.
A. Work Coordination
1. Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and arrange
equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of the Contract.
2. Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Products and materials shall be as described in the pertinent sections of Mechanical Divisions.
B. Scope of Work
1. Labour, materials, equipment and services to complete the work of the Mechanical part as further
specified and as shown on the Drawings.
2. The manufacture, supply, delivery, erection, testing and adjustment of the complete fire protection
systems and other utilities as indicated on the drawings and documents.
3. All of the material to provide a complete and operational installation to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. All incidental component and appurtenance necessary for the proper operation of the
system shall be provided and installed as required whether or not they were specifically mentioned in
the Contract Documents.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Contractor shall be responsible that all systems be in compliance with the design criteria specified
hereafter and in separate Sections of the Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall check the design and assume responsibility for the proper functioning of the system.
The Contractor shall also produce hydraulic calculations and submit for Engineer's review.
C. System Description
1. External Fire Hydrants
a. These fire hydrants shall be provided for use solely by the fire service personnel. Fire hydrants
shall be connected to an underground fire main. Inlets (breeching inlet piece) provided in an
accessible location shall allow the fire brigade to pump water into the fire mains from the nearest
water source. The complete system shall be continuously maintained under pressure by fire pumps
installed within the pump room.
2. Automatic Fire Hose Reels
a. This system shall primarily be for use by the occupants and used as a first aid means of fighting a
fire whilst awaiting the arrival of the Local Fire Brigade.
b. The fire hose reel pipework shall be connected to the standpipe mains through a pressure
reducing valve so as to maintain the system under pressure and to automatically release a jet of
water when any hose is uncoiled.
c. Fire hose reels shall be located such that these are readily accessible and that these can cover all
areas of the building with no part being more than 6 meters from the hose reel nozzle when the
hose is uncoiled.
3. Automatic Sprinkler System
a. The project shall be provided with an automatic sprinkler installation, classified and designed in
accordance to NFPA 13 for automatic sprinkler installation.
b. The sprinkler system shall be connected to the fire main and shall consist of a network of piping
with water always maintained under pressure. Fusible sprinkler heads shall be screwed into the
piping at intervals as recommended by NFPA regulations.
c. In the event of a fire, the heat generated shall cause the fusible element in the adjacent sprinkler
head to disintegrate and thus allow water to be discharged onto the fire in the form of a fire spray.
d. At the same time as water is discharged onto the fire, water shall also be allowed to flow to a
water turbine which in turn shall operate an alarm gong thus giving an audible alarm that the
system has operated. The system shall also be interfaced with the fire alarm panel in order to
actuate fire alarm bells in a fire situation.
4. Fire Extinguishers
a. Extinguishers shall be dry powder and/or carbon dioxide as required by the Civil Defence
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the manufacturers on the Vendors List.
B. General System and Product Requirements
1. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.
2. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14.
3. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.
2.4 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
A. The motor shall be NEMA MG 1, Design B, and medium induction motor.
B. The motor shall have a service factor of 1.15.
C. The pump motor shall be squirrel cage induction type and rated for continuous operation at an ambient
temperature not less than 50°C.
D. The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with insulation class (F) and IP54 protection and rated
for 380 - 415 volt, 3-phase and 60 cycle.
E. The motor shall be selected such that the power curve does not cross the pump curve at any point
(nonoverloading).
F. The motor shall be sized to operate continuously without exceeding the horsepower rating regardless of
the flow and head throughout the entire range of pump operation.
G. The motors shall be 2-pole TEFC operating at a speed of 2900 RPM.
H. The bearings shall be re-greaseable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
blocking.
I. Windings shall have Class 'F' insulation and shall be mounted on a common base plate and be connected
to its motor via a shrouded flexible coupling.
J. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned and shall be realigned by the Contractor after installation.
K. Each pump shall be factory tested in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards and NFPA
requirements.
L. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high-grade machinery enamel
paint prior to shipment.
M. Factory test Certificates shall be provided.
2.5 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
A. Grooved-piping type expansion joints shall be of ASTM A 53, cut grooved, short, steel type nipples, and
ductile-iron or malleable-iron shouldered couplings.
B. Slip-joint shall be of ASTM A 53, steel - pipe body, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), modified-
polyphenylenecoated steel-pipe slide; ductile-iron or malleable-iron housing. C. It shall include suitable
gasket material for piping.
C. Details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
D. Pressure rating of the flexible connectors shall be the same as the system pipework unless otherwise noted
on drawings.
E. Flexible connectors shall be installed at where shown on drawings and at all pump suctions and discharges.
F. Fire main crossing the building expansion joints shall be provided with flexible connectors designed
considering extent of building movement.
G. The materials of the flexible connectors shall be suitable for the substances to be conveyed.
2.6 METERS AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
A. Flow-measuring meters shall include calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses, or tubing, valves,
fittings, and conversion chart that is compatible with flow element, meter and system fluid.
B. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or system where
used.
C. Flow permanent meters shall be suitable for mounting on bracket, 150mm dial or equivalent with fittings
and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
D. Scale shall be in litres/ minute unless otherwise indicated.
E. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent between 20 to 80 percent of range.
F. Flow measuring-meters shall include complete operating instruction with each meter.
G. The water meters shall be provided with straight reading, dry dial, hermetically sealed register and
magnetic drive.
H. The rotation of the turbine is directly transmitted to be a register and magnetic drive.
I. The meters shall have totalization of flow volume in cubic meter (m³) or in the unit as accepted by the Civil
Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
J. The meter shall conform to the regulations of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and shall have
provision to provide a pulse reading to the BMS for remote monitoring/ reading.
K. Fire pump test meters shall be Factory Mutual Approved
L. Test meter shall be supplied with grooved ends for installation with grooved end couplings.
M. The Contractor shall supply a standard authority flow-measuring meter and fire pump meters and all other
accessories complete in all respect in accordance with the requirements of the Civil Defence Authority
having jurisdiction.
N. The Contractor shall provide pressure gauges conforming to ASME pertaining to construction and
installation of meter and gauges.
O. Pressure gages shall conform to ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage, with
bottom connection.
P. Pressure gages shall be encased in drawn steel, brass or aluminum with 115mm (4 -1/ 2") diameter glass
lens.
Q. Connector shall be of brass, 6mm (1/ 4"0 NPS.
R. Pressure gauges shall be filled with glycerin liquid to prevent damage of its needle due to the system water
pressure surge.
S. Scale shall be of white-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
T. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent of range.
U. Range shall conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches HG of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
2. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to100 kPa of pressure.
3. Fluids Under Pressure: 2 times operating pressure.
V. All gauges shall be provided with snubbers.
W. Snubbers shall be 6mm brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for
system fluid and working pressure.
X. Syphons shall be 6mm straight coil of brass tubing with thread on each end.
Y. Shut-off cock shall be provided between gauge and piping to permit gauge removal while system is under
pressure.
2.7 UNDERGROUND PIPING
A. Underground piping shall be HDPE / GRE / Ductile Iron in accordance with NFPA 24 and Civil Defence
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), as detailed on the Design Drawings.
2.8 ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Pipework size up to 50mm diameter shall be mill galvanized, Schedule 40, in accordance with ASTM A53
Grade-B/ ASTM A795 Grade-B ERW (Electric Resistance Welded) pipes in accordance with NFPA-13. B.
Fittings shall be malleable iron, mill galvanized in accordance with ANSI B16.3.
B. Pipework size 65mm diameter and larger shall galvanized, Schedule 40 in accordance with ASTM A53
Grade- A or B/ ASTM A795 Grade-B or ERW (Electric Resistance Welded) pipes in accordance with NFPA13.
C. Fittings shall be:
1. Butt-welded, in accordance with ASME B16.9 (ANSI B16.25 ends).
2. Pipe flanges in accordance with ASME B16.5.
3. Grooved mill galvanized fittings in accordance with AMSE F-1476.4
2.9 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers of heavy construction suitable for the size of pipe to be supported.
B. All materials to be of hot dipped galvanized steel (touch up all cut ends with galvanized paint).
C. Hangers for pipes up to and including 125mm to be adjustable swivel ring, split ring or adjustable wrought
clevis type.
D. Hangars for pipes above 125 mm shall be clevis type.
E. Support vertical piping with double bolt riser clamps attached to the pipe, resting on pre-engineered
spring hanged attached to the floor slab or wall. F. Use at least one clamp at every floor.
F. Where pipes are in open shafts, provide forged steel bar brackets fixed to wall.
G. Hanger and Support Installation
1. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
2. Provide intermediate steel where required to transfer loads to areas of structure where they can be
safely accommodated.
3. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated,
heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.
4. Keep pipes in position with U-bolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion to be free to slide or
roll. (Provide rollers on trapeze hangers).
5. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69, and the requirements of this
section.
6. Specified maximum spans are for straight runs of pipe.
7. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, use space hangers for
smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
8. Support vertical pipe risers independently of adjacent horizontal hangers.
9. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel.
10. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.
11. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers,
expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
12. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms.
13. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
14. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
15. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
16. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install
according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or
in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick or in post tensioned slabs.
17. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
18. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being
supported by welded steel according to AWS D-1.1.
H. Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping.
I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of
movement between pipe anchors and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion
bends, and similar units.
J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from
movement shall not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Support piping independently of
equipment.
K. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes.
L. Provide hangers at each change in direction on both sides of each valve and on both sides of fittings.
M. Do not hang piping from other piping.
N. Provide hanger rod minimum sizes in accordance with the schedule below:
Pipe Diameter Maximum Spacing Minimum Rod Size

(mm) (m) (mm)
25 3.66 10
32 3.66 10
40 4.57 10
50 4.57 10
65 4.57 10
80 4.57 10
100 4.57 10
125 4.57 12
150 4.57 12
200 4.57 12
250 4.57 16
300 4.57 16
2.10 GATE VALVES
A. 65mm to 300mm
B. Where stated elsewhere or on the drawings, isolating valves to appliances shall be of the outside screw and
yoke (OS&Y) gate valve type.
1. Type: Gate type valve.
2. Body material: Cast or Ductile iron.
3. Pressure rating: Suitable for working pressures up to 300 psi (2065kPa).
4. End connections: Grooved or flanged ends as applicable.
C. Specification: UL listed and FM approved Conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15, coated with
polyphenylene sulfide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15, coated
with a polyphenylene sulfide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15, with
EPDM coating providing bubble tight shut-off. D. Operation: Manually operated.
2.11 GLOBE (OR) ANGLE VALVES
A. Up to and including 50mm: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable
rubber disc, threaded ends, with back seating capacity repackable under pressure.
B. Over 50mm: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,
renewable seat and disc.
2.12 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 50mm: UL listed. Bronze 2-piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel
ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union.
B. Over 50mm: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or
gear drive hand wheel for sizes 250mm and over, flanged.
2.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 65 to 300mm.
B. Where stated elsewhere or on the drawings, sprinkler zone control valves shall be of the butterfly type
fitted with weather and tamper proof supervisory switch. UL listed and FM approved
1. Type: Vane type valve.
2. Body material: Cast or Ductile.
4. End connections: Grooved or Flanged ends as applicable.
5. Specification: UL/ FM approved conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15, coated with
polyphenylene sulphide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15,
coated with a polyphenylene sulphide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade
65-45-15, with EPDM coating providing bubble tight shut-off.
6. Operation: Manually operated.
2.14 CHECK VALVES
A. 65mm to 300mm
B. Check valves shall permit flow in one direction only and close automatically if flow reverses.
1. Type: Swing type check valve.
2. Body material: Cast / ductile Iron.
4. End connections: Flanged / grooved.
5. Specification: UL listed and FM approved conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15, coated with
polyphenylene sulphide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-4515, with
EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron, with grooved ends or flanged ends for installation.
a. Check valves larger than 50 mm shall have flanged ends.
b. Valves shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipe (with vertical flow upwards).
C. Where specified elsewhere the disc material shall be nitrile rubber but restricted to 90°C maximum
temperature, WRAS approved and in accordance with requirements specified within the NFPA standards.
2.15 DRAIN VALVES
A. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.
B. UL listed Ball or Gate Valve: Brass with cap and chain, and hose nipple.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions.
C. Examine the documents including the Specifications, Schedules and Drawings of all other Divisions before
bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe for butt fusion weld joint. For
grooved joints pipe ends shall be plain square cut.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions or grooved fittings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA13.
B. Install standpipe piping, hangers and supports in accordance with NFPA 14.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
H. Inserts
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete
beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100m.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with
recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
I. Pipe Hangers and Supports
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 15mm space between finished covering and adjacent work.
2. Place hangers within 300mm of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 40mm minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without
disengagement of supported pipe.
4. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal
piping.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
6. Provide seismic bracings and restraints as per NFPA 13 and Civil Defence requirements.
J. Install sprinkler system piping which allows entire sprinkler zone can be drained using test and drain valve
at zone control valve assembly. For all mains arrange systems to drain at low points. Prepare pipe, fittings,
supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural
building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Do not
penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
K. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve
fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
L. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and
couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
M. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other
nontoxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to
Installation.
O. Provide gate valves for shut-off or isolating service.
P. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
Q. Workmanship
1. Install equipment and piping in a workmanlike manner to present a neat appearance and to function
properly to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Install pipes parallel and perpendicular to the building
planes. Install all piping concealed in chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished
areas. Install all exposed systems neatly and group to present a neat appearance.
2. Install all gauges, thermometers, etc., to permit easy observance.
3. Install all equipment and apparatus which requires maintenance, adjustment, or eventual replacement
with due allowance for this.
4. Install control valves to guarantee proper sensing. Shield elements from direct radiation and avoid
placing them behind obstructions.
5. Install all panels and boards, etc., to permit easy operation.
6. Include in the work all requirements of Manufacturers as shown on their drawings.
3.4 SUPERVISION
A. The Contractor shall maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract, qualified personnel
and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and adjusting projects of comparable
nature and complexity.
A. All the works provided as part of this Contract shall be inspected and commissioned in accordance with all
relevant Standards, Specifications, and Codes of Practice and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
Inspection and Test Plan shall be submitted by the Contractor for Engineers approval.
B. Carry out all required tests in accordance relevant NFPA guidelines for system acceptance. Carry out all
tests required by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
C. Provide all equipment, labour, instruments, loading devices, incidentals, and pay for all fuel, power and
sundries required to carry out the tests.
D. All installations shall be inspected and tested in sections as the work proceeds and on completion as
composite systems
E. All tests shall be arranged in cooperation with the Engineer and all other concerned parties
3.6 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON COMPLETION AND COMMISSIONING
A. In accordance with the Conditions of Subcontract, relevant sections of Quality Requirements and
Inspection and Testing Requirements.
B. A copy of the tests and commissioning report of the equipment/ system shall be bound into the Operation
and Maintenance (O+M) Manual.
3.7 INSPECTIONS
A. Arrange for inspection of all work by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works. This is to occur on
an ongoing basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the termination of the project. On completion
of the work present to the Employer, final approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.
3.8 TEMPORARY SERVICE
A. Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific written approval is
obtained from the Engineer and the Employer or where specifically allowed elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
3.9 WORK TO CONTINUE
A. Unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Engineer the works are to continue to completion in the
most expeditious manner.
3.10 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair without removing
adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other materials. Any openings, framing or special lifting
equipment which may be required shall be included and provided by the Contractor.
3.11 INSPECTION OF THE WORK
A. The representatives of the Employer and the Engineer shall make periodic visits to the site during
construction to ascertain that the work is being executed in reasonable conformity with all plans and
specifications, but shall not execute quality control at all times. The Contractor shall maintain the quality
control as intended in the contract documents.
B. Correct all deficiencies immediately as noted during field inspections.
C. Request in writing that a final inspection of all services.
D. Do not issue this written request until:
1. All deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
2. All systems have been balanced and tested and are ready for operation.
3. All instruction manuals have been submitted and reviewed.
4. The cleaning up is finished in all respects.
3.12 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Employer and Engineer have inspected the system
and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.
B. Submit "As built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.
3.13 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION
A. Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract for a period of one year from the
date of acceptance of the completed work.
B. Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above and repair in a
manner to prevent recurrence.
C. Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment shall commence when the
completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into operation. In the event that
this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost to the Employer is involved, this Contractor
shall be liable to the full extent of the guarantee as indicated in the specification.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the premises all rubbish,
surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in the performance of the
work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings broom clean with no stains and in a condition
acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Where items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over painting, etc. and give all items
a final cleaning before handing over of the project.
SECTION 210553 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Pipe markers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Post Contract Submittals
1. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size and colour coding for fire suppression identification.
2. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function,
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
3. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalogue literature for each product required.
A. General:
1. Warranties.
frequency.
3. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
identification being supplied.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME Standards: ASME A13.1 Scheme for the
Identification of Piping Systems.
2. BSI Group, (BS) British Standards: BS 1710: Specification for identification of pipelines and services.
A. Deliver and store identification in containers, with labeling in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the listed manufacturers within the Vendor List.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Unless otherwise required by the Civil Defence Authority Having Jurisdiction:
1. An identification plate of metal shall be fixed to each pump unit and other fire suppression equipment.
This plate shall include full details and diameter of the impeller installed, pump size, model and serial
number, rpm, amps, etc. pump head and delivery for the duty specified and lubricant required.
2. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space location of
valve, and variations for identification.
3. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
4. Nameplates shall have metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.
5. Nameplates for external and wet applications to be stainless steel.
6. Nameplates shall have the Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,
operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2.3 TAGS
A. Unless otherwise required by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction:
1. Valve Tags shall be stamped or engraved with 6mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13mm
sequenced numbers. Include 4mm hole for fastener.
2. Material shall be: 0.8mm thick, polished brass, or aluminium for indoor and internal applications and
stainless steel for external and wet applications.
3. Size shall be 40mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Valve Tag Fasteners shall be of Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
5. Access Panel Markers shall be of 2mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve.
6. All provided labels and fastening method shall be UV resistant.
7. All proposed labels shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2.4 STENCILS
B. Minimum letter height is 30mm for ducts, and 20mm for access door signs and similar operational
instructions.
C. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 20mm to 30mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200mm long colour field, 15mm high letters.
2. 40mm to 50mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200mm long colour field, 20mm high
3. letters.
5. letters.
7. letters.
8. Over 250mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800mm long colour field, 90mm high letters.
9. Equipment: 65mm high letters.
D. Stencil Paint: Shall be made of exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated
E. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
F. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers shall be manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,

colorcoded, pressure-sensitive vinyl type with permanent adhesive, complying with ASME A13.1. G.
Lettering shall be manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by the Engineer.
G. Arrows shall either integral with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both directions, or as
separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
H. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers shall be manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi rigid, snap on, color-
coded, complying with ASME A13.1.
I. Width shall be 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for larger pipes.
J. Color shall comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 PIPE MARKERS
1. Colour: Conform to ASME A13.1.
2. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being
conveyed.
3. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings at least 0.08 mm thick.
4. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright coloured continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum
150mm wide by 0.10mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.6 CEILING TACKS
A. Unless otherwise required by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction
1. Description: Steel with 20mm diameter colour coded head.
2. Colour code as required by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient
adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting.
D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 20mm diameter and
smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 6m on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve
and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. E. Install plastic pipe
markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Identification bands shall be applied in a logical and tidy manner with lettering and flow arrows clearly
visible on the pipes and equipment.
G. Where several pipelines are installed in parallel to each other the identification bands shall be applied at
the same location on each pipe.
H. Additional identification bands shall be applied on a regular interval on piping above false ceilings so that
it is clearly visible from the limited number of access panels.
I. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150mm to 200mm below finished grade, directly above buried
pipe.
J. Identify pumps and valves with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, shall be identified
with tags.
K. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
L. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
M. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
N. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
O. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to
equipment.
SECTION 211000 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Division 01 General Requirements,
B. Section Includes
1. Fire protection system.
1. Section 210500 Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression.
2. Section 210553 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment
3. Section 210100 Operation and Maintenance of Fire Suppression
4. Section 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals
1. Qualification of Fire Protection Specialist.
2. List of all component manufacturers.
B. Post Contract Submittals
1. Shop Drawings.
a. The Design Drawings have been prepared for the purpose of showing the general arrangement
only. They are not intended for and shall not be used as Shop Drawings.
b. Provide construction drawing plans of each floor at a scale not smaller than 1:50, a detail plan and
section of the fire pump room at 1:10 scale showing pump installation, valve drain points, water
tank connections, pump bases, control panels, pressure switches and pump testing array.
c. Prepare large scale details 1:10 or larger, for firefighting stations, pipe supports, pump hold down
bolting and any other area where large scale details are required. Provide details of different
sprinklers showing exact method of fixing.
d. Provide Builders Work Drawings for plinths for pumps and other firefighting equipment, sleeve
sizes and their location in floors and walls.
e. The Contractor shall coordinate and arrange for all drawings to be stamped approved by the Civil
Defence Authority having jurisdiction prior to any work being commenced on Site.
f. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for the following:
1) Pipe and fittings.
2) Valves.
3) Pressure reducing stations.
4) Pumps.
5) Sprinklers
6) Fire hose cabinets
7) Control panels
8) Extinguishers.
9) Pump curves
10) Wiring diagrams
system/equipment.
7. Method Statement.
8. Quality Plan.
9. Summary of compliance and deviations (if any) from the Specification.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL:
1. Warranties.
frequency.
B. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design and manufacture of specific
C. Approved Subcontractors
1. Only Subcontractors approved by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction shall be permitted to
install fire protection equipment and systems. The Subcontractor shall submit written proof that he is
authorized to install fire protection systems together with his approval classification. The
Subcontractor shall also submit a separate prequalification for the fire protection Work issued by the
Engineer.
D. Qualifications: Execute Work of this section only by skilled tradesmen employed by a qualified Fire
Protection Subcontractor approved by Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and regularly engaged in
the installation of automatic sprinkler systems and other fire protection equipment.
E. Authorities and Agencies: Conform to requirements of relevant NFPA or equivalent British Standards where
indicated in the Contract Documents, the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and the Employer's
Insurance Underwriter.
F. All items of equipment and materials should receive acceptance of the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction prior to purchase and installation.
G. Standards and other Codes of Practice: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings
H. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
I. Testing and Inspection
1. Arrange for all inspections, examinations and tests required by the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction. Provide certificate where given, to the Engineer.
J. Combined Sprinkler/ Standpipe and External Pillar Hydrant Packaged Fire Pump sets Test
1. The motor and engine driven pumps shall be shop-tested by the respective manufacturers as required
by NFPA 20. The control panel shall also be tested as a unit. All such tests shall be conducted and
reports submitted for the Engineer's review prior to shipment.
2. The pumps, drivers, controllers and all accessories shall be purchased as 1 package under a single
contract. The pumps shall be given a complete performance test with NPSH of 1.5m. A certified
performance curve shall be prepared and submitted. Pumps shall also be hydrostatically tested to
twice the shut off pressure, but in no case less than 2086kPa.
3. The pump manufacturer shall assume the complete package unit responsibility and shall provide the
service of a factory trained representative to be available to conduct final field acceptance test in the
presence of the Employer and the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Supply all materials, labor, equipment, working plans, etc. to provide a complete fire protection system as
described herein and indicated on the Design Drawings including, but not limited to the following:
1. All piping including external fire department breeching inlets and connections.
2. Sprinkler and Standpipe Pump Package sets including jockey pump, electric motor driven pump,
controller, exhaust piping, insulation, metal cladding and fuel day tank.
3. All facility fire hydrants, fire hose cabinets and standpipe systems.
4. Sprinkler systems.
5. All fire extinguishers, cabinets and brackets.
6. Temporary standpipe during construction as required by the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction.
7. Clean agent systems.
8. Wet chemical system for kitchen hood.
9. Foam-water sprinkler/spray systems.
B. Provision of Third Party appointment in accordance with the requirements of the Civil Defence Authority
having jurisdiction to review Shop Drawings, inspection, audit report and any other requirements stipulated
by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction to obtain a completion certificate from the Civil Defence
C. Valve Tags and Identification Labels
1. Provide identification label and tags for all fire protection pipes, pumps, controls, gauges and valves in
accordance with the requirements specified. Indicate valve numbers and relevant labels on the As-built
Drawings.
2. The labels and tags shall be in accordance with Section 210553 Identification for Fire-Suppression
Piping and Equipment. Secure all tags to the valve by approved chain. Securely fix all labels to walls or
doors and equipment. Samples of valve tags and labels shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to
ordering.
3. All identification labels shall be in English and Arabic as necessary.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be experienced in the design and installation of fire protection systems
to NFPA standards and local Civil Defence requirements and shall be appropriately trained, accredited and
approved by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction, at the time and during the period of
construction.
B. Related Work Specified in other Work Sections
1. The fire water reservoir including concrete work, waterproofing, incoming water supply, overflows,
vents, water level switches, access ladder, washout and access door/ hatch.
2. All electrical wiring from local isolators to equipment and from equipment to local/ main Fire Alarm
Panel specified under Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security.
3. Refer to Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security for Main Fire Alarm Panel.
4. Motorized smoke fire dampers in air-conditioning ducts and walls for walls in gas protected areas.
5. Temporary electricity for construction and testing.
C. Comply with requirements of Section 210100 Operation and Maintenance of Fire-Suppression Systems for
mechanical general provisions and Section 210500 Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression Systems for
basic materials and methods for mechanical Work.
D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the requirements of the
above listed documents.
E. Sprinkler System and Standpipe Scope: Individual standpipe and wet sprinkler system.
F. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
1. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install Wet Pipe Sprinkler
systems as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification in accordance
with NFPA 13 and to the requirements of Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide all necessary sprinkler heads in accordance with NFPA 13 to achieve the sprinkler coverage
detailed in the Particular Specification.
3. Sprinkler system piping shall be sized by hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13. It is
important that the hydraulic calculations for sprinkler system, where combined sprinkler and standpipe
pump considered, shall also include flow rates for standpipe system in accordance with NFPA 14. A
complete set of calculations shall be submitted with the plans for Engineers review.
4. Submit system layout drawings, component shop drawings, specifications and hydraulic calculations
for Consultants review prior to commencing installation.
5. Submittal data shall be reviewed and incorporate requirements of the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction.
6. Drawings shall be certified correct and bear the Contractors certification prior to submission to the
Consultant.
7. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings and other documentation by the manufacturers model
number as specifically published in the appropriate agency listing or approval.
8. Trade names or other abbreviated designations are not permitted.
9. Obtain all approvals before proceeding with the work.
10. Shall meet local building and fire regulations, including the most recent issue of NFPA 13; Standard for
the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
11. All components of the sprinkler systems shall be UL listed and/or FM approved and labelled.
12. Perform all tests and provide certification as required by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
13. The Contractor shall refer to final Architectural and Interior Designer Reflected Ceiling Plans and
coordinate locations of sprinkler heads with ceiling profile, lighting and other ceiling mounted
components.
14. The Contractor shall coordinate sprinkler piping to avoid interference with all other services.
15. Sprinkler systems shall be provided with all accessories as indicated in the drawings and as per the
requirements of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and in accordance with NFPA 13.
16. Ceiling voids 800mm or more, and voids containing combustible materials shall be provided by
sprinklers as required and in accordance with Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
17. Hazard Classification: The area coverage and spacing of sprinkler heads shall be designed and installed
as per the hazard classifications in accordance with NFPA 13 and as shown on the drawings.
18. Sprinkler Heads:
a. All sprinklers shall be UL listed and FM approved and shall be selected to suit application and
accepted by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction. Type of sprinklers shall be as detailed
on the Design Drawings. All sprinklers and sprinkler equipment for the entire project shall be from
one manufacturer.
b. Pendent sprinkler heads:
1) Provide pendent type sprinklers. The sprinkler shall be glass bulb operated, spray type, with
25mm adjustable coupling reducer and 15mm discharge orifice, to the temperature ratings
indicated on the Design Drawings. Escutcheon plates shall be provided where shown on the
drawings
2) Concealed sprinkler cover plates shall be heat sensitive and the temperature rating of which
shall be suitable for the sprinkler temperature rating. The sprinkler cover colour finish shall be
to suit the ceiling colour and to the requirement of the architect.
3) All special colour covers shall be painted and supplied by the sprinkler manufacturer
c. Upright sprinkler heads:
1) Provide exposed upright glass bulb operated sprinkler heads. The sprinkler heads shall be
natural brass, spray type with 25mm adjustable coupling reducer and 15mm discharge orifice
to the temperature ratings as indicated on the Design Drawings.
d. Sidewall Sprinkler heads:
1) Where indicated on the Design Drawings provide sidewall sprinkler heads especially designed
for sidewall mounting with escutcheon plates. The sprinkler heads shall be natural brass, glass
bulb operated spray type with 25mm adjustable coupling reducer and 15mm discharge
orifice. Escutcheon plates shall be provided where shown on the drawings
e. Wire Guards: Provide wire guards for all sprinkler heads located below 2400mm in walkways,
parking garage, storage rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, service rooms, plant rooms,
janitors and closets.
f. Water Motor Gong: Provide, as required, a labelled water motor gong piped on the Interior of the
building with the drain line piped to nearest open drain to work in conjunction with the fire pumps
operation.
19. Sprinkler Heads shall have temperature rating of 68°C unless mentioned otherwise on the drawings.
20. Standpipe system piping shall be sized by hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 14 and a
complete set of calculations shall be submitted with the plans for Consultants review.
21. Submit system layout drawings, component shop drawings, specifications and hydraulic calculations
for Consultants review prior to commencing installation.
22. Submittal data shall be reviewed and incorporate requirements of the local authorities.
23. Drawings shall be certified correct and bear the Contractors certification prior to submission to the
Consultant.
24. The Contractor shall obtain all approvals before proceeding with the work.
25. The system and system design shall meet and conform to local building and most recent fire
regulations, including the most recent issue of NFPA Standards.
26. All components of the standpipe and hose systems shall be UL listed and labelled.
27. All materials shall meet current ASTM and ANSI standards.
28. The Contractor shall perform all tests and provide certification as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
29. Confirm fire hose cabinet locations and quantities from both Architectural and Mechanical Drawings
and provide higher count including piping connections.
30. Standpipe and hose systems shall be provided with all accessories as indicated in the drawings and as
per the requirements of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and in accordance with NFPA
14.
G. Pipework and Fittings
1. Fire Suppression Standpipe Systems
a. The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install all pipework materials and fittings for the standpipe
and hose systems.
b. All pipework (including underground piping), valves and fittings, and pipe hangers, unless
otherwise specified, shall comply with relevant clauses in the NFPA 14 regulations.
c. Underground piping supplying the system shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 14.
d. underground piping must meet the requirements of NFPA 24
e. Fittings on 50 mm and below shall be galvanized malleable iron fittings conforming to class 300,
ANSI B16.4 and shall be UL listed, FM approved.
f. Fittings 65mm and above shall be factory galvanized mechanical roll grooved fittings and shall be
UL listed, FM approved. These shall be class 300 to ANSI B16.9.
2. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
a. The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install all pipework materials and fittings for the Wet Pipe
Sprinkler systems.
b. All pipework, valves and fittings, and pipe hangers, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with
relevant clauses in the NFPA 13 regulations.
c. For working pressures below 20 bar the pipework shall be seamless factory galvanized steel in
accordance with ASTM A 53 grade A or B schedule 40.
d. Fittings on 50 mm and below shall be galvanized malleable iron fittings conforming to class300,
ANSI B16.4 and shall be UL listed, FM approved.
e. Fittings 65mm and above shall be factory galvanized mechanical roll grooved fittings and shall be
UL listed, FM approved. These shall be class 300 to ANSI B16.9.
f. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
g. The fittings shall be ductile iron, cast with a bulge/ short pattern fittings with flow equal to
standard pattern fittings.
h. Standard pattern grooved end fittings of the same manufacturer may be used for sizes where
short pattern is not available.
i. Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two ASTM A536 ductile iron housings, pressure responsive
gasket, and ASTM A449 zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts.
j. Rigid Type: Coupling housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern, bolt pads for joint
rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13.
k. Couplings shall be fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset contact.
l. Tongue and recess type couplings, or any coupling that requires exact gapping of bolt pads at
specific torque ratings for proper installation, are not permitted.
m. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required, and in
fire mains and risers where allowance for contraction and expansion and seismic considerations
are required.
n. In applicable sizes, installation-ready couplings, suitable for direct stab installation without field
disassembly, shall be used.
o. Grooved joint shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
p. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, or roll marks.
q. The gasket shall be moulded and produced by the coupling manufacturer of an elastomer suitable
for the intended service.
3. Facility Fire Hydrants
a. All pipework, valves and fittings, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with relevant clauses in
the NFPA 24 regulations.
b. All underground piping shall be HDPE / GRE / Ductile Iron in accordance with NFPA 24 and Civil
Defence Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), as detailed on the Design Drawings.
c. Underground piping supplying the system shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24.
H. Valves
1. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and standpipes shall be UL listed & FM approved,
indicating valves and shall be in accordance with NFPA 14.
2. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and sprinkler systems shall be UL listed & FM
approved, indicating valves and shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.
3. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and fire hydrants shall be UL listed & FM approved,
indicating valves and shall be in accordance with NFPA 24.
I. Hydraulic Design
1. Sprinkler systems designed to incorporate a booster pump system.
2. Limit pressure to the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction fire hose to 690kPa. Limit pressure to
occupants' fire hose cabinets to 450kPa. Use approved pressure reducing valve stations as specified.
3. The minimum operating pressure of any sprinkler for determining the water supply requirements shall
be not less than 0.5 bar (7 PSI) in the light hazard occupancy and 1.0 bar (14.5 PSI) in the ordinary
hazard occupancies.
A. Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the listed manufacturers within the approved
manufacturer list.
B. System Description
1. Standpipe and sprinkler systems shall be provided to meet the requirements of the NFPA Standards
and the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
2. Fire protection water shall be supplied from a fire water storage tank located within the building for
building protection.
3. Sprinkler pipe work systems shall be hydraulically sized in accordance with NFPA 13 for the
4. Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Sprinkler system as indicated on the Design Drawings shall connect to
risers through sprinkler alarm valves and to the feed sprinkler pipe mains, cross mains, branch lines
and sprinkler heads.
5. Standpipe: Standpipe risers as indicated on the Design Drawings shall be in accordance with NFPA-14
Class I and Class-II for Hose Systems.
a. Fire Fighting Stations as indicated on the Design Drawings comprising the following:
1) Purpose made cabinets housing 30m long x 25mm rubber hose for use by occupants, 30m
long x 65mm flat hose for use by personnel of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction,
1 No. DCP 6kg and 1 No. CO2 5kg hand held extinguishers for first aid fire protection.
2) The 65mm Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction hose shall have a minimum pressure of
6.9 bar with 15.77 l/s flowing at highest outlet in the building and shall be equipped with
pressure restriction device where static/ residual pressure exceeds
3) 12.1 bar
6. Provide pressure reducing valves on standpipe and sprinkler risers, whether these are indicated or not
on the Design Drawings and submit pressure study calculations (hydraulic analysis) for the Engineer's
review in accordance with the requirements of the NFPA and the approval of the Civil Defence
7. Provide 4-way fire department inlet connections for the Fire and Rescue Company emergency
connections of fire trucks as indicated on Design Drawings. Location shall be in accordance with
Design Drawings and to the approval of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
2.4 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, VALVES AND DEVICES
A. All materials, equipment, valves and devices provided under this section shall be listed by Underwriters'
Laboratories (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual (FM) equal British Fire Officer's Committee Standards. For
reference use Underwriters' Laboratories or Factory Mutual approved fire protection equipment list.
B. Drains: System drains and fireman's test connection shall run to the nearest open drain in the building.
However, the test & drain at the sprinkler zone control valve shall be connected to the main drain riser
which shall be terminated at respective fire water storage tank. All drains from the main headers and pump
glands etc. shall be terminated to the sump pit inside the pump room or as directed by the Engineer.
C. Pipework and Fittings
1. The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install all pipework materials and fittings for the standpipe and
hose systems.
2. Pipework shall follow the routes and approximate positions indicated on the drawings.
3. Pipework, ancillaries, valves and demountable joints shall be installed for convenient and safe routine
maintenance and renewals.
4. All pipework shall be installed with adequate gradients to facilitate draining and venting.
5. Pipework shall be run in a neat manner and installed plumb, straight, symmetrical and at right angles
to or parallel to adjacent walls.
6. No joints shall be formed in wall or floor thickness.
7. All pipework, fittings and valves shall be free from corrosion, scale and internal obstruction.
8. Pipework ends shall be cut square, reamed free from burrs and finished full bore.
9. Sufficient unions and flanged joints shall be provided to install and dismantle sections of pipe work,
10. Unions or flanges shall be provided at all valves and equipment for easy dismantling.
11. Connections to flexible coupling, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such a manner as to
eliminate undue strains in piping and equipment.
12. Care shall be taken in placing unions to allow freedom to spring apart.
13. Unions and flanges shall not be placed in inaccessible positions.
14. Where pipework is installed in inaccessible places, a union or flange shall be installed, prior to the pipe
passing into the wall or floor.
15. Unions shall have two bronze conical seats ground in.
16. Long screw connections shall not be accepted.
17. All black mild steel pipework in wall chases shall be welded throughout with flanged joints at 16m
maximum intervals if applicable.
18. Bends and tees shall be of the easy sweep type, except at air vents, drain points and dead legs where
19. Changes in diameter of horizontal pipework shall be formed eccentrically.
20. Prior to any work being "covered up"; the Contractor shall request the Engineers approval to that part
of the installation in question.
21. Pre-fabricated pipework shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses.
22. The Contractor shall take appropriate means to prevent galvanic action where dissimilar metals are
connected.
23. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions and floors.
24. Sleeves which are contained in walls, ceilings or floors which are fire barriers shall be additionally
packed with a non-combustible material for the entire length to form a fire/smoke stop of the required
fire rating.
25. All material shall be subject to approval and must comply with the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction.
26. UL listed expansion joints shall be provided for all pipework passing through any building expansion
joint and where necessary as specified and shall be designed for use in fire protection piping systems.
27. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, dirt, etc. before installation.
28. During the course of the installation, all open ends of pipes shall be plugged or capped to prevent
ingress of dirt.
29. After installation and sealing of joints all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned with clean water under
pressure to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
30. Water samples test shall be required where the Engineer considers as necessary.
31. Water used for this purpose shall be discharged as directed and in accordance with the requirements
of the authority having jurisdiction.
D. Valves
1. All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on body.
2. All valves shall be selected for the working pressure and test pressure required.
3. All isolating valves and control valves shall be provided with the proper and efficient operation and
maintenance of the entire systems.
4. Furnish all valves and accessory material necessary in the piping whether or not shown on drawings as
follows.
5. All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall be coated with oil and graphite.
6. Packing should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.
7. Plastic or metal plates (rustles) shall be provided to indicate the open/close status as well as the use of
each valve in the pump and tank rooms, and in the town main.
E. OS & Y Gate Valves
1. OS&Y gate valves shall be UL Listed & FM approved and shall be fitted to the installation in order to
shut the valve, the spindle must turn clockwise.
2. The hand wheels of all stop valves shall be clearly marked to indicate which direction the wheel is to be
turned to close the valve.
3. An indication shall also be provided which shows whether the valve is open or shut.
4. Each main stop valves shall be installed with a tamper/supervisory switch and interconnected to the
building fire alarm system or secured open by a padlock or riveted strap.
5. Bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, wedge gate, iron body, bronze trim with flanged ends,
threaded or grooved ends.
6. Gate valves shall be back seating and suitable for repacking under pressure.
7. Packing shall be non-asbestos.
8. Valves 50 mm (2 in) and smaller, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, bronze to ASTM B61 solid wedge
and screwed ends. OS & Y 1400Pa (water, oil gas).
9. Valve 65 mm and larger, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, iron body bronze mounted, OS & Y solid
wedge, flanged ends, 1200 kPa (water, oil, gas).
F. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be of materials similar to the gate valves for the appropriate systems in which they
shall be installed.
2. All check valves shall be of quick closing type to eliminate the sudden surge in the pipe line on closing.
3. Valves 50 mm and smaller, bronze to ASTM B61 designed of both horizontal and vertical mounting
replaceable composition disc, screwed cap and ends, 2100 kPa (water, oil, gas).
4. Valves 65 mm and larger, iron body, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, bronze mounted, regrind
renew bronze disc and seat ring, bolted cap, designed for either horizontal or vertical mounting,
flanged ends, 2100 kPa (water, oil, gas).
5. Swing Type: Use for water and low pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller with screwed bonnet,
screwed end; 65mm and larger with bolted bonnet, flanged end or grooved end.
6. Silent type: Use for standpipe system pumps.
7. Valves to have renewable bronze seat and disc.
8. Valves to have cast iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim and to be of the centre guide type,
with flanged end or grooved end.
G. Air Vents and Drain Valves
1. UL listed air vents and drain valves shall be provided at high points and low points respectively in all
standpipe piping in accordance with NFPA 24.
2. Air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel float and guides, and
noncorrodible valves and seats.
3. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a lock-shield valve.
4. Drain valves shall be connected to the nearest building floor drain or drain point of adequate size.
H. Gauges
1. Provide UL listed pressure gauges, in accordance with NFPA 24, where indicated on the drawings and
as mentioned below.
2. All gauges shall be liquid filled and provided with snubbers.
3. Gauges shall have 115mm diameter dial, white coated with black figures and graduations.
4. Shut-off cock shall be provided between gauge and piping to permit gauge removal while system is
under pressure.
5. Gauges shall have graduation such that at normal working pressure the needle is in the centre of the
field.
6. Gauge Location: Inlet and Outlet of Pumps; Top and bottom of all standpipe risers.
7. Mount gauges no higher than 1.5m above finished floor.
8. All gauges shall be calibrated in kPa to a maximum of not less than 1-1/ 3 times and not more than 2
times the operating pressure.
I. Backflow Preventers and Pressure Regulating Devices
1. UL listed backflow preventers shall be provided as required and where mentioned in the drawings in
accordance with NFPA 24.
J. Fire Department Connections
1. Provide where indicated on Design Drawings, 150mm diameter 4-way 65mm breeching inlet
connection contained in a recessed mounted breeching inlet cabinet and properly labelled and
identified for "Wet Riser Inlet" or “Sprinkler Inlet” as applicable services.
2. Provide where indicated on Design Drawings, fire department flush type reservoir fill point and
properly labelled and identified for "Fire reservoir fill point", in both Arabic and English language.
3. Coupling to suit the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction pumper vehicle and meet BS 336
requirements.
4. All breeching inlets shall be suitable for the system working pressure.
5. Breeching inlet shall be mounted within the recessed cabinet made of 1.2mm electro galvanized steel
powder coated to red and wired glass window to the approval of architect.
K. Fire Hose Cabinets
1. Front of House (FOH) Areas:
a. A recessed mounting cabinet shall have 1.2mm thick electro-galvanized steel back box powder
coated in white finish, with either stainless steel grade 316 1.2mm thick hairline finish door and
architrave, or stone/timber cladding finished door and architrave, or other finishes as detailed on
fire protection and/ or architectural/ ID drawings. The cabinet shall have two compartments with a
hose reel mounted on top compartment and a landing valve (where required), fire extinguishers
and other accessories placed in the lower compartment. Provide stainless steel escutcheons where
pipe enters into the cabinet.
2. Back of House (BOH) Areas:
a. Fire Hose Cabinet in back of house and podium parking areas shall be either surface or recessed
type as required by the Engineer/Architect. The surface cabinet shall be made of 1.2mm stainless
steel gr 316 hairline finish. Recessed cabinet shall be with 1.2mm stainless steel gr 316 door and
architrave and electro galvanized steel back box powder coated to red/white finish to Engineers
approval. The cabinet shall have two compartments with a hose reel mounted on top
compartment and a landing valve (where required), fire extinguishers and other accessories placed
in the lower compartment. Provide stainless steel escutcheons where pipe enters into the cabinet.
3. Basement Parking:
a. Fire Hose Cabinet in Basement parking areas shall be either surface or recessed type as required
by the Engineer/Architect. The cabinet shall be made of 1.2mm electro galvanized steel powder
coated to red finish to Engineers approval. The cabinet shall have two compartments with a hose
reel mounted on top compartment and a landing valve (where required), fire extinguishers and
other accessories placed in the lower compartment. Provide escutcheons where pipe enters into
the cabinet.
L. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
1. Provide portable filled and tested fire extinguishers from a manufacturer on the Vendor List as
follows:
a. 1 No. 6kg capacity DCP and 1 No. 5kg capacity CO2 fire extinguishers in each fire hose cabinet
and where indicated on Design Drawings.
b. 6kg capacity of DCP and 5kg capacity CO2 types independently mounted on the wall, or located
inside the cabinet, as indicated on the Design Drawings.
c. Other types of extinguishers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 10 and Civil Defence
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and as shown on the Design Drawings.
M. Fire Hose Reel
1. Fire Hose reel shall be automatic, swinging, cabinet mount type. Hose reel shall be equipped with
25mm diameter x 30m long smooth bore non-kink rubber hose and jet/spray brass chrome plated
nozzle. Fire Hose Reel and Hose shall comply with BS EN 671-1 and BS EN 694 respectively and shall
be LPCB approved and Kite marked. Hose reel shall swing to the extent of 180 degrees and connected
with steel pipe, no flexible pipe shall be used to connect water supply pipe with hose reel. Each hose
reel shall be provided with a lock shield isolating valve, pressure reducing valve and a pressure gauge.
1” diameter pressure reducing valve shall be of approved type and make and with a minimum flow
rate of 100 lpm at 4.5 bar pressure.
N. Landing Valve
1. Landing Valves shall be provided in the standpipe system where shown on the drawings and as
required in accordance with local Civil Defence Authority. The landing valves shall be UL listed 21/2”
dia oblique/angle pattern globe type with threaded inlet and outlet fitted with BS 336 female
instantaneous hose adapter with metal cap and chain. The landing valve shall be polished chrome
finish and fitted with adjustable pressure restricting device to reduce pressure to 6.9 bar. Landing
valve shall be housed in the cabinet or provided within the stair floor landings as shown on the
drawings and as per local civil defence requirements. Each landing valve shall be equipped with the
21/2” diameter x 30m long UL listed fire hose and nozzle mounted on the wall with a supporting
bracket to the requirement of local civil defence authority.
O. Supervised Valves
1. All sprinkler and standpipe system branch supervised valves, upstream and downstream of pressure
reducing stations: UL listed and FM approved gear operated butterfly type from a manufacturer on the
Vendor List complete with weather proof micro switch for wiring into the fire alarm annunciation
system. Micro switch shall be in the closed position when the valve is fully open and shall open when
the valve system moves away from full open position,
2. The switch shall consist of a single pole, double throw switch with a roller type actuator and a
springloaded plunger. The switch shall be UL listed and FM approved from a manufacturer on the
Vendor List.
P. Alarm Check Valves
1. Provide UL listed and FM approved alarm check valve for sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA
13 and with retarding device of approved design to obviate false alarms due to mains pressure
variations where required and as indicated on Design Drawings.
2. All alarm valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing the valve from the installed
position.
3. Alarm check valves shall be complete with Water Motor Alarm Gong, all required auxiliary valves and
drains and with pressure switch for wiring into the building fire alarm system.
4. Alarm check valves shall be high strength ductile iron body bronze trim for minimum 250psi (17.25bar)
working pressure complete with electric pressure switches, test and alarm bell connections.
5. Pressure gauges and all other ancillaries. Provide wiring from alarm check valves to fire alarm panel in
accordance with NFPA 72.
6. All ancillary valves and trims in the alarm check valve assembly shall be listed and supplied by the valve
manufacturer.
Q. Water Motor Alarm
1. The sprinkler system shall be fitted with an approved water motor alarm, which shall be located at a
distance not exceeding 25m from the alarm valve and at a height not to exceed 6m above the alarm
valve
2. The pipe work and fittings used shall be galvanized and in accordance with NFPA-13.
3. The pipe work shall be arranged to drain through a fitting having an orifice not exceeding 3 mm in
diameter.
4. The orifice plate may form an integral part of the fitting but shall be manufactured from a non-ferrous
material to prevent the hole from becoming blocked by corrosion or foreign matter.
5. A 15 mm test valve shall be installed on the installation side of each alarm valve.
6. The water motor alarm shall be listed and of the same make as the alarm check valve.
R. Electric Alarm Pressure Switch
1. Provide UL listed and FM approved electric alarm pressure switch in accordance with NFPA 13 and
they shall be mounted on a vertical branch pipe at least 300 mm long.
2. The pressure switch shall be of the diaphragm bellows operated type, and shall be sufficiently sensitive
to operate when only one sprinkler is discharging.
3. The pressure switch shall be provided with volt free contracts to facilitate monitoring by a Building
Automation System, and wired to the main fire alarm panel.
S. Sprinkler Zone Control Valve Assembly
1. Provide UL listed and FM approved zone control valve assembly for each sprinkler system zone as
required and as indicated on the Design Drawings in accordance with NFPA 13 and as per the
requirements of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
2. Sprinkler zone control valve assembly shall have the followings components:
a. UL listed and FM approved butterfly valve fitted with factory installed weather proof supervisory
tamper switch.
b. UL listed and FM approved check valve, with stainless steel spring and shaft, suitable for vertical
and horizontal installation.
c. UL listed and FM approved water flow alarm switch for the size of the pipe in which it is installed
as a paddle type water flow indicator and shall be fixed after the butterfly valve, on the main
supply pipe and before any connection is taken off.
d. UL listed and FM approved Inspector test and drain connection Valve.
e. Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures shall be fitted so arranged that it can be
easily removed for testing and checking without shutting down the water supply.
2.5 PACKAGED FIRE PUMP SETS
A. Provide packaged fire pump sets, completely assembled and pre-wired in factory, comprising the
following:
1. Jockey Pump:
a. Provide an approved vertical turbine multi-stage jockey pump in accordance with the equipment
schedules indicated on Design Drawings.
b. Capacity and head shall be as indicated in the equipment schedules.
c. Pump Construction:
1) Close coupled vertical with cast iron body.
2) Stainless steel impeller fitted.
d. The pump discharge head assembly 65mm shall be closed grained cast iron with suction and
65mm discharge connections, which shall be threaded. The pump shall be suitable for the pressure
indicated in the pump schedule.
e. The pump shall be installed with a cast or fabricated non-ferrous metal strainer having openings
to restrict the passage of objects 2.5mm in size.
f. Electric motors shall be Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled (TEFC) rated as per pump schedule suitable
for operation at 400Volts, 3-phase, and 60 Hz service. The motor locked rotor current shall not
exceed the values as stated by the NFPA or equivalent British Standard.
g. The pump and motor to be mounted on a common steel base, with motor and pump shaft close
coupled. Appropriate vibration isolators to be provided based on manufacturer recommendation.
h. Jockey pump shall be equal to Armstrong or acceptable equivalent.
2. Jockey Pump Controller:
a. Provide factory pre-wired jockey pump controller to meet NFPA 20.
b. Equipment to provide for:
1) Automatic start from water pressure switch
2) Manual start from hand-off-auto selector switch
3) Magnetic starter with 3-phase overload protection and earth leakage sensor for annunciation
only
4) Fusible disconnect with locking door
5) Enclosure to be constructed in accordance with NEMA 4x (IP65).
6) Running period timer to prevent excessive cycling
7) Control transformer for 230Volts/ 1-phase/ 60Hz
8) Auxiliary contacts for status, earth leakage and overload signals to BMS
9) Red pilot to indicate pump running
10) Ammeter with CTs and phase selector switch
11) Auxiliary contacts for status, earth leakage and overload signals to BMS.
12) Red pilot to indicate pump running.
13) Ammeter with CTs and phase selector switch.
c. The controller shall be floor or wall mounted and complete with required accessories including
pump operation alarm contacts, manual stop and running timer.
d. Power disconnect with 'OFF' position alarm signal to BMS.
3. Fire Pump Diesel Driven:
a. Provide in accordance with the Contract Documents a complete packaged standpipe and sprinkler
booster pumping system consisting of vertical turbine pump, diesel engine, drive, coupling guards,
controllers, accessories, etc.
b. Pump and diesel engine assembly shall be UL listed and FM approved.
c. Performance: Pump capacity and head shall as per the equipment schedule. The pump shall be
capable of delivering not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of not less than 65% of
rated head; shut-off pressure not to exceed 120% of rated head at rated capacity; maximum
permissible engine size as per pump schedule for 50°C operation.
d. The fire pumps shall be complete with piping accessory items for the pump installation which shall
adapt the pump connection to the standpipe system and test connection as follows. Pump fittings,
which are subjected to pump discharge pressure, shall be suitable for ratings in accordance with
BS 10 Table 'E'.
1) Venturi type flow measuring device.
2) Hose valve test head.
3) Hose valves with caps and chains.
4) Drip valves.
5) Automatic air release valve
6) Discharge tee
7) Main relief valve.
8) Open waste cone
e. Pump Construction:
1) Cast iron casing suitable for specified working pressure with cast iron bearing housings.
2) Bronze impellers and casing rings
3) Stainless steel shaft and shaft sleeve
4) Oil or grease lubricated bearings
5) Structural steel base plate and appropriate vibration isolators (if recommended by
manufacturer)
6) All metal flexible connections
7) Suction connection 125 lb flange
8) Discharge connection 250 lb flange
f. Diesel Engine:
1) To NFPA 20 or equal British Standard
2) Engine tachometer shall register shaft output speed
g. Batteries:
1) System Voltage: 12Volts DC
2) SAE Battery No.460 heavy 8D-900 or 20T8A duty for NFPA or British Standard requirement.
3) No. of batteries required: 2
4) No. of batteries per start: 1.
h. Engine exhaust piping, muffler and insulation.
4. Fire Pump Motor Driven:
a. Fire pump shall meet all the requirements of diesel driven fire pump and be UL listed or equal
British Standard.
b. Motor:
1) TEFC, size in accordance with pump schedule for maximum 2900 RPM suitable for 400Volts, 3-
phase, 60Hz power supply wired for auto transformer reduced voltage starting.
2) Motors and pump shall be mounted on common structural steel base and appropriate
vibration isolators (based on manufacturer recommendation) with pump and motor starts
correctly aligned and coupled, coupling guards fitted
3) Power disconnect with 'OFF' position alarm signal to BMS
5. Pump Controller: Provide fire pump controllers to start the motor and engine pumps in sequence.
a. Control Equipment for Motor Drive:
1) The Pump Motor shall be UL listed, FM approved or British Standard Part-II 5486 completely
assembled, wired and tested by the manufacturer before shipment from the factory and shall
be labelled "Motor Standpipe Pump Controller". The controllers shall be the combined manual
and automatic, (part wind) type, and shall be complete with:
a) Floor mounted enclosure constructed according to NEMA 4 x (IP65).
b) Disconnect switch externally operable, quick-break type.
c) Circuit breaker - time delay type with trips in all phase set for 300% of the motor full-load
current.
d) Motor starter to be auto transformer type for reduced voltage starting of pump motor.
Motor starter shall be energized automatically through the pressure switch or manually by
means of an externally operable handle. The minimum withstand rating of the controllers
shall not be less than 100,000 amps RMS symmetrical at 400Volts.
e) Pressure switch set of standpipe pump set to cut in at 50 psi and out at 65 psi measured
at uppermost point in standpipe riser. Pressure switch set of sprinkler pump set to follow
the requirements of the approved hydraulic calculation prepared by the specialist fire
protection service contractor.
f) Running period timer set to keep motor in operation, when started automatically, for a
minimum period of one minute for each 10HP motor rating, but not to exceed 7 minutes.
g) The controller shall have externally mounted individual, visible indicators for "Power
Available", "Low Pressure", "Local Start", "Remote Start". "Deluge Valve Open", "Phase
Reversal", "Interlock On", "Pump Running" and "Run Timer On". The Controller shall have
externally mounted operators including "Start" pushbutton and "Emergency Run"
mechanism. The "Start" push-button and "Emergency Run" mechanism shall be separate
units and not combined. The "Power available" and "Phase Failure" indictors shall be
wired through contacts on the phase monitor to give true power "On" indication. Loss of
power in any phase shall cause the "Power Available indication to go out. Remote
monitor for phase failure and main phase healthy to be provided.
h) Provision shall be made within the controller to permit the use of test instruments without
disconnecting any conductor within the controller, in accordance with NFPA 20.
i) Alarm relay to energize an audible or visible alarm through an independent source of

power to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure with indication to BMS.
j) The positions selector switch: Auto, Manual and Off.
k) Means shall be provided on the controller to operate an alarm signal continuously while
the pump is running.
l) Control equipment shall meet all requirements of NFPA 20.
b. Control Equipment for Engine Drive:
1) The automatic engine control panel shall be micro-processor type, approved for fire pump
service, and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 20 or BS EN 60439-2. The panel shall be of
the floor mounted type, and enclosed in moisture and dust tight housing. A combination
manual and automatic type controller with "Manual-OffAutomatic" selector switch shall be
provided. Also, 230Volts single-phase power failure relay or pressure switch which (when the
system drops below required pre-set pressures) shall activate all electrical circuits to
automatically start the engine
2) Should the engine fail to start after the required cranking cycles, the controller shall
disconnect the starting circuit and activate an alarm system using lights and buzzer or bell.
"Low oil pressure" and "High jacket-water temperature" shall also be indicted by a suitable
alarm system. The engine shall not shut down if either of these conditions occurs during an
operating cycle
3) The engine shall be started automatically by the controller at least once a week and operate a
minimum of 30 minutes. An appropriate timing arrangement shall determine the day and
hour of this test. Provide warning sign next to the set: "Caution! Equipment starts
automatically".
4) Starting the engine by a fire alarm relay, or remote push-button station shall be included in
the controller circuit.
5) Provide a remote alarm panel as per NFPA 20 for unattended pump. Remote alarm panel with
audio-visual alarms shall be mounted in the Fire Control Commander Room. Provide UL listed,
FM approved or equal British Standard pressure and flow switches with double sets of
contacts in the mains. In addition to the alarm functions specified in NFPA 20 or equal British
Standard, the controller shall be supplied with the following built-in audio visual alarms
complete with remote annunciation at the Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU):
a) Low Fuel Level.
b) Low Suction Pressure.
6) In addition, Earth Leakage/ Fault audio visual alarms shall be provided at the fire pumps
power panel outgoing circuit complete with remote annunciation at the BMS.
7) The controller shall have Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) relay contacts for
remote alarm of engine run, engine trouble and main switch miss-set annunciate at the BMS.
8) In addition, the controller shall have normally open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) relay
contacts for the following remote alarms annunciate at the Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU):
9) Engine over speed.
10) Low oil pressure.
11) High water temperature.
12) Engine failed to start.
13) Battery and/ or Charger failure.
6. Control panel shall be integral part of the packaged fire pump set installation and be provided by the
supplier of the packaged fire pump set equipment.
B. Controller for engine drive shall be microprocessor type with printer recorder, factory, pre-wired to NFPA
20.
2.6 PRESSURE SWITCHES AND FLOW SWITCHES
A. Water Flow Detector
1. Provide a water flow detector to each sprinkler zone.
2. The water flow detectors shall signal any water flow condition that equals or exceeds the discharge
from one sprinkler. The electrical signal shall be transmitted and give alarm at the main fire alarm
panel.
3. Water flow detectors shall be vane-type, with pneumatic retard element, UL listed and FM approved.
B. Pressure Switches
1. Provide UL listed and FM approved pressure switches with double sets of contacts in the mains.
2. Wiring for pressure and flow switches shall be provided by Division 26 Electrical Work.
2.7 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A. Provide UL and FM labeled Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV) with adjustable spring range, sized to suit
required flow and pressure differential, capable of maintaining differential pressure at ±138kPa during
both flow and static conditions.
B. Provide in accordance with the Contract Documents PRVs to produce a constant downstream pressure as
indicated on the Fire Services Riser Diagrams.
C. Valve shall be accurate and close drip tight when downstream pressure exceeds set point.
D. Valve shall be single seated hydraulically operated, pilot controlled diaphragm type globe valve.
E. Valve Construction
1. Cast iron body and cover, in accordance with ASTM A48.
2. Bronze trim, in accordance with ASTM B61.
3. Provide calculations to define pressure rating of PRVs subject to review by the Engineer.
4. Flanged connections.
5. Cast bronze with stainless steel trim.
6. Sizes as required and in accordance with the contract documents.
F. Control range shall be in accordance with approved calculations for the inlet and outlet pressure of the
PRVs and adjustable.
G. Pressure regulating valves shall be provided with isolating valves, gauges, bypass globe valve and pressure
relief valve to protect downstream piping.
H. Provide proper access to PRV stations for maintenance and replacement.
I. Provide a pressure switch at the downstream of pressure reducing valve to indicate in the BMS/Fire Alarm
Control Panel the increase in pressure in the system in the even the valve fails to control pressure.
2.8 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Provide UL and FM labeled relief valve at discharges of each fire pump to relieve excess pressure back to
the water reservoirs.
B. Valve shall be adjustable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Piping Installation
1. Keep piping free from scale and dirt. Do not split, bend, flatten nor otherwise injure the pipes either
before or during the installation. Do not bend or curve any pipe which shall diminish the waterway or
alter the internal diameter of the pipe in any part.
2. Install all piping to provide maximum headroom.
3. Provide drum drips on system piping at low points and at any point where piping is trapped.
4. Where practicable, pipework shall be carried out as the building proceeds, so as to minimize the
amount of cutting away and repairing.
5. Correctly position all necessary holes in walls, floors and ceilings for pipes and pipe supports.
6. The run and arrangement of all pipes shall be approximately as indicated on the Design Drawings and
as directed by the Engineer during installation.
7. Clearance between exposed pipes and the finished surface of wall, partition or ceiling shall be not less
than 50mm.
8. Install reducing fittings to pumps, fixtures, etc. where pipe sizes indicated or specified differ from the
connection sizes.
9. Plug off all ends of pipes to fixtures temporarily with an acceptable plug to prevent accumulation of
dirt or stoppage of the pipes. Paper and wood rag shall not be used.
10. Arrange sprinkler cross mains and branches to allow flushing in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide
40mm dia ball valve and hose nipple at the end of every sprinkler cross main to allow flushing.
11. Sprinkler pipe drainage:
a. All sprinkler piping and fittings shall be installed so that entire sprinkler system pipe work may be
drained from sprinkler zone control valve location using test and drain valve.
12. Install and coordinate sprinkler head locations with the reflected ceiling plans and Architectural wall
elevations to ensure adequate coverage.
13. A listed and approved flexible drop pipes shall be used for extending the sprinkler drop pipe from the
branch pipe to the sprinkler along with approved ceiling support fittings and hardware.
14. Upright and pendent sprinklers to be installed with deflectors parallel to ceilings and frames parallel to
pipe work, never across.
15. Sprinklers shall be transported, handled and stored with care to prevent mechanical damage.
16. Only special wrenches shall be used to tighten the sprinklers in fittings. Each sprinkler type shall be
provided with a special wrench supplied by manufacturer.
17. Sprinklers shall not be modified in any way nor have any type of ornamentation, coatings or paint
applied to them. No wiring or fixtures shall be attached to sprinklers or connecting pipework.
18. Hydrostatically test main headers and riser at above the maximum working pressure in accordance
with NFPA 13.
19. Provide at the most remote sprinkler point an inspector test port complete with pressure gauge.
20. Fix sprinkler heads only after flushing activity has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
21. Install sprinkler covers and escutcheons only after final painting of the ceiling has been completed.
22. All ceiling void sprinkler temporary caps shall be removed prior to the installation of false ceiling.
B. Drains
1. System drains and test connections shall run to the nearest open drain in the building.
2. Route PRV drain line on pressure reducing station, pump gland drain connections and main header
drains to sump pit inside the pump room or as directed by the engineer.
3. Terminate the base of the inspector's test and drain line and fire pump casing relief line back into the
fire water Reservoir. The fire pump flow test return shall be connected back to the fire water reservoir,
only when the tank is dedicated for fire use.
C. Fire Extinguishers
1. Refer to Design Drawings for location and types of extinguishers. Install brackets on firm backing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install cabinets securely with flanges flush with finished
wall surfaces.
D. Fire Hose Cabinets
1. Locate as indicated on Design Drawings with reference to Architectural wall elevations. Ensure hose
reel within the cabinets are no greater than 1500mm above finished floor or as required by the Civil
Defence Authority having jurisdiction. Labelling shall be in accordance with the requirements of this
section and to the approval of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
E. Pressure Reducing Valve Stations
1. Arrange piping and equipment to provide adequate service accessibility and minimum space
requirements.
2. Provide pressure relief valve and pressure switch at the downstream side of pressure reducing valve.
3. Provide full flow test connection at the downstream of pressure reducing valve routed through the fire
pump flow meter for testing pressure reducing valve.
F. Pump Sets
1. Install packaged pump sets in locations where they are readily accessible for maintenance and
servicing. Refer to manufacturers' instructions and applicable codes for proper arrangement and
connections. Mount the pump control panel in a location providing at least 1m clear space in front of
the panel.
2. Provide the services of the pump manufacturer for field testing of the pumps, motors, and controllers.
3. Provide a full flow test to the fire reservoir and plot the actual pump performance curve. Comply with
all other testing procedures as required by the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction and NFPA.
4. Perform all testing in the presence of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction, the Employer and
the Engineer. Submit all test results to the Engineer.
G. Anchoring
1. Provide joint anchors and thrust protection at all critical points in the piping systems throughout the
building designed to withstand hydraulic shock and stresses produced by the pumping system. Submit
anchor and thrust block design for review by the Engineer.
H. Labeling
1. Refer to the applicable section of the Specification and comply therewith.
2. Label all sprinkler systems at the flow switch identifying the zone number. Coordinate zone numbers
with Division 28 to match numbers on the fire alarm annunciator panel.
3. Label all sprinkler and standpipe zone and riser isolation valves. Mount design information as well as
the As-built Drawings schematic diagram near the labelling point or at base of riser or adjacent to
pump set in a glazed frame.
4. Label all piping throughout the building, for example "Sprinkler", "Inspector test" and similar, in both
Arabic and English languages.
I. Identification Signs
1. The Contractor shall provide signs, conforming to NFPA requirements and in accordance with the
requirements of local authorities, for each valve, alarm device etc.
J. Sprinkler Zoning
1. Generally, provide sprinkler zoning as defined on the Design Drawings.
K. Electric Wiring
1. Coordinate and cooperate with Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security regarding inter connections
for alarm points.
2. Provide wiring to the following:
a. All supervisory valve contacts.
b. All flow indicating contacts.
c. All supervisory/alarm pressure switch contacts.
3. This Contract's wiring shall include the following:
a. Fire pump pressure control.
b. Indication to BMS/FACP from fire pumps controllers.
c. Automatic reservoir level Control.
4. Wiring shall be carried out to criteria established in Division 26 Electrical Work.
A. Inspection
1. Do not recess, paint or conceal any material or equipment including piping and accessory equipment
before it has been inspected and approved.
2. The Contractor shall protect all finishes, replace or repair any damaged finishes to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
B. Testing
1. The Contractor shall test all water based systems in accordance with NFPA 25.
2. The Contractor shall carry out any additional tests required by the Civil Defence Authority having
jurisdiction.
3. The Contractor shall perform tests in the presence of the authorised inspector for the Civil Defence
4. The Contractor shall submit certification that systems have been designed and installed in accordance
with relevant NFPA and the requirements of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction.
5. The Contractor shall perform tests before piping is concealed.
6. The Contractor shall remove all components which shall not withstand test pressure, and replace after
tests.
7. Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts. Caulking of threaded or welded joints shall not be
permitted.
8. The Contractor shall repeat tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.
C. Site Visits by Personnel of the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction: During the construction period
the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction shall be called to make inspections and recommendations.
The Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction shall be called to inspect any pipework that shall be
subsequently hidden by false ceiling or enclosed within duct, or buried under ground. This work shall be
carried out in a way as to call the Civil Defence Authority having jurisdiction as few times as possible.
3.4 PAINTING
A. The Contractor shall paint all exposed piping with a suitable primer (one coat) and top coat (two coats) in
bright red to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Painting shall be carried out in accordance with paint
manufacturer’s recommendations and a method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. B. The Contractor shall obtain agreement from the Architect on top coat paint colour before
application.
SECTION 211339 FOAM WATER BASED SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section includes Foam Water Sprinkler System, as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install Foam Water Sprinkler
systems as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification in accordance with
NFPA 11, 13 & 16 and to the requirements of the Local Civil Defence Authority.
C. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be experienced in the design and installation of fire protection systems
to NFPA standards and shall be an approved Contractor by Local Civil Defence Authority.
D. Foam Water Sprinkler system piping shall be sized by hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13
&16 and a complete set of calculations shall be submitted with the plans for the Engineers review.
E. Submit system layout drawings, component shop drawings, specifications and hydraulic calculations for
Consultants review prior to commencing installation.
F. Submittal data shall be reviewed and incorporate requirements of the local authorities.
G. Drawings shall be certified correct and bear the Contractors certification prior to submission to the
Consultant.
H. Upon completion of the installation, modify the system calculations and submit hydraulic design data
based on as-built system.
I. Obtain all approvals before proceeding with the work.
J. Provide certificate of compliance that components are compatible and, where applicable, certified for
intended use by recognised testing agency.
K. Meet local building and fire regulations, including the most recent issue of the following:
1. NFPA 11 - Standard for the Low Expansion Foam Systems;
2. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems;
3. NFPA 16 - Standard for Low, Medium, & High Expansion Foam;
L. All components of the foam water sprinkler system shall be UL listed/ FM Approved and labelled.
M. Material shall meet current ASTM and ANSI standards.
N. Perform all tests and provide certification as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
O. Confirm component locations, specifications, and quantities from both Architectural and Mechanical
Drawings and provide higher count including piping connections.
P. Foam Water Sprinkler system shall be provided with all accessories as indicated in the drawings and as per
the requirements of the Local Civil Defence Authority and in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16.
1.2 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION
A. The area coverage and spacing of Foam Water sprinkler heads shall be designed and installed as per the
hazard classifications in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16, relevant standards and as shown on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS
A. All pipework, valves and fittings, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with relevant clauses in the NFPA
13 & 16 regulations.
B. Underground piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16.
C. The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install all pipework materials and fittings for the Foam Water
systems.
D. Pipework shall follow the routes and approximate positions indicated on the drawings.
E. Pipework, ancillaries, valves and demountable joints shall be installed for convenient and safe routine
maintenance and renewals.
F. Provide pipe hangers in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16.
G. All pipework shall be installed with adequate gradients to facilitate draining and venting.
H. Pipework shall be run in a neat manner and installed plumb, straight, symmetrical and at right angles to or
parallel to adjacent walls.
I. No joints shall be formed in wall or floor thickness.
J. All pipe work, fittings and valves shall be free from corrosion, scale and internal obstruction.
K. Pipe work ends shall be cut square, reamed free from burrs and finished full bore.
L. Sufficient unions and flanged joints shall be provided to install and dismantle sections of pipe work,
M. Unions or flanges shall be provided at all valves and equipment for easy dismantling.
N. Connections to coils/flexible couplings, pumps, and other equipment shall be made in such a manner as to
eliminate undue strains in piping and equipment.
O. Necessary fittings and bends shall be furnished to avoid springing of pipes during assembly.
P. Care shall be taken in placing unions to allow freedom to spring apart.
Q. Unions and flanges shall not be placed in inaccessible positions.
R. Where pipe work is installed in inaccessible places, a union or flange shall be installed, prior to the pipe
passing into the wall or floor.
S. Unions shall have two bronze conical seats ground in.
T. Long screw connections will not be accepted.
U. Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used and fabricated fittings will not be accepted without approval.
V. Bends and tees shall be of the easy sweep type, except at air vents, drain points and dead legs where
W. Changes in diameter of horizontal pipework shall be formed eccentrically.
X. Prior to any work being "covered up"; the Contractor shall request the Engineer's approval to that part of
the installation in question.
Y. Pre-fabricated pipework shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses.
Z. Take appropriate means to prevent galvanic action where dissimilar metals are connected.
AA. For working pressures below 20 bar the pipework shall be ERW factory galvanized steel in accordance with
ASTM A53 grade B schedule 40.
BB. Fittings on 50 mm and below shall be galvanized malleable iron fittings conforming to class 250, ANSI
B16.4 and or B16.25 and shall be UL listed, FM approved.
CC. Fittings 65mm and above shall be factory galvanized mechanical roll grooved fittings and shall be UL listed,
FM approved. These shall be class 250 to ANSI B16.9.
DD. For working pressures above 20 bar the pipework shall be seamless factory galvanized steel in accordance
with ASTM A53 grade B schedule 80.
EE. Fittings on 50 mm and below shall be galvanized malleable cast iron fittings conforming to class 300, ANSI
B16.3 and shall be UL listed, FM approved.
FF. Fittings 65mm and above shall be factory galvanized mechanical roll grooved fittings and shall be UL listed,
FM approved. These shall be class 300 to class 16.9.
GG. All valves and fittings used in the pipework system shall not have a pressure rating less than that of the
pipework.
HH. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, and floors.
II. Sleeves which are contained in walls, ceilings or floors which are fire barriers shall be additionally packed
with a non-combustible material for the entire length to form a fire/smoke stop of the required fire rating.
JJ. The material shall be subject to approval and must comply with Local Civil Defence Authority.
KK. UL listed expansion joints shall be provided for all pipework passing through any building expansion joint
and where necessary as specified and shall be designed for use in fire protection piping systems.
LL. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, dirt, etc., before installation.
MM. During the course of the installation, all open ends of pipes shall be plugged or capped to prevent ingress
of
NN. dirt.
OO. After installation and sealing of joints all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed with clean water
under pressure to the satisfaction of Engineer.
PP. Water samples test may be required if the Engineer is considered as necessary. Water used for this purpose
shall be discharged as directed.
QQ. Underground piping supplying the system shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 16.
RR. Any temporary pipework and equipment necessary for the above cleaning shall be provided by the
Contractor.
2.2 VALVES
A. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and foam water system shall be UL listed & FM
approved and indicating valves fitted with tamper proof supervisory switch and shall be in accordance with
NFPA 13 & 16.
B. All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on body.
C. All valves shall be selected for the working pressure and test pressure required.
D. All isolating valves and control valves shall be provided with the proper and efficient operation and
maintenance of the entire systems.
E. Furnish all valves and accessory material necessary in the piping whether or not shown on drawings as
follows.
F. All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall be coated with oil and graphite.
G. Packing should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.
H. Plastic or metal plates (rust less) shall be provided to indicate the open/close status as well as the use of
each valve in the pump and tank rooms, and in the town main.
2.3 DELUGE VALVES
A. The deluge valve shall be automatic in operation from a detection system (combination fixed temperature
and rate of rise heat actuated detector, etc.) a local manual station or a remote manual station.
B. The valve shall have an alarm pressure switch, alarm test connection, contact for starting fire pump system
and de-energizing protected equipment.
C. The Contractor shall provide all relevant drains and gauges.
D. The deluge valve shall be capable of being manually tripped.
E. All trim required for the valve, such as pipe, nipples, valves, check valves, and strainers shall be included.
2.4 OS & Y VALVES
A. OS & Y gate valves shall be UL Listed & FM approved and shall be fitted to the installation in order to shut
the valve, the spindle must turn clockwise.
B. The hand wheels of all stop valves shall be clearly marked to indicate which direction the wheel is to be
turned to close the valve.
C. An indication shall also be provided which shows whether the valve is open or shut.
D. Each main stop valves shall be installed with a supervisory switch and interconnected to the building fire
alarm system and secured open by a padlock or riveted strap.
E. Bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, wedge gate, iron body, bronze trim with flanged ends, threaded or
grooved ends.
F. Gate valves to be back seating and suitable for repacking under pressure.
G. Packing to be non-asbestos.
H. Valves 50 mm (2 in) and smaller, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, bronze to ASTM B61 solid wedge and
screwed ends. OS & Y 1400 Pa (water, oil gas).
I. Valve 65 mm and larger, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, iron body bronze mounted, OS & Y solid
wedge, flanged ends, 1200 kPa (water, oil, gas).
2.5 CHECK VALVES
A. Check valves shall be of materials similar to the gate valves for the appropriate systems in which they will
be installed.
B. All check valves shall be of quick closing type to eliminate the sudden surge in the pipe line on closing.
C. Valves 50 mm and smaller, bronze to ASTM B61 designed of both horizontal and vertical mounting
replaceable composition disc, screwed cap and ends, 1400 kPa (water, oil, gas).
D. Valves 65 mm and larger, iron body, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, bronze mounted, regrind renew
bronze disc and seat ring, bolted cap, designed for either horizontal or vertical mounting, flanged ends,
1200 kPa (water, oil, gas).
E. Swing Type: Use for water and low pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller with screwed bonnet,
screwed end; 65mm and larger with bolted bonnet, flanged end or grooved end. F. Valves shall have
renewable bronze seat and disc.
2.6 AIR VENTS AND DRAIN VALVES
A. UL listed air vents and drain valves shall be provided at high points and low points respectively in all Foam
–Water system piping in accordance with NFPA 11, 13, & 16.
B. Air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel float and guides, and
noncorrodible valves and seats.
C. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a lock-shield valve.
D. Drain valves shall be connected to the nearest building floor drain or drain point of adequate size.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Provide UL listed pressure gauges, in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16, where indicated on the drawings and
as mentioned below.
B. All gauges shall be liquid filled and provided with snubbers.
C. Gauges shall have 115mm diameter dial, white coated with black figures and graduations.
D. Shutoff cock shall be provided between gauge and piping to permit gauge removal while system is under
pressure.
E. Gauges shall have graduation such that at normal working pressure the needle is in the center of the field.
F. Gauge Location: Inlet and Outlet of Pumps
G. Mount gauges no higher than 1.5m above finished floor.
H. All gauges shall be calibrated in kPa to a maximum of not less than 1-1/3 times and not more than 2 times
the operating pressure.
2.8 FOAM PRESSURE PROPORTIONER
A. Provide UL listed Foam Pressure Proportioner in accordance with NFPA 16, where indicated on the
drawings.
B. Foam Pressure Proportioner shall be used to produce constant preset foam solution in pressure
proportioning system.
C. It should be designed to inject automatically the quantity of foam concentrate in to a water stream over a
wide flow rate by balancing the pressure of the foam concentrate with that of water supply. D. The flow
rate has to be selected as per the calculations.
2.9 FOAM WATER SPRINKLER
A. Provide UL listed and FM Approved sprinkler heads (without bulb/link) for foam water application as
required and as shown on the drawings in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16.
B. The sprinkler heads shall be of the spray pattern installed in an upright position or pendant position as
required.
C. Finish of sprinklers shall be to the approval of the Architect.
D. The design Criteria for all sprinklers such as K-factor, type, etc. shall be submitted for approval.
E. The Contractor shall supply set of spare sprinkler heads in each type and located in a cabinet in the fire
pump room together with sprinkler spanners for use in removing and installation of the heads in
accordance with NFPA 13 & 16 and as per the requirements of the Local Civil Defence Authority.
F. Assume full responsibility for protecting sprinkler heads during painting. Replace damaged and painted
components.
G. Be responsible for necessary modifications to the installation in the event the as-built hydraulic calculations
do not meet the design criteria.
2.10 FOAM SYSTEM BLADDER TANK
A. Provide UL listed, FM Approved Foam Bladder Tank as required and as shown on the drawings in
accordance with NFPA 13 & 16.
B. Bladder Tank shall be welded pressure vessels constructed of carbon steel with a working pressure of 175
psi.
C. Bladder Tank shall be supplied either vertical or horizontal configuration and shall be mounted on full skirt,
securely welded to tank shell, complete with four (4) mounting clips.
D. The tank shall have center discharge piping, located within the bladder, to ensure that the foam
concentrate flows to the bottom discharge.
E. Bottom discharge connection shall have provision to prevent the internal piping from entering the
discharge piping.
F. Tank shall include all necessary drain and vent valves, concentrate fill piping and fill cup. In accordance with
the NFPA requirement for valve supervision, all tank valves shall be locking type, brass or bronze ball valves
with identification labels on the handles.
G. All piping for foam concentrate shall be schedule 40 stainless steel gr 316 pipe.
H. Water pressurization and foam concentrate supply connections shall be female NPT. External surfaces of
tank and piping shall be coated with red high solids epoxy finish.
2.11 FOAM CONCENTRATE (3% AFFF)
A. The Contractor shall provide UL listed / FM Approved Foam Concentrate (3% AFFF) as required and based
on the design calculations. The Contractor shall provide equal quantity of foam concentrate as spare in
addition to that required for first fill and testing & commissioning.
2.12 ELECTRIC PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
A. The Contractor shall provide UL listed and FM approved electric alarm pressure switch in accordance with
NFPA 13 & 16 and they shall be mounted on a vertical branch pipe at least 300 mm long.
B. The pressure switch shall be of the diaphragm bellows operated type, and shall be sufficiently sensitive to
operate when only one sprinkler is discharging.
C. The pressure switch shall be provided with volt free contracts to facilitate monitoring by a Building
Management System and wired to the main fire alarm panel.
2.13 ALARM AND DISCHARGE ACTION
A. Cross-zoned Detection System: The Foam Water sprinkler system shall be automatically actuated by either
verified detection circuits or cross-zoned detection circuits.
B. Combination of Fixed Temperature & Rate-of-Rise Heat detectors shall be installed at no more than 23
square meters of coverage per detector (or as per manufacturers /applicable standards requirements). C.
The detectors shall be alternated throughout the protected area and be compatible on either circuit.
1. Phase I (General Alarm)
a. Activation of any single detector in any detection zone shall:
1) Cause a first-stage alarm (slow pulse horn/strobe);
2) Energise a lamp on the activated detector and control panel.
2. Phase II (Pre-Discharge)
a. Activation of two adjoining (cross-zoned) or any second (verified) detector shall:
1) Transmit an alarm signal to remote monitoring or building alarm panel;
2) Cause a second-stage (pre-discharge) alarm (fast pulse horn/strobe) to operate; 3). Operate
auxiliary contacts for air conditioning shutdowns and automatic dampers; 4). Initiate
an adjustable time delay (Foam Water sprinkler system release).
3. Phase III (Discharge)
a. Upon completion of the time delay the Foam Water sprinkler system shall:
1) Cause discharge (steady horn/strobe) alarm to be activated;
2) Operate auxiliary contacts for emergency power off all electrical equipment (excluding lighting
and emergency circuits for life safety);
3) Activate visual alarms at protected area entrance (strobe);
4) Energise control solenoid for Deluge valve releasing Foam Water sprinkler system into the
alarmed zone only.
2.14 AUXILIARY COMPONENTS
A. Manual Releasing Stations shall be provided at each exit of the protected area and shall when activated,
immediately release the Foam Water and cause all audible/visual alarms to activate.
B. Abort Stations shall be provided at each exit of the protected area and shall, when operated, interrupt the
discharge of Foam Water and emergency power off function.
C. The Abort Stations shall be momentary devices (dead-man) requiring constant pressure to maintain
contact closure.
D. Note: Manual Pull Station activation shall override any abort Station. Abort Station operation shall be per
IRI and FM guidelines.
2.15 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT - ELECTRICAL
A. Materials and equipment shall be of a single manufacturer.
B. Provide materials and equipment from approved suppliers.
C. The name of the manufacturer and the serial numbers shall appear on all major components. Locks for all
cabinets shall be keyed alike.
D. All electrical enclosures, trunking and conduits shall be employed in accordance with applicable codes and
intended use and contain only those electrical circuits associated with the fire detection and control system
and shall not contain any circuit that is unrelated to the system.
E. Unless specifically provided otherwise in each case, all conductors shall be enclosed in steel conduit, rigid
or thin wall as conditions dictate.
F. Any conduit or trunking exposed to weather or other similar conditions shall be properly sealed and
installed to prevent damage, provisions for draining and/or drying shall be employed.
G. NEMA rating and/or electrically hazardous classifications shall be observed and any equipment or materials
installed must meet or exceed the requirements of service.
H. Any wiring shall be of the proper size to conduct the circuit current but shall not be smaller than 18 AWG,
unless otherwise specified for a given purpose.
I. Wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation shall not be used.
J. The use of aluminium wire is strictly prohibited.
K. Wire splices shall not be made.
L. All wire terminations shall be made with crimp terminals unless the device at the termination is designed
for bare wire terminations.
M. All electrical circuits shall be numerically tagged with suitable devices at its terminating point.
N. All circuit numbers shall correspond with the installation drawings.
O. The use of coloured wires is encouraged but not required unless dictated by state or local authorities.
P. Black coloured wire shall be used exclusively for the identification of the neutral conductor of an
alternating current circuit.
Q. Green/Yellow coloured wire shall be used exclusively for the identification of the earth ground conductor
of an AC or DC circuit.
R. Primary system voltage shall be 220 VAC, single phase, 50 Hz.
1. Control Systems - General
a. All control systems shall be UL listed or FM approved and be utilised with listed or approved
operating devices and shall be capable of the following features:
1) Ground fault indication;
2) Supervised detection circuit(s);
3) Supervised alarm circuit;
4) Supervised release circuit;
5) Supervised manual pull circuit;
6) Supervised line power circuit;
7) Alarm overrides trouble logic;
8) Battery standby;
9) Front panel indicating lamps (LEDs);
10) Key lock steel enclosure;
11) Programmable time delay;
12) Programmable detection logic;
13) Prioritised trouble logic;
14) Solid state integrated circuitry;
15) Lamp test.
2. Control Panel
a. Provide a control system, in addition to the general requirements for control panels the control
system shall meet the requirements of this section.
b. The control system shall consist of a power supply, programmable zone actuation with the
necessary number of supervised circuits and auxiliary relays.
c. The Internal power supply shall operate from 240 VAC, single phase, 50 Hz (1.0/0.5 amp rectified
to 24 VDC (2 amp).
d. The control system shall provide provisions for housing its own set of “on-line” float charge
emergency batteries within the enclosure.
e. The control system shall provide two supervised detection (input circuits) programmable for:
1) Independent-zoning;
2) Priority-zoning;
3) Cross-zoning.
S. A supervised dedicated manual pull circuit designated for immediate operation of the release circuit shall
be provided.
T. Abort function (if used) shall be programmed for either immediate release or 10 second delay after abort
and comply with IRI requirements.
U. A programmable time delay for 10, 15, 30 or 60 seconds shall be provided between verification of a fire
situation and suppression system release.
V. Battery Supervision shall be provided for condition and placement of the batteries.
W. Four (4) plug-in relays with two (2) Form C (DPDT) contacts, one relay with Form C (SPDT) rated at 10 amps,
30 VDC and 7.5 amps at 240 VAC shall be provided for auxiliary functions. X. Each of the following actions
shall cause one for the five relays to transfer:
1. General alarm;
2. Pre-discharge alarm;
3. System discharge;
4. Assignable general alarm or pre-discharge alarm;
5. System trouble.
6. Prevent Switch.
a. The Contractor shall furnish each zone with a keyed ON/OFF switch in the face of the control panel
to prevent automatic actuation of the system.
b. In the off mode only operation of the manual pull stations will cause discharge.
7. Abort Switch
a. The abort switch shall be used where delay is desired between detection and actuation of the fire
suppression system.
1) This switch shall be a momentary contact “dead-man” type switch requiring constant pressure
to transfer one set of normally open contacts.
2) Clear operating instructions shall be provided at the abort switch.
3) This switch shall be rated at 6 amps at 240 VAC and 1.1 amps at 240 VDC.
4) The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.
2.16 INSPECTION
A. Do not recess, paint or conceal any work including piping and accessory equipment before it has been
inspected and approved.
B. The Contractor shall replace any missing items prior to final inspection and handover.
C. The Contractor shall protect all finishes, replace or repair any damaged finishes to the satisfaction of the
local consultant.
2.17 TESTING
A. Foam Water system test shall be carried out in presence of client representative, local fire official, engineer
and the Contractor in order to verify the system performance.
B. The Contractor shall test all system components in accordance with NFPA 13 & 16.
C. The Contractor shall carry out any additional tests required by the authorities having jurisdiction.
D. The Contractor shall submit certification that systems have been designed and installed in accordance with
NFPA 13, 16 and the requirements of the Local Civil Defence Authority. E. The Contactor shall
perform tests before piping is concealed.
E. The Contractor shall remove all components which will not withstand test pressure, and replace after tests.
F. Eliminate leaks or remove and refit defective parts.
G. Caulking of threaded or welded joints will not be permitted.
H. The Contractor shall repeat all tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.
I. The Contractor shall arrange foam water solution obtained from the system during testing is sent to the
testing laboratory acceptable to the engineer to ascertain the performance of foam proportional by
verifying % of foam concentrate in the solution.
2.18 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. The Contractor shall provide signs, conforming to NFPA 13 & 16 requirements and in accordance with the
requirements of local authorities, for each valve and alarm device.
2.19 PAINTING
A. The Contractor shall paint all exposed sprinkler piping with a suitable primer and top coat(s) in bright red
to the satisfaction of the lead consultant.
B. The Contractor shall obtain agreement from the Architect on top coat paint colour before application.
SECTION 212050 – Clean Agent Fire Suppression System

(Novec 1230)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This specification outlines the requirements for total flooding Clean Agent Fire Suppression System
designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid with automatic detection and control. The work
described in this specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary
and required for a complete and tested suppression system
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS
A. The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the suppression system designed for use
with Novec1230 fluid shall be in accordance with, but not necessarily limited to, the applicable
requirements set forth in the latest edition of the following:
1. NFPA 2001 – Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
3. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
4. UL Listed and FM Approved system
B. The standards and requirements listed, as well as all other applicable codes and standards shall be used as
“minimum” design standards. Compliance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall be required
and good engineering practices must be implemented.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Clean Agent Suppression System designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid
installation shall be made in accordance with the drawings, specifications and applicable standards. Should
a conflict occur between the drawings and specifications, the most stringent requirement shall take
precedence.
1.4 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The work listed below shall be coordinated with building services:
1. Power supply to the fire suppression system panel
2. Interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC system and dampers.
3. Interface with building fire alarm systems
A. Equipment Manufacturer
1. The manufacturer of the Clean Agent Suppression System designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire
Protection Fluid hardware and detection components shall be experienced in the design and
manufacture of similar types of suppression systems, have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the
design and
2. manufacture of such systems, be able to refer to similar installations providing satisfactory service and
ISO 9001 approved
3. The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear on all major suppression
system components.
4. All devices, components and equipment shall be the products of the same manufacturer or group.
5. All devices, components and equipment shall be new and standard products of the manufacturer’s
latest design, suitable to perform the intended functions and the Novec equipment shall be UL listed
and FM approved.
6. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike.
B. Agent Manufacturer
1. 3M Company, St Paul MN, USA shall manufacture or have manufactured for it the 3M Novec 1230 Fire
Protection Fluid component of the suppression system.
C. Installer
1. The installing contractor shall be a specialist Fire Engineering company with ISO 9001 approval and
trained by the equipment manufacturer to design, install, test and maintain suppression systems
designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid.
2. The installing contractor shall have a fabrication/workshop facility approved to ISO 9001.
3. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of automatic
Fire Suppression Systems using 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid, or similar other Clean Agents, in
strict accordance with applicable standards.
4. The installing contractor shall be experienced in the design, installation and testing of Fire Suppression
Systems using Novec 1230 fluid, or similar such systems, and have a minimum 5 years’ experience in
the design, installation, and testing of such systems. A list of suppression systems of a similar nature
and scope shall be provided upon request.
5. The installing contractor shall maintain a recharging station approved for recharging a Fire
Suppression System with 3M™ Novec™ fire Protection Fluid.
6. The installing contractor shall be an authorized distributor of the manufacturer for the suppression
system designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid so that the immediate replacement
parts are readily available from inventory.
7. The installing contractor shall show proof of 24/7 emergency services available with service personnel
available for emergency response.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. The installing contractor shall submit the following design information and drawings for approval prior to
starting work on the project:
1. Field installation layout drawings shall be provided detailing the location of all agent storage tanks,
pipe runs, including sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations,
audible and visual alarms, etc.
2. Separate layout drawings shall be provided for each level, such as the main room, sub floor and above
ceiling spaces as applicable. Also, include necessary details for mechanical and electrical work.
3. A separate drawing shall be provided showing isometric details of agent storage containers, mounting
details and pipe runs and sizes.
4. Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include point-to-point conduit
runs.
5. Provide an internal control panel wiring diagram, which shall include power supply requirements and
field wiring termination points.
6. Complete two-phase flow calculations from a UL listed computer program shall be provided for all
engineered suppression systems designed for use with 3M Novec 1230 Fire Protection Fluid.
Calculation sheets shall include the manufacturer’s name and listing of approval reference number (i.e.,
UL listing EXnumber) for verification. The individual sections of the pipe and each fitting shall be used
as shown on the isometric diagrams shall be identified and included in the calculation. Total agent
discharge time shall be shown and detailed by zone.
7. Provide calculations for the battery standby power supply taking into consideration the power
requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary components under full load conditions.
8. A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions,
remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone or system.
B. The contractor shall submit shop drawings, calculations and suppression system component data sheets
for approval to the Engineer, local fire department, owner’s insurance underwriter and/or all other AHJs
before starting installation.
PART 2 - NOVEC SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A. The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Fire Suppression System.
B. The System shall provide a Novec 1230 minimum design concentration of 4.7% by volume for Class “C” fire
hazards with maximum voltage up to 480 Volts and a minimum of 5.6% by volume for Class C hazards with
voltage more than 480 volts, in accordance with UL and FM in all areas and/or protected spaces, at the
minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area. NOVEC 1230 design concentration shall not
exceed 10% by volume for normally occupied spaces, adjusted for maximum space temperature
anticipated, with provisions for room evacuation before agent release.
C. The System shall be complete in all aspects. It shall include a mechanical and electrical installation, all
detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, Novec 1230 agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and
fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls,
shutdowns, alarm interface, advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and any other
operations necessary for a functional UL & FM approved Clean Agent Fire Suppression System.
D. Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service: Inspections shall be made at 6-month intervals
commencing when the system is first placed into normal service.
E. The contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected spaces against agent, loss and/
or leakage during the 10-minute “hold” period.
F. The system(s) shall be actuated by photoelectric detectors installed both in the room and under floor, or
above ceiling protected spaces.
G. Detectors shall be Cross-Zoned detection requiring two (2) detectors shall be in alarm before release.
H. Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1. Actuation of one (1) detector, within the System, shall:
a. Pulse the FIRE LED’s on the control panel face.
b. Pulse the appropriate zone LED on the control panel face.
c. Pulse the SILENCE ALARMS LED on the control panel face.
d. Operate the FIRE SIGNAL output, to transmit a signal to a remote location, and turn on the FIRE
SIGNAL LED.
e. Operate the appropriate zonal output.
f. Energize an alarm bell.
g. Operate the 1st stage shutdown output which can perform auxiliary system functions such as
operate door holder/ closures on access doors, shutdown HVAC equipment etc.
h. Provide remote indication on an optional annunciator.
I. In this state the internal panel buzzer can be silenced, the alarm bell can be silenced (and resounded if
necessary), the fire condition can be reset by operation of the FIRE RESET button on the control panel face
and the extinguishing pre-activated condition can be reset by operation of the EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
RESET button.
1. Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall (in addition to the above) :
a. Pulse the appropriate zone LED on the control panel face.
b. Operate the appropriate zonal output.
c. Operate the SYSTEM ACTIVATED LED on the control panel face.
d. Pulse a pre-discharge sounder/strobe device (1 second on, 1 second off).
e. Operate the 2nd stage shutdown output to shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
f. Start the pre-discharge delay timer (not to exceed 60 seconds) and display the time to discharge
on a two digit ‘seconds to discharge’ display on the control panel face.
g. Provide remote indication on an optional annunciator.
2. In this state the internal panel buzzer can be silenced, only the alarm bell can be silenced (and
resounded if necessary), the fire condition can be reset by operation of the FIRE RESET button on the
control panel face. The ability to reset the extinguishing pre-activated condition shall be inhibited and
the INHIBIT LED illuminated on the control panel face.
3. After completion of the time-delay sequence, the Clean Agent Fire Suppression System shall discharge
and the following shall occur:
a. The ‘seconds to discharge’ display on the control panel face clears.
b. The 3rd stage shutdown output operates to shut down all power to high-voltage equipment.
c. The output to the gas release solenoid is activated.
d. The sounder/strobe device continues to pulse (1 second on, 1 second off).
4. When the gas has released, a Gas Released input shall be activated on the control panel and the
following shall occur:
a. The Gas Released output is operated.
b. The GAS RELEASED LED and GAS RELEASED SIGNAL ACTIVE LED will illuminate on the control
panel face.
c. The SILENCE ALARMS LED on the control panel face will pulse.
d. The sounder/strobe device will sound continuously.
5. Provision within the panel for an Emergency Hold switch. Operation of an Emergency Hold switch
while the pre-discharge delay timer is running will stop the pre-discharge delay timer and reset it to a
time configured in the control panel. The sounder/strobe will change to pulsing 1 second on, 5
seconds off. The discharge timer will restart on release of the Emergency Hold switch & the
sounder/strobe circuit will return to pulsing 1 second on, 1 second off. A Hold output will operate
while the Hold switch is operated.
6. Provision within the panel for an Emergency Abort. Operation of an Emergency Abort switch will abort
the extinguishant release. The pre-discharge delay timer will be cancelled, the Extinguishing System
Reset Inhibit will be cancelled, the actuator circuits will be de-energized, the Extinguishing Sounder
circuit will be silenced & the Abort output will operate.
7. The Operation shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices. A manual discharge
device shall be incorporated in to the control panel face and shall also be located at each hazard exit.
Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the sequence description above except that the time
delay and abort functions shall be bypassed. The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical
actuation type and shall be supervised at the main control panel.
2.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of the supplier’s latest design
and suitable to perform all functions intended. When one or more pieces of equipment must perform the
same function(s), they shall be duplicates produced by one (1) manufacturer. B. All devices and equipment
shall be UL listed and FM approved.
B. Each system shall have its own supply of Clean Agent.
C. Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.
D. The Clean Agent shall be stored in Clean Agent storage tanks. Tanks shall be super-pressurized with dry
nitrogen to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70 0F (24.8 bar @ 21 0C). Tanks shall be of high-strength
low alloy steel construction and conforming to NFPA 2001.
E. Tanks (master) shall be actuated by either a resettable electric actuator or by pneumatic means from a
nitrogen cartridge located in the releasing device. Explosive devices shall not be permitted.
F. Removal of an electric actuator from the agent storage container discharge valve that it controls shall
result in an audible and visual indication of system impairment at the system releasing control panel.
G. Each tank shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual and electric supervision of
the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall be wired to the control panel to provide audible and
visual “Fault” alarms in the event the container pressure drops below 290 psi (20 bar). The pressure gauge
shall be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication of container pressure.
H. Tanks shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates before the internal nominal
pressure exceeds 730 psi (53.4 bar).
I. Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided within the manufacturer’s guidelines to distribute the
Novec 1230 agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be designed to provide proper
agent quantity and distribution. Nozzles shall be available in 1800 and 3600 distribution patterns.
J. Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and
NFPA 2001. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals. All piping shall be adequately
supported and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle locations.
1. All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burns, mill
varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
2. All pipe threads shall be seated with Teflon pipe sealant applied to the male thread only.
PART 3 - DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHING RELEASE SYSTEM
3.1 GENERAL
3.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers Fire Alarm Systems, including initiating devices, notification appliances, controls, and
supervision devices associated with the Novec Systems specified.
B. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing labor, equipment, and materials for installation of Fire
Alarm System as indicated in the drawings and specifications.
C. The Fire Alarm System shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software programming to
perform the following functions:
1. Fire Alarm System detection and notification operations
2. Control and monitoring of Fire Suppression Systems and other equipment as indicated in the drawings
and specifications.
3.3 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT AND SERVICE PROVIDERS
A. The equipment and service provider shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in Fire Alarm
and Fire Suppression Systems.
3.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide a complete, non-coded, microprocessor-based fire detection and alarm system for
suppression release applications with initiating devices, notification appliances, and auxiliary control
devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Circuit Wiring, Supervision, and
Annunciation:
1. System wiring connections for Initiating Device Circuits and Notification
2. Appliance Circuits shall be Class B.
3. Circuit Supervision: Initiating, Notification, and Releasing circuit faults shall be indicated by a fault
signal at the FACP. Distinctive fault LED annunciation shall be provided for each circuit.
B. Required Functions: The following are required system functions and operating features:
1. Priority of Signals: Alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the
order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Supervisory and Fault events have second
and thirdlevel priority, respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of
lower priority even though the lower priority condition occurred first.
2. Alarm Condition: A system alarm condition shall include:
a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP.
b. Identification of the zone that is the source of the alarm at the FACP.
c. Operation of audible and visible notification appliances throughout the hazard area until silenced
at FACP.
d. Audible alarm notification shall provide automatic audible escalation of events and shall operate:
1) To notify first cross-zoned alarm
2) To notify the release timer is active (running)
3) Steady to notify the release function
e. Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders serving hazard where alarm is
initiated.
f. Unlocking designated doors serving hazard where alarm is initiated.
g. Shutting down supply and return fans serving hazard where alarm is initiated.
h. Closing smoke dampers on system serving hazard where alarm is initiated.
3. Alarm Silencing: If the "Silence Alarm" button is pressed, all audible alarm signals shall cease
operation with the exception of the sounder/strobe during a 2nd detector activating the cross zoning.
4. System Reset
a. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. The system shall
verify all circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to avoid the potential for
realarming the system.
b. Should an alarm condition continue, the system shall remain in an alarmed state.
5. Manual Control: Manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal" condition of any circuit
shall cause a "fault" condition at the FACP. D. Fire Suppression Monitoring:
a. Suppression Release: The FACP shall be standalone type for Automatic Suppression Release
Service.
1) Secondary standby power for 24 hours of standby with 5 minutes of alarm. Battery
calculations shall be done to ensure proper operation of the actuators on battery standby.
Provide battery charts or calculations showing performance of such standby and alarm power.
2) Regulated 24VDC system power supply. In addition to power required for the FACP
electronics and optional modules, the FACP power supply shall be capable of providing power
for external peripheral devices and appliances.
3) Service disconnect switch(es), system abort switch(es), manual release station(s) and all other
accessories, as required.
4) Programmable operation for either non-cross-zone operation or cross-zone operation that

requires the activation of two automatic detector zones in the hazard area for initiation of the
automatic release operation.
5) Releasing Appliance Circuit manual release delay timer
6. The control panel shall receive AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit.
7. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of
normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 5 minutes of alarm
operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon
power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
8. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be electronically protected or
individually fused at the control panel.
9. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at the
control panel. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming AC power is
present.
10. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition, depleted battery, or
disconnection of the battery shall sound an audible fault signal, activate a general fault LED on the
FACP front cover and provide LED indication of the fault type on the inside of the FACP.
11. Loss of primary AC power shall sound an audible fault signal, activate a general fault LED at the FACP
and provide LED indication of the fault type on the inside of the FACP.
3.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract.
1. Product data sheets for system components highlighted to indicate the specific products, features, or
functions required to meet this specification.
2. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer.
3. Shop drawings showing system details including location of FACP, all devices, circuiting and details of
graphic annunciator
4. System power and battery charts.
5. Operating instructions for FACP
6. Operation and maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual. Include data for
each type product, including all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations.
7. Record of field tests of system
B. Submission to Authority Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submission of the above material, make
an identical submission to the authority having jurisdiction. Include copies of shop drawings as required to
depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments from the Authority, make
resubmissions, if required, to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval.
A. Installer Qualifications: A factory authorized installer is to perform the work of this section.
B. Each and every item of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed under the appropriate category
PART 4 - PRODUCTS
4.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange panel so all operations required for testing or for normal care
and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. B. The option to provide the
front panel text in Arabic must be provided.
B. The FACP shall provide fire status LED indication on the front panel face which shall have a minimum, but
not limited to the following:
1. Fire
2. Fire Signal
3. Zone 1
4. Zone 2
5. Aux Zone
6. Remote Sound Alarms
7. Remote Control Fault
8. Fire Sounder Fault/Disabled
C. The FACP shall provide common status LED indication on the front panel face which shall have a minimum,
but not limited to the following:
1. Power Supply On
2. General Fault
3. Power Supply Fault
4. System Fault
5. Earth Fault
6. Fuse Failed
7. Fault Signal Fault/Disabled
8. Sounder Test
D. The FACP shall provide extinguishing status LED indication on the front panel face which shall have a
minimum, but not limited to the following:
1. Auto & Manual
2. Manual Only
3. Manual Release Active
4. System Activated
5. Gas Released
6. Gas Released Signal Active
7. Emergency Abort Active
8. Emergency Hold Active
9. Circuit Fault
10. Gas Low
11. Gas Trapped in Manifold
12. Isolation Valve Abnormal
13. Isolation Valve Closed
14. Manual Release Fault/Disabled
15. Extinguishing Disabled
16. Gas Released Signal Disabled
17. Shutdown Outputs Disabled
E. The FACP shall provide the following minimum user control buttons
1. Silence Alarms
2. Resound Alarms
3. Fire Reset
4. Extinguishing System Reset
5. Silence Buzzer
6. Auto & Manual/Manual Only
7. Select On/Off
8. Enable
9. Scroll
10. Disable
11. Test
F. The use of the above control buttons, with the exception of the TEST button, will be restricted by a control
key switch located on the front cover of the FACP. The FACP will acknowledge a button press by sounding
the internal buzzer briefly.
G. A 2 digit ‘seconds to discharge’ display will be incorporated on to the front cover of the FACP to provide
visual indication of the remaining seconds left to discharge.
H. A yellow manual release call point will be incorporated on to the front cover of the FACP. The call point
will incorporate a transparent hinged cover to prevent accidental operation.
4.2 REMOTE ANNUNCIATION / CONTROL
A. The FACP must be capable of supporting up to 7 remote annunciation / control units. This range of units
should have the option for full function control including
1. Auto / manual status indication
2. Alarm and extinguishing indication
3. Auto / manual select
4. Manual release
5. Hold facility
6. Abort facility
7. ‘Seconds to discharge’ display
4.3 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. General: Components include battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch.
B. Battery: Sealed lead-acid type. Provide sufficient capacity to operate the complete alarm system in normal
or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of operation on battery
power, the battery shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system, including all
notification appliances in alarm mode for a period of 5 minutes.
4.4 MANUAL RELEASE CALL POINTS
A. Description: Single or double-action type, yellow ABS, marked with the words EXTINGUISHANT RELEASE,
with transparent hinged cover to prevent accidental operation. The call point will mechanically latch upon
operation and remain so until manually reset with a key.
4.5 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General: Smoke Detectors – Point detectors using scattered light, transmitted light shall include the
following features:
1. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.
2. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal
3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore normal
operation.
4. Plug-In Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that
connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. Base shall provide break-off plastic tab
that can be removed to engage the head/base locking mechanism. No special tools shall be required
to remove head once it has been locked. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory
circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a fault signal at the control unit.
5. Environmental Compensation: The detector shall provide a software filtering process that automatically
compensates for environmental factors and component aging that affect detector operation.
6. Each detector head shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the Control Unit. In
alarm condition, the detector head LED shall be on steady.
B. Type: Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type.
C. Area coverage per smoke detectors shall not exceed 250 square feet (23 m2). This spacing shall result in
spacing for a perfect square of 4.8 m. The detectors radius of coverage is 3.6 m, which can be used to
determine the optimum detector location.
4.6 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units shall be equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching
door plate. Unit shall operate from a 240VAC or a 24VDC source
4.7 STANDARD ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Bell: The bell shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 95 dBA @ 1m.
B. Audible/Visible: Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances The strobe light shall consist of
a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The sounder shall have a minimum sound pressure
level of 100dBA @ 1m.
PART 5 - EXECUTION
5.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install system components and all associated devices in accordance with applicable NFPA Standards and
B. Installation personnel shall be supervised by persons who are qualified and experienced in the installation,
inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems.
5.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans. Include
sufficient control unit(s), manual stations, automatic fire detectors, smoke detectors, audible and visible
notification appliances, wiring, terminations, electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a
complete operating system.
B. Install manual station with operating handle 1.2 m above floor. Install wall mounted audible and visual
notification appliances not less than 2.0 m above floor to bottom of lens and not greater than 2.4 m above
floor to bottom of lens.
C. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force.
D. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.
5.3 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work.
5.4 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. System Wiring: Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval agency acceptable
to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate articles from
the current approved edition of NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC).
5.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire
alarm systems.
B. Pretesting: Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the
Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. C. Inspection:
1. Inspect equipment installation, interconnection with system devices, mounting locations, and
mounting methods.
2. Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting
wires and terminals are identified.
C. Acceptance Operational Tests:
1. Perform operational system tests to verify conformance with specifications:
a. Each alarm initiating device installed shall be operationally tested. Each device shall be tested for
alarm and fault conditions. Contractor shall submit a written certification that the Fire Alarm
System installation is complete including all punch-list items. Test battery operated emergency
power supply. Test emergency power supply to minimum durations specified. Test Supervising
Station Signal Transmitter. Coordinate testing with Supervising Station monitoring firm/entity.
b. Test each Notification Appliance installed for proper operation. Submit written report indicating
sound pressure levels at specified distances.
c. Test Fire Alarm Control Panel and Remote Annunciator.
2. Provide minimum 10 days’ notice of acceptance test performance schedule to Owner, and local
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
D. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies.
Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable
standards.
E. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in
the form of a test log. Use NFPA 72 Forms for documentation.
F. Final Test, Record of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy:
1. Test the system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of
occupancy. Provide completed NFPA 72 Record of Completion form to Owner and AHJ.
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Clean unit internally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
PART 6 - TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
6.1 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
A. After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked out, inspected, and
functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
procedures and NFPA standards.
B. All cylinders and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and installation.
C. All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity, and resistance to earth.
D. The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his representative, and all
functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be operational at least five (5) days prior to the
final acceptance tests.
E. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures and test
values recorded.
F. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual devices, equipment
shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function as desired and designed.
G. Each control panel circuit shall be tested for fault by inducing a fault condition into the system.
6.2 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to each shift of the
owner’s personnel. Each training session shall include control panel operation, manual and abort functions,
fault procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
6.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) complete operation and
maintenance instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be
detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system
design, sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system.
Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques, maintenance operations
and procedures shall be included in the manual.
6.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide three copies of system “As-Built”
drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation details including all equipment
locations (i.e., control panel(s), agent cylinder(s), detectors, alarms, manual pull station(s) and abort
switch(es), etc.), as well as piping and conduit routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications,
including door and/or damper installations completed. One soft copy of reproducible engineering
drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details.
6.5 ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. At the time “As-Built” drawing and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted, the installing
contractor shall submit a “Test Plan” describing procedures shall be used to test the Gas Fire Suppression
& Control System(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all tests shall be performed
and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus shall be employed. The tests shall demonstrate
that the operational and installation requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be
conducted in the presence of the owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been approved.
B. The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and intended. All circuits
shall be tested: automatic actuation and manual actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual
alarm devices, and manual override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power
and battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
C. A room pressurization test shall be conducted in each protected space to determine the presence of
openings, which would affect the agent concentration levels. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA
2001.
D. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in leaks and/or loss of the
extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of
the protected space(s) by the general contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor
shall be responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The
Installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately
and properly sealed. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with these
specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine, and correct, the
cause of the test failure. The installing contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, until a
successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the owner for his record.
Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into service.
6.6 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS
A. During the one-year warranty period, the installing contractor shall provide two inspections of each system
installed under this contract. The first inspection shall be at the 6-month interval, and the second
inspection at the 12-month interval. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s
guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA 2001.
B. Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) inspection shall be submitted to the owner upon completion of
each inspection.
6.7 WARRANTY
A. All system components furnished and installed under this contract shall be warranted against defects in
design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period, which is standard with the manufacturer,
but in no case less than one year from the date of system acceptance.
SECTION 214000 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER STORAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Storage tanks shall be the type and capacity as indicated.
B. Tanks shall comply with the requirements of the local municipality.
C. Tanks and connections shall comply with:
1. Local Municipality and Water Authority Regulations
2. Civil Defence Department Regulations
3. NFPA 22: Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
D. Cistern and tank connections shall be located to ensure adequate circulation of the contents with outlets
from the bottom of the tank, wherever practical.
E. Adequate support shall be provided to all tank connections, pipe fittings and valves to prevent excessive
strain being imposed on the tank or cistern.
F. Tanks shall be stored and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Ensure adequate protection from damage and ingress of foreign matter to tanks and cisterns during,
storage, erection and commissioning.
H. Tanks and cisterns shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing and commissioning.
I. The internal surfaces of tanks and cisterns and their covers shall be free from such imperfections that may
inhibit the cleaning of these internal surfaces.
J. Tanks and cisterns shall be installed to allow internal and external surfaces to be easily inspected and
cleaned.
K. Sectional storage tanks shall be in accordance with BS EN 13280 for the designated class indicated.
L. Class B sectional tank for use in the storing of cold non- portable water.
M. All tanks and cisterns shall be clearly and durably marked by a waterproof adhesive label with the
information as required by BS EN 13280.
N. One-piece cistern and sectional tanks shall be provided with a screened air inlet to allow the escape of air
and preserve the integrity of the stored water.
O. The air inlet shall have a screen with apertures not exceeding 0.65 mm x 0.65 mm intended to prevent the
ingress of insects and particles.
P. The inlet shall be shrouded to alleviate the entry of dust and light, and prevent the entry of rainwater.
Q. The screens shall be non-corrosive material and easily removable for inspection and cleaning.
R. A fixing, connection provision or other device shall be provided to allow entry of a vent pipe through the
cover.
S. Such a device shall prevent any displacement or distortion of the cistern of tank or associate cover due to
expansion or other movement of the vent pipe.
T. Overflow pipes shall be provided with a termination assembly for fitting through the side wall of the
onepiece cistern or sectional tank which incorporates a free draining external watertight housing
containing a screen for fitting to the warning pipe.
U. The screen shall have apertures not exceeding 0.65 mm x 0.65 mm, shall not restrict the full flow and shall
be easily removable for inspection and cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE TANKS
A. The water storage tanks shall be cast in-situ reinforced concrete tanks. Reference shall be made to
architectural / civil drawings and specifications for construction details. The reinforced concrete
construction and shall be of the capacity and dimensions as indicated in the Drawings. They shall comply
with the relevant local Authority Having Jurisdiction regulations.
B. Tank nozzles complete with puddle flanges shall be provided inside formwork before pouring of concrete.
Each tank shall be fitted with the following:
1. Access openings with sealed cover, as per architectural details
2. Internal GRP ladders
3. External Galvanised Steel Ladder
4. Inlets with float valve
5. Outlets with Anti-Vortex Plate
6. Overflow with insect screen
7. Vent with insect proof vent cowls
8. Drain with valve and threaded end cap
C. After installation, tanks shall be filled with water for testing for 24 hours. No leakage shall be observed at
joints. On completion of leak tests, the tank shall be flushed out twice using maximum water pressure
available and all extraneous matter removed including the water used during the operation.
2.2 GRP LINING TO CONCRETE TANKS
A. GRP lining shall be provided to concrete tanks detailed above.
B. The lining shall consist of two layers of chopped strand mat hardened with polyester resin followed by
thick layer of Gel coat giving a thickness of approximate 4mm. Properties of general lining:
1. Density 0.8-1.2gram/cm3
2. Tensile strength 110-140mpa
3. Flexural strength 220-250MPa
4. Compressive strength 140-170MPa
5. Thermal conductivity 0.1W/M X D. Centigrade
6. Shrinkage = 0.2-0.4%
C. Complete lining thickness shall be minimum 5 mm and shall be guaranteed for 25 years
D. Water tank concrete surface has to be minimum 30days age before receive GRP lining system. The
concrete surface of water tanks, walls should be free from oily spots, flaky concrete and is uniformly
roughened. Residue and by products are to be removed by vacuum cleaner. The contractor shall make sure
the surface is defecting free.
E. Rectify any faulty or damaged work before practical completion, including damage, staining or corrosion
caused by subsequent construction activities.
2.3 SECTIONAL TANKS
A. The tank shall consist of base and side plates all constructed from flanged GRP panels with a jointing
sealant or gasket between.
B. The flanges of all panels shall be internal or external as indicated.
C. Where indicated, tanks shall be subdivided into two or more compartments by the inclusion of division
plates constructed from GRP sheet panels.
D. Division plates shall be sealed leak tight and be capable of supporting water on either side to the
maximum working depth.
E. They shall be constructed to withstand only the additional forces created by the water movement they are
designed to induce, and in the case of weir plates, to withstand any additional force due to any imbalance
in water pressure created by their use.
F. Internal metallic bracing system members shall be manufactured from stainless steel in accordance with
grade 1.4401 or other appropriate steel selected from Table 3 of EN 1008-3.
G. External structural supports shall be manufactured from either mild steel encapsulated in GRP laminate or
suitably protected from corrosion or galvanized or from stainless steel.
H. The design of bracing shall minimize the possibility of bimetallic corrosion.
I. Fasteners, including bolts, nuts and washers, used outside the tank shall be stainless steel.
J. Tanks shall be provided with internal and external ladders manufactured to satisfy dimensional and safety
requirements of BS 4211.
K. Internal ladders shall be manufactured from stainless and external ladders galvanized steel unless
otherwise stated.
L. Tanks shall be provided with a rigid and close fitting cover.
M. The cover shall have a gap of less 0.65 mm and shall be secured or mechanically fixed with an effective seal
to ensure the exclusion of light and the ingress of particles and/or insects and where connections pass
through the cover they shall be sealed.
N. All covers shall be capable of sustaining an imposed load of 0.6 kN/m² or 0.9 kN concentrated load,
whichever produces the maximum deflection.
O. Manholes or access hatches of at least 600mm diameter or side dimension shall be provided in sectional
tanks greater than 1000 litres and designed to prevent the ingress of rainwater, where external, dust and
vermin.
P. Each compartment of the tank shall have one manhole located over the ball float valve and one to gain
access to an internal stainless steel ladder where indicated.
Q. Base panels shall be designed to cope with downward force of a fluctuating static head.
R. Side panels shall be designed to withstand fluctuating loads applied with rising and falling water levels.
S. Roof panels shall be manufactured to take the specific point loads exerted by man-traffic.
T. Purpose designed automated drilling equipment shall be used to accurately drill panel to close
manufacturing tolerances ensuring correct alignment of bolt holes and to ensure proper joining and
sealing panels.
U. Panel sizes shall be 1.0 x 1.0 meter.
V. Sectional tanks shall be erected by the tank manufacturer.
2.4 LEVEL SENSORS
A. All level controllers, level sensors, level switches and alarms shall be provided and installed by the
Contractor.
B. Each probe shall be of the correct length for its particular application and tank location.
C. Electrodes shall be polished stainless steel 20mm outside diameter. Electrode holders shall be weather
proof in all respect.
D. The earthing probes shall be connected and wired to the building earth system.
E. Each set of electrodes shall be installed inside a 200mm-diameter PVC pipe acting as a wave barrier.
F. The level switch set shall be operated with a stepped down voltage at 24V maximum.
G. Stepped down transformer shall be provided for each set of control probes and shall be installed inside
centralized control cubicles inside pump room.
H. Provide interface unit at the pump control panel for the levels to be monitored by Fire Alarm System (FAS)
I. The FAS control panel will monitor the following outputs from the location for each Tank.
2.5 FAS TANK HIGH LEVEL (O/P)
A. Whenever the liquid level in the tank reaches a high level, a high level dry contact will be provided by the
Contractor at the level controller and monitored by the FAS.
2.6 FAS TANK LOW LEVEL (O/P)
A. Whenever the liquid level in the tank reaches a low level, a low level dry contact will be provided by the
Contractor at the level controller and monitored by the FAS.
2.7 TANK FOUNDATIONS
A. The surface of the foundation, whether it is a flat screed concrete, steelwork, support walls or pillars, shall
be flat, level and free from any irregularities.
B. It should not vary more than 2 mm in any 1mm, or a total of 6 mm in any 6 m, measured laterally or
diagonally.
C. Intermittent supports shall be spaced in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and should
continue in one direction.
D. Both continuous and discontinuous foundations shall conform to any additional requirements provided by
the manufacturer arising from the design of the cistern or tank.
E. Install water storage tanks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and standards specified.
F. Allow for cast-in-place, concrete ballast pad, plus 6 inches (150 mm) of sand or pea gravel between ballast
base and tank.
G. Set tie down eyelets for hold down straps in concrete ballast pad and tie to reinforced steel.
H. Place 6 inches (150 mm) of clean sand or pea gravel on top of ballast pad.
I. The Contractor shall ensure the tank foundation meets the necessary requirements before the installation
of the tank or cistern.
2.8 TANK MOUNTINGS
A. Water level indicators shall be provided for each tank compartment to provide visual indication of the
stored water level.
B. Water level indicators shall comprise dial gauges and sensors locally mounted.
C. Where a BAS system is provided, the gauges shall be capable of providing a content indication to the BAS
as indicated.
2.9 CLEANING
A. Tank flushing should be done using clean water
2.10 TESTING
A. Tanks and cisterns shall be subjected to the tests defined in BS EN 13280.
B. Leakage tests shall be undertaken on all tanks and cisterns.
C. When erected a tank shall not show any visible leakage after filling in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
D. The duration of the test shall be for a minimum of 24 hours, commencing at least 2 hours after the tank
has been filled.
E. The test shall be carried out within 10 days of erection unless otherwise stated.
F. Inspection for leaks shall be undertaken after 48 hours.
PART 3 - REFERED DOCUMENTS
3.1 REFERRED DOCUMENTS
A. The installation shall comply with the documents referred to in this section:
1. BS EN 13280:2001 Specification for glass fibre reinforced cisterns of one piece

and sectional construction, for the storage, above ground, of
cold water.
2. BS 4211:2005 Specification for permanently fixed ladders
3. NFPA 22 Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
Manjunath Naik
Po Box 117291
Dubai
UAE
T: +971 (0) 4 518 4000
F: +971 (0) 4 335 8190
Email: manjunath.naik@burohappold.com

DG NCD 408 0000 BNH SPC Me 000002

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DG NCD 408 0000 BNH SPC Me 000002

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCD P3 Carpark

50% Detailed Design Specifications - Mechanical, Public Health and

Copyright © 1976 - 2023 Buro Happold. All rights reserved.

Revision Description Issued by Date Checked

00 Draft MS/AJ 15/02/23 NM

01 90% Detailed Design MS/AJ 29/03/23 NM

https://burohappold.sharepoint.com/sites/052253/Shared Documents/030 MEP/90% Detailed Design/90% Final

author Mahavir Shah/Ashveen

approved Neil Mowat

SECTION 230710- HVAC INSULATION

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS

SECTION 233116 - NON-METAL DUCTS

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

SECTION 233400 – HVACS FANS

SECTION 233610 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS

SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

SECTION 234300 – ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS

SECTION 237213 – HEAT WHEEL AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

SECTION 237216 – HEAT PIPE AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

SECTION 237219 – FIXED PLATE AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

SECTION 237310 - CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

SECTION 238123 – COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEMS AIR-CONDITIONER

SECTION 238216 – AIR COILS

SECTION 238219 - FAN COILS

SECTION 239000 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

No table of tables entries found

No table of figures entries found.

SECTION 230010 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR

A. Read this Section in conjunction with:

2. Other related Divisions/Sections

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

4. Prepare shop / construction / installation drawings for approval.

9. Train the Employer's staff in the operation of the systems installed.

1.3 STANDARD OF WORK

1.4 PROVIDE EVERYTHING NECESSARY

1.5 CONTINUITY OF THE WORKS

1.6 RELATION TO WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

1.8 STANDARDS AND OTHER CODES OF PRACTICE

1. British Standard Specification (BS) and European Standards (BS EN).

2. British Standard Code of Practice (BSCP).

3. CIBSE Guides to Current Practice and Technical Memoranda

4. Institution of Electrical Engineers Regulations (IEE) (BS 7671).

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

6. Building Research Station (BRE) digest recommendations.

7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)

9. Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association (HVCA)

10. The Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA)

11. Project Specific Design or Operator Standards as stated elsewhere

1. Local Municipality Regulations

2. Local Fire and/or Civil Defence Authorities

3. Local Water Authority

4. Local Electricity Supply Authority

5. Local Telecoms and Data Services Provider

6. National Ministry of Interior

7. The Requirements of General Authorities for Health Services

8. ME Radio communications Agency

9. Local LPG Gas regulations/authorities

10. Police Requirements